Cosmographie in four bookes : containing the chorographie and historie of the whole vvorld, and all the principall kingdomes, provinces, seas and isles thereof / by Peter Heylyn.

COSMOGRAPHIE. The Third Book CONTAINING THE CHOROGRAPHIE and HISTORIE of the Lesser and Greater ASIA, And all the principall Kingdomes, Provinces, Seas, and Isles thereof. (Book 3)

OF ASIA.

ASIA is bounded on the West with the Mediterranean, and Aegean Seas, the Hellespont, Propontis, Thracian Bosphorus, and the Euxine Sea; the Palus Maeotis, the Rivers Tanais, and Duina; a line being drown from the first of the two said Rivers unto the other; by all which parted from Europe. On the North it hath the main Scythick Ocean; on the East the Streits of Aman (if such there be) the Indian Ocean, and Mare Del Zur, by which separated from A∣merica: on the South, the Mediterranean, or that part of it which is called the Carpathian, washing the shores of Anatolia; and the main Southern Ocean, pas∣sing along the Indian, Persian, and Arabian coasts: and finally, on the South-west the Red Sea or Bay of Arabia, by which parted from Africk. Environed on all sides with the Sea, or some Sea-like Rivers, except a narrow Isthmus in the South-west, which joynes it to Africk; and the space of ground (whatso∣ever it be) betwixt Duina, and Tanais, on the North-west, which unites it to Europe.

It took this name, as some will have it, from Asia, the daughter of Oceanus and Thetis, the wife of Japetus & (by him) mother to Prometheus: as others say from Asius the son of Atis, a King of Lydia, from whence that Conntrey first, afterwards all Ana••olia or Asia Minor, and finally, the whole Continent had the name of Asia. Others again (but more improbably) derive the name from Asius the Philosopher, who gave the Palladium unto the Trojans; in memory whereof that Countrey first, and after the whole Continent did re∣ceive this name. But these Originations being very uncertain, Bochartus (out of his great affection to the Punick or Phoenician language) will have it called so from Asi••, a Phanician word, signifying M••∣aium, or the middle: because Anatolia or the Lesser Asia, which gives name (as he conceiveth) to the Greater also, lieth in the middle, as it were betwixt some parts of Europe and Africa. And so farre the Conjecture doth find countenance from some antient writers, that Asia is said by Plinie to be inter Afri∣cam & Europan, to be betwixt Africa and Europe; by Mela, Medium nostris oequoribus excipt, to be embraced in the middle of two Seas (he meaneth Pontus Euxinus and the Mediterranean) and fi∣nally, by Eustathius (conceive them all of Anatolia or the Lesser Asia) 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, to have a middle situation betwixt Europe and Africa. But by what name, and on what grounds soever it be called by the Greeks and Latines; it is otherwise, and with better reason called in holy Scriptures by the name of Semia; as being that portion of the world, wherein the whole posterity of Sem had their seates

and dwellings: If the observation of Maginus be of any weight.

It is situate East and West from the 52. to the 169 degree of Longitude: and North and South from the 82 degree of Latitude to the very Aequator; some onely of the Islands lying on the South of that 〈◊〉〈◊〉 so that the longest Summers day in the Southern parts is but twelve houres onely; but in the most Northern parts hereof for almost four whole moneths together no night at all. And for a measurement by miles, it stretches in length 5200. and in bredth 4560. miles.

This Countrey hath heretofore been had in especiall honour, 1. For the Creation of man, who had his first making in this part of the world 2. Because in this part of it stood the garden of Eden, which he had for the first place of his habitation. 3. Because here flourished the four first great Monarchies of the Assyrian, Babylo∣nian••, M••d••s and Persians. 4. Because it was the Scene of almost all the memorable actions which are recorded by the pen-men of the holy Scriptures. 5. Because that here our Saviour CHRIST was bor••, here wrought he most divine miracles, and here accomplished the great work of our Redemption. 6. And finally because from hence all Nations of the World had their first beginning, on the dispersion which was made by the sonnes of Noal, after their vain attempt at Babel.

The chief Mountains of this great Continent, not limited within the bounds of any one Province (for of those we are to speak in their severall places) are 1. Mount Taurus, which having its beginning in 〈◊〉〈◊〉 a Province of An••iol••••, passeth directly East-wards to the Indian Ocean: and reckoning in its severall wind ••gs, & turnings with its spurs and branches every way, is said to be 6250. miles long, and 357 m. broad. This Mountain, or rather Ridge of hils, divideth the Greater Asia (as the Aequator doth the World into North and South: memorable for three difficult passages from the one to the other, the first out of the 〈◊〉〈◊〉 of 〈◊〉〈◊〉 into Ciliciae, called Pylae Ciliciae; the second out of Scythia or Tarterie, into Turcoma••••, called 〈◊〉〈◊〉 Portae; and the third out of Scythia into Persia, called Portae Caspia. Of which and of the whole course of this Mountain, more at large hereafter. 2. Imaus, which beginning neere the sheres of the Northern Ocean runneth directly towards the South; dividing the Greater Asia (as the Meridian doth the World) into East and West, and crossing Mount Taurus in right Angles, in or about the Longitude of 140. This on the North of Taurus hath no other name among the Latines, then Imaus onely: and by that name divide •• Scythia into Scythia intra Imaum, and Scythia extra Imaum: but by the Tartars is called Altay, by some writers Belgion. And on the South-side of that Mountain is known in Ptolomy by the name of B••••••go, extending from Mount Caucasus, or some other Branch of the Ta••rus to the Cape of C••mari in the Southern Ocean: supposed by some to be Mount Sephar mentioned, Gen. 10. v. 30. of which we shall say more also when we come into India.

The estate of Christianity in this vast Continent is in ill condition, discountenanced and oppressed, though no•• quite extinguished. For all the great Princes and Commanders of it being either Mahometans or Pa∣gans; the most that can be hoped for of the Christian Faith, is a toleration or connivence: and that not found but with an intermixture of such afflictions as commonly attend discountenanced and disgraced Re∣ligions. Yet is not Christianity so over-powered either by Mahomet ••nisme or Paganisme,, but that in A∣sia the Lesser, Syria, Palestine, and Armenia, a great part of the inhabitants do retain the Gospel, under their severall Pa••••••••chs and Metropolitans: differing in some few points from one another; but in many from the Church of Rome, with which they hold neither correspondency nor Communion. Nor want there many Christian Churches in the Empire of Persia, nor in those of Tartarie and the Indies, antiently planted in those Countreys; besides the late increase thereof in the Eastern Islands, by the diligent preaching of the J••suites and some late Factories there setled by the English and Hollanders: of all which I shall write in place convenient.

In reference to the Roman Empire, whose Dominion did not often extend beyound the River Euphrates, this Continent conteined onely three Dioceses or Juridicall Circuits; that is to say, the Diocese of Pon∣tus, Asia properly so called, and the Ortentall: which with the Dioceses of Thrace and Egypt, were under the command of the Praefec••us Praetorio Orient is; the greatest Officer of power and jurisdiction, next to the Emporours themselves in the Roman Monarchie. And these three Dioceses conteined in them to the number of thirty seven Provinces, viz. the Provinces of Bithynnia, 2. Helenopontus. 3. Pontus Polemoniacus. 4 Galatia Prim••. 5. Galatta Salutaris. 6. Honorius. 7. Paphlagonia. 8. Cappadocia prima. 9. Cappa∣〈◊〉〈◊〉. 10. Armema prima, and 11. Armenia secunda, conteined in the Diocese of Pontu••, and governed by the Vicarius or Lieutenant thereof: II. the Provinces of Pamphylia. 2. Lycia. 3. Car••••. 4. 〈◊〉〈◊〉 5. Lycaon••a. 6. Lyd••a. 7. Phrygia Pacatiana. 8. Phrygia Salutaris. 9. Asia specially so called. 10. Hellespont, and 11. the Isles of Anatolia. making up the Diocese of Asia: whereof the three last were governed by a peculiar Officer called the Proconsul of Asia, the others by the ordinary Lieutenant or Vicar••us. III. The Provinces of Isauria. 2. Cilicia prima. 3. Cilicia secunda. 4. Cyprus. 5. Pha∣nices. 6. Ph••••nices Labani. 7. Syria. 8. Syria Salutaris. 9. Palestina prima. 10. Palestina secunda. 11. Palestina Salutaris. 12. Euphratensis. 13. Osroene. 14. Mesopotamia, and 15. Arabia, con∣stituting the Diocese of the Orient, under the Comes Orientis. The rest of Asia subject unto the Parth•••• or Persian Kings, besides those of India (and of many Regions and Countreys not then discovered) was never conquered by the Roman••, and therefore not within the compasse of this distribution.

At this time A••ia stands divided amongst nine great Monarchs, that is to say, the Turke commanding all these parts and Provinces which antiently belonged to the Roman Empire: 2. The Persian, ruling in all the Provinces beyond Euphrate••, possessed by the Persian Kings in the time of Alexander the great, or the 〈◊〉〈◊〉 or 〈◊〉〈◊〉 in the times of the Romans. 3. The Great Cham of Tartarie, commanding eve all the North part of Asia, an••iently known by the name of Seythia: 4. The King of China governing in that large and populous Countrey. 5. The King of Barma; whose dominion comprehends all or the greatest

part of India beyond the River of Ganges; and the Great Mogor, whose Empire is extended over all India on this side of that River. And some there be who in the descriptions of this great Continent follow this division. But for our parts for the better understanding of the Greek and the Roman stories and the estate of the Assyrian, Babylonian and Persian Monarchies, to which the holy Scriptures do so much relate: we shall consider it as divided into the Regions of 1. Anatolia, or Asia Minor. 2. Cyprus. 3. Syria. 4. Pa∣•••••••• 5. Arabia. 6. Chaldaea. 7. Assyria. 8. Mesopotamia. 9. Turconanian. 10. Media. 11. Per∣••••. 12. Tartaria. 13. China. 14. India, and 15. the Oriental Islands.

ANATOLIA or ASIA MINOR.

ANATOLIA or ASIA MINOR, is bounded on the East with the River Euphrates, by which parted from the greater Asia on the West with the Thracian Bosphorus, Propontis, Hellespont, and the Aegean Sea, by which parted from Europe: on the North with Pontus Euxinus, called also the Blak Sea, and Alare Maggiore, and on the South by the Rhodiar, Lydian, and Pamphylian Seas, se∣veral parts of the Mediterranean. So that this it is a demi-Island or Peninsula, environed on all sides with waters, excepting a small Isthmus or neck of land extending from the head of Euphrates to the Euxine Sea, by which joined to the rest of Asia.

It was antiently called Asia Minor, to difference it from the residue of this great Continent; afterwards Anatoli••, 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 from the more Eastward situation of it in respect of Greece; and now Natolia by the Turks, with little deviation from the former name. But here it is to be observed, that as this Lesser Asia was a part of the greater, and the Diocese of Asia a part of Asia the Lesse: so was Asia properly & specially so cal∣led, but a part only of the Asian Diocese; the Lydian Asia a part of Asia properly so called, and the Procon∣sular Asia but a part of that. The limits of Asia the Lesse and the several Provinces conteined in the Asian Diocese, have bin shewn already. And as for that part hereof which had the name of Asia properly and espe∣cially so called, it contained only the two Phrygia's both the Mysia's, Aeolis, Ionia, Lydia, and Caria: which falling unto the Romans by the last Will and Testament of Attalus the last King of Pergamus; were by them made into one Province, and called Asia, after the name of the whole Continent, this being as it were the earnest-penny, to make sure the rest. So witnesseth Strabe, where he saith, 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 Lib. 13. And for the Lydian Asia, that contained onely so much of the Roman or proper Asia, as antiently did belong to Lydia, that is to say, Lydia it self, together with Aeolis and Ionia, and some parts of the Greater Mysia adjoining to it. Which as it had ori∣ginally the name of Asia, from Asia a chief City of it neer the foot of mount Tmolw, which both Sui∣das and the Great Etymologist have taken notice of; before that name became to be communicated to the Greater Continent: so it reteined that name to it selfe in several, distinct both from the Greater and the Lesser Asia, as also from the Asia propria of Ptolomie, and others of the antient writers. And of this Asia only is it, which the Scriptures speake; both in the Book of the Acts, and the Revelation: the se∣ven Churches mentioned in the one being found in this Lydian Asia; and the passages in the other concern∣ing Asia, not to be understood of any but of this alone. For whereas it is said Acts XVI. That when they had gone throughout Phrygia and the Region of Galatia, and were forbidden of the Holy Ghost to preach the Word in Asia, after they were come to Mysia they assayed to go into Bithynia, and came down to Troas: most clear it is, that neither Galatia nor Bithynia though Regions of the Lesser Asia, nor Phry∣gia, Mysia, or Troas, all Regions of the Proper Asia, were any part of that Asia which the Scripture speaks of. So also where it is affirmed that upon St. Pauls preaching and disputing for two years in Ephesi••, all they which dwelt in Asia heard the word of the Lord: Acts XIX. V. 10. It is not to be meant of any but the Lydian Asian, whereof Ephesus at that time was the principal City. So also Acts XIX. V. 22. 26. 31. and chapter XX. V. 18. Finally for the Proconsular Asia, which together with Hellespont and the Islet, made up a Government apart, exempt from the command of the Vicarus or Lieutenant of the Asian Diocesse, it contained onely Aeolis and Ionia with the South part of Lydia, or the Countreys lying about Ephesus. So witnesseth St. Hierome for the Christian writers, where he affirmes that although all the whole Peninsula have the name of the Lesser Asia; Specialiter ubi Ephesus Civitas est, Asia Vocatur, yet more particularly the parts adjoining unto Ephesus have the name of Asia. And this appeareth by the di∣stribution of the Provinces before laid down, where Lydia is reckoned for a Province of the Asian Diocese, distinct from the Proconsular Asia which we now insist on.

So having cleered our way in regard of the name proceed we next unto the Regions or place thus named, according to the notion in the largest latitude, extending from the Hellespont to the River Euphrates, and from the Euxine Sea to the Mediterranean. By which account it reacheth from the 51. to the 72. degree of Longitude, and from the 36. to the 45. degree of Latitude: the length hereof from the Hellespont to the River Euphrates, being estimated at 630. miles; the breadth from Sinus Issicus in Cilicia to the City of Trabezond, at 210. As for the situation of it in reference to the Heavenly bodies, it lieth almost in the same position with Italy, extending from the middle Parallel of the fourth Clime to the middle Parallell of the sixt: so that the longest summer day in the Southern parts, is about fourteen hours and a halfe; and one hour longer in those parts which ly most towards the North.

The temperature of the aire is exceeding sound, and the soile generally exceeding fruitfull; abounding in most excellent pastures, and antiently very plentiful of all fruites both for use and pleasure, as still it would be were it cultivated as in former times. Once very populous and replenished with goodly Cities, now in a manner waste and desolate, lamenting the destruction of 4000. Townes, some of them destroyed by Earth∣quakes,

quakes, (the falling sicknesse of most great Cities in the East) but most by warre; and have little now to boast of but the comodiousnesse of the Havens which are very many, though most of them but meanly traded, as in a Countrey ill manured; and of little manufactures.

The people antiently, especially those of Greek original, and the nations bordering on the Euxine, were very warlike and industrious: the rest, especially the Lydians and those of the greater Phrygia, as idle and effiminate, wholly addicted to their pleasures. All of them at this time affected with the same disease; in∣somuch that the larkge; (unlesse compelled thereto by extreame necessities) never inroll their Children in the number of santatres. The greatest part of them generally professe the Christian faith; but overpowered by 〈◊〉〈◊〉 which is here most prevalent: all followers of the Church of Greece, and subject all (except those of 〈◊〉〈◊〉 and Ciliers,) to the Patriarch of Constantinople. And as they are of the Commu∣nion of that Church, so they retaine the Greek liturgies for Sacred Offices; not so well understood amongst them in former times, when it was more generally spoken there then it is at the present; now over-topped in most places by the 〈◊〉〈◊〉 and Sclavons tongues. And though in former times by reason of the many Greek Colonies planted in this Countrey, the Conquest of it by Alexander the Great, and the subjection of it to the Syrian Kings of the Maccdon race, that language became generally understood amongst them: in somuch as three of the Greek Dialects, vix. the Dorick, the Iontar, and the Aeiolick, were spoken here: yet did it never so prevaile as to become the Vulgar language of the People, or to extinguish any of the Vul∣gar tongues: For it is said of Mubridues King of Pentus, that he understood two and twenty languages without any Interpreter; which were no other then the languages of so many Nations subject to himselfe, whose Dominion was contained for the most part within Asia Minor.

Principall Mountains of this Countrey are Hermione in Pontus, Argaeus in Capoadocia, Ida in the Les∣ser Phrygia, Clympus in Mysis, Tmolus in Lydic; Amamus in Cilicia, and finally Antetaurus and Scordisous in Armenia Minor. Out of which for the most part flowe the chief Rivers hereof, that is to say. 1. Iris,(now Casilmach) 2. Thermodor. 3. Halis. (now Ottomangruch) 4. Parthenius (now Dilop) 5. Sangarius, now Sangre, all of them falling into the Euxine Sea. 6. Ascanius. 7. Rhynda∣cus. 8. Aesapus. and 9. Granicus, passing into the Propontis. 10. Simoeis. 11. Scamander called also Xanthus, ending their short course in the Hellespont. 12. Caicus. 13. Hermus. 14. Caystrus, and 15. Maeander, loosing themselves in the Aegean. 16. Calbis. 17. Xanthus called also Lycus. 18. Limyrus. 19. Cataractes, dischannelling into the Medetirranian; and 20. Melas, adding to the waters of the great River Euphraues. Of most of which we shall speak more particularly in their several places.

In reference to the State of Rome, it contained the whole Diocesse of Pontue, except Armenia the Great∣er; the Asian Diocesse intirely without any exception; and the peculiar jurisdiction of the Proconsull of Asia; together with the Provinces of Isuria and Cilicia, parts of the Diocesse of the East. But because the names of many of those Provinces were of new invention, and some of them of as short continuance; we will consider it according as it stood divided antiently, and before the Romans had made any conquests in it, into the Provinces of 1. Bithynia. 2. Pontis. 3. Paphlagonia. 4. Galatia. 5. Cappadocia. 6. Armenia Minor; which (together with Armenia Major) made up though in other names, the Pon∣•••••••• 7. Phrygia Minor. 8. Phrygia Major. 9. Mysia the Greater and the Lesser. 10. AE∣elus 〈◊〉〈◊〉 11. Lydia. 12. Caria. 13. Lycia. 14. Lycgonia. 15. Pisidia. 16. Pamphilia. 17. the Province of the Rhodes, all comprehended under the command of the Vicarius and Proconsul of Asia. 18. Isauria. 19. Cilicia, parts of the Diocese of the East as before was said.

1. BITHYNIA.

BITHYNIA is bounded on the east with Pontus, and the River Sangarius; on the west with part of the Euxius, the Thracian Bosphorus, and part of the Propontis; on the North wholly with the Euxine; and on the South with Mysia and Phrygia Minor: Formerly called Bebrycia, afterwards Mygdonia, and at last Bithynia, and that as some say from Bithynius, once a King hereof; more proba∣bly from the Thrns, a people of Thrace, who passed over the Bosthorus and subdued it, called there∣fore by some writers Thracia Asiarica. So witnesseth the Poet Claudian saying,

Thyni Thraces erant, quae nunc Bithynia Fertur.

By Justin the Historian it is called by the name of Metapontus, by reason of its neighbourhood to the Euxme, and the Ponticks Region.

The Countrey naturally rich, and in those parts hereof which lie next the Bosphorus, opposite to Constax∣tinople, so plentifully enriched with fruitfull hills, and pleasant orchards, when kept by the more curious Christian, that it was thought not to be inferiour to the so much celebrated Tempe: now robbed of all those former beauties by the carclessenesse of the Turks, who affect neither art not sumptuositie in their re∣tirements and delights.

Chiese Rivers hereof are Phillis. 2. Sang trius now called Sangri, both falling into the Euxine Sea; this last arising from Mount Dindymus, in the furthest parts of Phrygia Major; and making two long reaches in his journey hither. 3. Aseanius, which rising also in Phrygia Major, but more neer the bor∣ders of this Countrey, falleth into the Propontis, making the Bay called Sinus Ascanius. Which with a lake in the same Countrey called Lacus Ascanius doth plainely manifest that the Bithynians are derived from Askenaz the Sonne of Gomer and grand-son of Japhet.

The principal Townes hereof are 1. Seutari over against the Haven of Constantinople, called antiently Chrysupolis for that there the Persians received their tribute from the other Cities of all these parts of Asia Minor. An ample Town, well garrisoned within, and surrounded round about with most pleasant Or∣chards,

and honoured with the neighbourhood of a Royall Seraglio. Not far off is a Tower called the Murder-Power, serving both for a Fort and watch-tower; and being furnished for defence with twenty pieces of Ordnance. 2. Caleedon on the same shore also, a Colonie of the Megarenses, called blinde by the Oracle, for neglecting Byzantium and choosing the lesse convenie it place for their habitation. And yet did Constantine the Great resolve upon the same place also for his Regall Citie: but changed his resolutions on a kinde of miracle: it being observed that when his workmen began to draw the plat-forme, some Eagles con∣veyed away their lines to the other side of the Bosphorus, and let them fall directly upon Byzemtium. Me∣morable after that for the fourth Gener all Council there assembled by Command of the Emperour Martia∣nus, for repressing the heresie of Nestorius; in which were five hundred and thirty Bishops: now so decay∣ed that it can onely shew some few of the ruines of it: Scutari being risen on the fall thereof. 3. Nice∣media, so called from Nicomedes King of Bithynia (the son of Zipes, and grand child to that Bithynian King, who so valiantly defended his own and his Countreys liberty against Calantus, one of great Alexanders Captains,) by whom founded: Sitaute on the top of an hill, environed with a pleasant and delightfull Plain: honoured with the leate and residence of many of the Roman Emperors, when their affaires called them into the East, before the building of Constantinople; on that occasion made the Throne on which many of Gods Saints received the Crown of Martyrdome, especially in the persecution under Dioclesiar. In those tunes wealthy and of same, now much decayed, but notwithstanding well inhabited both by Greeks and Turks for the commodiousnesse of the fresh Springs which are thereabouts. 4. Libussa, betwixt Nico∣media and the River Ascanius, memorable for the death and Sepulture of the famous Anmball, who to prevent his being made Prisoner to the Romans when Prusius King of Bithynia intended unwor∣thily to betray him, here made away himself by poison. 5. Prusa, founded by another Prusiu, whose name it beareth; a large and wealthy City as most in Asia, honoured for a long time with the residence of the Turkish Kings till the removall of their seat to Adrianople by Mahomet the first; and still ennobled with the sepulture of the Princes of the Ottanan race, except the Emperours themselves. By the Turks called Bursu. 6. Nicae or Nicaea, by the Turks called Neichia, but most commonly Isnichs, situate, caer the fennes of the River Ascanius, occasioned by the frequent overslowings of that River: by some af∣firmed to be the Metropolis of Bithynia; but I think Nicomedia hath more right to claime that honour. First named Antigonta from Antigonius the founder of it; and afterwards Nicaea by the name of 〈◊〉〈◊〉 wife unto Lysimachus, both of them Captaines of the Great Alexander; which last had the happi∣nesse to survive the overthrow of the former, and was the longest liver of those great Commanders. Sufficiently famous both in Ecclesiasticall and Civill story for the first generall Councill there holden, by the appointment of Constantine the Great Anno 314. for settling the peace of the Church then miserably distracted by the Arian Heresie. The number of Bishops there assembled no more then 318. yet of such high esteem for learning and piety, that never Council hath been held in so great an Honour. Here was also held the Councel by the Emperesse Irene, for establishing the veneration of Images; that passing by the name of the Nicene Councel, the Acts thereof might be of greater reputation amongst ignorant men. In which it was decreed by such doubtfull Atguments, as Let us make man after our own Image, once mainly insisted on by a Legate of the Eastern Churches, that they should be reverenced and adored in as ample and religious manner, as the blessed Trinity it self. This City was also the Imperiall City of the Greek Emperours, af∣ter the taking of Constantinople by the Westem Christians; and there continued till the expulsion of the Lutines: Under these

Emperours of the GREEKS residing at NICE.

• A. CH.
• 1200. 1. Theodorus Lascaris son in law to Alexius Angelus the Usurper; upon the taking of Con∣stantinople by the Latines passed over into Asia, and fortifying the City of Nice made it the head City of his Kingdome, conteining Bithyuia, both the Phrygia's, both the Mysia's, Lydie, Aeclis and Ionia.
• 1223. 2 John surnamed Ducas, the husband of Irene daughter of Theodore Lasearis, succeeded his Father in law in the Empire; to which he added Pontus, most of the Isles of the Aegean, and not a few places of importance in Theace it self.
• 1256. 3. Theodorus II. the son of Ducas.
• 1259. 4. John II. the son of Theodore the second, an Infant of about six years old, supplanted first, and after cruelly deposed and deprived of right.
• 1259. 5. Michael Palaeologus, descended from the Imperiall family of the Conneni, first took up∣on him as Protectour of the Infant-Empe our, and afterwards as his assviate in the Empire: in which con∣firmed by many fortunate successes as well against the Latixes as some Greek Usurpers in Tlessaly and Pe∣liponesus, especially the taking of Constantinople; he deprived the young Emperour of his sight, made himself sole Emperour, and left it unto his posterity, who held it with a great deal of trouble and con∣tinuall disquiets, till the year 1452. when Conquered by Mahomet the Great, as before was said. But this recovery of Constantinople was the losse of Nice, taken not long after the removall of the Imperiall seate by Sultan Ottonar; Anno 1299. who presently thereupon took on himselfe the stile of King, from which before he had bstained.

As for the fortunes of Bithynia it self, I look upon the Bithynians as a Thracian people, whom both Strabo and Herodotus speak of as the founders of the name and Nation. Of such a King of theirs as Bithynius I finde some mention in my Authors; and possibly it might be he who had the leading of the Thrni, or Bithy∣xi, in this expedition: that being the name rather of his Nation, then his proper Family. But for the line of Kings which held out till the flourish of the Roman greatnesse, they begun to reign here some few geaerati∣ons

before the time of Philip and Alexander the Macedonians: by whom having other imployment, and lying out of the road towards Persia they were little troubled. (alantus one of Alexanders Captains, made an expedition into their Countrey, and was vanquished by them: and afterwards they had to do with one of the Lieutanants of Antigonus, (one of Alexanders greatest Princes) who though he humbled them for the present, yet got he neither title nor possession by it. And thus they held it out till the time of Prusias, so shuffling with the Macedonian and Syrian Kings, that betwixt both they still preserved their own estates. This Prusias, when the Romans became so considerable, as that no danger need be feared from Greece or Syria, peeced himself with them: and having aided them in their warres against Philip and Antiochus both, and most unworthily promised to deliver Anniball (who had fled to him for succour) unto their Embassadours, made all sure on this side. His Sonne and successour Nicomedes, being outed of his Kingdome by Muhridates King of Pontus, and restored again unto it by the power of the Romans, held it as their Fenditarie, as did Nicomedes his next Successour simamed Philometor: who dying without issue in the time of Augustus, gave his whole Kingdome to the Romans. By them, with the addition of that part of Pontus which lay next unto it, it was made a Province of their Empire, by the name of Pontus and Bithynta; continuing so till the division of that Empire into the Eastern and the Western; when falling to the share of the Constantinopolitans, and with them to the power of the Turkish Tyrants who do still pos∣sesse it.

2. PONTVS.

PONTUS is bounded on the East with Colchis, and Armenta; on the West with Bithynia and the River Sangarius; on the North with the Euxine Sea; and on the South with Phrygia Mayor; Paphlagonia; Galatia and Cappadocia. So that it taketh up the whole length of Anatolia or Asia Minor from Bithynia to the River Euphrates, which parts it from Armenia Major; but not of answer∣able breadth; and gives name to the Sea adjoining, a Ponto regione illi adjacente it a appellari, as Ortelius hath it; called from hence Pontus by the Latines, the adjunct of Euxinus comming on another occasion; which we have spoken of before. A Countrey of a large extent, and therefore divided by the Romans (when Masters of it) into these four parts, viz. Metapontus, or Pontus specially so called. 2. Pontus Galaticus. 3. Polemomacus; and 4. Pontus Cappadocius.

1. PONTUS specially so called or Metapontus bordering on Bithynia and bounded on the East with the River Parthemius which divided it from Paphlagonia; had for the Chief Cities thereof 1. Claudi∣apolis, so called in honor of Clausdius the Roman Emperor; as 2. Flaviopolis, in honor of Flavius Vespasianus; and 3. Fulipolis, in honor of the Julian family, all midland Towns 4. Diospolis, on the Euxine Sea, so called from a Temple consecrated to Jupiter, of great resort. 5. Heraclea, a Colonie of the Phocians, called for distin∣ctionssake, (there being many of that name) Heraeclea Pontit memorable of late times for being the seat or re∣sidence of a branch of the Imperial family of the Conent; when at the taking of Constantinople by the Western Christians, David & Alexius Comnexi fled into these parts: the first fixing here his Royal residence commanded over this part of Pontus and paphligonia; the other possessing himself of Cappadocia and Galatia, made Trabezond his Regall or Imperiall City. But these two Empires, though of the same date, were of differ∣ent destinies: that of Heraclea and Pontus being partly conquered by the Greek Emperours residing at Nice, and partly seized on by the Turks in the beginning and first fortunes of the Ottoman family; the other keeping up the Majesty and State of an Empire, till the year 1461. when subdued by Mahomet the Great. 6. Phillium, at the mouth or influx of the River Phillis, upon which it is seated. 7. Amastris, the far∣thest Town of this part towards the East, on the Sea-side also; once of great strength, but take by Lucul∣lus, together with Heracles, Sinope, Amisut, and other Townes, in the war against Mithridates the great King of Pontus.

2. Eastward of Pontus specially so called, or Metapontus, as Justin the historian call's it, lyeth PONTUS GALATICUS, so named because added to Galatia in the time of the Romans. The chief Cities whereof were 1. Sinope, pleasantly seated on a long point or Promontorie shooting into the main, remarkable in antient storie for the birth and sepulture of Muthridates before mentioned; and in the later times for being the chief seat of the Issendiars and noble Family of the Turkes, who had taken it with the rest of this tract from the Comneni, and held it till the same year in which the Empire of Trabe∣zond was subdued by Mahomet. First built by the Milesians, and continuing in a free estate, till taken by Pharatees a King of Pontus, and made the Metropolis of that Kingdome. 2. Castamona, the head City of the Principality of the Isfendiars before mentioned; preferred by them for strength and convenien∣cy of situation, before Heraclea, or Synope. 3. Themiseyra, now called Favagoria, seated on a spa∣cious plain neer unto the Sea, and antiently giving name to the Province adjoyning. 4. Amasia, the birth∣place of Strabo the Geographer, remarkable in the Ecclesiatical Histories for the Martyrdome of St. The∣odorus; and of late times for being the residence of the eldest Sonnes of the Grand Signeur, sent hither as soon as circumcised, never returning back again till the death of their Father. Accompted now amongst the Cities of Cappadocia, and the chief of that Province, a midland Town, as also is 5. Cabira, called afterward Dtopolis, memerable for the great defeat which Lucullus gave there unto Mithridates; more for the trick which Mithridues there put upon Lacullus. For being well acquainted with the covetous∣nesse of the Romans, he saw no better way to save himself and the rest of his forces after the defeate, then to scatter his treasures in the way which he was to take: that by that meanes his enemies might slacken the pursuite to collect the spoiles, and he preserve himself to another day: and so accordingly it proved. 6. Co∣niaus, to difference it from another of that name, called Comana Pontica; to which other being of Cap∣padociae,

or Armenia Minor, Mithridates came in safety by the trick aforesaid, and thence escaped unto Trgranes the Armenian King, with 2000. horse.

3. Eastward of Pontus Galaticus lieth Polemoniacus, so called by the Romans either from Polemomum a chief town of this tract, or from Polemo the last King hereof, after whose death this Kingdome came unto the Romans. Places of most importance in it, 1. Polemonium on the Sea-side, spoken of before. 2. Hermanassa, a Sea-town also, more in the land. 3. Neo-Coefarea, (now Nixaria) the Metropolis of Polemoniacus, when made a Province of it self. 4. Zela, enlarged by Pompey, and called Mega∣lopolis, by Constantine laid unto the Province of Helenopontus. 5. Sebaestia, so called in honour of Augustus, whom the Greeks called Sebastos; a place of great strength, and one of the first Townes in the Lesser Asia, which held out against Tamerlane; in revenge whereof when he had took it, he caused 12000. men women and children to be most cruelly buried alive in some hollow pits, which he had dagged for that purpose. Nigh to this City is Mount Stella, where Pompey gave Mithridates his fatal overthrow: where also Tamerlane with an Army of 800000 of his Tartars, encountred with Barazet the Turke, comming to the reliese of Sebastia, with an Armie of 500000 fighting men. The assue of which fight was this, that Bayazet having lost 200000. of his souldiers, was himself taken prison∣a, and carried by the insolent Conqueror in an iron cage, against the barres whereof he beat out his brains. 6. Barbanissa. 7. Megalossus. 8. Gozalvia, & c. not much observable in Story.

In this part of Pontus is the rise and fall of the River Thermodon, on the bankes whereof the Ama∣zones, a sort of Warlike women are said to dwell, so called, either quasi 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, because they used to cut off their right pappes, that they might not be an impediment to their shooting: or from a and 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 since pane, because they used not to eat bread; or from 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, because they used to live to∣gether. They were originally of Schythia, and accompanied their husbands to these parts, about the time of the Scythians first irruptions into Asia, in the time of Sesostris King of Egypt. The leaders of this people into Cappadocia, were Plinos and Scolpythus, two young men of a great house, whom a contrary action had banished. They held a great hand over the Themiscyrii, who inhabited this region, and the Nations round about them; At last they were by treachery all murdered. But their wives now doubly vexed, both with exile and widowhood; and extremity of grief and fear producing its usual effect, desperate∣resse: they set upon the Conquerors under the Conduct of Lampedo and Marpesia; and not onely over∣threw them, but also infinitely inlarged their Dominions.

The Amazon Queens.

1. Lampedo. Marpesia. First Queens of the Amazones in these parts.

2. Ortera.

3. Antiopa, whose sisters Hippolyte and Menalippe, challenged Hercules and Theseus to single com∣bate: and were at last hardly vanquished, to their eternal credits.

4. Penhesilea, who came with a troope of brave Viragoes, to the aid of Priamus King of Troy: she invented the Battaile axe, and was at last slaine by Pyrrhus, sonne to Achilles. Long after her death reign∣ed Thalestris; who came to Alexander being in Hyrcania, and plainly told him she came to be his bed-fellow; which done she returned; and at last by little and this Female Nation was extinct. They used in matters of copulation to go to their neighbouring men thrice in a year: if they brought forth males, they sent them to their fathers; if females, they kept them and trained them up in all discipline of war and courage. Of these more elsewhere.

4. the most Eastern part of Pontus, called CAPPADOCIUS, for that it bordered on that Province, and for a time was added to it by the Romans, extended from Polemoniacus to Colchis, and the Ri∣ver Euphrates, the utmost boundaries of this Countrey. Places of most consideration in it. 1. Pharnacia, built by Pharnaces a King of Pontus. 2. Cerasu, by Constantine laid unto the Province of Polemoniacus, from whence Cherries were brought first to Rome, Anno V. C. 680 called therefore Cerasa by the Latines. 3. Ischo∣polis, on the Euxine Sea, as the others are. And so is also 4. Trapezus, now Trabezond, the Imperial City of the Comneny, here raigning over Cappadocia, Galatia, and these parts; of Pontus. An Empire founded first by A∣lexins Comnenus (Nephew of the great Tyrant Andronicus Comnenus by his Son Emanuel) who at the ta∣king of Constant nopl: by the Western Christians fled unto these parts; which willingly submitted unto his command, Anno 1200. Here his posterity flourished in great prosperity, preserving the Majesty of the Empire in a better measure then the Constantinopilitans themselves till the time of David the last Emperour, in whose reign the City of Trabezond, and therewith all the whole dominion belonging to it, was taken by Maho∣met the Great; the poor Emperour ledde prisoner into Greece, and there cruelly murdered. A famous Em∣porie and specially for the trade of fish, caught by the People on the shores of the Euxine Sea; here salted, and from hence transported in great quantities, to Constantinople, Caffa, and other places. And for their better help herein, it is said that there is a Mountain not far from this City affording a black stone, which being beaten in a Mortar serves instead of salt, wherewith they season the fish, which they send abroad. A City honor∣ed heretofore with the residence of the Lord Deputies or Lieutenants of the Grecian Emperour, for defence of the outparts of the Euxine against the Persiant, and now the Station of such Gallies as are maintain∣ed by the Grand Siegnour, to scoure the coasts of the Black Sea, and secure their trade. More in the land stand. 5. Zephiriam. 6. Aza. 7. Cocalia. 8. Cordyle, and many others named in Ptolomy, but not else observable.

The antient Inhabitants of this Countrey were called LEUCOSYRI or White Syrians, governed by a race of Kings descended from the Royall house of Achemenes King of Persia. The first of them cal∣led

Mithridates, one of the seven Competitors for the Persian Kingdome, on the death of Camb••ses. But that honour failing on Darius (of which more hereafter) he seated himself in these remote parts of 〈◊〉〈◊〉, the Ancestour of many great and purssant Princes, but none more memorable then one of his 〈◊〉〈◊〉, Regum Orientis post Alexandrum Aeagnum Maximus, the most potent King of all the East since the time of Alexander the great, as my Author hath it. A Prince of great abilities both in war and coun∣c••ll, and one who longer held it out against the Romans; then Pyrrhus, Anniball, and the great Kings of 〈◊〉〈◊〉 and Syria had done together. This was that famous Mithridates, who being once a friend and confederate of the Roman, took their part against Aristonious; who would not consent to the admission of the Romans unto Pergamus, according to the will of Attalus. Afterward, conceiving an ambitious hope to obtain the Monarchy of Asia; in one night he plotted and effected the death of all the Roman Soul∣diers dispersed in Anat••lia, being in number 150000: in like manner, as in after times the Engl••••••, taught perhaps by this example, murdered all the Danes then resident in England; and the 〈◊〉〈◊〉 massacred all the French inhabiting Sicilia, as we have formerly declared. He dispossessed Nao∣mede; sonne to P••usias, King of Bithyma; Ar••obarzanes, King of Cappadocia; and Philomones, King of 〈◊〉〈◊〉 of their estates; because they persisted faithful to his enemies of Rome. He excited the Grecians to rebell, possessed himself of Athens, and divers places of importance in Greece, Thrac•• and Asia; and allured all the Isles, except Rhodes, from their obedience to the Romans. And finally having disturbed their victories, and much shaken their estate, for the space of 40. years: he was with much ado vanquished by the valour and felicity of L. Sylla, Lucullus, and Pompey the Great; three of the great∣est Souldiers that ever the Roman Empire knew. Yet did not the Roman puissance so much pluck down his proud heart, as the rebellion of his son Pha••na••es, against him; which he no sooner heard, but he would have poisoned himself; but having formerly so used his bedie to a kind of poison allaied (which from h••s inventing of it, we now call Mithridate) that the venome could not work upon him; he flew himself. He is said to have been an excellent Scholler, and to have spoken perfectly the languages of 22. Nations; the languages of so many nations which were subject to him. But neither his learning nor his courage could preserve him from those common miseries, which ordinarily attend a falling greatnesse. And so ended this long and te∣dious war, exceeding troublesome to the Romans, but withall very beneficial. For under colour of giving aid to Mithridates, they took in Crete, Galatia, Colchis, Iberia, and both Armenia's: insomuch as it is truely said by L. Florus, totum pene Orientem & Septen trionem involvit, that in his ruines invol∣ved both the Eastand and North. But to proceed: after his death the Kingdome continued unto his post•• but 〈◊〉〈◊〉 to the Romans, till the time of Nero, when Polemo the last King hereof dying with 〈◊〉〈◊〉 issue; it was comoned and divided into many parts, and laid unto the Provinces of Bithynia, Gal••••a, and Cappadocia onely that part of it which was called Polemen••••cus retaining the dignity of a Province di∣stinct and separate. And so it remained till the reign of Consean in•• the Great, who changing the names, lessening the bounds, and increasing the number of the Provinces, left onely the Province of Pontus, and Bithy••ia in the state he found it. And for the rest he cast it into two new Provinces, that towards the East, retaining the name, but not the bounds of the old Polemoniacus, wherein were the Cities of Trapezus, N••c-Caesarea, Cerasus, Comana Pontica, Palemonium, and Petroeorum Civitas, called afterwads Ju-〈◊〉〈◊〉; of which Ne••-Caesarea was the Metropolis. That towards the East, separated from the Province of Pontus and Bithynia by the River Parthemius, he caused to be called Hel••xopontu, by the name of his Mother; and thereunto assigned the Cities of Amasia the Metropolis of it, Ibora, Eu••haita, Zela, A••∣drapus, Aeg••um Chmacus, Sinope, Amisus, and Leontopolis. But this division held not long, both being united into one and called Hel••nopontus by Justintan; continuing after that a member of the Eastern Empire, till the comming of David and Alexius Comneni from Constantizopls, whereof the one reigned in Heraclea, and the other in Trabezond, as befores said. But their estates being overthrown, it remains wholly to the Turkes, who do now possesse it.

The Armes of the Emperours of Trabezond the greatest Princes of these parts till the Turkes subdued them, were Oz, an Eagle volant Gules.

3. PAPHLAGONIA.

PAPHLAGONIA is bounded on the East with the River Halys, by which parted from 〈◊〉〈◊〉; on the West by the Rivers Parthemius, which part it from the Province of Ponthus and 〈◊〉〈◊〉; on the North with that part of the Kingdome of Pontus which was named Galaticus; and on the South, with Phrygia Ma••or and Galatia. So called of Paphlago the Sonne of Phineus, estated in it by his Father who had newly conquered it.

The Countrey was but small, and of little power, and consequently the Cities were not very many, and of no great note. The principall of such as were, were 1. Gangra, observable for a Councill holden there in the 〈◊〉〈◊〉 times, Anno 339. commonly called Synodus Gangrensis. 2. Conica, or Cinata, of so convenient a situation that it was entrenched and fortified by Mithridate, when he was master of this Countrey. 3. Pompe••opolis, raised out of the foundations of some lesser town, by Pompey the great, and by him so named. 4. Germanopolis. 5. Xo••na. 6. Anarapa, called afterwards Nava Claud opo∣••••••, to difference it from another City of that name in Pontus.

This Province though but small in circuite, was heretofore the seat of four different Nations, viz. 1. the ••word, of whom it is said, that they never waged warre on any enemy, but they faithfully certified them before-hand, of the time and place of their fight. 2. The Heptaco••etoe. 3. The Mossynoe••, both which were a people so beastly and shamelesse, that they used to performe the work of generation

publique; not knowing that Multa sunt honesta factu, qua sunt turpia visit: and 4. the Heneri, to whom the Venetians, as we have already said, do owe their first originall. The Kings which ruled in this Countrey derived themselves from Philomores, who ass••sted Priamus King of Troy in his defence against the Greeks: in memory of whom this Region for a while was called Philomenia. Applying themselves unto the times, they were alwaies favourable to the strongest, serving the Persian, and submitting to A∣lexander as he passed that way; and so maintained their estate without much molestation, till the time of Muthridates King of Pontus: who finding them firme unto the Romans, then growing to great power in the lesser Asia, deprived Philomenes then King hereof, and took the Kingdome to himselfe, fortifying the chiefe townes and places of it. Restored again unto his Kingdome by the power of the Romans, he gave it to them at his death. But the Countrey being very much wasted, and most of the Cities of it destroyed and desolated in the course of that warre; it was not thought worthy a particular care, and therefore laid unto Galatia. Not reckoned a distinct Province in the time of Saint Peter, who writing to the Jewes, disper∣sed in Pontus, Cappadocia, Galatia, Asia, and Bithynnia, take's no notice of this Paphl••gonia; nor was it otherwise esteemed then as a member of Galatia, in the time of Ptolomie. Afterwards it was joyned to Pontus by the Emperour Constantine: part of it after that, with some parts of Pontus and Bi∣thynnia, being made into a new Province by the Emperour Theodosias, and called Henorias, in honour of his sonne Honorius, whereof Claudiopolis, a Citie of Pontus, properly so called, was made the Metro∣polis. But by Justinian, the name of Honorius being abolished, and that of Paphlagonia revived again; the whole Countrey, as before limited, was governed by an Imperiall Officer, whom he called Froetor Justinianus: continuing under the command of the Constantinopolitans, till the taking of that Citie by the Latines. After which made a Member of the Empire of Trabe••ond till the conquest of it by the Turkes, by whom called Rom.

4. GALATIA.

GALATIA is bounded on the East with Cappadoais; on the West with the River Sangarius, and some part of Pontus specially so called, or Metapontus; on the North with Paphlagonia; on the South with Pamphylia. So called from the Gaules, who having ranged over Greece, passed into Asia, and brought a great part of it under their command: but being broken by Attalus King of Pergamus, and drove out of Mysia, and the Lesser phrygia, were at last confined to this Countrey. It was also called Gallo-Groecia, from that mixture of Gaules and Grecians, who uniting into one body when they came for Asia, were commonly called Gallo-groeci. By Suidas, Groeco-Galli, and the Countrey suitably Gra∣co-Gallia.

The Countrey very plentifull of all manner of fruites, even unto voluptuousnesse; and providently provi∣ded of the Stone called the Amethyst, which is said to preserve from drunkennesse the man that weareth it. The name doth signifie as much, derived from A privativum, and 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, ebrius, which commeth from 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, signifying wine.

The people had a custome in their publique funerals, to cast letters fairely written, into that last and fa∣tall fire wherein the dead body was to be bumed, supposing that their friends should read them in the other world. Much given to Sacrifices, in the number and frequency whereof they excelled all Nations: inso∣much that Athenoeus telleth us of one Ariamnes a rich Galatian, that he feasted the whole Nation for a year together with the Sacrifices of Buls, Sheep, Swine, and other provisions, boyled in great Caldrons made for that purpose, and distributed amongst them in Tents and Boothes erected for that entertain∣ment. A brave flash of a vain-glorious hospitality.

Rivers of note here are not any but what are common unto them with their neighbouring Nations, as Ha∣l••s, Sangarius, and some others. The Towns of most consideration in it were 1. An••yra on the banks of tae River Sangarius, the chief Citie of the Teclosages a Gallick Nation, and the Metropolis of the whole Countrey; memorable in Church-story for a Synod here held in the Primitive times, Anno 299. cal∣led Synodus Ancyrana; but of most note at the present for the making of Chamlets; now called Angauri. 2. Olenus. 3. Agrinama, Cities of the same people also. 4. Tavium, or Tanium (for I finde both names) the chiefe Citie of the Trocmi or Trogmi, where was a brazen statue of Juipter, whose temple there was a priviledged Sanctuary. 5. Androsia. 6. Phabarena, Cities of that nation also. 7. Ther∣mae, a Roman Colonie, so called of the hot Bathes there, the chief Citie of the Tolibosti, as Ptolomy, or Tolistobogi, as Strabo nameth them. 8. Talachbachora, belonging also to that people.

Besides the Nations above named, here dwelt also the Byceni and Proseliminitoe, who had also their peculiar Cities, mentioned by name in Ptolomie, but of little or no observation in the course of story. Of all which Nations, onely the Tectosags, were of Gallick originall; who with others of their Countrey∣men under the conduct of Belgius and Bremius, having ransacked Pannonia and Illyricum, fell at last into Macedon; where having tyrannized a while, and laid waste the Countrey, they were at last vanquished and expulsed by Antigonus Gonatas. After this overthrow under the conduct of Lammorius, and Lutoriut, they ferried over the Hellespont, and subdued almost all Asia Minor on this side the Taurus; employed there, by those petty Kings and States against one another: their reputation grown so great, that no Prince thought himself secure without their alliance, or able to make warre without their assistance. The very Switzers of that age; as mercenary, but more faithfull unto those that hired them. But being over rigo∣tous in compelling their neighbor Princes to become their Tributaries, and too severe in the exacting of their Tributes: they inforced Attalus King of Pergamus, by whose favour they had setled about the Hellespont, to become their enemy. Vanquished by him, they were constrained to contein themselves within the

bounds of this Province, which from them in the following times was called Galatia, and Gallograecia. Here for a while they kept their antient courage and estimation, molesting many times their neighbours, and sometimes setting themselves to hire in the wars of others: but in the end they lost both courage and esteem, and were Gaules onely in name, retaining little in them of their Ancestours valour. For as most plants and trees lose much of their vertue, being transplanted into another soile, so these men lost their native cour∣age, strength, and hardinesse, being weakened by the Asian pleasures and delicacies. For as Tully saith, for a man to be good in other places, is no mastery; but in Asia to lead a temperate life, is indeed praise∣worthy: So might one have said to the Gaules, that to be couragious and patient of travell amongst the mountains, was no whit to be admired; but to have continued so amidst the delights of Asia, had been indeed meritorious in them. But these men were so farre from assailing the Romans in the Capitol, that they lost their own Countrey to Malius a Roman General. A warre which Manlius undertook for no other cause, but that they had been aiding to Antiochus against the Romans: nor was there any me∣morable act performed herein, but that of Chiomena the Kings wife, who being ravished by one of the Ro∣man Captains, took her advantage whilest he busied himself in telling the money agreed on for her ransome, to cut off his head; which she presented to her husband. But Manlius got little honour by this successe, not being welcomed with a triumph, at his comming home, according to the Roman custome; because he undertook the warre of his own accord, without commission from the Senate. And yet the Senate was content to enjoy the fruites of it, keeping the Galatians as their Subjects, and the Kings their Feudataries. This happ'ned anno V. C. 564. After which time, I find Desotarus by consent of the Romans, to reign here as King: who siding with Pompey in his warre against Caesar, incurred the anger of the Victor; and had died for it, had not Tullie pleaded his cause and obtained his pardon. But he being dead, his Countrey in the time of Augustus was made a Province of the Empire; Lollius Paulinus being the first President or Governour of it: enlarged afterwards with the addition of Paphlagonia, and some part of Pontus, from whence called Galaticus. Reduced to its first bounds by the Emperour Constantine; and divided into two Provinces by Theodosius, the one called Galatia Prima; the other Salutaris, from its medicinall waters. Of both which Ancyra remained the Metropolis. In the falling of the Eastern Empire it was partly seised on by the Turks; not totally come into their hands, till the subverting of the Empire of Trabezone, upon which it depended. By the Turks at this day called Chianger.

5. CAPPADOCIA.

CAPPADOCIA is bounded on the East with Armenia Major, and some part of Ar∣menia Minor; on the West with Galatia; on the North with Pontus Polemoniacus, and Cap∣padocius; and on the South with Lycaonia, and the rest of Armenia Minor. So called of a River, as Pli∣nie telleth us, which runneth betwixt it and Galatia.

The Countrey very plentiful of wine, and most kind of fruits, rich in mines of Silver, Brasse, Iron, and Allom: affording also besides a mean sort of Alabaster, good store of Crystall, Jasper, and the O∣nyx stone. But the greatest wealth hereof is their breed of horses, infinite almost in numbers, and fit for any service they can be put to. And this is universal, in all parts of the Countrey, but not the other, there be∣ing some parts of it mountainous and very barren, especially about the spurres and branches of the Antitan∣rus: which is a chaine of hils thrusting out of the Taurus, and bending themselves unto the North, upon the edges of this Countrey and the two Armenia's. Here is also in this Countrey the mountain Argaeus, said to be of so great an height, that from one of the summits or tops thereof, a man of perspicacious eyes may discern the Euxine on the one hand, and the Mediterranean on the other.

The People of this Countrey in the time of the Romans were of ill report, so vicious and lewd of life, so monstrously addicted to all kind of wickednesse, that besides the share they had in the old Greek proverb, of 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, they had some proverbs to themselves: 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, & 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, that is to say, a man of Cappadocia, and a Cappadocian Monster, being used proverbially, to signifie a man most extreamly wicked. The words so used by Gregory Nazianzen, speaking of Gregory or George, the Arian Patriarch of Alexandria, if either Suidas or Erasmus, two right learned Criticks, understand him rightly. And they made good the Proverb in the times of the Gospell: Gregory that bloody Butcher of Alexandria, Auxentius, Asterius, Eustathius, principal Patrons of the Arian, and that Arch-Heretick Eunomius, being all of this Countrey. Yet such is the influence of Christianity, where once entertained, that this lewd disposition of the Cappadocians was so corrected and restrained by it; that this Countrey afforded as many godly Prelates, and couragious Martyrs, as any other whatsoever. Highly commended for it by Nazianzen before remembred, who with Gregory Nyssen, and St. Basil, all learned and religious Bishops, were all Cappadocians. And amongst many Martyrs of great faith and constancy, St. George, a noble Coppadocian, Collonell or Tribune of souldiers under Dioclesian, more celebrated in the Churches both East and West, then any other Saints in all the Calender, the blessed Apostles and Evangelists excepted onely, & for that reason made Patron of the Order of the Garter by K. Ed. the 3. Finally, it is reported of these Cappadocians, that they were not onely morally wicked, but naturally venomous also: insomuch that if a Serpent did bite any of them, the mans blood was a poison to the snake and killed him.

Principal Rivers of this Countrey, were 1. Haly••, spoken of before, which had here its fountain and Originall; the end of Croesius Empire both in site and fate, the utmost bound of his dominions on that side; which purposing to passe over in his way to Media, which he intended to invade, he was encountred with and va••iquished by Cyrus the great King of Persia. 2. Iris, which ariseth in this Countrey also, and passing

thorough it and a part of Pontus, dischannelleth it self, as the other doth in the Euxine Sea.

Places of most observation in it, 1. Mazac••, beautified and enlarged by the Emperour Tiberius, after the uniting of this Province to the Roman Empire; and in honour of Augustus Caesar, by him called Caes∣rea: the Metropolis of Cappadocia, and the Episcopal See of renowned St. Basil. 2. Nyss••, the See of Gregory, surnamed Nyssenus, the brother of Basil. 3. Nazianzum, the Episcopal See of another Gregory, surnamed Nazianzenus: three men, which as for the piety of their conversation they were not equalled in those times; so for their admirable abilities in all kind of learning, nothing inferiour to the most c••ninent of the antient Grecians. 4. Tyana, the Metropolis of Cappadocia secunda, after the subdivi∣sion of it by the Emperour Valens. 5. Archelais, in the Praefecture of Garduacreta, so called from Ar∣che••ous a Cappadocian King, the founder or repairer of it. 6. Comana, for distinctions sake called Co∣mana Cappadocia, to difference it from another of that name in Pontus; by Ptolomie placed, I know not why, in Armenia Minor, as is also Nyssa before mentioned. Memorable in old times for a Tem∣ple consecrated to Bellon; whose Priests and other inferious Officers of both sexes, amounted in the time of Sivalo to 6000 and upwards; for maintenance of whom the Priests received the Revenue of the Regi∣on next adjoyning to it; in honour next unto the King, and commonly of the same kindred also. 7. Dio-Casarea; called formerly Cabira, as we find in Strabo. 8. Faustiopolis, so called in honour of Fau∣stin, wife of the Emperour Antoninus. 9. Andraca. 10. Phiara. 11. Salambria. 12. Cani∣pae, spoken of by Ptolomie, with many others as obscure, and not worth the naming. Of more note, though not found in the antient Writers, is 13. Erzirum, situate on the very confines of the Greater Armenia, for that cause made the Rendez-vous, or place of meeting for the Turkish Souldiers when there is any ex∣pedition in hand against the Persian; at which place also after the ending of the warre for the present year, they are disbanded and sent home to their several quarters. And 14. Pterium, not named in Prolo∣mi••, but memorable for the great battle fought in sight thereof between Croesus King of Lydia, and Cy∣rus of Persia; in which Croesus having lost the field, and with it his Kingdome, found the Oracle true, (though not in the sense which he expected) that Croesus passing over the River Halys, should overthrow a great estate, as indeed he did: but it was his own, and not the Persians.

That the Cappadocians are derived from Togarma, the Sonne of Gomer, hath been so fully proved alrea∣dy in our Generall Preface, that we shall not trouble our selves to repeat it here: Nor shall we need to say more in confuting of their opinion, who would fetch Capththorim out of Egypt from the rest of his brethren, to plant him in this Countrey, than hath there been said. Their fortunes in the former times I find little of: subjected by the Persian with the rest of Asia Minor, after the overthrow of Croesus, who before had given the law unto it; as to the Phrygians, Paphlagonians, Bithynians, Mysians, and others of the neighbouring Nations. By Cyrus given together with Atossa his Sister to Pharnaces a noble Persian, who had saved him from the fury of a ravenous Lion running upon him with full mouth, as he was a hunt∣ing. A noble loyalty, and no lesse royally rewarded. From him descended Ariarathes King hereof in the time of Alexander the Great, continuing stedfast in his duty to the Crown of Persia, when almost all the rest of the Kings of Asia yielded to the Enemy. Nor did Alexander call him to account in his march for Persia. But after his decease, Perdiccas having the command of the Army, set upon him, vanquish∣ed him, and most cruelly crucified him, together with as many of his kindred as could be found. One of his Sonnes, who fortunately had escaped this slaughter, spying his time, when the Maccdonians were at warres amongst themselves, recovered his estate again, and passed it over to his off-spring: continuing in his line, without any subjection, till the time of that Ariobarzanes, who by Mithridates was deprived of his dominion, as was told before. Restored again unto his Kingdome by the power of the Romans, he became their Homager, holding, as did his Successours, by their courtesie onely: Continuing yet in state of Kings, till the death of Archelaus the last King hereof. Who having angred Tiberius, for not attending on him when he lived at Rhodes, during the life-time of Augustus, as did others of the tributary States and Princes, was by him then possessed of the Empire, cited unto Rome under colour of projecting somewhat a∣gainst the State. Where the old Prince even spent with Age, the Cout, and some other diseases, had without question been condemned by the servile Senate: but that one of the Witnesses deposed, that he had said that if ever he went back into Cappadocia, Tiberius should find, quales sibi nervi essent, what a man he was. Which moved such a laughter in the Senate, the old King being neither able to sit nor stand, that he was dismissed: Tiberius thinking that he could not punish him more effectually, than to let him live. A favour which the old King construed to the best, and in the way of gratitude, bequeath∣ed his Kingdome at his death to the Empire of Rome. Being added to the Roman Empire, it was exceed∣ingly enlarged by the addition of the greatest part of the Kingdome of Pontus: and so it stood in the time of Ptolomy, who reckoneth Pontus Galaticus, Cappadocius, and Polemoniacus, as parts and members of this Province. Divided besides those into these eight Praefectures, that is to say, Clamaniensis, Sar∣guransene, Gardaocreta, Cilicia, Tyanidis, Lycaonia, Antiochiana, and Cataonia. But Pontus, Lycaonia, and Antiochiana (he meanes Pisidia as I take it) being made Provinces of themselves, by the Emperour Constantine: it returned unto its naturall bounds, and made one Province of the Empire, of which Caesarea, as is said before, was the Metropolitan: and so remained, till the Emperour Valens ae great Patron of the Arian faction, of purpose to despight St. Basil, who opposed that heresie, created ano∣ther Province out of it, called Cappadocia secunda, whereof the Metropolis was Tyana. After this it continued part of the Eastern Empire, till the erecting of the new Empire of Trabezond; together with which it fell unto the hands of the Turkes; by whom the whole Province with the addition of Pontus, is now called Amasia; after the name of that City, which the Beglerbeg of Anatolia honoureth with his residence; and is said to yield yearly to the Grand Seigneur 60000. Ducats.

6. ARMENIA MINOR.

ARMENIA MINOR is bounded on the East with Euphrates, which parteth is from Armenia Ma••or; on the South with Mount Taurus, which separates it from Cilicia; on the West and North with a long chain of hills called Mons Scordiscus, by some called Mons Amanus, by others Anti-••aurus, according to the change of places; by which divided from Cappadocia. Of the rea∣son of the name hereafter.

The Countrey of the same nature with Cappadocia, before described, in some parts over-grown with Mountains, by which and by the River Euphr••••es so inclosed and fenced, that it is difficult of entrance: in others pleasant and delightfull; well watered with sweet streams, and some fair Rivers issuing out of the Mountains, the principall whereof is Melas, so called from the blacknesse of the water thereof, which ••alleth into the Euphr••••es.

Divided in the time of the Romans into these four Regions, that is to say, Laviana, Aravena, Me∣••••ene, lying on the Euphrates; Mar•••••••• more within the land towards Cappadocia: each of which had their severall C••••ies, whose names are to be found in Ptolomie. The principall 1. Meliten••, the chief City of the Region so called, and the Metropolis of the lesser Armenia. Called afterwards Ma∣laxia, and now Suur: the territory thereof abounding in Oyle and Wine, not inferiour to the best of Greece. The City said by Onuphrius to be a Colonie of the Romans: much spoken of by Eusebius and other writers of Ec•• estiasticall story, for the piety of the Christians there inhabiting in the fiery times of Per∣〈◊〉〈◊〉 2. Nicopolis, and 3. Oro••••andus in the Mountain Countries; the former built by Pompey, in memory of his victory there obtained against the forces of Tigranes, King of Syria and both Armonia's. 4. Garnace, a well ••ortified town, mentioned by Tac••tus in the twelfth book of his Annals, and by him called Gorneas. 5. Cuous••n, and 6. Arabyssus, memorable for the exile of Saint Crrsostome, Patriarch of Constantin∣ple, confined unto these places by the power and malice of the Empresse Eudoxia, by whom hated for his 〈◊〉〈◊〉 〈◊〉〈◊〉 in points of faith; who dying afterwards at Comana of Cappadocia, was there interred.

This Countrey was once part of Cappadocia, till the Armenians by their incursions and Colonies pes∣sessed themselves of it, and gave unto it the name of Armenia Minor: continuing part of their estate till the warre of 〈◊〉〈◊〉 against the Romans. Who being discomfited by Lucullus, fled with two thousand h••rse to the Court of Tigranes the Armenian, who had married his daughter. By whom at first neglected, and not suffered to come into his presence; but afterwards on the apprehension of the common danger more esteemed and set by: insomuch that his royall entertainment there, and the refusall of Tigranes to yield him up when required by the Roman••: occasioned Lucullus to bring his forces into these parts, subduing all before him to the bankes of Euphrate: His victories being seconded by Pomper, and confirmed by Augustus, this Countrey was made a Province of the Roman Empire: the greater Arm••nia, lying on the other side of that River, though conquered also in that warre, not being taken into the accompt of the Roman Provinces, till the time of Traian; Augustus thinking it an high point of wisdome (as no doubt it was) not to extend the Empire beyond those bankes. After this it conti∣nued Roman, till the declining times of the Eastern Empire; when wasted by the Persians, and subdued by the Turkes; by whom called Genech, or as some say Pegia.

And so much of the Provinces of the Pontick Diocese lying within Anatolia, or Asia Minor; convert∣ed to the Christian faith by the two great Apostles of Jews and Gentles; as appeareth by Saint Paul's E∣pistle to the Galatians, and Saint Peter's to the S••rangers dispersed in Pontus, Galatia, Cappadocia, Asia, and Bithynnta.

7. ASIA PROPRIA.

COme we now to the ASIAN Diocese, and first to that part thereof which Ptolomie and others (for the reasons spoken of before) call Asia Propria. Antiently the most rich and flourishing part of all this 〈◊〉〈◊〉 and so affirmed to be by Tullie, who telleth us that the tributes which the Romans had from other places, hardly sufficed to defray the publick charges for defence thereof. Asia vero tam opinia est & s••rul••s ut & ubert 〈◊〉〈◊〉 agrorum, & varictate fructuum, & magnitudine pastionis, & multitudine carum rerum quae exportentur, facile omnibus terris antecellit. But as for Asia (saith he) it is so fertile and so rich, that for the fruitfulnesse of the fields, variety of fruites, largenesse of pasture-grounds, and quan∣tity of commodities which were brought from thence; it very easily excelled all other Countreys. The fortunes of the severall Provinces we shall see anon. Brought under the command of the Persians, they continued subject to that Crown, for some generations: but at last taken from them by the Grecions, under the prosperous ensignes of victorious Alexander. After whose decease, the Empire being divided among his Captains, Asia, fell to the share of Antigonus; whose sonne Demetrius seized on the Kingdome of Macedonia: and left Asia to Seleucus Nicanor, King of Syria and the East, being also one of Alex∣ander's heires. The sixt from this Seleucus was Antiochus called the Great who waging warre with young Prolomy Philopaters, King of Eg••••t, committed by his father to the protection of the Romans; and otherwise pract••ing against their estate; provoked the Sen ite of Rome to send Scipio (sirnamed from his 〈◊〉〈◊〉 victories) A••••aticus against him: who compelled him to forsake Asia, which the Romans presently took into their possions. But finding it agreeable to the present estate of their Affaires (the Kingdome of Mac••∣denia standing in their way) to make further use of Eumene•• King of Pergamus, and the people of Rhodes, who had been aiding to them in the former warre; they gave unto Eumenes the Provinces of L••caonia,

Phrygia, Mysia, Ionia, Lydia, Lycia and Caria to the Rhodians: knowing full well, that they could easily take them back again, when they saw occasion. More hereof in the story of the Kings of Perga∣mus: on the decease of Artalus the last King thereof, these Provinces returning fully to the power of the Romans.

It contained only after the accompt of Cicero, the Provinces of Phrygia, Mysia, Caria, Lydia, as he reck oneth them up in his Oration for Flaccus: computing the two Phrygia's for one Province only, and comprehending Aeolis and Ionia, under that of Lydia. But for our more punctuall and particular proceed∣ing in it, we will consider it as divided into 1. Phrygia Minor. 2. Phrygia Mayor. 3. Mysia. 4. Aeolis and Ionia,, or Asia more especially so called. 5. Lydia, and 6. Caria.

8. PHRYGIA MINOR.

PHRYGIA MINOR, is bounded on the East with Mysia, interposing betwixt it and the Greater Phrygia; on the West, with the Hellespont; on the North, with the Proponis; on the Sourh, with the Aegean Sea. Called Phrygia from Phryx a River in the Greater Phrygia; or as some say, from Phryxus, the sonne of Athamas King of Thebes; who flying from the treacherous snares of his Mo∣ther in law, did here seat himself. Minor was added to it to distinguish it from the other Phrygia, which being the bigger of the two had the name of Major. It was also called Phrygia Hellespontiaca, from its situation on that Streit: and Troas, from Troas the chief City of it; by which name it occurreth in the book of the Acts. It was called also Epictetus, but the reason of the name I finde not, except it came from the Epicteti, a People dwelling on the East parts of Bithynnia, and consequently neere this place.

Chief Rivers of it, 1. Scamander, on whose Bankes stood the renowned Citie of Troy, honoured by Hesiod with the title of Divine Scamander: in which the Virgins of this Countrey a litle before they were to be married used to bath themselves, and to say these words, 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, that is to say, Take O Scamander my Virginity. Which opportunity, Cimon an Athenian taking, clapped a Coroner of Reeds upon his head, like a River-god, and so deflowred Callirhoe a noble Virgin, then be∣trothed to another: occasioning thereby the leaving off of this foolish custome. It was also called Xanthus by the Poets, Xanthúm{que} bibissent, as in Virgil; and watered a litle Region called Lycia, of which more anon. 2. Aesopus, parting this litle Region from the Lesser Mysia; the boundary of it on the North, as the Promontory called Lectium is the furthest point of it towards the South. 3. Simoeis, now cal∣led Simores, falling into the Hellespent not far from the Promontorie called Rhateuni (memorable for the Statue and Sepulchre of A ax): but rising out of Mount Ida, an hill of this Region, on which Paris (being by his Father exposed to the fury of wild Beasts) judged the controversy of the golden ball in favour of Venus; respecting neither the great riches of Juno, nor the divine wisdome of Pallas, but transported with a sensuall delight fatall in the end to the whole Countrey.

Cities of most observation in it, 1. Dard••num or 'Dardania, the Town and Patrimony of Aeneas. 2. Assus, mentioned Acts 20. v. 13. by Plinie called, Apollonia; who telleth us that the earth about it is of such a nature that it will consume a dead body in fourty daies. 3. Trajanopolis, whose name declareth its founder 4. Sigaeum the Port-town to Troy, neere a noted Promontory of the same name. 5. Troy, situate on the Ri∣ver Scamander, the beauty and glory of the East: called Ilium, and Pergamus for the reason to be shewn anon. A famons Town, from the people whereof, all Nations des••e to fetch their originall. The beau∣ty of it may be (as some write) yet seen in the ruines, which with a kind of majesty entertain the beholder: the walls of large circuit, consisting of a black hard stone cut four-square; some remnants of the Turrets which stood on the walls, and the fragments of great Marble Tombes and monuments of curious workman∣ship. But certainly these are not the ruines of that Ilium, which was destroyed by the Grecians, but 6. Troas or New Troy, built some four miles from the situation of the old, by Lysimachus, one of A∣lexanders Captains, who peopled it from the neighbouring Cities, and called it Alexandria, or Troas Alexandri, in honour of Alexander the Great who begun the work, but lived not to bring it to any per∣fection. In following times called Troas onely, and by that name mentioned Acts 20. v. 6. then the Metropolis of this Province, now a ruine onely, but every day made more ruinous then other by the Turks, who carry daily the stones and Pillars of it to Constantinople to adorn the houses of the Bassas. 7. Sca∣mandria, a strong piece, but of later foundation, cunningly surprized by Ottoman the first King or the Turkes, in the time of a funerall. Now concerning old Ilium, the buildings, glories, and fall of it, take this story with you.

The Kings of TROY.

• A. M.
• 2487. 1. Dardanus sonne to Corinthus King of Corinth, having killed his brother Jasius, fled into this Countrey, where he built this City, calling it Dardania; according to that verse of Virgil,

  Dardanus Iliacae primus pater urbis & autor. Both of Troy Town, and Trojan race Dardanus the first founder was.

• 2518. 2. Erichthonius, of whom litle memorable. 75.
• 2593. 3. Tros the sonne of Erichthonius, who so much beautified and enlarged the Citie of Dardania, that from thence-forth it was called Troja, and the people Troes. By supporting the unnatu∣rall malice of Saturn, against his sonne Jupiter, he lost his own sonne Ganimedes: who being taken prisoner by Jupiter, who carried the Eagle for his Ensigne, is by the Poets said

• to have been snatched up to Heaven by an Eagle. 60.
• 2653. 4. Ilus the sonne of Tros, who built the Regall Palace called Ilium; and did withall so enlarge the City, and added so much Omament and beauty to it, that it is frequently called Ilium, and the People Iliaci. The many Towers and Turrets of it, were of his erection, which being by the Greeks called 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, and sometimes 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, occasioned the whole Cine to be called Pergamus. 54.
• 2707. 5. Laomedon, who new-built Troy: which afterwards Hercules and the Grecians (justly con∣ceiving displeasure against the treacherous King) twice took and defaced; Laomedon himself being slain the latter time. 36.
• 2743. 6. Priamus, who re-edified Troy; but giving leave to his sonne Paris to ravish Helena, wife to Meuelaus King of Sparta, forced the Greekes to renew their ancient quarrell: who aftee a ten years siege, forced the Town, having lost of their own men 860000. and killed 666000. of the Trojans, and their Associates, A. M. 2783.

So as that of Ovid was most true,

Iam seges estubi Troja fuit, resecanda{que}, falce, Luxuriat Phygio sanguine pinguis humus. Corne fit for sithes now growes where Troy once stood, And the soyle's fatted with the Phrygian bloud.

Concerning the taking of this Town, two things are to be considered First, whether rhe Grecians in these ten years lay continually before it, and it seemes they did not: but that rather they did beat up and down, wasting the Countrey. and robbing the Seas, for the first nine yeares; and in the tenth onely said a formall siege. This is the more probable, because that in the tenth year of the warre, Priam is recorded by Homer in the third of his Iliads, to have sat on a high Tower; and to have learned of Helen the names and qualities of the Greek Commanders: which he could not be thought ignorant of, if they had so long together layn in eye-reach. Secondly, by what means the Town was taken, and here we finde a difference. Eor some Historians tell us, that Aeneas and Antenor, being either weary of the warre, or discontented that it was not managed by their sole advice, or otherwise corrupted by the Grecians, betrayed it to the enemy: but this Virgil could not brook, as prejudiciall to his Aeneas; whom he intended to make the pattern of a compleat Prince. He therefore telleth us of a woodex-horse: wherein divers of the Greek Princes lay hidden, which by Sinon one of the Grecians, was brought to Troy-gates: and that the people desirous of that monument of the enemies flight, made a breach in their walls, that gate not being high enough to receive it. And that this fiction of Virgil might be grounded on history; it is thought by some, that over the Scaean Gate where the Greekes entered, was the portraiture of a large and stately horse: and by o∣thers, that the walls were battered by a wooden Engin called an Horse, as the Romans in after ages used a like Engine called a Ramme. Neither of which is much improbable: but with me perswade not the inte∣grity of Antenor or Aeneas, for whose sakes the fable of the wooden horse was first invented.

The Citie being thus destroyed, the Trojans who remained in the Country, when Aeneas and Antenor had forsaken it, began to think of some other place for their habitation: which having often shifted they fixed at last by advice of an Oracle, some four miles from the former; giving it the name of Ilium. A poor and sorry vil∣lage when Alexander came thither; who in the Temple of Minerva, (the onely one they had, and a meane one too) offered up his own shield and took down another, which he used after in his fights against the Persians: honouring it with gifts, and promising the people to rebuild and inlarge their City. But what he lived not to make good was performed by Lysimachus, who gave it the name of Alexandria, next called the Alexandrian Troas, at last Troas simply. A free City it continued till the warre of Mithri∣dates against the Romans; in the course whereof Fimbria a Roman Quaestor having feditiously slain the Consul Valerius Flaccus in Bithynia, and made himself Master of the Armie, being refused entrance here as a theese and a Rebell, besieged the City, and in the space of eleven daies took it. And when he boast∣ed that he had done as much in eleven daies as Agamemnon and the Greeks could do in as many yeers, one of the Ilians tartly answered, That they wanted an Hector to defend them. Afterwards Julius Caesar emulous of Alexanders attempts, and descended from Julus of Trojan race, restored them to their liberty, and inlar∣ged their territories: a Colonie, and an Vniversity of the Romans of no mean esteem. But time and war, and the barbaritie of the Turks, have brought it unto rubbish, as before was said.

In the distributing of the Provinces of the Roman Empire, this little Region, with that of Mysia Hel∣lespontiaca adjoining to it, made up the Province called by the name of Hellespontus, subject with Aeolis, Ionia, and the Asian Isles, to the exempt jurisdiction of the Proconsul of Asia. Following the fortunes of Constantinople till the taking of that City by the Latines, it became then subject to the Greek Emperours residing at Nice: conquered not long after by the Turks of the Selzuccian family. In the division of whose Empire on the death of the second Atadine, the whole Province of Hellespont, with part of the greater My∣sia, and Aeolis, adjoining to them, and some part of Lydia, were seized upon by Carasus a man of great power amongst the Turks; who here erected a small kingdome, called from him Carasia, or Carasi-illt: long since swallowed up by the Ottoman race, in the time of Orchanes, son of Ottoman, and the second King of that house.

9. PHRYGIA MAJOR.

PHRYGIA MAJOR is bounded on the East with Galitia; on the West with Mysia interposed betwixt it and the lesser Phrygia; on the North with Metapontus, or Pontus specially so called; on the South with Lyd••••. Called Phrygia for the reasons before laid down; the word Major

being added for distinctions sake, because the greater of the two.

The People of this Countrey were antiently more superstitious then the other Asians, as appeareth by the rites used in the Sacrifices of Cybele, and some other Godesses said to be also the Inventors of Augury, and 〈◊〉〈◊〉 kiddes of Divination. And yet for the most part men of after-wits, and all for had I wist; whence 〈◊〉〈◊〉 Proverb, Sero sapiuut Phryges, applyed to those who wanted forecast, and knew better to lament mis∣〈◊〉〈◊〉 then to keep them off; and used not to bethink themselves of what would follow till it was too 〈◊〉〈◊〉. A people noted for effeminacy and lightnesse of conversation: and for fear they should not of them∣selves be wanton enough, their very Musick was so fitted as to dispose them to laseiviousnesse. Where by the way, I find three sorts of Musick spoken of amongst the Antients: the first, that which Aristotle calleth 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, because it setled and composed the affections; and Boëtius, the Lydian Musick, because much used by that people, before corrupted by long ease and ill example. It consisted principally of long notes or Spondee••; such as is that supposed to be which Elisha called for, Kings 1. chap. 3. v. 15. to invite the spirit of prophesie to him, and was played by David before Saul to drive away the ill spirit from him. And of this sort was the Church-Musick of the Primitive times, fitted to calme mens passions, and raise their devotions; ut per oblectamenta aurium (as Saint Augustine hath it) assurgat enimus ad pietat is affectum, that by the pleasure of the ears the passions might be calmed, and the soul inflamed with pious and devout affections. The second sort is that which Aristotle calleth 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, or Active (as the other 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 or merall) commending it before the other in the education of youth, because more stirring them to action; consisting of Dactyles, or one long note and two short ones, by him and Boëtius both cal∣led D••ri••n, as most peculiar to that people. The third and last by the Philosopher called 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, or ravishing, because it unhingeth the affections and stirreth men to lascivious gestures, and wanton thoughts; consisting of short notes or Tribrachies; Boëtius termes it Phrygian, as most in use amongst this loose and ungoverned nation; such as the French Musick in our age. A sort of Musick forbidden to be used by Aristotle but upon the Theatre, for contentation of the rude and unpolished people, by reason of that influence which it had upon mens behaviour. Mutatâ Musicâ (saith the Oratour) mutantur & mores; Cu∣randum ita{que} ut Musica quàm gravissima & sedatissima retineatur, that is to say, the change of Musick maketh an alteration of manners; care therefore to be taken in the Common-Wealth, that the Musick be composed and grave, and such onely used. But see how fane this fidling humour hath led me out of the way; I return again.

The Countrey very rich and pleasant, well watered with the River Sangarius and Marsyas. Of which the former hath its spring or fountain in this Countrey, but his fall in the Euxine; on the banks whereof standech the City Gordium, and many others of good note. The later was so called from one Marsyas, who striving with Apollo for prcheminence in Musick, was by him flead: which fact (say the Poets) was so lamented, that from the tears of the mourners grew this River. The chief Townes are 1. Gordior, the seat of Gordius, who from a plowman being raised and chosen King of this Kingdome; placed the furni∣ture of his waine and Oxen in the Temple of Apollo, tied in such a knot; that the Monarchy of the world was promised to him that could untie it: which when Alexander had tried and could not undo it, he cut it with his sword 2. Midaeium, the seat of Midas, son to this Gordiu••, who being not a little covetous, intreated of Bacchus, that what ever he touched should be turned into gold; which petition granted, he was almost starved, his very victuall turned into gold till he had repealed his wish; and af∣terward for preferring Pan's pipe before Apollo's Harpe, his head was adorned with a comely paire of As∣ses eares. 3. Colosse where dwelt the Colossians, to whom Saint Paul writ one of his Epistles. 4. Pesinus where the Goddesse Cybele being worshipped, was called Dea Pesinuncia. The Romans were once told by an Oracle, that they should be Lords of the world, if they could get this Goddesse into their possession. Hereupon they send to the Phrygians to demand it. The Phrygians willing to please a potent neighbour especially the Romans, being their Countrey-men, as descended from Aeneas and his Troians; granted their request, and the Goddesse is shipp'd away for Rome. But behold the unluckinesse of fortune. The Ship, Goddesse and all made a stand in Tiber; neither could it be advanced forward by force or art. It hapned that one of the Vestall Virgins named Claudia, being suspected of unchastity, resolved to put her self upon this experiment: and fastning her girdle to the ship prayed to the Goddesse, that if she were cause∣lessely suspected, the ship might be suffered to go forward; which was no sooner heard then granted, Claudia drawing the ship up the water to Rome; where I leave the people wondering at the miracle, as well they might. But to return unto the City, it stands in the borders of Galatia, and is by some made to be the City of Gordius, and the Gordian knot plac'd in it also; but neither rightly. Not far off stood the mountain Dindyme, overlooking the City, in which the Priests of Cybele had their usuall residence, thence called Dindymene. 5. Apamea, situate not far from the banks of Maeander, antiently a most flourishing Emporie; & the Metropolis of the whole Countrey, till Constantine divided it into the two Pro∣vinces of Salutaris, and Pacatiana: making 6. Synnada the Metropolis of the first. 7. Hi••rapolis, and 8. Laodicea, two noted Cities in those times, the principall of the other Province. 9. Juliopolis, and 10. Tiberiopolis, so called from the Emperours to whose honour dedicated. 11. Dorylaeum, &c. Not known unto the antient Writers, but of more note in modem stories, are 1. Sagnta, the habitati∣on of Etrogul, Father of Othoman the first King of the Turks. 2. Chara-chisar, by the Grecians cal∣led Melampyrgos or the Black Tower. 3. Billezuga. 4. Eineg••oll, places of consequence and impor∣tance taken by the said Ottoman from the Christians in the first rise of his fortunes.

As for the Phrycians, they descended (as was shewn before) from Gomer the eldest sonne of Japhet, and Ask••naz the eldest sonne of Gomer: of which, Gomer first placed himself in the mountainous Countreys of Albania; and afterwards in the more pleasant plaines of the Greater Phrygi••, where the City of Cimmeris

(the posterity of Gomer being generally called Cimmerians) did preserve his memory. And as for A••∣kenaz, he first took up his dwelling in the Lesser Phrygia, and the banks of the Hellespont, where was antiently a City and Territory called Ascania, some Isles adjoining called Insuloe Ascanioe, the name of Ascanius also very frequent in Troy it self. An antient people they were doubtlesse, esteemed the anti∣entest of the world by Psamniticus King of Egypt, upon this experiment. Desitous to inform himself to what Nation the priviledge of Antiquity did of right belong, he caused two Children to be kept in a fold, where they were suckled by goates; all mankind being prohibited upon very great penalties; to have re∣course to them. All the language which the children learned from their speechlesse nurses, was no more then Bec, which in the Phrygian language signifieth Bread, and being of no signification at all in any o∣ther which was then known to the Aegyptians, gave up the Verdict on their side. But other Nations of the world not yielding to this sentence, by a Writ of Errour, or an Ad meliùs inquirendum impannell'd a new Jurie; wherein it was pronounced on the Scythians side, Seytharum gens semper antiquissima. Where by the way, Goropius Becanus makes the like use of this experiment, to prove the High-Dutch to be the Original or Mother-tongue of the world: because Becker in that language signifieth, as with us a Baker, or a maker of Bread. In this Countrey reigned Niobe, who preferring her self before Latona, the mother of Phoebus and Diana, had her Children slain before her face by an unseen meanes, and was her self turned into a stone, as the Poets fable. Here also reigned Tantalus, who being rich, and wan∣ting wisdome to make use of it: is feigned to stand in hell up to the chin in water, and that too under a tree whose fruit toucheth his lips; yet both the one and the other flie from him, when he offereth at them Of which thus Ovid,

—Tibi Tantale nullae Deprenduntur aquae, quae{que} imminet, effugit arbor.

In English thus.

Thou canst not, Tantalus, those waters tast, The tree just at thy lippes, flies off as fast.

But this race of Kings being worn out by the tyranny of time or war, the Phrygians were made subject to the Kings of Lydia; continuing under their command till the conquest of Lydia by the Persians: with which they fell together to the Crown thereof, not made the stronger by the accession of effeminate Subjects. Gained from them by the sword of Alexander, they fell unto Antigonus one of his great Captains: and on his overthrow at the battell of Ipsus, to Seleucus the Conquerour, the first King of that race: follow∣ing the same fortune after that with the rest of Asia, till they came to be possessed by the Romans, and made a Province of that Empire. But Constantine laying to it the Greater Mysia made two Provinces of it: the one called Salutaris, from some miraculous cures there wrought by the Arck-Angel Michael, as was then generally believed: the other called Pacatiana, from Pacatianus, who in the time of the said Constantine was Praefect for the Praetorium of the East, and divers years before had began his honours with the Lieutenantship of Britain. In the declining of the Constantinopolitans it became a prey unto the Turkts of the Selzuccian Family; possessed by them till the death of Aladine the last King of that race: when seized upon together with the Greater Mysia, and those parts of Lydia which lay next unto it, by Aidin, a great Turkish Prince, and made a peculiar Kingdome, called by his name Aidinia, or Aidin∣Illi; extorted shortly from his heires by the house of Ottoman.

10. MYSIA.

INterposed betwixt the two Phrygia's lieth the Countrey of MYSIA, bounded on the East with Phrygia Major; on the West with Phrygia Minor, and the Aegean Sea; on the North with parts of Bithynia, Propontis, and the Hellespont; and on the South with part of Lydia, Aeolis, and the Aegean. So called from the Mysians, the Inhabitants of it.

Whether these Mysians were originally a Phrygian Nation, or some inter-lopers which thrust in after∣wards amongst them, I find not determined. Most probable it is they were naturall Phrygians; being as superstitious in the worship of their severall Deities, as any Phrygian of them all: and that they had this name given them by the Lydians, from the abundance of Beech-trees which grow amongst them, by them called Mysae. A people of so base and contemptible quality that it grew into a common proverb to call a fellow of no worth Mysiorum postremus.

The principall Mountain of this Countrey is that called Olympus, situate in the north-parts hereof border∣ing towards Bithyma: which as it is called Olympus Mysius, to difference it from Olympus in Greece; so the people of the Greater Mysia, where this Mountain is, are called Olympeni, to difference them from the Mysii or Masi of Europe. And as for Rivers, those of most note besides Aesopus, parting it from Troas, or the Lesser Phrvgia. are 1. Caicus, on whose bankes stand's the City of Pergamus, and from thence passeth into the Aegean Sea, at the Bay of Eloea, and 2. the famous River of Granicus, which hath his fountain in Mysia Major, and passing through Mysia Minor, falleth into the Propontis. A River memorable for the Victory which Alexander obtained on the bankes hereof, in his first essay against the Persians: by whom upon the first noyse of his preparations he was so slighted, that Darius King of Persia, gave command to his Leiutenants residing in Asia Minor, that they should take him alive, whip him with rods, and so convey him to his presence, A notoble example of pride and fall of the Persians. But Alexander soon taught them another lesson. For though the Persians were possessed of the higher bankes of the River, with an intent to stop his passage; yet he resolved to charge them in the face of their strength: knowing full well that if he could beat them on a place of so great advantage, he should not one∣ly

lessen them in point of reputation, but beget an opinion of himself that he was invincible. And so ac∣cordingly it proved, the Persians being vanquished by him, and all the Kingdomes and Provinces of this Asia submitting to him on the noyse of the Victory (as an Enemy not to be resisted upon equall termes) some few Townes excepted. And therefore it was wisely advised by Machiavell, that he who takes upon him to defend a passage, should with his ablest forces oppose the Assailant; because in all invasions where the Nations invaded have been beaten upon a great advantage of place, as defence of Rivers, Streets, and Mountaines; they do not onely dishearten their Souldiers from dealing afterwards on even ground with that enemy, but leave no hope unto their fellowes and partakers, of being succoured and defended by such weak Protectors. Which caution if the Persians Commanders had observed either here, or at Pylae Cilicia spo∣ken of hereafter; Alexander had not so easily subverted the Persian Monarchy. But the fatall period of it was now drawing on, and the men either naturally Cowards, or els prodigiously besotted.

It is divided commonly into Mysia Minor, or the Lesser Mysia, which lying on the West towards Troas and the Hellespont, is called sometimes Mysia Hellespontiaca; and joyned unto Troas by the Emperour Constantine, made up that Province which he called the Consular Hellespont: and Mysia Major, called from Olympus which was in it, Mysia Olympina, and the Inhabitants Olympeni; which joyned by that Em∣perour to the western parts of Phrygia Major, made up that Province which he caused to be called Phrygia Satutaris, for the reason formerly delivered.

Places of most observation in the Lesser Mysia, were 1. Abydus, standing on the narrowest of the Hel∣lespont, opposite unto Sestos in Thrace; first built by the Milesians with the consent of Gyges King of Lydia, to whom the Countrey then belonged. Memorable both in the antient and modern story. In antient story for the famous resolution of the Inhabitants, when besieged by Philip the Father of Perseus King of Macc∣dm. For being brought by him into some distresse, and hopelesse of good conditions from him, the young men of the Town who had bound themselves by oath to die rather then fall into his hands, set fire thereof, and barbarously slew themselves with as many of the women and children as could be met with. Which newes being brought to Philip, moved so litle compassion, that he said he would give the Abydeni three daies leisure to die; and therefore would not suffer any of his souldiers to enter the Town, then set open to him either to take the spoile thereof, or hinder this bloudy execution, till the three daies end. In Modern story no lesse memorable for the taking of it by the Turkes, in the reign of Orchanes the sonne of Ottoman, through the treason of the Governours daughter: who bewitched with the person and valour of Abdevachmen, a young Turkish Gallant, whom she had beheld from the Towers of the Castle, threw a letter to him as he drew neer the wall, wherein she manifested her affection, and promised to make him master of that fortresse, if he would perswade his Generall to raise the siege, and come with a strong party in the dead time of the night to receive it from her, which was done accordingly. The Town continuing ever since in the power of the Turkes, well fortified, and one of the two Castles spoken of before, which defend Constantinople on that side from all force by Sea. 2. Cyzicus, seated in the Propontis, in an Island of the same name also, but so neer the Continent that it joyned to it by two bridges. The Metropolis of the Consular Hellespont, by consequence an Arch-Bishops See in the prosperous times of Christianity; as were all other Cities in the Roman Empire, which were the Mother-Cities or Metropoles of their severall Provinces. A town of wonderfull strength and beauty, when first known to the Romans, called therefore by L. Florus, the Rome of Asia: who gives this character also of it, Cyzicum nobilis civit as, arce, moenibus, portu, turri∣busq, marmorets Asiatica plagoe littora illustrat, that is to say, that the noble City of Cyzicum by the excellency or the Walls, Bulworks Haven, and Towers of Marble, doth beautifie and illustrate the Shores of Asia. Honoured amongst many other goodly and magnificent buildings with a glorious Temple, the pillars whereof being four Cubits thick, and fifty Cubits high, were each of one entire stone onely; the whole fabrick all of polished Marble, every stone joyned unto the other with a line of Gold. In vain be∣sieged by Mithridates in the time of his warre, who lost before it by the sword, pestilence and famin no sewer then 300000 men; and yet could not force it. Afterwards ruined by an Earthquake, the falling Sicknesse of the East, as before is said, it could never be restored to its former luster: the very ruines of it daily made more ruinous by transporting the stones and Marbles to Constantinople, for the Embelishing of that City. 3. Lampsacus on the same Propontis, in which the beastly god Priapus was worshipped in as beastly a figure: quem non denudo (as wittily Lactantius scoffeth it) ne quid appareat risu dignum; supposed to be the same with the Syrian or Phanecian Baal, so often mentioned in the Scriptures. For this and on some other reasons, Alexander had conceived against it such an high displeasure when he was in A∣sia, that he resolved to raze it to the very ground. And seeing Anaximenes coming to him as an Ambassa∣dour from the Town to obtain his favour, commanded him to hold his peace, and sware as by way of pre∣vention that he would deny whatsoever he requested of him: whereupon Anaximenes intreated him to de∣stroy the City, which now for his oaths sake he could not do; and so this wicked City at that time escaped. 4. Parium, so called, as some say, from Parius, the sonne of Jason 2 Colonie at first of the Milesians, of the Romans afterwards: Troas and this, the onely two Roman Colonies in all the Province. By Homer called Adrastia: as Lampsacus in the same Author is called Pityusa. More in the Land. are 5. Scepscis. 6. Hieragerme, both mentioned by Ptolomy, but of more antiquity then fame.

Chief Cities in MYSIA MAJOR or OLYMPENA, are 1. Dainta, in the North-parts not far from Olympus. 2. Apolloma, near a large Lake sacred to Apollo, in the same parts also. 3. Paloe Scepsis, or Scepsis Vetus, on a Bay of the Aegean Sea, joining upon Troas, or the Lesser Phrygia. 4. A∣dramyttium mentioned, Acts 27. where Saint Paul took ship to go to Rome. 5. Antandrus on the same Sea also, now called Saint Dimitri, named at first Cimmeris from the Gomerites or Cimmeritans here inhabiting (which sheweth that Mysia antiently was a part of Phrygia) afterwards Edonis, and at last

Antandeus, either because built or repaired rather by the men of Andros, an Island of the Aegean, spoken of before amongst the Cyclades; or because the Grecians having taken Polydorus the son of Priam, from the King of Thrace, received this City for his ransome, or rather in exchange for him as the word doth intimate. 5. Protoselene, on the same coast also. More in the land. 6. Proepemissus. 7. Tro∣senopols. 8. Alydda, of which little memorable. 9. Pergamus, the Regal City of this tract, situ∣ate in a goodly plain on the banks of the River Cycus, of a small Town or fortresle made a stately Ci∣ty by the Kings hereof, and beautified with an excellent Library containing 200000. Volumes; for the writing or transcribing whereof, Parchment was here first invented, which from hence to this day is called Pergnmenum. Here also were those costly hangings first invented which we now call Tapestrie; by the Romans called first Aulaea, from Aula, signifying a Hall; the Hall of Attalus King hereof (by whom invented) being the first room furnished and adorned herewith. Here was born Galen the famous Physic∣an, living very healthfully to the age of 140 yearsthis health preserved to so great age, by these means spe∣cially. 1. Never eating or drinking his fill. 2. Never eating any thing that was rawe; 3. Alwates carrying about him some sweet perfumes. Finally, this was one of the seven Churches to which Saint John writ his Revelation. For though it were originally a City of Mysia, yet being near unto the bor∣ders of Lydia, it was reckoned as a City of the Lydian Asia; within the limits whereof those seven Chareche were all comprehended.

As for the Kings hereof which flourished here for some ages in such wealth and splendour, they came but from a poor and obscure original. The first of them one Sphiletaerus, an Eunuch, belonging to Antigo∣nus one of the Great Alexanders greatest Captaines; and after his death to Lysimachus King of Thrace, by whem trusted with his money and accompts. Fearing the furie of his Master then grown old and ty∣rannous, he seized on the Castle of Pergamus, and therein on 90000 talents, which he offered with his service unto Seleucus the first King of Syria. But both Lysimachus and Seleucus dying shortly after, he kept the money to himself, and reigned in this City as an absolute King: leaving the Kingdome at his death to his Brother Eumenes, no better man then a poor Carter, till raised by the fortunes of this Eunuch. Eumenes furnished with money though of no great territory, was able by the Gaules and o∣ther Mercinaries; not only to preserve himself against the Syrian Kings who laid claim to his City, but al∣so to enlarge his bounds as he saw occasion. But the main improvement of this Kingdome happ'ned in the dales of Eumenes the second, the sonne of Attalus, the brother and Successour of this Eumenes: who be∣ing useful to the Romans in their warres against Philip of Macedon, and Antiochus the Great, King of Swir, was liberally rewarded by them with the Provinces of Lydia, Phrygia, Aeolis, Ionia, Troas, and both the Mysia's; which they had taken from Antiochus in the end of that warre. The rest of the affaires hereof till it fell in fine unto the Romans, taken here in this short Catalogue of

The Kings of Pergamus.

• A. M.
• 3668. 1. Philetaerus, the first King of Pergamus, of whom before. 20.
• 3688. 2. Eumenes, Brother, or as some say, the Brothers sonne of Philetaerus, vanquished Antio∣chus sirnamed Hierax, in a fight neer Sardis, and awed Seleucus Callinicus, both Kings of Syria. 22.
• 3710. 3. Autalus Brother of Eumenes, restored Ariarathes the Cappadocian to his Kingdome, and discomsited the Gaules, compelling them to keep themselves within the Countrey since na∣med Galatia. A Confederate of the Romans, and by them much courted.
• 3754. 4. Eumenes II. Sonne of Attalus gratified by the Romans with the spoiles of Antiochus. He was an hereditary Enemie to the Kingdome of Macedon, which he laboured the Romans to destroy, as in fine they did; and thereby finding no more use of these Pergamon Kings, be∣gan to grow to lesse liking with them.
• 3782. 5. Attalus II. Brother of Eumenes, to whom the Kingdome was offered by the Romans in the life of his Brother then lesse gracious with them; but he most gallantly refused it, to the great indignation of the Roman Senate.
• 3792. 6. Fumene; III. Brother of Attalus the second, and Tutor or P••otectour to his Nephew Attalus, in whose minority he governed the estate as King.
• 3813. 7. Attalus III. Sonne of Attalus the second, succeeded on the death of his Uncle Eumenes, and having held the Kingdome but five years onely deceased without issue, & bequeathed it by his last Will unto the Romans. But before the Romans had possession of so great a Legacy, Aristonicus the base Sonne of Eumenes made himself master of Mindus, Colophon, Samos, and many other Towns and estates hereof. Against whom the Romans making warre were aided by the greatest part of the Asian Kings; not seeing their own danger and destruction to draw neer unto them, by letting such a potent neigh∣bour come amongst them to undo them all. But the Romans got little by this warre, though they had the better of it. For being now made masters of the riches and sweets of Asia, they took with them their vices also: growing thereby to great riot, and unparallelled luxurie: which overcame the rigour and severity of their former discipline, and made them apt for faction, and those bloody quarrels, which proved the ruine of their State. So truly was it said by Justine, Sic Asia facta Romanorum, cum opibus suis vitia quoque sua Roman transmisit. This Kingdome taking it in the largest extent thereof being thus subdued and setled as a Roman Province., had the name of Asia, according to the name of the Greater Concinent; by P••o••omie and others called Asiapropria: continuing, under the subjection of the Roman Emperours till the translating of the Imperiall seat unto Constantinople; as after that unto the Emperours

• of the East, till conquered piece-meal by the Turks of the Selznccian family. Which being ended in the person of Aladine the second, those parts hereof which lay next Troas, made up the Kingdome of Ca∣rasan, or Carasa-Illi, as those which had been laid to the Greater Phrygia; made up the Ardintant; both of them swallowed up long since by the Ottoman Kings, the Accessories running the same fortune as the Principalls did.

11. ASIA SPECIALIVS DICTA.

BEsides the Proper Asia spoken of before, containing all the Provinces of the Pergamon Kingdome, there was one part hereof, which antiently had the name of Asia, before it was communicated to the great∣er Continent, or this whole Peninsula. This for distinctions sake the Romans called the PROCON∣SULAR ASIA; because committed to the government of one of their Proconsuls (who had his resi∣dence in Ephesus the principall City of this Province) together with the Consular Hellespont, and the Pro∣vince of the Isles of Asia. This we have spoken of before, as also how the Countrey lying about Ephe∣sus, had more especially the name of Asia, then any other: so specially that Erasmus thereupon in∣ferreth that by Asia in the New Testament, (but more peculiarly in the Acts) is meant that part of Asia in which Ephesus standeth.

This being agreed on for the name, we shall bound it on the East with Lydia, whereof it was antiently a part; on the West, with the Aegean Sea; on the North, with Mysia; and on the South, with Caria. And having so bounded it, we shall divide it into the two Regions of AEOLIS and IONIA: that of Aeolis lying on the North, towards Mysix; as Ionia doth upon the South, towards Caria: posses∣sed both of them by Greek Nations, and of them so named.

Principall Towns in AEOLIS, are 1. Acarnea, over against the Isle of Lesbos, the Royall seat sometimes of the Tyrant Hermias, who being once a Scholler of Aristotles but unworthy of so good a Master, seized on this City, and here committed so great cruelties, that at last he was taken by the people, sowed in an Oxes hide, and so baited to death. 2. Pitane, on a little River so named, falling into Ca∣icus, not farre from the influx or fall thereof into the Aegean: in which Town they had an Art of making bricks which would swimme on the water. 3. Elaea, on the mouth of Caicus, the Port-Town to Per∣gamus. 4. Myrina, afterwards in honour of Augustus., called Sebastopolis. 5. Cene, by Strabo called Cane, by Mela, Cannae, not farre from a Promontorie of the same name. 6. Cuma, the prin∣cipal and greatest of all Aeolis, the birth-place of Ephorus a learned man of elder times, and the habi∣tation of Sibylla sirnamed Cumana, to difference her from Sibylla Cumaea, so named from Cumae, a City of the Realme of Naples. 7. Phocaea, a Colonie of the Athenians, so named from the multitudes of Sea-Calves (the Greeks call them Phocae) which thrust themselves a shore at the building of it. The peo∣ple hereof over-bundened by the Persians, and impatient of so great servitude as was laid upon them; forsook their Countrey, binding themselves by a fearful oath, never more to return unto it: and after ma∣ny and long wanderings came at last into Gaule, where they founded the famous City of Marseilles.

The Inhabitants of this little Region are by Josephus said to be descended of Elisha the Sonne of Javan, who therefore calleth them by the name of Elisaei. And it is possible enough that so it was: Elisha being planted in Greece where he gave name to Elis, one of the Provinces of Peloponesus; from whence some of his race in succeeding times might passe over into Asia, and possesse those coasts. For that they were a Greek people is confessed by all; the Aeolick dialect or phrase of speech, taking name from hence. Not otherwise much mentioned in the course of story, then as partakers of the same fortunes with the rest of their Asian Neighbours before related, and so not necessary to be now repeated.

IONIA, as a larger tract, requires a more particular & punctuall description. For here the River Lycus falleth into the Maeander, and here Maeander and Caystrus, two of the most famous Rivers of Asia Minor: (of which more hereafter) fall into the Aegean. Here is the renowned City of Ephesus, ho∣toured with one of the worlds seven wonders, the long abode of Saint Paul, and the death and sepulture of Saint John; the Promontory Trogyllium, with a little Isle adjoyning of the same name, mentioned Acts 20. v. 15.

Principall Cities of this tract, are 1. Myas, on an anne of the Sea, assigned together with Lampsacw, and Magnesia, by Actaxerxes to Themistocles; when being banished his own Countrey he fled to his great∣est Enemie for entertainment; and there met with more safety then Athens would, and more honour then it could afford him: So that he well might say (as he often did) Periissem nisi periissem. And on the o∣ther side, the King was so overjoyed at his comming to him, (as having now upon his side the man who had most hindered him in the conquest of Greece) that many times in his sleep he was heard to clap his hands and say, Habeo Themistoclem Atheniensem. In after-times, the water drawing further off, the soyle brought forth such an innumerable multitude of fleas, that the inhabitants were faine to forsake the City, and with their bagge and baggage to retire to Miletus: Nothing hereof being left but the name and memory in the time of Pausan••as. 2. Erythra, memorable for the habitation of one of the Sibyle, from hence called Sihrlla Erythroea; of which Prophetesses we shall speak more when we come to Africk. 3. Le∣bedus, of most note in the elder-times for those publick Plaics, which were here annually held in the ho∣nour of Bacchus. 4. Clazomene, situate in a small Ilet, neer unto the shore, of much esteem amongst the Romans for the wines there growing; and no lesse honoured by the Asianus for a beautiful Temple of Apollo seated neer unto it. 5. Priene, the birth-place of Bias, one of the seven Wise-men of Greece. 6 Ipsus, renowed for the great battel betwixt Antigonus and Seleucus, two of Alexanders chiefe Commanders; the Victory wherein falling to Seleucus, with the death of his Adversary, estated him in all the Con∣quests

of his Master, except Egypt onely. 7. Teos the birth-place of Anacreon that lascivious and drunk∣en Poet, hence sirnamed Te••us; the Ovid of the Grecians both for wit and wantonnesse: of both which it may well be doubted whether the smoothnesse of the verse, or the wantonnesse of their expressions be the more predominant. 8. Smyrna, a faire and antient City, on a Bay thence named the Bay of Smyrna: the greatest part whereof lay towards the Sea, but the fairest on the side of an hill overlooking the waters. Destroyed by the Lydians, it was re-edified by Antigonus and Lysimachus, two of Alexanders great Commanders; of good accompt in the time of the Romans, and one of the seven Asian Churches, to which Saint John inscribed his Revelation: Much traded and frequented to this very day especially for Chamlets, Grograines, and such stuffes; made for the most part at Ancyra the Chief Town of Galatia, and here vended to the forreign Merchant. For government of the trade whereof, and of other commodities of these parts, the English Merchants have an Officer called the Consul of Smyrna. In old time there was in it amongst others, a goodly Temple, dedicated unto Homer, said to be born in this City, and to have writ his Poems in a Cave hard by. 9. Colophon, most memorable for the Inhabitants of it, so skilled in horse-man-ship, that the side on which they served in warre was sure of Victory; whereupon Co∣lophonem addere, to put a good end to any businesse, grew into a Proverb. It was also another of those Cities, which so ambitiously contended for the birth of Homer; of which there were seven in all, as the old Verses tell us, saying

Septem urbes certant de stirpe insignis Homeri Smyrna, Rhodos, Colophon, Salamis, Chios, Argos, Athenae.

Whether Homer purposely concealed his Countrey, that all places might challenge him for theirs, I am not able to say. But sure I am that Paterculus speaketh it in the commendation of Hesiodus (the next Greek Poet after him in course of time) that he had specified his birth-place: Qui vitavit ne in id quod Homerus inciderit, patriam & parentes testatus est. 10. Ephesus, the Metropolis of the Roman Asia, and the seat of the Primat of the Asian Diocese: memorable in the purest times of Christianity, for being the Episcopall See of Timothy the Evangelist, the first Bishop hereof. 2ly In that Saint Paul directed to the people of it, one of his Epistles; and 3ly for the buriall of Saint John the Apostle, who by some learned men of the elder times, is said to have gone alive into his Grave, and that he is not dead but sleeping; building that thought upon that saying which went abroad among the Brethre••, that that Disciple should not die. John 21. v. 23. And no lesse memorable amongst the Gentiles for that snmptuous and magnificent Temple here consecrated to Diana: which for the largenesse, furniture, and workmanship of it, was accompted one of the Wonders of the World. The length thereof said to be 425. foot, 220. foot in breadth, supported with 127. Pillars of Marble, seventy foot in height, of which twenty seven were most curiously engraver, and all the rest of Marble polished. The modell of it contrived by one Ctesiphon, and that with so much art and curiosity of Architecture, that it took up two hundred years before it was finished. When finished it was fired seven times, the last time by Erastrotus, onely to get himself a name: which hap'ning on the same night inwhich Alexander the Great was born, gave occasion to that weighty but witty scoffe, that Diana (she was counted one of the Godesses of midwifery) could not attend the preservation of her Temple, being then busied at the birth of so great a Prince.

As for those Iones, or Ionians, they were no doubt the descendants of Javan the fourth sonne of Japhet, as hath been shewn before in our generall Preface: but whether they came hither out of Graecia, or passed from hence into that Countrey, hath been made a question. The Athenians boasting of themselves to be Aborigines, men growing as it were out of the Soile it selfe, without any Ancestors, report that those Ionians were a Colonie of their Plantation. But Hecataeus in Strabo doth affirm the contrary, Saying that the Athenians or Iones of Greece, came from those of Asia: for that Attica was antiently called Ionia, Plutarch in the life of Theseus doth declare expresly. Most probable it is, that Hecataeus was in the right; these parts of Asia lying so directly in the way from the vallyef Shinaar unto Greece, that Javan may very well be thought to leave some of his company here, when he ferried the rest over to the opposite Continent. I know Pansani as ignorant of their true antiquity, deriveth them from Ien the sonne of Xu∣thus and grandchild of Deucali••n: wherein he came so neer the truth, though he missed the men, that it was the grand-son of that man who escaped the flood, from whom both the Athenians, and those Ionians had their true Originall. In regard of which relations betwixt the Nations, the Athenians gave aide to those Ionians against the Persians, who on the overthrow given to Croesus, pretended to the Lordship or Domini∣on of Asia, and conquered them in the time of Cyrus, the first Persian Monarch. Upon which ground, and the sending of fresh aid to them upon their revolt in the time of Darius, that King first undertook the invasion of Greece.

After this yielding to the times they followed the fortune of the strongest, subject successively to the Persians, Macedonians, Romans, Constantinopolitans, and Turks; till the death of Aladine before mentioned: when both Aeolis and Ionia got a new name, and are now called Sarcan, from Sarachan a Turkish Captain, who on the death of that Aladine seized upon this Countrey, and erected here a petit Kingdome long since subdued by those of the race of Ottoman.

12. LYDIA.

LYDIA is bounded on the East with Phrygia Ma••or, and some part of Pisidia, from which separated by a branch of the Mountain Taurus; on the West, with Aeolis and Ionia, or Asia speci∣ally so called; on the North, with the Greater Mysia; on the South, with Caria. So called from Lud the Sonne of Sem, by some of whose posterity it was first inhabited. In the full Latitude and extent there∣of,

as antiently comprehended in Aeolis and Ionia, the adjoining Provinces, it made the Lydian Asia spoken of before; within the verge whereof all the seven Churches were contained, mentioned by Saint John in the Revelation.

The people of this Countrey are said to have been the first coyners of money, the first Hucksters and Ped∣le••s, and the first inventers of dice, ball, chesse, and the like games: necesity and hunger thereunto enforcing them, according to that of Persius, Ar••is Magister, ingenii{que} largitor venter. For being sorely vext with famine, in the time of Atis, one of the progenitors of Omphale; they devised these games; and every second day playing at them, beguiled their hungry bellies. Thus for 22 years, they continued playing and eating by turns: but then seeing that themselves were more fruitfull in getting and bearing children, then the s••ile in bringing forth sustenance to maintaine them: they sent a Colony into Italy under the con∣duct of Iyrrhenus, the Sonne of A••is, who planted in that Countrey, called at first Tyrrhenia, and afterward Tuscany.

This Countrey was also called Moeonia, and was thought to have been the native soile of Homer, in regard that Colophon and Smyrna, two of the seven contending Cities, and those which seem to have most colour for their claime, were antiently accounted as parts of Lydia, as was said before. Hence Homer hath the name of Moenides, and Moeonitus Vates: and in some Authors, Carmen Moeontum is used for Homers Poeticall abilities, as Carmine Moeonio consurgere, in Ovid. Bacchus is also called sometimes by the name of Moeonius, but for a very different reason; viz. because antiently there were no Trees in all this Countrey, but the Vine onely.

Principall Mountaines of this Countrey are 1. Sipylus, and 2. Tmolus; this last of most accompt in regard of the great fruitfulnesse of it, covered over with Vines, and yielding abundance of the best Saffron. Cinefe Rivers of it are 1. Hermus, which rising out of Phrygia Major, passeth onely by the skirts hereof, and so falleth into a fair Bay of the Aegean, opening towards the Isle of Clazomene. 2. Pactolus, which rising at the foot of mount Tmolus, falleth not long after into Hermus; famous amongst the Poets for its golden sands. 3. Caystrus, no lesse notable for the abundance of Swans, which swim thereon, whose fountain is in Phrygia Major also neer the borders hereof; and his fall in the Aegean also over against the Isle of Samos. 4. Maeander, which rising out of a branch of the Taurus in the furthest parts of the said Phrygia, towards Lycaonia, passeth by Magnesia, and endeth his course in the same Sea, neer the City of 〈◊〉〈◊〉. A River famous for its many turnings in and out, 600 at the least, as Prusaeus counteth them. Of which in generall thus the Poet

Quique recurvatis, ••lud it Maeander in undis. Maeander plaies his watry pranks, In his so many winding banks.

The Countrey by reason of these Rivers was exceeding fruitfull, abounding in all sorts both of wealth and pleasures, well cultivated and manured above ground, and under-neath inriched with prodigall veines of Gold and Silver, and some precious gemmes. Which made the people, after their overthrow by Cyrus, to become more sensuall and voluptuous and lesse sit for action, then any plot of their new Masters could have brought them to; had not the naturall delicacies of the Soyle it self, contributed to the advancement of their design. And yet before, they were sufficiently infamous for their luxury, and excesse of riot, when between in warres: so that it is a marvel they were able to prevaise on the neighbour Nations, and bring then under their command; as in the times of some of Croesus Predecessors it is said they did. Unlesse perhaps they did participate of the temper of Moecenas, the great favorite of Augustus Caesar, of whom Paereulus hath left this Character: ubires vigiliam exigeret erat sane insomnis, providens, & agendi 〈◊〉〈◊〉 simul ••e aliquidex negotio remitti possit, otio ac mossite penè ultra foeminam fluens. No man more vigilant then he in times of businesse, nor woman more effeminate in his times of leisure.

Principall Cities of this Countrey were 1. Sardis, on both sides of Pactolus, the seat Royall of Croe∣su•• and the Kings of Lydia; till the conquest of Lydia by the Persian. After which time, being taken by the Grecians it so startled Xerxes, that he commanded one of his Attendants, to say aloud every day whilest to was at dinner, that the Grecians had taken Sardis; continuing that Memento till it was recovered. Which course (I note this onely by the way) was commonly observed in the Parliaments of France, as long as Calice did remain in the hands of the English; and might be profitably revived till again recovered from the French. Overthrown by a most terrible Earth-quake, (to which disease most of these Asian Cities have been very much subject,) it was re-edified again at the cost of Tiberius; continuing long after the Metropolis of this Province, and one of the Seven Churches of the Lydian Asia, of which the holy Spirit took such speciall notice. The others (besides Pergamus, already mentioned in the Greater Mysia, and Ephesus, and Smyrna, in the Proper Asia) were 20 Philadelphia neer or on the banks of the River Caystrus the second City in accompt next to Sardis it selfe: and honoured with the dignity of a Metropolitan as appeareth by the Acts of the Constantinopolitan Council, where Eustathius Bishop hereof doth subscribe himselfe, 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, Bishop of the Metropolis of Philadelphia, in the Province of Lydia. 3. Thiatyra, honoured with the same privilege also, as appears by the constant Order observed as well in the Civill as Ecclesiasticall Catologues of the Cities belonging to this Province. The reason whereof (for otherwise it was contrary to the practise both of Church and State, to have in one Province more then one Metropolis) was the respect had to those severall Churches in regard of their primi∣tive antiquity, and the foundation of them by Saint John the Apostle, as it was generally believed. 4. Lariaicea, by Ptolomy placed amongst the Cities of this Province, as it stood in his time, and before: but afterwards laid by Constantine to the Greater Phrygia, and made the Metropolis thereof (which honour 〈◊〉〈◊〉 had before enjoyed) it being well observed by Strabo, that the Romans did not dispose of their

Provinces according to Nations; 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, but according to those districts or Circuits, in which they kept their Courts of justice. Next unto these, there were of especiall consideration, 5. Magnesia ad Maeandrum, so called because situate on that River, to difference it from 6. Magnesia penes Sipylum montem, another of the same name neer the hill Sipylus. The first asigned over to Themistocles together with Myus and Lampsacus, as was said before. The other memorable for the great battell fought neer unto it, betwixt Antiochus and the Romans: the losse whereof falling unto Antiochus, occasioned the losse of all his Asian Provinces on this side of Taurus and the payment of 15000 talents for the charge of the warre, besides some other hard conditions then impo∣sed upon him. 7. Alabanda, opposite to Magnesia on the other side of Maeander, the people whereof, immediatly on the overthrew of Antiochus, not onely sent Ambassadors to Rome to congratulate with them, as many other Nations did, but built a Temple to it, and appointed Anniversary Games to be celebra∣ted in the honour of that new-made Godesse. A thing more to be wondered at in the Roman Senate for recei∣ving, than in this poor people for bestowing on their City, so divine an honour. 8. Trallis, on the banks of Caystrus, to the Inhabitants whereof, Ignatius that Reverend Bishop, and godly Martyr, writ the E∣pistle ad Trallenses.

That the Lydians were derived from Lud the Sonne of Sem, is testified by the general consent of such antient writers, as treat of the dispersions of the Sonnes of Noah: to which opinion the nearnesse of the names of Lud, Ludin, and Lydi (or 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, as the Grecians call them) seems to give good countenance. Nor shall I here dispute it further, as a point unquestioned: the tale of Lydus, I know not what Noble∣man that should name this Countrey, being taken up amongst the Greeks for want of more certain truths. Once setled here, they grew up suddenly to a Kingdome; Amongst the Antient Kings whereof are num∣bered Manes as the first, Cotis, and Atis, and then Asius (from whom Lydia first, and after all the Continent, had the name of Asia) as his immediate Successors. After them I find mention of one Cam∣bletes, said by Athenaeus to be so great a Gourmandizer, that in his sleep he eat his wife; and finding her hand in his mouth next morning, slew himself for shame: and of another named Andramytes, as in∣famous for his filthy lusts as Cambletes for gluttony. But the race of these Kings ending in Omphale the Mistresse of Hercules, who made that valiant Champion spinne amongst her Damosels; the Heraclidae or posterity of Hercules succeeded next: of whom there is no constant and continued succession till the time of Ardisius the nineteenth in order of that line, who began his reign not long before the building of the City of Rome. Under his successors the affaires hereof so exceedingly prospered, especially under Haliattes the Father of Croesus, that Phrygia, Bithynia, Paphlagonia, Mysia, Caria, Aeolis, Doris, and Ionia, acknowledged themselves Vassalls to this Crown: conceived both in wealth and power to be e∣quall to the Aegyptian, Babylonian, or Median Kingdomes, till the Conquest of Syria and Aegypt, by Nabuchadnezzer, gave him the preheminence. But being come unto the height it received a fall in the person of Croesus the Successour of him who so much advanced it. The Kings hereof from the time of the said Ardisius, take in order following.

The Kings of Lydia.

• A. M.
• 3190. 1. Ardisius. 36.
• 3226. 2. Haliactes. 14.
• 3240. 3. Melos, who overcame the people of Sardis. 12.
• 3252. 4. Candaules, who shewing his wife naked to Gyges, was by him slain; who marying his wife, succeeded him in his Kingdome. The whole story is this. Candaules had to his wife a woman of unparallell'd beauty; And supposing the greatnesse of his happinesse, not to con∣sist so much in his own fruition, as the notice which others might take of it, intended to shew her in natures bravery to Gyges the master of his heards. Gyges at first disswaded him from an at∣tempt so foolish: but seeing no perswasion could prevaile, he condescended. When he had seen the naked Queen, and was ready to depart, Candanles cryed to him, Esto fidelis, Gyges: which words the Queen marking, and seeing the back of Gyges as he left the chamber, the next morning sent for him. When holding a poynyard in her hand, she gave him his choise, either presently to be slaine, or else to kill the King and take her to wife, with the Kingdome for her Dower. Of which two evils he made choice of that which he thought the best, and so killed Candaules.
• 5. Gyges the first of this new line, added Ionia to his other dominions. A Prince of so great wisdome, for the times he lived in, that all other Kings his neighbours sate as (it were) in the light to him; and he as in the dark to them: occasioning thereby the fiction of a Ring he had, by which made invisible, when and as often as he pleased.
• 3305. 6. Ardis II. the Sonne of Gyges. 37.
• 3342. 7. Sardiattes. 15.
• 3357. 8. Haliactes II. of whom before. 57.
• 3406. 9. Croesus the last King of Lydia, subdued Doris, and Aeolis; after which victories, he was overcome by Cyrus King of Persia: in which battell, a Sonne of Croesus who had been dumb from his cradle, seeing a Souldier ready to kill his father, suddenly broke out into these words, Rex est, cave ne occîdas. After this overthrow, and the captivity of Croe∣sus (one of the richest Kings that ever was of old) Lydia was made a Persian Province, A. M. 3420.

The 〈◊〉〈◊〉 after this rebelled, but being again subdued, Cyrus bereaved them of all their horses of 〈◊〉〈◊〉 dispoyled them of all their armour, and trained them up in all manner of loose and effeminate 〈◊〉〈◊〉 weakening by this means a powerful Nation, which before that time had not onely maintained its own liberty, but awed all the Provinces adjoining. After this they continued Persian till the Conquest of 〈◊〉〈◊〉 by the Macedonians, in the division of whose spoiles they fell to the portion of Seleueus and the Kings of Syria: following the common fortune of the rest of this Asia, till they came under the power of the Romans. Made by them one of the Provinces of their Empire; it had the Lower Mysia, or Mysia Olympen•• annexed unto it: by means whereof the limits of each became so confounded, that the Towns and Cities of the one are many times ascribed to the other. In the falling of the Eastern Empire it was made (as all the rest of Anatolia) a prey to the Turks: that part of it which lieth next to Aeolis, subject to the Carausian Family; as the other part towards the Phrygia Major were to the Aidinian; of which before.

13. CARIA.

CARIA is bounded on the East, with Lycia; on the North, with Lydia and Ionia; on the West, with the Icarian or Aegean Sea; and on the South, with the Carpatian. So called from Cares the Sonne of Phoroneus King of Argos, once the Lord hereof; Who is said to have invented the Science of Divination by the flying of Birds, called Augury, though others ascribe it to the Phrygians.

In this Countrey is the Hill called Latmus, the dwelling or rather retiring place of Endymion, who being much addicted to the study of Astronomy, found out the changes and courses of the Moon, and is therefore by the Poets feigned to have been her Paramour. Others adde, that Jupiter hid him him in a cave under this Hill, and cast him into a dead sleep; (which notwithstanding, she descended sometimes to kiss him) whence came the old By-word, of Endymionis somnium dormit. Here is also in this Countrey the River Salmacis, said to inseeble all such as either drink of it, or bath in it: from whence the Poets raise their fiction of Salmacis and Hermaphroditus described by Ovid; and the Proverb of Salmacida spolia sine sanguine & sudore, mentioned by Tully in his book of Offices, and there used for effeminate and wan∣ton exercises.

Places of most note in it, 1. Miletus, not far from the hill Latmus, the birth-place of Thales one of the seven wife-men of Greece, from hence called Milesius, and the Mother of no fewer than 75. (or as Pliny faith of 80.) Colonies, dispersed in severall places of Greece and Asia; antiently honoured with the Oracle of Apollo surnamed Didymoeus, whose Temple being burnt by Xerxes, was again rebuilt by the ••Milisians, to so vast a greatness that it remained without roof, compassed about with a Grove, and dwelling houses, and sumptuously ser out with costly workmanship. This is that Mileties mentioned Acts XX. to which Saint Paul called together the Bishops of Ephesus, and other the adjoining Cities, ab Epheso & reliquis proximis Civitatibus, faith Saint Irenoeus the renowned Bishop of Lions, Lib. 3. cap. 14. Antiently it was called Lelegis and Anactoria. 2. Mindus, which being but a small Town, had so great Gates, that Diogenes the Cynick cryed out and said, Ye men of Mindus take heed that your Ci∣ty run not out at your Gates. 3. Heraclea ad Latmum, so called because situate at the foot of that Mountain, to difference it from many others of that name. 4. Borgylia, or Borgylos, as Plinie calleth it, where antiently Diana had another Temple, though not to be compared to that of Ephesus. 5. Mi∣lisa, in old times famous for two Temples sacred unto Jupiter; the way to which for 60 furlongs was paved with stone for the easier travelling of Pilgrims, and the better ordering of Procession; the principall of the Citizens serving there as Priests, which office they held unto their deaths. 7. Primassus, me∣morable for the Stratagem by which it was taken by Philip of Macedon, the Father of Perseus. Who meaning to force it by Maine, and finding the earth so stony that it would not work, commanded the Pyoneers notwithstanding to make a noise under the ground, and caused great mounts of rubbish to be raised secretly in the night at the mouth of the Mine, as if the work went very well forwards: At last he sent word unto the Towns-men, that two parts of their wall stood only upon wooden props, to which if he gave fire, they should find no mercy; which heard, the Citizens yielded up the Town unto him. So use∣full in the Art of warre is a piece of wit, that it prevailes sometimes more than Mines or Batteries.

In the South-west of this Province, thrusting it self into the Sea like a spacious Promontory, stands the Countrey of DORIS, so called of the Dores, a Greek people, who there inhabited. The prin∣cipal Cities whereof were, 1. Cnidus, not farre from a foreland or Promontory of the same name, fa∣mous of old times for the marble Image of Venus, called hence Dea Cnidia. 2. Cressa, a noted Haven∣Town in the time Ptolomy. 3. Halicarnassus (now called Nesi) the birth-place of Herodotus, and Dtonysius named hence Halicarnasseus; two famous Historians: and the seat-Royall of Artemisia Queen of the Carians, (called from hence sometimes the Queen of Harlicarnassus,) who in the honour of her husband Mausolus, built a stately monument, accounted one of the worlds seven wonders; of which thus Martiall, speaking of the Roman Amphitheatre erected by Domitian••

Aere nec vacuo pendentia Mausolaea Laudibus immodicis Cares ad astra ferant.

That is to say,

Mausolus tomb filling the empty Aire, Let not the Carians praise beyond compare.

That the Carians were so called from Cares the sonne of Phoroneus, King of Argos, hath been said

before. But Bochartus will rather have them so called from Car; which in the Phoenician language sig∣nifieth a Sheep or a Ram; with numerous flocks whereof they did once abound. And this may seem more probable, in regard that the Ionians, next neighbours to Caria, borrowing this word from the Phoenicians, called sheep by the name of Cara; 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 faith Hesrchius, the old Gra∣marian. But from whomsoever they had their name, certain it is they were a very warlike people, 〈◊〉〈◊〉 morun pugnae{que} amans (saith Pomponius Mela) ut aliena etiam bella appeterent; who when they had no warres at home, would seek out for action. A little before the time of Xerxes, Mausolus reigned here, whose wife Artemisia (lately mentioned) aided that King in his undertakings against Greece. After∣wards in the time of Alexander the Great, we meet with Ada Queen hereof, who aided him against the Persians, adopting him for her Sonne and Successour. Subject after her decease to the Macedonians, it followed the same fortune with the rest of these Provinces till the defeat of Antiochus neer Magnesia; in the division of whose spoiles it was given to the Rhodians: incorporated not long after to the State of Rome, and made a Province of the Empire. Wrested from the Eastern Emperours by the Turkes of the Selzuccian Family; the greatest part hereof, on the death of Aladine 2d. was raised unto a petit Kingdome by the name of Mentesia, so called from Mendos (or Mindus) the chief City of it, the residue being laid to the Caraman Kingdome, both long ago subdued by the Ottoman Family: that of Mentesia by Ma∣home! surnamed the Great, who dispossessed Elias the last Prince thereof, Anno 1451.

LYCIA.

LYCIA is bounded on the East, with Pamphylia; on the West, with Caria; on the North, with parts of Lydia and Phrygia Major; on the Sauth, with the Mediterrenean Sea. Environed on three sides with the Mountain Taurus, which part it from the Countries above mentioned; by consequence na∣turally strong, aud not very accessible: the Sea, for the space of twenty miles shutting up the fourth. And here it is to be observed, that besides this, there was a litle Region of the same name, not far from Troy, not much observed by our Geographers either old or new: but mentioned sometimes by the Peets; as in Virgill Aeneid. 4. Qualis ubi hybernan Lyciam, Xanthique fluenta deserit, &c. which is meant plainly of the Phrygian or Trojan Lycia: the word hyberna being added because of its Northern situation in respect of this.

The People hereof were sometimes called Xanthi, from Xanthus the chief River hereof, which rising in two springs from the foot of mount Cadmus, passeth by a Town called Xanthus also, and falleth into the Sea. But generally they were called Lycii, and the Councrey Lycia, from Lycius the sonne of Pandion King of Athens; who either conquered them, or did some memorable Act amongst them, which deserved that honour.

The principall Mountain of this Countrey, and indeed of Asia, is the Mountain Taurus, which hath his beginning in this Province, extending Eastward to the great Orientall Ocean: of which somewhat hath been said already, and more is to be said hereafter, when these hils are grown unto the greatest. One of the branches of it, and the most notable in this Countrey, is that called Chimoera, vomiting flames of fire like Cicilian Aetna: the bottom whereof was infested with Serpents, the midle parts grazed upon by Goats, and the higher parts made dangerous by the dens of Lions. Hence by the Poets made a Monster, having the head of a Lion, the body of a Goat, and the taile of a Serpent; according unto that of Ovid in his Me∣tamorphosis.

Quoque Chimaera iugo mediis in partibns Hyrcum, Pectus & ora Leo, caudam Serpentis habebat.

In English thus,

Chimaera from a Goat her mid-parts takes From Lions head and breast, her tail from Snakes.

This dangerous Mountain was first planted and made habitable by the care of Bellerophou, a noble Greci∣an, who is therefore fabled by the Poets to have killed this Monster; employed upon this business by Jo∣bares the King of Lycia, to whom he had been sent by Proetus King of Argos who was jealous of him; and sent with letters to require that King to kill him. Whence came the saying, Bellerophontis liter as portare; applied to those, who were unawares imployed do carry letters tending to their own destruction: such as those carried by Vriah, to Joab the Generall, by command of David.

This Countrey was so populous, that antiently there were reckoned threescore Cities in it, of which six and thirty remained in the time of Saint Paul; now nothing left of them but the names and ruins. Those of chief note were, 1. Myra, the Metropolis of Lycia, when a Roman Province; by consequence an Arch∣Bishops See, when Christian. St. Nicholas one of the Bishops hereof in the primitive times, is said to have been a great Patron of Scholars: his festivall annually holden on the sixt of December, is celebrated in the Church of Rome with several pastimes; and still in some Schools here in England (as in that of Burford in the County of Oxon (where I had my breeding and my birth) for a feast and a play-day. Of this City there is mention Acts 27. v. 5. 2. Telmesus, the Inhabitants whereof were famous for South-saying, and accounted the first Interpreters of Dreams. 3. Patara, or Patras, (formerly called Sataros) beau∣tified with a fair Haven and many Temples; one of them dedicated to Apollo with an Oracle in it, for wealth and credit equall unto that of Delphos. 4. Phaselis, on the Sea-side also, a nest of Pirates in the times of the Reman greatness, by whom then haunted and enriched, as Algiers is now: but taken by Servilius, a Roman Captain, at such time as Powpey scowred the Seas. And unto the Pirates of this Town the former Ages were indebted, for the first invention of those swift Vessels, which the Romans cal∣led

a Phaselus, by the name of the Town; we may render it a Brigantine. 5. Cragus, with a Moun∣tain of the same name thrusting out eight points or Promontories neer to the Chimoera. 6. Rhodia, or Rho∣diopolis as Plinie calleth it, most probably the foundation of the neighbouring Rhodians. 7. Solyma, on the borders hereof towards Pisidia; the people of which were conquered and added unto Lycia by the sword of Bellerophon, whom Jobares, with a minde to kill him according to the request of Poetus, imployed in that service. 8. Corydalla, neer the Mountain called Masigrum, the Massycites of Plinie. 9. Poda∣lea, the chief Town of Mylias; as 11. OEnoanda is of OEbalia, two little Regions in this Countrey.

The Lycians were in former times a puissant people, extending their power upon the Seas, as far as Italy Subjected to the Persian not without great difficulty; the people with such obstinacy defending their liber∣ty, that some of them being besieged by Harpagus, Licutenant unto Cyrus the first Persian Monarch, they first burnt their wives, children, servants, and riches, in a common fire; and then made a furious sal∣ly upon the Enemy, by whom put all unto the sword. To Alexoender in his march this way towards Per∣sia, they submitted without any resistance. After whose death, they fell with the rest of these parts in∣to the hands of Seleucus. On the defeat of Antiochus at the battel of Magnesia, it was given to the Rhodians, for their assistance in that warre; but governed as a free estate by a Common Council of fourteen Senators, elected out of their principall Cities: over whom was one chief President or Prince of the Senate whom they called by the name of Lyciarchus. In these remained the sole power of imposing taxes, mak∣ing warre, and peace, appointing Justiciaries and inferiour Magistrates, and all things appertaining to the publick government. A shadow of which power they retained when brought under the Romans, and a sha∣dow onely: the Supreme power being no longer in the Senate of Lycia, but in that of Rome. Nor had their Ly∣ciarchus any thing but an empty name, and the vain privilege or ordering and disposing the publique games, wherein by his office he presided. When made a Province of the Empier, it had the same fortune as the others had till it fell into the power of the Turks: after the death of the second Aladine made a part of the Kingdome of Caramania; of which more anon.

15. LYCAONIA.

LYCAONIA is bounded on the East, with Armenia Minor, from which parted by a branch of the Mountain Taurus; on the West, with the Greater Phrygia; on the North, with Cappadocia; and on the South, with Pisidia. So called from the Lycaones a people of Lycia, or from the Lycaonians Inhabitants of Lycaonia a Town of Phrygia Major, who inlarging themselves into these parts, gave this name unto it. Either of which I should prefer before their conceit who derive it from Lycaon King of Arcadia, dispossessed by Jupiter of that Kingdome; or think that Lycaon was a King of this Countrey, and not of that.

Places of most note herein, 1. Iconium (now Cogni) the Metropolis hereof when a Roman Pro∣vince; a place of great strength and consequence, situated advantagiously in the Mountains for defence and sarety, and therefore chosen for the seat of the Turkish Kings in Lesser Asia, at such time as they were most distressed by the Western Christians; who under the command and presence of the Emperour Conrade did in vain besiege it; forced to depart thence with great loss both of men and honour. Afterwards made the Seat-Royall of the Aladine Kings, the former race being extingnished by the Tartars, and final∣ly of the Kings of the house of Caraman, whose Kingdome, called the Kingdome of Caramania, con∣tained all the South-parts of the Lesser Asia, that is to say, part of the Province of Caria, all Lycia, Pam∣phylia, Isauria, Cilicia, Pisidia, and this Lycaonia. 2. Lystra••, the birth place of Timothy the E∣vangelist, where Paul and Barnab as having miraculously healed a Cripple were adored as Gods, and not long after on the instigation of some Jews, which came down from Antioch and Iconium, most despiteful∣ly treated; Paul being stoned into the bargain, though it pleased God, to raise him to life again, Acts 14. v. 19, 20. Such was the divine pleasure of Almighty God, that he that did consent to the stoning of Saint Stephen the Protomartyr, and took charge of the Cloaths of his Executioners, should suffer in the same kind wherein he had-trespassed, and feel some smart remembrance of his former Actions. 3. Derbe, honoured by the preaching of the said Apostles. 4. Laranda, so called by Ptolomy, and still preserving its old name; the second place for reputation next unto Iconium. 5. Adopissus. 6. Paralais. 7. Canna. 8. Caratha, with others named by Ptolomy, but not els observable.

Nor indeed were the Lycaonians themselves, from whomsoever they descended, of any great note or ob∣servation in the former times: subject to Cappadocia when it was a Kingdome, and reckoned as part of it in the time of Ptolomy, when made a Province of the Empire. Dismembred from it by some of the fol∣lowing Emperours: either to create new Offices and preferments for some Court-favourite; or to satisfie the ambition of some Prelates, aspiring to the dignity of a Metropolitan; it was made a Province of it self. Tom from the Empire by the Turks, it was at first a member of the Selzuccian Kingdome, as afterwards of the Caramanian. Which last founded by Caraman a great Prince of the Turks, on the death of Aladine the second, the last King of the Selzuccian Family, was a great eye-sore unto those of the house of Ottoman, from the time of Amurath the first, who first warred upon it, to the reign of Boejazet the second, who in fine subverted it, Anno 1486. as shall be shewn hereafter when we come to Cicilia; the last of the Provinces of that Kingdome, in the course of this work.

16. PISIDIA.

PISIDIA, hath on the East, Armenia Minor; on the West, some parts of Lycia and Phry∣gia Ma••or; on the North, Lycaonia; on the South, Pamphylia, and some part of Cilicia; from which parted by the main body of Mount Taurus. So called from the Pisidoe, the Inhabirants of it; but the rea∣son of their name I find not amongst my Authors.

The Countrey small, but furnished with great plenty of all provisions, as appeareth by that passage of Livie, where speaking of the expedition of Marlius unto these parts, he telleth us that he came into the fields of Sagalassa (one of the Cities hereof) being of a rich soyl, and plentifull of all manner of fruit. Inde∣ventume est (saith he) in agrum Sagallassarum, uberem fertilem{que} omni genere frugum. But this to be understood onely of the plains and champain; the mountainous parts hereof, being (like others of that nature) poor and barren.

Towns of most observation in ir, 1. Antioch, the Metropolis hereof, when a Province of the Ro∣man Empire, called for distictions sake Antiochia Pisidioe, mention of which is made Acts 4. and of the Jews Synagogue therein, honoured by Saint Pauls preaching, the summe of whose divine Sermon is there repeated. Built by Seleucus the first King of Syria of the Macedon race, and by him so called in honour of his Father Antiochus. 2. Seleucia, the foundation of the same Seleucus, called also to distinguish it from others of that name, Seleucia Pisidioe. 3. Lysinnia, on the borders hereof towards Phrygia. 4. Selge a Colonie of the Lacedemonians. 5. Sagalassa, situate in the most fruitfull part of all this Coun∣trey, as appears by that of Livie before mentioned. 6. Cremna, which onely had the honour of a Roman Colonie. 7. Termessus strongly situate in the Straits of the Mounts; the hilly Countrey about which hath the name of Milyes. 8. Olbanassa. 9. Plutanessus, of which little me∣morable.

As for these Piside, they were originally descended of the Solymi, Inhabitants of the borders of Lycia. A valiant People, and so affirmed to be by Livie, who calleth them longé optimos bello. Nor did he speak it without cause, this small Nation holding out against the Persians, and not conquered by them, when their great neighbours were subdued. Against these, Cyrus the brother of Artaxerx Mn••∣mon King of Persia did pretend a quarrell, as if they had trespassed on the borders of his Province. Which though perhaps they had not done, yet this gave him good occasion to leavy an Army, pretending revenge on them; but intending to dispossess his brother of the Persian Monarchy: but Tisaphernes Lieutenant to the King in Asia, seeing greater preparations than were sufficient to oppose the weak Pisidians, made the King acquaint∣ed with his suspitions; who accordingly provided for resistance. The Army of Cyrus consisting of 12000 Grecians, and 100000 Persians: the Kings forces were no fewer than 900000 fighting men. They met at Cunaxa, not far from Babylon, where Cyrus lost both the victory and his life. The Grecians, who had made their side good, and stood in honourable terms of composition, being by Tisaphernes betrayed, lost the best of their company. The rest under the conduct of Xenophon, made safe retreat home in despight of 200000 men which followed at their heels. This Xenophon, was an agent in, and the historian of this expedition: by whose example the Spartans first, and after them the Macedonians, were encouraged to attempt the conquest of Persia. But to return to these Pisidians, they fell with others of their neighbours, under the power of the Macedonians, and were made part of the Dominion of Seleucus. Abandoned by Antiochus to the will of the Romans, and setled in obedience by the Military progress of Manlius, spo∣ken of before; they were in Prolomies time annexed to Pamphylia, as a part thereof. Afterwards made a distinct Province of it self, and so continued till those parts of the Eastern Empire were subdued by the Turks: first part of the Selzuccian, and Aladinian Kingdomes, after of the Kingdome of Cara∣mania; whereof more anon.

17. PAMPHYLIA.

PAMPHYLIA, is bounded on the East, with Isauria and Cilicia; and on the West, with Lycia, from which parted by a branch of the Taurus; on the North, with Pisidia, separated from it by the main body of that Mountain; and on the South, with the Mediterranean Sea, which in those parts which lie next to it is called Mare Pamphylium. The reason of the name I find not, unless we think with Metaphrastes that it was so named, quod ex omnibus gentibus conflata esset, because inhabited by a mixture of many Nations: for so Pamphylia in the Greek tongue doth expresly signifie. And probable enough it is, that lying neer unto the Sea with an open shore, opposite to Africk, neer Sy∣ria, and not far from Greece, severall Nations from those parts might repair unto it; and from thence the name.

The Countrey for the most part is very mountainous, over-run with the Branches of Mount Taurus; but those branches feed great store of Goats, of whose hair are made abundance of Chamlets and Grograines, not inferiour unto Silks for fineness. Towards the Sea, which for the space of a hun∣dred and fifty Miles coasts along this shore, more pleasant, populous and fruitfull; well watered, and as well planted. The principall Rivers hereof, being 1. Cataractus. 2. Cestrus, and 3. Eurymed••n;

Nigh to which last, Cimon the sonne of Hilliades, Captain Generall of the Athenian Army, overthrew in one day both the Sea and Land Forces of the Persians. The manner thus: Having by plain force bick their Navy, of which he took and sunk no fewer than forty Ships and three thousand Gallies, he stowed the Persian Vessels with his best men, attired in the habit, and wearing the Colours of the Persians in the tops of their Ships. In their approach the Camp was opened, and all prepared to entertain their victorious Countrey-men: but the Greeks once in suddenly put them to the sword, and took twenty thousand of them Prisoners.

Principall Cities of it, 1. A••talia, founded by Ptolomy Philadelpus King of Egypt, and for long time the greatest and most flourishing Citie of all this Province; well fenced, and seated very commodious∣ly for Trade, on a very fair Bay, now called Golfo di Sattalia, by the name of the Town but little alte∣red. And though the Romans did conferr the honour of the Metropolitan City upon Aspendus; yet still Artalia had the start in point of riches; and is to this day a wealthy and well traded Empory, the weal∣their for the fair Tapestries which are herein made. Of this Town their is mention Acts 14. v. 25. 2. Perge, famous in old times for a Temple of Diana, and the yearly festivals there held in honour of her; from hence called Diana Pergaea more famous in the fulness of time for Saint Paul's preaching in it, mentio-Acts 14. v. 25. 3. Side, renowned in times of Gentilism, for a Temple of Pallas. 4. Magydis, on the Sea-side, not far from Side. 5. Aspendus, an inland Town, but strongly situate; made the Metro∣polis of the Province in the time of the Romans; remarkable for the Fidlers or Musitians of it, who with one hand both held their Harps and plaid upon them, keeping the other free for more gainfull uses; whence the Proverb of Aspendus Citharista, an Aspendian Harper, by which they signified a Theef. The Town first founded by the Argines, the Colonie sent thither being led by Mopsus, from whom the Countrey hereabouts had the name of Mopsia. 6. Olbia, not far from Attalia. 7. Caracensium, and 8. Colobrassus, two of the Towns of that part hereof, which had the name of Cilicia aspera: as 9. Cretopolis, and 10. Menedemium, of that part which was called Carbalia.

Of these Pamphylians there is little to be said in point of story, but that they were for the most part on the suffering hand; subject from time to time to those mightier Princes, who would not let their neighburs rest in quiet by them. Being on the same side of Taurus, and of easie access, they be∣came first Vassals to the Syrtan, and after to the Persian Kings. When Alexander passed that way in his march towards Persia, he took in all the Sea-Towns of it: the whole brought under with the rest of the Asian Provinces, by Antig••nus first, after by Seleucus the great King of Syria. In the expiration of whose line, this People and their neighburs of Cilicia, being left to themselves, and tempted by Mitthridates to his faction, began to be troublesome on the Seas, and and proved notable Pirates; and were the first Authors or inventers of those great Ga••llies of a hun∣dred and forty or a hondred and sixty Oars a peece; which the Italians call from hence by the name of Pamphyli. But forced to leave this trade at last, being warred upon by the Romans with great forces both by Sea and Land (a fuller narrative whereof we shall have in Cilicia) in the conclu∣sion of that warre, they lost that liberty which so small a time they had enjoyed; and were made Vassals unto Rome. Afterwards made a Province of the Asian Diocese, they ran the same fortune with the rest, till subdued by the Turks: and at the death of Alidine, were seized on by Caraman, and so became a part of his Kingdome. Of which we shall hear more when we come to Cilicia. And so much for the Provinces of the Asian Diocese, (the Provinces of the Isles excepted whereof more anon) converted to the Christian faith by three great Apostles, but most especially by Saint Paul, of whose travels through most Cities and Regions of it there is such pregnant evidence in the book of the Acts. And that Saint Peter and Saint John had also their parts herein, appears by the Revelation of the one, and the first E∣pistle of the other: Paul planting, John and Peter watering; but God himself giving the increase. Pass we on next unto ISAURIA and CILICIA, which though Provinces of the Diocese, of the Orient, were parts of the Caramanian Kingdome: of which having taken a Survey, and so cleared our selve•• of this Peninsula, we will then sayl about such Islands as make up the remainder of the Asian Diocese.

18. ISAVRIA. CILCIA.

THese two, though distinct Provinces, I have joined together, because the first was onely a part of the last; Cilicia antiently comprehending both. The fourtunes of both being the same also in point of story.

ISAVRIA, a mountainous and hilly Province, seated on both sides of Taurus, hath on the East and South the rest of Cilicia, whereof antiently it was a part; on the North, Pisidia; on the West, Pamphylia. So called from Isaurus, the chief City of it, when first made known unto the Romans; which being taken by Servilius the Proconsnl, imployed by Pompey in that service, reduced the conquered Countrey under the command of Rome, and gave unto the Conquerour the surname of Isauricus.

The quality of the Soyl, and whole estate of this small Province, take thus from Ammianus Marcelli∣nus, who had seen these Countries. Ciliciae lateri dextro adnexa Isauria, uberi palmite viret, & frugi∣bus multis; quam mediam flumen navigabile Calicadnus interscindit, &c.

i. e. On the right hand of Cilicia lyeth Isauria, a Province of a wealthy soyl, plentifull of Vines and much other fruits, which the River Calecadnus parteth in the very middest. Beautified besides many Towns with two principall Cities. 1. Seleucia, founded by Seleucus: and 2. Claudiopolis, into which Claudius the Emperour

brought a Roman Colonie. For as touching 3. Isauria, heretofore a walled City, and of most esteem, it hath been long ago destroyed, as yielding too secure a refuge to the neighburing Rebels; insomuch that now there are scarce any visible tracts of its former greatness.

And not much after, Hae duae Provinciae bello quondam Piratico cateruis mixtae Praedonum, a Servilio Proconsule missae sub jugum, factae sunt ve∣ctigales; i e

These Provinces (Cilicia and this) heretofore in the Piraticall warre joyning with those Robbers, were brought under by Servilius the Procons••l, and made subject to the State of Rome.

And here we have in brief, the nature of the Countrey, the names of the chief Rivers, and the principall Cities, with so much of the story as relates to the first subjugation of it. What further doth concern it we shall hear in Cilicia, upon the which it did depend.

2. CILICIA is bounded on the East, with Syria, or rather that part thereof which is called Coma∣gena, separated from which part by a branch of the Mounta in Taurus, called Amanus; on the West, with Pamphylia; on the North, with Isauria, and Armenia Minor; on the South, with the Mediterranean, and Syria specially so called. It was thus named as the old tradition was, from (〈◊〉〈◊〉 the brother of Cadmus the Phoenician, a neer neighbour to it: but as Bochartus (of whose humour I have told you often) from Callukim, a Phoenician word signifying stones, quia lapidosa est Regio, because in some parts, especially in that which was called Cilicia Trachaea, or Cilicia Aspera, it was very stony. It is now called Caramania, as the last Province of the Caramanian Kingdome, which held out for those falling Princes, when the rest was conquerd by the Turks of the Ottoman race.

The Countrey said by Marcellinus, to be terra dives omnibus bonis, wealthy and fruitfull of all ne∣cessaries. Which Character holdeth good chiefly in the Eastern parts, which heretofore had the name of Cilicia Campestris; the western parts lying towards Pamphylia, formerly called Cilicia aspera, being rough and stony. But generally where the lands lie in severall, and are duly cultivated, it answereth to the former Character: being also very well watered, and having a fair and large Sea-coast, for the space of there hundred miles and upwards. Which notwithstanding, it is not much traded, and but meanly inhabited, a great part of the Countrey lying in large and common fields, to which none can lay any proper claim, and therefore planted onely with Goats and Sheep: out of which the Commoners on all sides raise good profit by cheese and butter, by their fleeces chiefly. Here is also a good breed of Horses, of which six hundred yearly are culled out for the speciall service of the Grand Signeur. But as they have some profitable and usefull creatures; so have they others as dangerous and hurtfull to them, especially those which the Vulgar Grecians call Squilachi, of a mixt making betwixt a Dog and a Wolf, which go in ttoops, and are so bold and theevish withall, as they use to set upon a man as he is a sleep, and leave him neither hat, cloak, nor fardell, nor anything they can conveniently get from him.

Chief Rivers hereof are, 1. Pyzamus, now called Malmistra, which rising on the North side of the Taurus, and forcing his passage through that Mountain, makes such a noise in falling down the precipices and rocks thereof, as resemblanceth at a great distance a clap of Thunder. 2. Orymagdus. 3. Cali∣cadnus spoken of before. 4. Cidnus, which riseth in the Anti-Taurus, a River of a violent course, and so cold a water, that as Pliny writes, it cureth the Gout: the waters of which proved very dangerous to Alex∣ander the Great, the coldness of them striking violently into his stomack; and deadly to Fredrick the first Emperour of the Germans, as he here bathed himself, the violence of the stream tripping up his heels, and he not able to recover was presenly drowned.

Of their chief hils I need add nothing, having already said that the Countrey is parted by Amanus from Syria; and by Taurus it self from Pisidia and Armenia Minor: not easie of entrance by the first, but very difficult by the last: the Streits thereof called Pyloe Cilicioe, or the Ports of Cilicia, being indeed so strait, and almost impassable, that had they been guarded or regarded by the Persians, as they should have been, the progress of Alexanders victoties might have ended there But Arsenes, who had the charge of them, durst not stand his ground, and so left them open to the Enemy: whom by those Ports he put into the possession of the Kingdome of Persia. With better faith, though no better fourtune did the Souldiers of Pesceninus Niger make good these Streits against the Emperour Severus: the Monarchy of the World ly∣ing a second time at stake, and to be tried for in this Cock-pit. For the Nigrians possessed of these Streits and entrances, couragiously withstood the Severian party, till at last a sudden tempest of rain and thunder continually darting in their faces, as if the very Heavens had been armed against them, they were fain to leave the passage, and therewith the victory, to the adverse faction; having sold that at the loss of 20000. of their own lives, which Alexander had the happiness or the hap to buy for nothing.

In the borders of this Countrey towards Pamphylia, lived a Tribe or Nation called the Soli, originally of Attica: but in long tract of time difused from converse and communication with their Countrey-men, they spake that language so corruptly, that from their barbarous manner of pronunciation, and as rude expression, came the word Soloecismus. Yet amonst these were born three men of eminent note, that is to say, Chry∣sippus the Philosopher, Philemon and Aratus the Poet; out of the writings of which last Saint Paul vouch∣safed to use this passage 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, i. e. for we are also his offspring, Acts 17. v. 28. That blessed Apostle thought himself never the worse Preacher, for being brought up in humane learning at the feet of Gamaliel: nor held it any disparagement to the influences of the Holy Ghost to make use of it in his Sermons, and divine discourses. And therefore to prevent those cavils which ignorance or misprision might chance to make in times succeeding, he hath thrice vouchsafed the words and testimony of the hea∣then writers; viz. of Epim••nides, T••tus 1. v. 12. of Menander, 1 Cor. 15. v. 33. and that of Aratus before mentioned. So lawfull is it in this kind for those of the spirituall Israel to rob the Aegyp∣tians; and to make this Hagar serviceable to their Mistress Sarah.

Principall Cities in this Province, 1. Soloe, the habitation of the Soli before remembred; by some said

to be built by Solon the Athenian; but generally affirmed to have been planted by those of Rhodes and Attica: mistakingly called Heliopolis, by Qu. Curtius, which is as much in Latine as Solis civitas, or the City of the Sunne. On the site hereof then decayed and ruinous (the Town having been destroyed by Tygranes the Armenian King in his late warres against the Romans) did Pompey build his City of Pom∣peropolis after his victory over the Pirates, who not onely lorded it over the Seas, and consequently obstru∣cted trade and merchandize, but wasted and spoiled the Villages of Italy it self. Pompey being Victor, and having inflicted exemplary punishment on the Ring-leaders, with the rest peopled this new Town, and the Countrey adjoining; allowing them competent possessions, lest want and necessity should again in∣force them to the like courses. An action truly commendable, and worthy so great a Captain, rather to take occasion of offending from the people, than after offence done to punish them. Hythlodoeus in the Utopia, somewhat bitterly, though perhaps not unjustly, inveigheth against the lawes of England, for ordaining death to be the punishment of theft, Cum multò potius providendum fuerit, uti aliquis esset proventus vitae; ne cuipiam sit tam dira furandi primùm, deinde pereundi necessitas. Where as (saith he) the lawes ought to make provision for putting men in to some orderly course of life, and not let them runne upon the necessity of stealing first, and then being hanged for it. 2. Tarsus, the birth-place of Saint Paul the Apostle, for that sufficiently famous, were there nothing else to commend it to consideration. But it was a Town withall of great note and consequence, the Metropolis first of all Cilicia, and after the division, of Cilicia Prima. The Inhabitants whereof had the privilege of Roman Citizens. Situate in a goodly plain on the banks of the Cydnus, and by some said to be the work of Sardanapalus the last King of Assyria; it being engraven on a Monument erected to him, that in one day he had built this Tarsus; and 3. Anchiala, another City of this Countrey, neer the Sea-side, and not farre from the Promonto∣ry Zephyrium. Of the same date (if the said Monument speak truth,) but neither of the same fortune nor continuance: that being utterly decayed, but Tarsus still remaining of great wealth and strength. Much spoken of in the wars of the Holy Land, and in the Stories of the Caramanian and Ottoman Kings. And thoughthe Tarsians to ingratiate themselves with Julius Coesar, would needs have their City called Julio∣polis; yet the old name survived the new, and it is to this day called Tersia or Terassa by the vulgar Greci∣ans; but Hamsa by the Turks, as Bellonius telleth us. 4. Adena, the Adana of Ptolomy, a large Town but unwalled, instead whereof defended by a very strong Castle. Situate in a fruitful soyl, both for wine and corn, wherewith the Town is alwaies furnished for the use of those that are to travell over the Taurus, who commonly take in here three daies provision. 5. Epiphania, the birth-place of George the Arian Bishop of Alexandria; thrust on the world of late by some learned men (but of more industry than judgement) for George the Cappadocian Martyr. 6. Mopsuestia, as famous, or infamous, rather for giving title to Theodorus Mopsuestenus, Bishop hereof, and a great Patron of the Nestorian Heresies, in the time of Saint Chrysostome. The City otherwise of good note, and of great consequence, in the course of the Roman warres, described at large by Ammianus Marcellinus. 7. Issus, upon a spacious Bay, called hence Sinus Issicus, neer the borders of Syria: memorable for the great battel here fought betwixt Alexander and an handful (in comparison) of his Macedonians, and that vast Army of Darius (himself there in person) consisting of 600000 undisciplined Asians, whereof so many lost their lives, that the dead bodies seemed to have buried the ground. For partly by the unskilfulness of the Commanders, who chose so ill a place to sight in that they could make no use of their mighty numbers, and partly by the effeminatness of the Asian Souldiers, unable to endure the charge, there fell that day no fewer than 200000 of the Persians, 40000 of them being taken Prisoners, amongst them the wives and daughters of Darius; and not above 100 of the Alexandrians, if Qu. Curtius be not partiall in relating the Story. A victorie which assured Alexander of his former purchases, and opened a way unto the rest: the Persian not being able to make head again till he had pierced into the bowels of their Empire, and ad∣ded Syria and Egypt to his former Conquests. Of so great consequence is one full Victory to the losing and getting of a Kingdome. This Town it self now called Aiazzo, and the great Bay on which it stand∣eth Golfo di Aiazzo. 8. Alexandria, built by command of the Conquerour neer the place of battel, commodiously for trade, as upon the Sea, but otherwise in a fenny and boggy soyl, which makes the air there to be very unwholesome to men not used to it; little now remaining, but a few houses on the Sea∣shore built of straw and mudd, hardly affording it the reputation of a sorry village; and would not long continue such, but that it is the neerest Haven to the Town of Aleppo (whereof more in Syria) which draw∣eth unto it the resort of some Christian Factors, whose houses are of clay and timber, but of them not ma∣ny. The Town at first called Alexandria, as before was said; diminished first to Alexandretta, now called Scanderone. 9. Nicopolis, another of Alexanders foundations, so named in memory of his great Victory before mentioned. 10. Amavarza, a City of great Antiquity in the time of Strabo, and the Metropolis of the Province of Cilicia Secunda. 11. Heraclea, mentioned by Bellonius, and by him placed in a fruitful and well cultivated plain, at the foot of mount Taurus, a fair and large Town as he reporteth it, and distant from Adana towards the North-west about three dayes journey. But I find no such Town in Strabo, or Ptolomy, or any other of the Antients. 12. Scandeloro, a City of Cilicia Aspe∣ra, or that part of Cilicia which lieth towards Pamphilia, heretofore with the adjoining territory govern∣ed as a State distinct, when all the rest of this Countrey was under the kings of Caramania: against whom the Prince hereof, being a Mahometan had preserved his liberties, by the assistance of the Knights of the Rhodes, and the King of Cyprus. And when the Caramanian Kingdome was subdued by Ba••azet; he made so good conditions for himself, that he had other lands and estates in the Lesser Asia, assigned to him in exchange for this, and so surrendred this to the will of the conquerour.

The first Inhabitants of this Countrey were of the Progenie of Tarshish the Son of Javan, by whom, or

some of his posterity, to preserve his memory, the City of Tarsus was first built; Increased in tract of time by some new Colonies out of the neighbouring parts of Syria, it followed for the most part the fortunes of it: successively together subject to the Assyrians, Persians, and Macedonians. In the declining for∣tunes of the house of Seleucus, they began to stand upon their own legs, and might have continued longer in so good a posture, had they not hearkned to ill Counsails. Tempted by Mithridates to join with him against the Romans; of whose greatnesse all the Eastern States were grown very jealous; and being natur∣ally good Sea-faring men, they began together with the Pamphylians, to infest the Seas. At first they ventured no further then the shores adjoining. But after emboldened with successe, and finding that the Romans were sufficiently embroiled in domestick troubles, and a sharpe warre with Mithridates, they fell upon the coasts of Greece, and in fine of Italy itself; Publius Servilius the Proconsull first imploi∣ed against them, gave them an overthrow at Sea: and following his good fortune set upon them in their Harbours and retiring places. In which pursuit he not only took from them Phaselis, a strong Town in Lycia, one of their Retreats, and others of their best and strongest Receptacles: but wasting the whole Countrey of Cilicia, fell upon Isaurus, the most defensible Town thereof, which he took and ransacked. No sooner was Servilius departed home but they broke out more violently then before; filling all the ••reeks and ports of the Eastern Seas with their Frigots, Brigantines, and other light Piraticall Vessels: inso∣much that Pompey himself thought it to be an action not unbecoming his greatness to undertake the warre against them. And he pursued it to such purpose, that having armed 500 sail of all sorts, and stored his ships with 130000 men, he set upon them all at once; and in the space of one sole moneth made an end of the warre. An action not sufficiently to be wondered at, if we consider either the speedinesse of it, done in so little time as a moneth; or the cheapnesse of the victory, purchased without the losse of one Romen Vessel; or finally the importance and consequence of it, the Pirates from that time not daring to infest the Seas, and all Cilicia subjected to the State of Rome. How they were afterwards disposed of hath been shewn already. After this they did very good service unto Pompey in his warre again Caesar; of whom thus Lucan, reckoning up his Allies and Aids,

At{que} Cilix justa nunc non Pirata, carinà. And the reformed Cilicians now No Pirates, in his fleet did row.

Nor were they pliant unto him onely, as unto their Conquerour, but generally so tame and tractable in the time of Cicero, one of the first Proconsuls or Lord Deputies which were sent to govern them, that he writ merrily to Rome, that he found all quiet in his Province; save that the Panthars (some of which one of his friends had prayed him to send to Rome for the adorning of his triumph) were for fear of him fled into Pamphylia. At the first conquest by the Romans it was divided only into Campestrem and Trachaeam, as was said before; of which Campestris was reduced immediately to the form of a Province. Aspera or Trachaea was a while continued under the Government of Kings, till the time of Vespasian, and then made a Province as the other. By the succeeding Emperours, on some reasons of State (if not those inti∣mated in Lycaonia) the number of Provinces being increased (though the bounds of the Empire were no larger than they had been formerly) the whole was divided into three: that is to say, Cilicia prima, taking up all Compestris wholly; Cilicia secunda, containing the Maritime parts of Cilicia Aspera; and Isau∣ria, taking up the mountai nous parts of this last division. Laid by the Emperour Constantine to the Dio∣cese of the Orient; and consequently subject in spiritual matters to the Patriarch of Antioch, where the Praefectus Praetorio Orientis had his usual residence. In the falling of the Eastern Empire, it was con∣quered hy the Saracens in the time of Muhaveas or Mnavi, the fixt Caliph. Continuing under their com∣mand till their declination, it was recovered by the Greek or Eastern Emperours, and from them conquered by the Turks in the course of their Victories. But the first race of Turkish Kings being worn out by the Tar∣tars, and the Aladinian Kings ending in Aladine the second; it was part of the new Kingdome of the Caramanians; continuing theirs till the destruction of that line by Bajazet the second, Anno 1486. by whom incorporated with the rest of the Ottoman Empire.

Thus having made our Progress over all the Provinces of the Lesser Asia, and shewn how every one of them was made subject to the Turkish Tyranny: we must next draw down the Succession of such Turkish Kings as have reigned herein, till it was wholly conquered by the Princes of the house of Ottoman. Con∣cerning which we are to know in the way of Preamble, that the Turks having made themselves Masters of the Kingdome of Persia, and following their successes into Syria also; fell to a breach amongst them∣selves. For making up whereof it was condescended unto by Axan, the then Persian Sultan, that Me∣loch and Ducat two of his discontented Kins-men, should be infeoffed in the Cities of Aleppo and Da∣mascus and their severall Territories; with whatsoever they could conquer from the Caleph of Egypt, pos∣sessed at that time of most part of Syria, and some of the adjoining Provinces. It was also then agreed upon, that a third but neerer Kinsman called Cutlu Moses, another of the Leaders of the opposite faction, should have leave to conquer for himself whatsoever he could win from the Christian Princes; And he ac∣cordingly being furnished with a competent Army, subdued the Provinces of Media and Armenia in the Greater Asia, with Cappadocia, Pontus, and Bithynia in Asia Minor. Which and the rest of their affairs take here in the ensuing Catologue of

The Turkish Kings in Asia Minor of the Selzuccian Family.

• 1075. 1. Cutlu Moses, Nephew to Trangolipix, the first Persian Sultan of the Turks, won Media, part of Armenia Major, Cappadocia, Pontus, and Bithynia.
• ...

• 2. Solyman, Son of Cutlu Moses, for a while dispossed of most of his estates by the Westren Christians, in their first passage towards the Holy Land.
• 3. Mahomet the Sonne of Solyman, recovered most of his estates in the Lesser Asia, but outed of them and subbued by
• 4. Musat, Sultan or Lord Deputy of Iconium, but of the same Selzuccian family, who was thereby possessed of all the Turkish Provinces in the Lesser Asia.
• 5. Calisastlan the Sonne of Musat, to whom his Father left Iconium with the adjacent Pro∣vinces, wrested Amasia, and Ancyra from his brother Jagupasan; Sebastia, and Caesare••, from his brother Dodune; which with their severall Territories were bequeathed unto them, by the will of their Father. He overthrow the Emp. Emanuel Comnenus, and united Phrygia to his Kingdome.
• 6. Reucratine, the third Son of Calisastlan, having dispossest his three brethren Masut, Cap∣patine, Caicosrhoes, of the estates left them by their Father; became sole Monarch of all the Turkish Provinces in the Lesser Asia. In the later end of whose reign, Occata the Tartarian Cham having driven the Turks out of Persia, many of them under the conduct of Aladine, a Prince of the same Selzuccian Family, joined themselves to their Countreymen here, with whose help they won Cilicia, from the Grecian Emperours, who in the reign of Calo-Johannes, (the Turks being then embroyled by the Western Christians) had not long before regained it: and after the decease of Reucratine, advanced him to the whole estate.

The Turkish Kings in Asia Minor of the race of Aladine.

• 7. Aladine, descended in direct line from Cussanes, the last Turkish Sultan in Persia, having with many of his Nation seated himself in Cilicia, first made Sebastia, one of the Cities thereof, his chief Seat or residence: Which after the death of Reucratine, he removed to I∣conium, as the antient Regall City of the former Kings.
• 8. Azalide, by some called Azadire, eldest Son of Aladine, wasted the most part of his reign in wars with his brother Jathatine; whom at last he forced into exile.
• 9. Jathatine, on the death of his brother possesseth the Kingdome; slain afterwards in single com∣bate by Theodorus Lascaris, Emp. of the Greeks at Nice.
• 10. Jathatine II. Son of the former, driven out of his Kingdome by the Tartars, and dyed in exile: the Turks becoming Tributaries and Vassals unto the Tartarian.
• 11. Masut and Cei-cubades of the same Selzuccian Family (but whether the Sons of the second Jathatine I am not able to say) substituted in his place, as Tributaries to the conquering Tartars.
• 12. Aladine II. Son of Cei-cubades, succeeded his Father in the Kingdome, but as Vassall and Leigeman to the Tartars. After whose death leaving no issue of his body, the great Princes of his Family, divided amongst them his Dominions. To Sarachan fell Aeolis, Ionia, and part of Ly∣dia; from him named Sarchan, Sarachan, or Saracha-Illi; to Aidin the rest of Lydia, Phrygia Major, and the greatest part of the Greater Mysia, from him called Aidinia, or Aidin-Illi; to Cara∣sus, the Lesser Phrygia, with the rest of Mysia; from him denominated Carasan, or Carasa-Illi. To the Family of the Isfendiars, the Cities of Heraclea, Sinote, and that part of Pontus, which lieth next to Bithynia. There were also lesser Toparchies or sub-divisions, from whence we find a Prince of Smyrna, a second of Amasia, a third of Amisus, a fourth of Scandcloro; besides many others. But the main body of the estate was seized by Caraman, who for his share had the whole Provinces of Lycia, Lycamia, Pisidia, Pamphylia, Isauria, Cilicia, with the Regall City of Iconium, the greatest part of Caria (the rest of it appertaining to the Prince of Men••esia) with part of Cappadocia, and Armenia Minor, and some Towns in Phrygia; continuing in his family for as many descents (as either of the formet had held before) in great power and lustre, under

The Turkish Kings in Asia Minor of the house of Caraman.

• 13. Caraman, the first raiser of this family, Contemporary with Ottoman the first King of that race.
• 14. Aladine Son of Caraman, and Son-in-Law of Amurath the first, of the house of Otto∣man, by whom subdued, but pardoned and restored unto his estate, on the humble entreats of his wife.
• 15. Aladine II. Son of the former, subdued by Bajazet the first, and hanged by Tertumases, one of Bajazets great Commanders.
• 16. Mahomet, Son of Aladine the second, recovered his Kingdome on the death of Bajazet, vanquished and led captive by the mighty Tamerlane. Afterwards warred upon and vanqui∣shed by Mahomet the Son of Bajazet, redeemed his peace, by yielding up unto him many of his principal Towns; and was finally slain at the siege of Attalia.
• 17. Ibrahim, the Son of Mahomet, and Son-in-Law of Amurath the second, against whom unadvisedly raising war, he was forced to submit and become his Tributary: after whose death, rebelling against Mahomet the Great, he was then also vanquished? and a reconcili∣ation made betwixt them.
• ...

• 18. Ibrahim II. by some called Pyramus, the Son of Ibrahim the first, supported Zemes bro∣ther of Bajazet the second in his warre against him: for which Bajazet having setled his af∣fairs, invaded and subdued the Kingdome of Caramanta, killed the unfortunate King in battel, and so united that Estate unto the rest of the Dominions of the house of O••toman. The strange successes of which house, from the first rising of it to these present times, shall be deferred till we come unto Turcomania, from whence this Nation first attempted and atchieved the conquest of Persia, and which only of all their large possessions doth retain any thing of their name. In the mean time we will survey the Islands of this Lesser Asia, and so procceed to their possessions in the Greater, as they ly before us.

19. The Province of the ASIAN ISLES.

THe Province of the ASIAN ISLES comprehendeth all the Islands in Asia Minor; from the mouth of the Hellespont to the Rhodes, reckoning that for one: united first into a Province by the Emperour Vespasian; next reckoned as a part of the Asian Diocese, and afterwards, together with the Province of the Hellespont, and that of Asia properly and specially so called, making up the peculiar or exempt jutisdiction of the Proconsul of Asia. Those of most consideration are, 1. Tenedos, 2. Les∣bos. 3. Chios. 4. Samos. 5. Coos. 6. Icaria. 7. Patmos. 8. Claros. 9. Caparthos. 10. Rhodes. Others of less note, having nothing memorable but their names, are scarce worth the naming.

1. TENEDOS, is situate at the mouth of the Hellestont, overagainst the noted Promontory called of old Sigeum (but now Cape Janizarie) a Promontory of Troas, or the Lesser Phrygia, from which distant not above five miles. The Isle it self in circuit no more then ten; swelling with a round Mountain towards the North, in other parts levell; in both producing as good wines as the best of Greece. It took name, as the generall tradition was, from Tenes the Son of Cycnus, King of a little City in the Lesser Phrygia, who being falsly accused by his Step-dame for solliciting her to that incestuous mixture which she had violently importuned, and he as piously refused, was by the command of his Father put into a chest, exposed to the mercy of the Sea, and here miraculously preserved. Here for a time he is said to reign with great commendation for his justice; and after wards going to the aid of the Trojans, to have been slain by the hand of Achilles; of whom therefore it was not lawful to make mention in any of the Sacrifices offered in the Temple hereof. But Bochartus casting off all this as an old wives fable, will have it so called from Tin-edum a Phoenician word, signifying Red clay, which the Potters made use of in their earthen vessels. A town it had of the same name with the Island, in which a Temple sacred to Apollo Sminthius; and 2. another called Asterion, situate neer a little River well stored with Crab-fish, whose shells were made in the form of an Axot Hatcher. From which Town as the Islanders have in some Authors the name of Asterii; so from the other circumstance they are said to have had the stamp of an Hatchet on their coin or money. Memorable for an old custome observed amongst them, which was, that at the back of the Judge there alwaies stood a man with an Ax advanced; as well to terrifie the Witnesses from giving false evi∣dence to the Judge, as the Judge from pronouncing a false sentence upon the evidence. Whence the Pro∣verb, Tenedia Securis. More memorable for the finall destruction of Troy, which was plotted here the Grecians withdrawing their forces hither, as if gone in earnest, but from hence setting sail again to surprise the Town, when they saw their plot had took effect. And so I leave it with that Character which the Poet gives it.

Est in conspectu Tenedos, notissima famâ Insula, divesopum Priami dum Regna menebant. Nunc tantum finus, & statio male-sida carinis.

In English thus,

In sight of Troy an Island stands, well known, Call'd Tenedos; rich, and of great renown, Whilest Priams Kingdome flourished; now (they say) Grown a poor Road, for ships an unsafe Bay.

2. LESBOS, the largest of these Asian Isles, is distant from the main land of Troas about seven miles; 168 in compass: reckoned the seventh in bigness of the Mediterranean; which Aristotle in his Book de Mundo, ranketh in this Order following. 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉. That is to say, The most considerable of these, are Sicilie, Sardinia, Corsica, Crete, Euboea, Cyprus, and Lesbos. And though both Seylax in his Periplus, a nameless Poet in Eustathius, Diodorus Siculus, Strabo, and others of the Antients, vary in ordering of the rest, according as their information or fancies led them: yet Leshos comes in the seventh place constantly, without change at all. Upon which ground Bochartus will have it called Lesbos from Esburith a Phoenician word, signifying seven: contracted first to Esbu, by leaving out the last syllable of it; and then by changing bu to bos, and prefixing L to the beginning. Far enough fet, and were it but as dearly bought, would be good for Ladies: this Island being reckoned in the seventh place for no other reason, but because it lay furthest off and most North from Sicilie, from whence they ordered their accompt; and not any mystery in the name thereof.

It had then the name from Lesbos the Chief City of it, as that from Lesbus the Son of Lapythus, who ma∣ried Methymna the Daughter of Macarius Prince hereof: from which Macarius, it had sometimes the name of Macaria; as that of Mitylene by which it is now commonly called, from Mitylene another of the daughters of the said Macarius. And that the memory of the whole family might be pre∣served

in this Island, Methymna also had a City called by her name, one of the principal of the Countrey.

The Countrey towards the Westand South reported to be mountainous and somewhat barren; the rest level and fruitful: plentiful of excellent corn, and abounding in delicious wines, compared by Athenaeus to Ambrosia, the liquor of the Gods, as the Poets fable; affording also plenty of sheep, and store of horses; these last couragious and strong, though but low of Stature. More memorable for the eminent persons which it hath produced, as 1. Sappho an Heroick woman, whose invention was the Sapphick verse, and therefore called the tenth Muse. 2. Pittacus, one of the seven Wisemen of Greece. 3. Theo∣phraitus, that notable Physician and Philosopher. 4. Alcaus, the successour of Orpheus in the excel∣lecy of Lyricall poesie; and 5. Arion, the Musician, who was so perfect on his Harp, that being cast into the Sea playing on that instrument, a Dolphin took him on his back, and wasted him safe as far as Corinth, where he related the whole story unto Periander, attested by the Mariners who had thrown him overboard. And though this be by some rejected as a poetical fiction; yet past all doubt, the man was not only an excellent Musician, but an eminent Poet, the first inventor of Tragedies, a chief Lyrick, and the Author of the verse called Dithyrambick.

Principal Towns herein, 1. Lesbos, 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, from whom (saith Stephanus) the whole Island had the name of Lesbos. 2. Methymna, so named from Methymna one of the daugh∣ters of Macarius, spoken of before. 3. Mitylene, so named from the other daughter, and wife of Lesbus: now the Chief City of the Island, seated on a Peninsula looking towards the main land, strong by nature, and fortifyed by Art: enjoying on either side a commodious Haven, that on the South most fit for Gal∣lies; the other capable of ships of burden. Beautified heretofore with magnificent buildings, and sweet∣ned with variety of delights and pleasures: little now left of it since subdued by the Turks, but a strong Castle manned with an able Garrison, and a well-stored Ars nall for Gallies, kept here in readiness to preserve those Seas from Pirates; with which much infested. But the two first long since decayed and grown out of knowledge, those of most note next Mitylene, are 4. Vasilica. 5. Theodori. 6. Castel-Gera: all of late daies, and therefore of no observation in point of Story.

The Island was first inhabited by the Pelasgians, conducted hither by Zanthus the Sonne of Triopus; whence named Pelasgia: afterwards by some Ionians and people of sundry nations planted here by Maca∣rius, (the father of Mitylene and Methymna) who by his prudence and the reputation of his justice, obtained a kind of Soveraignty over the neighbouring Islands. Lesbus the Sonne of Lapithus arriving here with his Family, married Methymna, and had the Island for her Dower; though Mitylene had the hap to have the predominant City, and the Island consequently called by her name. Made subject to the State of Athens, in the time of the Peloponnesian warre (when almost all Greece banded against that City) they revolted from it, and were so straitly besieged by Paches, an Athenian Captain, that they submitted unto mercy. The Generall sends to Athens to know what should be done with the Mitylenians; Answer was sent, that he should put them to the sword. But the Senate on the morrow after repenting of that cruell Decree, sent a countermand. These latter Messengers made no stay, but eating with one hand, and row∣ing with the other, came to Mitylene, just as Paches was reading the former Order; by this speed pre∣vented. So neer were these miserable people to a fatall destruction. Subdued by the Romans with the rest of Greece, they fell together with it to the Constantinopolitan Emperours: from whom taken, with Chios, Samos, Andros, and some other of these Isles, Anno 1124. by the State of Venice, upon a quarrel betwixt them and the Grecian Emperour. Confirmed unto that Signeury by the Emperour Baldwin, and all the rest of the Aegean added to their portion; those above-named were again recovered by the va∣lour and good fortune of John Ducas, the Greek Emperour, then residing at Nice. Afterwards in the year 1335. the Emperour Calo-Johannes gave it to Franciscus Catalusius, a Noble Gentleman of Ge••o; with one of his Sisters, for her Dower. By whose posterity enjoyed till the year 1462. when Mahomet the Great incensed against Dominicus Catalusius the then Lord hereof, for the murder of his elder Brother, a Vassall and Tributary of his Empire (those Princes paying to the Turk an annuall tribute of 4000 Du∣cats) but more for harbouring the Pirates of Spain and Italy; besieges him in Mitylene his principall City; which in 27 daies (for so long it held) he constrained to submit unto him, and therewith all the Island also. Some of the Chief families, being removed unto Constantinople, upon some reasons of State, the main body of the people were permitted to remain here to till the land; and so continue to this day, with some few Turks, inconsiderable for their strength or numhers, entermixed amongst them.

3. CHIOS, the next to Lesbos both in site and bigness, lyeth opposite to the shore of Ionia, from which distant not above four leagues, is in compass about 126 miles. So called, as some say, from Chione a fair Nymph hereof, much sought after by many Suters: as others say, from 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, a Greek word signifying Snow, wherewith the mountains of it are sometimes covered. And some again will have it take name from Chios the Chief City of it, which being built in the form of the Greek letter 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, first got that name unto it self, and afterwards did communicate it to the whole Island. Isidore in his Origines gives another reason, and will have it called so from a Syriack word signifying Mastick, whereof there is plenty in this Isle. Chios insula (saith he) Syrâ linquâ appellatur, eo quod ibi Mastyx gignitur; Syri enim Mastychen Chion vocant. And were it so, that Chios in the Syriack did signifie Mastick, there could no better reason be assigned for the name: this Island being more furnished with that commodity, than any place in the world besides. A gumme it is growing out of the Lentisck tree, which in the moneths of July and August the Inhabitants force out of those trees by making with sharp instruments a deep incision into the the barks of them; one of which the juice dropping is afterwards hardned like a gumme, and in the Septem∣ber

following gathered. A Commodity with yieldeth yearly to the Inhabitants 18000 Sultanies, every Sultanie being valued at the rate of a Zochine of Venice: and therefore the felling of the Lentisck tree, at the time of the distilling of this precious juice, interdicted on the penalty of losing the right hand of him that doth it.

Other Commodities of this Island are Corn and Oyl in indifferent plenty, some quarries of most ex∣cellent Marble, a certain green earth like the rust of brass; some Silks, and Cotton-Wool, but shert in worth to those of Smyrna, and other places: Honey as good as any the world affordeth; and a vain of most delicious wines, those specially which grow on the Mountain Arvis, now called Amisea. Of which 〈◊〉〈◊〉 gives this commendation, In sumoia gloria fuere Thasium, Chiumque; ex Chio, quod Ar∣visium vocant. Of all wines (saith he) those of Thassus, and Chios, are of best esteem; and of these of Chios, the Arvisian. Strabo extolleth them in the Superlative degree, and calleth the wine here∣of, 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, incomparably the best of Greece. And Plutarch, speaking of an E∣picurean or voluptuous liver, affirms that he conceived it the supreme felicity 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, to lie with Thais, and drink th••se Arvisian wines. Here are also infinite store of Pa∣triges, of a red colour, kept tame, and fed in slocks like Geese, in the Streets and Greenswarths of their villages: some little Boy or Girl driving them to field, and calling them home again with a whistle when the night comes on.

The Island divided commonly into two parts, the Higher called Apanomera, lying towards the North and West, hilly, and rough, but intermixt with fruitful vales and pleasant Rivers: the Lower, opposit unto it, called Catamorea, swelled here and there with gentle hillocks, on which groweth the Lentisck. The whole inhabited by Greeks intennixt with Genoese, and (since their conquest by that people) some few Turks amongst them. Which mixture with the Genoese, tempereth the levity of the Greeks with it than gravity: the better sort of people both in apparrel and manners coming neer the Genoese, once the Lords of this Island: the common fort continuing their old Greek humour of mirth and jollity, (not sensible of the Turkish thraldome under which they suffer) with as much licenciousness as ever. And though this in∣termixture hath so corrupted their language, that neither the Greek nor the Italian be here rightly spoken, but a compound tongue made up of both: yet keep they their Religions still distinct and separate, as if they had never known another.

Here are reckoned in it six and thirty Towns and villages, the principall whereof are, I. S. Elias in the North. 2. Pigrine, in the midest hereof; and 3. Chios it self, now called Sio(as is all the Island) one of the seven Cities contending for the birth of Homer, whose Sepulchre they pretend to shew in an old Castle neer the Mount and Town of S. Elias(which were it his, would be a better argument for his buri∣all here, than it is for his birth.) The Town situate in the most pleasant and fruitfull part of the Countrey, to which both industry and Art have given great advantage: here being few houses without Orchards of excellent fruits, as Oringes, Limons, Pomegranats, Citrons, and a kind of Fig, much praised for their quick∣ness of tast by the antient Romans. It standeth on the East-side opposite to the Shores of Asia,stretched along the bottom of the Haven, and on the West-side backed with a rocky Mountain, upon which it former∣ly did stand. The Buildings ordinary, the Streets narrow, and the Haven every day decaying: though other∣wise secure once entred; and for directing of the entrance a Lantern advanced by the Genoese(when Lords hereof) to give light by night, and serve for a land-mark in the day. Fortified on the North-side by a large and strong Castle, environed with deep ditches, well furnished with munition, and a Turkish Garrison. And because the Island is on all parts accessible, not naturally fortified with rocks, and dangerous precipices, as many others; besides this Castle, they have all along the Coast small Watch-to••rs, which with smoke by day, and fire by night, give notice unto one another of such Vessels as they see approaching: the Guards about the Castle being so intent also about their charge, that every minute of the night there goeth a word about the walls to declare their vigilancie.

The Chians were at first a free people, governing themselves as a Commonwealth; and by reason of their many harbours, able to furnish out a Navy of 80 Sayl, which gave them the Lordship of those Seas; till ecclipsed by the Rhodians. Besieged by Philip the Father of Perseus, with his utmost power, who when he could not get it by force, proclamed freedome to the Slaves (of which here were many) and liberty to ma∣••y with their Masters wives, if they would rebell against their Masters. And when this policy would not do it, the Town being held out with greater heat of indignation, he gave over the siege. At last they be∣came subject to the Romans, with the rest of Greece, and followed punctually the same change of fortunes, as did those of Les••os; which we have spoken of before: till given by Andronicus Paloeologus, one of the last Greek Emperours, to the Justinians, a noble Genoesian Family, assistant to him in his wars. Under them it continued as tribut tries to the Turks (after the Turks had made themselves masters of Constantinople) to whom they annually paid eighteen thousand Ducats; till the year 1566. When Solyman the Magnifi∣cent picking a quarrell with them for some suspected correspondency with the Knights of Malta, commanded Pial, one of his greatest Bassas, to seize the Island. And he accordingly presenting himself before the City with a strong Fleet of eighty Gallies, did so astonish and amaze the Inhabitants of it, that without any other summons than the fight of his Navy, they surrendred themselves unto his disposing, upon Easter-day, being the same day he came before it. since that it hath continued Turkish, all save their Religion, en∣joyed by them with like liberty as in former times.

4. SAMOS, is on the South-east of Chios, distant about five miles from the shores of Ionia; 〈◊〉〈◊〉 eighty or eighty seven in compass; environed for the most part, especially on the North-west with in∣••••able but beautified with a fair and capacious Haven; of little use by reason of the Pirates 〈…〉〈…〉s. The soyl sufficiently enriched with most kind of fruits, abundantly plentifull 〈◊〉〈◊〉

Oly, and Olives, but of Vines altogether unfurnished which is the more to be admired in regard all the Islands and shores about it, produce them in so great a plenty. It stretcheth from the East to the West: and on the South part of it stood the City Samia, neer unto the Haven before spoken of. In former times po∣pulous, and well inhabited, as was the rest of the Iland; now wholly desolate in a manner, because of the Pi∣rates, and in most places very much over-grown with woods: becoming thereby very usefull to those publick enemies, who find here Timber enough for Shipping, and can upon the sudden put a ship to Sea, for pursuit of their Robberies. The chief commodity it affordeth besides those above, is a medicinall Earth, usefull for Chirurgery and Physick: of which in former times were those Vessels made, called Vasa Samia, in great request amongst the Romans.

Antiently it had the names of Dryusa, Anathemusa, Melamphylas, and Ciparissa: out-worn by that of Samos, which it still retaineth. Memorable in old times for the birth of Juno, of one of the Sibyls, hence called Samia; and finally of the wise-man Pythagoras (a wiser than any of the seven wise Ma∣sters, so renowned amongst them) who first brought Philosophy into Greece, and from thence into Italy. Once a free Common-wealth of no small esteem, the Institutes whereof are mentioned by Heraclides. in his Books of the severall Commonwealths then being: afterwards made subject to the Tyrant Polycrates, a man so fortunate that for a long time he never fell into any mischance. Fearing lest such a long calm would bring on a tempest, he let fall into the Sea a most precious Ring, by him deservedly esteemed; that so it might be said he had some mis-fortunes. Which after he had found again in the belly of a fish brought ac∣cidentally to his table, he was overcome by Orontes a Persian, and brought to a miserable death. Lea∣ving a notable example that fortune is certain in nothing but uncertainties; and like a Bee with a sharp sting, hath alwaies some misery following in the train of a long concatenation of felicity. From this time forwards it ran the same fortune with the rest of these Ilands; subject successively to the great Monarchies in former times, as of late times to the Venetians, Greeks, and Turks, who do now enjoy it.

5. ICARIA, (now called Niceria) lyeth not far from Samos, to the West-ward of it, nar∣row, but extended out in length; the whole compass seven and thirty miles: neighboured by two great Rocks, or little Ilands, of old called Melanthii, now the Fernaces; formidable at all times to Mariners, in the right especially. Meanly inhabited at the present, though abounding in pasturage, and yielding sufficiency of corn: Havenless, and therefore the less frequented, yet that defect supplyed by commodious Roads. In former times called Doliche, then Macris, after Ichsiaesa: which name it held till the flight of Daedalus out of Crete. Who justly fearing the anger of Minos, for being Pandar to his wife in her loves with Tau∣rus, secretly with Icarus his sonne, fled out of that Iland. And because he would be sure to out-strip the Rower; who pursued him, he added fails unto his Boat, which it is said he first invented. But Icarus, co∣ming after in another Bark, delighted with the new device, clapped on too much Canvass, and bearing too great a Sayl, was here cast away. Hence the new name both to this Iland, and the Seas adjoyning to it: and the occasion of the Fable of Daedalus putting wings upon his shoulders, when he fled from Crete; and of his sonnes flying too high, whereby the wax melted which his wings were fastned with, and so he perished in the water. Of which thus Ovid

Dum petít infirmis nimium sublimia pennis Icarus, Icariis nomina fecit aquis. In English thus, Whilst Icarus weak wings too high did soare, He fell, and gave name to th' Icarian shore.

6. PATMOS, now called Palmosa, is situate on the South of the other two; A little Iland, not above 30. miles in compass. Mounteinous, but indifferently fruitful, especially of wheat and pulse: of other commodities and fruits not so well provided. On one of these Mounteins stands a town of the s••me name with the Iland; having on the top thereof a Monasterie of Greek Caloiros; and on the bottom a fair haven (I mean in reference to the Iland). Fourty sail of Ships are said to belong unto it; by the trading whereof they bring in those provisions which the soyl affordeth not: the soyl about the town being so incomparably barren, that nothing groweth on or near it, but on such earth as is brought thither from o∣ther places. Unto this Iland (as to others in other parts of the world) did the Roman Emperours use to confine offenders. A punishment laid by Domitian on S. John the Divine, who in this place writ his ••••velation to the Churches of Asia. So much the Text affirmes for certain, as to the writing of it in this Iland. And the Inhabitants by tradition point unto an house on the North-side of the Town in which it was written; and nor far off, the Cave, where it was revealed. Both places equally honoured by the Greeks, and Latines. They also shew a dead mans hand, which they affirm to be his, the nayls whereof grow again as oft as cut. But the Turks (saith Maginus) claim it for the hand of one of their Prophets. Let them dispute the controversie, whilst we hast to

7. CLAROS, another Iland not far off, containing about forty miles in compass. Well sto∣••••d with commodious Harbours, but very mountainous, some of those hils of such an height, that from the tops thereof, the City of Ephesus in Ionia, though distant at least eighty miles, may be easily seen. It is ••••w called Calamo. Neighboured by Lero (of old called Ileron) a little Iland not above eighteen miles an circuit; but very populous, inhabited both by Greeks and Turks. and furnishing the neighbouring Coun∣••••es with some store of Aloes. Sacred in formertimes was Claros to Apollo; reckoned by him amongst his honours in his brags to Daphne: where he declares,

—Mihi Delphica teltus, Et Claros, et Tenedos, Pataraeaque Regia servic.

That is to say,

The folk of Delphos, Tenedos and Clare, And Royall Patara, my Vassals are.

8. COOS, COS, or COVS, for by all these names it was called of old, is situate over against Caria, in the very bottom of the Aegean, that is to say, in that part thereof which is called Mare Myrtoum, the Myrtoan Sea. A Sea so called, as some say, from one Myrtilus, the Coachman or C••ioteer of OEnomaus, who having betrayed his race with Pelops, and importunate for his reward, was by Pelops precipitated into this Sea. Plinie less probably conceiveth that it took name from Myrtos a little Iland not far from Euboea: a little to far off to extend its name to the shores of Caria. And there∣fore considering that Lydia antiently was called Myrtus, and that in those times Aeolis and Ionia lying on this Sea, were accompted but as parts thereof; I think we may resolve with more probability that it de∣rived this name from that Lydian Myrtus.

In this Sea stands the Isle of Coos, now called Lange, affording Saylers as they passe by a most beauti∣full prospect, lying for the most part flat and level, but swelling towards the East with some gracefull mountains, out of which issue many sweet and pleasant springs to refresh the Iland, which maketh it more than ordinarie fruitful. Productive of Cypress trees, Turpentine, and sundry others, both delight∣ful and medicinall, but most especially celebrated for those rich wines, which the Good Fellows of Rome so much loved to quaff, called Vinum Cos. It is in compasse 70 miles, having a Town of the same name, in the suburbs whereof Stomalimne stood, antiently the Temple of Aesculapius, famous, and rich with the offerings of those who having by his assistance (as they supposed) recovered health, came hi∣ther to make payment of their vowes, and express their gratitude. It is now fortified with a strong Castle, held by a Garrison of Turks: and besides this, two Villages onely in the Iland, and both inhabited by Greeks.

In elder times it had the name of Merope, Caria and Nymphoea, and at last of Coos. Memorable in being the Countrey of many famous men who were herein bota; viz. of Hippocrates, the Revivor of Physick, then almost decayed, who is hence called Hippocrates Cous. 2. Sinius, a Physician also; 3. Ariston, a Peripatetick Philosopher. 4. Philetas, as good an Oratour as a Poet. 5. Nicias, who for a time oppressed the liberty of this people, and 6. of Apelles the famous Painter, who to express his art in the picture of Venus, (rising naked out of the Sea) assembled together all the most beautifull wo∣man of this Iland, uniting in that piece their divided perfections. Which famous peece being afterwards hanged up in the Temple of Stomalimne, one of the principal of this Iland, was thence conveyed to Rome by Augustus, and their dedicated to Coesar, as the mother of the Julian Family: the Coans in regard hereof being eased of a great part of their annuall tributes. Not much less memorable for that fine thin stuffe (such as now called Tiffanies) so much in use amongst the Chief Ladies of Rome: which at once shewed them cloathed and naked. Perlucida utuntur veste, ita ut nudoe conspici possint, as my Author hath it. These they called Vestimenta Coa, and Vestes Coas, so often mentioned by the Poets, especially in their Amatoria; as Coa puellis Vestis, in Tibullus; Indue me Cois, in Propertius; Sive e••••t in Cois, saith the Poet Ovid. So in others also, too many, and too long to be added here. I passe to

9. CARPATHOS, situate on the South of Caria, in the Mediterranean, from this Iland, called here abouts the Carpathtan Sea. A rugged and unpleasing soil, full of difficult mountains, but those mountains stored with quarries of most excellent Marble. In circuit about 60 miles, extending more in length than breadth. Heretofore beautified with four Cities, and thence named Tetrapolis. But three of the four Cities are long since perished, that of Carpathos being still remaining, and still the princi∣pall of the Iland; both now called Scarpanto. Some other Towns it hath all along the shore, and every one of them furnished with some Port or Haven, but small, and for the most part very unsafe. Situate in the midle as it were betwixt Crete and Rhodes, it hath continued hitherto in the possession of the State of V••∣nice (if not taken from them very lately) to whom being given with other of the Ilands of these Grecian Seas, at the taking of Constantinople by the Western forces, it hath the fortune or felicity to continue theirs, when almost all the residue were subdued by the Turks. The people Greek, of the communion of that Church, notwithstanding their subjection to a State of Italy.

10. RHODES, situate in the Rhodian or Carpathian Sea, lyeth over against the coast of Lyria, in Asia Minor, from which distant about 20 miles. Formerly called Ophiusa, Asteria, Aethroea, Trinachia, Poeessa, Corymbia, Atabyria, and at last Macaria; it settled finally and fortunately in the name of Rhodes. So named by the Grecians from the abundance of Roses, which the soil produceth, Rhodos in that language signifying a Rose, the Isle of Roses, as it were: but as the Poets say, of Rhoda, a Nymph of these Seas, here deflowred by Apollo; or rather of Rhoda, one of the daughters of Apollo begat on Venus: For so one of them thus declareth;

Insula dicta Rhodos, de Sole et Cypride nata est. Rhoda, from whom this Isle took name, Of Venus and Apollo came.

The Iland 140 miles in compass, enriched with a most temperate air, and a fertile soyl, producing finuts in very great plenty, full of excellent pastures, adorned with trees which alwaies do continue gree•••• and in a word so blest with the gists nature, that it gave occasion to the fable of those Golden Shewers, which were once said to have fallen upon it. The wines hereof so excellent, and so rich of tast, that by the Romans they were used in their second courses, or reserved for the sacrifices of the Gods, as too good for morta••ls, as affirmed by Virgil in the Geor••icks. The cause of which perpetual flourishing, and continuall spring, is to be ascribed to the powerful influences of the Sun, so dearly cherishing this Island, or so much in

love with it, that it is constantly affirmed that no day passeth wherein he shineth not clearly on it, be the air in all other places never so much over-cast with Clouds, or obscured by mists. Fained for that cause to have been naturally a meer Marish, altogether unhabitable, if not covered with waters, till loved by Phoebus, anstcrected above the waves by his vigorous influences.

Of the People we shall speak anon; Look we in the mean time on the places of most observation. 1. Lindun (now Lindo a pety Town, but formerly of more esteem:) of note in those times for the Temple consecrated to Minerva, by Danaus King of Egypt, landing here when he fled out of that Kingdome. As also for the birth of Cares, the Architect of the huge Collossus, whereof more presently; but special∣ly for the nativity of Cleobulus, one of the seven wise men of Greece: the other six, being Solon of Ath••n••, Pertander of Corinth, Chilo of Sparta, Bias of Priene, Thales of Miletum, and Pittacus of Mi∣tylene. Seven men of whom the Grecians most immensely bragged, as if the World could neither afford them equals, or an equall number: for which derided handsomely by Lactanitius, an old Christian wri∣ter, who scoffe's their paucity, and calleth it a miserable and calamitous age, in quo septom Soli fuerunt qui hominum vocabula mererentur; in which there were no more than seven who deserved to be accompt∣ed men. 2. Rhodes, antiently, as now the chief City of it, the Iland from hence taking name, and for∣merly, as well as in later times, depending on the fortunes and strength hereof. No place in elder times held superiour to it, for the convenency of the Haven, magnificent buildings, delightfull Orchards, and other excellencies. Situate on the East part of the Isle, on the declining of an hill, and neer the Sea, where it enjoyeth a safe and commodious Haven: treble walled, fortified with thirteen Turrets, and five strong Bulwarks, besides divers Sconces, and other out-works: this Town, and Famagusta in the Isle of Cyprus, being conceived to be the two strongest holds in the Turkish Empire. In former times, one of the principall Universities of the Roman Empire; this Rhodes, Marseiles, Tarsus, Athens, and Alexandria, be∣ing reckoned the old Academies of the Monarchy. And to this Town, as a most noted place of Study, Ti∣berius (afterwards Emperour) did withdraw himself, when Augustus had declared his two Nephewes Lucius and Caius, for his Heires: pretending onely a desire to improve himself in the waies of literature; whereas the true cause was his envy at their preferment. Honoured in those times with that huge Collossus, one of the seven wonders of the World, made by Chares of Lindum before mentioned. Composed of Brass, in height seventy Cubits, every finger of it being as great as an ordinary man; and consecrated to the Sun, as the proper Deity of the Iland. Twelve years in making, and having stood but sixty six years, was pulled down in an instant by an Earthquake, which terribly shook the whole Iland. The Rhodians being forbid by an Oracle to erect it again (or possibly pretending such an Oracle to save that charge) yet held the brass and other materials of it (in a manner) sacred. Not medled with, nor sacriligiously purloined till Mnavias the Generall of Osmen, the Mahometan Caliph, finding in himself no such scruple of con∣science, (after he had subdued this Iland) made a prey hereof; loading nine hundred Camels with the ve∣ry brass of it. From this Colossus, was the Iland sometimes called Colossa, and the People Collossians: not those Colossians (as some have very vainly thought) to whom Sain Paul writ his Epistle, those being of Colosse, a Town of the Greater Phrigya, as hath there been noted. Here was also in this City antient∣ly a Temple of Bacchus, enriched with many presents both of Greeks and Romans; of both which People the Rhodians were then held in a fair esteem, but the God and the good Wines in greater. Towns of less note, are 3. Villanova. 4. Russicare, and some others, but as little memorable.

This Iland was first Peopled by Dodanim the sonne of Javan, and the Grand-child of Japhet, whom the Greeks call commonly but corruptly Rhodanim; mistaking the Hebrew letter Dalesh for that of Resh, letters so like as easily it might draw them to that mistake. Finding this Iland too narrow for him, he left here a Colony, and with the main body of his People passed into Greece, where he planted the Countrey of Epirus, as hath there been said. Those which staid here, being mistakingly called Rhodians (or called so by the Grecians, not looking with too curious eyes into their Antiquities, from the abundant of Roses here∣in growing) making the best use of their Haven, and other the advantages of their situation, became so ex∣pert in maritime affairs, that by Florus they are stiled Populus nauticus; and that not onely in the way of Trade and Marchandize, but of power and government: holding for many years the command of these Seas, and prescribing Lawes for the Regleiment of Navegation. Which being called the Rhodian Lawes, became the generall Rule for deciding marine causes, and ordering the Affaires of Sea, in all the parts and Provinces of the Roman Empire: and so continued till supplanted in these Westem parts by the Lawes of Oleron. Fearfull of falling under the Macedonians, they applied themselves unto the Romans; whom first they aided in their warres against Philip the Father of Perseus; and afterwards in that also against Antiochus. Re∣warded for this last service with Lycia and Caria, two of the Asian Provinces, which Antiochus was to leave on his composition; they became so faithfully affected to the State of Rome, that when all the other Ilands of the Mediterranean and Aegean Seas, revalted to Mithridates King of Pontus: this onely ad∣hered unto the Romans. Proud either of their strength at Sea, or of those good Officers, they be∣gan to take upon them as Mediatours, and thought themselves fit men to advise their Masters. Crown troublesome by their frequent interpositions, and losing much of their esteem by such impertinencies: they be∣gan to grow jealous of the Romans, and incline to Perseus King of Macedon; whose Father they before opposed with their utmost power. A change which Perterculus expresseth with some admiration. Rhodij ipsi fidelissimi antea Romanis, dubià jam fide proniores in Regis partes visisunt, as his words there are. But yet they held for them against Mithridates, as before was said; and served their turn on all occasions; until insensibly they bretraied their liberty to the power of their friends; and of Confederates and Allaies, became their Vassals. Made by Vespasian into a Province with the rest of the Isles, the Governour or Pr∣sident of that Province fixing here his residence, as the chief of those Ilands: which gave the title of Me∣tropolitan

tropolitan to the Bishop of Rhodes. Under that Empire it continued, (or under that of Constantinople af∣ter the division) till the year 1124. when taken from the Grecians, by the State of Venice; again recovered by the Greeks, in the time of their Emperour John Ducas, then residing at Nice. Wonne from the Gre∣cians by the Turks, the Knights of Saint John of Hierusalem, being utterly driven out of Asia, possessed themselves of it, by the favour of Emanuel the then Emperour, who aided them in the conquest, Anno 1308. Afterwards proving bad neighbours to the Turkish tyrants, whom they ceased not to infest upon all occasions, they were many times in vain invaded: Mahomet the Great, famous for taking Constantinople and the Empire of Trabezond, spending some time before their City with both loss and shame. At the last 1522. it was again besieged by Solyman the Magnificent, Lilladamus Villerius being then Great Master: who did as much in defence hereof as policy and puissance could extend unto. But multitude in the end prevailed, and upon Christmas day, the Turk entred Rhodes as Conquerour; though possibly he might have said (as Pyrrhus once said of a like victory against the Romans) that such another victory would have quite undon him. Since that a Province of the Turks, by whom, and by some Jews banished out of Spain, the Ci∣ty of Rhodes is wholly inhabited: the Christians, which are licensed to dwell in the Countrey, and have leave to trade there in the day time, not suffered upon pain of death to stay there all night. And so we pass from the Ilands of the Asian Diocese, to the Isle of Cyprus, a neer neighbour unto Anatolia, but no member of it: the rest of that Diocese, and those Seas, as 11. Possidium. 12. Arcesine. 13 Bu∣gialos. 14. Minyas. 15. Sirne. 16. Cesi, and the rest, yielding but little matter of observation, besides their names.

OF CYPRUS.

CYPRVS is situate in the Syrian and Cilician Seas, extended in length from East to West two hundred miles, in breadth, sixty, the whole cumpass reckoned five hundred and fifty: distant about sixty miles from the rocky shores of Cilicia in Asia Minor, and a∣bout an hundred from the main Land of Syria, towards which it shooteth it self out with a long sharp Promontory, extending heretofore to the main land, from which rent in for∣mer time by a Violent Earthquake, as is said by Pliny; and worn unto this narrowness by the continuall working of the Sea upon it.

No place hath oftner changed its name, or at lest had more names on the By than this. Called at first Cethin, or Cethinia, from Ketim the sonne of Javan, who first planted in it; 2. Cerastis, from the abundance of Promontories, thrusting like horns into the Sea, (as the word intimates in the Greek.) 3. Amathusia. 4. Paphia. 5. Salaminia; these three last from the principall Towns in those parts hereof. 6. Macaria, from the fruitfulness and felicities of it. Besides these it hath in some times had these By-names also, as 7. Asperia, from the roughness of the Soyl. 8. Collinia, from the frequency of Hills, and Mountains. 9. Aerosa, from the Mines of Brass, which abound therein. 10. And fi∣nally, all those forgotten or laid by, it setled at the last in the name of Cyprus. So called, say some, from the abundance of Cypress Trees, with which most plentifully provided; as others from Cryptos a Greek word, signifying Concealed or hidden, because sometimes concealed by the Surges from the eye of Saylers; but most improbably said by others to take name from Cyrus, who founded here the City of Aphrodisia, where∣as indeed six hundred years before Cyprus his birth, we find it by this name in Homer; more rightly Ste∣phanus, who deriveth it, 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, from Cyprus daughter of Cinyras, one of the Kings hereof, living before the Troian Warres: though in my mind the first comes neerest to the truth, the Cypress Tree, not onely growing here in so great abundance, but being antiently peculiar in a manner to this Iland onely.

But on what ground soever it was called Cyprus, certain I am it had the name of Cerastis upon very good reason: no Iland or Region that I know of (for the bigness of it) thrusting out so many sharp Promontories. For on the West, there is 1. the Promontory called Acamas, now Capo S. Pisano. 2. Drepanum, now Trapano and Melechia. 3. Zephyrum, or Caput Calidoni, now Punta Malota. On the South, 4. Phrurium, now Capo Bianco. 5. Curias, or Capo della Gatte. 6. Gades, or Capo Chitt. 7. Throni, or Capo Pilae. On the East, 8. Pendaliun, now Capo di Griego. 9. Clides, now Capo S. Andrea. And on the North, 10. Cronyon, now Capo Cornochiette; besides some o∣thers of less note. Some of the Poets give another reason of this name, as that Venus offended with the People of Amathus for sacrificing their guests, should turn them into horned Cattell: Vinde ettam nomen traxere Cerastae, as it is in Ovid. But that meerly fabulous; somewhat of kind unto the Legend of Tho∣mas Becket, and the Kentish Long-tailes. Yet so far we may join with Ovid, that the Island was not only called Cerastis; but that the People were also called Cerastae, of which there wants not proof from some other Authors; with which we need not trouble our selves, that name being altoge∣ther worn out of use, and no other but that of Cyprus given it in common speech. Nor is it a matter of more strangeness that Cyprus should be called so by the Grecians, from its abundance of Cypress Trees, antiently and originally peculiar to this Iland, as before was noted: than that the same Grecians should give unto the neighbouring Iland the name of Rhodes, from its great plenty of Roses; or to the neighbour∣ing Continent the name of Phoenicia, from its great plenty of Palme-trees; the words so signifiying in that Language.

It is situate under the fourth Climate, so that the longest day in summer is no more than 14. hours and an half: and for that cause the air in summer time exceeding hot and swelthry: the soyl moystned with some few brooks, meriting rather the name of torrents, than rivers; which being generated for the most part by rain water, are not seldome dried up by the heat of the Sun: insomuch that in the reign of Con∣stantine the Great, this Iland was for 36 years together almost utterly forsaken; no rain falling all that time. These inconveniences notwithstanding, it is stored with such plenty of all things, that without the help of any forreign Nation, it is of it self able to build a tall ship from the keel to the top-sail, and so put it to Sea furnished with all things needful for a voyage, or a Sea-fight. It also aboundeth in Wine, Oyl, Corn, Sugar, Cotton, Honey, Wooll, Turpentine, and Allum; Verdegreece, all sorts of Metals, store of Salt, Grograms, and other commodities: whereupon this Iland was once called Ma∣caria (i.e. happy.) By reason of which wounderful affluence of all necessaries, and that variety of plea∣sures (even to sensuality) which the place afforded, it was antiontly consecrated unto Venus, who is hence

called Venus Cypria, and Dea Cypri, Sic te diva potens Cypri, in Horace; and in Ovid,

Festa dies Veneris, tota celeberrima Cypro, Venerat; ipsa suis aderat Venus aurea festis. Venus feasts hallowed through all Cyprus came; And Venus with her presence grac'd the same.

The people hereof are warlike, strong and nimble; of great civility, hospitality to their neighbours, and love to strangers of all Nations, Jewes onely excepted. For in the Empire of Trajan, the Jewes inha∣biting Egypt and the adjoining Countreys, drew themselves together, and chose one A exanaer for their Captain: under whose conduct they entred into this Island, and laid it desolate, killing in it 240000 per∣sons of all sexes and ages; not without much bloodshed vanquished and slain by Lucius the Emperours Lieutenant. Since which time the Cypriots permit no Jew to enter into the Iland: but come he hither vo∣luntarily or by force of tempest, they lay hands on him, and lead him presently to execution. A hated Nation, that neither innocence can protect, or equity reprieve from that cruel custome.

The women in former times much noted for their Unchastity, to which their worshipping of Venus was no small incentive; it being the custome of these women to prostitute themselves on the shores to the passers by: their very Virgins not refusing to be hanselled there, before their mariage; either to raise their por∣tions by the sale of their bodies, or else to please their Godess with such beastly sacrifices. And if Volaterranus may be credited (as I think he may) the Ladies which attended on Queen Carlotte, when she came to Rome to seek for aid against James the bastard, who had dispossessed her of this Kingdome, shew∣ed themselves little chaster than those antient Cypriots. Somewhat more fortunate in the men, Aes••le∣piades the Author of the verse so named. 2. Xenophon, an old Poet. 3. Zeno, and 4. Apollonius, the Philosophers. 5. Epiphanius, the learned Bishop of Salamis; and 6. above all, Saint Barnabas, the dear Associate of Saint Paul, being all natives of this Countrey.

The Christian faith was first here planted by Saint Paul, and Barnabas, as the very first fruits of their Apostleship, after they had been separated to the work of the Ministry by the Imposition of hands; as ap∣peareth Acts 13. v. 4. &c. The Church hereof, by reason of the Antiquity of it, and the honour of this joint foundation, so privileged in the best ages of Christianity, that the Arch-Bishop of this Island had all prerogatives of a Primate; consecrated by his own Suffragan Bishops, and acting in all sacred and Eccle∣siastical affaires, without dependance on, or relation to, the See of Antioch, whereunto all other Bishops in the Eastern Diocese were either subordinate or subject. Which privilege being questioned in the Coun∣cil of Ephesus, was by the Fathers there assembled, on a full hearing of the cause, approved and ratifyed; confirmed by the Civil sanction of the Emperour Justinian, whose wife was a native of this Island; and by the name of Jus Cyprium, the privilege or exemption of the Cyprian Church, transmitted to the Pre∣lates of succeeding times. Which notwithstanding, they continued in good correspondence with the Eastern Churches of the Greek Communion, and officiated all Divine Acts after the rites and forms thereof; till the Venetians became Lords of it, who brought in the Latine Service into some of their Churches, and appointed Bishops and other Ministers of the Papall party, for execution of the same. And for the Go∣vernment of these Churches, they had at first fourteen Bishops and Arch-Bishops, to gratify Queen Alice, (who had a mind to enrich her friends with some of the spoiles of them) reduced by Innocent the third to four only, that is to say, the Arch-Bishoprick of Nicosia, the Bishopricks of Famagusta, Paphos, and Amathus; but each See furnished with two Prelates, the one for the Greeks, the other for the Latines, of which the Bishops for the Latines have all the Lands and annual Revenues, which of right belong to those Cathredrals, the Greek Bishops living upon stipends, leavyed on the Priests and Deacons of their juris∣diction.

Rivers, as formerly was said, here are very few: and of those few, the principall are called Lycus, and Lapithus; the first running towards the South, the last towards the North; both not seldome so dri∣ed up, that they leave their empty Channels without any water. Both also have their Source from the hill O'ympus (the highest Mountain of the Iland) garnished with Trees and fruits of all sorts; in compass about eighteen Leagues (which make four and fifty Italian miles) and at the end of every League a Mo∣nastery of Greek Monks or Caloires, and a fountain of fresh water for the use of the house. Here are also two other little Rivers, the one called 3. Bodeus, the other 4. Tolius, but of the same nature as the former.

By Ptolomy, or in his time, divided into four parts or Provinces, but since it fell into the hands of the Lusignan family, distributed into twelve Counties or Cantrades; most of them called by the names of their Principal Towns, viz. 1. Nicosia. 2. Famagusta. 3. Paphia. 4. Audima. 5. Limissa. 6. Masorum. 7. Salines. 8. Messoria. 9. Crusocus. 10. Pentalia. 11. Carpassus. 12. Ce∣rines. The whole containing, besides these Cities and great Towns, 805 Villages, or thereabouts, which they called Casales; whereof the one half antiently belonged unto the Crown; the other half divided be∣twixt the Lay-Nobility, and the Ecclesiasticks: the Patrimony of these last being computed at 80000 Crowns of annual rents, besides casualties, and the vails of the Altar. But because the tracing out of these Cantrades will be very difficult (as a way which none have gone before me) I will adhere to the division made hereof in the time of Ptolomy, into the Provinces of 1. Paphia, 2. Amathusia, 3. Lapethia, and 4. Salamine.

1. PAPHIA, so called of Paphos the chief town thereof, taketh up the West part of the Iland: in which the Townes of most importance and observation, are, 1. Pa••hos, on the Sea-side, by Pli∣ny called Pala-paphos, or old Paphus, built as some say by Cyniras, the Father of Myrrha, and so named in memory of Paphus his father: but as others say, by Paphos, the Sonne of Pygmalion, Kings

of Phoenicia and Cyprus: to which last Ovid doth agree, who speaking of Pygmalions statue, turned in∣to a woman by the power of Venus (or rather of his beautiful wife, fabled, for the surpassing whiteness of her skin, to be made of Ivorie) he addes this of her,

Illa Paphum genuit de quo tenet insula nomen. She Paphus bare, from whom the name Of Paphia, to the Iland came.

Here Venus had her so much celebrated Temple; hence the name of Paphia; and here her Votaries of both sexes in their natural nakedness did perform her sacrifices. Both Town and Temple ruined by a fearfull Earthquake; or as the Legends have it, by the prayers of Saint Barnabas; the ruins of it still remaining. 2. Paphos Nova, or New Paphos, Now called Basso, five miles from the old, built by Agapenor, one of the Nephews of Lycurgus the Spartan Law-giver, after the sack of Troy forced hither by a violent tempest: consecrate to the same impure Godess, and much frequented, but without injury to the other; those which here offered, not thinking they had done her sufficient service, unlesse they went in a solemn manner of procession, and paid their vowes also at the other. 3. Arsinoe, situate betwixt both; built by, or called so in honour of Arsinoe daughter of Ptolomy the first King Egypt, and Lord of Cyprus, of that house. 4. Drepanun, now called Trepano, under the Promontory so named, a well-traded Port, but miserably defaced by the Turks, when they took this Iland. 5. Connelia, one of the richest of the Iland, by reason of the plenty of Sugar, and Cotton, and Wooll, growing thereabouts. Built in the place of 6. Ci∣thera, dedicated to Venus also, but differing from the Iland of that name in the Aegean Sea, rather in pronunciation than the purity of her oblations: the last syllable save one, in the name of that Iland, being short in verse, but this of Cyprus sounding long, as in this of Virgil.

Est Amathus, est celsa mihi Paphos, at{que} Cithera. Cithera, Amathus divine, And lofty Paphos, are all mine.

2. On the South-East of Paphia lieth the Province or District of AMATHƲSIA, taking up the South parts of the Island which look towards Egypt. Chief Towns hereof, 1. Amathus, giving name unto this division, then of most note, and much frequented for the annuall sacrifices made unto Adonis the darling of Venus, who had here another of her Temples: the ruins of both hardly now discerned. Built as some say by Amasis King of Egypt, when he conquered this Iland; but as others say by some of the Anathites, descended from Anath one of the Sons of Canaan. 2. Cetium, or Citium, (for I find it called by both names) the birth-place of Zeno the Stoick, hence called 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, or Citien∣sis; and memorable for the death of Cimon the Athenian Generall, a Town wherein the memory of Cit∣tim, the Son of Javan, is most apparently preserved. 3. Episcopio, one of the chief of all the Island, built on the place, or out of the decay, of 4. Curias, not far from the Promontory of the same name, founded by the Argives, where Apollo had both a Grove and a Temple, by the name of Apollo Hylates: his Altars in those times held so sacred, that whosoever presumed to touch them, was thrown into the Sea from the Promontory or rocks adjoining. 5. Salines, or Salinae, so called from the rich Saltpits, one of the chief Towns of this part; and giving name to one of these twelve Cantrades, into which the whole is now divided.

3. LAPETHIA, the third part of the Iland, lyeth on the North thereof, opposite to Cilicia in Asia Minor. Places of most importance in it, 1. Nicosia, the Regall City of the Kings, and the See of the Arch-Bishop, and the chief of the Iland: antiently called Ledronsis, and Lenteinis; but those mames long ago laid by. Situate in the midest of the Isle; and in a plain and champain Countrey, obun∣dantly fertile and delightfull. Environed with a fair wall, so exactly round as if it had been drawn with a pair of compasses; in circuite about five miles, and both for situation, numbers of people, and magnificent buildings of all sorts both publick and private, compared by some to the most beautiful City of Florence. For∣tified by the Venetians, when in their possession, with new walls, deep ditches, and eleven strong Bull∣warks, with three great Out-works, all of them built according to the Art of modern fortification. But notwithstanding all these works, and the help of 250 peece of Cannon planted on the walls, and about the City, it was by the Turks taken at the second or third assault, Septemb. 9. Anno 1570. So evident a truth it is, that Fortifications are more strengthened by the gallantry and courage of the Defendants, than the Defendants are by their Fortifications. 2. Cerines, situate neer the Sea, strong by art and nature, and furnished with all things necessary to endure a siege; but yielded to the Turks by Alfonsus Palacius the unwarlike Governour, terrified with the great slaughter made at the sack of Nicosia, before the enemy came neer it. At first called Ceurania, and said to have been built by Cyrus the great Persian King, when he first subdued the nine Kings hereof, and united the Iland to that Crown; blest with a more temperate and wholsome air, than any other in the Countrey. 3. Tremitus, the birth-place of Spiridion, a Bishop of the Primitive times, renowned for miracles, many of which reported by Sozomen, lib. 1. cap. 10. and other Ecclesiaaesticall writers. Wholly decaied, the ruine of it much contributing to the rise of Nicosia. 5. Lapithus (by Pliny called Lapeto) on the banks of a small Riveret of that name. Of so great note in former times, that it gave to this Division the name of Lapethia. In this part standeth the hill Olympus (now the Mountain of the holy Cross) described before.

4. SALAMINE, the fourth and last Province of this Iland, taketh up the whole East-parts hereof: So named from 1. Salamis, once the chief City of the Isle, and the Sea of the Primate, or Me∣tropolitan hereof, in the Primitive times. Destroyed by the Jewes in the reign of Trajan, and re-built again; but being after that taken, sacked, and razed unto the ground by the Saracens, in the time of He∣raclius, it never could again recover: the Metropolitan See after that subversion, being removed to Ni∣cosia.

It was sometimes, and by some writers, called Constantia also; but that name could give it no more perpetuity than the other of Salamis. Memorable whilest it stood for the founder of it, being Teucer the sonne of I elamon King of Salamis, an Isle of the Aegean Sea; banished his Countrey by his Father, and setled in this Iland by the power of Belus, King of Phoenicia: as also for a famous Temple sacred unto Jupiter, hence called Salaminius. Out of the ruins hereof arose 2. Famagusta, now the prime City of rhese parts; built as is said by Costa, the Father of Saint Catharize; but that uncertain. Situ∣ate ate at the East end of the Iland, in a plain and low ground betwixt two Promontories, the one called the 〈◊〉〈◊〉 of Saint Andren, and the other Cap o di Griego, or the head of Groecia. In compass not above two miles, in form four square, but that the side towards the East stretcheth out more in length than the other three. On two parts beaten on with the Sea, the other parts towards the Land defended with a Ditch not above fifteen foot in breadth, an old stone wall, and certain Bulwarks. The Haven (opposite to Tripolis a Town of Syria) openeth towards the South-east, defended from the injury of the Sea by two great Rocks, betwixt which the Sea cometh in at a narrow passage not above forty paces broad, but after opening wider and wider, ma∣keth a convenient Harbour, rather safe than large, assured both by the difficult entrance, and a chain crossed over it. The whole Town, when the Turks appeared before it, but meanly fortified: the works of it of the old fashion, generally decaied except one Bulwark, which was built according to the modern Arts of Fortification, with Palisadoes, Curteins, Casemates, and all other Additaments: most gallantly defended by Bragadine the noble Generall, to the wonder and envy of the Turks, who spent no lesse then 118000 great shot upon it; and at last yielded upon honourable terms, had they been as punctually performed. 3. Aphrodisium, so named of Venus, whom the Greeks called Aplrodite, who had here another of her Temples. 4. Arsinoe, built also by one of the Arsinoes Queens of Egypt (there being two others of this name, and the same foundation,) now called Lescare, and antiently renowned for the Groves of Ju∣p••ter. 5 Tamassus, of good note in the time of Strabo, for rich Mines of Brass, as afterwards for abun∣dance of Verdegreece and Vitriol, found plentifully in the fields adjoyning. 6. Idalium, neer a Mount of the same name, so called by accident. For Chalcenor the founder of it being told by Oracle, that he should seat himself, and build a City where he first saw the rising Sun: one of his followers, seeing the Sun begin to rise, cried out 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, that is to say, behold the Sun. Which omen taken by Chalcenor, he here built this City. But whether this were so or not (as for my part I build not very much upon it) certain it is, that Venus had here another Temple, neighboured by the idalian Groves, so memorized and chanted by the antient Poets. So strong an influence had lust and sensuality on this wretched People, that every corner of the Iland was defiled with those brutish Sacrifices which day by day were offered to that impure deitie: though to say truth, it was no marvail if having made their Belly their God, they made also in the next place their glory their shame.

The first Inhabitants of this Iland were the posterity of Cittim the Sonne of Javan, and grand-sonne of Japhet: who having seen his brother Tarshish setled in Cilicia, (where his memory is still preserved in the City of Tarsus) planted himself and his retinue in this opposite Island. The City of Cetium as Ptolemy, or Cuium as Pliny calleth it, one of the antientest of the Iland; which with the authority of Josephus and others of the antient writers, put it out of question. But being this Iland was too narrow to contain his num∣bers, and willing to seek further off for a larger dwelling, he left here so many of his followers as might serve in time to plant the Countrey; and with the rest passed into Macedon, where we have already spo∣ken of him. Made tributary first to Amasis King of Egypt, from which distant about three or four daies failing. Subjected afterwards to the Phoenicians, a neer neighbour to them, who being a Sea-faring people, made themselves masters of the Sea-coasts and maritime places. Cinyras the Father of Myrrha (by whom both Father and Grand-Father to Adonis) is said to have been King of both. The like affirmed of Belus one of his Successsors, who is said to have been the founder of the City of Citium, named so (if not rather repaired than new built by him,) with reference no doubt to ••ittim, the first Progenitor of this People. By the power and favour of this Belus, Teucer the Sonne of Telamon banished his Countrey, accompanied with many followers from Salamis, Athens, and Arcadia, was settled in the East-parts hereof, where the City of Salamis, by him built, was his first plantation. Yet so, that the Phoenicians kept their former hold: it being evident in Story that Eluloeus one of the Successors of this Belus, (but a King of Tyre,) and a Co-temporary with Salmanassar King of Assyria, passed over into Cyprus with a puissant Navy to reduce the Citioeans to obedience, who had then rebelled. The Iland at first comming of Teucer hither so infinitely overgrown with woods, that the people were not able to till the land. In∣somuch that notwithstanding the great wast made of them, both in building ships, and casting metals, a law was made that every one which would should fell them, and take as much ground in severalty for his own inheritance, as he could overcome and make fit for tillage. Encourged herewith, the natural Cypriots, together with the Colonies of Grecians, Phoenicians, and Aegyptians, so bestirred themselves, that at last they brought it unto Champagn: parcelled out in succeeding times amongst nine Kings, for so many Cyrus the great Persian Monarch found at his comming hither. But Cyrus, though he did subdue all those petit Princes, yet he took not from them their estates, or titles: contented with the conquest of it, and an annual tribute. For after this, in the time of Artaxerxes Mnemon, we find Evagoras, and Nicooles, to whom Isocrates inscribed two of his Orations, to be Kings hereof. And in the time of Alexander the Great, Citium it self (such was the honour born unto the Mother-City) had a King a∣part, not subject unto any other. The King whereof to indear himself with the Conquerour, gave him a sword, 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, saith Plutarch, an admirable sword, both for colour and lightness, which he after used in all his fights. And after the death of Alexander, his great Commanders cantoning his e∣states amongst them, the Princes and people of this Iland were in great distractions; not knowing to whom

they might submit for their best advantage. But Ptolomy who had seized on Egypt for his part of the spoil, being strong in shipping, settled them by a personal visit; and fortifying some of the best pieces in it, as∣sured the Countrey to himself. To him and his posterity it continued subject till the time of Ptolomy Aule∣tes the nineth King of this line in our Accompt, who gave it for a portion to one of his Brethren: in whose time, the Romans, without any colour or pretence of quarrell, but only to enrich themselves with the spoil of the Iland, sent Portius Cato to subdue it. And he at first assayed to get it with die Kings con∣sent, offering him, in the name of the Roman Senate, the Priest-hood of the Temple of Paphos, being a rich and gainful Office, and of high esteem among that people. But when Ptolomy for fear of a worse mischief had made away himself by poison, Cato without more ceremony takes possession of it. And be∣cause Ammianus Marcellinus the Historian, hath so significantly expressed this business, and withall described so punctually the estate of this Iland; we will adde to this discourse from him; though somewhat be repeated which was said before. Cyprum insulam procul à Continente distantem, & protuosam, &c.

The Isle of Cyprus, farre distant from the Continent, and well stored with Harbours, is famous, besides many Municipall Towns, by two principall Cities, that is to say, Salamis, and Paphos, the one sacred to Jupiter, and the other to Venus. An Isle so admirably fruitful, and with all things furnish∣ed, that without the help of any forrein Nation, it is able of it self to build and rig forth a ship from the very keel unto the top-sail, and trim it with all tackle necessary for a present voyage. Nor do I shame to say, that with greater avarice than justice, the Romans did invade this Iland; King Ptolo∣my, our old Consederate and Ally, being unworthily proscribed, for no other reason but that our treasury was bare, our Exchequor empty. And he no sooner had prevented this dishonour by a quick and voluntary death, making away himself by poison, but the Iland was forthwith made tributary, and the riches of it, velut hostiles exuvioe classi imposit oe & in urbem adduct oe per Catonem, as the spoils of so re conquered enemy were brought on Ship-bord, and conveyed by Cato unto Rome.

So far and to this purpose he.

I know there is another cause alleged for the sending of Cato on this Errand, viz. that Clodius who was then Tribune and sped the Edict, might have opportunity by his absence to revenge him∣self on Cicero and some others of the opposite faction: but the main business was the money, as before was said; the prey amounting to 7000 Talents, which comes to two Millions, and one hundred thousand Crowns, of coin now currant. Which money and moveables, amounting unto so vast a sum, he fearing to lose by Sea, divided it into many small portions, which he put into several boxes, viz. in every box two Talents and fifty Drachms. At the end of every box he fastened a long rope with a piece of Cork; by which floating above the water, the money, if by Shipwrack lost, might be espied again: which was not much unlike the buoyes which Mariners fasten by long ropes to their Anchors, that they may be the sooner found. We see by this that the pretence of the Romans to this Countrey was very weak: Avariùs magis quam justius sumus assecuti, are the words of Sextus Rutus also. But being made a Roman Pro∣vince, it was in the division of the Empire assigned to the Constantinopolitan Emperours: under whom it suffered, as all other parts of the Empire did, by the violent invasion of the Saracens, who spoiled and ransacked it in the time of Constans the second, destroying then the City of Salamis or Constantia. But that tempest being overblown, they returned again unto that Empire, governed by a Succession of Dukes, till the year 1184. At which time Androuicus Comnenus usurping the Greek Empire, compelled Isaacibus 〈◊〉〈◊〉 one of the bloud Royal, to shift for himself: who seasing on this Iland made himself King there∣of, and ruling till the year 1191. when Richard the first of England, being denyed the Common courtesie of taking in fresh water, and seeing his Souldiers abused by the Cypriots, not only took the King Prisoner, but subdued the whole Iland. And as Paterculus telleth us, that when Marcus Antonius had captivat∣ed Aramasdes King of Armenia; Catenis, sed ne quid honori deesset, aureis vinxit; So did our Rich∣ard keep a decorum towards this Prisoner, binding him not in bonds of Iron, but silver. King Richard having thus possessed himself of this Countrey, sold it for ready money, (which for his mannaging of his intended wars against the Turk, he most needed) unto the Templers: and taking it, upon I know not what dis∣content, again from them, he bestowed it on Guy of Lusignam, the titulary and miserable King of Hieru∣talem; receiving in way of exchange, the title of that lost and shipwracked Kingdome; with which title be and some of his Successours for a time were honoured.

In the posterity of this Guy, this Iland continued free and absolute till the year one thousand foure hundred twentythree when Melechella (or Melechnaser) Sultan of Egypt, invaded this Coun∣trey, took John King hereof Prisoner, ransomed him for 150000 Sultanies, restored him to his Kingdome, and imposed on him and his Successours, the yearly tribute of 40000 Crowns. This John was Father to another John, whose two Children were Carlotte a legitimate daughter, and James a ba∣stard Sonne. James, after the death of his Father, dispossessed his Sister Carlotte of the Crown, by the con∣sent and help of the Sultan of Egypt. and the better to strengthen himself against all opposition, he took to wife Catharine Cornari, daughter by adoption to the Venetian Senate; whom at his death he made his heir, if the child she went withall (having then none by her) should die without issue, as it did, not long after it was born: and she seeing the factious Nobility too head-strong to be bridled by a female au∣thority, like a good child resigned her Crown and Scepter to the Venetian State, Anno 1473. These defended it against all claims, (paying only as tribute to the Aegyptian, and after to the Turkish Sultans, the 40000 Crowns before mentioned;) till the year 1570. when Mustapha, Generall of the Turks, wrested it from the Venetians, to the use of his Master Selimus the second, who pretended title to it as Lord of Aegypt. The governour of the Venetian Forces at the time of this unfortunate loss, was Signior Bragadino: who as long as hope of succours, meanes of resistance, or possibility of prevailing continued,

with incredible valour made good the Town of Famagusta, in whose defence consisted the welfare of the whole Island. At last he yielded it on honourable conditions, had they been as faithfully kept, as pun∣ctually agreed on. But Mustapha the Turkish Generall inviting to his Tent, the principall men of worth in the Town, caused them all to be murdered: and as for Bragadin himself, he commanded his ears to be cut off, his body to be flead alive, and his skin stuffed with straw, to be hanged at the main yard of his Gally. The chief of the prisoners and spoiles were in two tall ships, and one Gallion, sent unto Se••∣mus; but he never saw them. For a Noble Cyprian Lady destinated to the lust of the Grand Signeour, fired certain barrels of powder; by the violence whereof both the vessels and the booty in them, were in part burned, in part drowned. A famous and heroick act; inferiour unto none of the Roman Dames, so much commended in their Stories, though more to be commended in a Roman than a Christian Lady.

Thus having summed up the affaires of this Iland from the first plantation of it, till this last sad conquest, I will lay down the succession of the Cyprian Kings of the Noble Lusignam Family, in this ensuing Catalogue of

The Kings of Cyprus.

• 1. Guy of Lusignam, the titulary King of Hierusalem, estated in the Kindome of Cyprus by Ri∣chard the first of England.
• 2. Almericus, the brother of Guy.
• 3. Hugh, the Sonne of Almericus.
• 4. Henry, the Sonne of Hugh.
• 5. Hugh II. Sonne of Henry.
• 6. Hugh III. Sonne of Hugh the second.
• 7. John, Sonne of Hugh the third.
• 8. Henry II. the Brother of John.
• 9. Hugh IV. Sonne of Guido, the younger brother of John, and Henry the second.
• 10. Peter, the Sonne of Hugh the fourth.
• 11. Petrinus, the Sonne of Peter.
• 12. James, younger brother of Peter, and Uncle to Petrinus.
• 13. James, the Sonne of James, made Tributary by Melechnaser, to the Kingdome of Aegypt.
• 14. John II. the Sonne of Janus.
• 15. Carlotte, sole Daughter and heir of John the second, first maryed to John the Prince of Portugal, and after to Lewis Prince of Savoy; outed of her estate and Kingdome, by
• 16. James II. the bastard Sonne of John the second, who by a strong hand seized upon it; and by help of the Venetians kept it during life.
• 17. James III. born after the decease of his Father, whom he survived not very long. After whose death, being the last of this Family, the Venetians possessed themselves of Cyprus: which they invaded with no better title than the Romans had done in former times; and not likely to be blest with a long fruition of that which they had so unjustly got into their hands. But of that already.

And here it is to be observed that these Cyprian Kings retaining the title of Hierusalem (towards which they sometimes cast an eye) bestowed upon their greatest Subjects, and deserving Servitors, both titles of Honour and Offices of State, belonging antiently to that Kingdome. So that we find amongst them a Prince of Antioch, a Prince of Galilee, a Count of Tripoli, a Lord of Caesarea, and a Lord of Mount Tabor; a Seneschall of Hierusalem, a Constable, Marshall, and High Chamberlain of that King∣dome also. With better reason, though no doubt with as little profit, as the Pope gives Bishopricks, and Arch-Bishopricks in Greece or Aegypt. But those titular Offices are now quite extent, though possi∣bly some of the titles of honor which were took from thence, may be still remaining.

But to return unto the Turks, having thus taken Famagusta, and Nicosia, on which the whole Iland did depend, all other Cities of it, and the whole by consequence, were forced to submit to the Turkish Tyranny. The Noble men, and Citizens of principall quality, either most cruelly massacred in the sack of those Towns, or banished for ever their native Countrey, as men whose living there might possibly en∣danger their new conquest. But the Countrey people, Artificers, and persons of inferiour rank, permit∣ted to enjoy both their lives and livelyhoods; together with their severall and respective religions, in the same manner as before: paying such ordinary taxes as were laid upon them. And so this goodly Iland came into the hands of the Turks, who have hitherto enjoied the possession of it: For notwithstanding that the 〈◊〉〈◊〉 in the year next following, with the help of the Pope and King of Spain, gave the Turks that great and memorable overthrow, at the famous battel of Lepanto: yet did they nothing in pur∣suit of so great a victory for the recovery of this Iland; and indeed they could not: the confederates return∣ing home, and dissolving their Fleet, as soon as they had secured their own estates by the overthrow of the Tnrkish Navy. And though the Venetians, to put the best face they could on so great a losse, so highly pleased themselves with the following Victory, that they put the same in balance with the losse Cyprus: yet an ingenious Turk to let them see the folly of so vain a boasting, compared the losing of Cyprus, to the loss of an Arme, which could not without a miracle be recovered; and the loss at Lepanto to the shaving off of ones beard, which growes the thicker for the cutting, as indeed it proved: For the next year

the Turks armed out another Navy, no lesse formidable than the other had been before, braving therewith the whole Christian Forces, not as then disbanded.

What the Revenues of it were to the Kings hereof, I cannot certainly determine. The profits of Salt only, and that of the Custome-house yielded yearly to the Signcury of Venice, when it was in their hands, a million of Crowns. For the Customes and profits of the Salt were farmed for 500000 Crowns 〈◊〉〈◊〉, which being turned into the Chief Cyprian Commodities, were counted double worth that money, when unladed at Venice. To which if we should adde the lands of the former Kings, and other waies of raising money on the Subject, I cannot see, but the Intrado of the Crown must needs amount constantly to a mil∣lion and an half yearly, if it were not more.

The Armes hereof were quarterly, first Argent, a Cross Potent between four Crosses Or; secondly Barre-wise of eight pieces, Arg. and Azure, supporting a Lion Passant Azure, Crowned, Or; thirdly, a Lion Gules; and fourthly, Argent, a Lion Gules; as Bara a French Herald hath given the Blazon.

On the East of Cyprus towards Syrialy four small Ilands, which Ptolomy calleth by the name of Cli∣des, not far from the Promontory of that name; both Promontory and Iland now called Saint Andrews: and towards the West another little knot of Islets, which he calls Carpasiae; but nothing memorable in either. So I passe them over.

There are in Cyprus Arch-Bishops 2. Bishops 6.

And so much for CYPRVS.

OF SYRIA.

SYRIA is bonnded on the East, with the River Euphrates, by which parted from Me∣sopotamia; on the West, with the Mediterranean Sea; on the North, with Cilicia and Armenia Minor, from the last parted by Mount Taurus; and on the South, with Pale∣stine, and some parts of Arabia. The length hereof from Mount Taurus to the edge of Arabia, is said to be five hundred twenty and five miles; the breadth from the Meaiter∣ranean to the River Euphrates computed at four hundred and seventy; drawing somewhat neer unto a square.

In the Scriptures it is called Aram, and the People Aramites, because first peopled and possessed by Aram the sonne of Sem, though Hamath, Arphad, and Sidon, the sonnes of Canaan, did also put in for a share: and yet not called thus by the Sctiptures onely, but by some of the Heathen writers also. For Strabo doth not onely acknowledge, that the Syrians in his time were called 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, but citeth Possidoniu a more antient Writer, for proof that the 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, which Homer speaketh of must be those Syrians: further averring, that the Syrians called themselves by the name of Aramaei, or plainly Aramites. But by the Greeks they are called Syrians, or Surians, from the City Tyre, called antiently by the name of Sur, o•• Tsur, (of which more hereafter) either because the Tyrians or Tsurians, had in those times the com∣mand of the Sea-coasts of this Countrey; or else that Tyro or Tsur being the chief Mart-Town of all those parts, was the place where they ttaded with these Aramites. Conform to which antient Appellations, the City of Tyre is again called Sur, and this Countrey Soria.

But here we are to understand, that though the Syria of the Romans, as it was a member of that Empire, was limited within the bounds before laid down; yet antiently as well the Aram of the Hebrewes, as the Syria of the Greeks and Romans, was of greater Latitude: of which because it may be usefull to the un∣derstanding of holy Scriptures, and of some Classick Authors also, I shall enlarge a litle further. For A∣ram, taken in the largest exception of it, extendeth from the Coast of Cilicia, North, to Idumaea towards the South; from the River Tigris in the East, to the Mediterranean Sea, upon the West, conteining besides the Syria of the Greeks and Romans (in which Palestine also was included) Arabia the Desart, and Petraea, Chaldaea, Babylonia, and all those Provinces to which the name Aram is either prefixed or sub∣joyned in the Book of God, as Aram-Naharaijm, Aram-Sobab, Padan-Aram, Aram-Maahah, Sede-Aram, Aram-Beth-Rehob; all mentioned in the holy Scriptures. Some doe extend it further yet, and do not only bring Armenia within the Latitude of this name, which they derive from Aram-minni, whose neighbourhood to Syria may give some colour to the errour; but even those People of Cappadocia bordering on the Euxine Sea, the Inhabitants of which were antiently called Luco Syri, or white Syrians. But this not having any good warrant or authority wherewithall to back it, shall not come under the compass of this consideration. But for the rest, I find it generally agreed upon amongst the learned, that Aram-Naharaum, is the same with the whole Countrey of Mesopotamia, so named both by the Jewes and Gre∣cians, because it is environed with the two famous Rivers of Tygris and Euphrates; which Priscian by a 〈◊〉〈◊〉 Latine name, would have to be called Medanna (but Inter-Amna by his leave would express it bet∣ter) and as for Pad••n-Aram wherein Laban dwelt, which is called Sed••-Aram by the Propher Hosea, chap. 12. v. 13. that is a part onely of the other: the whole Countrey of Aram-Naharai••m or Mesopo∣tamia being divided into two parts; whereof the more fruitfull lying North-ward, is called Padan-Aram, or Sede-Aram, to whose Inhabitants Xenophon gives the name of Syrians; the barren and more defart ly∣ing towards the South, which by the same Author is called Arabia. For Aram-Maachah, mentioned 1 Corin. 19. 6. it is conceived to be that part of Syria, which was after named Comagena, whereof Samo∣sata was the M••ropolis or Mother City. And as for Aram-Sobab, of which and of Adadezer the King thereof, there is so frequent mention in the Books of the Kings and Chro••icles, it was the Province lying on the North-East of Damascus, and so extending to the banks of the River Euphrates, and is the ••ame with that which afferwards was called 〈◊〉〈◊〉 from the City Palmyra. South-west of which amongst the pety Kingdomes on the North of Gessur in the Land of Palestine, lay the Kingdome of Aram-B••••••-Rehob, confederate with Ammon in the warre which they had with David, 2. Sam. 10. 6. Nor did the Greeks less extend the name of Syria, then the Hebrewes did the name of Aram, if they stretched it ••ot further. Certain I am, that Strabo comprehendeth the Assyrians in the name of Syria, where he af∣firmeth, that the Medes over-ruled all Asia, 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, the Empire of the Syrians (he meaneth the Assyrians) being overthrown. And in Herodotus it is said, that those whom the Barba∣rians call Asirians, 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, were called Syrians by the Greeks. And to that purpose Justin also, Imperium Assyrij, qui postea Syri dicti sunt, Annos 1300 tenuere. But these all

writ after the time that Seleucus and his race had the possession of the Eastern Empire: who living for the most part in Syria, from whence they might more easily furnish themselves with Souldiers out of Gree••••, (as they did most commonly for all their military expeditions) caused all the other parts of their large do∣minions to be called in tract of time by the name of Syria. But on the other side, as the Syria of the Romans extended not to the East and South, as the Aram of the Hebrews did: so it contained some other Regions, that is to say, those of Phoenicia and Palestine, which were not comprehended in the name of Aram; as being planted by a people of another race, and of different fortunes, till brought to∣gether under the command of the Babylonians. In which regard we will treat severally of the natures of the soyl and people; their originals, government, and successes, till we have brought them into one hand: and then continue their affaires as one joint estate. But first we will survey the antient and present fortunes of Christianity, and other Religions herein embraced or tolerated, wherein the whole, according to the bounds and limits before laid down, is alike concerned.

And for Religions in this Countrey, here is choise enough; those namely of the Mahometan, Christi∣an, Pagan; and one compounded out of all, which is that of the Drusians. The Mahometan imbra∣ced by the generality of the people throughout the whole, and by all that be in any office or authority, is only countenanced and approved of, though the rest be tolerated. The Pagan intertained onely in the moun∣tainous Countreys bordering on Armenia; inhabited by a people whom they call Curdi, or the Curdenes, supposed to be descended from the antient Parthians, as being very expert in Bows and Arrows, their most usual Armes. A race of people who are said to worship alike both God and the Devil; the one that they may receive benefits from him, the other that he may not hurt them. Se alios deos colere ut pro∣sint, alios••ne noceant, as Lactantius doth affirm of the antient Grecians. But their principall devotions are addressed to the Devil only, and that upon good reasons, as themselves conceive. For God they say is a good man, and will do no body no harm, but the Devill is a mischievous fellow, and must be plea∣sed with sacrifices that he do not hurt them. And for the Drusians, they are conceived to be the remainder of those Frankes (by which name the Turks call all Western Christians) who driven unto the mountains, (when they lost the soveraig••ty and possession of the Holy Land) and defending themselves by the advantage of the place, could never be wholly rooted out by the Turks: contented at the length to afford them both peace and liberty of their religion. But they have so forgot the Principles of that Religi∣on, that they retain nothing of it but baptism; and not that generally neither: accounting it lawful most unlawfully to many their own Daughters, Sisters, or Mothers: and yet conform unto the Turks in their habit only, wearing the white Turbant, as the Turks do; but abhorring Circumcision, and indulging to themselves the liberty of wine, by law forbidden to the Turks. A people otherwise very warlike, stout and resolute: with great, both constancy and courage, resisting hitherto the Attempts of the Turkish Sul∣tans. The Countrey they possess environed with the confines of Joppa about Caesarea Palestinae, betwixt the Rivers of Jordan and Orontes, extending Eastwards as far as the plains of Damascus: so that there is no part of Syria, except Comagena, unto which their habitations reach not.

But for the Christian Faith it was first preached here by some of the dispersed Brethren, (which fled from the rage of persecution) in Phonice, and the City of Antiochia, amongst whom Saint Peter, as he passed through all quarters, Acts 931. is by the Fathers said to have been the Chief. The Church more fully planted in it by Barnabas first, after by Paul and Barnabas jointly. Who spending there a whole year together, inlarged the borders of the Church, and gained much people, as is said Acts 11. v. 19. &c. insomuch that here the Disciples were first called Christians, v. 26. Not called so accidentally as a thing of chance, but on a serious consultation had amongst themselves, and a devout invocation on the name of God to direct them in it. The word 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 used in the Originall importeth somewhat of O∣racular and Divine direction. And certainly it standeth with reason that it should be so. For if upon the giving of a name to John the Baptist, there was not only a consultation had of the Friends and Mother, but the dumb Father called to advise about it; and if we use not to admit the poorest child of the parish in∣to the congregation of Christs Church by the door of Baptism, but by the joint invocation of the name of God for his blessings on it: with how much more regard of Ceremony and Solemnity must we conceive that the whole body of Christ•• people were baptized into the name of Christians? And there is some proof for it too, besides probability and conjectures. For Suidas, and before him Johannes Antiochenus an old Cosmographer, do expresly say, that in the daies of Claudius Caesar, ten years after the Ascension of our Lord and Saviour, Euodius received Episcopal consecration, and was made Patriarch of Antioch the Great in Syria, succeeding immediately to St. Peter: then addeth, that at that time the Disciples were first cal∣led Christians, 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, &c. i. e. Euodius their Bishop calling them to a Solemn Assembly, and imposing this new name upon them, whereas before they were called Nazarites and Galilaeans. A people so hated by the Hea∣then, that they ceased not to slander them from the first beginning. For as concerning this Sect; we know that it is every where spoken against, said the Jews of Rome to the Apostle, Acts 28. 22. Tacitus, a Roman, but a Gentile, goes yet further with them, calling them homines per flagitia invisos, & novis∣s••m meritos exempla; the calumny in his time being strong and generall, that at their private meetings they devoured Infants, and had carnall company with their Mothers and Sisters. Which defamations notwithstanding they grew in few years to so great numbers that they were a terrour to their Enemies, though grievously afflicted, tortured, and put to severall kindes of death, under the ten Famous Persecutions, raised against them, by Nero, Anno 67. 2. Domitian, Anno 96. 3. Trajanus, Anno 110. 4. Marcus Antonius, Anno 167. 5. Severus, Anno 195. 6. Maximinus, Anno 237. 7. Decius, Anno 250. 8. Val••rianus, Anno 259. 9. Aurelianus, Anno 278. 10. by Diocle∣tianus,

Anno 293. All, but this last especially so extremely raging, that (as Saint Hierome writech in one of his Epistles) there were martyred 5000 for each day in the year, except the first of January, on which they used not to shed bloud. But jangu••s Martyrum semen Ecclesiae. This little grain of Mustard-seed, sowed by Gods own hand, and watered by the blood of so many holy men, grew so great a tree, that the branches of it spred themselves over all the world: and go: such footing, even in the Roman Army it self, (mea commonly not of the strictest kind of Religion,) that when Julisn the Apostata had vomited out his foul, with Viciste tandem galilea, they elected Jouiniar, though a Christian, for his Successor, with this acclamation, Christianionines sumus, We are also Christians. But see how the baptizing of Gods people by the name of Christians, in the City of Antioch, hath drawn me cut of my way. I return a∣gain, both to the place and to the Authoe. In whose evidence, besides what doth concern the imposition of the name of Christian upon the body of the faithful, we have a testimony for Saint Peters being Bishop of An lock, the first Bishop thereof (of the Church of the Jews therein as lest) as is said positively by Eusebius in his (Chronologie, Saint Hierome in his Catalogue of Ecclesiasticall writers, Saint Chrysostonze in his Homilie de Translatione Ignatii, Theodoret, Dialog. 1. Saint Gregory Epistol. lib. 6. cap. 37. and be∣fore any of them by Origen, in his sixt Homily on Saint Luke. With reference whereunto, and in re∣spect that Antioch was accompted alwaies the principal City of the East parts of the Roman Empire (the Prefect of the East for the most part residing in it) the Bishop hereof in the first Ages of Christianity had jurisdiction over all the Churches in the East, as far as the bounds of that Empire did extend that way. To which by Constantine the Great the Provinces of Cilicia and Isauria, with those of Mesopotamus and Osroent were after added: Containing fifteen Roman Provinces, or the whole Diocese of the Orient. And though by the substracting of the Churches of Palestine, and the decay of Christianity in these parts by the con∣quests of the Turks and Saracens, the jurisdiction of this Patriarch hath bin very much lessened: yet William of Tyre, who flourished in the year 1130. reciteth the names of 13 Archiepiscopal, 21 Metropolitical, and 127. Episcopal, Sees, yielding obedience in his time to the See of Antoch. Since which that number is much diminished, Mahometanism more and more increasing, and Christianity divided into Sects and factions: insomuch as of three forts of Christians living in these Countreys, viz. the Maronites, Jacobites, and Melchites, onely the Melchites are subordinate to the Church of Antioch, the others having Patriarels of their own Religion.

And first for the Melchites, who are indeed the true and proper Members of the Church of Antioch, and the greatest body of Christians in all the East, they are so named in way of scorn by the Jacobite and Maronite Schismatick, separating without just cause from their communion. The name derived from Malchi, signifying in the Syriack language a King or Emperour: because adhering to their Primate, they followed the Canons and decisions of preceding Councils, ratisied by authority of the Emperour Leo, by whom subscription was required to the Acts thereof, and were in that respect, (as we use to say) of the Kings Religion. Conform in points of doctrine to the Church of Greece, but that they celebrate divine ser∣vice as solemnly on the Saturday as upon the Sunday: subject to their true and original Patriarch, who since the destruction of Antioch doth reside in Damaseus; and on no terms acknowledging the authority of the Popes of Rome.

Next for the Maronites, they derive that name either from Marona; one of the principall Villages where they first inhabited; or from the Monasterie of S. Maron, mentioned in the first Act of the Council of Consumople holden under Mennas, the Monks of which called Maronites, were the head of their Sect. Some points they hold, in which they differ from all Orthodox Christians; others in which they differ onely from the Church of Rome. Of the first sort, 1. That the Holy Ghost proceedeth from the Father onely, without relation to the Sonne. 2. That the Souls of men were created all together at the first be∣ginning. 3. That male Children are not be Baptized together, but at severall times by one and one. 4. That Herenques returning to the Church, are to be re-baptized. 5. That the Child is made unclean by the touch of his Mother till her purification, and therefore not Baptizing Children till that time be past, which after the birth of a Male Child, must be forty daies, of a Female, eighty. 6. That the Euchirist is to be given to Children presently after Baptism. 7. That the fourth Mariage is utterly unlawfull. 8. That the Father may dissolve the mariage of his Sonne or Daughter, 9. That young men are not to be Ordeived Priests or Deacons except they be maried. 10. That nothing Strangled, or of blood, may be eaten by Christians. 11. That Women in their monethly courses are not to be admitted to the Eucharist, of to comeinto the Church. 12. And finally (which was indeed their first discrimination from the Orthodox Christians) that there was but one will and action in Christ, the Fautors of which opinion had the name of Monothelies. Of the last kind, 1. That the Sacrament of the Lords Supper was to be administred in both kinds; 2. and in Leavened bread; 3. that bread to be broken to the Communicants (and not each man to have his waser to himself,) according to the first Institution. 4. Not reserving that Sacrament, 5. not carrying any part of the confecrated Elements to sick persons in danger of death. 6. That Aleri∣age is nothing inferiour to the single life. 7. That no man entreth the Kingdome of Heaven till the General Judgement. 8. That the Saturday or old Sabbath is not to be fasted; 9. nor the Sacrament upon dates of fasting to be administred till the Evening. They withdrew themselves from the See of Antioch, and set up a Patriark of their own, many ages since, (but the certain time thereof I find not) conferring on him for the greater credit of their Schism, the honourable title of the Patriarch of Antioch. His name perpe∣tually to be Peter, as the undoubted Successour of that Apostle in the See thereof. Dispersed about the spurres and branches of Mount Libanus, where they have many Townships and seattered Villages, of which four are reported to retain in their common speech the true antient Syriack; that is to say 1. Eden, a small village, but a Bishops See, by the Turks called Aechera, 2. Hatchteth 3. Sherrie, 4. Bole∣sa,

or Blousa, little superiour to the rest in bigness or beauty, but made the seat of their Patriarch, when he comes amongst them. At such time as the Western Christians were possessed of these parts, they submitted to the Church of Rome; but upon their expulsion by the Turks and Saracens, they returned a∣gain to the obedience of their own Patriarch, on whom they have ever since depended. His residence for the most part at Tripolis a chief Town of Syria; but when he came to visit his Churches, and take an ac∣compt of his Suffragan Bishops (who are nine in number) then at Blousa, as is said before. Won to the Pa∣pacy again by John Baptist a Jesuite, in the time of Pope Gregory the thirteenth, who sent them a Ca∣techism from Rome printed in the Arabian language (which is generally spoken by them) for their instru∣ction in the Rudiments of that Religion: yet so, that their Patriarch still retains his former power, and the Priests still officiate by the old liturgies of those Churches in the Syriack tongue. So that this reconciliati∣on upon the matter is but a matter of complement on the one side, and oftentation on the other: without any increase of power or patrimony to the Pope at all. And for the Jacobites, though dispersed in many places of this Countrey, yet since they are more entirely settled in Mesopotamia, where their Patriarch alto hath his abode or residence, we shall there speak of them.

The language vulgarly here spoken is the Arabick tongue, continued here ever since the subjugation of these Countreys by the Saracens. But antiently they spake the Syrian and Phoenician languages. Of which the first, (for of the other we shall speak when we come to Phoenicia) was the very same with the Children, (as the learned Brerewood hath observed) either originally so, or else received by them when first conquered by the Babylonians. In which respect the Jews when they returned home from their long Capcivity, gave to the language which they brought with them the name of Syriack; being a compound of the Hebrew and Chaldaean tongues: Chaldean for a great part of it, as to the substance of the words; but Hebrew as to the notation of points, Conjugations, Affixes, and other properties of their former and original speech. And of this more herafter also, when we come to Palestine. But whatsoever their lan∣guage was in former times, it is now so overtopped by the Arabick, that it is spoken in some Villages of the Maronites onely in all these Countreys; the Arabick being generally used in all the rest, as was said before.

Principall Rivers of these parts, are, 1. Chorsaeus, called Chison by the Hebrews, which hath its fountain in Palestine, but his fall in Phoenicia, not far from Mount Carmel. 2. Orontes, now called Saldino, and by some writers Jordan the less, ariseth out of the hills called Pieria, not far from Mount Libanus, and after a while running under the ground, breaketh forth again about Apamia, and passing by the great City of Antioch, falleth into the Sea not farre from it. It was first called Tiphon, and took this name from one Orontes who built the first bridge over it, as we find in Strabo. 3. Eleuthorie, which riseth out of some part of Libanus, and glideth with a speedy course thorough a strangely-intricate Channel, into the Mediterranean Sea: guilty of the death of the Emperour Frederick Barbarossa, who falling from his horse as he pursued the Infidels, and oppressed with the weight of his Armour, was here drowned, and lyeth buried at Tyre. It is now called Casmer. 4. Sing as, by some said to be called Marsoas also, which arising in the mountainous parts of Comagena, and passing by the City of Aleppo, falleth into Euphrates. 5. Euphrates, the most famost River of the East; of which more hereafter.

Chief Mountains of it, 1. Carmel, which being properly of Phaenicia, we shall there speak of it. 2. Pieria, out of which the River Orontes hath its first Originall. 3. Casius, not far from Antioch, said to be four miles high perpendicularly. 4. Libanus, famous for its multitude of Cedars growing there up∣on; affording materials unto Solomon for the holy Temple. Besides which it afforded such store of Frankin∣cense, that some derived the name from 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, signifying Frankincense in the Greek: and so replenished with Honey falling from the Heavens, and hanging on the Boughs of the Trees, that the Husbandmen used to sing (as Gallen telleth us) that God rained honey; and yearly filled their pots and vessels with the sweets thereof. This the most famous and greatest Hill of all these parts, extending in length 150 miles, that is to say, from Sidona a City of Phoenicia, to Smyrna, one of the Cities of Coele-Syria: and taking seven hun∣dred miles in compass. Inhabited wholly in a manner by the Maronite Christians, who to keep that dwelling to themselves, without the intermixture of Mahometans, doe yearly pay to the Great Turk seventeen Sultanies a man, for every one above twelve years of Age, each Sultante being reckoned at seven shillings and six pence of our money. And yet those Maronites though intire, without intermixture, are held to be the smallest Sect, for numbers, in all the East, not estimated to exceed twelve thousand hous∣holds, by reason of the indisposition of this Mountain, in most places unfit for habitation. For besides the cragginess and steepiness of it, which makes many parts hereof to be inaccessible the higher Ridges of it are in a manner perpetually covered with Snow, not melted in so hot a Climat at the neerest approaches of the Sun. And thence no doubt it took this name: the word Leban, in the Hebrew and Phoenician Lan∣guage signisfying White, or whiteness: even as from the like whiteness of Snow, the highest part of the Py∣maan hills had the name of Canus; and that perpetnall Ridge of Mountains which part Italy from France and Germany, had the name of Alpes. 5. Anti-Libanus, opposite to the former, and from that so called, a rich, but litle Vally onely being interposed, out of which Valley the Orontes hath its spring or Fountain; the hill Pieria there begining to advance it self. Some make but one Mountain of them both, divided into two great Ledges or Chains of Hills. Of which the main hody lying towards the North, hath the name of Libanus; that on the South being but a branch or excursion of it, called Anti-Libanus. And to this the Scripture gives some hint, in which both pass for one by the name of Lebanon.

The whole Countrey was antiently divided into these six parts, viz. 1. Phoenicia. 2. Palestine. 3. Syria specially so called. 4. Comagena. 5. Palmyrene, and 6. Coele-Syria, or Syria Cava. But Palestine, coming under a more distinct consideration, we shall now speak onely of the rest.

1. PHOENICIA.

PHOENICIA is bounded on the East and South, with Palestine; on the North, with Sy∣ria properly and specially so called; on the West, with the Mediterranean Sea. So called by the Gre∣cians, from the abundance of Palm-trees therein growing, the word 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 in that language signifying a Palm. And for a further proof hereof (for I know there are other Etymons and Originations pretended for it) the Palm was antiently the speciall Cognizance or Ensign of this Countrey, as the Olive-branch and Conie of Spain, the Elephant of Africk, the Camel of Arabia, and the Crocodile to Egypt, be∣ing peculiar to those Countries. And in an old Coyn of the Emperour Vespasian's stamped for a memoriall of his conquest of Judaea, the Impress is a woman sitting in a sad and melancholick posture at the back of Palm-trees, with these two words, Judaea Capta, inscribed thereon: in which no question may be made but that the desolate woman signifieth the Land of Judaea, and the Palm Phoenicia; Phoenicia being seated immediatly on the North at the back of Jewrie.

But it was thus first called by the Greciaans onely, the Latines and other People after them taking up that name. For by themselves, and the People of Israel their next Neighbours, they are called Canaanites, or the posterity of Canaan, five of whose sonnes, viz. Zidon, Harki, Arvadi, Senari, and Chama∣thi, were planted here: the other six inhabiting more towards the South and East, in the Land of Palestine. For further evidence whereof we may adde these reasons: first, that the same woman which in Saint Mat∣thews Gospel, chap. 15. v. 22. is named a Canaanite, is by Saint Mark, chap. 7. v. 26. called a Sy∣ro-Phoenician. Secondly, Where mention is made in the Book of Josuah of the Kings of Canaan, the Septagint (who very well understood the History and Language of their own Countrey) call them 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, or the Kings of Phoenicia. Thirdly, the Poeni, or Carthaginians, being beyond all dispute a Tyrian or Phoenician Colony, when they were asked any thing of their Originall, would answer that they were Channaei, meaning (as Saint Augustine that Countrey-man doth expound their words) that they were Originally Chanaanites, of the stock of Canaan. And lastly, from the Language of it, which antiently was the old Hebrew, Canaanitish, or the Language of Canaan; spoken both here and in Palestine also, before that Countrey was possessed by the house of Jacob: as appeareth plainly by those names by which the places and Cities of Canaan were called, when and before the Israelites came first to dwell amongst them, which are meerly Hebrew. And so much, as unto the Language is acknowledged by Bochartus also, who in the entrance of his Book inscribed Chanaan, declares what profit may ensue from that undertaking to the Hebrew tongue, cujus Phoenicia lingua dialectus fuit, of which the Phoenician language was a dialect onely.

The Counrrey of it self not great, extended in a good length, from the further side of mount Carmel where it joyns with Palestine, to the River Volanus on the North, by which parted from Syria: but withall so narrow, that it is litle more than a bare Sea-coast, and therefore very rightly called terrarum angustissims by a modern Writer. Rich rather by the benefit and increase of Trade (to which no Nation under Heaven hath been more addicted) than by the naturall Commodities which the Land afforded: yet for the quantity there of no place could be more plentifully furnished with Oyl, Wheat, and the best fort of Balm, and most excellent Honey; the lower part hereof being designed for the Seat of Asher, of whom Moses prophesied, Dent. 33. v. 24. that he should dip his foot in Oyl. So that the Countrey generally, it was well condi∣tioned, lovely to look upon, populous, and adorned with more beautifull Cities, than such a span of Earth could be thought to hold. Of which thus writeth Ammianus, Acclivis monti Libano Phoenicia Regio, plena gratiarum & venustatis, urbibus decorata magnis & pulchris, &c. i. e. Falling from Mount Libanus lieth the Countrey of Phoenicia, full of all graces and elegancies, adorned with great and beau∣tifull Cities, of which the most renowned for the fertility of their soyl, and the same of their achievements, are Tyre, Sidon, Eerytus, &c.

The People antiently by reason of their Maritime situation, were great Adventurers at Sea, trading in almost all the Ports of the then known World, and sending more Colonies abroad upon forreign Plantations than any Nations in the Earth. An active and ingenuous People, said to have been the first Navigators, the first builders of Ships, the first inventors of Letters, (of which hereafter more on some other occasion) and the first authors of Arithmetick; the first that brought Astronomy to an Art or Method; and the first makers of Glass. Defamed in holy Scripture for their gross Idolatries, by which they laid a stumbling∣block at the feet of the Israelites: Astoroth (or Asturte) the Godess of the Sidonians (but whether Ju∣no, Venus, or some other, I dispute not here) being so highly prized amongst them, that Solomon himself when he fell from God, made this one of his Idols. Once yearly, as Eusebius telleth us, they sacrificed some of their sonnes to Saturn, whom in their language they called Moloch. And in the inmost retreats of Libanus had a Temple to Venus, defiled with the practice of most filthy lusts, intemperately using the natu∣rall Sex, and most unnaturally abusing their own. Nor could the purity and piety of the Christian Faith pre∣vail so far as to extinguish these ungodly rites, till Constantine finally destroyed both the Temples and Idols, and left not any thing remaining of them but the shame and infamy. St. Austin addeth, that they did pro∣stitute their Daughters unto Venus, before they maried them: and it is most likely to be true. For the Phoenicians and Cypriots being so near neighbours, and subject for a time to the same Princes also, could not but impart their impure Rites and Ceremonies unto one another.

Rivers of note there can be none in so narrow a Region, but what are common unto others, and shall there be spoken of Most proper unto this is the River of Adonis (now called Canis,) so named most proba∣bly

from Adonis the Dearling of Venus, whose rites are here performed with as much solemnity as they be in Cyprus. His Obsequi••s celebrated yearly in the moneth of June with great howlings and Lamenta∣tions, Lucian fabling that the River usually streameth blood upon that Solemnity; (as if Adonis were newly wounded in the Mountains of Libanus,) to give the better colour to their Superstitions. But the truth is, that this redness of the water ariseth onely from the winds, which at that time of the year blowing very vehemently, doe thereby carry down the stream a great quantity of Minium or red Earth from the sides of those hils, wherewith the waters are discoloured. Such use can Satan make of a naturall Accident to blind the eyes and captivate the understandings of besotted people.

Chief Mountains of this Countrey are, 1. Libanus, spoken of before, which hath here its first advance or rising. 2. Carmel, which Ptolomy placeth in this Countrey, of which it is the utmost part upon the South, where it joyneth with Palestine. Washed on the North-side with the Brook Chison; on the West, with the Mediterranean Sea: steep of ascent, and of indifferent altitude, abounding with severall sorts of fruits, Olives and Vines in good plenty, and stored with herbs both medicinable and sweet of small. The retreat sometimes of Elias, when he fled from Jesabel, whose habitation here, after his decease, was converted to a Jewish Synagogue. To this place (being then in the possession of the Kings of Israel) did that Prophet assemble the Priests of Baal, and having by a miraculous experiment confuted their Idol••trons follies, caused them to be cut in peeces on the banks of the River Chison neer adjoyning to it. Upon this visible declaring of the power and presence of the Almighty, the Gentiles grew perswaded that Oracles were there given by God; by Suetonius called the God Carmelus. Where speaking of Vespafian, who had then newly took upon him the Imperiall dignity, he addeth, Apud Iudaeam Carmeli Dei oracula con∣sulentem•• ta confirmavere sortes, &c. that consulting in Judaea with the Oracle of the God Carmelus, he was assured that whatsoever he undertook should succeed well with him. In after-times the Order of the Friers Carmelites, as successouts unto the Children of the Prophets left here by Eliah, had their name from hence: the Ruines of whose Monastery are still to be seen, with a Temple dedicated to the blessed Vir∣gin; and under that a Cave or Chappell, said to have been the lurking place of that holy Prophet in the time of his troubles.

Places of most importunance in it, 1. Ptolemais, now nothing but a ruine of what it hath been, but formerly of great strength and consequence. Named Ace at the first, a refuge for the Persian Kings in their wars against Egypt: enlarged, or rather new built, by Ptolomy, the first of that race, by whom called Pto∣lemais, which name still continued, though Claudius Casar planting there a Roman Colony, would fain have had it called Colonia Claud••: after the conquest of it by the Saracens, in the time of Omer the great Caliph, it returned towards its first name, and was called Acon, or Acre, both names still remaining in vulgar speech, as that of Ptolemais amongst Latine writers. Situate in the flourish of it on a flat or levell, in form of a triangular-Shield; on two sides neighboured by the Sea which comes up close to it; on the third looking towards the Champaign: environed with a double wall, to each wall a Ditch; fortified on the outside with Towers and Bulwarkes, within the wals so strongly housed as if the whole Town had been a Conjunction of fortresses, and not ordained for private dwellings. In the midst of the City was one Tower of great strength and beauty, which had sometimes been the Temple of Bel-zebub, and was therefore called the Castle of Flies: on the top whereof was maintained a perpetuall light, like the Pharos of Egypt, to give comfort and direction in the night to such Mariners as made towards this Port. Took from the Chri∣stians by the Saracens in the time of Omer, and from them wrested by the Turks with the rest of Syria, it became Christian again Anno 1004. in the Reign of Baldwin the first, brother of the famous Godfrey of Bouillon, and second King of Hierusalem, by the help of the Genoese, who for their pains had the third part of the City assigned unto them. Recovered by Salidine to the Turks, and from him taken again by the Western Christian; under the conduct of Philip of France, and Richard the first of England, Anno 1191. it continued in the possession of the Kings of Hierusalem, notably defended by the Hospitalers (now Knights of Malta) till the year 1291. When besieged by an Army of a hundred and fifty thousand Turks, it was forced to yield, though lost by inches: and the Turks fearing left the Christians would again attempt it, razed it to the ground; demolishing the large walls and arches of it, which lie like massy Rocks on their old foundations. Memorable in those times, for the brave service here done by the Christians of the We∣ster•• parts; of which none more renowned than those of our Richard the first, and Edward the first. This later here treacherously wounded by an Infidell, with a poisoned knife, the venome whereof could by no means be asswaged, till his most vertuous wife (herein proposing a most rare example of conjugall affecti∣on) sucked it out with her mouth. And for the former, he became so terrible and redoubted among the Turks, that when their Children began to cry, they would say, Peace King Richard is coming: and when their horses started, they would spurre them saying, What you Jades, doe you think that King Richard is here. By the Mamalucks, when Lords of Syria, it was patched together, and made fit for habitation rather than defence: not Peopled by above 300 Inhabitants, nor would it have so many but for the Haven adjoyning; which though a small Bay, and of very ill anchorage, is much frequented by the Merchants of our Western World, trading here for their Cotton Wools, with which the neighbouring Countrie is abundantly fur∣nished. I have staid the longer in this place by reason of the great fame and importance of it, as being the last hold which the Christians had of all their conquests; with the loss whereof they laid aside all thoughts of those holy wars.

2. Tyre, seated in a rocky Iland, about seventy paces from the main Land; well built, and circular of form, as well by Art as Nature impregnably fortified. A Colonie of the Sidonians, and therefore by the Prophet Esay, Chapter 23. verse 12. called the Daughter of Sidon: but by them built upon an high hill; the ruines whereof by the name of Palatyrus, or old Tyre, are remaining still.

Removed unto the Iland by Agenor King of the Phaniclans, and by him named Sor, or Tzor, from the rockie situation of it, (as that word importeth.) Mollified by the Greeks to Tyrus, and from them taken by the Luines, though known to them also by the name of Sarra, (the Tyrian purple being by 〈◊〉〈◊〉 and some other of the antient Poets, called Sarrarum Ostrum,) and now at last returned to its first and originall name, vulgarly at this day called Snr. A City in the elder times of great trade and wealth: the Prophet Esay chap. 27. v. 8. calling the Merchants hereof Princes, and her Chapmen the Nobles of the World. Excelling all others of those times both for Learning and Manufactures, especially for the dying of Purple, first here invented, and that as Julius Pollux faith, by a very Accident: the D••g of Hercu••es (or if not his, some Dog or other) whose lips by eating of the fish called Couchilis or Purpura, had been made of that colour. Grown to great pride, by reason of the wealth and pleasures, her destruction was fore-signified by the holy Prophets: accomplished in Gods own time by Nebucadnezzar; who with great industrie and toil joyned it to the Continent. But his works being demolished by the fury of the Sea, and the labour of the Tyrians, it was after seventy years again reedified; and having flourished after that for two hundred years, by Alexander the Great was again demolished; to whose indefatigable per∣severance nothing was impossible. For having filled the Channell with the stones and rubbish of old Ty••••, and rammed them in with huge beams brought from Libanus, he made a passag•• for his Army: and having once approached the walls, so over-topped them with Towers, and frames of Timber, that at last he made himself Master of it, putting to the sword all such as resisted, and causing two thousand of them to be hang∣ed in cold blood, all along the Shore, for a terrour to others. This rendition of the Town was divined by the Southsayers which followed the Camp of Alexander, upon a dream which he had not long before. For dreaming that he had disported himself with Satyres; the Diviners onely making of one word two, found that 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 was no more than 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 that is, Tui Tyrus; and it hapned accordingly. Recovering once again both her riches and beauties, she became a confederate of the Romans in the growth of their fortunes, endued by them with the privileges of their City, for her great fidelity. Made in the best times of Christianity, the Metropolitan See for the Province of Phoenicia, the Bishop hereof having under him fourteen Suffragan Bishops. Subjected to the Saracens in the year six hundred thirty and six, and having groaned under that yoke for the space of fourhundred eighty and eight years, was at the last regained by Guar••∣mund Patriarck of Hierusalem, in the Reign of the second Baldwin, the Venetians contributing their as∣sistance in it, Anno 1124. In vain attempted afterwards by victorious Saladine; but finally brought un∣der the Turkish thraldome, Anno 1289. as it still continueth. Now nothing but an heap of ruines, but the very ruines of it of so fair a prospect, as striketh both pity and amazement into the beholders; shewing them an exemplary pattern of our humane frailty. Subject at the present to the Emir, or Prince of Sidon, and beautified with a goodly and capacious Haven, one of the best of the Levant; but of no great trading. 3. Sarepta, by the Hebrews called Sarphath, situate on the Sea-Coast betwixt Tyre and Sidon. Memo∣rable in holy writ for the miracle here performed by the Prophet Elijah, in raising the poor Widows Sonne: in Heathen writers, for the purest Wines, little inferiour unto those of Falernum in Italy, or Chios in Greece. Of which thus the Poet.

Vina mihi non sunt Gazetica, Chia, Falerna, Quaque Sareptano palmite missa bib as.

In English thus,

I have no Chian, or Falernian wines, Nor those of Gazas or Sarept as vines.

4. Sido••, the antientest City of all Phoenicia, and the most Nothern of all those which were assigned for the portion of the sonnes of Aser: beyond which the Countrey of Phoenicia, having been hitherto nothing but a bare Sea-coast, beginneth to open towards the East in a fine rich vally, having Libanus upon the North, and the Anti-Libanus on the South: once closed up from the rest of Syria with a very strong wall, long since demolished. It was so called from Zidon, one of the sonnes of Canaan, who first planted here; not (as some say) from Sida the daughter of Belus, once a King hereof: this City being mentioned in the Book of Josuah, when no such Belus was in being. Situate in a fertile and delightful soyl, defended with the Sea on one side, and on the other by the Mountains lying betwixt it & Libanus; from whence descended those many Springs, with which they watered and enriched their most pleasant Orchards. The Inhabitants hereof are said to be the first makers of Christall Glass; the materials of the work brought hither from the Sands of a River running not far from Ptolomais, and onely made fusible in this City. And from hence So∣lomon and Zorobabel had their principall workmen both for Stone and Timber, in their severall buildings of the Temple. The People hereof so flourishing in Arts and Trades, that the Prophet Zechariah chap. 9. v. 2. calleth them the wise Sidonians. A City which at severall times was both the Mother and Daughter of Tyre: the Mother of it in the times of Heathenism, Tyre being a Colony of this People; and the Daught∣er of it when instructed in the Christian faith, acknowledging the Church of Tyre for its Mother-Church. The City in those times very strong both by Art and Nature, having on the North-side a Fort or Citadell, mounted on an inaccessible Rock, and invironed on all sides by the Sea: which when it was brought under the command of the Western Christians, was held by the Order of the Duch Knights; and another on the South-side of the Port, which the Templars guarded. Won by the Turks with the rest of this Coun∣trey from the Christians, and ruined by those often interchanges of fortune: it onely sheweth now some markes of the antient greatness; the present Sidon standing somewhat West of the old, and having little worth a particular description.

The Haven decayed, or serving at the best for Gallies; with a poor Block-house rather for shew than service: the walls of no greater strength, and as little beauty; and the buildings ordinary, but that the

Mosque, the Bannia of Bathes, and the Cane for Merchants, are somewhat fairer than the rest: yet gives a title at this time to the Emir of Sidon, one of the greatest Princes of all this Countrey, of whom more hereafter. 5. Berytus, originally called Geris, from Gerge••hi the fift Sonne of Canaan, took this new name from Berith a Phoaenician Idol herein worshipped; and now called Barutti. Destroyed by Tryphon in the warres of the Syrians against the Jews, it was re-edified by the Romans, by whom made a Colonie, and honoured with the name of Julia Felix, Augustus giving it the Privileges of the City of Rome. By Herod and Agrippa Kings of the Jews, much adorned and beautified; and of no mean esteem in the time of the Christians: when made an Episcopall See under the Metropolitan of Tyre. Being a place of no great strength, nor aimed at by every new Invader, it hath sped better than the rest of these Cities (though strong∣er than this) retaining still her being, though not all her beauties; well stored with merchandize, and well frequented by the Merchant. Nigh to this Town is a fair and fruitful Valley, which they call Saint Georges; in which there is a Castle, and in that an Oratory of the same name also. All sacred to Saint George the Martyr, who hereabouts is fabled to have killed the Dragon, and thereby delivered a Kings daughter, but what Kings I know not, nor they neither. 6. Biblis, sometimes the habitation of Hevi the fourth Sonne of Canaan, and then called Hevaea: afterwards made the Regal Seat of Cinyras, Fa∣ther and Grand father of Adonis, by his Daughter Myrrha; whereof we have already spoken when we were in Cyprus. Of such esteem in the Primitive times of Christianity, that it was made a Bishops See; desolate and of no repute since it lost that honour, and became thrall unto the Turks. 7. Orthosia, cal∣led also Antaradus, because opposite to Aradus, another old City of this tract, but in after ages called Tortosa, and by that name well known in the Histories of the Holy Warre, undertaken by the Western Christians. To whom it made such stout and notable resistance, that though besieged on all sides with u∣nited forces (the whole Army formerly divided, sitting down before it); yet after three mon••ths hard siege, they were fain to leave the Town behind them, and content themselves with spoiling the adjoining Coun∣try 8. Tripolis, seated in a tich and delightful plain, more fruitful than can be imagined: one of which fruits they called by the name of Amazza Franchi, i.e. Kill-Frank, because the Western Christians, whom they call by the name of French, died in great numbers by the intemperate eating of them. A Valley which is said to have yielded yearly to the Counts of Tripolis, no lesse than 200000 Crowns. As for the Town, it standeth about two miles from the Sea, at the foot of Mount Libanus; so called because built by the joint purses of three Cities, that is to say, Tyrus, Sidon, and Aradus. Of no great note among the Romans, for ought I can find, till made one of the Episcopal Sees, belonging to the Arch-Bishop of Tyre, in the Primitive times. But thriving by degrees, it grew to principal Accompt by the time that the Western Christians warred in the Holy Land: when conquered by them, it was made one of the Te∣trarchies, or Capital Cities for the four Quarters of their Empire; which were, Hierusalem for Pale∣stins, Edessa for Comagena, or Mesopotamia; Autioch for Syria, and this for Phoenicia. Commit∣ted at the first taking of it, to the custody of Raymond Earl of Tholouse in France: whose posterity, whilest i•• lasted, had from hence the title of Earles of Tripoli. A City, which I know not by what good hap, hath sped better than any of those parts, retaining still as much in strength and beauty as ever it had; if not grown greater by the ruine of all the rest. Situate two miles from the Sea, as before is said, but not above half a mile from the Haven, which lieth upon the West side of it, compassed with a wall, and fortified with seven Towers, of which the fourth is commonly called the Tower of Love, because built by an Ita∣lian Merchant, who was found in bed with a Turkish Woman, for which he had forfeited his life, if not thus redeemed it. Before the Haven is an ill-neighbouring bank of sand, which every day groweth grea∣ter and neerer to it; by which in time there is a Prophecy which faith it shall qui•• be choaked: On both sides of it many store-houses for the Merchant, to stow his goods in, and shops to sell them; the way from thence unto the City having on both sides very pleasant Gardens.

The Town it self stretched out in length from South to North, is situate, as before was said, at the foot of Libanus, conveying a Brook into the Streets, and many pleasant springs into the chief of their gardens: in which, and in those towards the Haven, and on other sides of the Town, the Inhabitants keep great store of Silk-Worms; selling their Silks raw unto the Italians, and buying them again of them in the Stuff or Manufacture. The buildings generally low, and the Streets but narrow, except that leading to∣wards Aleppo, which is fair and open. Over the Brook, at the East-side of the City are built two Bridges; and on the South-side a strong Castle mounted on an hill, built by the French when they had the custody hereof; now garrisoned for the Grand Signeur with 200 Janizaries. At this time it is looked on as the Metropolis or chief City of Phoenicia; honoured with the residence of the Patriarch of the Maronites, for the most part dwelling in this Town; and enriched with a great part of the Trade of Scanderone, or Alexandretta, removed hither some fourty years ago by the Turks appointment; that Haven lying unfenced and more open to Pirates.

That the Phoenicians were descended of the Sonnes of Canaan hath been proved already. And being descendants of that stock, they were at the first governed like them, by the Chiefs of their families, whom they honoured (as most Nations did) which the title of Kings: But most of the Canaanitish Kings being o∣ver come and slain by Josuah, Agenor, a stout and prudent man, one of those many Kings which com∣manded in those parts of the Conntrey, seeing how impossible it was to resist that enemy; borrowed some and from Aegypt, where he had his breeding, to make good the Sea-coasts of his Countrey, in which the Philistims who interposed upon those coasts betwixt him and Aegypt concurred also with him. By which assistance, and by the fortifying of Zidon, Tyre, and Ace (or Ptolomais) which were all the Cities of this Countrey that were then in being; he did not only preserve his own estate from the present danger, but lest it so assured to the Kings succeeding, that neither Solomen nor David, nor any of the Kings of Israel

durst attempt upon them. To Agenor succeeded his Sonne Phoenix, (Cadmus his elder brother going into 〈◊〉〈◊〉 in search of his Sister Europa, ravished by Jupiter, where he built Thebes, and therein reigned 〈◊〉〈◊〉 his death) from whom, as some conceive, this Countrey had the name of Phoenicia. And though I have declared my self for another reason of this name, which I like much better; yet I shall rather yield to thus, or to any other, than to that of Bochartus: who will have it derived from Ben-Anak, or the Sonnes of 〈◊〉〈◊〉 (as if the old Phoenicians were such Giantly men) which much first be contracted in Beanac••, then by the Grecians turned into Pheanac, and at last into Phoenix. Such farre-fetched and extorted O∣riginations never please my fancy, who had much rather hearken to the old received opinions touching the first Originals of names and nations, where there is not very pregnant reason to perswade me otherwise; than strain my self so farre for a new invention; or hearken unto those that do. But for what cause soe∣ver they were named Phoenicians, certain it is they were a very active and industrious people, trading in the most parts of the Mediterranean, and planting Colonies in many. Thebes and Sephyra in Boeotia, 〈◊〉〈◊〉 in Italy, Gades in Spain; Utica, Leptis, Carthage, in Africk, were of their foundation. Nay if we may beleeve Bochartus, there was no Iland, or Sea-coast in the Mediterranean, or on the Can∣tabrian, Gallick, or British Ocean, wherein they did not keep some factory, or erect some Colony. What Kings succeeded Phoenix in a constant and continued course, I can no where find. Most like it is they were not under the command of any one Prince: and that besides the Kings of Sidon, where Agenor reigned, there were some others who called themselves Kings of Phoenicia also, as well as they. Of which sort were Cyniras, Paphus, and Pygmalion, who had their Regal Seat at Biblis, and lorded it over a good part of Cyprus; as did also Belus who gave some part of that Isle to Teucer, as is said before. There is also found mention of one Phasis, a Phoenician King, at such time as the Grecians conquered Troy. After him none till the subjugation of this Countrey by the Babylonians: Tetramnestus, Tennes, and Strato, mentioned in succeeding times, being Tributaries to the Persian, and no absolute Princes. Whether it were that the Phoenicians were made subject to the Kings of Tyre, or that the Kings thereof did nothing to preserve their memory; I am not able to determine. Certain it is that the Kings of Tyre came in short time to be of very great repute, and to possesse themselves of the coasts of Syria, and Phoenicia, and a great part of Cyprus: whereby, and by the benefit of their trade and shipping, they grew rich, and power∣full, and of great consideration in affairs of the World. The names and history of whom I shall here subjoin, in this ensuing Catalogue of

The Kings of Tyre.

• A. M.
• 1. Abibalus, as Josephus, Abemalus as Theophilus Antiochenus calleth him, Co-tempo∣rary with Samuel: supposed to be the same which the Sonne of Syrach mentioneth, Eccles. 46. verse 18.
• 2. Saron, the Sonne of Abibalus, whom David, as Eusebius saith, compelled to pay tri∣bute; complained of by that Prophet, Psal. 83. v. 7.
• 2931. 3. Hiram, the Sonne of Saron, confederate with David, to whom he sent Cedars, with Car∣penters and Masons, towards his buildings in Hierusalem, after he had beaten thence the Jebusites; as he did afterwards to Solomon when he built the Temple. Much mentioned in the Books of Kings and Chronicles. 53.
• 2955. 4. Baleastartus, or Bazorus, succeeded Hiram. 7.
• 2962. 5. Abdastartus, Sonne of Baleastartus, slain by the four Sonnes of his own nurse, hav∣ing reigned 9 years; the eldest of which four, did for the space of 12 years usurp the King∣dome.
• 2983. 6. Astartus, brother of Abdastartus, recovered the Kingdome to his house, out of the hands of the Usurpers. 12.
• 2995. 7. Astorinus, or Athorinus as Theophilus calleth him, the younger Brother of A. startus. 9.
• 3004. 8. Phelles, the Brother of these three Kings, and youngest Sonne of Baleastartus, reigned eight moneths only.
• 9. Ithobalus, called Ethbaal, 1 Kings 16. 31. Sonne of Astorinus, slew his Uncle Phelles, and so regained his Fathers Throne; before which he was the High-Priest of the Godess A∣staroth or Astarta, (a dignity next to that of the King). He was the Father of Jezabel, the wife of Ahab, so often mentioned in the Scripture. 32.
• 3037. 10. Badezar, or Bazar, Sonne of Ethbaal. 6.
• 3043. 11. Mettimus, by some called Matginus, Sonne of Badezar, and Father of Elisa, whom Va∣gil celebrateth by the name of Dido.
• 3052. 12. Pygmalion, the Sonne of Mettimus, who slew Sicheus the husband of his Sister Elisa, to get his riches; but yet was cosened of his prey: his Sister Elisa, accompanied with her Brother Barca (the founder of the Noble Barcine Family, of which Annibal was) and her Sister Anna, flying into Africk; where she built the renowned City of Carthage. 47. The names of his Successors we find not till we come to
• 13. Elulaus, descended from a Sonne of Pygmalion, who overthrew the Fleet of Salmannassar the Assyrian, in the port of Tyre.
• 14. E••hobales, or Ethbaal II. who vaunted himself to be as wise as Daniel, and to know all secrets, as saith the Prophet Ezekiel, chap. 28. v. 1, 2. And yet not wise enough to preserve

• his Kingdome from Nabuchadonosor; who after a•• 13 years took the City of Tyre, and subject∣ed it unto his Empire.
• 15. Baal, the Sonne and Successor of Ethbaal the second, but a Tributary to the Babylonians.

After whose death the Tyrians had no more Kings, but were governed by Judges, or by such titular Kings onely as were sent from Babylon. And though Tyre and Sidon did recover breath in the fall of the Babylonian Empire, and the unsettledness of the Persian: yet being of the Persian faction, and having dependance on that Crown, they were by Alexander held unworthy to continue. Who therefore deposed Strato the King of Sidon, and overthrew the City of Tyre, in the taking whereof he had spent more time than in forcing all the Cities of Asia.

After this time Phoenicia, being reckoned as a part of Syria, followed the fortune of the whole, sub∣ject unto the Syrian Kings of the house of Seleucus, till made a Province of the Romans; subject to the Constantinopolitans, till the fatall year 636. when subdued by the Saracens. Successively conquered by the Turks, Christians, and after their expulsion by the Turks again: then by the Mamalucks of Egypt, and finally with the rest of Syria, by Selimus the first united to the Turkish Empire. Subject at this time, or of late to the Emir of the Drusians, (commonly called the Emir of Sidon) of which people we have spoken before. A people who in the time of Amurath the third, were governed by 5 Emirs or Priu∣ces; one of which was Man-Ogli, who so resolutely resisted Ibrahim Bassa, Anno 1585. This Man∣Ogli then kept his Court or residence at Andirene, a strong place situate on a hill, and was of that wealth, that he sent to make his peace unto the above-named Ibrahim, 320 Arcubuses, 20 packs of Andirene Silks, and 50000 Ducats. At a second time he presented him with 50000 Ducats more, 480 Arcubu∣ses, 1000 Goats, 150 Camels, 150 Buffes, 1000 Oxen, and 200 Weathers. By these rich gifts we may not a little conjecture of the Revenue of the present Emir of Sidon; who since the year 1600. hath re∣duced almost all the Countreys belonging once to five Princes, under his own Empire; containing the Towns and Territories of Gaza, Barut, Sidon, Tyre, Acre, Saffet, (or Tiberias) his seat of refi∣dence, Nazareth, Cana, Mount Tabor, Elkiffe, &c. This present Emir, by name Faccardine, was not long since driven out of his Countrey by the Turk, and forced to fly to Florence: but he again recover∣ed his own, laid siege to Damascus, and caused a notable rebellion in Asia; not quenched in a long time after. And finally having possessed himself of the City and Castle of Damascus, prepared for the taking of Hierusalem also; threatning to make the Christians once more Masters of it. This was in the year 1623. How he sped afterward, and whether his Some, as stout and valiant as himself, hath since his death succeeded him in his Estates, I am not able to say: having of late heard nothing of them.

2. SYRIA PROPRIA.

SYRIA PROPRIA, or Syria specially so called, is bounded on the East, with Palmyrene; on the West, with the Mediterranean; on the North, with Cilicia; on the South, with Phoenicia and some part of Coele, Syria.

This part of Syria I take to be the Land of Hamath, so often mentioned in the Scriptures; the King∣dome of Toi or Tou, next neighbour, and sworn Enemy to Adadezer King of Aram-Sobah: who hea∣ring of the great discomfiture which David had given unto that King, sent his Sonne Joram or Adoram, (for the Scripture calls him by both names) with Presents unto him, as well to congratulate his success, as to be assured for times to come of his love and amity. So called from Hamath one of the Sonnes of Ca∣naan, who fixed his dwelling in these parts, and left many Cities of that name in Syria and Palestine (which we shall meet withall in the course of this work) either built by him or his postetity. Now that the Land of Hamath was this part of Syria, I am perswaded to believe by these following reasons. viz. 1. From the neighbourhood hereof to Arpad or Arphad, conjoined together, as in Esay 10. 9. and Jer. 49. 23. So in other places, viz. Where are the Gods of Hamath and Arpad, 2 Kings 18. 34. The King of Hamath, and the King of Arphad, Esay 37. 13. And we know well that Arvad was the name of an Iland over against the mouth of the River Eleutherus, one of the Rivers of this Countrey: so called from Arvad, one of the Sonnes of Canaan, alluded to by the Greeks and Romans in the name of Aradus, by which this Isle was known unto them. 2. By the vicinity which it hath to Palmyrene, the Aram-So∣bah of the Scriptures, to which it joyneth on the East, with the King whereof (as bordering Princes use to be) the Kings of Hamath for the most part were in open warre. Of which fee 2 Sam. 8. 9, 10. & 1 Chr. 8. 9, 10. 3. From the authority of Saint Hierome, who finding mention in the Prophet Amos, cha. 6. v. 2. of a City named Hamath the Great, determineth it to be that City which afterwards was cal∣led Antiochia (the principall City of this part, and indeed of Syria): the title of Great being added to it, to difference it from some other Cities of this name of inferiour note. And 4. from comparing the places in Scripture, with the like passage in Josephus the Historiographer. The Scripture telleth us; that Hie∣rusalem being forced by the Babylonians, Zedekias the King was brought Prisoner to Nabuchadnezzer, being then at Riblath, 2 Kings c. 2. v. 6. to Riblath in the Land of Hamath, v. 21. where the poor Prince first saw his Children slain before his face; and then miserably deprived of fight, that he might not see his great misfortunes, was led away to Babylon. Ask of Josephus, where this sad tragedy was acted, and he will tell us that it was at Reblatha (or Riblah) a City of Syria, Antiqu. l. 10. c. 10. and if we ask Saint Hierome what he thinks of Reblatha, he will tell us that it was Urbs ea quam nun•• Antiochiam. vocant, the City which in following times was called Antioch. On these grounds I conceive this part of Syria to be the land of Hamath intended in the Texts of scripture above-cited, though there were other Towns and Territories of the same name also.

The Countrey is naturally fertile; the hedges on the high-way sides affording very good fruits, and the adjoining fields affording to the Passenger the shade of Fig-trees. Were it not naturally so, it would not be much helped by Art or Industry, as being very meanly peopled, and those few people without any incou∣ragement either to plant fruits or manure the Land. Their Sheep are commonly fair and fat, but so over∣laded in the tail, both with flesh and fleece, that they hang in long wreathes unto the ground, dragged after them with no small difficulty. Pliny observes it in his time, that the tails of the Syrian Sheep were a Cu∣bit long, and had good store of wooll upon them. Natur. Hist. l. 8. c. 48. And modern Travellers report, that the tails of these sheep do frequently weigh 25 pound weight, and sometimes 30 pounds and upwards. The like hath also been affirmed of the sheep of Palestine, comprehended in old times in the name of Syria. And that may probably be the reason why the rumpes or tails of sheep (and of no beast else) were ordained to be offered up in sacrifice, of which Levit. 3. v. 9. But besides the store of Wooll which they have from the sheep, they have also great plenty of Cotton Wooll, which groweth there abundantly; with the seeds whereof they sow their fields, as we ours with Corn. The stalk no bigger than that of Wheat, but as tough as a Beans; the head round and bearded, in the size and shape of a Medlar, and as hard as a stone: which ripening breaketh, and is delivered of a white soft Bombast intermixed with seeds, which parted with an instrument, they keep the Seeds for another sowing, and fell the Wooll unto the Mer∣chant: a greater quantity thereof issuing from that litle shell than can be imagined by those who have not seen it.

The people heretofore were very industrious, especially about their gardens; the fruitful effects where∣of they found in the increase of their herbs, and plants. Whence the Proverb, Multa Syrorum Olera. But withall they were observed to be very gluttonous, spending whole daies and nights in feasting, great scoffers, and much given to laughter. Crafty and subtile in their dealings, not easily to be trusted but on good security: and so were the Phoenicians, their next neighbours also. Hence came the Greek A∣dage which Suidas speaketh of, 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, Syri contra Phoenices, used by them when two crafty knaves endeavoured to deceive each other. They were noted also to be superstitious, great worshippers of the Godess Fortune, but greater of their Syrian Godess, whatsoever she was. Affirmed by Plutarch to be a womanish and effeminat nation; prone unto tears, and such as on the death of their friends would hide themselves in caves from the sight of the Sun. Herodian addeth, that they were wavering and uncon∣stant, lovers of plaies and publick pastimes, and easily stirred up unto Innovations. But at this time, they are almost beaten out of all these humours, having been so often cowed and conquered, that they are now grown servilely officious to them that govern them: not without cause, defective in that part of indu∣stry which before enriched them.

Where by the way we must observe, that this Character of the people, and that of the Countrey belong not to this part alone, exclusively of those which follow, but to all Syria, and every part and Province of it, except Phoenicia, which being planted by a people of another Stock, hath had its Character by it self. The whole by Ptolamy divided, besides Comagena, Palmyrene, and Coele-Syria, into many petit Regions, and subdivisions, as 1. Pieria. 2. Casiotis, from the hills adjoining. 3. Seleucis. 4. Apamene. 5. L••todicene. 6. Cyrrestica. 7. Chalcidice, and 8. Chalybanotis from their principall Cities. Of which in all he musters up the names of an hundred and upwards, then of some note, most of them now grown out of knowledge, and many of them of no mark or observation in the course of business. So that omitting his method we will follow our own, and take notice only of such places as an∣tiently were, or at this present are, of most observation and importance in the course of Story: with reference notwithstanding to the subdivisions made by Ptolomy, as they come in my way, reckoning Cyrrestica, Cha∣lybanotis, Casiotis, and the territories of Seleucus, Laodicea, and Apamea, into Syria Propria; and Pieria into Comagena.

First then to begin with those Cities which ly most towards the East, we have in Cyrrestica, 1. Zeug∣ma, on the banks of the River Euphrates, memorable for the passage of Alexander the Great, who there passed over his Army on a Bridge of Boats. 2. Berroea, supposed by some both antient and modern writers, to be that which is now called Aleppo; but the position of the place agreeth not with that suppo∣sition, Aleppo being placed by our modern Cosmographers in the 72. degree of Longitude, and the 38. of Latitude; whereas Berroea is assigned by Ptolomy, to the 36. degree of Latitude, and the 71. of Longitude. Besides that the River Singas on which Aleppo is situate, keepeth it self almost on an even course in the Latitude of 37. between 20 and 30. minutes over: which is more by a degree and a half than the site assigned unto Berroea. 3. Cybros, as in the Latine Copies of Ptolomy, mistook for Cyrrhus, once the chief City of this part, from hence called Cyrrestica. 4. Heraclea, neer which Minerva had a Tem∣ple: in which, as in that sacred to her in Laodicea, they used once yearly to offer a Virgin for a sacrifice: but afterwards on the sight of that gross impiety changed it to an Hart. 5. Regia, now Rugia, two dayes journey from Antioch, took by the Christians in the beginning of the warres for the Holy Land. 6. 〈◊〉〈◊〉 is, of great renown in those dark times of ignorance and idolatry for the Syrian Godess therein worshipped; from whence it had the name of Hierapolis; or the Holy City, being formerly by the Gre∣cians called Callinice, by the Syrians, Magog, one of the first seats of Magog the Some of Japhet, and from him denominated. The Godess so esteemed of in those wretched times, that from all parts, Assyria, Babylonia, Arabia, Cilicia, Cappadocia, and indeed what not, they brought her many rich gifts and costly offerings: Nero himself who scoffed at all Religions else, being for a while a great Votary of this Syrian Idol, though afterwards he grew weary of her and defiled her with urine. The Temple built by Stratonice the wife of Seleucus in the midst of the City, compassed with a double wall about the height of 300 Fathome: the roof thereof inlaid with gold, and made of such a fragant and sweet-smelling wood,

that the clothes of them which came thither retained the sent thereof for a long time after. Without the Temple there were places inclosed for Oxen, and beasts of Sacrifice; and not farre off a lake of 200 fa∣thom in depth, wherein they kept their sacred fishes: the Priests attending here for their severall Offices, amounting in number to three hundred, besides many more subservient Ministers. The tricks and jugglings of these Priests to deceive the people, he that list to see, may find them copiously described in the Meta∣morphosis of Apuleius: which changing but the names and times, may serve for a Relation of those gul∣leries and Arts of Leger-de-main, which the Friers and Pardoners have practised in the Church of Rome. 7. Chalyban, whence the parts adjoining were called ••halybanotis; conceived by Postellus and some 〈◊〉〈◊〉 to be Chalepium or Aleppo, but on no good ground: this City having one degree less of Northern Latitude, than Berroea had. 8. Barbarissus in the same subdivision neer the banks of Euphrates. 9. Chalcus, the principal of that part of Syria Propria which is called Chalcidice, but not otherwise memo∣rable. 10. Telmedissa, another Town of the same division, and as litle famous. 11. Seleucus, so nam∣ed from the founder of it, the first Eastern Monarch of that race, and the greatest Builder of the World: founding nine Cities of this name, sixteen in memory of his Father Antiochus, six by the name of Laodice his Mother, and three in honour of Apamia his first Wife, besides many others of great note in Greece and Asia, either new built, or beautified and repaired by him. From this, the Countrey hereabouts had the name of Scleucis. 12. Laodicea, one of the Cities founded by Scleucus, in honour of Laodice his Mother; from which the Region adjoining is called Laodicene. Built by him in the place where formerly had stood the City Rhamantus, so called from a certain Sheepherd, who being strook with a flash of light∣ning cryed out amazedly Rhamantus, that is to say, Deus ab excelso, before which time it had been named Leuca Acte, from the whitenesse of the Sea-cliffs neer to which it is situate: the Countrey round-about commended antiently for the best wines, and choise of very excellent fruits. 13. Apamia, so named in honour of Apamia, the wife of Seleucus, which together with Laodicea and Seleucus be∣fore mentioned, having the same founder, and maintaining a strict league of amity with one another, were commonly called the Three Sisters. From this the Countrey neer is called Apime∣ne. 14. Emesa, (now Hamse) the Episcopall See of Eusebius, hence called Emesenus, who flou∣rished in the time of Constantius the Sonne of Constantine: in whose name are extant certain Homilies, justly conceived to be of a later date. The City seated in a spacious and fruitful plain of Apimene, wa∣tered with many pleasant and cheerfull Riverers; once of great note, as may be easily conjectured from the walls hereof, which are still perfect and entire, built of polished stone, and of very large circu∣it: but the dwelling-houses so decayed, that it affordeth nothing worthy observation. 15. Epipha∣ma, in the cantred or subdivision of Casiotis; called at first Hamath, from Hamath a Sonne of Ca∣naan, the founder of it; and upon that account mistaken by Saint Hierome for another Town of the same name in the Tribe of Naphthals: so different from this place both in Longitude and Lati∣tude (as we shall shew hereafter when we come to Palestine) that they can by no means be the same. But that old Town being gone to ruin, it was repaired, if not re-edified by Antiochus Epaphanes King of Syria, who thereupon commanded it to be called Epiphania, obeyed therein as Josephus telleth us by the Macedonians, though the Syrians still called it Amatha as in former times, Antiqu. l. 1. ca. 7. 16. Ltrissa, which still preserveth its old name, being now called Laris; much mentioned in the warres of the Holy Land, especially for the death of Baldwin the first Brother of Godfrey of Bovillon, and second King of Hierusalem, Anno 1118. 17. Gebal, the Gabala of Ptolomy and others of the antient Wri∣ters, situate on the South of Laodicea, from which twelve miles distant; mentioned Psal. 83. as a confe∣derate with Tyre and other uncircumcised Nations, in their hatred and designes against the Israelites: at this day called Gabella (with little difference from the old name of it) and by that name remembred in the Stories of the Holy Warres. 18. Aradus, one of the Co-founders of Tripolis, situate in a rocky Iland of a mile in compass, directly opposite to the mouth or influx of the River Eleutherus, and distant from the Continent about twenty furlongs. So called from Arvad one of the Sonnes of Canaan, and menti∣oned by that name in the Prophet Ezrk. Chap. 27. v. 8. 11. This once a Kingdome of it self, containing not this Iland only but some part of the Continent; especially about Antaradus (so called because built over against it) situate on the Northern banks of the River Eleurberus, of which we have spoken in Phoe∣nics. 19. Daphne, about five miles from Antioch, but afterwards by the continuall enlargements of that City, accounted as the Suburb to it; so named of Daphne one of the Mistresses of Apollo, who was here worshipped by the name of Apollo Daphnans, and had here his Oracle and his Groves, with other the Additaments appertaining unto those Idolatries; as much esteemed of but more sumpeuous than those of Delphos. The Grove about ten miles in circuit, environed round with Cypresses and other trees, so tall and close to one another, that they suffered not the Sunne to enter in his greatest heats: the ground perpetu∣ally covered with the choisest Tapestry of nature, watered with many a pleasant stream, derived from the Castalian founteins as it was given out; and yielding the most excellent fruits both for taste and tincture, to which the wind and air participating the sweetness of the place, did adde a most delightfull in∣fluence.

A place devised for pleasure, but abused to lust: he being held unworthy of the name of a man, who transformed not himself unto a Beast, or trod on this unholy ground without his Curtezan: insomuch as they which had a care of their good names, did forbear to haunt it. A fuller discription of it he that lists to see, may find in the first Book and 18. chapter of Sozomens Ecclesiasicall History, who is copious in it. The Temple said to have been built by Seleucus also, renowned for the Oracle there given, by which A∣drian was foretold of his being Emperour; and therefore much resorted to by Julian the Apostata for that purpose also. But the body of Babylas the Martyr and Bishop of Antioch, being removed thither by the

command of his Brother Galius then created Coesar by Constantius; the Devil and his Oracles were both frighted away; as the devill did himself confess to Julian. Who being desirous to learn here the success of his intended expedition into Persia, received this Answer, that no Oracle could be given as long as those divine bones were so neer the Shrine. Nor was it long after, before the Idol and the Temple were consu∣med by a fire from Heaven; as was avowed by those who observed the fall of it: though Julian did impure it to the innocent Christians, and in revenge caused many of their Churches to be burned to ashes. 20. Anitoch, situate in that part hereof, which is called Casiotis, first built, o•• began rather by Antigonus, when Lord of Asia, by whom named Antigonia; but finished and enlarged by Seleucus, after he had o∣verthrown and slain him at the battell of Issus: by the Jewes or Hebrew's once called Reblatha. Built neer the place, and partly out of the ruines of an antient City, in the second Book of Kings called R••blah in the Land of Hamath; Hamath the Great in the sixt of Amos; by Josephus and the Syrians, Reblata. Memorable in those daies, for the Tragedies of Jehoahaz, and Sedechias, Kings of Judah: the first of which was here deprived of his Crown and Liberty by Pharaoh Neco King of Egypt, 2 Kings 23. 33. the other of his eyes and Children by the command of Nebuchadnezzar King of Babylon, as was said before. In following times it was by some Greek writers called Epidaphne, from the neerness of it to that Grove: as afterwards in the times of Chrictianity, by the name of Theopolis, or the City of God, either from the many miracles there done in the Primitive times; or from the great improvement which the Christian faith did here receive, where the Disciples first obtained the name of Christians. The Royall seat for many Ages of the Kings of Syria, and in the flourish and best fortune of the Roman Empire, the ordinary residence of the Praefect or Governour of the Eastern Provinces; next of the Praefectus Praetorio Orientis, who had not only the superintendency over the Diocese of the Orient, though that large enough, but also of the Dioceses of Egypt, Asia, Pontus, Thrace; extending so his Jurisdiction into all the parts of the then known World. Honoured also with the residence of many of the Roman Emperours, especially of Verus and Va∣lens, who spent here the greatest part of their times; and from the first dawning of the Gospel, with the Seat of the Patriarck. A title of such eminency in all times of the Church, the second in Accompt to the See of Rome (till Constantinople being made the Imperiall City, got precedence of it) that there are at this time no less than four great Prelates which pretend unto it: that is to say, the true Patriarck, governing the Christians of those parts, whom they call Syrians or Melchites; the Ps••ndo-Patriarcks of the Jacobite and Maronite Sectaries, both which, for the greater credit to their Schism doe assume this title: and finally, a titular Patriarck nominated by the Pope, who since the time that the Western Christians were possessed of these Eastern Countries, hath assumed a power unto himself of nominating Patriarks for Alexandria, Hierusalem, and this City of Antioch.

The City seated on both sides of the River Orontis, about twelve miles distant from the shores of the Me∣diterranean; the River Parfar passing on the South-side of it. By Art and Nature fortified even to admirati∣on, compassed with a double wall, the outward most of which was stone, the other of brick, with four hundred and sixty Towers in the walls, and an impregnable Castle at the East-end thereof, and on the other side defended with high broken Mountains, whereunto was adjoyning a deep Lake, comming cut of the River Parfar, before mentioned. Adorned in former times with many sumptuous Palaces, and magni∣ficent Temples, answerable to the reputation of so great a City: till taken by the Sarac••ns, and after by the Turks and Mamalucks, men careless of all State and beauty in their fairest Cities, it began to grow in∣to decay. Recovered by the Western Christians from the power of the Turks, after a siege of seven moneths, June 3. Anno 1098. confirmed in their possession by a great and memorable Victory, got in the very sight hereof within few daies after, (June 28.) obtained against Corbanas, Lieutenant to the Persian Sultan; in which with the loss of four thousand and two hundred of their own, they slew a hundred thousand of the Enemy. The Town and territory given by the Conquerours to Bohemund a noble Norman and Prince of Tarentum: who by practising with one Pyr••hus, who had the command of one of the chief Towers there∣of, afterwards called Saint Georges Tower, was secretly let into the City, and so made way for all the rest. Bohemund thus made the Prince, or as some say, King of Antioch, left it to Bohemund his sonne about ten years after; succeeded in this principate by Tancred and Roger, Princes of great renown in those holy wars: which last unfortunately slain by the Turks, not far from Aleppo, in the year 1120. Baldwin the second having revenged his death by a signall victory, joyned this estate to the Kingdome of Hierusalem. Betrayed about sixty years after this, that is to say, in the year 1188. it came into the power of Saladine, the victo∣rious King of Egypt and Damascus; and therewithall no fewer than five and twenty Cities. which depended on the fortunes of it: the glories of this famous City so declining after this last Tragedy (but whether laid desolate of set purpose, or destroyed by the injury of time, I am not able to declare) that it is grown the sepulchre of what once it was, and lieth buried in its own sad ruines; hardly preserving the repute of a forry village. Such is the instability of all worldly glories. Some other Towns there are in this part of Sy∣ria, but not to be remembred the same day with Antioch. Of which the most observable is 21. Alba∣ria, distant two daies march from Antioch, remembred, in the Warres of the Holy Land.

As for the story of this Province, as a State distinct, we find it had a King of its own, called the King of Hamath (the Kingdome of Toi, or Tou before remembred) who together with the King of Arphac, commanded in this part of Syria; and the Isles adjoining. Vassalls in time succeeding to the Kings of Tyre, who lorded it over all the Sea-coasts hereof: and consequently had great influence on the Inlands also. And it continned in this State till the Assrrian Kings began to turn their forces Westward; when added to that Empire by Tiglath Phileser, after the subversion of the Kingdome of Damascus; or by Salmanassar after the destruction of that of Israel. The proud but dreadful vaunt which Senacherih, the Successour of those mighty Monarchs, made to Hezekiah, viz. Where are the Kings of Hamath and

Arphad; shews clearly that those Kingdomes had been conquered not long before; and therefore needs by Salmanasser, or Tigl••••h Phil••s••r. Afterwards in the struglings betwixt the Babylonians and Egyptians for the chief command, it was a while at the devotions of the Kings of Egypt; it being at Reblatha in this Province, that Jehoahaz King of Judah was put into bonds, by the command of Pharoah Neco, as was said before. But Neco being long after vanquished by Nebuchadnezzer King of Babylon, it returned again unto that Crown; and after the same fortunes with the rest of Syria.

3. COMAGENA.

COMAGENA is bounded on the East, with the River Euphrates, by which parted from Mesopotamia; on the West, with the Mounteins called Amamus, which divide it from Calicia; on the North, with Taurus, by which separated from Armenia Minor; on the South, with Palmyr••∣ne. Called also Euphratensis and Euphratesia, when a Roman Province, by reason of its situation bor∣dering on that River.

The reason of the name I find not amongst my Authors: but find that many learned men conceive it to be that part of Syria, which the Scriptures call Syria Maacha, mention whereof is made 1 Chron. cap. 19. v. 6. gainsayed by others because they find a place called Maacha in the Tribe of Manasses: but with no great reason as I take it. For being it is joined (in the 2 of Chron. 19. v. 6. above mentioned) in the same action with Mesopotamia, and Syria Sobah; and not so only, but placed between them in the me∣thod of that holy pen-man; I dare not think but that they were all very neer neighbours, and ranked ac∣cording to the natural situation of them. Which agreeth very well with the site of this Camag••na, having Mesopotamia on the East, and Aram-Sobah on the South. Nor is it any stronger proof unto the contrary that Maacha is a Town of the Tribe of Manasses; then if a man should say that there is no such Pro∣vince as Mansfield in High Germany, because there is a Town of that name in England; or no such place as Savoy among the Alpes, because there is an house of that name in London.

As for the people hereof, besides what they have common with the rest of the Syrians; they were of old much given unto Divinations; and for that cause derided thus in the sixt Satyr of Juv••nal.

Spondet amatorem tenerum vel divit is orbi Testamentum ingens, calidae pulmone columboe Tractato Armenius vel Comagenus Aruspex. Pectora pullorum rimabitur, exta Catelli Interdum & pueri. Faciet quod deferat ipse.

Thus Englished by my honoured friend Sir Robert Stapylton.

A childless rich mans Legacy, or young love Are found i'th'lights of a warm ttembling Dove, By Comagene Sooth-Sayers; they look into A dead Chicks brest, the same th' Armenians do. They view the entrails of a dog, and reach A childs perhaps; They do it and then peach.

Chief places of this part, 1. Samosata, the Metropolis or head City of it, when a Roman Province situate neer the banks of Euphrates, over which it had a bridge for passage into Mesopotamia. Unfor∣tunate for being the birth-place of Lucian that profane Scoffer of Christianity, though otherwise a man of a quick wit, and great abilities: as also of Paulus Samosatenus, Patriarch of Antioch, condemned of Here sie in a Councill holden in his own City, Anno 273 (by the great and most learned Bishops of that Age, there assembled together) for teaching that our Saviour was no other then a natural man, but neither God nor the Sonne of God, as the Scriptures testify. 2. Germanicia, (by some called Germanicopolis) on the other side of the Countrey neer the Mountain Amamus: no lesse unfortunate than the former in being the birth-place of Nestorius Patriarch of Constantinople, who troubling the peace of the Church with He∣terodoxie, and impertinent nicities, about the blessed Mother of Christ, as also about the nature and per∣son of Christ himself: was thereupon condemned of Heresie in the Council of Ephesus, Anno 435. In former times called Adata, or as some write Adapa: but took this new name from Germanicus Casar, in honour of whom it was made a Roman Colony by Augustus: testified by this Inscription extant in O∣nuphrius, viz. COLONIA JULIA GERMANICIA, SA∣CRA, AUGUSTA, FELIX. 3. Singa, so called from the River upon which it is situate. 4. Antiochia penes Taurum so called because seated at the foot of that Mountain; to dif∣ference it from the other of this name in Syria. 5. Pinara, one of the chief Cities of that part which is called Pieria. 6. Doliche, a small Town, but made an Episcopall See in the best times of the Church, as appeareth by the Acts of the Councills of Antioch, and Constantinople, in which there is some menti∣on of the Bishops of it. 7. Aleppo, now the Principall of all the Countrey, supposed by some to be the Sepharvaim, mentioned 2 Kings 17. 24. It was thus called as some say from Halep, which in the language of those parts signifieth milk, afforded liberally by the rich pastures round about it: as others more improbably from Aleph, the first letter of the Greek Alphabet, because the first in estimation of the Cities of Syria, Most probably from Alepius: Leiutenant here in the time of Julian the Apostata, who did here many notable exploits, and amongst others, in or neer the ruins of some old Town of these parts, not yet agreed on (in case it be not Sepharvaim before mentioned) advanced this City. Situate on the banks of the River Singas, which rising out of the hill Pi••rius, with many windings and turnings run∣neth thorough Comagena, and there falleth into Euphrates. Destroyed by Haalon King of the Tartars,

at such time as the Western Christians were possessed of this Countrey and the Holy Land: but being repaired and re-peopled became by reason of the commodious situation of it to be much frequented by Merchants from all parts of the world. Situate in the midst betwixt Tripolis, Berytus and Alexandretta, the three prime Ports of Tukie, on the one side; and the Persian territories on the other: it was made choyse of for the Staple of the Eastern commodities, brought to Euphrates, and then boated to this Town by the River S••••gas. A City of great trade at present, the English Merchants (amongst others which frequent the same) having here three houses for the Stowage and disposing of their Commodities; and a chief Offi∣cer or Super-Intendent over the whole Factory, whom they call the Consul of Aleppo. But greater was the trade hereof in the former times, before the Portugals found out a way by Sea to those Eastern Countries, since followed by the English, Hollanders and other Nations. The building of it low, but of one Roof high, (as in most Towns of Syria) with a plain topp plastered to walk upon: and with Arches before their doors, or houses, as well to pass dry under them in time of rain, as to shew their wares. Pleasantly seated amongst Gardens, with the sweet smels whereof very much refreshed: the ordinary Residence of a Turkish B••ssa, safe rather in the remotenesse of it from any Enemie, than the strength of the place, as being nothing less than well fortified. Neer one of the Gates they shew a Sepulchre, by them affirmed to be Saint Georges (whom of all the Christian Saints they only worship) before which they maintain a lamp which burns continually. 8. Amin, in the way betwixt Tripoli and Aleppo, supposed by some to be that 〈◊〉〈◊〉, mention whereof is made 2 Kings chap. 17, 12. A City of a large circuit, pleasantly seated on two hills, which give it a fair prospect over six of the neighbouring villages: a thing not to be boasted of as the world now goeth, by many of the Syrian Cities. On a thrd hill once flood a Castle, now decayed and ruinous; beneath it a fair River which runs gently by it; environed round about with Orchards of Palm-trees and very good fruits. 9. Chalmodora, seated by Ptolomy on Euphrates, of which no ruins now remaining; unless tbe name be changed to 10. Byrrha, as perhaps it may be, that being made by Ptolomy the most Northern Town of Comagena; and this the utmost Town which the Aegyptian Mamalucks (then Lords of Syria) had upon this River, and the boundary betwixt them and the Sultans of Persia. Memorable for an old ceremony here used by those Mamalucks, who accounted not themselves worthy of the name of a Sultan of Egypt, till in this place in solemn pomp in the sight of their Army, they had forced their horse into the River, and made him drink of the waters of of it: testifying by that ceremony aswell the extent of their dominions, as their readiness to de∣fend the same against all Invaders. A ceremony performed with great State by Campsin Gaurus, in the war betwixt him and Selimus the first. But for all this he lost the field, and his life to boot, in the fight neer Aleppo: and therewith did not only leave him Syria, as the fruits of his Victory; but opened him a fair way to the conquest of Egypt, which soone after followed. And hereto I refer the Cities of 11. He∣na, and 12. Ivah, with their severall Territories; mentioned together with the City of Sepharvaim, Esay 37. v. 13. and 2 King 18. v. 34. it being probable that if Sepharvaim were the City now called Aleppe, as the Jews that dwell there say it was; that then the other two joined together with it, must be hereabouts, though we find no tract of them in the old Geographers.

And if they were (as it seems probable to me) we have then more Kings in this Province in the elder times than the King of Maacha; unlesse perhaps it may be said that the Kindome of Maacha (or of A∣ram-Maacha) being broke in pieces, these petit States arose from the ruins of it. Of little observation in the course of business, whether entire or subdivided into parcels: but that the King hereof (the King of Maacha) aided the Ammanites against David with 1000 men: no very great number I confess, (as one who lay more out of the danger than the rest of the Syrian confederates did) but sufficient to ingage them in the quarrel with them. Nor find we any thing after this touching their affairs, but that the Kings of Henai Ivah and Sepharvaim (who shared the greatest part amongst them) being swallowed up by the Assyrrians, (as the forementioned Texts do expressely say) some Colonies of the people hereof, were sent by Salmanassar the Assyrtian Monarch, to plant the desolate dwellings of the Tribes of Israel, as appear∣eth plainly in the 2. of Kings chap. 17. v. 24. A course in which the Conquerour dealt exceeding wisely; weakning thereby the great Cities and mightier States of this Countrey, which otherwise might have been apt enough to revolt again; and strengthning therewithall their conquests in the Land of Israel, which otherwise had lain open to the next Invader, and yielding little or no profit to the publick Treasurie.

After this time it followed the same fortune with the rest of Syria, till Tigranes the last King hereof was subdued by the Romans. At what time all the rest of Syria being reduced under the form of a Province, this part being then in the possession of Antiochus, Sonne of that Antiochus surnamed Eusebes whom Ti∣granes had spoiled of his estates: was left unto him by the Conquerours with the title of King. Continu∣ing in his line till the death of another Antiochus the last King hereof; when made a Province of the Em∣pire by Tiberius Caesar, as is said by Tacitus; Qu. Servaeus being sent hither as the first Roman Praetor for the government of it: though Sueton doth refer it to the times of Vespasian.

4. PALMYRENE.

PALMYRENE is bounded on the East by the River Euphrates; on the West, by Syria preperly and especially so called: on the North, with Comagena; and on the South with Mount Liba∣nus (dividing it from the Province of Coele-Syria, and part of Arabia Deserta.

It took this name from Palmyra the Chief City of it. When conquered by the Romant, and made a distinct Province of it self, it had the name of Syria Secunda, and Salutaris. Called Syria Secunda,

to distinguish it from Syria specially so called, which by them was named Syria Prima, and Saluta•••• in regard of the medicinal waters springing in many places of it. But before it had any of these names, it was in the Scriptures called Aram-Sobah, wherof Adad-azer was King in the time of David, as we reads 2 Sam. 8. 3. and 1 Chran. 18. 3.

The Countrey destitute of Rivers fit for Navigation, save that it bordereth on Euphrates; but liberally furnished with those hot springs, good for many diseases, which gave it the name of Salutaris. Of which thus writeth Marcellinus lib. 14. In his trastibus havingerum nusquam visitur flumer, at in lacis pluri∣mis aquae suacte natura calentes emergunt, ad usum aptae multiplicium medelarum. So he. The sense whereof we had before.

Places of most observation, are 1. Palmyra, seated in a desart and sandy plain, one of the Cities built by Solomon in the Wilderness, mention of which is made 1 Kings chap. 9. v. 17, 18. this Palmyra be∣ing supposed to be that City which is there called Tadmer, or Tamer in the Vulgar Latine. The cause for long time of much contention betwixt the Parthians and the Romans, as situate in the borders of either Empire: not fully setled in the Romans, till that they had subdued Zenobia, then the Queen hereof. By Adrian the Emperour who repaired it, it was called Hadrianople, but it held not long, the old name in short time prevailing above the new. 2. Gezer, 3. Bethboron the upper, and 4. Bethberon the nether, said to be fenced Cities with Walls, Gates, and Barres, 2 Chron. 8. 4. and 5. Baalath, four of the other Towns here built by Solomon; but either quite worn out of knowledge, or called by new names in the time of Ptolouy, who faith nothing of them. 6. Adada, built, as the name doth intimate, by some of the Adads Kings of this Countrey or of Damascus, to which last made subject. 7. Sura more to∣wards the River Euphrates, in the Notitia, called Flavia Firma Sura, which sheweth that it was either repaired or made a Colonie by the Emprour Vespatian, whose fore-name was Flavius: honoured with an Episcopal See also in the times next following, as appeareth by the Acts of the Council of Constantinople. 8. Alamatha, on the banks of the River Euphrates, which if it were lawful for me to criticize upon my Author, I should conceive to be that Hamath of the Scriptures, which is call'd Hamath Sobah, 2 Chro. 8. 3. against which Solomon prevailed: the mistake from Camatha to Alamatha being not uneasie in the Transcripts. And if it were the same as I think it was, confirmed herein by that passage in the second of Chron. chap. 18. ver. 3. where it is said, that David smote Hadad-ezer King of Sobah unto Hamath, as he went to stablish his dominion by the River Euphraters. By which it seemeth that Hamath stood up∣on that River as the Camatha or Alamatha of Ptolomy is said to do. I should conceive it to be the chief feat of those Kings, and the Principal City of this Kingdome: the word Sobah, being added to it, not onely for distinctions sake, but in way of eminency. 9. Resapha, a Town of note in the time of Prolo∣my, but of greater in the holy Scripture, where it is represented to us by the name of Reseph, Esay 3. 12. Reseph Civitas Syria as St. Hierome hath it: and a Town of Syria, then most like this. 10. Betah, and 11. Becothai, two other Cities of this Kingdome, taken by David in his warre against Hadad-ezer, 2 Sam. 8. 8. the last supposed to be the Barathins of Ptolomy, though placed by him here some time, they are Towns of Arabia, the Desart by which it seems it was alotted in the change of time.

This part of Syria, as the rest, was once a distict Kingdome of it self, by the name of the Kingdome of Sobah, or of Aram-Sobah. The first KING thereof, whose name occurs in holy Scripture, being Rehob, the Co-temperare of Saul King of Israel; by whom discomfited in battel, as is said 1 Sam. 14. 47. But Adad-ezor the Sonne of Rehob, a Prince of greater power and valour then his Fa∣ther was, having brought all the neighbouring Kings under his command, (as is said 2 Sam. 10. 19. conceived himself a fit match for David, and thereupon opposed his passage, as he went to recover his border at the River Euphrates. In which action though he lost a thousand Charets, and twenty thousand Foot, and seven hundred Horse, yet would he not so end the wane, but first with the Syrians of Damaseus, and after with the Ammonites and their confederates; and finally by the aid of the Mesopotamians, re∣newed the quarrell. But being discomfited also in this last enterprise with the lose of forty thousand and seven hundred men, and his life to boot, the Kingdome of Zobah was brought under by the Kings of Da∣maicus. The Storie of this warre we have in the 2 of Sam. cap. 8. and 10. in the first of Chron. cap. 18. and 1 Kings 11. 23, 24. yet were not the Kings of Damascus so well setled in it, but that David had possessed himself of Betah and Berothia, and other peeces of importance: the Regal City of Hameth-So∣ba being wonne by Solomon, and many of the best Towns of it built by him to assure his conquest. But the Kingdome Solomon being rent in pieces in the next Succession, the Kingdome of Zobah fell again unto those of Damasous; and so continued till Damascus it self was conquered by the Kings of Assyria: unless perhaps that Hamath which Jeroboam the second is said to have subdued (together with Damascus it self) to the Crown of Israel, 2 Kings 14. 28. were this Hamath Soba; as perhaps it was.

After this nothing memorable in the Affaires of this Countrey, till the time of Gallientus the Roman Emperour: during whose reign amongst the rest who cantonned that Empire betwixt themselves, (commonly called the Thirty Tyrants) O tenatus a man of great power and vertue assumed the Imperial habit, and took unto himself the command of these parts of Syria, together with Mesopotamia and some other Provinces, which he had conquered from Savores the King of Persia; against whom he had so good an hand, that he discomfited him in battell, seized upon his Treasures, took many of his Nobles, and most of his Concu∣bines. For which great Acts admitted partner in the Empire by Gallienus, he was not long after slain by Maeonius his own Cousen German. Who by that murder hoped to obtain the Principality of Palmyreni (for by that name it was now called): but in that deceived. For after his death, Zembia his unfortunate Widow, a most masculine Ladie, not onely preserved the principalitie of Palmirene for the use of her Children; but took upon her both the Purple habit, and the command of his Annie: which she managed

with great wisdome and gallantry, the rest of the time of Gallienus, and all the reignes of Claudius an 〈◊〉〈◊〉 his two next Successors. But vanquished and rook Prisoner by Aurelianus (who had the hap¦piness to unite the broken limbs of that Empire into as strong a body as ever formerly) she was led in Tri∣umph thorow Rome. The terrour of her name, and the unusualness of the sight, so heightning the general expectation: ut ea specie nihil unquam esset pompabilius, saith Trebelliu Pollio; That never any shew was esteemed so glorious. A Ladie of so strong a vertue, and of such command upon her self, that she is said never to have made use of her husbands company, when she perceived her self with child. After this nothing singular in the Story of Palmirene, but that when all the rest of Syria was subdued by the Christans of the West, this Province and the next onely were made good against them by the Turkish Sultars of Damasens.

5. COELE-SYRIA.

COELE-SYRIA is bounden on the East with part of Palmyrene, and Arabia Deserta; on the West, with Palestine; on the North, with Palmyrene, and some part of Syria Propria, from which divided by the Interposition of Mount Libanus; on the South, with Ituraea, and Arabia Deserta also.

It was called by the Greeks Coele-Syria, i.e. Syria Cava, because partly situate in the hollow vallies interjected betwixt Libanus and Anti-Libanus: and sometimes also Syro-Phoenacia, from the inter∣mixture of those people; as the Phoenicians which went with Dido into Africk, were called Libe-Phoem∣ces. By the Romans, when made a distinct Province of their Empire, it had the name of Phoenice Libam, or Phanicia Libanensis, to difference it from the other Phoenicia, which they called Maritima: but before all this by the Hebrews named Aram-Damasek, Syria-Damascena in the Latine, from Damaescus the chief City of it: unless perhaps we should rather say, that Aram-Damasek conteined only that which lay between the Mountaines of Labanus and Anti-Libanus; the rest being added by the Romans, out of the neighbouring parts of Palestine, and Arabia-Deserta, as perhaps it was.

Chief Rivers hereof are, 1. Abanak, and 2. Pharphar, the Rivers of Damascus, as the Scripture calleth them, 2 Kings chap. 5. The one of which is thought to be the River Adonis, spoken of already; the other that which Ptolomy calleth Chrysorrhoas, or the golden flood; which rising in the Hills of this Countrey, passeth by Damascus; and so together with the other into the Mediterranean Sea Chief Mountaines of it, 1. Alsadamus, by the Phoenicians called Syrion, by the Amorites, Samir; a Ridge of Hills which begin∣ning at the East point of Anti-Libanus, bend directly Southwards, shutting up on that side the land of Isra∣el, whereof more in Palestine, 2. Hippus, a ledge of Mountains in the South parts of this Province, where it bordereth on Arabia Deserta.

Towns of most consideration in it, 1. Heliopolis, so called from an Image of the Sun there worshipped in time of Paganism; now Ballebec, or (as some say) Balbec. 2. Chalcis, more East-ward towards Damascut, which gave the title of a King to Prolomy Mennaeus, and his sonne Lysanias, the Kingdome then extending over the City of Abila, and the whole Province of Iturea in Palestine. But that Family being either expired, or grown out of favour, and Abila with Ituret otherwise disposed of, the title of the King of Chalcis with the Town and territory, was given to Herod brother of Agrippa the first, King of Jeurie. Erroneously supposed by some learned men to be that Chalcis, from which the Countrey called Chalcidice takes denomination: that Chalcis being placed by Ptolomy a degree and an half more East than Damascus, and two degrees more towards the North; whereas this Chalcis lieth on the West of that City, in the shades of Libanus, and in the very same degree of Northern Latitude. 3. Abila, seated at the foot of Libanus, betwixt Heliopolis and Chalcis, from whence the Countrey round about is called Abi∣lene: given to Lysanias, the sonne of the former Lysanias King of Chalcis, with the title of Tetrach. Mentioned Luk 3. 1. with those other Princes which shared Palestine amongst them: not that he was the sonne of Herod, as antiently Beda and Euthymius, and of late-times some very industrious men have been of opinion; but partly because the Cities of Chalcis and Abila of right belonged to those of the Tribe of Naphthalim (though never conquered or possessed by them) and so to be a part of Palestine; and partly because the Teirarchy of Abtlene, when Saint Luke wrote that Gospel, was possessed together with the rest by King Agrippa. Restored (as it seemeth) to the former Family, after his decease; for known it was by the name of Abil-Lysaniae in the time of Prolomy. 4 Adida, memorable for the victory which Aretas King of Arabia obtained neer unto it, against Alexander King of Jewrie: the Kingdome of Syria then lying open as a prey to the next Invaders. 5. Hippus, or Hippons, as Plinie calleth it, not far from the Mountain of that name. 6. Capitolias, now called Suente. 7. Gadara. 8. Scythopolis. 9. Gerasa, and 10. Philadelphia, reckoned by Ptolomy as Cities of Coele-Syria, but of right belonging unto Palestine, where we mean to take more notice of them. 11. Damascus, situate in a large plain environed with hills, and watered with the River Chrysorrboas, which with a great noise descendeth from the Mountains, and so abundantly serveth the City, that not only most of the houses have their Fountains of it, but their Orchards and gardens have some Rivulets conveyed into them. The Countrey round about abundantly enriched with plenty of most excellent wines (the vines hereof bearing grapes all the year long) and great store of wheat, as their Orchards with variety of most delicate fruits: our Damascens, (or Pru∣na Damaseena as the Latines call them) coming first from hence; as also do our Damask Roses but infi∣nite short of their naturall sweetness, by the transplantation. A place so surfeiting of delights, so girt a∣bout with odoriferous and curious gardens, that the vile Impostor Mahomet would never be perswaded to come into it: for fear (as himself was used to say) lest being ravished with the ineffable pleasures of it, he

should forget the business he was sent about, and make there his Paradice. But Muhavias, one of his Successors, having no such scruple, removed the Regal Seat unto it, where it continued (for the most part) till the building of Bagdat by Bugiafer the twentieth Caliph, about an hundred years after this Remo∣vall.

The chief buildings of it of late times, till destroyed by the Tartars, were a strong Castle, in the opi∣nion of those times held to be impregnable; and not without great difficulty forced by Tamerlane, whom nothing was able to withstand: and as Majesticall a Church, gamished with fourty suumptucus porch∣es, and no fewer then 9000 Lanterns of gold and Silver; which with 30000 people in it (who fled thither for Sanctuary) was by the said Tamerline most cruelly and unmercifully burnt and pulled down unto the ground. Repaired by the Mamalucks of Aegypt, when Lords of Syria, it hath since flourished in Trade, the people being industrious, and celebrated for most excellent Artizans: the branching of Satins, and fine Linnen which we call by the name of Damasks, being amongst many others, one of their inven∣tions. Renowned in the Old Testament for the Kings hereof, and the birth of Eliezer, Abrahams Steward (so honourably antient was this City); and in the New, for the Conversion of Saint Paul, who first preached the Gospell in this place, and here so narrowly escaped the snares of his enemies, that he was fain to be let down out of the house in which he was, by the help of Basket. 12. Eden, at the foot of Mount Libanus, now a Town of the Maronites, and antiently of such esteem, that the whole Countrey of Damascus was called Beth-Eden, Amos 1. 5.

But antient and honourable though this City was, we find nothing of the story of it, till the time of David, the Kings thereof untill those daies, being conceived to have been Homagers and Tributaries to the Kings of Zobah. The first exploit ascribed unto them in the Holy Scripture, is their coming to the aid of Adad-ezer, upon his first dereat by David: in which action having lost 22000 men, they were so broken, that they did not only suffer David to put Garrisons in the best Cities of Damascus. but patient∣ly became his Servants, and brought presents to him, 2 Sam. 8. 5, 6. The name of this unfortunate Prince not made known in Scripture, is by Josephus affirmed out of Nicolas Damasceus, to have been Adad (a name much cherished and assumed by the Kings his Suceessours): who keeping constant to the party of Adad-ezer in his following wars; was at last slain with him in that great discomsiture which David gave them, mentioned in the 2 of Sam. chap. 10. v. 18. In which Text the Scripture telleth us nothing of the death of those Kings, that being supplyed to us by Josephus out of their Records. Who also addeth, that Rezin one of the Chief Commanders of Adad-ezer, taking this advantage, not only usurped his Masters Kingdome, but made himself Master of the Kingdome of Damascus also. From this time forward the Seat-Royall of the Kings of Syria. Nor is this the tradition of Josephus only, but founded plainly on the Scriptures; of which see 1 Kings 11. v. 23, 24. the Scriptures after this, taking no notice of any other Kings of Syria (by the name of Kings of Syria) but of those that reigned in Damascus; who in short time had swallowed up the petit Kingdomes of Gessur, Ish-tok, Rehob, besides that of Sobah before-mentioned.

The Kings of Syria or Damascus.

• 1. Adad, the Friend and Confederate of Adad-ezer King of Sobah; in whose quarrel he was vanquished and slain by David.
• 2. Rezin, of whom the Scripture saith in the 2 of Chron. that when David slew them of Sobah, he fled from Adad-ezer his Lord, and gathered men unto him, and certain Captains over a Band, and went to Damascus and dwelt therein, and reigned in Damascus.
• 3. Adad II. an Idumoean, supposed to be of the family of Adad-ezer, but rather as I think of Adad, for fear of David fled to Aegypt, where he maried Taphnes, the Queens Sister: and hearing that both David and Joab were dead, returned again into his Countrey, and as some write, expelled Rezin out of Damascus, and reigned there as King.
• 4. Hezion, Successour unto Adad.
• 5. Tabrimon, the Sonne of Hezion, as is said 1 Kings 15. 18.
• 6. Ben-hadad the Sonne of Tabrimon, hired by Asa King of Judah, to aid him in his wars against Baasha of Israel.
• 7. Ben-hadad II. Sonne of the former, twice invaded Israel in the reign of Achab, but both times notably repulsed; the first time by a sally of 700 men at the siege of Sama∣ria, the next at Aphec, where with the like number in effect he was taken prisoner, and his Army routed.
• 8. Hazael, Captain of the host to Ben-hadad, annointed King of Syria by the Prophet Elisha, whom God appointed so to do, that by his hands he might avenge himself on Ben-ha-dad, whom Hazael slew, but he proved as ill a neighbour to the Kings of Israel, as those before him. He attempted upon Judah also in the time of Joas, but bribed with the Treasures of the Temple, he withdrew his forces.
• 9. Ben-hadad III. Sonne of Hazael, discomfited in three set Battels by Joas King of Israel.
• 10. Ben-hadad IV. Sonne of Ben-hadad the third.
• 11. Ben-hadad V. Sonne of Ben-hadad the fourth.
• 12. Ben-hadad VI. Sonne of Ben-hadad the fifth, in the time of one of which three Kings, but which one we find not for a certain, Jeroboam the Sonne of Joas King of Israe!, subdued

• both Chamath, and Damascus: of which see 2 Kings 14. v. 18.
• 13. R••zin II. Sonne of Ben-hadad the sixt, and the last King of Damascus, who joining with P••k••h King of Israel, against Ahaz of Judah, enforced him to call unto his aid ••••glal P••alasar, King of Assyria, by whom Rezin was taken, and beheaded, and the City of Damascus won: the Kingdome of Syria by that means united to the Assyrian Em∣pire.

After this time the Syrians continued subject to the Babylonian and Assyrian Monarchs; and in the o∣verthrow of that Empire by the Medes and Persians, became a part of their estate: remaining so till the first battel betwixt Alexander and Darius fought near Issus in Cilicia. The victory wherein falling to the Macedonia, gave him without more trouble than the seige of Tyre, the possesion of Syria and Phoen••••••. He dying not long after his conquest of Persia, this Countrey lay as it were at stake betwixt Prolomy King of Egypt, and Antigonus the chief Lord of Asia: but the possession of it, together with the rest of the Per∣sian. Empire in both Asias, fell in conclusion to the share of Scleucus, for his many great and signal victo∣ries surnamed Nicanor; a man strangely preferred. For being at the first, Governour of Cha••dea onely, he was fotced to leave Babylon, and forsake his Province for fear of Antigonus, then dreadful to all the Macedonian Captaines; and to flie into Egypt, where he became Ptolomies Admiral. After which Ptolomie sighting a pitched field with Demetrius, son to Antigonus, took Seleucus with him; and ha∣ving won the battel, gave him aid and license to recover his former government. Seleucus wel-beloved of the people, soon made himself Master, not of Chaldea onely, but of all the Persian Provinces beyond Euphrates: and not long after (being seconded by his good friend Ptolomy, Cassander, and Ly••••ma∣chus) he encountred Antigonus at Ipsus in Ionia, where Antigonus himself was slain, and his whole ar∣my routed. This victory made Seleucus Lord of all Asia, from whence passing over into Europe, he vanquished and flew Lysimachus: seven moneths after which victory he was slain by Ptolomy Ceraunus, whose patron and protector he had formerly been; being yet the last survivor of all Alexanders Princes, and the onely possessour of all the dominions which his master had, by the way of conquest, Egypt excepted. His Successours, although they were Lords of all Asia, yet since in Syria they kept their residence, to the end that they might the better furnish themselves with Souldiers out of Greece, upon all occasions, as was said before; they were commonly called the Kings of Syria. But long they held not in that greatness of estate and power which Seleucus left them: though being a full-bodied Tree, and of several Limbs, it endured the lopping off of many branches, and many a sad blow at the very root of it, before it fell For in the time of Seleucus Callinicus, the fourth of this house, A••saces a noble Parthian recovered from it all the Provin∣ces of the Persian Empire, lying on that side of Euphrates, and erected the so much celebrated Parthian Kingdome, whereof more in Persia. And in the reign of Antiochus Magnus, so called for his victories in Egypt, Judea, and Babylonia, the Romans extorted from it all the Asian Provinces, on this side Mount Taurus; not wanting many provocations to incite them to it: for he not only had made warre against Pto∣lomy Philopater King of Egypt, whom the Romans had taken into their protection; but stirred up the Ci∣ties and States of Greece against them; invaded Lysimachia, and some other parts of Europe in defiance of them; and had received Annibal the Carthagimar, and Thoas the Aetolian, their most mortal enemies, into his dominions, governing his Counsels by the influences which they had upon him. Nor may we think but that ambition and avarice, to adde to their same and Empire by the overthrow of so great a Prince, did perswade much with them. So that the point being brought to a ready issue, they pleaded it on both sides in the battel of Magnesia, a City of Lydia, to which Antiochus brought an Army of 300000. foot, and as many armed Chariots, besides store of Elephants, if the Roman writers be not o∣ver-lavish in their reports. But rejecting the advise of Annibal, and committing his affaires wholly to Evil Counsellers, he was vanquished by no more than four Legions of enemies, and for his peace, compelle to quit all his Asian Provinces, on that side of Taurus, and to pay 15000. Talents in ready mony for the charge of the warre. The rest of his estates they were content he should enjoy for a longer time, Et libentius quod tam facile cessisset, (as Florus handsomly puts it on him) because he had so easily relinquished that. Afterwards in the civil broyles among themselves, about the succession of the Kingdome, Alexander, King of the Jews, took from them many of their best Towns in Palestine, as Joppa, Gaza, Anthedon, Azotus, Rhinocorura, almost all Samaria, and Gaulonitis, with Sythopolis, Gadara, and many other strong Towns in Coele-Syria. Finally, when they had consumed almost all the Royal race, and changed their Kings no less than ten times in 40. years, (a sure sign of a falling and expiring Kingdome) they were fain to cast themselves upon Tigranes King of Armenia, a puissant and successeful Prince, till ingaged in the quarrel of Mithridates against the Romans: by whom stripped of all his Estates on this side Eu∣phrates, he was fain to content himself with his own Armenia, leaving Syria to the absolute disposal of Pompey, who presently reduced it to the form of a Province. This said, we have not much more to do with the house of Seleucus, but to lay down their names, and times of their several governments, till we draw towards the last end of

The Macedonian Kings of Syria.

• A. M.
• 3654. 1. Seleucus, Nicanor, the first King of this house. 31.
• 3685. 2. Antiochus, surnamed Soter, or the Saviour; memorable for nothing so much, as marying with Stratonice his Fathers wife, in his Fathers life-time.
• 3704. 3. Antiochus II. by his flattering Courtiers surnamed Theos, or the God: but being poisoned by his wife he proved a mortall.
• ...

• 3719. 4. Seleucus II. surnamed by the like flattery Callinicus, or fair Conquerour; because shame∣fully beaten by the Parthians.
• 3739 5. Seleucus III. called for the like reason Ceraunus, or the Thunderer; the eldest sonne of Callinicus.
• 3742. 6. Antiochus III. surnamed Magnus, the younger sonne of Callinicus, a Prince that imbra∣ced many great actions, and was fortunate in his successes beyond Euphrates: he plagued the Jews, but lost all Asia Minor unto the Romans.
• 3778. 7. Seleucus IV. called Philopator, the sonne of Antiochus, who first began to cast his eye up∣on the riches of the Tempse at Hierusalem.
• 3790. 8. Antiochus IV. surnamed Epiphanes, or the Illustrious, but more truly Epimanes, or the mad, the great scourge of the Jews; brother of Seleucus Philopator. With whom be∣ginneth the story of the first Book of the Maccabees.
• 3802. 9. Antiochus V. called by the name of Eupator, the sonne of Epiphanes; who by Lysias his Captain tyrannized over the poor Iudeans, for the litle time that he reigned; as did also
• 3804. 10. Demetrius, surnamed Soter, sonne of Seleucus Philopator, by the hands of Nicanor: ha∣ving possessed himself of the diademe by the death of Eupator, slain in his favour by the Soul∣diers who revolted from him. He was afterwards deposed for a time by Alexander Bala, pretending himself to be the Sonne of Eupator, supported herein by the Antiochians.
• 3814. 11. Alexander Bala, discomfited in his first battell by Demetrius, whom he slew and van∣quished in the second; maryed Cleopatra Daughter of Ptolomy Philometor, by whose aid he was victorious. But a quarrel breaking out between them, Ptolomy invaded Syria, and caused himself to be crowned King of it: Alexander being slain by some of his Soul∣diers.
• 3819. 12. Demetrius II. surnamed Nicator, Sonne of Demetrius the first, recovered his Fathers Kingdome, a friend of the Maccabees, but so cruell to his own people, that he was driven out of his Kingdome by Tryphon Generall of his Armies.
• 3821. 13. Antiochus VI. surnamed Entheus, the Sonne of Alexander and Cleopatra, advanced unto the Throne by Tryphon, and after slain by him to make way for himself unto the Throne.
• 3824. 14. Tryphon, called also Diodorus, having driven out Demetrius, and slain Antiochus, made himself King.
• 3827. 15. Antiochus VII. surnamed Sedetes, brother of Demetrius, having overcome and slain Try∣phon, succeeded him in the estate; for a while victorious against the Parthians, but after∣wards overcome and slain by them. After whose death Demetrius Nicator (having lived in Parthia since the loss of his Kingdome) was restored again unto the Throne; which having held about 4 years, he was again dispossessed and slain by
• 3843. 16. Alexander II. surnamed Zebenna, an Aegyptian of mean birth, set up by Ptolomy Euer∣getes, and pretending himself to be the adopted Sonne of Antiochus; afterwards vanquish∣ed and slain by
• 3845. 17. Antiochus VIII. from the croockednesse of his nose surnamed Gryphus, Sonne of Deme∣trius, aided herein by the Aegyptian, with whom reconciled: having reigned about eight years in peace, embroiled himself in warre with his half-brother Antiochus surnamed Cyzi∣cenus; which with variable successes on both sides, continued till the time of his death, having reigned 29 years in all.
• 3874. 18. Seleucus V. Sonne of Antiochus Gryphus, in the beginning of his reign overcame and flew his Uncle Cyzicenus; but being vanquished by Antiochus surnamed Eusebes or Pius, one of the Sonnes of Cyzicenus, he fled into Cilicta, and was there burnt in his palace.
• 19. Antiochus IX. surnamed Eusebes, having first vanquished Seleucus, and afterwards Antio∣chus, another of the Sonnes of Gryphus, was crowned King of Syria; but slain not long af∣ter in the Persian wars.
• 20. Philip, and Demetrius III. surnamed Eucoerus, younger Sonnes of Gryphus, jointly Kings of Syria, but reigning in their severall parts. Of which Demetrius intending to disseize his brother, was himself vanquished, and forced to fly into Parthia; leaving the whole King∣dome unto Philip. During which warres amongst themselves, Syria was invad∣ed, and in part conquered, by Aret as King of the Arabians, and Alexander King of the Jews.
• 3884. 21. Tigranes King of Armenia, during these dissentions was by the Syrians chosen King, that by his power they might be freed from the Jews and Arabians: the most puissant Prince that had reigned in Syria since the time of Antiochus the Great, as being King of Syria by election, of Armenia by succession, of Media by conquest. But ingaging himself with Mithridates (whose daughter he had maryed) against the Romans, was vanquished by Lucullus: who with the loss of five Romans onely, and the wounds of an hundred, is reported to have slain of his Enemies above a 100000 men. Finally, being again broken and vanquished by Lucullus, he yielded himself to Pompey (who being appointed Lucullus successour, deprived him of the honour of ending that warre;) and retaining to himself Armenia only, he left all Syria to the Romans; having reigned eighteen years. And though An∣tiochus Comagenus, the Sonne of Eusebes, petitioned Pompey for a restitution to the Throne of his An∣••estours; yet it would not be granted: Pompey replying that he would not trust the Countrey into such

• weak hands as were not able to defend it against the Arabians, Parthians, and the like Invaders; and so reduced it presently to the form of a Province. The government of this Countrey under these new Lords, was accompted to be one of the greatest honours of the Empire: the Prefect hereof having al∣most regall jurisdiction over all the regions on this side Euphrates; with a super-intendency over Egypt. Niger the concurrent of Severus, was Praefect here: and on the strength hereof presumed on that competi∣tion. So also was Cassius Syrus, who being a Native of this Countrey, and well-beloved by reason of his moderate and plausible demeanour, had almost tumbled M. Antonius out of his Throne. On this occasion it was enacted by the Senate, that no man hereafter should have any militer or legale command in the Province where he was born: Left perhaps supported by the naturall propension of the people, to one of their own Nation; and heartned by the powerableness of his Friends, he might appropri∣ate that to himself which was common to the Senate and people of Rome. But this was when it was en∣tire, and passed but for one Province only, Phoenicia being also taken into the accompt, which made the Antiochians so proud and insolent, that Adrian, in his time intended to subduct Phoenicia from it, ne∣tot civitatum Metropolis Antiochia diceretur, (faith Gallcanus) that Antioch might not be the chief of so many Cities. But what he lived not to accomplish, was performed by Constantine. By whom Pho∣nicia was not only taken off, but Syria itself divided into four distinct Provinces, as was shewed before; each of them having its Metropolis or Mother City: but all subordinate to the command of the Comes or Praefect of the East, as he to the command of the Praefectus Praetorio Orientis; the greatest Officer of the Empire, of whom we have often spoke already.

For the defence hereof aswell against all Forrein invasions, as the insurrections of the Natives, (a wa∣vering and inconstant People) the Romans kept here in continuall pay four Legions, with their Aids, and other Additaments. For so many Mutianus had here in the time of Galba; and by the strength and repu∣tation of those Forces, was able to transfer the Empire upon Vespasian. And though the Constantinopoli∣tan Emperours to whose share it fell in the division of the Empire, rather increased than diminished any part of this strength: yet when the fat all time was come, and that Empire was in the Declination, the Sara∣cens, under the conduct of Haumar their third Caliph, an. 636. possessed themselves of it, Heraclius then reigning in Constantinople. And it continued in their power, till Trangrolipix the Turk having con∣quered Persia, and the Provinces on that side of Euphrates, passed over the River into Syria, and made himself Master of a great part of that also. A quarrell falling out betwixt him and his neerest Kins-men, and thereby a great stop made in their further progress, was thus composed, by the mediation of the Calivh of Babylon in the time of Axan his Successour. To Cutlu Muses was assigned a convenient Army, to be by him employed against the Christians, with Regal power over the Provinces by him gained, without re∣lation or subordination to the Persian Sultans: of whose successes and affairs hath been spoke elsewhere. To Melech, and Ducat, two others of his discontented Kins-men, but all of the same Selzuccian fa∣mily, he gave the fair Cities of Aleppo and Damascus, and those parts of Syria, with whatsoever they could conquer from the Caliph of Aegypt, who then held all Phoenicia, and the Sea-coasts of Palestine, to be held in see and vassalage of the Crown of Persia. To these two brethren then we are to refer the beginning of the Turkish Kingdome in Syria: who with their Successors, by reason that here they held their residence, caused themselves to be called

The Turkish Kings of Damascus.

• 1075. 1. Melech and Ducat, the first Turkish Kings of Damascus by the gift of Axan the second Sul∣tan of the Turks in Persia, added to their dominions all the rest of Syria, together with Cili∣cia and some neighbouring Provinces in the Lesser Asia.
• 2.—Sultan of Damascus, at such time as the Christians of the West won the Holy Land: against whom he notably defended the City and Territories of Damascus; and in a set Battel discomfited and flew Roger the Norman, Prince of Antioch.
• 1146. 3. Noradine (the Sonne of Sanguin) Generall of the Armies, and Sonne-in-Law to the former King, succeeded him in the estate. A noble Prince, memorable amongst other things for a gal∣lant answer made to his Commanders, when they perswaded him to take the advantage on the death of Baldwin the third, and to invade Hierusalem whilst the Christians were busie in so∣lemnizing his Funerals. Not so, faith he, Compassion and regard is to be had of the just sorrow of those Christians, who have lost such a King, as could not be equalled in the world.
• 1175. 4. Melechsala, Sonne of Noradine, contemned by reason of his youth, by his Nobles and Souldiery, who made choice of Saladine for their King, by whom dispossessed first, and after vanquished.
• 1176. 5. Saladine the Turkish Sultan of Egypt, having vanquished the Persians, or Parthians, com∣ing under the conduct of Cacobed, Uncle to Melechsia, to restore that Prince to his Estate, remained King of Damascus: and by the puistance of his Armies recovered from the Christi∣ans all Syria, and the Holy Land, with the City of Hierusalem.
• 1199. 6. Eladel, or El-Aphzal the eldest Sonne of Saladine, suceeded in the Realm of Damascus, which he exchanged for that of Egypt with his Brother Elaziz.
• 7. Elaziz, the second Sonne of Saladine succeeded upon this Exchange in the Realm of Da∣mascus, murdered not long after by his Uncle Saphradine.
• 8. Saphradine the Brother of Saladine, having barbariously murdered eight of the Sonnes of Sa∣ladine, (the youngest called Saphradine escaping onely, who was after Sultan of Aleppo) pos∣sessed

• himself of the Kingdome of Damascus, left at his death to Corradine his Sonne or Ne∣phew.
• 9. Corradine, Sonne or Nephew to the Tyrant Saphradine, was by him at his death left Sultan of Damascus, to which all Syria and Palestine were then made Provincials. But the treacheries and murders of Saphradine crying loud for vengeance, Haulon the Tartar in the year 1262. having taken the King of Damascus Prisoner (but whether Corradine or some other I am not a∣ble to say) brought him before the walls of the City, threatning to kill him in the sight of his people, if they did not deliver it unto him. Which the Citizens refusing to do, the wretched King was torn in peeces, and the City taken by assault: the Kingdome by the Conquerors conferred upon Agab the Sonne of Haalon. And so ended the Selzuccian family of the Kings of Damascus in the person of Corra∣dine, or the Sonne of Corradine, most miserably murdered by the Tartars; as it had done in Egypt 17 years before in the person of Melechsela and Elmutam the Sonne of Meledine, as villainously dispos∣ed and murdered by the Mamalucks. So slippery is the foundation of those Kingdomes which are laid in blood.

Nor did this Kingdome hold long in the hands of the Tartars, recovered from them in short time by the Mamalucise then Kings of Egypt; from them once more regained by the furious Tamerlane, who in the year 1400. besieged Damascius with an Army of 1200000. men (if the number be not mistaken, and one Cypher added more than should): in pursuite whereof he filled up the ditches with his Prisoners, put all the people, to the sword, and with great art raised three Towers as a trophey of his victory, built with the heads of those whom he had so slaughtered. A man so strangely made up of vice and vertues, that it is hard to say which had the predominancie. But the violence of this tempest being overblown, the Mamalucks from whom he had also conquered the Kingdome of Egypt, recovered Syria by degrees, and repaired Da∣mascus: continuing in their power till the year 1516 when Selimus the first discomsited (am••s••n Gau∣rus the Aegyptian Sultan in the fields of Aleppo. Upon the newes whereof the Citizens of Damascus, fearing the spoil of their rich City then of very great trading, set open their Gates unto the Victors; as did all the other Cities and Towns of Syria by their Example. By means whereof, without any more blows, the Turks became Lords of all this Country; as the next year of Egypt also by the vanquishment and death of Tonombeius who succeeded Campson: so rooting out the name and government of the Mamalucks, and adding those rich Kindomes to the Turkish Empire.

And so much for Syria

MOVNT HERMON.

IN our passage out of Coele-Syria into Palestine; we must cross Mount Hermon; a ledge of hills, which beginning at the East point of the Anti-Libanus, bend directly South: in different places, and by se∣veral Nations called by divers names. By Ptolomy called Alsadamus; by the Amorites, Samir; by the Phoenicians, Syrion; & by that name remembered in the book of Psadmes. But Alsadamus they are called onely where they border upon Coele-Syria. Where they begin to part the Region of Traconitis from A∣rabis-Deserta, they are called by Moses and the Scriptures Hermon; part of the Kingdome of Og, the King of Basan, as is said, Josuah chap. 12. ver. 6. Syrion by the Sidonians, as is affirmed Deut. chap. 3. v. 9. Running farther after this unto the South, they are called Gilead or Galaad: by Strabo, Trachonitae, after the name of the Region along which they pass: and are conceived to be the highest part of all Mount Labanus, or rather of that long Ridge of Mountains which there take beginining. And so we are to un∣derstand the words of the Prophet Jeremie saying, Galaad tu mihi caput Libani, as the Vulgar readeth it. That is to say, that as the head is the highest part of a man; so these hills, or this part of them, was the highest of all the branches or spurres of Livanus. Called Galeed by Jacob from that heap of stones which was there laid by Laban and Jacob, to be a witness of the Covenant which was made betwixt them, Con. 31 ver. 27. the word signifying in the Original an heap of Witnesses. And Laban said, this heap 〈◊〉〈◊〉 between me and thee this day; therefore was the name of it called Galeed, ver. 28. By these hills, and the main body of the Anti-Libanus lying on the North, and the Mountaines of Phoenicia and lanmaea on the West, the land of Palestine is so shut up on every side, that no Foretress can be stronger by wit or Art, than that Countrey by Nature, the passages in some parts so narrow as hardly to afford passage for a single person, Clauditur undig, montibus, hinc abruptis, rupibus et profundis vallibus concursu Torrentium, inde altis et implexis anfractibus sic contractis, ut per angustos colles vix pateat transitus viatori, as my Author hath it. I forgot to adde, that that part of these hills, which commonly is known in Scripture by the name of Hermon, is in one place thereof called Sihon, as Deut 4 ver. 48. where it is said that the Israelites possessed the Land from Aroer on the bank of the River Arnon, even to Mount Sion, which is Hermon: as also that one of the highest tops or Summits of it, had the name of Amana, allu∣ded to by Solomon in the fourth of the Canticles, by some mistaken for Amanus a branch of Taurus, which divides Syria from Cilicia in the Lesser Asia, with which Solomon had but small or no acquaintance. And so having cleared our selves of so much of this Mountain as lay before us in our way, we palestine: where we shall meet with it again, (or rather with the Western parts and branches of it) under the names of Gilead and Trachonitis, as a part of that Country.

OF PALESTINE.

PALESTINE is bounden on the East, with the Hills last mentioned, by which parted from Coelo-Syria, and Arabia-Deserta; on the West, with the Mediterranean Sea, and some part of Phoenicia; on the North, with the Anti-Libanus which divides 〈◊〉〈◊〉 from Syria, and the rest of Phoenicia; and on the South, with some part of Arabia Petraea.

It was first called Palestine from the Philistims, the most potent Nation of those parts. A name first found in the History of Herodotus, but generally used in times succeeding by the Greeks & Roman••. And this I look on as the proper and adaequate name of the whole Countrey, according to the bounds be∣fore laid down: the others, by which commonly called, being more restrained, and properly belonging to so much hereof as was in the possession of the Tribes of Israel. And of this sort are 1. Canaan, o•• the Land of Canaan, so called from Canaan the Sonne of Cham, by whom first peopled after the flood. 2. The Land of Promise, because by God promised to Abraham and his feed for an habitation. 3. Israel, from the Israelites or Sonnes of Jncob, whose surname was Israel. 4. Judaea, and by us Jewry, from the Jews, or people of the Tribe of Jadah, the most prevalent of the Tribes of Israel. And 5. Terr••s Sancta or the Holy Land, because the subject of the greatest part of the Holy Scripture: and that the work of our Redemption was herein accomplished by our Lord and Saviour. Which notwithstanding we must know, that though these names do many times by a Synechdoche, express the whole Countrey of Palestine•• yet neither the Canaanites or the Israelites were ever Masters of the whole: except onely in the times of David, and of some of the Maccabean Princes, as also in some part of the reign of Herod the Great; all which had the good fortune to command it totally.

But being the most considerable People of it were the Tribes of Israel; we will first look upon the Coun∣trey People under that capacity. And for so much hereof as was held by them, it is situate between the third and fourth Climats: the longest day being fourteen hours and a quarter: the whole length but 200 miles, and not above 80 in the breadth, yet was of such a fruitful soil, that before the comming in of the Israelites, it had 30 Kings: and after the comming in of that people so extreamly populous, that Da∣vid numbred on Million and 300000 fighting men, besides those of the Tribes of Levi and Benjami••. But of the fruitfulness hereof more shortly.

As for the People they were by composition of a midle stature, but strong of bodie: in their best times a murmuring and stiff-necked genneration, never well pleased either with God or man, with their Priests or Princes; seldome conform unto the Commandments of their God, nor very much constant to them∣selves. So crippled in their goings betwixt superstitions and Idolatry, that they knew not how to walk uprightly. Idolatrous above measure, and incorrigible in it, till their coming back from the Captivity of Babylon: and after that as superstitious and severe in the point of their Sabbath, as they had formerly been exorbitant in the worship of Idols. No Medium on either side, but extream in both. Divided an∣tiently into these four ranks, that is to say, 1. Jews, 2. Hellenists, 3. Proselytes, and 4. Samaritans; all of them pretending a right unto this Countrey, though not all of them dwelling in it.

Of these the first called Jews, from Judah, the predominant Tribe; and Hebrews, from Heber the Sonne of Sela, grand-sonne of Sem, and one of the Ancestors of Abraham: were such as naturally de∣scended of the Tribes of Israel, and lived for the most part in their own Countrey, adhering to the Law of Moses; and embracing the whole Canon of the Old Testament, from the book of Genesis to the book of the Prophet Malachi. Called also Israelites, because descended from the loins of their Father 〈◊〉〈◊〉 to whom God gave the name of Israel, for his greater honour: but after the ten Tribes were carryed away by Salm••inassar to an endlesse captivity; and the two tribes (with the remainder of the rest) returned from that temporary one, which they found in Babylon: the name of Israelites was laid by; and that of J••••s assumed, as more proper to them. These read the Scriptures, and executed all Divine Offices in their natural Hebrew.

2. The Hellenists, were such as were Jews by parentage, but lived dispersed in most Provinces of the Roman Empire: called by that name (we may English it the Graecizing Jews) because they read the Scriptures in the Greek or Septuagints translation; and performed all publique offices in that lanquage also. In other things as superstitious in their Sabbaths, as tenacious of their Circumcision, and others of the rites and ceremonies of the law of Moses, as the Jews of Palestine; and for that reason scorned and derided by the Gen••iles amongst whom they lived; Credit Indaerus apella, saith one of their Poets; relating to their circumcising; Recu••ing, Sabbat a palles, saith another of them, with scorn enough unto their Sab∣baths. Novi••illie ritus & coetets mortalibus con••rar••, saith Tacitus a graver Author, of the whole body of their Rituals or Acts of worship.

3. The Proselytes were such, as not being Iews by birth, or discent of parentage, conformed them∣selves unto their customes, and desired to be admitted into their Religion. And these were also of two sorts, the one called Proselyri Portae; and the other Proselyti foederis, The first of these, admitted by the Iews to the worship of God, and instructed in the hopes of the life to come, were onely tied to those precepts which the Hebrew Doctors call the Precepts of the sonnes of Noah; but were neither circumcised, nor otherwise conform to the Law of Moses. Which Precepts of the Sonnes of Noah, so called because supposed to be given by Noah unto his Sonnes, when he came out of the Ark, were seven in number; that is to say, 1. That they dealt uprightly with every man. 2. That they blessed and magnified the name of God. 3. That they worshipped not any false Gods, but to abstain from Idolatry. 4. To refrain from all unlawful lusts and copulations. 5. To keep themselves from theft and robbery. 6. From shed∣ding bloud. And 7. not to eat the flesh or member of any beast taken from it when it was alive, by which all cruelty was forbidden. These though they were admitted to the worship of God, and might re∣pair unto the Temple, yet because of their Uncircumcision they were not suffered to converse with the Iews, nor to come into the same Court of the Temple with them: but were accounted as unclean, and had their Court apart assigned them in the worship of God, which was called Atriam Gentium, or Immundoru••, and was the outermost of all. The other Proselytes which were called Proselyti foederis, conformed in all things to the Iews; as in Circumcision, Sabbath-keeping, and all other Ceremonies: and were accoun∣ted of as adopted Iews, privileged as they were to worship in the Inner Court; bound as they were, from eating or drinking with a Gentile; and in a word, partakers with them in all things both divine and humane, and different in nothing from them but their race or parentage. These last in the New Testament called sim∣ply Proselytes, without any addition: the former by the name of 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, or the worshipping Gentiles, of which see Acts 16. v. 14. & chap. 17. v. 4. 17. & chap. 18. v. 4. &c.

4. As for the Samaritans, they possessed a great part of this Countrey which the Proselytes did not, yet were not so much Iews as they. But of these more anon when we come to Samaria, the proper place of their abode.

As for the natural Jews themselves they are divided also into severall Sects, as viz. 1. Esseni, 2. the Sadduces, 3. the Scribes, 4. the Pharisees, 5. the Herodians, and 6. the Gaulonites or 〈◊〉〈◊〉 The Essenes or Esseni derive their name as some conceive from Asca, which signifieth facere, to doe, be∣cause they laboured with their hands; as others say from Asa, which signifieth 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, or to cure di∣seases, because they were much given to the study and practice of Phisick. Their beginning is not yet a∣greed on. The first time they were heard of was in the time of Jonathan the brother of Judas Maccabaen••, about 150 years before Christ's nativity, then mentioned by Josephus, Antiqu. Judaic. l. 13. cap. 9. A P••hagorean kind of Jew, and not much differing in opinion from those old Philosophers, professing as they did. 1. Community of goods. 2. Abstaining even from lawfull pleasures. 3. Forbiding of Oaths. 4 Forbearing Wine, and drinking Water. 5. Ascribing the conduct of affairs to fate or destine. 6. Using onely inanimate or un bloody Sacrifices. Some other Dogmata they had, but these the principall: forbid∣ing mariage not being common to the Sect, but onely to some few amongst them. And though we find no mention of them in the New Testament, the Sect in those times being small and inconsiderable; yet it is thought that Saint Paul alludeth to their Tenets: as where he adviseth Timothy to make use of Wine, and glanceth upon those who prohibited mariage, 1 Tim. 4. 3. or condemned others in the use of meat and arnk, 2. Collos. 16. As for the manner of their life, they lived together as it were in Manasteries or Colledges, and in every one had their 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, or Oratory: admitting none into their fellowship or society, unless he brought all he had into their common Treasury; and not then neither under a three years Proba∣tionership. More of them he that listeth to see, may satisfie himself in that tract of Philo, intituled De vi∣ta contemplativa, where he most copiously describeth their Institutes and course of life: mistakingly ap∣plied by Eusebius to the Primitive Christians, as if that Tract had purposely been composed of them by that learned Jew.

2. The Sadduces either derive their name from Sadoc, who lived about the time of Alexander the Great, and is thought to be the first founder of them; or from Sadok an Hebrew word, signifying Justice; the men pretending to be so exact and strict Iusticiaries, as if they would justifie themselves before Gods Tri∣bunall. The occasion of the Sect or heresie (for both it was) said to arise from a mistake of Antigonus a right learned man, who teaching that we ought not to serve God, as Servants doe their Masters, for the hope of reward; occasioned Sadoc and Baitus, two of his Auditors, to conceive that there was no re∣ward nor recompence for a godly life, and consequently no Resurreection nor World to come, neither An∣gels nor Spirits. These were the most capital of their Errors, as appeareth Act. 23. 6. 8. Mat. 22. 3. Luke 20. 20. 27. &c. But other Dogmata they had not mentioned in the holy Scripture, ascribing nothing unto Fate, or Predestination, but all things altogether to a mans free-will. 2. Teaching the soul to be annihilated at the hour of death. 3. Rejecting all Traditions; and 4. Allowing no more Scripture than the five Books of Moses. In most of their opinions contrary to the Scribes and Pharisees, but joining with them both in opposing Christ, and though like Sampsons foxes they looked divers wayes and were tied together by their tails onely; yet in those tails they carried fire-brands to destroy Gods harvest; and had done it if they had been able.

3. But indeed the Pharisees were the men who were the Master-wits in the Arts of mis chief. Homines robustioris impietatis in the Fathers words. Fellowes of such a perfect and concocted malice, that they were almost able to possess the devil. Their name they derive from Pharez, which is to separate. Sepa∣rist•• we may rightly call them. For they were first 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, separated to the study of the Law of God, as Saul was brought up to that purpose at the feet of Gamaliel: and 2ly 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉,

separated from the rest of mankind, by a more strict profession of sanctity; as the Phar••∣see boasted of himself that he was not as other men, or as that Publican. And that they might so seem unto simple men, they did thirdly separate themselves from the society and conversation of others not to pure as themselves, whom they called populum terrae, or the Sonnes of the earth: upbraiding Christ that he kept company with Publicans and Sinners: and more then so, used a particular kind of habit, and had a garbe unto themselves which no others had; using it for a by-word amongst themselves, that 〈◊〉〈◊〉 populi terrae sunt conculcatio Pharisaeorum. To which end, as their Countenances were more clouded and severe than others; so did they wear their Ph••lacteries of a broder size than others did; which by the way, were scrols of Parchment bound about their heads and upon their hands, wherein were writ the Ten Commandments of God: foolishly so interpreting those words of Deut. And they shall be as front•••••• between thine eyes, &c. chap. 6. ver. 8. They began at the same time with the Sadduces; which was about 300 years before Christs nativity. As for their Dogmata, besides those specified above, which were also practicable, they mentioned 1. a Pythagorean Metempsuchosis, affirming that the soul of a righteous man passed from one man into another, at the time of his death: from whence the divers opi∣nions touching Christ our Saviour, Mat. 16. v. 14. are supposed to spring, as if his body had been anima∣ted with the soul of Elias, John the Baptist, Jeremy, or some other Prophet. 2. They adhered so te∣naciously to unwritten traditions, that in comparison of them, they neglected the written Law as either insufficient or impertinent. And 3. ascribed so much sanctity unto frequent washings, especially when they came from Market, Mark 7. v. 4. where possibly they might meet with some unclean person; and before their sitting down to meat, Mat. 15. 2. that if they came unto a place where there was not wa∣ter enough both to drink and wash, the 'Pharisee would rather choose to wash than drink, thoughte died for thirst. More of them he that list to see, may find it copiously set down in the four and twentyeth chapter of Saint Matthew; and thither I referre the Reader. By means of which pretensions to so great a sanctity, and some other arts they had to abuse the people, they grew so strong, and had such store of followers, and dependants on them, that they became formidable in short time to their Kings and Prin∣ces. Insomuch that Alexandra durst not enter on the government in her Childrens nonage as Josephus telleth us Antiqu. lib. 13. cap 23. untill she had permitted all things unto their disposing, 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, &c. and promised to doe nothing without their advice. And this she did by the di∣rection of King Alexander her dying Husband, whose Government as he found by too sad experience, had in many things proved unsuccessfull, 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, because he had put some scor••cs upon them, and otherwise offended that prevailing faction. A faction so predominant amongst the Peo∣ple. saith the same Josephus, Antiqu. lib. 19. cap. 18. 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, &c. that whatsoever they pleased to spread abroad either of the High Priest. or the King himself, how false and scandalous soever; it was received for truth without more dispute, or any enquire made in∣to it.

4. But of the Pharisees enough, of the Scribes anon. Proceed we now to the Herodians and the Gaulonites, whom I look not on as either the Authors or Promoters of any Sect of Religion in the Jew∣ish Church; but as the names of two opposite factions in the Civil State. The first were such who depend∣ing upon Herods fortune, as he did on the pleasure of the Roman Emperours; sollicited the paying of tribute to the Romans; and earnestly pressed upon that point, that Herod might be thereby the more in∣deered to his Masters of Rome, and they to him. Upon this ground, nick-named Herodians by the peo∣ple, as men that more endeavoured the greatness and estate of Herod, than the prosperity and liberty of their native Countrey. And possible enough it is, that some amongst them seeing the magnificence of He∣rods palace, and experimentally knowing his prowess; might fancy him to be the Messiah, so long look∣ed for and thereby own this name with a better title than the others did. Opposite unto these were those called the Gaulonites (we may call the one the Court-faction, the other the faction of the Countrey or Common-people): so named from one Judas, a Gaulonite as Josephus calleth him from the place of his birth; a Galilaean, as Gamaliel calleth him, Acts 5. 37. from the place of his abode or habitation. By him the Jews were practised with to deny this tribute, telling them that it was a manifest token of their fervitude and that they ought to know no Lord, but the Lord of Heaven: drawing them finally on this ground into open armes, in which action he and his adherents perished, and were brought to nothing. Most of his followers were of Galilee, though he had some disciples in Hierusalem and Samaria also: and of these Galilaeans were those poor men, whose bloud Pilate is said to mingle with their Sacrifices, Luke 13. 1.

The language of this people by them called the Hebrew, was naturally and originally the same which Abraham found in the land of Can••••an, at his comming thither: as hath been shewn before when we were in Pham••ia. Used by them constantly till their subjugation by the Babylonians, when being led captive to that Countrey, and conforming themselves to the speech and dialect of it: they came at last to speak a kind of broken language, neither true Chaldaean, nor good Hebrew, but one made of both. Chaldee, as to the main body of it, but Hebrew, as to the Affixes, points, and Conjugations; being the same with that which we now call the Syriack. And at their comming home, after seventy years, had so far lost the knowledge of their Mother-tongue: that they were not able to understand the words of the Holy Scripture, when Ezra read it in their hearing; inso∣much that he was forced to employ some learned in that tongue, to expound it to them. To this the Scribes so often mentioned in the New Testament, must refer their originall: there being no such Office heard of till the time of Ezra, though long before that time the Law had ordinarily been read unto them in the feast of Tabernacles. For this cause they were called Scribes of the Law, Ezra 7. 6. Do∣ctors

of the Law, Luke 5. 17. and simply by the name of Lawyers, Luke 7. 30. as men whose of∣fice was to expound the Law, and make it intelligible to the people. These people we may resemble to the Canonists in the Church of Rome, or the Divinity Reader in some School or College: and grew to so great estimation in the Jewish State, that it was hard to say at last whether the Pharisees or they were the better men. For what the Pharisees gained on the common people by pretence of sanctity, these got more justifiably by their zeal to the written word, which they endeavoured to preserve from the common dan∣gers both of corruption and contempt. And though I look on those men especially, as the name of a fun∣ction, not a Sect: yet being they held so close to the Pharisees, and concurred with them in most of their superstitions, as appeareth Mat. 23. I consider them as a strong and potent faction, of great authority and influence in affaires of moment.

For matters of Religion, the people of this land were privileged above all others, had they had the grace to make good use of it: the Law being given to them by God the Father, the Gospel preached amongst them by God the Sonne, and that Gospel countenanced and confirmed before their eyes, by the miracu∣lous operations of the Holy Ghost. The Government of that Church in the time of the Law by a subordi∣nation of Priests and Levites to their several heads; the Priests divided by King David into 24. ranks or Classes, each Classis serving in their turnes at the holy Temple: the chiefs or Heads of which several Classes made but that body of men which are called Principes Sacerdotum, or chief Priests, so often mentioned in the writings of the holy Evangelists. Over all which there was one supreme, whom they called Summum Sacerdotem, or the High-Priest, descended lineally from Aaron, till the Romans out of ave∣rice and reason of State made the office saleable. And because possibly the High-Priest might be under some pollution, and so uncapable by law to perform his Office, he had his Suffragan (or Sagan) to dis∣charge it for him. Of which sort was Zephaniah, the Sagan or second Priest to Semiah, mentioned Ierem. 52. 24. And of this sort is Annas thought by some to have been to Caiaphas; and for that cause the title of High-Priest to be given to both, Luke 3. 2. though others think that Annas was High-Priest in right, and the other in fact: the one being desposed by the Romans, and the other super-induced into the place. In time of Christianity they were governed as in other Churches, by a subordination of Priests to Bishops, the first said to be Saint Iames, the Sonne of Alphaeus, commonly called the Lords Brother: affirmed by Ignatius, Scholar to the Apostles, in his Epistle ad Trallianos; by Egesippus who lived in the Apostles times, as Saint Hierome and Eusebius cite him; as also by Clem••ns of Alexandria cited by Eusebius, hist. 1. 7. c. 14. by Cyrill of Hierusalem, Catechism. 4. and 14. Epiphanius, Haeres. 78. n. 7. Saint Ambrose in Gal. 1. Saint Chrysost. on the last of Saint Iohus Gospel; Saint Hierome in his Ca∣talogue of Ecelesiastical writers; Saint Augustine cont. Crescon. 1. 2. cap. 37. to whom there may be added the joint consent of 289. Prelates, assembled in the sixth General Council holden at Constantinople, affirming Iames the Lords Brother to be the first Bishop of Hierusalem: all of them, with the Fathers before mentioned, taking the word Bishop in that sense in which it generally passed for the times they lived in. His Successors subject at the first to the Bishop of Caesarea, as their Metropolitan; though privileged in their own Diocese with the rights of Patriarchs, as appears evidently by the Acts of the Nicene Council. But after∣wards for the greater honour of the Holy City, wherein our Saviour wrought the work of our Redemption, it was ordained at Chalcedor, that the Bishop of Hieru••alem should have as well the jurisdiction as the name of a Patriarch; the three Palestines, (for Constantine had before divided it into so many Provinces) being sub∣ducted from the power of the See of Antioch, to make up this Patriarchate. So stood it in the elder times, but now by the incroachment of Mahometanism the Christian faith is so obscured, and the beauties of it so Ecclipsed: that were it not for some Sects of Christians dwelling in Mount Sinai, and about Hierusa∣lem, it might be said without any manifest untruth to be quite exstinguished.

But to look back upon the Countrey, it cannot be described more fully and significantly than Moses hath done it to our hands in the 8. of Deut. Where it is said to be a land of Brooks and Waters, of Foun∣tains and depths that spring out of the Vallies and Hills; a Land of Wheat and Barly, and Vines, and Fig-trees, and Pomgranatis; of Oyl-olive, and Honey; a Land wherein was bread without scarceness; a Land whose stones were as Iron, and out of whose Hills one might dig brass. An ample com∣mendation, and yet in some sort short of the fertility of this flourishing Countrey, which did not onely consist in the choice and plenty, but the perpetuity of its fruits: it being on record in the Epistles of the Emperour Julian, (surnamed the Apostate) that the Fig-trees, and other fruit-trees herein, were seldome or never without fruits: the old not fully falling off, till the new come on, which his report if true, (as certainly he did not love our Saviour so well as to flatter the Countrey for his sake) we have then an answer to the difficulty which hath so much perplexed all Commentators of former times, and that is, why our Saviour should curse the Fig-tree for not bearing fruit, when the Text saith, that the time of fruits was not yet come, Mar. 14. 13. For though the time for new fruits was not come as yet (it being then but early Spring) yet our Saviour being hungry might expect to find some of the old, and failing of his expectation lay that curse upon it. Nor is this solution of the doubt discountenanced, (rather much confirmed) by the Character and condition of the Countrey as it stands at present, naturally adorned with beautiful moun∣tains and luxurious vallies, the rocks affording excellent waters, and the Air never pinched with colds, nor scorched with heats: though either by the negligence of the Inhabitants, or some curse laid upon the land, far short of that fertility with which once it flourished. Yet still Figs, Olives, Pomgranates, Palm-trees, are here very frequently to be seen; somestore of Wine, with Oranges, and the Apple of Paradice, which they preserve upon the trees all the year long, (which agrees very well with that of Julian spoken of before) well furnished with Honey and Sugar-canes; as also with Goats, Swine, Hares, Quailes, and Partriges: but pestred so in many places with rats and mice, that if it were not for certain

Birds which feed upon them, it were not possible for the people to have any Harvest. Balm they had an∣tiently, not now. Nor any Nuts, Peares, Plums, or Cherries, but what are brought hither from Da∣mascus.

Principal Rivers of this Countrey, are, 1. Chison, the Chorsaeus of Ptolomy, which riseth out of Mount Tabor in Galilee, and falleth into the Mediterranean Sea, not farre from Mount Carmel in Phoenicia. 2. Cedron, a Torrent rather than a River, passing betwixt Hierusalem and the Mount of O∣lives; but more remarkable for many notable actions, than many others of a greater both name and course For over this Brook did David pass when he fled from Absolom; and over this our Saviour the Sence of David passed, when he went to his passion. On the banks hereof did Asa the King of Judah burn his mothers Idols, 1 Kings 15. as Josiah did the vessels which were made for Baal, 2 Kings 23. 3. Zared, and 4. Napthea, which arising out of the hils of the tribe of Iudah, have their fall into the Mediterranean. 5. Arnon, which hath its spring in the hills so called, and endeth its course in the Mare Mortuum. 6. lab••••, oft mentioned in the Scriptures; which issuing out of the Mountains of Galaad, and 7. Hermon which springing from the hills so named, lose themselves in Jordan. 8. Iordan, so called from for and Dan, two neigh∣bouring fountains, out of which he seemes to take his source: though they do also fetch their spring from Phi∣ala, a round deep well at the foot of Anti-Libanus, about twenti-four miles from these fountains, into which he maketh his way like a Mole, under ground. A River of more same than length, breadth or depth, running from North to South, almost in a strait line to the Dead Se•• only, where he endeth his course; not navi∣gably deep, nor above ten yards in breadth, where broadest; shadowed on both sides with Poplars, Tamari••k-trees, and reeds of many several sorts, of some of which the Arabians make darts and lavel•• nes, of others A∣rows, and some again they fashion into pens to write with. Passing along it maketh two Lakes, the one in the Vpper Galilce, by the antients called Samachonitis; dry for the most part in the Summer, and then covered with shrubs and sedge; not mentioned in the Holy Scriptures: the other in the Lower Galiles, a∣bout a hundred furlongs in length, and about fourty in breadth, called the Sea of Galilee from the Coun∣trey, the Lake of Tiberias from a City of that name on the banks thereof, and for the like cause called al∣so the Lake of Genezareth. And it is to be observed, that the River passeth thorow this Lake with so swift a course, that it preserves it self distinct from the waters of it both in tast and colour, as is affirmed of Nilus for a long space in the Mediterranean, and other great Rivers in their falls. Finally, having run thorow the plains of Hiericho, it finisheth its course at last in the Mare Mortuum, or Dead Sea. Honoured with the name of a Sea, because salt, and large: seventy miles long, and sixteen broad, fur∣nishing with salt the whole land of Iewrie: but called the Dead Sea, either because it hath no visible en∣flux into the Ocean, nor is at all increased with the waters of this River and many other Torrents which fall into it; or because no living creature is nourished it it, suffocated with the bituminous savour which it sendeth forth, from the abundance of which matter it is also called Lacus Alphaltites. Nigh hereunto stood the once-famous Cities of Sodom and Gomorrah, with three others more, whence the valley had the name of Pentapolis, destroyed for their abominations by a fire from heaven: now fruitful in shew onely, but not in substance; the fruits here growing, being very fair unto the eye, sed levi tactu pressa in vagum f••∣tiscunt pulverem, but if touched, moulder into ashes, as Solinus hath it.

Chief Hills and Mountains of it besides Anti-Libanns and Mount Hermon spoken of already, which be onely borderers, are, 1. Mount Sion, memorable for the Tower of David, which was built upon it, cal∣led frequently the Holy Hill of Sion. 2. Mount Moriah, famous for the intended sacrifice of Isaac, and the Temple of Solomon. 3. Mount Calvarie, on which CHRIST suffered, supposed to be the burial place of our Father Adam. 4. Mount Tabor, on which our Saviour was transfigured. 5. Mount Oli∣ver, from which he ascended into Heaven. 6. Mount Garizim, whereon stood the Samaritans Temple, their ordinary place of worship, mentioned Iohn 4. 20. 8. The Mountains of Saron, stretching with in∣termixed vallies from the Sea of Galilee to the Mediterranean, notfar from Tyre; there ending in a white cliff, and for that cause called Capo Bianco by the Sayler. The whole Mountain pleasantly enriched with the fragant smells of Rosemary, Sweet Marjoram, Hyssop, Baies, and other odoriferous plants which do grow their naturally but for all that destitute of any other Inhabitants than Leopards, Boars, Jaccalls, and such savage Creatures. 9. the Mountains of Gilboa, the highest on the West of Iordan; as 10. those of Basan, celebrated for their height in the book of Psalmes; and 11. those of Abarim, on the East side of it: from one of the Summits of which last called Nebo, by some writers Pasgah, the Lord gave Moses a Survey of the Land of Promise.

As for this whole Countrey comprehended in the name of Palestine, it hath had divers divisions, ac∣cording to the quality of the People, or the will of those who have been formerly Masters of it. Divided first betwizt the Philistims, Perezites, Hittites, Jebusites, and others of the sonnes of Canaan, on this side Jordan; the Moabites, Ammonites, Midianites, and Amorites, dwelling on the other. When conquered by the sonnes of Jacob, it / was divided into the twelve Tribes, of 1. Iudah, 2. Benjamin, 3. Simeon, 4. Dan, 5. Aser, 6. Nephthali, 7. Zabuton, 8. Issachar, 9. Gad, 10. Reuben, 11. Epbraim, and 12. Manasseth. When that great breach was made by Iereboam in the Kindome of Da∣vid, it was broken into the two Kingdomes of Iudah and Israel; of which the first contained onely the two Tribes of Iudah and Benjamin, the latter comprehending the other ten. When the Israelites were led captive into Assyria, and a new set of People planted in their rooms, those new-comers, from Sama∣ria their capitall City, had the name of Samaritans: And when the men of Iudah were released of their long captivity, and came back from Babylon, they took to themselves the name of Iewes: after which time the whole Countrey of Palestine antiently possessed or subdued by the seed of Abraham, was divi∣ded into 1. Peraea, 2. Ituraea, 3. Galilee, 4. Samarin, 5. Iudaea, and 6. Idumaea. When con∣quered

by the Romans, all these were joined into one Province, which for a time was reckoned as a part of Syria, or at least subordinate. But Constantine not liking of the one or the other, went a way by himself, and cast it into three Provinces, viz. 1. Palestina Prima, 2. Palestina Secunda, and 3. Palestina Salutaris; the Metropolis of the first being Caesarea Palestinae; of the second, Sama∣ria; of the third, Hierusalem. But this division of Constantines growing out of use, we will adhere un∣to to the former, beginning first with those parts hereof which lay on the other side of Iordan, because first conquered and possessed by the house of Israel; who at that gate found entrance into the rest; and coming round to Idumaea; which last of all these Provinces was added to the State of Iewry. In the Choro∣graphis whereof, 1 must confess my self a Debtor to Sir Walter Raleigh, whose industry herein hath saved me a great deal of search, though sometimes I make bold to differ from him, & add to him as I see occasion.

PERAEA.

PERAEA, is that part of Palestine which lieth betwixt the River Iordan and the mountains of Arnon, which divide Palestine from Syria and Arabia, East and West; and reacheth from Pellis in the North, to Petra the chief Town of Arabia Petraea in the South. By Pliny it is made to bend more towards Egypt, who describes it thus. Peraea Judeae pars est ulterior; Arabiae & Egypto proxima, aspe∣ris dispersa montibus & á coeteris Indaeis Jordane amne discreta. Peraea (saith he) is the furtherst part of Iudaea, neighbouring Arabia and Egypt, interspersed with rough and craggy mountains, and parted from the rest of the Iews by the River Iordan. So called from the Greek word 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, in regard of the situa∣tion of it on the other side of that River, and not improperly might be rendred by Trans-Iordana. Blessed with a rich soil, and large fields beset with divers trees, especially of Olive, Vines, and Palms. The habitation in times past of the Midianites, Amorites, and Ammonites; as also of the two Tribes of Gad and Reuben. Of all which I shall speak in order, beginning with the Midianites, and the Children of Lot, as the first occupants hereof; upon the knowlege of whose affairs, the state and story of the Israelites hath so much dependance.

And first the MADIANITES inhabited on the South-East of the Dead Sea, at the very entrance of the Countrey; descended from one or more of the five Sonnes of Madian, the Sonne of Abraham by Keturah, mentioned Gen. 25. v. 4. Who leaving the rest of their brethren to seek them∣selves new habitations more towards the banks of the Red Sea, and the desarts of Arabia Petraea, conti∣nued neer unto the place of Abrahams dwelling; and mingling with the Moabites and Canaanites in blood and Mariages, came in short time to lose all the knowlege of the true God; and to worship Idols as the rest of their neighbours did.

Their chief Cities were 1. Recon, built by one of the five Kings of the Midianites, which was slain by Iosuah: afterwards called Selah, 2 Kings 14. 7. accounted at that time a City of the Edomites: next of the Ismaelites or Arabians, and by them called Hagar. Best known unto the Greeks and Ro∣mans, by the name of Petra, and by that name we shall take further notice of it when we come to Ara∣bia. 2. Midian, on the banks of the Dead Sea, the ordinary residence of their Princes, absolute of themselves at first, as in other places; but at the time when Moses and Iosuah led the people into their pos∣sessions, subjected unto Sehon King of the Amorites; whose Dukes their five Kings or Princes are said to be, Iosuah 13. 21. A people whom the Israelites had neither commission or intent to make warre upon, if they had not causelesly provoked them at the request of the Moabites, by sending amongst them (as Ba∣laam the false prophet had advised) the most beautiful of all their women, not only to entice them to pro∣hibited mixtures, but to allure them to the worship of their Idols also. A mischievous and successfull plot, but alike dangerous to both parties: God sending a sierce plague amongst the Israelites, which cost them the lives of 24000 persons, besides such as perished by the sword; and giving a command to Moses to avenge him of the Midianites who had so provoked him. On which commission Moses culled out 12000 men, and sent them under Phineas against the Midianites; by whom all their Princes were slain, their Cities and goodly Castles burnt with fire, their men, women, and male-children put unto the sword; as is related in the one and thireieth Chapter of the Book of Numbers Yet notwithstanding this great slaugh∣ter they recovered their former power, if not a greater; and after the death of Barac the Judge of Israel, did for the space of four years so afflict that people, that they were fain to. hide themselves in the Caves and strongholds of the Mountains, as is said Iudg. 6. 2. their enemies having left them neither sheep, oxe, nor asse, or any sustenance at all, v. 4. But Gideon being raised up by God for their deliverance, encoun∣tred with their tour Kings and put them to flight: of which four, Oreb and Zeb were taken and slain by the Ephraimites at the passage of Iordan; Zebah and Salmanah, taken by Gideon himself, and execu∣ted by his own hand, as the story telleth us. In this war there are said to have perished of this people and their Confederates, no fewer than 120000 persons: by which so weakned that we hear no more of them from this time forwards, in any action of importance: their name and Countrey being first incorporated in∣to that of the Edomites; and after into that of the Ismaelites and other the Inhabitants of Arabia Petraea.

2. The MOABITES, possessed all the Countrey from the Midianites in the South as far as to Esebon in the North, on both sides of the River Arnon: having Iordan on the West, and the hills of Abarin on the East. Possessed at the first by the Emmims, a race of Giants, whole chief City was Sheneth Kiriathaim. But these being vanquished and broken by Cherdorlaomer and his Associates, of which see Gen. 14. 5. their forlom seats were taken up by the Moabites, descended from Moab one of the Sonnes of Lot, who lived herein great prosperity till the time of Vaheb. Grand-father unto Baalac the

Sonne of Zippor, from whom Sehon King of the Amorites had taken all the parts of Moab on the North of the River Arnom, and made that River, which before was the middle of Moab, to be the North bound or border of it. In which estate it stood in the time of Moses.

Chief Cities of it at that time were 1. Rabbar, the Regall seat of Baalac the King of Moab, the Rhalmathum of P••olomy. 2. Diblatham, destroyed with the rest of Moab by Nabuchadnezzer, as is said Ier. 48. 22. 3. Gallim, the principality of Phalti the Sonne of Laish, to whom Saul gave his Daughter Michael, formerly married unto David, 1. Sam. 25. 44. 4. Muthana, and 5. Nashaliel, thorow which the Israelites passed, after they had left the well called Beer. 6. Bamath, where Moses was encamped when he sent to Sehon to demand a passage thorow his Countrey, Numbers 21. 19. &c. 7. Mizpah, the City of Refuge to the Father and Mother of David, in the time of his troubles under Saul. 8. Hor, the chief City of Moab, not medled with by Moses in his march this way, the Lord himself forbidding him to touch upon it, or distress it; because it had been given by him for an inheritance to the Children of Lot, Deut. 2. 9. Which prohibition was not onely for this place particularly (though this particularly their mentioned) but for all the lands and terretories then in their possession. 9. Kir-hasareth, of chief note for the barbarous and inhumane fact of Mesha the Moabitish King, who being besieged herein by the Kings of Judah, Israel, and Edom, without hope of escape, sacrificed his own eldest Sonne on the wall hereof, which so moved the Kings of Judah, and Edom, that they forsook the King of Israel whose the quarrel was. So the siege was raised, 2 Kings 3. 27.

Now as Moses did not at the present disobey Gods Order in leaving the Moabites in quiet; so neither did the Moabites on their parts provoke him to it; giving him a free and open passage in his march for Ca∣••aan out of an hope that when the Amorites were subdued, they should be put into possession of their lost estates. And though they were deceived of that expectation, the Israelites looking on the Countrey which they had conquered, as the spoiles of the Amorites; and given it for a possession to the Tribe of Reuben: yet durst they not do any thing in the way of Annes, but sent for Baalam the false Prophet, to cast them by his curses and incantations into some diseases, whereby their strength and courage might be taken from them. Balaac the Sonne of Zippor was at this time King. After whom we find not the name of any other till we come to Eglon, who with the help of Ammon, and Amalek, over-mastered Israel, and for the space of eighteen years tyrannized amongst them: when slain in his own house, and afterwards 10000 of his people by the hand of Ehad. But this indignity was in the times succeeding revenged by Saul in some part, who made warre upon them; but more by David who subdued them, and made them Tributaries. And not so onely but subjected them to the vilest offices, as is intimated in that form of Speech, Moab is my wash-pot, Psal. 60. 8. Taking their opportunity they withdrew themselves from the house of David, and put themselves under the command of the Kings of Israel, to whom they paid for tribute in the time of Ahab, 100000 Lambs, and 200000 Rams, with their fleeces on: but quickly weary of those payments, and revolting from the house of Ahab also, they were invaded by Jehoram, aided herein by the Kings of Judah and Idumaea; by whom being van∣quished, Mesha their King was fain to shut himself up in Kir-hasareth, as was said before. Af∣ter this joining with the Ammonites, and the Idumaeans, or Sonnes of Edom, they invaded Je∣hosophat King of Judah, to whom God gave a memorable and signall victory, without blow or battel: the Ammonites first setting upon the Edomites, and after upon one another, till they were almost all destroyed, 2 Chron. 20. 23. From this time we hear nothing of them; but that probably they recovered some parts of their former dwellings, when the two Tribes and a half, on the East of Iordan were carryed away captive by Tiglath Pileser. Possessed hereof and of other their habita∣tions, till the reign of Zedekias King of Iudah; when vanquished, with the rest of these Nations by the Babylonians and Assyrians under Nabuchadnezzar. Nor find we any mention of them in the ages following; the name of Moab being forgotten, or grown out of use: the South parts of their Countrey laid to Arabia Petraea, as the East parts were to that also of Arabia Deserta; and all the rest, as well as that which had been conquered by the Jews, swallowed up in the general name of Palestinians.

3. The AMMONITES, inhabited on the North-East of the River Arnon, and pos∣sessed all that tract from Arocr on the head of that River to the City of Rabbah; and on both sides of the River Iaboc, as well within the mountains of Galaaed as without the same. The seat in elder times of the Ra∣pharms, and Zamzummins, a Giantlike race of men, as the Emmins were; but vanquished also, as the others, by Cherdorlaomor; Athtaroth, and Heth, being then the principal of their habitations. Succeeded to, in their desolate and forsaken dwellings by the children of Ammon, the other Sonne of Lot, and the brother of Moab: both houses running the same fortune, these Ammonites being conquered and deprived of the best part of their Countrey on the South-side of Iaboc, by Og King of Basan; as the Moa∣bites, at the same time of theirs by Sehon. A monument of which subjection was the bed of Og, found in the City of Rabbah, the chief City of Ammon; there to be seen when Moses had subdued the Kings of the Amorites, as appeareth Deut. 3.

Chief Cities at such times as the Israelites first conquered the Land of Canaan, were 1. Rabbah, the Regall City of their Kings; taken by Og of Basan, as is said before; but again quitted as it seemeth on the comming of Moses, that he might be the better able to keep the field. Memorabble in suceeding times for the death of Vriah, slaine here by a design of Davids, when besieged by Joab. Who ha∣ing brought it to termes of yielding sent for the King to come before it, that he might have the honour of taking a place to defensible, environed in a manner with the River Iaboc, and therefore called the City of wa••ers, 2. Sam. 12. 27. Afterwards repaired and beautified by Ptolomy Philadelphus King of Egypt,

who having made himself master of those parts of Arabia, which lie near unto it, and liking the conve∣niencie of the situation, honoured it with the name of Philadelphia. 2. Dathema, supposed to be Rith∣ma by the learned Iunius, mentioned Num. 33. 18. (the Hebrew letters D. and R. being much alike) a place of great strength amongst the Ammonites. 3. Minneth, in the South border, and 4. Abel vi∣nearum in the East border of Ammon; both mentioned in the pursuite of that people when subdued by Iephte. 4. Mitspa; sometimes one of the Cities of the halfe Tribe of Manasses, and at that time honou∣red with the residence of Iephte; but afterwards recovered by the children of Ammon: in whose hands it was when utterly destroyed and burnt by Iudas Maccabeaus. 1 Macc. 5. 35. 6 Magod, and 7. Bosor, two other strong places of the Ammonites, there also mentioned; but said to be in the Region of Galaad, by which name, or by that of Gileadites, all the Countrey of the Ammonites lying on this side of the Mountains was at that time called.

As for those Ammonites; they had nothing at all to do with Israel as they passed towards Canaan; neither provoking them nor provoked by them to any acts of hostility. Afterwards not well pleased, that they were no restored to the possession of those lands which had been taken from them by Og of Basan, (conferred by the decree of Moses on the tribe of Gad;) they joined with the Midianites in their expedi∣tion. But worsted by the puissance and good fortune of Gedeon, they lay still a while, till stirred up by some secret motions from, Almighty God, to avenge him on that sinful and idolatrous people, who by worshipping the Gods of the Heathen, had provoked him to anger. Prosperous in it for a time, till his wrath was pacified, who having made use of them to chastise his people, delivered up his rod to be burnt by Jepthe, vanquished, and driven home by him with a very great saughter. Not so much chrushed by the unsuccessefulness of this attempt, but that in the time of Saul they break out again, and besieged Ja∣besh Gilead, Nabas, a cruel Tyrant, being then their King: who having brought the City into great extremity, would give them no other conditions than the loss of every mans right eye; to the end that they using to carry a great Target on their left Armes, wherewith the eye on that side was wholly shadowed, they might by this means be disabled from all future service. But Saul came time enough to save them from that shame and loss: for that cause so offensive to Nabas, that to despight him, he shewed friendship to David in the time of his trouble. A curtesie which David was so mindful of, that he sent Ambassadours to Hanan the Sonne of Nabas to make acknowledgment of it, and to confirm the, amity which he had with his Father: but found so ill requital from him, that instead of thanks and kind accepance, his mes∣sengers were despightfully handled, their beards half shaven, and their garments cut off by the knee. In∣censed wherewith he sent Joab against them: by whom the Countrey was laid wast, and Rabbah their chief City taken; their Kings Crown, weighing a talent of Gold, set on Davids head, and all the Prisoners executed with great severity, some of them being cast into lime-kills, and the rest torn in peeces with saws and harrows. Quiet a long while after this we hear no great newes of them till the reign of Jehosophat, against whom confederated with the Edomites and Moabites; they made open warre; but fell by one anothers swords, as was said before. Not well recovered of this blow, they were subdued and made Tributaries by Ozias King of Judah, and so continued in the time of Joatham his Sonne; who so in∣creased the ribute laid upon them by his Father, that it amounted to a hundred Talents of Silver, ten thou∣sand measures of Wheat, and as many of Barley. Taught by this lesson how to value the Kings of Iu∣dah, they continued either quiet neighbours or obedient subjects, though much improved in power and reputation by regaining the greatest part of their antient dwellings on the removal of the two Tribes and an half, on the East of Iordan, to the land of Assyria, by Tiglath Phul-Assur. For after this, (with refe∣rence to the common danger) Baulis their King, was so strict a confederate with Zedechias, that when Na∣buchadnezzar had taken Zedechias with him unto Babylon, and left Gedaliah as his Deputy to com∣mand the Countrey; Ismael, one of the blood of the Kings of Iudah, was sent by Baulis to slay him. But he paid dear for his attempt; his Countrey being shortly conquered by the Babylonians, and the name of Ammonite forgotten: changed by the Grecians when they came to Lord it over them, to those of Gilea∣ditis, and Philadelphia; according to the new name of their principal City, and the old one of the Moun∣tains and hills adjoining.

4. The REVBENITES took name from Reuben the eldest of Jacobs sonnes by Leah, of whom in the first muster which was made of them at Mount Sinai, there were found 46000. fighting men, and 43700. at the second muster, when they passed over Iordan. Their dwelling was on the East of that famous River; having the Gadites on the North, the Desart Arabia on the East, and the Land of Moab on the South, from which parted by the River Arnon.

Places of most observation here, 1. Abel-Sittim, seated in that part of the Countrey which was called the Plains of Moab: the last incamping place of Moses; afterwards by the Iews called simply Sit∣tim; memorable for the wood so often mention in the Scriptures, of which the ark of the Lord was made; In after times by the Greeks and Romans it was called Abila, mistook by some for that Abila or Abilene whereof Lysanias was Tetrarch: that Town and territory as Iosephus doth affirm expressely being situate amongst the spurres and branches of Libanus, farre enough from hence, 2. Bethabora, or Beth-Bara; where Iohn baptized, and Moses made his last and most divine exhortations to the Tribes of Israel, con∣tained in Deuteronomy. 3. Machaerus, the strongest in-land City and Castle in those parts of the world, standing alost upon a Mountain every way unaccessible; first fortified by Alexander Jannaeus King of the Iews, as a frontire Town against the Arabians; and afterwards demolished by Gabinius one of Pompeys Lieutenants in the warre against Aristobulus. Unfortunately remarkable for the death of Iohn Baptist, where murdered by the command of Herod the Tetrarch of Galilee, and Lord of this Countrey of Peraea. 4. Lasa, or Leshah, of which Gen. 10. 19. by the Greeks called Challirh••e, by

reason of the fair fountains rising from the Hills adjoyning, out of which issue springs both of hot and cold waters, as also bitter and sweet: all which soon after joined into one stream make a wholesome Bath, especially for convulsions, and contraction of sinewes. 5. Medeba, famous for the defeat given to the Sy∣rians and Ammonites by the conduct of Ioab, 1 Chron. 19. 7. 6. Bosor, or Bozra, a City of Refuge, and one of those that were assigned unto the Levites on that side of the water. 7. Levias, a Town new built by Herod in honour of Livia, the mother of Tiberius Caesar: different from that which the Geogra∣phers call 8. Libias, (though by some confounded) the same with Laban, mentioned Deut. 1. 1. 9. Ke∣demoth, another City of the Levites, giving name unto the adjoining Desart, from whence Moses sent his Ambassage to Sehon King of the Ammorites. 10. Bamath-Baal, the chief City of the worshippers of Baal, to which Balaam was brought by Balaac to curse the Israelites. 11. Hesbon, the Regal City of Sehon King of the Ammorites. 11. Adam, or the City Adam (Ios. 3. 17.) where the Tribes passed drie-foot over Iordan, opposite unto Gilgal in the Tribe of Benjamin. Within this Tribe is the Mountain Nobo, from which Moses took a view of the land of Canaan: an hill as it seemeth, of two tops, where∣of that which looketh towards Iericho is called Pisgah, that which looketh toward Moth being called Hnir. Here is also an high hill named Peor, where the filthy Idol Baal was worshipped also, who hath hence the addition of Baal-Peor.

5. The GADITES, were so called from Gad the seventh sonne of Jacob, begot on Zilphah the hand-maid of Lea; of whom were found at the first muster when they came out of Egypt forty five thou∣sand five hundred and fifty fighting men; and at the second when they entred the land of Canaan, forty five thousand bearing armes. Their situation was betwixt the Rubenites on the South, and the balfe Tribe of Manasses upon the North, the River Iordan on the West, and the Mountains of Arnon on the East; by which last parted from the dwellings of the Children of Ammon.

Cities of most observation, 1. Aroer, on the banks of the River Arnon, the principall Citie of the Gadites. 2. Dihon, more towards Jordan, of great note in the time of Josuah, and of no small ac∣compt in the time of Saint Hieroeme. 3. Beth-nimah, of which Esay prophesied that the waters thereof should be dried up; seated upon the Arnon also. 4. Nattoroth, more in the body of the Tribe. 5. Beth-haram, mentioned by Josuah, chap. 13. v. 27. by Josephus called Betaramptha; new built by He∣rod Antipas, and called Livias, in honour of Livia the wife of Augustus Caesar, translated into the Ju∣lian family; who also laid unto it fourteen villages to make it of the greater power and jurisdiction. 6. Beth-ezob, by Josephus called Vetezabra, the habitation of Miriam, who in the fiege of Hierusalem when destroyed by Titus, was compelled by famine to eat her own sonne. 7. Succoth, not far from the River Jordan, so called from the Tents or Booths which Jacob fet up there in his passage from Mesopetamis to the land of Canaan: the People of which Town having denied reliefe to Gedeon as he followed the chace of Zeba and Zalmanah, were by him miserably tortured at his return, under a tribulum or thresh∣ing carre, wherewith he tore their flesh, and bruised their bodies. 8. Jahzoz, another of the Regall Seats of Sehon King of the Amorites; first taken by Moses, after recovered by the Moabites (as appear∣ech Esay 6. 8.) then possessed by the Ammonites; and finally from them regained by Judas Macca∣beus, 1 Macc. 5. 8. 9. Mahanaijm, so called from the Army of Angels which appeared to Iacob (Ger. 32. 2.) as ready to defend him against all his Enemies, the word in the originall importing a double Ar∣my. A place of very great strength and safety, and therefore made by Abner the feat Royall of Ishbose••h, the Sonne of Saul, during the warre he had with David; as afterwards the retiring place of David during the rebellion of his Son Absolom. 10. Rogelim, the City of Barzillai the Gileadite, so faithfull to Da∣vid in that warre. 11. Ramoth, or Ramoth Gilead, so called from the situation of it neer the Moun∣tains of Gilead; a Town of specialll note in the Book of God; particularly for the pacification here made betwixt Iacob and Laban; for the death of Ahab King of Israel, who lost his life in the recovery of it from the hands of the Syrians; and finally for the Election of Iehu to the Crown of Israel, Anointed at the Siege hereof by a Son of the Prophets. 12. Penuel, so called from the enter-view which the Lord pleased to bestow there on his servant Iacob at his return out of Mesopotamia, mentioned Gen. 32. 32. the word signifying the place of the face or vision of God: defaced by Gedeon, for their churlish usage of him, when he craved relief of them against the Midianites; to whom together with the Moabites, and Ammonites, the whole territory appertaining to these two Tribes did once belong. But being from them taken by Og King of Basan, and Sehon King of the Amorites, it came by the overthrow of those Kings to the hands of Moses: by whom assigned unto the Tribes of Gad and Reuben for their habitation; Continuing theirs till the fatall period of this Kingdome of Israel began to approach: at what time these two Tribes with the half Tribe of Manasses, lying on the East of Iordan, being carried captive into Assyria by Tiglath Phila∣ser, the Moabites and Ammonites recovered a great part of their, antient dwellings. Of which possessed till their subversion by the Babylonians. Afterwards this whole Countrey coming into the hands of the Kings of Syria, had the name of Pereaa, for the reason formerly delivered. And being wonne peece-meal by the Maccabaeans, came with the rest of the Kingdome of Iudah to the possession of Herod the Great: by whom bequeathed at his death unto Herod Antipas, one of his Sonnes, who held it together with both Galilees, under the name of Tetrarch of Galilee and Pereaa, as Iosephus, or of Galile onely as Saint Luke: who being dead, it was bestowed on Agrippa King of the Iews, of whom more hereafter.

ITVRAEA.

ITVRAEA, hath on the East and North Cale-Syria; on the West, the River Iordan; and on the South Peraea. So called from Ietur one of the Sonnes of Ismael, seated in this tract; though lost by his posterity to the Amorites, one of the most powerful tribes amongst the Chanaanites; and by them made the patrimony of the Kings of Basan. The race of which Kings ending in Og, the wealthiest and best parts hereof, were given by Moses to the half Tribe of Manasses; such parts of it as lay towards Damascus being seized on by the neighbouring Aramites, and made a Kingdome of it self, called the Kingdome of Gessur; and the more mountainous and unpleasant left to the first inhabitants, as not worth the conquer∣ing. But both the Kingdome of Gessur, and those of the half tribe of Manasses, shifting from one Lord to another, till they came into the hands of the Grecians, the name of Ituraea revived again and grew into very good esteem, the Ituraeans being reputed for good Souldiers, especially at the Bow and Arrowes; of which thus the Poet in his Georgicks lib. 2.

—Ituraeas taxi torquentur in arcus. Of the best Eugh that can be had The Ituraean Bows are made.

The whole Countrey in the times of the Greeks and Romans, divided into Trachomitis and Ituraea specially so called: this last again being subdivided into Batanea, Ganlonitis, Auranitis, and Paneas. For whereas it is said in Saint Lukes Gospel, that Philip the brother of Herod, was Tetrach of Ituraea and the Region of Trachonitis; and by Iosephus that for his Tetrachy he had the Provinces of Trachonitis, Batanea, Gaulonitis, Auranitis, and Paneas: it must needs be that the four last mentioned Provinces make up that one which by Saint Luke is comprehended in the name of Ituraea; distinct from that of Tra∣chonitis though a part hereof. Inhabited in the time of Iosephus, as in those of Iosuah and David, both by Iews and Syrians: the Syrians dwelling in the mountainous, and more barren parts, the Iews in that which was assigned them in the time of Moses: the whole not yielding unto Galilee for extent of ground; but far inferiour to it for wealth and fruitfulness; not well inhabited where best, and in some places which are desart and very barren hardly inhabited at all, or bearing any thing but wild-fruits. Such was it in the time of Iosephus, and not bettered since.

1. TRACHONITIS is that mountainous and hilly Countrey, which beginning at the borders of the Ammonites, where the hills are called the Mountains of Gilead, extendeth it self North∣wards as far as Libanus: the hills in those parts being by the Iews called Galeed, Syrion, and He••mon; but by the Grecians, for the craggedness and roughness of them, by the name of Trachones. The people mischievously bent and much given to witch-craft, as we find in Strabo. Montanam regionem incolunt Ituraei & Arabes, malefici omnes. So he, or his Translatour rather, for I have not the Originall by me. Where by Arabians he meaneth those of Trachonitis, which every where he maketh to be the fame with Ituraea, though differing from it as the Cots-wold Countreys do from the rest of Gloucestershire, or as a pared th from the whole; because united by that name into one estate at the time he lived in. Solet & Trachonitis Itureae nomine appellari, saith the learned Grottus, according to the generall consent of the antient Writers. A people generally addicted to spoyl and robberie, living especially on the spoil of those Merchants which traded to and from Damascus: till with some difficulty restrained to a more orderly life by Herod, on whom Augustus Caesar had bestowed the Countrey, to the end that by strong hand he might hold them in.

The People and the Countrey by Iosephus are thus described.

The Trachonites (saith he) have neither Towns nor lands, nor heritage or any other possessions, but only certain retreates and caves under the ground, where they lived like beasts: and having made abundant provision of water and victuals, were able to hold out along time against any assailant. For the doors of their Caves were made so nar∣row that they could be entered but by one at once; and the way to them not direct, but full of turnings and windings, not possibly to be found out but by the help of a Guide, the whole Countrey naturally consisting of craggy Rocks. The passages of the Caves once entred they were found to be very large and spacious: sufficient to contain great multitudes of these theevish people, who when they had not oppor∣tunity to spoile their neighbours, would rob one another, and omitted no kind of wickedness; being so accustomed to thest that they could not live otherwise.

But I conceive that this is not meant generally of all the people, but only of some bodie of theeves or out-lawes, which possessed themselves of the streits of the Mountains; and from thence issued to assault and spoil the Passengers. For it is afterwards expres∣sed, that revolting upon the news of Herods death, and committing new out-rages, they no sooner heard of his recovery but they fled the Countrey, and betook themselves unto a strong Castle in Arabia, where they increased to the number of a thousand persons. So that there is no question to be made at all but they had villages and towns, and lands and heritages, in the more civill parts hereof; though not amongst those Mountainers which Iosephus speaks of. And amongst those, I reckon, 1. Gerra, 2. Elere, 3. Nelaxa, 4. Adrama; all named by Ptolomy, and all placed by him in the Longitude of 70 degrees or upwards: more towards the East than well agreeth with the position of this Countrey, or any part of Be∣lying more towards the West than Trachonitis, though to that part of Ituraea, by him ascribed. Hither also I refer the City of 5. Tishbe, the Countrey of old Tobit, and the Prophet Elias. 6. Tob, where Jophes lived in exile, when oppreffed by his Brethren, till the necessities of his Countrey called him to the publick government; and 7. Hippus, at the foot of those Mountains, reckoned amongst the Cities of Coele-Syria.

2. BATANEA is that part of Ituraea, which antiently made up the best and great∣est part of the Kingdome of Basan, whence it had this name: the changing of S to T, as Assyria into Attyria, and the like, being usuall among the Greeks. But that Kingdome being brought to an end by Moses, it was given to the half tribe of Manasses; so called of Manasses the Sonne of Jo∣seph, of whom there were found at the first muster neer Mount Sinai 32200 men able to bear armes: which though consumed in the Desarts, yet were they of such a swift increase, that there were found 52700 fighting men of them when rhey passed over Jordan. Their Territory on that side of the River, streching from Jaboc on the South, to the Realm of Gessur on the North, and from the mountains unto Jordan East and West, was exceeding fertile: repenished withall sorts of Cattel, and adorned with the goodliest Woods in that part of the World; the Oakes of Basan being celebrated in the Holy Scrip∣tures.

It had in it 60. fenced Cities when first conquered by those of this Tribe. The principall of which 1. Pella, formerly called Butis, but being rebuilt by Seleucus the Great King of Syria, was by him called Pella, with reference to a City of that name in Macedon, the birth-place of Alexander, to whom Seleucus owed his greatness and whole estate. Destroyed by Alexander Jannaeus King of the Jews, be∣cause not willing to admit of the Law of Moses; it was afterwards restored by Pompey to its former lu∣stre. Memorable in Church-story for the Admonition or premonishment given by a voice from Heaven to the Christians dwelling at Hierusalem, to remove thence and dwell at Pella: that so they might escape that destruction which the Roman Army under Titus was to bring upon it. 2. Edrey, the Seat-Royall of the Kings of Basan. 3. Carnaim, on the banks of Jaboc, taken by Judas Maccabaeus, who set fire on the Temple of the Idols there; and burnt therein all such as sled thither for sanctuary. 4. Ephror, a strong City upon Jordan, taken and burnt by the same Judas Maccabaeus, for refusing to give a passage to his Army. 5. Jabesh Gilead, more neer unto the Mountains, whence it had that Adjunct; memo∣rable in the Scriptures for the siege of Nabas King of the Ammonites, the raising of that siege by Saul, and the gratitude of the People towards him again, in taking down, imbalming and intombing the bodies of him and his Sonnes, which the Philistims had most delpitefully hanged on the walls of Bethsan. 6. A∣staroth, a City of great note in the Elder times; the seat of the Rephaims, a Giantlike race of men, of whom descended Og of Basan; from whence the Countrey adjoining had the name of the Land of giant•• Astaroth the Godess of the Sidonians had here her worshippers. 7. Gaulon, sometimes possessed by Og of Basan, and afterwards made one of the Cities of Refuge; of such esteem in the times of the Greeks and Romans, that the North part of Basanitis or Batanea was called Gaulonitis, divided into Superior and Inferior, so often mentioned by Josephus. And of this City or Countrey was that Judas of Gal••lee spo∣ken of in the sift of the Acts, the Founder of the Gaulonites, or Anti-Herodians. 8. Gamala, in the Lower Gaulonitis, so called because the Hill upon which it stood was fashioned like the back of a Camel: invincibly situate, strengthned both by Art and Nature: and at the last with so great difficulty, and hazard of Vespasians person, stormed by Titus, that the Romans in the heat of the execution, spared neither Wo∣men nor Children; insomuch that all the Inhabitants perished, except some few Women which had hid themselves. 9. Gadara after ten moneths siege taken and destroyed by Alexander Jannaeus King of the lews; repaired by Pompey, and by Gabinius made one of the five feats of Justice for the whole Countrey of Palestine: the other four being Hierusalem, Iericho, Hamath, and Sephorah. 10. Gerasa, or Gergesa, the Chief City of the Gergesites, the people whereof on the loss of their Swine, intreated our Saviour to depart out of their costs, as Saint Matthew hath it. Saint Luke. and Saint Mark ascribe it to the People of Gadara, not that the Cities were both one, or the E∣vangelists at ods in the Relation, but because they were two neighbouring Cities, and their fields lay in Common pour cause de vicinage, as our Lawyers phrase it; and so the storie might be common to both alike. 11. Hippus, not far from the River Iordan, so called from a Garrison of Horse there placed by Herod: not from the Mountain Hippus, as some suppose; which is too far off to have a∣ny influence upon it. 12. Iulias, built by Philip the Tetrarch of Ituraea, in the Southern border of his estate, in imitation of the like work of Herod the Tetrarch of Galilee and Peraea; to ingra∣tiate himself with Iulia, the wife of Tiberius Caesar. 13. Abel, by Iosephus called Abel Maacha, for distinctions sake: where Sheba that Grand Rebell being besieged by Ioab, and the City brought into some danger; had his head cut off and thrown over the wall, at the perswasion of a wife wo∣man of the Town. So the rebellion ended, and the City was saved.

North of Basanitis or Batanea lieth the Kingdome of GESSVR by a latter name called AVRANITIS, from Hauran, a chief City of it mentioned by the Prophet Ezekiel chap. 16. 18. A Kingdome spoken of by Moses as the Northern bound of the Half Tribe of Manasses on that side of Iordan. Deut. 4. 14. by Iosuah as the Northern border of the Kingdome of Basar, chap 12. 5 but reckoned as a part of Syria, because held by the Aramites, 2 Sam. 15. 8. A Kingdome though of no great territorie, yet of some consideration in the eye of the World; David esteeming the alliance of the Kings hereof of some use unto him; and therefore marying Maacha, the daughter of Tolmui, King of Gessur, by whom he had Absolom and Tamar. And to this King it was that Absolom fled on the killing of Amnon, abiding here three years as the storie telleth us.

Conterminus to this, or at least not very much distant from it, was the petit Kingdome of Isk-••ob, which sent 12000. men to the aid of the Ammonites against David: and not far off, but more towards Palmyrens, or Aram-Zobah, that of Beth-Rehob, confederate in the same war also with the other Syrians; mention whereof is made in the second book of Sam. chap. 10. ver. 6. Which whether they belonged to Syria, or to those North-parts of Ituraea, is of no great certainty, and as little consequence.

For after their greatest and last exploit we hear no more news of them; swallowed up not long after (as it seems) by the Kings of Damascus.

To return therefore into Gessur, as more certainly within the limits of Palestine, the places of most obser∣vation in it were, 1. Gessur, then the chief City of it, and giving name unto the whole. 2. Mahaeath or Macuti as some call it: conceived to be that Maacha mentioned 1 Chron. 19. 6. But of this we have already spoken in Comagena. 3. Chauran or Hauran, mentioned by the Prophet Ezekul chap. 47. whence these Northen parts of Palestine were called Auranitis. 4. Chaisar-Hevan, there mentioned by that Prophet also. 5. Ʋs, neer the borders of Damascus, the first habitation of Ʋs the Sonne of Aram and Grand-child of Sem, by whose name so called: supposed to be the founder of Damascus also, and that more probably than that the Countrey thereabouts should be the Land of Hus, enabled by the dwel∣ling and story of Iob. 6. Sueta, mentioned by Brochardus, and by some conceived to be the habitation 〈◊〉〈◊〉 surnamed the Shuchite, one of Iobs three friends mentioned in that story: but both of him, and Iob himself and the Land of Hus, we shall speak more at large when we come to Arabia. More certain∣ly remarkable for a Fort of great strength and use for the commanding of the Countrey; recovered from the 〈◊〉〈◊〉 in the time of Baldwin the second, by digging with incredible labour thorow the very rock upon which it was seated.

As for the fortunes of this part, the Tribes on that side of Iordan were led captive into Assyria, and the Kingdome of Damascus subverted by Tiglah-Phalassar; it followed the fortune of the Babylonian and Per••ian Empires, together with which it came to the Macedonian Kings of the race of Seleucus. In the declining of that house (but the time I find not) it made up the greatest part of the Kingdome of Chalcis; possessed by Ptolomy the Sonne of Mennaeus, in the beginning of Herods greatness, who dying, left unto Lysanias his eldest Sonne, murdered about seven years after by Marc. Antonie, on the suggestions of Cleopatra, who presently seized on his estates. But Antonie and Cleopatra having left the Stage, Lysa∣nias, a Sonne of the murdered Prince entreth next upon it, by the permission of Augustus. During whose time Zenodorus Lord of the Town and territory of Paneas, farming his demeasnes, and paying a very grat Rent for them: not only suffered the Trachonites to play the Robbers, and infest the Merchants of Damascus: but received part of the booty with them. Augustus, on complaint hereof, giveth the whole Countrey of Trachonites, Batanea, Gaulonitis, and Auranitis, to Herod the Ascalonite, be∣fore created King of Iewrie: that by his puissance and power, he might quell those Robbers, and reduce the Countrie into order: Leaving unto Lysanias nothing but the City of Abila (of which he was the na∣tural Lord) whereof and of the adjoining territory, he was afterwards created Tetrarch, by the name of the Tetrarch of Abilene, mentioned Luke 3. Nor did Herods good fortune end in this. For presently on the death of Zenodorus, not long after following, Augustus gave him also the district of Paneas (of which we shall speak more when we come to Galilee): which with the Countries formerly taken from Lysanias, made up the Tetrarchie of Philip his youngest Sonne, affording him the yearly Revenue of 100. Talents, which make 37500 l. of English money. On Philips death, his Tetrarchy was by Cains Cal••gula, conferred on Agrippa the Nephew of Herod by his Sonne Aristobulus, whom he had also dignified with the title of King; after whose death, and the death of Agrippa Minor, who next succeeded, his estates escheated to the Romans, and have since had the same fortune with the rest of Palestine.

3. GALILEE.

GALILEE is bounden on the East, with Batanea, and part of the halfe Tribe of Manasses on that side of Iordan; on the West, with the Sea-coast of Phoenicia, on the Mediterranean; on the North, with Anti-Libanus; on the South, with Sam••ria. So called, as some say, from Geliloth, a Phoe∣nician word, signifying as much as borders, because the bordering Countrey betwixt them and the Iews.

The Countrey not so large as that on the other side of the River, but far more fertile; naturally fruit∣full of it self, every where producing excellent fruits without much pains to the Husbandman; and so well cultivated in old times that there was hardly any wast ground to be found in it. Thick set with Cities, Towns, and Villages in the time of Iosephus, and those so populous and rich that the smallest Village in it is affirmed by that Author, to comprehend no fewer than 15000 Inhabitants. A number beyond all pa∣rallel if reported rightly; and not mistaken in the transcripts. The people from their childhood very stout and warlike, not daunted for fear of want or deard of penury: which seconded by their vast and almost incredible numbers, made them experimentally known for a tough peece of employment, when subdued by Titus. And this, together with their zeal to the Iewish Religion, makes it more than probable, that there was something in them of the antient Israelite; and that they were not meerly of an Assyrian ei∣ther stock or spirit, but intermixt with such remainders of the Tribes as had saved themselves either by flying to the Mountains, or hiding themselves in Caves and Defarts, or otherwise were inconsiderable for strength and numbers; in the great transplantation of them made by Salmanassar. And in this I am the more con∣firmed by their speech or language, which was the same with that of the natural Iews, differing no other∣wise from it than in tone, and dialect; as our Northern English doth from that which is spoke in London: as appeareth by the communication which the Damosel had with Saint Peter in the High-Priests Hall; in which she plainly understood him, but so that she pronounced him for a Galilean, For had the Transplan∣tation been so universal as some think it was, and that both sick and sound, old and young had been caried away; and none but Colonies of the Assyrians to fill up their places: it must needs be that those New∣comers would have planted their own language there; as the Saxons did on the extirpation of the Bri∣•••••• on this side of the Severn. The like may be affirmed of the other Tribes on this side of Iordan (espe∣cially

Simeon and Dan) which either bordering upon Iudah, or having their lands and Cities intermingled with it, continued in great numbers in their former dwellings, under the Patronage or subjection or the Kings thereof.

Divided it was antiently into the Higher, and the Lower. The Higher so called from its situation more amongst the Mountains, had also the name of Galilea Gentium, or Galilee of the Gentiles. And that either because it lay betwixt the Gentiles and the rest of the Iews, or because a great part of it had been g••∣ven by Solomon to the Kings of Tyre. But for what cause soever it was called so first, certain it is, it had this name unto the last; known by it in the time of the Apostles, as appeareth by Saint Matthews Gospel, chap. 4. ver. 15. The Lower Galilee is situate on the South of the other, memorable for the birth and E∣ducation of our blessed Saviour, whom Iulian the Apostata, called, for this cause, in scorn, the Ga∣lilean: as for the same, the Disciples Generally had the name of Galileans imposed upon them, till that of Christian, (being a name of their own choosing) did in fine prevail. Both, or the greater part of both, known in the New Testament by the name of Decapolis, or Regio Decapolitant, mentioned Mat. 4. 25. Mark 7. 31. So called from the ten principal Cities of it, that is to say, 1. Caesarea Philippi, 2. Aser, 3. Cedes-Nepthalim, 4. Sephet, 5. Chorazim, 6. Capernaum, 7. Bethsai••••, 8. Jotopata, 9. Tiberias, and 10. Scythopolis. By which accompt it stretched from the Medite∣ranean to the head of Jordan, East and West, and from Libanus to the hills of Gilboa, North and South; which might make up a square of forty miles. With reference to the Tribes of Israel, the whole Galilee was so disposed of, that Aser, Nepthalim, and a part of the tribe of Dan, had their habitation in the Higher; Zabulom, and Issachar in the Lower: according to which distribution we will now describe them.

1. The Tribe of NAPHTHALI, was so called from NAPHTHALI the sixt Sonne of Jacob, begotten on Bilhah the handmaid of Rachel; of whom at their first muster were found 53400 fighting men, and at the second 44540 able to bear armes. The land alotted to them lay on the West-side of the River Jordan, opposite to the Northen parts of Ituraea, where before we left; having on the East, the Tribe of Aser, and that of Zabulun on the South. Within which tract were cer∣tain Cities which they never conquered; and one which appertained to the Tribe of Dan: the chief of those which were with-holden by the Gentiles, being Chalcis, Abila, Heliopolis, Cities accompted of as belonging to Coele-Syria, where they have been spoken of already.

That which did appertain to the Tribe of DAN, lay on the North-east part hereof, confronting the most Northen parts of Ituraea, as before was said, where the Danites held one Town of moment, besides many others of less note. And it seemed destined to this Tribe by some old presage, the Eastern fountain of Jordan (which hath its originall in this tract) being called Dan, at the time of the defeat which A∣braham gave to Cherdor laomer and his Associates, hundreds of years before this Tribe had ever a possessi∣on in it. Of which see Gen. 14. v. 14. The Town of moment first called Leshem, by some Writers, Laish: afterwards subject or allied to the Kings of Sidon, and upon strength thereof made good against those of Naphthali; but taken by some Adventurers of the Tribe of Dan. Of whom it is said Josuah 19. 47. that finding their own Countrey too little for them, they went up and fought against Leshem, which they took and called D A N. Accompted after this exploit, the utmost bound Northward of the land of Cantan, the length thereof being measured from Dan in the North, unto Beersheba in the South: re∣markable for one of the Golden Calves which was placed here by Ieroboam; and for the two spring-heads of Iordan, rising neer unto it. When conquered by the Romans, it was called Paneas, from a fountain ad∣joining of that name: which, with the territory about it, after the death of Zenodorus, who held it of the Roman Empire, as before is said, was given by Augustus Caesar unto Herod the Great, and by him at his decease to Philip his youngest Sonne, with the Tetrarchy of Ituraea and Trachonitis. By him repaired and beautified, it was called Caesarea Philippi, partly to curry favour with Tiberius Caesar, partly to pre∣serve the memory of his own name, and partly to distinguish it from another Caesarea situate on the shores of the Mediterranean, and called Caesarea Palestinae, and being so repaired by him, it was made the Metropolis of that Tetrarchy. Mentioned by that name Mat. 16. 13. when Saint Peter made that con∣fession or acknowledgement of his Lord and Master, That he was CHRIST the Sonne of the living God. By King Agrippa, who succeeded him in his estates, in honour of the Emperour Ner••, it was called Neronia. But that, and the Adjunct of Philippi, were of no continuance; the Town being called Caesarea Paneaa in the time of Ptolomy, and simply Paneas, as before, in the time of Saint Hierome. Of this Caesarea was tha woman whom our Saviour cured of a bloody Flux, by touching but the hem of his garment: who in a pious gratitude of so great a mercy, erected two Statuaes in this place, representing CHRIST, and her self kneeling at his feet; remaining here entire till the time of Iulian the Apostata, by whose command it was cast down, and a Statua of his own set up in the place thereof, miraculously destroyed by a fire from heaven, the City being at that time and long time before, an Episcopal See. Of less note there were, 1. Haleb, and 2. Reccath, both situate in the confines of it. And not far off the strong Town and Castle of 3. Magdala, (the habitation as some say of Mary Magdalen) where the Pharisees desired a signe of our Saviour CHRIST, as is said Mat. 15. 39. and 16. 1. the same, or some place neer unto it, being by Saint Mark reporting the same part of the Story, called Dalmanutha. chap. 8. 10. 11. But whether this Castle did antiently belong to these Danites, or to those of Naphthali, or to the Half Tribe of Manasses beyond the River, I am not able to deter∣mine.

Of those which were in the possession of the Tribe of NAPHTHALI, the Cities of most eminent observation were, 1. Hazor, or Azor, by Junius and Tremelius called Chatz••••••

the Regal City and Metropolis of all the Canaanites: memorable for the Rendez-vous of 24. Canaam∣•••• Kings in the war with Jo••uah; by whom it was taken notwithstanding, and burnt to ashes. But being afterwards re-built it became the Regal Seat of Jabin the King of the Canaanites, who so grie∣vously for the space of 20. years afflicted Israel, till vanquished by Deborah and Barak. Destroyed in that warre, and repaired by Solomon, it continued in so good estate in our Saviours time, that it was then one of the ten Cities of Decapolis: in being still, but known by the name of Antiopta. 2. Cape naum, seated on the River Jordan, where it falleth into the Sea of Galilee, of which Country it was accompted the Metropolis, in the time of our Saviour, with whose presence and preaching often honoured, and one of the principal of the Decapolitans. Some marks of its former greatness it retained when Saint Hierome liv∣ed, who confesseth it to be a Town of some good capacity; but so decaied in the time of Bre••denbeck and brochardus, that it consisted but of six poor Fishermens houses. 3. Hamath, so called from Hama∣•••••• the Sonne of Canaan, planted in these parts; a Town of such esteem in the elder times, that it was rekoned one of the Gates of the Land of Canaan, and therefore called in Scripture, introitum Hamath, or the entrance of Hamath; as Num. 34. 8. Jos. 13. 5. Judg. 3. 3. &c. Mistaken by Saint Hie∣rome for another of the same name in Syria, by the Greeks, and Romans after them, called Epiphania. And in this I say he is mistaken; Epiphania being placed by Ptolomy two degrees more Eastward than Caesarea Philippi, the most Eastern City of all Galilee; and two degrees more North than that, though the most Northern City of all Palestine. The ground of this mistake we have seen before. Won by the Syrians of Damascus, it was again recovered to the Crown of Israel, by Jeroboam the second the Son of Joas: and after added by the Romans (as were Scythopolis, Pella, Gadara, and some other of the Cities of this tract unto Coele-Syria. 4 Kadesh, to difference it from others of the same name, called Ka∣•••••• Naphthalim, high-seated on the top of an hill, as is said Jos. 20. 7. the King whereof being taken and slain by Iosuah, it was made one of the Cities of Refuge, and given to the Levites. Most memorable for the birth of Barac, who discomsited Sisera, Lieutenant of the host of Jabin before mentioned, in the infancy of the Jewish State; one of the ten Cities of Decapolis in the time of the Romans; and an Epis∣copal See in the first ages of Christianity. 5. Riblah, watered with the Fountain of Daphnis, a little Riveret, which hereabouts falleth into Jordan: to which City, as some say, (but I think erroniously) Zedechias the unfortunate King of the Iews was brought Prisoner unto Nebuchadnezzar, who caused his Children to be slain before his face, and then put out his eyes. But this I look on as an Errour in them that say it, the scaene of this sad Tragedy being by Iosephus laid in Reblatha (or Riblah) a City of Syria, the same which in succeeding times had the name of Antioch. And certainly Iosephus who for so long was Governour of both the Galilees, cannot be conceived to be so ignorant of the State of this Province, as to transferre that bloody execution to a City of Syria, if it had been acted in this Countrey. Nor can I think that this Riblah, none of the greatest Towns in the Tribe of Naphthali, should be capable of the Court and train of that mighty Monarch; especially for so long a time, as he is said to have attended in that place the success of his forces then before Hierusalem, and the disposal of the State when the Town was taken. 6. Saphet, another of the Decapolitan Cities, strongly if not impregnably seated; one of the strongest Fortresses of the Western Christians, as it was after their expulsion, of the Turks and Saracens, who from hence wasted and subdued all the neighbouring Countrey, as far as to the very Sea. The onely place, not of this Countrey onely, but of all the East, in which the Iews (who possessed a third part of this Town) have any shew or shadow of a Common-wealth. 7. Bethsemes, mentioned Ios. 15. 38. made tributary unto those of this Tribe; though otherwise possessed by the Canaanites who held out against them. 8. Carthan, or Kiriaitham situate neer the mountain which in following times was called Mo∣as Christi, because much freqvented by our Saviour; who here made choice of his Apostles, as is said Mark. 3. 13 and where he also made that Divine Sermon, recited in the 5, 6, & 7. Chapters of Saint Matthews Gospel. 9. Masoloth, a place of great strength, but forced by Baccludes Generall of the Armies of the Kings of Syria, in the time of the Maccabees. 10. Cinnereth, a strong City, after cal∣led Gennesareth; whence the Lake or Sea of Tiberias, neighbouring neer unto it, is sometimes called the Lake of Gennesareth, as Luke 5. 1. &c.

2. The Tribe of A SER was so called from Aser, the 8. Sonne of Iacob, begotten on Zil∣phah the hand-maid of Leah; of whom at their first muster when they came out of Egypt were found 41500 persons, able to bear Armes, all above 20. years of Age; and at the second muster when they entred the Land of Canaan, 53400 fighting men of the new increase. The portion of the land allotted for their ha∣bitation was plentifull in wine, oyl, and wheat, with great store of Balsam: extending from the coast of Sidon to Ptolemais, 30 miles in length; and from the Mediterranean Eastward to the Tribe of Napththali some twelve miles in breadth. And though they never were of power to reduce the mari∣time Cities of Ptolemais, Tyre, Sarepta, and Sidon, under their command: yet had they in this nar∣row compasse many beautiful Cities, and Towns of note, which they were quietly possessed of till their subjugation by the Kings of Assyria.

The principal of those, and others which have since been founded, 1. Aphek, memorable for the great slaughter there made of the Syrians, when besieged by Benhadad: of whom 100000. were slain by the Israe ites under the leading of Ahab, and 27000 killed by the fall of the wall. 2. Gabal••, men∣tioned by Ptolomy amongst the mid-land Cities of Phoenicia; but belonging properly to this Tribe; one of those twenty which were offered by S••lomon unto Hiram, and upon his refusal peopled by the Israelites, Fallen to decay, it was afterwards re-built and strongly fortified by Herod the Great. 3. Gi••••ala, a Town of great strength and consequence, the birth-place of Iohn or Iehochaman, one of the three seditious •••• Hierusalem when besieged by Titus, where he did more mischief than the enemy. Attempting to be∣tray

this City to the power of the Romans, he gave the Tyrians an opportunity to be Masters of it, by whom it was burnt unto the ground. But being re-built by the Authority of Iosephus, then Governour of Galilee for the Iews, it was afterwards yielded to Titus upon composition. 4. Cana, for distinction sake called Cana-Ma or, to difference it from another of that name in the Lower Galilee, assumed for the dwelling of that woman, whose daughter Christ delivered of an evil Spirit: called by Saint Ma∣thew, a woman of Canaan, cap. 15. a Syro-Phoenician by Saint Mark chap. 7. the Syro-Phoenici∣ans of this Tract, being originally of the race of Canaan, as was said before. 5. Het••lan, or Ch••••••∣lan, the furthest City of the North; as 6. Messal, or Masheal, to the South, of the Tribe of Aser. Of later date there are. 7. Thoron, a strong piece built by the Christians on the hills neer Tyre, to ••••••∣der the excursions of the Turks, when they held that City. Situate in a pleasant and fruitful Soil, of great importance in the wars of the Holy Land, and giving name to the noble family of the Lords of Thor••••: one of which being Constable to King Baldwin the third, lieth buried in the Chappel adjoyning to it, a curious piece of workmanship, and Dedicated by the name of the blessed Virgin. 8. Belfort, so nam∣ed from the strength and beauty of it; seated on the high grounds neer the River Naar; and memorable for the great repulse which Saladine the Victorious King of the Turks received before it; being forced to raise his siege with dishonour and loss, on the comming of the Christian Armies. Some other Forts here are of the same erection, as 9. Montfort, and 10. Mount-Royall (or Castrum Regium) belonging to the Dutch Knights (of whom more hereafter) and by them valiantly defended against the Infidels.

3. The Tribe of ZABVLON, was so called from Zabulon the tenth sonne of Jacob by his wife Leah: of whom there mustered neer Mount Sinai, 57400 able men; and 65000. at their second muster when they came into Canaan. Their territory lay on the South of Aser and Nephthalim, and the North of Zabulon, extending from the Lake of Tiberias to the Mediterranean.

Places of most observation in it, 1. Jokneham, the King whereof was slain by Josuah, and the Ci∣ty given unto the Levites. 2. Zabulon, or the City of men, a Sately and magnificent City, till burnt to the ground by Cestius, a Roman President. 3. Cana-Minor, so called to difference it from the o∣ther in the Tribe of Aser, the birth-place of Nathaneel, and as some say of Simon Zelotes: memorable for the mariage at which our Saviour wrought his first miracle, of turning water into wine. Called in Saint Johns Gospel Cana of Galilee. 4. Bersabe, standing in the border betwixt both Galilees, and therefore strongly fortified by Josephus against the Romans. 5. Dothan, where Ioseph found his brethren as they fed their flocks; and where the Prophet Elisha strook blind the Syrians, who besieged him in it. 6. Bethsaida, situate on the Sea of Galilee, one of the ten Cities of Decapolis, the birth-place of Peter, Andrew, and Philip, but most renowned for the miracles and preaching of our Lord and Savi∣our. 7. Nazareth, now a small village, seated in a vale betwixt two hills, not far from Ptolema•••• or Acon; upon one of which two hills it was formerly built, where still are to be seen the ruins of many Churches, here founded by the Christians: it being in the flourishing times of Christianity an Arch-Bi∣shops See. Of great esteem, for being, if not the birth-place, yet the habitation of the Virgin Mary, who was here saluted with those joyful tidings, by an Angnl, as she sate in her chamber. Of which chamber it is said in the Popish legends, that it was after the Virgins death had in great reverence by the Christians, and remained in this Town, till the Holy Land was subdued by the Turks and Saracens, Anno 1291. Then most miraculously transported into Scalvonia; but that place being unworthy of the Virgins Divine presence, it was by the Angels carried over into the Sea-coast of Italy, Anno 1294. That place also be∣ing infested with theeves and pyrats, the Angels removed it to the little village of Loretto, where her miracles were quickly divulged: insomuch that Paul the 2. built a most stately Church over this Cham∣ber, and Xistus the fift made the Village a City. And thus we have the beginning of our famous Lady of Leretto. Here did our blessed Saviour spend a great part of his life before his Baptism; from whence both he and his Disciples had for many years the name of Nazarites. 8. Iotopata, strongly seated on the top of a Mountain, neer the Lake of Gtnnesareth, fortified by Iosephus in the warre with the Romans, but after a long siege taken by Vespasian, and in it Iosephus the Historian, chief Governour of the City, and of both the Galilees. 9. Tiberias, raised out of the ground by Herod the Tetrarch, and named thus in honour of Tiberius Caesar. Situate in a fruitful soyl, on the edge of the Lake, which afterwards took the name of the Lake or Sea of Tiberias: this City being held to be the greatest of the Lower Galilee, and the Metropolis of the Decapolitan Region. In this City it was that our Saviour CHRIST called Saint Matthew from the receipts of the Custome-house; and neer unto it that he raised the daughter of Jairus. 10. Bethulia, more within the land, seated on an high hill, and of very great strength, as appears by the story of Judith and Holofernes. 11. Iapha, a place of like strength, but forced by Ti∣tus, who in the fury of the storm slew in it above 15000. persons, and carried away with him 2000 Priso∣ners. 12. Sephoris or Sipphora, the habitation of Ioachim and Anna, the Parents of the blessed Vir∣gin: fortified with strong walls by Herod the Tetrarch, who made it his Regal seat for the Lower Galilee. Before that time, it had been made by Gabinius, one of the five Iuridical Resorts for the Palestinians; after that, notwithout great difficulty forced by Vespasian; and is now nothing but a Castle known by The name of Zaphet, or Saffet; the ordinary Residence for the most part of the Turkish Sanziack who hath the Government of this Province, and lately, if not still, of the Emirs of Sidon, Faccardine the late Emir having been made the Sanziack of it, before his falling off from the Turks. Not farre off is Mount Tabor, famous for the transfiguration of our Saviour; for a sumptuous Chappel built on the top of the hill in memory of it, by the Empresse Helen, mother of Constantine the Great, and for the Fountain of the brook Cheson, which presently divided into two streams, runneth Eastward with the one to the Sea of Tibe∣rias, and Westward with the other to the Mediterranean.

4. The Tribe of ISSACHAR is so called from Issachar the ninth sonne of Jacob, by his wife Le∣••••, of whom were found at the first muster 54400 fighting men, and 64300 at the second muster. Their l••t, in the partition of the land amongst the Tribes, fell betwixt Zabulon, and the half Tribe of Man••••ss•••• on this side Jordan, North and South; extending from that River to the Mid-land Sea. A territory not so well replenished with strong and eminent Cities, as was that before; nor yielding so much matter of ob∣servation in the course of business.

Those of most note in it, 1. Tarichaea, on the side of the Lake, about eight miles from Tiberias, or great strength both by Art and Nature, as witnessed the notable resistance which Vespasion found when he besieged it: by whom taken with great difficulty and incredible slaughter. 2. C••shion, a City of the Levites. 3. Remeth, called also farmuth, another Citie of the L••vites, where the hills of Gilboa take beginning, and thence range as far as the Mediterranean Westward, and the City of J••zre••l towards the East. 4. En-hadda, neer which Saul being discomfited by the Philistims, slew himself for grief, or else for fear of falling into the hands of those merciless Enemies, against whom he had so often returned victorious. 5. Naim, on the banks of the River Chison, where CHRIST raised to life the Widowes Sonne. 6. Hapharaim, or Aphraim, on the banks of the same River also. 7. Endor, of chief note for the Witch with whom Saul consulted; and the discomfiture of the Midianites by Gede••m, who perished at Endor, and became as the Dung of the Earth, saith the Royall Psalmist. 8. Daba∣rath, one of the Cities of refuge. 9. Arbela, not far from the Cave of the two theeves which so greatly infested Galilee in the time of Herod. And 10. of a later date the Castle of Pilgrims (Castrum Peregrinorum in Latine Writers) built by Raymond Earl of Tholouse, and after fortified by the Templers, for the security of such as traveled to the Holy Land: and for long time the Magazine or Store-house of the Western Christians; now called Tortora. Situate on the shores of the Mediterranean neer a spaci∣ous bay; on the North-side whereof Mount Carmel, described already.

As for those Galileans which succeeded in the place of these Tribes, they were for the most part origi∣nally such as were sent hither by Salmanassar to inhabit there, when the Israelites were led away into endless thraldome; but intermixed with some Remainders of the ten Tribes, as was said before. And yet as if they had been wholly of the same extraction with the rest of the Samaritan Nations, they were as much despised by the Jews (as witnesseth that scornful by-word, Can there any good come out of Galilee?) as the others were: though these as Orthedox in Religion as the Jews themselves. In which so zealously affected, that neither threats nor force could make them offer sacrifice for the health of the Ro∣man Emperours, whom they looked on as the Enemies of their Law and liberty. Brought under the com∣mand of the Kings of Iewry by the Maccabaeans, and with the rest of that Kingdome bestowed on Herod by the Romans. Left by him at his death to Herod, surnamed Antipas, the second of his Sonnes then living, with the title of Tetrarch, which he enjoyed till the death of our Saviour, and on his deprivation (being banished to Lyons in France by the Emperour Caligula) bestowed upon Agrippa his brothers Sonne, the first King of the Iews so named. Under him and his Sonne Agrippa the second, it continued till the generall revolt of the Jewish Nation: Subjected by the sword of Titus to the power of the Ro∣mans, it hath since followed the same fortune with the rest of Palestine.

4. SAMARIA.

SAMARIA is bounded on the East with the River Jordan; on the West, with the Mediterra∣nean Sea; on the North, with Galilee; and on the South, with Iudaea. So called from Samaria, the chief City of it, of which more hereafter.

The Countrey interchangeably composed of fields and mountains, excellent good for tillage, and full of trees, yielding variety of fruits; watered both with the dew of heaven, and many fresh springs which the Earth affordeth it, occasioning thereby abundance of grass, and consequently of Milch∣beasts exceeding plenty. Heretofore very wealthy, and no less populous, but now famed for nei∣ther.

The people for the most part were originally the descendants of those Assyrians whom Salmanassar sent hither to possess the dwellings of the captive Israelites. Gentiles at first, till better instructed by the Lions whom God sent amongst them, and after by the Priests sent hither by the Kings of Assyria, they entertained the five Books of Moses, and out of them learned the manner of the God of the Land, 2 Kin. 17 Further then this they would not go, rejecting all the rest of the sacred Canon; and no strict obser∣vers of this neither. And though at first they so embraced the worship of God, as that they still adhered to the gods of the Nations, where before they dwelt, as Nergal, Ashimah, Nibbar, Tartak, and the rest of that rabble, mentioned 2 Kings 17. yet they were soon taken off from those impieties, and be∣came zealous in the worship of one onely God, erronious cheifly in the place which was destined to it. The wicked policy of Ieroboam the Sonne of Nebat, was as naturall to them, as if they could not have possessed his estates without it: and therefore would not suffer their people to go up to H••rusalem to worship, as the Law required. More pious yet in this than their Pred••cessours, that they erected no Golden Calves in Dan, and Bethel, or any other parts of their Dominions: though to divert the people from the Temple of God, they would have a Temple of their own. Mount Garizim, and the Temple there (of which more anon) as sacred unto them, as that of Solomon to the Iews: Schismaticat enough in this, but not idolatrous and Schismaticall, as the others were; yet so conceited of themselves, and their own perfections, that they imagined themselves defiled by any company but their own. If there∣fore they had visited any of their neighbour nations, at their return they used to sprinkle themselves with u∣rine:

but if by negligence, or the necessitie of business, they had touched any not of their own Sect, they drenched themselves, cloathes and all, in the next fountain. But in this the Iews cryed quittance with them, not so much as eating or drinking with them, nor having with them any kind of commerce or dea∣ling, as appeareth Iohn 4. 9. but loading them, on the other side, with all the bitternesse. of reproach and hatred. There are two manner of people (saith the Sonne of Sirach) which mine heart abhorreth, 〈◊〉〈◊〉 the third is no people: they that sit on the Mountains of Samaria; the Philistims, and the foolish people that dwell as Sichem Ec••ius. 50. And this continued to the times of our blessed Saviour; whom when the Jew•• endeavoured to reproch with their heaviest calumnies, they could find out none so great as to say he was a Samaritan, (which they thought came all to one) a man that had converse with Devils and familiar spirits.

Of these there were some Sects also as amongst the Jews, 1. the Dositheans, so called from D••su••eus or Dosth••••, supposed to be the first Priest who was sent thither by the Kings of Assyria: agreeing with the Jews in Circumcision, and the Sabbath, and the doctrine of the Resurrection (in which last they differed from the common Samaritan who was a Saducee in that point) but differing from them in some points of as signal consequence. For they rejected the writings of all the Prophets, as not 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, inspired by the Holy Ghost; they eat of nothing that had life, like the Pythagoreans; abstained from mariage, like the Essenes; and in the point of Sabbath-keeping out went the Pharisees: it being re∣solved upon amongst them, that in what posture soever a man was found on the Sabbath-day-morning, in the same he was to continue without alteration the whole day after. 2. The Sebvians, so called from Sebva or Sebviah one of the Companions of that Dosthai: who though they kept all the publick festivals, as the Jews and the other Samaritans did, yet they kept them not at the same time; transferring the P••sseover to August, the Pentecost to Autumn, and the feast of Tabernacles to the time of the Passe∣ov••r; not suffered for that cause to worship in the Temple of Garizim. 3. The Gortheni, who kept the same Festivals, and observed the same times of those Solemnities, as the Law required; but kept onely one of the seven dayes of those great Festivals, and laid by the rest, as dayes of ordinary labour. In other points not differing from the other Samaritans, who though at first possessed of all the land be∣longing to the ten Tribes of Israel, were yet reduced at last to a narrower compass: shut up betwixt Galilee and Judaea, within the antient territories of the Tribe of Ephraim, and the other half Tribe of Manasses on this side of the water.

1. The half Tribe of MANASSES on this side of Jordan was situate betwixt Issachar on the North, and the Tribe of Ephraim on the South, extending from the Mediterranean to the banks of that River. In which the places of most consequence and consideration, 1. Beth-san, environed almost with the land of Issachar, situate neer the banks of Jordan, where it beginneth again to streighten and be like it self, having been almost lost in the Sea of Galilee: first called Nysa, and so called by Bac∣chus or Liber Pater the founder of it, in memory of his Nurse there buried: but the children of Manasses not being able to expel the natives out of it, as in other places, gave it the name of Beth-san, or the house of an Enemy. Afterwards when the Scythians invaded those parts of Asia, and compelled some of the Jews to serve them against the rest (whom notwithstanding their good service they put all to the sword) they new-built this City: called therefore by the Grecians, Scythopol••s, or the City of Scythians; and by them reckoned as a City of ••oele-Syria. Memorable in the old Testament for the hanging of the dead bo∣dies of Saul and his sonnes on the walls hereof, by the barbarous Philistims; in the time of our Saviour for being the greatest of all the Decapolitan Region; as afterwards in the flourishing times of Christianity, for being the See of an Arch-Bishop: now nothing but a desolate village, or an heap of rubbish, out of which many goodly Pillars, and other peeces of excellent Marble are often digged. 2. Terzah, used by the Kings of Israel for their Regal Seat; till the building of Samaria, and the removal of it thither. 3. A••rabata, the territory whereof called Acrabatena, was after made one of the ten Toparchies of Jude••. 4. Thebes, not far from Samaria, where the Bastard Abimelech was wounded with a stone which a woman threw at him from the wall; and perceiving his death to be drawing on, commanded his Page to slay him, that it might not be said he perished by the hands of a woman. 5. Ephra, or Hophr••, in which Gideon dwelt: neer whereunto there stood an Altar, consecrated to Baal, defaced by Gideon; and not farre off the fatal stone on which Abimelech slew 70 of his Brethren. An heathenish cruelty, and at this day practised by the Turks. 6. Asophon, an ignoble village, made famous only for the great and notable defeat which Ptolomy Lathurus here gave to Alexander the King of the Jews: which vi∣ctory he used with so great barbarity, that he slew all the Women as he passed along, and caused young children to be sod in Caldron••. 7, Bezek, the City of the bloody Tyrant Adon••∣Bezek, whose story (touched upon before) see at large in Judges chap. 1. By Josephus it is called Bala, and seemeth to be the place in which Saul assembled the chief strength of Israel and Ju∣dah, to the number of 330000. men, for the relief of Iabesh Gilead then distressed by the Ammonites. 8. Iezreel, the Royal City of Ahab and the Kings of his race, situate at the foot of the Mountains of Gilboa; So neer unto the Borders of Issachar, that some have placed it in that Tribe. Memorable in sa∣cred story for the stoning of Naboth by the procurement of Iezabel; and the breaking of Iezabels neck by command of Iehu. A City which gave name to the plains adjoyning, called the valley or Plain•• of Ie∣zreel, (but by the name of Campus Magnus in the book of Maccabees; lib. 1. cap. 12.) extending from S••••thopolis to the Mediterranean: famous for the great and many battels which have been fought in it, as namely of Gideon against the M••dianites, of Sa••l against the Philistims, of Ahah against the Sy••••••n, of Jehu against Iehoram, and finally of the Christians against the Saracens. 9. Megiddo, unfortunately observable for the death of the good King Iosiah, slain hereabouts in a battel against Phar••oh Ne••••, King of Egypt; and before that of Ahaziah King of Iudah, who received his death-wound at Gaber, a Town

adjoining, when pursued by Iehu. 11. Dora, or Dor, as the Scriptures call it, on the Moditerrani∣an, not far from the Castle of Pilgrims in the tribe of Issachar; a very strong and powerfull City, and therefore chose by Try hon for his City of Refuge, who having first treacher••sly taken, and barbarously murdered Ionathan the Maccabaean, after he had received 200 talents for his ransome, and no less vi••la∣nously slain Antiochus the sixt of Syria, his Lord and Master, whom he succeeded in his throne; was by Antiochus the seventh, with an Army of 120000 foot, and 8000 horse, besieged in this City, and most deservedly put to death. 12. Caesarea, antiently called the Tower of Siraton, from Stra•••••• a King of the Zidonians, new built by Herod, and by him not only beautified with a large Theatre and Amp••••∣theatre, both of polished Marble, but with a fair and capacious haven, which with incredible charge and pains he forced out of the Sea. And having in twelve years brought it to perfection, in honour of Drusus Caesar, Sonne-in-Law of Augustus, he caused one of the chief Towers thereof to be called D••••∣sus, the City it self to be called Caesarea Palestinae. In this City was Cornelius baptized by St. Peter; here did St. Paul plead in defence of Christianity, before Festus then the Roman President; and finally, here Herod Agrippa was smitten by an Angell, and devoured by worms, after his Rhetorical Oration, which his Parasites called the voyce of God and not of man. The Metropolis of all Palestine, when one Province only; as afterwards of Palestina Prima, when by Constantine, or some of his Successors, can∣toned into three: the first Bishop hereof being said to be that Cornelius whom Saint Peter here initiated in the faith of CHRIST. 13. Antipatris, another City of Herods building, in the place where Kapharsalama, mentioned 1 Maccab. 7. 31. had sometimes stood; who in honour of his Father An∣tipater gave it this new name. Neer hereunto did Iudas Maccabaeus overthrew a part of Nicanors Ar∣my; and not far off the Mountain where Abdia, the Steward of Ahab, hid the hundred Prophets, whom he preserved against the fury of Iezabel: finally to this City it was that S. Paul was conveyed by the command of Lysias, to save him from the Iews who lay in wait to destroy him.

2. The Tribe of EPHRAIM was so called from Ephraim the second and youngest sonne of Joseph; of whom were mustered in the Desarts 45000 fighting men, and 32500 in the Land of Canaan: where their lot fell betwixt this half Tribe of Manasses, on the North; and the Tribes of Dan and Benjamin, upon the South; extending from the River Jordan to the Mediterranean.

Places of most consideration, 1. S••r••n, on the Mediterranean, to the South of Antipuris, menti∣oned Acts 9. 35. and giving name unto that fruitfull valley, which reacheth from Caesarea Palestinae, as far as Joppa. 2. Lydda, upon the same shores, where Saint Peter (virtute Christi non sua) cured Aeneas of the Palsey. By the Gentiles it was called D••ospolis, or the City of Jupiter; but by the Chri∣stians in the time of the holy wars, it had the name of the St. Georges: partly from a Magnificent Temple which the Emperour Justinian there errected to the honour of that blessed M••rtyr; but principally from an opinion which they had amongst them, that he suffered martyrdome in that place. An opinion founded on mistakes, first of a Ceno••aphium, or an empty Monument, errected in this City to preserve his memory, for the grave in which he was interred; the other, in taking the word Passio, used in the Mar••••yrologies, for the place of his suffering, which is meant onely of the story or celebration. But howsoever they intitu∣led it by the name of Saint Georges, as was said before, and made it on that accompt also an Episcopall See. 3. Ramatha, or A••amathea, a City of the Levites, supposed to be the dwelling of Joseph, who begged of Pilate the bodie of CHRIST. 4. Helon or A••alon, a City of the Levites also. 5. Themnath-Chares, given by the Israelites to Iosuah, who enlarged the same, and made it a strong and goodly City; honoured with the sepulchre of that brave Commander, one of the nine Worthies of the World; and afterwards made one of the Prefectures of Judaea, by the name of Thamnitica. 6. Ada∣sa, or Adars••, where Iudas Maccabaeus with 3000 Iews overthrew the Army of Nicanor. 7. Ie∣••eti called otherwise Pelethi, which gave name and birth unto the P••lethites, part of Davids guard, under the governance of Benaiah. 8. Silo, situate on the top of a lofty mountain; the receptacle of the Ark, till taken and carryed thence by the Philistims. 9. Michmas, the habitation of Jonathan one of the Maccabaean Brethren, situate in the middle way from Samaria to Hierusalem, now called Byra. 10. N••••oth, where Saul prophesied. 11. Bethoron, a City of the Levites, beautified by Solomon, but made more famous by the great and notable overthrow which Judas Maccabaeus here gave to Lysi∣as. 12. Pirhatlon, on the Mountain Amale••, the City of Abdon the Judge of Israel. 13. Si••he••. called also Sichor, the habitation in the old times of Sichem the father of that Hamor who de••l••ured D••∣na the daughter of Jacob; the City for that cause destroyed by Simeon and Levi, repaired again, and afterward by Abimelech levelled with the ground; a third time re-edified by Ieroboam the Sonne of N••ba••, and a third time ruined by the Kings of Damascus; yet notwithstanding these blowes it was of good e∣steem in the time of our Saviour, who abode in it two daies, and converted many. Memorable for Iacobs Well which was very neer it, more for its neighbourhood to Mount Garizam, where the blessings were to be read to the people (of which see Deut. 11. 27. and Ios. 8. 23.) and where afterwards was built a magnificent Temple for the use of the Samaritan Nation; at the cost and charge of S••••b•••••• a great Prince amongst them. Who having marryed his Daughter to Manasses, brother of Iaddus the Priest of the Iews; and fearing he would put her away, to avoid the sentence of excommunication, which he was involved in for that match, promised him, that if he would retain her, he would build a Tample answerable unto that of Hierusalem, and make him the Hi••••h Priest thereof, which was do••e accord∣ingly. But this Temple had not stood above 200 hundred years, when destroyed by Hyro•••••••• the M••∣cabae••n: the place remaining notwithstanding a place of worship, as appeareth Ioh. 4. 20 As for the City of Sichem or Sichor, it was by the Grecians called Ne••••olis, afterwards made a Colony by the Emperour Vespasian, who caused it to be called Fl•••••••• Caesarea; of which Colony was that renowned

Iustin Martyr. 14. Samaria, the Metropolis of the Kingdome of Israel, founded by Omri one of the Kings thereof, on the top of the Mountain Samrom, (which overlooketh all the bottom as far as the Se-coast) whence it had the name. A stately and magnificent City, conjectured by Brochardus, who had traced the antient ruins of it, to be bigger than Hierusalem. Destroyed by the Assyrians when they car∣ryed away the Ten Tribes, but afterwards repaired again, and again, beaten to the ground by the Sonnes of Hyranus above-mentioned. But Herod the Great, who was pleased with the situation of it, did a∣again re-edifie it, in more stately manner than before, as appeareth by the great store of goodly Marble pillars, and other carved stones, in great abundance found amongst the rubbish: and having rebuilt it to has mind, inclosed it with a strong wall, and beautifyed it with a goodly Temple; in honour of Augustus Caesar, whom the Greeks call Sebastos, he caused it to be called Sebaste. Memorable after this new erection for the Sepulchre of Iohn Baptist, and being made the Metropolis of Palestin; Secund••, (by consequence an Arch-Bihops See), now nothing but a few Cottages filled with Grecian Monkes.

Nor were the Samaritans themselves (so called from this their principall City) less subject to the vicissi∣tudes and change of fortune, than the City was. Descended for the most part from the Assyians, and such other Nations, as were sent thither to fill up the empty places of the Captive Tribes: but called Cu••••••∣ans by the Jewes, either because most of them were of Cuth, a Region of Persia, as Josephus telleth us, which is now called Chuzestan: or else by way of scorn, for Chusites, as being of the posterity of the ac∣cursed Cham, by Chus his sonne. Having imbraced the Law of Moses, they began to think better of the Jews than the other Nations, but fitted their affections to the change of times: it being the observation of the said Iosephus, that as often as the Iews were in any prosperity, then they called them Cousins, and would be of the same Nation with them; but when their fortunes were on the declining hand, then they were stran∣gers which came thither out of forrain Nations, and no kin at all. Nor doth he wrong them in that Chara∣cter. For when Alexander the Great had granted the Iews a release of the seventh years tribute, and the Samaritans desiring the like exemption, pleaded for themselves 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, &c. that they indeed were very Hebrews, though it pleased the Sidonians to call them Sichemites. But when Antiochus raged against them with fire and sword, the Samaritans sent letters to him disclaming all relation to those of Iudah, and challenging their descent from the Medes and Persians. Nor were they content onely to disclame all kindred with the Iews in the times of trouble, when any persecution. rose against them for the Law of God; but did them also all ill offices, and joyned with their Enemies to their destruction: especially after the Iews had refused to admit of their assistance, in the re-building of the Temple; which after that they hindred with great malice, and no less perversness. But the fortune of the Iews did at last prevail, the whole Nation being subdued by Hyrcanus the Maccabaean, who destroyed their Schismaticall temple also, and levelled Samaria it self to the very ground. After this subject to the Iews, who possessed themselves of most of their Cities, and contracted them into a narrower compass than they were in formerly: but still so hated and contemned, that nothing was able to appease that inveterate malice, which they had conceived, till both Nations were extirpated in the time of Adrian, and made to seek their dwellings in other Countries. Made afterwards a Province of the Roman Empire, by the name of Palestina Secunda: successively subject with the rest to the Persians, Saracens, and Turks, who doe now possess it.

IVDAEA.

JVDAEA is bounded on the East, with the Dead Sea, and the River Iordan; on the West, with the Mediterranean; on the North, with Samaria; and on the South, with Idumaea. So called from the Iews, or People of the Tribe of Iudah, who after their return from the Captivity of Babylon, communicated the name of Iew unto all the Nation; as they did that of Iudaea to this part of the Countrey.

The Soyl of the same nature with that of Samaria, before described; but that it is more swelled with hills, and more stored with Rivers, though of no great fame. And therefore we shall say no more as to the generall character and description of it; but look on the particular parts as it stood divided betwixt the Phi∣listims, the Tribes of Dan, Simeon, Judah, and Benjamin.

And first, the PHILISTIMS commanded all the Sea-coasts from the South of Phoenicia, to the North of Idumaea, or from the Castle of Pilgrims, to the City of Gaza, taking both into the ac∣compt. But Joppa, and all the Towns on the North of that being taken in by the Israelites, they held no more than six Towns of any importance, with the Countries and territories adjoyning to them: but those so populous and strong, that by their own power, and the assistance of the Edomites and the rest of their neigh∣bours, not well affected to the Tribes, they kept them unto harder terms, and lay more heavy on them than all the Canaanites together; as will appear when we summe up the story and successes of their af∣fairs.

In the mean time let us survey the Countrey which was holden by them, notwithstanding all that could be done against them by the Kings of Israel: and therein we shall find worth our observation, 1. Ge••h, or Gath, the birth-place of the huge Giant Goliah, slain by David; as also of many others of the like Gi∣gantine proportion, slain by Davids worthies. Destroyed by David, or rather slighted and dismantled, it was re-built by Reboam the sonne of Solomon; but again razed by Ozias King of Judah, who found the Philistims there garisoned but ill neighbours to him; and finally laid wast by Hazael the King of Syria. Not much regarded after that, though it kept the name of Gath in Saint Hieromes time; till in these last A∣ges Fulk the King of Hierusalem created there a new Castle from the antient ruins. From hence as I con∣ceive,

the Idol Dagon, so much worshipped by these Philistims, was by the Syrians and Phanician called Ater-Gatis; and not from Gatis a Syrian Queen, as is said by many. 2. A••caror, on the South of Gath, of great wealth and power, and one that held out notably against the Danites and Judae∣ans: much spoke of in the holy Scriptures, but for nothing more than their Idolatrous worship of bel-ze∣bub, that is to say the Lord of Flies: so called by the Iew••, either in contempt of the Idolatries commit∣ted to him, or because of that great multitude of flies which attended his sacrifices, wherof some say, the Temple of Hierusalem was wholly free. But whatsoever he was, or for what cause so named, certain it is that he was here had in especial honour, and therefore called in Scripture the God of Accaron: and hither Azahtah the King of Israel sent his messenger to enquire of this Idol concerning his health. 3. Ashdod (by the Grecians called Azotus) memorable in holy writ for the Temple of D••gon, into which the Ark of the Lord was brought; that Idol falling down before it, as not able to stand upright when the Ark so neer. Neer to this Town was Iudas Maccabeus overcome and stain by Bacchides, Lieutenant to Demetrius the King of Syria; and not long after the Town it self was taken by Ioniathan the brother of Iudas, who put the Citizens to the sword, and burnt all such as fled into the Temple of Dagon, together with the very Idol, consumed in the same fire with the Idolaters. Re-built by Gabinius, a Roman General, in the times of Christianity it was made an Episcopal See; and continued a fair village till the daies of Saint Hierom. 4. Ascalon, on the Sea-side also, said to be built by Ascalus a noble Lydian, employed by his King in a warre against the Syrians; but this very uncertain. One of the chief and strongest Cities of the Philistims, of great note amongst the Gentiles for a Temple dedicated to Dirceto the mother of Semiramis, here worshipped in the form of a Mer-maid: and for another of Apollo, wherein Herod the father of Antipater, and Grand-fa∣ther of Herod the Great (from his birth in this City called Herod the Ascalonite) is said to have served as the Priest. It had in the first times of Christianity an Episcopal See; and in the course of the holy warres was beautified with a new wall and many fair buildings by King Richard the first. 5. Gaza, more within the land, on the River Besor; a fair and strong Town, formerly called Assa, from whence perhaps the name of Gaza was derived by the Heathens; or else it was so called by the Persians, in regard that Cambyses here laid up the treasure which he had provided for the warre of Egypt; the word Gaza in the Persian language signifying treasures. Of which Cambyses it is said by Pomponius Mel••, cum armis Aegyptum peteret huc belli opes et pecuniam in vehi curavi••. After which it was made the Re∣ceipt or Treasury in which the Persians laid the tributes of the Western Provinces; whence all Riches had in time the name of Gazae. Once Caleb took it, but not able to hold it against the Philistins, he again deserted it. Destroyed by Alexander the Great, and re-built again it made notable resistance a∣gainst the Maccabees, till at last forced by Simon the brother of Judas, who liked the place so well that he intended to have made it his place of residence; not so decayed in length of time, but that it was a goodly City in the dayes of Brochardus. And is still the best of all this coast, built on an hill encompas∣sed with rich and pleasant vallies; the building low and mean as in other places; but some of them a∣dorned with pillars of fair Parian marble, digged out of the remaining ruins. 6. Maioma, the Port Town of Gaza, but made a City of it self by Constantine, by whom called Constantia: but restored again by Julian unto those of Gaza, and by him commanded to be called Gaza Mari••ma.

These were the chief places holden by the Philistims, a strong and Giantlike race of men, such as the Scripture call by the name of Anak, or the Sonnes of Anak. Originally descended from Casluhim, and Copthorim, of the race of Mizraim the sonnes of Cham: as appeareth both by the common consent of an∣tient Writers, and plain Texts of Scripture, Jerem. 47. 4. and Amos 9. 7. These being setled first in the borders of Egypt and Idumaea, where the Casluhim gave name unto the Province of Casiotis, and the Mountain Casius; proceeded North-wards and subdued the Avim, a Canaanish people, planting themselves in their habitations, as is said expressely Deut. 2. 23. Here Abraham found them in his time, and here they were when Israea went down to Gezar. Governed at first by one King, whom they called al∣wayes by the name of Abimelech, as the Egyptians theirs by the name of Pharaoh; sometimes by five, according to the number of their principal Cities; but still united in the times of approaching dangers. Too strong to be subdued by the Tribes of Israel, they made head against them, and mastered them at se∣veral times for above 150. years, Tyrannizing over them, till broken by Sampson, and for a time kept off by Samuel. Recovering again, they vanquished the Israelites in the time of Saul, whom they discomfited, and hanged his dead body barbarously on the walls of Bethsan. But David, a more fortunate Prince, overthew them in many set battels, and at length took the Town of Gath, one of the strongest Towns they had: and by that means so weakned them that they durst not stirre all the time of David, nor a long while after. Beginning to be troublesome in the dayes of Ozias King of Judah, they were warred on by him, their army overthrown, Ita and Amnia, two of their strong Forts, took and razed; and the Town of Gath again dismantled. In the time of the Idolatrous Achaz, associating with the Edomites, (who evermore attended the destruction of Judah) they brake out again, took Bethsemes, Aialon, Timnah, and some other Towns, carried away many Prisoners, and flew much people. But the good King Eze∣••••ah made them pay dear for it, taking from them the greatest part of their Country, betwixt Gath and Ga∣za Which notwithstanding, they recovered to so great esteem that the whole Countrey had from them the name of Palestine. But broken by degrees by the Maccabaeans, they lost both their power and reputation, passing in common estimate as a part of ••ewry; the fortunes of which it followed for thetimes succeeding.

2. The Tribe of DAN, so called from Dan the fift sonne of Iacob, by Bilhah the hand-maid of Rache, of whom were mustered at Mount Sinai 62700. fighting men; and 66400. at the second muster in the Land of Canaan; where their lot fell betwixt Ephraim on the North, Simeon on the

South, the Tribe of BENIAMEN on the East, and the Mediterranean on the West.

Places of most note in it, 1. Ioppa (now called Iaffa) once a famous Mart-Town, and the onely Haven to Iudaea in foregoing times: the Town, where Ionah took ship to fly unto Tarshiesh; where Pe∣ter raised Dorcas from death to life, and where he lying in the house of one Simon a Tanner, was in a vision taught the conversion of the Gentiles. This City they report to have been built before the floudn: here they say reigned Cepheus, whose daughter Andromeda was by Perseus delivered from a Sea-monster, some of whose bones the people use to shew to strangers; even till the flourishing of the Romans. Just as our Citizens of Coventry and Warwick, shew the bones of the Dun-Cow of Dunsmear heath, and the bones of I know not what Gyant, slain by Guy Earl of Warwick. In the time of the Maccabees it was garrisoned by the Syrians, who having in the Port a Fleet of good power and strength, invited 200 of the chief Citizens to go aboard with them, and there drowned them all: for which their fleet was fired by Iudas, and such as did escape the fire fell upon his sword. Twice taken by the Romans, and the se∣cond time burnt unto the ground: new walled, and fortified with Towers, by King Lewis of France, in the year 1250, the Holy Warres then drawing to their finall end. Now nothing standing of it but two little Turrets where are certain Harquebusses for defence of the Haven; none of the best, de∣fended from the South and West winds with eminent Rocks, but exposed to the fury of the North, which makes it more unsafe than the open Seas, when inraged by Tempests. Not much frequented by the Merchant, who trade here but for Cottons onely; and hold their Factory not far off in a Town called 2. Rama, by the Moores called Ramula, situate in a sandy plain on the rising of a little hill; built of free-stone, but the streets thereof narrow, and the houses contemptible. More beautifull in the ruins of some Christian Churches, and a Monastery built by Philip the Good of Burgundie, where the house of Nicod mus stood, than in any of the remaining edifices. 3. Iamnia, neer Ioppa, where Iudas burnt the rest of the Syrian Fleet, the flame whereof was seen to Hierusalem, 240 furlongs off; mentioned by Ptolomy, and in the times of Christianity an Episcopall S••e; now not discernable in the ruins. 4. Cedar, or Cedron, fortified against the Iews by Cendebaeus one of the Lieutenants of Antiochus, who hereabouts was over∣thrown by the Maccabees. 5. Modin, a small Town, but honoured with the birth and sepulchre of those Maccabaeans; the Sepulchre being seven Marble Pillars of so great an height, that they served as a mark for Seamen. 6.Gibbethon, in the Countrey called Makats, a City of the Levites, but after∣wards possessed by the Philistims; at the sieige whereof Nadab, the Sonne of Ieroboam King of Israel, was slain by Baasha, who succeeded; and Omri chosen King on the death of Zimri. 7. Cariathi rim, where the Ark of the Lord was kept for 20 years in the house of Aminadab; that is to say, from the sending it home by the Philistims, till brought to Hierusalem by David. 8. Beth-semes, to which the A•••• was brought by a yoke of Kine, turned loose by the Philistims: for irreverent looking into which there were slain by the immediate hand of God, no fewer then 50070 persons of this City. 9. Tsarah, neer which is a fountain, called the Fountain of Ethiopia, because Philip there baptized the Ethiopian Eu∣nuch. 10. Caspin, taken with great slaughter by Iudas Maccabaeus. 11. Lachis, remarkable for the death of Amaziah King of Iudah. 12. Aialon, a City of the Levites also, in the valley whereof the Moon is said to have stood still at the prayers of Iosuah, as the Sun did over the City of Gibeon: the mo∣tion of the Heavens being said, that he might have the more time for execution on the Kings of the Cana∣anites. To this Tribe also belonged the Town and Territory of Dan, or Leshem, afterwards called Caesarea Philippi, in the Tribe of NEPHTHALIM; whereof we have there spoke al∣ready.

3. The Tribe of SIMEON was so called from Simeon the second Sonne of I••∣cob by his first wife Leah: of whom were found at the first muster 59300 able men; and but 22200 at the second muster, when they came into Canaan. Where they enjoyed but a small Territory to themselves, their lot falling amongst the Philistims, whom they were not able to expell: and therefore they were taken into the Tribe of Iudah, where they were permitted to enjoy some Towns and Villages, intermixed with that more potent Tribe. Afterwards in the reign of King Hezekiah, some of them possessed themselves of Gedar, belonging to the Children of Ham; and others passing Southwards into Idumaea, smote the Amale••ites which inhabited in the Mountains thereof, and dwelt in the places by them conquered. But for all this, wanting room for themselves and their Children, many of them undertook the Office of Scribes or Scrive∣ners, and dispersed themselves amongst the rest of the Tribes, teaching their Children to write, and giv∣ing themselves to the employment of Publick Notaries: God herein verifying the curse which Iacob had denounced on Simeon, that he should be divided and scattered in Israel. But for their fixed habitation which fell to them by lot, it lay betwixt Dan upon the North, and Idumaea on the South; the Tribe of Iudah on the East, and the Philistims upon the West.

Places of most observation in it, 1. Gerar, the Royall seat of the two Abimelechs, Kings of the Philistims, with whom Abraham and Isaac had to do; and probably of some other of their Kings and Princes, till subdued by the Israelites. Situate in the South border of Canaan, not far from the Wil∣dernesse of Beersheba, but in a very healthfull air; called therefore Regio Salutaris in the times succeed∣ing. 2. Siceleg, or Ziglag, belonging to the Philistims till the time of David, to whom given by Achish King of Gath, for his place of retreat, when persecuted by Saul, from whom flying he lodged here all his goods and carriages: sacked by the Amalekites, but the booty recovered from them speedily by the diligence and good fortune of David. 3. Haiin, a City of the Levites. 4. Cariath-〈◊〉〈◊〉, that is to say the City of Books, seated within the bounds of Simeon, but belonging to Iudah, which some hold to be the University or Academie of old Palestine. A Citie of the Levites also, and at first pos∣sessed

by the Sonnes of Anak, or men of a Gigantine stature, but taken by Othomel, the Sonne of Ken••, on the promise and encouragement which was given by Caleb, that whosoever took it should have his Daughter Achsah to wife. Afterwards it was called Debir, Iudg. 1. 11. known in the time of Saint Hierome, by the name of Daema. 5. Chorma, conceived by some to be that place mentioned 〈◊〉〈◊〉 14. 45 to which the Canaanites and Amalekites pursued those of Israel. 6. Beershab, or 〈◊〉〈◊〉 ••uramenti, so called of the Well of waters, and the oath which was there sworn betwixt Abraham and Abimelech, Gen. 21. 31. Memorable in the Scripture for the Grove which Abraham there planted, the wandring of Hagar thereabouts, when she was cast out of Abrahams house with her young sonne ••••ma∣d, and the dwelling of Isaac, for which cause called the City of Isaac. Situate in the extreme South bor∣der of the Land of Canaan, the length whereof is often measured in the Scripture from this Town to Da••: and for that cause well fortified by the Western Christians, when they were possessed of this Countrey, as standing on the borders of Idumaea, and the Desarts of Arabia, in the way from Egypt.

4. The Tribe of IVDAH was so called from Iudah the fourth sonne of Iacob, by his wife Le∣ah; of whom there were numbred at the first generall muster taken neer Mount Sinai, 76600 fighting men; and no fewer than 76500, at their entrance into the Land of Canaan. The greatest Tribe, and therefore answerably fitted with the largest territory; bordering on the Dead Sea, East; upon Simeon, West; and the Tribe of Benjamin on the North; and the Idumaeans on the South. Comparatively large, with reference to the other Tribes: but otherwise unable to contain or feed those infinite multitudes, without the extraor∣dinary providence of Almighty God, which are recorded to be in it: King David mustering 470000 fight∣ing men of this Tribe alone; which was more than half the number found in the rest of the Tribes. A Tribe which had a native Sovereignty over all the others, the Scepter, the Legislative power, and the worlds Messiah, being all promised unto this.

Places of most observation in it, 1. Arad, situate in the entrance of Iudaea, in the way from the Wil∣derness of Edom. 2. Hebron, one of the antientest Cities of Canaan: the seat of Giants, called Ana∣kim, or the sonnes of Anak. This word Anak signifieth a chain worn for ornament: and it seemeth that this Anak enriched with the spoils of his enemies, wore a chain of Gold, leaving both the custome and name to his posterity. We read the like of Manlius Torquatus in the Roman Histories. This Town did Abraham buy for a buriall place for his dead, and in it his wife Sarah was first buried; and after her four of the Patriarchs. Adjoyning to this town is the plain of Mamre, where Abraham the Father of the faithfull, sitting in his Tent, was visited from Heaven by God in the shape of man. Here David kept his Court before the winning of Hierusalem; to this place came the Tribes to anoint him King over Israel; and hither came Absalon, under the pretence of paying his vowes, to usurp the Kingdome of his Father. 3. Tecoa, the City of Amos the Prophet; and also of that woman, who by the words which Ioab put into her mouth, perswaded the King to call Absolon from exile. In the Wilderness of this Tecoa, there assembled the Inhabitants of Moab, Ammon, and Mount Seir, to overthrow Iuda. But the Lord being appeased by the publique Fast, proclamed and kept by Iehosaphat and the people, sowed dissenti∣ons amongst them: So that the children of Ammon and Moab stood up against the inhabitants of Mount-Seir, utterly to slay and destroy them; and when they had made an end of the inhabitants of Mount Seir, every one helped to destroy one another. 4. Cerioth, or Carioth, the birth-place of Iudas, hence suma∣med Iscariot (or the man of Carioth) who betrayed our Saviour. 5. Jether, or Jatter, nigh unto which was fought that memorable battell, wherein Asa, King of Iudah, by the help of God, discomfi∣ted Zerah, King of the Arabians; whose Army consisted of a Million of fighting men. 6. Marsia, the native Soyl of the Prophet Michah, neer whereunto first Asa King of Iudah discomfitted the vast Army of Terah the Arabian or Ethiopian, consisting of above a Million of men; and afterwards Gorgias was overthrown by Iudas Maccabaeus. 7. Emaus, (after called Nicopolis) memorable for the third overthrow which Iudas gave to the said Gorgias; for our Redeemers shewing himself after his Resurrection to Cleophas and another of his Disciples; & for the hot Bathes hereabouts, which gave the name of Salntaris to this part of Palestine. The sovereign vertue of which waters Sozomen, a Christian, attributes to the washing of Christ's feet in them, as he passed by at that time; but Iosephus, a Iew, ascribes (as it is most likely) unto naturall causes. 8. Hasor, or Chatsor, one of the forntiere Towns towards Idumaea. 9. Odalla, or Hadullan, an antient and magnificent City, taken and de∣stroyed by Josuah; and long after much enlarged and beautified by Ionathan, one of the Macca∣bees. 10. Ceila, or Keila, where David sometimes hid himself when he fled from Saul; by him deli∣vered afterwards from the assaults of the Philistims. 11. Eleutheropolis, or the Free City, not far from Hebron, a City of later date than any of Iudah, mentioned by Ptolomy, and much remembred by Saint Hierome. 12. Azecha, not far from Emaus, to which Iosuah followed Dabir the King of Eglon and his four Associates, whom he discomfited in the cause and quarrell of the Gibeonites, molested by them for submitting to their common Enemy. Seated in the vally of Terebinth, and of very great strength; presuming upon which, it revolted from Ioram King of Judah, at the same time that Libn••, and the E∣domites had revolted from him. 13. Beth-Sur (or Seth-Sora) that is to say, the house on the Rock, so called from the situation on a rocky hill, one of the strongest places of Sudah: Fortified first by Robo∣am. the son of Solomon, after by Iudas Maccabaeus, and finally made impregnable by his brother Simeon. 14. Adoram, bordering on the Dead-Sea, beautified also by Roboam. 15. Zoar, in former times called Bela, but took his name from the words of Lot, alleging that it was but a little one, Gen. 19. 20. as the word Tsohor doth import; in whose escape it was preserved; being otherwise one of the five Cities of the Region called Pentapolis, doomed unto destruction; the other four, Sodom, Gomorrals, Ad••∣ma, and Seboim, being at the same time destroied by fire and brimstone, 16. Massada, situate on an

high Mountain called Collis Achilloe, an impregnable fortress, built by Herod the Great, in the place where Ionathan the Maccabee had sometime raised a very strong Castle; Which he fortified with 27. Tur∣rets, and left therein, as in a place impregnable, and inaccessible, a Magazine of Armes and all war∣like furniture for an Army of 100000 men. 17. Libna, a strong City seated in a corner of Iudah, running between the Tribes of Dan and Benjamin. This City revolted from Ioram King of Iudah, at the same time the Edomites did: and continued a free State, even as long as Iudab continued a Kingdome. 18. Ziph, in the wilderness, wherein David hid himself from the fury of Saul. Hither, when Saul pur∣sued him, David came into his Camp (the watch being all asleep) and took thence his spear, and a Cruse of oyl, and departed. Abishai indeed would fain have killed him: but David, though he knew that Samuel had by Gods command abdicated Saul from the Kingdome, and that himself was appointed in his stead, would not touch him, but left him to the judgement of the Lord, whose annointed he was. 19. Bethlem, or (to distinguish it from another of this name in Zabulon so called) Bethlem-Iudah, where Christ was born; and the Innocents suffered for him, before he had suffered for them. In this general Massacre of young children, a sonne of Herods, which was at nurse, was also slain: Which being told unto Augustus, he replyed, he had rather be Herods swine than his sonne. His swine being safe in re∣gard the Iews were forbidden hog-meat; but his sonnes frequently made away upon fears and jealousies. A Town for this cause had in great respect by the Primitive Christians, beautified by Helen with a State∣ly Temple, which yet standeth entire; by the Lady Paula (much extolled by Saint Hierome) with some goodly Monasteries, in one of which the body of that Father lieth; and by the Western Christian•• with a See Episcopal. 20. On the frontire of this Country towards the Philistians, was that strong Castle, which Herod repairing, called Herodium, seated on a hill, the ascent unto which was made with 200 steps of Marble exceeding fair and large. In this Countrey also are the hils of Engaddi, in a Cave of which David cut off the lap of Sauls garment, and all along the bottomes whereof were the gardens of Balsamum, or Opobalsamum, the trees of which, were by Cleopatra (at such time as she governed M. Antony, and the East,) sent for to be replanted in Heliopolis of Aegypt; and Herod, who durst not deny them, plucked them up by the roots and sent them to her.

5. The Tribe of BENIAMIN took name from the twelf and youngest sonne of Iacob, by Rachel his best beloved wife, who died in that Child-birth: of which at the first muster neer unto Mount Sinai, were numbred 35000 able men; and at the second muster when they entred the Promised Land, there were found of them fit for Armes, 45600. persons. A Tribe in great danger to have been utterly cut off, by the folly of the men of Gibeah: all Israel arming against it, as one man. For besides those that perished in the former battels, there fell in one day 25000 men that drew the sword: the sury of the Conquerours after that great victory sparing neither man nor beast, nor any thing that came to hand, and burning down all their Cities also which they came unto. So great an havock was there made even of in∣nocent maidens, that when the edge of this displeasure was taken off, there were not wives enough found for those few young men which had escaped; the other Tribes having bound themselves by a solemn oath, not to bestow their daughters on them: insomuch, that they were fain to provide themselves of wives of the daughters of Iabesh-Gilead, a Town of the Manissites beyond Iordan, which they took by assault, and of the daughters of Shilo, whom they took by Stratagem. The whole story see at large in the Book of the Indges, chap. 19, 20, 21.

The territories of this Tribe lay betwixt those of Ephraim on the North, and Iudah on the South, ha∣ving the Dead-Sea to the East, and Tribe of Dan to the West-ward of them. The chief of their Towns and Cities, were, 1. Micmas, the incamping place of Saul, 1 Sam. 13. 2. and the abiding place of Iona∣than, one of the Maccaboean brethren. 1 Macc. 9. 73. 2. Mispah, famous in being the ordinary place of assembly, for the whole body of the people, in matters of warre or peace: as also in that stand∣ing in the midst of Canaan, it was (together with Gilgal) made the seat of justice to which Samuel went yearly, to give judgement to the people. 3. Gebah, the North border of the Kingdome of Iudah toward Israel. 4. Gibeah, the Countrey of Saul, the first King: where the a busing of the Levites wife by the young men of this Town, had almost rooted the Tribe of Renjamin out of the garden of Israel. 5. At, a great and strong City, in the siege of which, the Israels were first discomfited: but when by the death of A∣chan, who had stoln the accursed thing, the Camp was purged; Josuah by a warlike stratagem surprised it. 6. Gibeon, the mother City of the Gibeonites, who presaging the unresistable victories of the Isra∣elites, came to the Camp of Josuah, and by a wile obtained peace of Josuah and the People. Emploied by them in hewing wood and drawing water for the use of the Tabernacle, after the fraud was made known unto them; called Nethinims, Ezr. 43. from Nathan, which signifies to give, because they were given to the service of the Tabernacle first; of the Temple after. Saul about four hundred years after, slew some of them, for which fact the Lord caused a famine on the land: which could not be taken away till seven of Sauls sonnes were by David delivered unto the Gibeonites, and by them hanged. This fa∣mine did God send, because in killing those poor Gibeonites, the Oath was broken, which Josuah and the Princes swore concerning them. In defence of those Gibeonites it was, that Josuah waged war against the Kings of the Canaanites; and staied the motion of the Sun by his fervent praiers. 7. Jericho, destroi∣ed by the sound of Rams-horns, was not onely levelled by Josuah to the ground, but a curse inflicted on him that should attempt the re-building of it. This curse notwithstanding, at the time when Ahab reign∣ed in Israel (which was about five hundred years after the ruine of it) Hiel a Bethelite, delighted with the pleasantness of the place, reedified it. But (as it was foretold by Iosuah) as he laid the foundation of the wals, he lost his eldest Sonne; and when he had finished it, and was setting up the gates thereof, he lost also the younger. It may be Hiel, when he began his work minded not the prophecy; it may be he be∣lieved

it not: peradventure he thought the words of Iosuah, not so much to proceed from the spirit of prophe∣cy, as from an angry and vexed heart; they being spoken in way of wish, or execration. And it is possible, it may be, he chose rather to build the eternity of his name on so pleasant and beautifull a City, than on the lines and issues of two young men. 8. Anathoth, the birth-place of the Prophet Ieremy, and the patri∣mony of Abiathar the high Priest, sent hither by the command of Solomon, as to a place of his own when deposed from his Office by that King. 9. Nob, called 1 Sam. 22. 19. the Cit of the Priests, de∣stroyed by Saul, for the relief which Abimelech the high Priest had given to David; the A••k of the Lord then residing there. 10. Gilga••, upon the banks of Iordan, where Iosuah did first eat of the fruits of the Land, and kept his first Passeover; where he circumcised such of the People as were born during their wandring in the Wilderness; and nigh to which he set up twelve stones for a Memorial to posterity that the waters of Jordan did there divide themselves to give passage to the twelve Tribes of Israel; where Agag, King of the Amalekites, was hewen in peeces by Samuel, and where Samuel once every year administred Justice to the People. For being seated in the midst of the land of Israel betwixt North and South, and on the Eastside of the Countrey neer the banks of Iordan, it served very fitly for that purpose: as Mispah also did, which stood in the same distance in regard of the length of the land of Canaan, but situate towards the West Sea, neer the land of the Philistinis: used therefore enterchangeably for the ease of the people, 11. Bthel, at first called Luz, but took this new name in remembrance of the vision which Iacob saw here at his going towards Mesopotamia, as is said Gen. 28. 19. It signifieth the house of God, and was therefore chosen by Jeroboam, for the setting up of one of his Golden Calves; though thereby, (as the Prophet saith) he made it to be Beth-aver, the house of vanity, Osee 4. 15. and 10. 5. For then it was a part of the Kingdome of the Ten Tribe, and the Southern border of that Kingdome on the coasts of Ephraim: but taken from it by Abijah the King of Judah, and after that accounted as a member of his Kingdome till the destruction of it by the Chaldoeans. Called with the rest of those parts, in the time of the Maccabees by the of Aphoerema, which signifieth a thing taken away, because taken from the Ten Tribes, to which once it belonged, 1. Maccab. 11. 34. where it is said, to have been taken from the Countrey of Sa∣maria, and added unto the borders of Iudoea. 12. Ramath, another place there mentioned, and said to have been added to the Realm of Iudah, having been formerly the South border of the Kingdome of Israel, and therefore strongly fortified by Baoesha, in the time of Asa King of Iudah. 13. Chadid, or Hadid, one of the three Cities (the other two being 14. Lod, and 15. Ono) which were inhabited by the Fenja∣mites after the Captivity. Destroyed in the warres with the Kings of Syria, and afterwards rebuilt by Si∣m••n the Maccaboean.

But he chief glory of this Tribe, and of all the rest, and not so only, but of all the whole world be∣sides, was the famous City of Hurusalem: seated upon a rocky Mountain, every way to be ascended with steep and difficult ascents, (except towards the North;) environed on all other sides also with some neighbouring mountainets, as if placed in the middest of an Amphitheatre. It consisted in the time of its greatest flourish of four parts, separated by their several Walls, as if severall Cities; we may call them the Upper City, the Lower City, the New City, and the City of Herod: all of them but the Lower Ci∣ty seated upon their severall hills. Of these, that which we call the City of Herod, had formerly been beautified with the houses of many of the Prophets, as in our Saviours time with that of Mary the mother of John Mark, mentioned acts 15. 37. converted to a Church by the Primitive Christians: the We∣stern part whereof was wholly taken up by the Palace of Herod (a wicked but magnificent Prince) for cost excessive, and for strength invincible; containing gardens, groves, fish-ponds, places devised for plea∣sure, besides those for exercise. Fortified with three Towers at the Corners of it, that on the South-East of the wall, 50 Cubi••s high, of excellent workmanship, called Mariamnes Tower, in memory of his be∣loved but insolent wife, rashly murdered by him. Opposite to which on the South-West corner, stood the Tower of Phaseolus, so called by the name of his brother, 70 Cubits high, and in form resembling that so much celebrated Aegyptian Phtros; and on the North Wall on an high hill the Tower of Hippick, exceeding both the rest in height by 14 Cubits, and having on the top two Spires, in memory of the two Hipp••er, his very dear friends, slain in his service by the wars.

2. On the South-side stood that part which was called the Old City, possessed if not built by the Iebu∣〈◊〉〈◊〉, and therein both the Mountain and Fort of Sion; but after called the City of David, because taken by him, who thereon built a strong and magnificent Castle, the Royall Court and Mansion of the Kings succeding. In the West part hereof stood the Tower of David; a double Palace built by Herod, the one part whereof he named Agrippa, and the other Coesar, composed of Marble, and every where enterlaid with gold; and not far off the house of Annas and Caiaphas, to which the Conspirators led our Saviour to receive his tryall.

3. That which was called the Lower City, because it had more in it of the Valley, was also called the Daughter of Sion, because built after it, in majesty and greatness did exceed the Mother. For therein upon Mount Moriah stood the Temple of Solomon (whereof more anon,) and betwixt it and Mount Zion, on another hill, the Palace which he built for his Wife the Daughter of Aegypt, and that which he founded for himself, from which by an high Bridge he had a way unto the Temple. West hereof on a losty rock overlooking the City, stood the Royall Palace of the Princes of the Maccaboeans, re-edified and dwelt in by King Agripoa (though of Herod race,) and not far off the Theater of Herods building; adorned with admirall pictures, expressing the many victories and triumphs of Augustus Coesar. In this part also stood Mount A••ra, and on that once a Citadell built by Antiochus King of Syria, but razed by Simon, one of the Maccaboean Brothers, because it overtopped the Temple; the house of Helena Queen of Adiab••ne, who converted from Paganism to Indaism, had here her dwelling, and here died; and final∣ly

Herods Amphitheatre, capacious enough to contain 80000 people, whom he entertained sometime with such shews and spectacles as were in use amongst the Romans. And in this part also on an high and craggy rock, not far from the Temple, stood the Tower of Baris, whereon the same Herod built a strong and impregnable Citadell, in honour of Marc. Antonie, whose Creature he first was, called by the name of Antonius, having a fair and large Tower at every corner, two of them 50. Cubits high, and the other 70. afterwards garrisoned by the Romans, for fear the Jews presuming on the strengen of the Temple, might take occasion to rebel.

4. As for the New City, which lay North to the City of Herod, it was once a Suburb onely unto all the rest; inhabited by none but mechanicall persons, and the meanest trades-men; but after incompassed by Agrippa with a wall of 25 Cubits high, and fortified with ninety Turrets. The whole City fenced with a wonderfull circumvallation, on all parts thereof, having a Ditch cut out of the main Rock, as Iosephus an eye-witness writeth, sixty foot deep, and no less than two hundred and fifty foot in bredth. First built, say some, by Melghisedech the King of Salem; by the Jebusites themselves, say others: by whomsoever built, called at first Jebusalem, afterwards Jerusalem, with the change of one letter only; inlarged in time, when made the Royall seat of the house of David, to the Magnificence and greatness before described, •••• it attained unto the compass of sixty furlongs, or seven miles and an half. Unconquered for the first four hundred years after the entrance of the Children of Israel: and when David attempted it, the people presu∣med so much on the strength of the place, that they told him in the way of scorn, that the bl••nd and the lame which they had amongst them (as the Text is generally expounded) should defend it against him. But as I think, the late learned Mr. Gregory of Christ-church in Oxon, hath found out a more likely meaning of the Text than this, who telleth us, that the Jubesites by the blind and lame (as they knew well the Israeli••es called blind and lame) did understand those Tutelar Idols, on whose protection they relied (as the 〈◊〉〈◊〉 did on their Palladium) for defence thereof: and then the meaning must be this, those Gods whom you of Is∣rael call blind and lame, shall defend our Walls. Why else should David say (had they meant it lite∣rally) that his soul hated the lame and the blind? 2. Sam. 5. 8. or why should the People of Israel be so uncharitable, as to say that the blind and lame should not come into the House (or Temple of God) were it meant no otherwise? But notwithstanding these vain hopes, the Town was carried under the con∣duct of Joab, that fortunate and couragious leader, and made the Royal seat of the Kings of Judah.

Proceed we now unto the Temple built by Solomon, in providing the materials whereof there were in Lebanon 30000 workmen, which wrought by the ten thousand every moneth; 70000 Labourers which carried burdens; 80000 Quarry-men that hewed stones in the Mountains; and of Officers and Over∣seers of the work, no lesse then 3300 men. The description of this Stately Fabrick we have in the first of Kings, cap. 6. 7. In the year of the world 2350 it was destroyed by Nabuchadzezzar at the taking of Hierusalem: rebuilt again after the return from the Captivity; but with such opposition of the Sama∣ritans, that the Workmen were fain to hold their Tooles in one hand, and their swords in the other, to repulse, if need were, those malicious enemies. But yet this Temple was not answerable to the magnifi∣cence of the former; so that the Prophet Haggi had good occasion to say to the People, cap. 2. ver. 3. Who is l••ft among you that saw this house in her first glory? is it not in your eyes as nothing, in comparison of it? Nor fell it short thereof onely in the outward structure, but some inward Additaments. For it wanted, 1. The Pot of Mannah, which the Lord commanded Moses to lay up before the Testimony for a Memorial, Exod. 16. 32. &c. 2. The Rod of Aaron, which onely budded of all the Rods of the Princes of Israel, and was commanded to be kept before the (Ark of the) Testimony, for a token against Corah, Dathan, and Abiram, Num. 17. 10. 3. The Ark of the Covenant: the making whereof we have Exod. 25. 10. and the placing of it in the Oracle, or Sanctum Sanctorum, 1 King 6. 19. 4. The Two Tables of the Law, writ by Gods own finger, and by Moses laid up in the Ark of the Covenant, Exod. 40. 30. and Deut. 10. 5. And 5. The fire of Sacrifice, which came down from Heaven, mentioned Levit. 9. 24. 2 Chron. 17. 1. which by the Priest was to be kept continu∣ally burning, never to go out. This second Temple, partly because it was grown ruinous, partly because it seemed not magnificent enough, but principally to curry favour with the Jews, Herod the Asealonate pulled down, and set up another in the place; making it not much inferiour (if at all) unto that of Solo∣mon, but far superiour to the other: immensoe opulentioe Templum, as Tacitus most truly called it. And this was it to which our Saviour did sometimes vouchsafe his presence. But here we are to under∣stand, that by the Temple is not meant the Fabrick onely, or the house it self, but also all those several Courts with which encompassed, being four in number: That is to say, Atrium Sacerdotum, or the Priests Court, which was next unto the Temple, wherein stood the brazen Altar for the dayly sa∣crifice, and the Laver for the washing of the Priests and the Sacrifice also: into which Court might none enter but the Priest alone. 2. Then there was Atrium populi, or the Peoples Court, separated from the other by a wall of three Cubits height; to which the people did repair to perform their Sacrifices, to say their prayers, and to make payment of their vowes. In the middle of this Court, did Solomon maken a brazen Scaffold for the Kings his Successors, 2 Chron. 6. 13. and afterwards in imitation of his Porol built before the Temple, were many Porches built about it, for the people to repaire into in rainy weather, which gave to this whole Court the name of Solomons porch; whereof see John 10. 23. A •••• 3. 11. Without that stood 3. Atrium Foeminarum, or the Womens Court, divided from the other, as is collected out of 2 Chron. 20. 5. in the time of Iehosophat King of Iudah; in which stood their Trea∣sury, or poor-mans Box, mentioned in the one and twentieth Chapter of Saint Lukes Gospell, from whence this whole Court had sometimes the name of Treasury, as appeareth John 8. 20. where it is said, that these words spake JESUS in the Treasury, that is to say in the Womens Court, where

the Treafury or Alm-Box stood. Betwixt these last was an Ascent of fifteen steps, on which the Levites used to sing those 15. Psalmes which do immediately follow the hundred nineteenth Psalm, upon each step one; from whence they had the name of Psalmi Graduales, or Cantica graduum, i.e. the Psalms or Songs of degrees. And so farre all was counted holy Ground, upon which none might tread but ei∣ther natural Jews, or circumcised Proselytes, whom they called Proselytifoederis, as before was said; or such of the other Sex, (not natural Jewesses) who having received all outward initiations, had bound themselves unto the observation of the law of Moses. 4. So was it not with the fourth and last Court, called Atrium Gentium, or the Court of the Gentiles, designed for the use of those Gentiles whom they called Proselyti portoe, bound onely unto the keeping of the Precepts given the Sonnes of Noah. For in that, as unsanctified ground, (though counted part of the Temple also) did they permit a market of sheep and oxen, the sale of Doves and Pigeons, and the Tables of money-changets, for the oblations of the people: stabling the poor Gentiles amongst their Cattel, and ranking them with the worst of men. And out of this Temple, or Court of the Temple, did CHRIST our Saviour cast the buyers and eller••, and o∣verthrew the Tables of the money-changers, asserting it to its primitive and original use, which was to be an house of prayer for all the Nations. This last Court separated from the other by a wall of three Cu∣bits height, adorned with certain Pillars of equal distance, bearing this inscription, 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, i.e. Let no Alien (or one that is no lew) enter into the holy place, And to this wall it is that the Apostle alludeth, saying, He hath broken down the middle wall of partition between us (i.e. betwen the Iews and Gentiles) making one of twain, Ephes. 2. 14, 15. inferring hereupon that the Gentiles are no more strangers and forreiners, but fellow Citizens with the Saints, and of the houshold of God, v. 19.

But to go forwards with the Temple, having continued in the glories to which Herod brought it, not above 85 years, it was finally destroyed by Titus the sonne of Vespasian, in the 69. year after Christs nativity. At what time the Temple of Delphos was utterly overthrown by Earth-quakes and thunder-bolts from Heaven, neither of them ever-since repaired, though much endeavoured. The concurrence of which two miracles evidently sheweth that the time was then come in which God would put an end both to the Iewish Ceremonies, and Heathen Idolatries, that so the Kingdome of his sonne might be all in all. For this de∣struction of the Temple of Hierusalem I may call a miracle, in regard it was done against the command of Titus, who was not onely careful to preserve it, before his Souldiers had put fire to it, but did all that possibly might be to quench it. His reason was 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉; as Iosephus hath it, be∣cause the loss thereof would redound so highly to the prejudice of the Roman Empire, in being deprived of such a glorious and magnificent structure. But do he what he could with his utmost industry, there was no quenching of it till it was consumed. And it addes somewhat to the marvel, that this should happen on the tenth day of August, on which day, the first Temple had been burnt by Nabu••hadnozzar. And certainly it is worth the noting (I hope I shall not be accounted superstitious for this observation) to see how happy or unfortunate one and the same day hath been found unto divers persons. In the wars be∣twixt the French and the Spaniards for the Realm of Naples, Friday was observed to be very lucky to that great Captain Consalvo; he having on that day given the French many notable overthrows. Wednesday is said to have been fortunate to Pope Sixtus the fift; for on that day was he born, on the same made a Monk; on that day created Generall of his Order; on the same made Cardinal, then chosen to be Pope, and finally on the same inaugurated. To Henry the seventh of England Saturday was observed to be ve∣ry fortunate in all his actions, as was the 24. of February unto Charles the fift, on what day soever: for on that he came into the world, & in that he took K. Francis Prisoner at the battel of Pav••e, and on the same received the Imperial Crown. But to return unto the Temple, we find that on the Sabbath or Saturday it was taken by Pampey, on the same by Herod, and on that also by Titus.

But goe we forwards to Hierusalem as now it standeth, it lay in rubbish and unbuilt (after the destru∣ction of it by Titus) till repaired by Adrian: and then the Temple not so much as thought of, till out of an ungodly policy, in the Reign of Julian that Politick Enemy of the Church; who to diminish the infi∣nite number of Christians by the increase of the Jews: began again to build this Temple. But no sooner were the foundations laid, but a terrible Earth-quake cast them up again, and fire from Heaven consumed the Tools of the Workmen, together with the Stones, Timber, and other materials. As for the City it self, after the desolation in it which was made by Titus, it was re-edified by the Emperour Aelius Adria∣nus, who named it Aelia, drave thence the Jews, and gave it to the Christians. But this new City was not built in the place of the old. For within this Mount Calvary is comprehended, which was not in the Old before: As on the other side a great part of Mount Sion, part of the City of Herod, and the Soyl where the New City stood, are left out of this: the ruines of the other still remaining visible, to shew the antient greatness and magnificence of it. To look upon it then as it stands at present, it is now onely famous for the Temple of the Sepulchre, built by Helena (whom most report to have been daughter to Corlus a British King) Mother to Constantine the great. Much a doe had the good Lady to find the place where the LORDS body had been laid: for the Jews and Heathens had raised great hillocks on the place; and built there a Temple of Venus. This Temple being plucked down, and the earth d••gged away, she found the three Crosses, whereon our blessed Saviour, and the two Theeves had suffered. To know which of these was the right Cross, they were all carried to a woman, who had been long visited with sick∣ness, and now lay at the point of death. The Crosses of the two Theeves did the weak woman no good: but as soon as they laid on her the Cross on which the Lord died, she leaped up and was restored to her for∣mer health. This Temple of the Sepu••chre, even at the first building, was highly reverenced and esteemed by the Christians of these parts: and even untill our daies, it is much resorted to, both by Pilgrims from

all the parts of the Romish Church, who fondly and superstitiously hope to merit by their journey: and al∣so by divers Gentlemen of the reformed Churches, who travell hitherward; partly for curiosity, partly for love to the antiquity of the place, and partly because their generous spirits imitate the heaven and delight in motion. Whosoever is admitted to the sight of this Sepulchre, payeth nine crowns to the Turkish Officers: so that this ••ribute onely is worth to the Grand Signeur, eighty thousand Duckats yearly. The other building generally very mean and poor, if not contemptible. Built of flint stones, Low, and but one rock high; flat on the tops for men to walk on, and fenced with battlements of a yard in hight to preserve them from falling; the under-rooms no better than vaults, where they repose themselves in the heat of the day.

Some houses neer the Temple of Solomon, and the Palace of Herod, adorned with Arches toward the Street, where the passenger may walk dry in a showr of rain; but not many such: nor any thing but the ruins left of the antient buildings. The whole circuit of it reduced to two or three miles: and yet to those which take a survey thereof from some hills adjoining, where the ruines are not well discerned from the standing edifices, it affordeth to the eye no unpleasing prospect. And as the place is, such is the people, in∣habited for the most part by Artizans of the meanest quality, gathered together of the scumme of divers Na∣tions: the greatest part consisting of Moores, and Arabians; a few poor Christians, of all the Orientall Sects, which dwell there for devotion, and some Turks, who for the profit which they make of Christi∣ans, are content to stay in it. Insomuch that when Robert Duke of Normandy, being then not cured of his wounds, and was carried into this City on the backs of some of this rascal people, he called to a Gen∣tleman of his, who was going for England, and bad him say, that he saw Duke Robert carried into Hea∣ven on the backs of devils.

Come we now to the Tribe of LEVI, though indeed not reckoned for a Tribe, because not planted close together as the other were, nor had whole Provinces to themselves, but mingled and dispersed amongst the rest of the people, having forty eight Cities assigned them for their habitation, proportionably taken out of the other Tribes. So was it ordered by the Lord, partly that they being set apart for his Service, might be at hand in every place to instruct the People; and partly to fulfill the Prophecy which he had spoken by Jacob, who had fore-signified to Levi at the time of his death, that he should be divided in Jacob, and scattered in Israel. The like fortune he had prophesied of Simeon also; of the accomplishment whereof, so far as it refered to him, and the dispersion of his Tribe, we have spoken before. Now to make up the number of the twelve Tribes, Joseph was divided into Ephraim, and Manasses; and the Levites were reckoned to belong unto that Tribe, within whose territorie, that City which they dwelt in, stood. Their maintenance was from the tenths or tithes, the first fruits, offerings, and Sacrifices of the People: and as it is in the eighteenth of Joshua, v. the seventeenth, The Priesthood of the Lord was their inheritance. There were of them four kinds. 1. Punies or Tirones, which from their childhood, till the five and twentieth year of their age, learned the duty of their offices. 2. Graduates, 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, which having spent four years in the study of the Law, were able to answer and oppose in it. 3. Licenciates, 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, which did actually exercise the Priestly function. And 4. Doctors (Rabbins they use to call them) who were the highest in degree. For maintenance of whom they had (as before is said) the Tithes, first fruits, and offerings of all the rest of the People; besides the 48 Cities assigned for their habitation: which last, with the severall territories appertaining to them, extending every way for the space of two thousand Cubits, seems to have been a greater proportion of it self, than any of the other Tribes (with reference to the small number of the Levites) had in their possessions. Then for the Tithes, there was not onely a full tenth set out of all kinds of increase, but such an imposition laid upon all sorts of grain, as came to more than a sixt part of the Crop it self. For first, out of six thousand bushels (and so accordingly in all after that proportion) a sixtieth part at least, (and that they termed the Therumah of the evil eye, or the niggards first fruits) was to be set forth as the first fruits of the threshing floor, which was an hundred in the totall. Out of the residue, being five thousand and nine hundred Bushels, the first Tith paid unto the Levites came to five hundred and ninety Bushels: and of the residue, being five thousand three hundred and thirty Bushels, five hundred thirty and one were paid for the second Tithe unto the Priest which ministred in the holy Temple: yet so, that such as would decline the trouble of carrying it in hand unto Hierusalem, must pay the price thereof at the Priest's own estimate. Laying which severall summes together, it appears demonstrably, that of six thousand Bushels (& fic de cateris) there will accrew one thousand two hundred seventy and one Bushels to the Priests and Levites; and but four thousand seven hundred seventy and nine to the Lord or Tenant; which is not fully a sixt part, as was said before. Then had they the first born of mankind and all unclean Beasts, redeemed at a certain rate; the first fruits of Wine, Oyl, and wool; the first fruits of the dough, and of the firstlings of clean Beasts (their bloud being sprinkled on the Altar, and the fat offe∣red for a burnt offering) the flesh remained unto the Priest. They had also the meat-offerings, the sinne∣offerings, the trespass-offerings, the shake-offerings, the heave-offerings, and the Shew-bread: as also of all Eucharisticall Sacrifices the breast and the shoulder; of others the shoulder, the two cheeks, and the maw; and of the whole burnt-offering they received the skin; besides the free-gifts of the people appearing thrice yearly before the Lord; and all this brought in unto them without charge or trouble. Which makes it e∣vident that they were farre moore liberally provided for than the rest of the Tribes; though they had no whole Countrey allotted to them, as the others had. And so much for such parts of the Land of Palestine as were possessed in part or wholly, by the Sons of Jacob: proceed we now to the Inheritance of the Sons of Esau.

IDVMAEA.

IDVMAEA, or the Land of EDOM, is bounded on the East and South, with Arabia Petraea; on the North, with Judaea; and on the West, with the Mediterranean Sea. So called from the Edomites, or Children of Esau, whose name is Edom, Gen. 36. 1. the Father of the Edomites, v. 43. by whom it was planted and possessed: or as others say from the Idumai, a people of Arabia, who in a mutiny being forced to forsake their Countrey, came and setled here. The first the more certain of the two, and therefore I adhere to that.

The Countrey towards the Seaside very fat and fruitful; but where it bendeth towards Arabia, exceed∣ing mountainous and barren. Heretofore it afforded Balm, not now: but still it hath some store of Palm∣trees, for which much celebrated by some writers of antient times, as Arbusto Palmarum dives Idu••••e, in the Poet Lucan. Sandy and full of vast desarts, for which, and for the want of water, it is thought un∣conquerable. For though they have many wells there for the use of the natives, yet to them only are they known, not obvious at all to the eyes of strangers, no not upon the strictest search that can be imagined. But all places are not so well furnished, as appeareth by the sad condition which the Kings of Iudah, Is∣rael, and Edom were fallen into, when they led their Armies thorough the desarts of this Countrey against the Moabite, finding herein no water for man or beast: insomuch that the King of Israel said, Alas that the Lord hath called these three Kings together to deliver them into the hand of Moab, 2 Kings 3. 10. Not otherwise delivered out of this perplexity, but by a miracle from Heaven: God sending them the next day an abundance of water, without wind or rain, or any other visible means, ver. 17, 20.

The people antiently rude and barbarous, greedy of change in government, easily stirred to insurrections, and in love with tumults. Professed enemies to the lews, till conquered by them: and when compelled by Hyrcanus to the lewish Religion, they were at the best but false friends, and in the siege of Hierusalem by Titus, did them more mischief than the Romans. At this time subject to the Turk, and differ not much in life and custome from the wild Arabians.

Rivers of note there can be none, where so little waters. One Lake it hath, though possibly it had been better had they been without it, now small, and every day growing less; the passage being long since bared which it had to the Sea. Antiently, though then narrow, it was two hundred surlongs, or five and twenty miles long; bordered on each side by hills of Sand, which born by the winds into the water did so thicken the same, that it was not easie to be discerned from the dry land; insomuch as whole Armies have been swallowed up in it. Thence called Barathrum by the Latines; The true name of it formerly was the lake of Sirbon. By the Italians it is now called Lago di Teveso, by the Natives Bayrema, the utmost bound of Palestine where it joineth on Aegypt.

The Chief mountains of it, are, 1. Mount Seir, the first habitation of Esau, after he left his dwelling in the Land of Canaan to make room for Iacob, as is said Gen. 36. 7, 8. Not called so unless by An∣ticipation (a thing not unusuall in the Scriptures) till the coming of Esau thither; the word Seir signifying ba••ry or brisled, such as Esau is described to be, Gen. 27. 11. To this St. Hierome doth accord, deriving the name of Seir from Esau, Sumpto ab autore nomine. His reason is, Seir quippe interpretatur Hispidus & pilosus qua'is Esau fuit. So he in his Comment on Esaiah, cap. 21. For the same cause, is the whole Countrey of Edom, sometimes called Mount Seir, in Scripture, by the name of this Mountain, as 2 Chron. 20. 10, 23. The 2. hill of note is that called Cassius, not far from the Lake of Sirbon, now nothing but an huge heap of sand, formerly famous for a Temple of Iupiter, and the Sepulchre of Pom∣pey the Great. Who being basely murdered here (after his defeat neer Pharsalia by Iulius Caesar) by the command of Ptolomy the younger, King of Aegypt, unto whom he fled (or rather by the command of A∣chillus who then governed his Counsails) by the piety of a private Souldier was here interred in an obscure and homely, but honest Sepulchre. The Sepulchre afterwards re-edified and made more suitable to the man, by the Emperour Adrian. The piety of the Souldier not a whit the less for the cost of the Empe∣rour; in whose name Lucan had bestowed this Epitaph on that first Monument.

Hic situs est Magnus, placet hoc Fortuna Sepulchrum Dicere Pompeii, quo condi malluit illum, Quam terra carnisse Socer.

Which may be Englished to this purpose.

Here Magnus lies, Such, Fortune, is thy doom That this vile earth should be great Pompeys Tomb. In which even Caesars self would rather have His Son-in-Law interr'd, than want a grave.

Places of most consideration in it, 1. Dinhahah, the City of Bela, the first King of Edom. 2. A∣nith, the City of Had••d, and 3. Pan, the City of Hadar, two others of the Kings hereof: which three are mentioned Gen. 36. 32. 35. 39. 4. Berzamna, placed here by Ptolomy, supposed to be the same with Bershabee in the Tribe of Simeon, the utmost border South-wards of the Land of Canaan: of which more there. 5. Caparorsa. 6. Gammararis, and 7. Elasa, all of them mentioned by Ptolomy, which sheweth them to be of some consideration in those times; though now forgotten with the former. 8. Anthedon, on the South-side of the River Besor, opposite to Gaza in the Tribe of Simeon, which is situate on the Northern bank. A port Town, once of good repute, till defaced by Alexander King of the lewes: re-edified afterwards by Herod the Great, and named Agr••ppias, in honour of Agrippa the favorite and Sonne-in-Law of Augustus Caesar. 9. Raphia, memorable for the great defeat which

Ptolomy Philopater there gave unto Antiochus surnamed Magnus. 10. Rhinocurura, so called from a mishap which befel the Inhabitants hereof, by mangling and defacing their noses. By Plinie and S••rab•• called Rhinocurula; and at this day Pharamica. Memorable for an old but ill-grounded tradition, that here the world was divided by lots, betwixt the posterity of Noah: and so considerable in the warres of the holy land, that it was strongly fortified by Baldwin the first, to obstruct the passage of such forces as usually came out on Egypt to aid the Turks. 11. Ostracine, now Stragion••; on the Sea-side beneath Anthedon, and in that part of the Countrey which from Mount Casius hath the name of Casiotus: ascrib∣ed by Ptolomy to Egypt; but being they are both on the North of the Lake of Sirbon, more properly be∣longing to Palestina. But most of these being now buried in their ruines, there are left none but a few Castles and scattered villages: the villages inhabited for the most part by Arabians, the Castles garrison∣ed by Turks. The chief of which lying on the Sea in the road to Egypt, are 12. Hamones, a small Ca∣stle not farre from Gaza, used chiefly for a Toll-booth, to receive custome of such Merchants as pass that way. 13. Harissa, a small Castle also, serving specially for the same use, but stronger and of more im∣portance because neer the Sea; from which not above two miles distant; and for that cause garrisoned with a hundred Souldiers: environed with a few houses, by reason of the commodity of the water, which is sweet and wholesome; else little better than a Desart. 14. Catio, an other Castle, or rather Toll∣booth, with a garrison of about 60 Souldiers in it: seated in a place so desert and unfruitful, that nothing vegetable groweth in it, but a few starved Palm-trees; The water which they have there so bad and brackish, though esteemed good enough for the common Souldiers, that all which the Captain drinketh is brought from 15. Tina, a Town upon the Sea-shore, about twelve miles distant, and the last upon this coast towards Egypt.

The first Inhabitants of this Countrey were the Horites, the Horites which dwelt in Mount Seir, as we reade in Gen. cap. 14, v. 6. that is to say, which dwelt in that hilly Countrey which after∣wards was called Mount Seir. But whether it were so called from Esaus dwelling here, as is said before, or from Seir the Horite, mentioned Gen. 36. 20. as perhaps may probably be supposed, need not now come into dispute. Broken by Cherdolaomer and his Associates, they were the more easily subdued by Esau. Who leaving the land of Canaan to his brother Iacob, Gen. 36. 7, 8. because those parts in which they dwelt did not afford them room enough for their several Cattel, came into this Countrey, and having destroyed the Horites from before them, succeeded in their habitations, and dwelt there in their stead ••∣venunto this day, Deut. 2. 22. Tis true, we find Esau in Mount Seir, before this remove: for it is said, that Iacob at his first coming out of Mesopotamia, sent messengers before him to Esau his brother, unto the Land of Seir, the Countrey of Edom, Gen. 32. 3. And hence a question hath been moved, how Esau dwelling there before Jacobs coming, can be said to remove thither to make room for him. To this Sir Walter Ra egh and some others answer, that at the time when Jacob came out of Padan-Aram, Esau dwelt in those parts of the Mountains which lie on the East of Jordan, called afterwards Galaad and Mount Hermon, by which Jacob must needs passe in his way to Canaan; which Mountains then were called by the name of Seir, and from thence Syrion by the Zidonians or Phoenicians in the ages follow∣ing: from whence driven by the Amorites at such time as they vanquished those of Moab and Ammon, they were forced to seat themselves on the South of Canaan, where Moses found them. But with this I am by no means satisfied. For besides that it maketh Esau to carry a Mount Sier with him, wheresoever he went; it doth expressely differ from the plain words of Scripture, both in the occasion and the time of his setling there: the victories which the Amorites had over the Ammonites and Moabites, being then fresh and newly gotten when Moses with the children of Israel came into these parts, which was at the least 200. years after Esau did withdraw himself to the land of Edom. And therefore I should rather think, that Esau finding himself distasted by his Father and Mother, in regard of his Canaanitish mariages, and the hatred which he bare to Jacob, departed from them, and so journed in the South parts amongst the Horites of Moun Seir; that thither Jacob sent his messengers to make peace between them; that the re∣conciliation being made, Esau returned unto the place where before he sojourned; and having brought thence his children, cattel, and the rest of his substance, fixed himself again neer the house of his Fathers; and finally, that on Isaacs death, finding his family increased, his heards of flocks augmented, and the rest of his substance also doubled by the death of his father; he thought it fit also to enlarge his dwelling, and so removed back once more to Edom. A thing not needful to be done had he dwelt in Galaad, H••rmon, or any other part of that Mountainous Tract: considering the great distance betwixt those Mountaines and the City of Hebron in which Isaac dwelt, nigh to which Iacob also had set up his dwelling.

But on what ground soever Esau left the possession of the land of Canaan to his brother Iacob, certain it is, he did it not without some strong impulsions from the spirit of God, by whom the possession of that Land was desigued for Iacob; to whom the blessing & the birth-right had been both preferred. And though Esau over-ruled by Almighty God, seemed to have forgotten all displeasure against his brother: yet the quarrel began by them in the womb of Rebecca, brake out more violently in the times of their posterity. Insomuch that Moses could by no means obtain a passage thorow Edom into the Promised Land, though he sought it by a fair ad∣dress, and pressed it by all those motives and inducements which a wise and understanding man could have set before them. For though the King of Edom then being, seemed to pretend nothing but the safety of him∣self and his people, both which he might have hazarded (in all humane Reason) by opening the closures of his Mountains, and letting in a Nation mightier than his own: yet it is possible there might be as much of stomach as worldly policy, and that aswell the buying of the birth-right for so sleight a trifle, as the getting of the blessing by such fraudulent means, might not be forgotten. Forhe not onely denyed them passage

and sent back word expressely they should not go thorow, but came against them with much people and a strong band, as is said Numbers 20. 20. But the Edomites could not for all this prevent their destiny' or make the word of God to be ineffectuall, by which it had been signified, when they were yet in their mothers womb, that the elder should serve the younger. Not verified in Esaus person, for Iacob called him his Lord Esau, professed himself to be his Servant, and willingly submitted to his superierity; but in the issues of them both: then specially when David had subdued the Edomites, and made them Homa∣gers and Vassals to the Crown of Judah, 2 Sam. 8. 14. Nor is less intimated in those words of the 60 Psalm, where it is said, Over Edom will I cast my shooe; it being a custome of old times to fling their shooes upon a Countrey conquered or designed for conquest. Pro ectio calceamenti super Regionem ali∣quam denotat subiicere, as my Author hath it. And in allusion unto this, there is a story in the Chroni∣cles of the Kings of Man, how Magnus King of the Isles sent his Ambassadours to Murchard a King in Ireland, commanding him on the next Christmas day to carry openly the shooes of King Magnus upon his shoulders, in testimony, saith the story, that he was his Vassal. The casting of the Shooe on a conquer∣ed Countrey, or the treading of it under feet, another ceremony of this nature mentioned Deut. 33. 29. do come both to one, and signifie that vassallage or bondage, which such a captivated Country was reduced unto.

But on the other side, there was another part of the heavenly Oracle, which made for Edom: Isaac had signified to Esau, that though the blessing given to Jacob could not be revoked, and that he must content himself with being a servant to his brother for a certain in season: yet there should one day come a time in which he should not onely break that yoke from off his neck, but obtain the dominion over him, Gen. 27. 40. The first part verified, when the Edomites revolted from the Kings of Judah in the time of Joram, or Jehoram the Sonne of Jehosophat: and instead of a Vice-Roy sent unto them from the Court of Hieru∣salem, set up a King of their own Nation; never returning after that to the house of David. For though foram made war presently upon them, and got the victory, yet he did not prosecute it unto any effect, nor beat them out of any of their strong holds, nor reduce any of their Cities unto his obedience: as if he had got honour enough in the eye of the world by being master of the Field; or shewing his abilities in com∣mand of a greater Army than the Edomites could bring against him. The like errour was committed also by Amaziah, who by a vast Army of 300000 fighting men, did no greater wonders, than the killing of 10000, and the taking of as many Edomites; but neither left garrisons in any of their defensible places, nor reduced any part of their Countrey under his obedience. And for the later part thereof, it was as punctu∣ally fulfilled in the time of Antipater an Idumaean, Herod the Ascalonite his Sonne, and their Succes∣sors, who in the decrepit age of the house of Iacob, became Kings of the Iews, and lorded over them with insolence and contempt enough.

Mean time to look upon the intermediate passages of their State and story, it seemeth that at the first they were governed by Dukes, each having the command of those severall families of which they were the heads or Princes. But as ambition and power did prevail among them, the most potent having vanquished or awed the rest, took to himself the name of King: which by the names of their Fathers, and their several Ci∣ties in which they reigned, seem to have been chosen by election, or otherwise to come in by strong hand, as the sword could carry it. The names of which are thus set down in the book of Genesis.

The Kings of Edom.

• 1. Bela, the Sonne of Beor.
• 2. Iobab, the Sonne of Zerah.
• 3. Hasham, of the Land of Temani.
• 4. Hadad, the Sonne of Bedad, who warred against the Midianites, and vanquished them in the fields of Moab, Gen. 36. 35.
• 5. Samlah, of Masrekah.
• 6. Saul, of Rehoboth by the River Euphrates.
• 7. Baal-Hanan, the Sonne of Achbor.
• 8. Hadar, the Sonne perhaps of Baal-Hanan, for I find no mention of his Father. After whose death, the heads of the severall Families resumed the Government again, ruling over their own Tribes, without any one Soveraign or Supreme. And all these Kings they had before there reigned any King in Israel, Gen. 36. 31. that is to say, before any form of Supreme Government was established amongst them in the per∣son of Moses, called by the name of a King in the book of Deut. chap. 35. v. 5. But this distracted Government did not long continue, the Edomites being under a King again, at such time as the Children of Israel came out of Egypt: for it was unto the King of Edom that Moses sent Messengers from Kadesh to desire a passage thorow his Countrey. Which being denied, and the Edomites in Armes to defend their passes, Moses forbore to force his way, though the neerest for him, partly because he had no mind to spend those forces in fighting with hills and desarts, which were designed for the conquest of another Coun∣trey; but principally because God commanded him not to medle with them, or to take so much as a foot of their Countrey from them, Deut. 2. 5. But David, upon whom lay no such obligation, having vanquished the Syrians and other Nations round about him, followed his fortunes unto Edom, whom he overcame, and put Garrisons into all their Cities, and the Edomites became his servants. Governed from thenceforth by a Deputy or Vice-Roy (as is said before) till the time of Joram the Son of Jehoso∣phat King of Judah; in whose Reign they revolted as before was said. Never regained to that Crown, and but twice endeavoured, that so the word of God might be all in all. Onely the Simeonites in the reign of Hezekiah, wanting pasture for their cattel, and room for themselves, seized on the parts which lay neerest to them, destroyed the inhabitants thereof, and dwelt in their habitations, because there was pasture for their flocks, 1. Chron. 4. 39. Provoked wherewith, and with the natural Antipathy which

• was between them. No people were more mischievously bent against Judah, than these Edomites were: no men so forward of themselves to assist Nabuchadonosor against Hierusalem; none that so vehemently cry∣ed Down with it down unto the ground; none half so ready to set fire to the holy Temple. But they got little by this service to the Babylonians, their own thraldome following close upon that of Judah: with whom made fellow-subjects to the Chaldaeans, as afterwards to the Persians, and Kings of Syria of the race of Seleucus. In the declining of that house, subdued by Hyrcanus the Son of Simon, the fourth of the Maccabaean Princes; by whom they were compelled to be Circumcised, and to receive the Law of Moses: not onely reckoned after that, as a Province of the Jewish Kingdome, but as naturall Jews. Which notwithstanding, and that the setting of that Crown on the head of Herod and his house, being originally I∣dumaenus, might in all reason have extinguished their inveterate malice: yet was their hatred of that Nation as great as ever. Forgetting therefore how they had been rewatded by the Babylonians, they would needs aid the Romans against them also: putting themselves into Hierusalem, when besieged by Titus, onely of pur∣pose to betray it; joyning with the seditious there, doing more mischief in the City than the enemy had done without; and finally, setting fire to the second Temple, as they had done unto the first. Subjected after∣wards by the Romans, they followed the same fortune with the rest of Palestine.

Having thus gon through with the story of those neighbouring Nations which encompassed Canaan: it will be seasonable to look on the affairs of the Canaanites first, and after of the house of Jacob who possessed their Countrey. First for the Canaanites, they descended from Canaan the son of Cham, who with his eleven sons were here setled immediatly after the confusion at Babel. Of those twelve (taking in the Father) five plan∣ted in Phoenicia, and the coasts of Syria, that is to say, Sidon, Harki, Arvadi, Semari, and Hamathi: the other seven in those parts which we now call Palestine, though not all of that, the Edomites, Moabites, Midianites, Ammonites, and Ituraeans, being Occupants or Tenants with them. And of those seven came those seven Nations, which by Gods appointment were totally to be rooted out, viz. the Canaanites, the Amorites, the Hittites, the Iebusites, the Hivites, the Gergeshites, and the Perizites. But from which of the sons of Canaan these last descended, is not yet agreed on, unless perhaps they were descended of the Si∣nites (not otherwise reckoned in this muster) and got the name of Perizites, on some new occasion. Go∣verned at first by the Chiefest of their severall Families, with the names of Kings; the number of which in∣creased as their Families were subdivided into smaller branches: insomuch as Iosuah found 31 Kings of the Cannanites onely, besides what might descend from those who were setled in Phoenicia and the borders of Syria. The most potent of those Nations were the Amorites, the Iebusites, and the Chanaanites proper∣ly so called. Of which the Amorites had not onely inlarged their borders beyond Iordan, but in the reigns of Og and Sihon, ruling at the same time in their severall parts, had thrust the Ituraeans, Ammonites and Moabites, out of most of their Countries: and so restored the same again to the race of the Emmims and Zanzummims (of which they were) who had been dispossessed thereof by the Sons of Lot. These van∣quished in the time of Moses, and their habitations assigned over to the Tribes of Reuben, Gad, and the one half-tribe of Manasses. The Canaanites properly so called, as they were the first which fought with the house of Iacob; so they were the last of all these people that contended with them. They first fought with them under the conduct of Arad their King, who thinking it more safe and prudent to encounter the Enemy in an other mans Countrey, than to expect them in his own; gave battell unto Moses in the Desarts of Mo∣ab: and having cut off some of the out-parts of his Army, and taken a few Prisoners, he went home again. But Iabin, under whom they made their second onset, went to work more resolutely; and taking a time when the iniquities of that People cried loud for vengeance, so prevailed against them, that he tyrannized over them for the space of 20 years. After which time, his Army being discomfited by Bara••, in the time of Debora; Sisera, his great Captain, slain by Iael the wife of Heber the Kenite; and most of his Cities taken and pos∣sessed by the Israelites; he perished himself in the close of that war; for it is said that they prevailed against Iabin the King of Canaan, till they had destroyed him, Judg. 4. 24. As for the Iebusites, they were grown so formidable (at the time of the comming of the Hebrews) to the rest of their neighbours, that their King Adonibezek bragged that he had cut off the thumbs and great toes of 70 Kings, and made them eat the crums which fell under his table. But being vanquished by Iudah, he was served in the same kind himself by Iudah and Simeon, and carried to Hicrusalem, where he died: the whole Countrey of the Iebusites, and the City of Hierusalem it self, the fortress of Mount Zion excepted onely, being made a prey unto the Vi∣ctor. And though the Iebusites held that fortess till the time of David, yet being they were onely on the defensive side, and made no open war against those of Israel, I reckon the Canaanites as the last which did contend with them for the chief command.

The Canaanites thus conquered, and for the most part worn out of the Countrey, the Israelites succeeded in their possessions; according to the promise of God made to Abraham, renewed to Isaac, and confirmed to Iacob. Governed, after the death of Moses and Josuah, by the Congregation of the Elders, as appears by many passages in the book of Iudg. the Iudges (as the Scripture calleth them) not being the ordinary Magi∣strates, but raised up occasionally by God for some speciall purpose, according to the exigence of their affairs. Carrying in this a likeness unto the Dictators in the State of Rome. So that the Government at the first was an Aristocratie; though to say truth, it rather was a Theocratie, as the Fathers call it, that is to say, a government wherein GOD presided more immediatly than in other Nations. And thereupon when the People cried out to Samuel to have a King, God said unto him, Hearken unto the voice of the people, for they have not rejected thee, but they have rejected me that I should not reign over them, 1 Samuel 8. 7. God was their King, and he had mightily reigned over them since they came out of Egypt; but they desired to have a King like to other Nations, to go in and out before them, and to fight their battels: a King whom they might see with their bodily eyes, and converse with him in such manner as the people did, which dwelt round about them. And so came in the Monarchy or Kingly Government, be∣gun

in Saul, but confirmed in David; the first a Benjamite, the second of the Tribe of Judah; of which Jacob had fore-told at the time of his death, that the Kingdome of his People should be vested in it. But there were onely three in all, reckoning Saul for one, who had Dominion over the whole house of Israel; the Kingdome after Solomons death being rent in twain; ten of the twelve Tribes revolting unto Jeroboam the Sonne of Nebat; and only Benjamin and Judah, and so much of the Tribes of Dan and Sime••n, as lay intermingled with and in the Tribe of Judah, remaining firm to Reholoam the Son of Solomon, who misguided by some evil Counsellers which were about him, had given occasion to the breach. A breach that never could be soldered or made up again; notwithstanding the fair opportunities which were after offered, of uniting Judah unto Israel (for so the two Kingdomes were distinguished) in the time of Joas; and rejoining Israel to Judah, in the time of Asa. The opportunity offered to Asa King of Iu∣dah for regaining the revolted Tribes, was the confusions which in his time had fallen out amongst them by severall factions, each challenging the privilege of making a King unto it self: Nadab the Sonne of 〈◊〉〈◊〉 being slain by Baasha, Ela the sonne of Baasha murdered by Zimri, Zimri deposed by O•••• the Father of Ahab, and Tobni a competitor against Omri also. During which time, as the people must needs suffer many great oppressions, which might make them think of their allegeance to the house of Da∣vid: so could not Asa have wanted many fair advantages (had he made his best use of them) of working on the divided Kingdome, and reducing it back unto his house. But there were two reasons which prevailed more against this re-union, than any that could be presented to invite them to it. First the imperiousness and arbitrary government of the Kings of Iudah, putting to death without formality of law, those that had displeased them; as in the case of Shimei, Ioab, and Adonijah, in the daies of Solomon: and raising on the Subject what sums they pleased, though more for ostentation of their own magnificence, than the necessities of the State. Of which exactions Rehoboam the Sonne of Solomon was so far from promising a release, or some mitigation at the least, that he threatned to make them more than double what they had been formerly: and how knew they, but that Asa, and all such as descended from him, might be of the same temper also, and act according to those Principles which their Fathers left them. Whereas the Kings of Israel holding by no other title than the love of their people, and the moderate and regular form of their government over them, had put their mouthes in such a tast of the sweets of liberty, and made them so much masters of their own both lives and fortunes; that Naboth durst deny his vine-yard to Ahab, though offering full compensation for it; and Ahab durst not question the life of Naboth, but by suborning witnesses to accuse him of blasphemie. So that the present confusions under which they suffered by the change and violent death of so many Kings one after another, being only temporary, and not likely to con∣tinue long; were no perswasions unto them to accept of Asa, and much less to offer themselves unto him; who conceived all adversity to be far more tolerable than the weighty Scepter of that house. And there was something also of present profit which swaied the business. The people were obliged by the Law of Moses to make three chargeable journeys yearly to Hierusalem, to worship there in the Holy Temple; and to pay a double tenth yearly out of their estates (besides offerings and other casualties) to the Priests and Levites. Jeroboam out of an ungodly policie, fearing these frequent journeys unto Hierusalem might be an occasion of reducing them to the house of David, released them of that charge and trouble, by set∣ting up a new form of worship, erecting golden Calves for them in Dan and Bethel, and leaving every man unto the liberty of his own opinion, so it tended not to the establishment of the old Religion. And on the other side the Levites which dwelt amongst them, and received their Tithes, not willing to conform to these new impieties, and finding that their Ministery was no longer useful, withdrew themselves into the Kingdome of Judah, and left the antient places of their habitations: by means whereof, the people were released of those payments also. If they returned again to their old obedience, and accepted Asa for their King, they must return again also to their old Religion; the golden Calves of their own imaginations and inventions must no more be worshipped: and (which no doubt prevailed most on the common people, who like that Religion best which costs them nothing) the antient payments to the Priests and Levites must come up again. Rather than so, they were resolved to suffer yet a little longer, to please themselves in expectation of more settled times: and so no falling off to Asa, though as moderate and religious a Prince as they could have wished for, had they had power of fashioning a King to their own desires. Now as this opportunity of rejoining Israel unto Judah, proved unsuccesful unto Asa, so did the like of uniting Ju∣d••th unto Israel prove as unprofitable unto Joas the Sonne of Jehoahaz and grand-child of Iehu King of Is∣rael, who being provoked by Amaziah King of Iudah made warre upon him; and not onely discomfited him without battell, and took him prisoner without blowes, but led him captive to the very walls of Hie∣rusalem, and by his authority got the gates thereof to be opened to him. But not contented with this honor, (greater than ever had befallen to the Kings of Israel) he caused 400 Cubits of the wall to be broken down, thorow which breach he entered triumphantly in his chariot, carrying the unhappy Prince before him: and be∣ing entered, sacked both the Royal palace, and the holy Temple. This was the opportunity which was given to Ioas of uniting Iudah unto Israel; and this the loss of it. For the people, otherwise like enough to have accepted him for their King, as a Prince of whose noble Acts they had heard much speech; were so exas∣perated by these rash and unseasonable out-rages, that they looked upon him as a Sacrilegious Church-Rob∣ber, whom the Holy Altars were not safe from; and as a covetous and ungoverned Tyrant, not able to concoct the fulness of his own prosperities. If he were thus unfatiable in his covetousness, and insup∣portable in his pride, when he was a Candidate for their Kingdome: when in all common prudence he should have sought their loves, and insinuated into their good opinions, by easing them of former taxes, and shewing them fair hopes of his moderate government: what must they look for when their towns were fill'd with garri∣sons, Hierusalem stuffed with armed troops; & all the Princes of the house of David, from whom they might

Redemption from cruel bondage, destroyed or banished, or otherwise made unable to afford them sue∣cours? Rather than so, they were resolved to rise as one man against him, and let him see, that neither their Army was so scattered, nor themselves so cowed, but that they durst adventure it to a farther trial. The fear of which made 〈◊〉〈◊〉 sensible of the loss of his opportunity: and so content with hostages for his safe retreat, he returned home again without other benefit of his victory, than the spoil and honour. And that this possibly might be the motive of his going back, without putting the success of the affair to a fur∣ther hazard; may be made probable by the like occurrence in the story of Guicciardine, which in brief is this. 〈◊〉〈◊〉 Medic••s had very weakly opened the gates of Florence to Charles the eighth, then in his passage towards Naples. Charles entreth it triumphantly as a conquered City, armed in compleat man∣ner, and his lance on his thing; his whole army with him. Many insolencies being committed by the 〈◊〉〈◊〉, the Citizens prepare to fight in defence of their liberties. Charles willing to go forwards on his m••reh towards Naples, propounds conditions in writing: but so intolerable, that Peter Cappori one of the chief Citizens catching the papers out of the Kings Secretaries hands, and tearing them before his face; do you, saith he, sound your trumpets, we will ring our bells, and see what will follow. Which stout and peremptory dealing did so daunt the French, that they condescended upon very casie termes to a∣bandon the City, and restore all the places appertaining unto their estate, which were then in his power. The like consideration probably might prevail with Ioas, as did then with Charles; and prompt him not to fight with an inraged uiultitude in the streets of a City where he could make no use of his horse; and where he might be more galled with women and children, throwing stones or darts out of their win∣dows, and from the tops of their houses, than with an armed enemy in the open field. Nor wanted loas an example of this kind in the times before him, even that of Abimelech in the book of Iudges, who having taken the Town of Thebet, and forced all the men and women into the Castle, was slain there by a pecce of a Mill-stone, thrown at his head from one of the Turrets of it by the hands of a woman.

To proceed further in the story of these several Kings, or recapitulate the summe of their principal acti∣ons (as in other places we have done) may be thought unnecessary: the Scripture being in the hands of all fears of persons, in which their actions, and successions, are at large contained. So that I onely shall sub∣join their names, with the time of their reigns, and the year of the world in which they did begin their Empire: leaving the rest unto the industry and search of the Christian Reader, of whose acquaintance with the Scriptures I dare make no question. This onely I premise as concerning the Iudges, that the time of their continuance in rhat authority is not to be measured from the time of their coming to it, till the entrance of the next Successor, as in that of the Kings; these being occasionally raised by Almighty God, for some present service, and no standing or established Magistrates; except Moses and Iosuah onely, who held the government during life, and managed it as absolute Princes.

The Judges and Captains of the Hebrews.

• A. M.
• 2454. 1.Moses, a Levite, the Lawgiver of the Hebrews, brought by him out of the Land of Egypt. 40.
• 2494. 2.Josuath, an Ephramite, who setled them in the land of Canaan. 33.
• 2526. 3. Othoniel, of Judah, by whom they were delivered from the Mesopotamiaens.
• 1530. 4. Ehud, a Beniamite, who rescued them from the hand of Eglon King of Moab.
• 2610. 5. Deborah the Prophetess, and Barack the Nephtalite, who discomfited the host of Jabin King of the Canaanites.
• 2650. 6. Gideon, a Manassite, who ransomed them from the power of the Midianites. 40.
• 2690. 7. Abimelech, the Base Sonne of Gide∣on. 3.
• 2693. 8. Tola, of the Tribe of Issachar. 23.
• 2716. 9. Iair, a Gileadite. 22.
• 2760. 10. Iephtah, a Gileadite, by whom the People were redeemed from the hand of the Ammonites,
• 2766. 11. Ibsan, of Bethlehem. 7.
• 2773. 12. Elon, a Zebulonite. 10.
• 2783. 13. Abdon, an Ephramite. 8.
• 2790. 14. Samson, a Danite, the Avenger of the People upon the Philistiws.
• 2809. 15. Eli, the High Priest, in whose time the Ark was taken by the Philistims.
• 2849. 16. Samuel, the Prophet, of the Tribe of Ephraim, in the later end of whose govern∣ment, the People being weary of the com∣mand of their former Rulers, desired to have a King, to go in and out before them like other Nations.

The Kings of the Hebrews.

• A. M.
• 2878. 1. Saul, of the Tribe of Benjamin, the first King of the Hebrews, an unlucky one to begin withall. 17.
• 2890. 2. David, the Sonne of Jesse, of the Tribe of Judah, the most victorious King of the Hebrew Nation. 40.
• 2930. 3. Solomon, the Sonne of David, renowned for building of the Temple. The Kingdome af∣terward divided into Judah, and Israel.

The Kings of Judah.

• A. M.
• 2971. 1. Rehoboam, the Sonne of Solomon, the first King of Iudth. 17.
• 2988. 2. Abisah, the Sonne of Rehoboam. 3.
• 2991. 3. Asa, the Sonne of Abijah; discemfi∣red the numerous Army of Zerah, the Ethi∣opian or Arabian King.
• 3031. 4. Iehosaphat, the Sonne of Asa, a great Reformer of the State, both Ecclesiasticall and Civil. 35.
• 3056. 5. Iehoram, the Sonne of Iehosophat. 8.
• 3064. 6. Ahaziah, the Sonne of Iehoram by Athaliah his wife, the Sister of Ahab King of Israel. 1.
• 3065. 7. Athaliah, the Daughter of Omri, and Sister of Ahab, having destroyed the Re∣gall race of the house of David, usurped the Kingdome for 7. years.
• 3072. 8. Ioash, the onely surviving Heir of the house of David, restored by Iehojada the Priest, to the Throne of his Ancestors. 40.
• 3112. 9. Amaziah, the Sonne of Ioash, van∣quished by Ioash King of Israel, and a breach forced thorow the walls of Hierusa∣lem. 29.
• 3141. 10. Azariah, the Sonne of Amaziah, called also Vzziah; smote with a Leprosie by the Lord. 52.
• 3192. 11. Iotham, the Sonne of Vzziah or A∣zariah. 16.
• 3208. 12. Achaz, the Son of Iotham, in whose time, and on whose occasion, the Kingdome of Damascus was ruined by Tiglath-Pile∣ser King of Assyria; and the Tribes on the farther side of Iordan led into captivity. 16.
• 3224. 13. Hezekiah, the Sonne of Ahaz, a re∣ligious Prince; in whose time the Kingdom of the ten Tribes was destroyed by the Assy∣rians; and that of Assyria, by the Baby∣lonians.
• 3253. 14. Manasses, the wicked sonne of the good King Hezekiah, restored Idolatry, and put to death the Prophet Esaiah for opposing his irreligous courses. 55.
• 3308. 15. Amon the sonne of Manasses, and as bad as he; slain by a conspiracy of his Servants, when he had reigned but two years onely.
• 3310. 16. Iosiah, the sonne of Amon, a right godly King, unfortunately slain by Pharaoh Necoh King of Egypt, at the battel of Megiddo. 31.
• 3341. 17. Iehoahaz, the sonne of Iosiah, a King of 3. moneths onely, deposed and sent Prisoner by Pharaoh Necoh, to Riblah in the land of Hamath, since called Antiochia.
• 18. Iehoiakim the sonne of Iosiah, and half Brother of Iehoahaz, advanced unto the Throne by Necoh, who changed his name from Eliakim, by which he formerly was called, into that of Iehoiakim. 11.
• 3351. 19. Iehoiachin or Iechoniah, the sonne of Iehoiakim, at the end of three moneths led captive unto Babylon, with his wives and Mother, and the great Officers of the Realm, by Nebuchad∣nezzar.
• 20. Zedekiah, an other of the sonnes of Iosiah, and brother by the whole blood of Iehoahaz, made King by Nebuchadnezzar in the place of Iehoiachin or Iechoniah; his name being chang∣ed from Mattaniah, by which called before. But rebelling against his Benefactor, contrary to the Counsel of the Prophet Ierem, he was taken Prisoner in the 11. year of his reign, Hierusalem de∣stroyed, the Temple ruinated, and the People carried Captive to the land of Babylon. A. M. 3362. where they lived in exile 70 years: which time being expired, Cyrus the King of the Persians, gave them leave to return to their Countrey, and to re-edifie their City and Temple; which work being finish∣ed, by the encouragement of Ezra, Nehemiah, and Zorobabel, and the Nation again setled in some part of their old possessions, they were after governed by their High-Priests, and the Counsel of the El∣ders, which they called the Sanhedrim: the High-Priest bearing the chief stroke, and being looked on as the man of the greatest power. And therefore I will here subjoyn the Catalogue of so many of them,

• as governed the affaires of this Countrey from the Return of the People from the Captivity of Babylon, till the time of the Maccabces; who managed the estate hereof both as Priests and Princes, till their subjection by the Romans.

The Kings of Ispael.

• A. M.
• 2971. 1. Ieroboam, the Sonne of Nebat, of the Tribe of Ephraim, the first King of Israel. 22
• 2993. 2. Nadab, the Son of Ieroboam. 2.
• 2995. 3. Baasha, of the Tribe of Issachar, having slain Nadab, reigned in his steed. 24.
• 3019. 4. Ela, the Son of Baasha. 2.
• 3021. 5. Zimri, a King of seven daies onely, the murderer of Ela, and his own Executioner.
• 6. Omri, the Captain of the host, who re∣moved the Regall seat from Tirzah to Sa∣maria. 8.
• 3029. 7. Ahab, the Son of Omri, and husband of Iezebel.
• 3051. 8. Ahaziah, the Son of Ahab. 2.
• 3053. 9. Iehoram, the Brother of Ahaziah. 12.
• 3065. 10. Iehu, the Captain of the host, van∣quished and slew Ieboram, reigning in his steed. 28.
• 3093. 11. Iehoahaz, the Son of Iehu. 17.
• 3110. 12. Ioash, the Son of Iehoahaz. 16.
• 3126. 13. Ieroboam II. the Son of Ioash. 41.
• 3178. 14. Zachariah, the Son of Ieroboam the second, after an Interregnum of 11 years, succeeded in the Throne of his Father: slain at the end of six moneths, by
• 3178. 16. Menahem, the Son of Gadi. 10.
• 3188. 17. Pekahiah, the Sonne of Menahem; slain by
• 3190. 18. Pekah, the Son of Remaliah; served in the same kind after a reign of 20 years, by
• 3210. 19. Hoseah, the Son of Ela, in the fifth year of whose reign, and the 18th year from the death of Pekah, Salmanassar King of Assyria, having by a siege of three years carried the City of Samaria, destroyed the Kingdome of Israel, and led the greatest part of the People into Captivity.

The High-Priests of the lews.

• A. M.
• 3427. 1. Iosuah, the High-Priest at the time of the Return, assistant to Zorobabel in rebuilding the Temple, which he lived not to finish; though continuing (as som say) in the Government 100. years. But I believe rather, that the names of his Successors being lost, the whole time is ascrib∣ed to him.
• 3530. 2. Ioiakim, said to be the sonne of Iosuah; in whose time, by the diligence of Ezra and Ne∣hemiah, the Temple was finished, and the Worship of God restored.
• 3580. 3. Ionathan, or Iohanan. 30.
• 3610. 4. Iaddus, who entertained Alexander the Great coming to Hier••salem (of whom more anon) the brother of that Manasses, for whose sake, and on whose occasion, the Temple on Mount Ga∣razim was built by Sanballat, with the leave of Alexander. 20.
• 3630. 5. Ontas succeeded Iaddus, as Iaddus had done Ionathan, not by birth (as formerly) but by the Election of the People.
• 3651. 6. Simon, surnamed Iustus. 9.
• 3660. 7. Eleazer, the brother of Simon. 32.
• 3692. 8. Menelaus, the brother of Eleazer and Simon.
• 3718. 9. Onias II. 14.
• 3732. 10. Simon II. 10.
• 3742. 11. Ontas III. the sonne of Simon the 2.
• 3787. 12. Iason, the brother of Omas the 3.
• 3789. 13. Menelaus II. the brother of Iason; in whose time the Temple was profaned by the Syrians, at the command of Antiochus Epiphanes.
• 3794. 14. Aletmus, under whose Government the Maccabees began to appear in defence of their Countrey and Religion, by whom succeeded in the office of High-Priest, after his decease. A∣mong these none of greater note than Iaddus, High-Priest at such time as Alexander the Great having conquered Syria marched towards Hierusalem, and was encountred by this Iaddus in his Priestly vest∣ments; assuring him in the name of the most high God, and making it demonstrable from the Prophecy of Daniel, that he should prosper in his enterprize against the Persians. An hope which Alexander did imbrace with the greater confidence, because (as he affirmed to Parmenio his chief commander) he had once at Diu, a City of Macedon, seen in a dream or Vision such a person as Iaddus was, so habited, and prosessing the same one God, by whom he was encouraged to pursue the action which he had in hand, with assurance of Victory. And upon this, the lews were so much favoured by him, that he gave them leave to live according to their own laws, and to enjoy with freedome their own Religion. But it held onely for his own time. For shortly after his decease, they were on both sides plagued by the Kings of E∣gypt and Syria, who ransacked their Cities, slaughtered their People, made havock of their goods, and compelled many of them both to eat of forbidden meats, and offer sacrifice unto Idols. At the last God raised up Mattathias and his five sonnes to resist these insolencies, who in the reign of Antiochus Epipha∣nes King of Syria, undertook the protection of the People, and gave unto the Syrians many notable over∣throws, insomuch that the Iews made choice of Iudus surnamed Maccaboeus (the eldest of the five bre∣them) for their Prince or Governour.

The Maccabaean Princes of Jewry.

• A. M.
• 3799. 1. Judas Maceaboeus, one of the nine Worthies, vanquished three great and puissant Armies of the Syrians, conducted by Apollonius, Gorgias, and Lysias, men of great renown, be∣ing Commanders of the forces of Antiochus Epiphanes before mentioned.
• 1805. 2. Jonathan, the brother of Judas, vanquished the forces of Bacchides and Alcimus, Cap∣tains of Demetrius King of Syria; and after many notable exploits and deeds of Armes, was treacherously murdered by Tryphon, aspiring at that time to the Syrian Diadem.
• 3823. 3. Simon, the brother of Judas and Jonathan, subdued the Cities of Gaza, Joppe, and Jamnia, and cleered Judaea of the Syrians: perfidiously slain in the course of his fortunes by his sonne-in-law Ptolomy. 8.
• 3831. 4. Johannes Hyrcanus, the third sonne of Simon, (his two other Brethren being in the power of Ptolomy) succeeded in the Government. He destroyed the Temple on Mount Garazim, subdued the Idumoeans, compelling them to be Circumcised; transferred the warre into Syria, and dying left the Sovereignty to his eldestsonne Aristobulus.

The Maccabaean Kings of Judah.

• 3862. 1. Aristobulus, the first King of Judah after the Babylonian captivity; starved his mother, and slew Antigonus his brother.
• 3863. 2. Alexander, the brother of Aristobulus, exceedingly inlarged the Kingdome of Jewrie, but was withall so great a Tyrant, that he slew of his subjects 50000 in battel; and commanded 800 of his principal enemies to be hanged before his face. 27
• ...

• 3890. 3. Alexandra or Solome, wife to Alexander. 9.
• 3899. 4. Hyrcanus, elder sonne to Alexander, was disturbed in his succession by his younger bro∣ther Aristobulus; but was at length firmly established in his Throne, by Pompey: who carried Aristobulus with his sonnes, Alexander and Antigonus, captives to Rome. Alexander es∣caping out of prison, troubled the quiet of his Countrey, till he was surprized by Gabinius, and slain by Scipio, two of Pompeys Captains: after whose death Antigonus set free by Iulius Coesar, deprived Hyrcanus of his Kingdome, and cut off his eares. Revenge suddenly followed this villany: for he was slain by Marcus Antonius, and his Kingdome given to a stranger.

The stranger Kings of Iewry.

• A. M.
• 3920. 1. Herod the Ascalonite, surnamed the Great, sonne of Antipater an Idnmaean, was by Mar. Antonie created, and by Augustus confirmed King of Jewrie, under whom that Kingdome was more inlarged, and in greater splendour, than ever it had been in the time of David. A Prince of great magnificence, but of great vices. During his reign, the Scepter being now departed from Iudah, the Lord CHRIST was born.
• ...A. C.
• 6. 2. Archelaus, eldest sonne of Herod at the time of his death, succeeded with the title of King, but in truth and realty possessed onely a Tetrarchie or fourth part of the Kingdome, though the best and largest of the four, containing Iudaea, Samaria, and Idumaea. The rest of Herods Kingdome was divided into three other Tetrarchies, i.e. the Tetrarchie of Galilee and Perae••, given to Herod Antipas; 2. That of Ituraea given to Philip, another of the sonnes of He∣rod; And 3. That of Abilene conferred on Lysanias. Banished into France, his Tetrarchie was made a Province of the Roman Empire; governed by Pontus Pilate, at our Saviours Passion.
• 16. 3. Herod II. surnamed Antipas, Tetrarch of Galilee and Peraea, on the banishment of Archelius, succeeded him, as chief of the Herodian family, but not in his Tetrarchie; and at last followed him in his banishment also. This is he who murdered Iohn Baptist, and in whose time CHRIST suffered.
• 40. 4. Herod III. surnamed Agrippa, Nephew to Herod the Great, by his sonne Aristobulus begotten on Mariamne of the race of the Maccabees; was by Caligula first invested in the Tetrarchy of his Uncle Philip with the title of King, and next in that of Antipas also, and fi∣nally by Claudius in that of Lysanias also; some part of the Tetrarchie of Archelaus being ad∣ded unto his dominions. This was the man that murdered Iames, and imprisoned Peter, and in the end was stricken by an Angel, and devoured by wormes. 7.
• 47. 5. Agrippa Minor, sonne of Herod Agrippa, was he before whom Saint Paul pleaded in defence of the Gospel; and the last which had the title of King of the Iews: for in his time the City of Hierusalem was destroyed by Titus, and the whole Kingdome made a Province of the Roman Empire. Anno 73.

And here it is to be observed, that when Salmanassar had subdued and captivated the ten Tribes of Israel, he sent new Colonies of his own to plant this Countrey; that so fruitful and well-situate a part of his Empire might yield its just tribute, and not lye open to the fury of the next Invader. But the Ro∣mans not having (it seemeth) so much policy or providence, as those whom they accounted barba∣tous; having laid the Countrey desolate, left it unfurnished of new Colonies; whereby the Persians, next the Saracens, and after them the Turks, entring the Roman Empire at this doore, have successively driven the Romans out of the whole house. Now that we may the better perceive how the Romans had weakned and almost utterly rooted out the Iewish Nation, we will relate some of their particular massa∣cres: which were not more cruelly inflicted on them by the enemy, then justly deserved by themselves; they wishing, though (I suppose) not desiring, that the innocent Bloud of our Saviour should be on them and their children. First then the inhabitants of Caesarea slew of the Iews in one day, about 20000, and such as fled were took and imprisoned by Florus the Roman Lieutenant of Iudaea. To revenge this slaughter, the Iews set upon the Syrians; in which skirmish 13000 of them were slain. The people of Alexandria put 50000 of them to the sword; they of Damascus, 10000; Antonius a Roman Captain, slew in As∣calon 10000 of them; and Cestius another Captain, 8040 persons. Now to come to the warres here managed by Vespasian. This Vespasian in the siege of Aphaca, slew and took prisoners, 17130. per∣sons. In Samaria, 11600. persons; in Iotopata, 42200 persons. In Ioppa, so many killed and drowned themselves, that the Sea threw up again 4200 dead bodies: and the rest so totally perished, that there remained none to carry tidings unto Hierusalem, of the loss of the Town. In the City of Tari∣chea, were slain, and made captives, 45000 persons, besides those which were given to the King Agrip∣pa. In Gamala there perished 90000. and none left alive but only two women: In Gascala 5000. men dyed by the sword; in the City of Gadera there were slain 32200, besides an infinite number of such as had drown∣ed themselves. In Hierusalem it self, there died 1100000 of them, partly by the sword, and parly by the fa∣mine; the worser enemy of the two: there were found 2000 in privies and sinks; and 97000 taken priso∣ners, insomuch that 30 lews were sold for a penny. So punctual was the Divine Iustice in retaliating to this wretched people according to the measure of their iniquities; that they who bought their Saviour for 30 pence, should be sold at 30 for a penny in the open market.

Now that Hierusalem was able to contain such a number of people, is evident in that when Cestius was Lieutenant of Iewry, the High-Priest did at his request number the people which came thither to eat

the Pas••hall Lamb, and found them to be two millions and seven hundred thousand living souls, all found and purifyed: For to leapers, or men having a flux of seed, or women in their monethly terms, or to stran∣gers, it was not lawful to eat of it. And when Titus laid siege to the City it was in the feast of the Passe∣over, when most of the people were there assembled; God (as it were) having thus imprisoned them. All these massacres, besides divers others which I have omitted, and infinite numbers which were slain in the fields and villages, which drowned themselves, and which were privately made away, amounting all to almost 2000000 of people, hapned in the compass of 4 years, beginning at the 12 of Nero, and ending at the 2d. of Ve••p••sian: yet was not the whole Nation rooted out, till the year 136. For then this misera∣bic people, having stirred two not able rebellions; the one under Trajan, and the last under Adrian the Emperours; were generally banished their native Countrey, and never again permitted to inhabite it, other∣wise than as strangers. After this dissolution the Iews were dispersed all over the world, and especially in Spain, where Adrian commanded many of them to dwell: yet they found every where so little favour, that having divers times been put to grievous mulcts and ransomes, they were at last thrust cut of most of the Kingdomes of Europe also. They were ban shed out of England by Edward the first, Anno 1290. Out of France, by Philip the fair, 1307. Out of Spain, by Ferdinand the Catholique, 1492. Out of Portugal, by Emmanuel, 1497. Out of Naples and Sicily, by Charles the fist, 1539. Yet are they found in great numbers in the Romish parts of Germany and Poland; in most Cities of Italy; especially Rome it self, where there are no less then 15000 or 20000 of them; and also in the Popes Countrey of Avignton. The reason why they are permitted to live thus under the Popes nose, is pretended to be an expectation of their conversion, which is a meer pretence; indeed the true reason being the benefit hence arising to his Holiness coffers: the hopes of their conversion being very small, and the means less. For besides the scandal, datum & acceptum, by the Papists fond worshipping of Images, so peremptorily contrary to the first table of the Law: they are not permitted to see any book of the Christian Religion, no not so much as the new Testament. And (which worketh much upon men of their metall) because at their conversion they must quit all their goods unto the Church, as being ill gotten, and by consequence the works of the devil; which in their baptism they promise to renounce. They have also a Synagogue at Amsterdam, and are pretty thick spred over the Dominions of the Turkes: who notwithstanding so hate them for crucifying of CHRIST, that they used to say in derestation of a thing, I would I might dy a Iew. Neither will they permit a Iew to turn Turk, unless he be first baptized. And though their multitudes be so great both in Thessa∣lonica and Constantinople, that it is conceived they do amount to the number of 160000 persons: yet are they not only contemned and hated, but there and in all other places of their habitation, upon every tumultuous assembly of the Common people, and constantly every Easter, wheresoever they be, in danger of death. Insomuch that if a Iew do but stir out of doors betwixt Maundie Thursday at noon, and Easter Eve at night, the Christians of the East amongst whom they dwell, (though far fewer in number) will be sure to stone them, because at that time, they buffeted, derided, and in fine crucified their Saviour. Hated in all the parts of the Turks dominions, because imployed as Publioans in gathering and enhauncing the publick tributes, which they exact with all severity that may be, and improve unto the most. And no less hated in all parts of the Christian world, as enemies to the Cross of CHRIST, so unreclaimably addicted to their antient Judaism, and so abhorring from the conversation of other men, that it is not possible that they should reap any other harvest than contempt and scorn from those amongst whom they dwell.

To give you their Character in brief. They are a people which know how to comply with the times, and the condition which they live in; especially if their profit be concerned in it: reviled like dogs, and used like slaves, yet never shew so much as an angry Countenance. A Nation which will thrive whereso∣ever they come, but most by usury and hrocage; not lending any thing but on pawnes; and those once for∣feited never more redeemable. The best of both Sexes said to have an unsavoury rankness, not incident (if not caused by sluttishness) to other people: from whom as different in their habit as in their Religion. And as for that, they retain still Circumcision as the badge and cognizance of their Nation, but ming∣led with many ceremonies not prescribed by the law, nor observed by the Antients: placing a void chair for the Prophet Elias, whom they believe to be present, though unseen, at the solemnity. And upon this they are so besotted, that they conceive the female sex uncapable of eternal life, because not capable of Circumcision: and therefore use to name them with no other Ceremonie, than at the six weeks end to have some young wenches lift up the Cradle with the child in it, which she that standeth at the head, giveth the name unto, Of their Sabbath so extremely doting, that they have added to the superstitions left them by the Phtrisees: and herein they are so precise, that if a Iew travel on the Friday, and in the Evening fall so short of his journeys end, that it amounts to more then 2000. Cubits, or six Furlongs, which they accompt a Sabbathdties journey, there must he sit him down and keep his Sabbath, though in a wood, or field, or the high-way side, without fear of wind or weather, of Theeves or Robbers, and without taking order for meat or drink: periculo latronum praedonumg{que} omni, penuria item omni cibi potus{que} ••neglect is, as Buxdorfius hath it. And so farre have they gone in despight of Christ, as to declare it unlawful to lift the Ox or Ase out of a ditch, permitted in the strictest times of Pharisaical rigor. So pertinacious in re∣taining the difference of meats and drinks, that thy will by no means sit at the same table with other men: and so precise in the dressing of it, that they will eat of no flesh but of their own killing onely; and that too with such cautions and reservations, that if any of the entrailes be corrupt or dislocated, they will sell the whole beast to the Christians for a very trifle. Beneficial in that onely to the neighbouring Christian. Wine they forbear except it be of their own planting, not so much out of dislike of that liquor, for they are

generally good fellows, and love their bellies; as for fear the wine should be baptized; a Cetemeny much used in the Eastern parts. Of the coming of their Messiah so full of hopes, that there is no great Warrier stirring, but they look upon him as the man, till some sad tragedy or other, which they suffer under that perswasion, makes them see there error: promising to themselves whensoever he cometh, a restitution of their Kingdome; and such felicities there in in the litteral sense of some Texts of Scripture, which carry in them a more mystical and sacred meaning. That in good time (but Gods not theirs) they shall be made partakers of the several blessings which those Texts do speak of, is both the hope and wish of all pious men, who cannot choose but grieve to behold the natural branches so long dismembred and cut off from the tree of life. And this they neither hope nor wish for but on some fair grounds presented to them by Saint Paul: who saith expressely, that when the fulness of the Gentiles is once come in, that then all Israel shall be saved; Rom. 11. 25, 26. The words so plainly positive that they need no commentary; or if they did, we have the general consent of the antients, besides the constant current of most modern writers, which cherish the glad hopes of their conversion to the Gospel, which the Apostle doth there aim at. Origen, Athanasius, Hierome, Augustixe, Chrysostome, for the primitive times; Bedoe and Hugo Cardinalis in the times succeeding, Gorram and Thomas Aquinas for those of Rome, Cal∣vin, Beza, Bullinger and Peter Martyr for the Reformed Churches, besides divers others of great note, so expound that Text. Nor want there other Texts of Scripture to affirm as much; which he that doth de∣sire to see, may find them with the expositions of most Christian Writers, in a Book writ by Doctor Wil∣let, entituled De generali et novissima Judaeorum vocatione; and thither I referre the more curious Rea∣der. Out of all I shall take these words of Peter Martyr, written on that passage of Saint Paul to the Romans, viz. Non ita Judaei perierunt, ut nulla de illorum salute spes super sit; The Jews (saith he) are not so wholly fallen from the favour of God, but that there still remain some hopes of their salvation. Of their Salvation then by the Gospel of Christ, when the fulness of the Gentiles is once come in, we conceive good hopes: but whether there be any of their restitution to their temporal Kindome, is a fur∣ther question, and not so cleerly evidenced in the Book of God, though there be somewhat in that Book which may seem to intimate it. That the opinion of being restored by the Messiah to that temporal power which was taken from them by the Romans, was prevalent as well amongst Christs Disciples, as the rest of the Iews, is, as I take it, clear enough in the holy Gospel. In such a Kingdome and no other did the two sonnes of Zebedee desire to sit on both hands of their Master: and the same was it and no other, which all of them expected, appeareth by the words of Cleophas, Luke 24. 21. that Christ should have restored them. We though said he, that this would have proved the man that should have redeemed Israel, Redeemed Israel? from what? from sinne and Satan, or the curse and bondage of the Law? Not so, 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉; but from the yoke of vassallage which the Romans had so lately imposed on them, say the Fathers right. Touching the same it was that they moved him saying, Lord wilt thou at this time restore again the Kingdome of Israel? Acts 1. 6. In answer whereunto, our Saviour makes them no deniall, as unto the thing, nor tells them that they never must expect such a restauration; but on∣ly puts them off as unto the time, and bids them rest themselves on the pleasure of God the Father, in whose hands the disposing of all Kingdomes was. It is not for you (saith he) to know the times and sea∣sons, which the Father hath in his own power, ver. 7. By which answer (as it seems to me) there is a possibility of restoring them to their Kingdome also, though not in the 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, at that very instant when they were most desirous to have it done, or at any other time fit for them to know, that being a secret which the Father hath reserved to himself alone.

But leaving these speculations of a restitution of the Throne of Israel, and the great power and privileges it may then enjoy; let us look back on the estate in which it flourished in the former times, when the for∣ces and Revenue of it were at the highest. And first for the Revenues, they amounted in the time of Solo∣mon (as is said 2 Chron. 9. 13.) to 666 Talents of Gold, besides the benefits of his Customes and Impo∣sitions, which cometh to two Millions, and nine hundred ninety and seven thousand pounds of yearly income. A vast summe for such a litle Kingdome. Nor can we reckon them at less, if they were not greater, in the time of David: of whom it is affirmed, 1 Chron. 22. 14. that he left to Solomon an hundred thousand Talents of Gold, and ten hundred thousand Talents of Silver, towards the building of the Temple: besides three thousand Talents of Gold, and seven thousand Talents of Silver, formerly deposited for that purpose, as is and 1 Chron. 29. 4. Which if it be computed at the ordinary rate of a Jewish Talent, reckoning a Ta∣lent of Gold at four thousand and five hundred pound, and a Talent of Silver, at three hundred seventy five pound, will amount in our money to eight hundred and forty millions and one hundred twenty and five thou∣sand pounds. So vast a summe, that it had been sufficient to have built a Temple of pure Gold and Silver, far greater than the Temple of Solomon, without other materials. I conceive therefore with our learned and industrious Brerewood, that by the Talent in those places we are to understand a far lesser summe than the ordinary Hebrew Talents: which whether it doth there signifie a Sicle onely, which is half a Crown of English money, as Eupolemus, cited by Eusebius, was of opinion; or that every Talent of Gold, came to three golden Crowns of Athens, which maketh forty five shillings of English money, as Julius Pollux hath it in his Onomasticon; I am not able to determine. But measuring it by the last estimate, which I more ap∣prove of, it will amount to two millions and two hundred ninety and five thousand pounds: a vast summe for a King to leave in ready money, which was alwaies exercised in war. And though I doe not find expresly what the Revenues of Judah might amount unto after the division: yet by one circumstance I find them to be very great. For it is written 2 Kings 18. 14. that the yearly tribute imposed upon Hezekiah by the King of Assyria, was three hundred Talents of Silver, and thirty Talents of Gold, amounting (according to the ordinary Hebrew Talent, which questionless is there intended) to two hundred forty seven thousand

and five hundred pounds of English money: and therefore probably his ordinary Revenue must be thrice as much, above tha ttribue; Else the Assyrian had not left him a subsistance for a King to live on. Nor can I think that the Revenues of this Crown were less to Herod, than formerly to Solomon or David; conside∣ring his vast expences, the many and magnificent Structures which he brought to perfection, and the large Legacies he gave at the time of his death; not paralleld by any King before or since, though of a larger and more ample territory than he stood possessed of.

What forces the Kings of the Hebrews were able to bring into the field, may best be estimated by the mu∣ster which David made when he numbred the People: the inrolment of such as were able to bear arms, and fit for service, coming in all to five hundred thousand fighting men, in Judab onely, and eight hundred thousand men in the Tribes of Israel. Tis true, that David never brought into the field so vast a multitude; but when the Kingdomes wete divided, and warre denounced betwixt Jeroboam and Abijah, we find al∣most the whole number brought into the field: that is to say, eight hundred thousand on the side of Jerobs∣am the King of Israel, and four hundred thousand by Abijah the King of Iudah. After this, out of that small Kingdome, Asa the Son of Abijah, being invaded by Zerah the Arabian or Ethiopian, advanced an Army of five hundred and eighty thousand men; which was more than the inrolment made in the time of David. An infinite proportion for so small a Kingdome; and were it not a vouched in the holy Scriptures, far above belief: had not that God who said to Abraham, that his seed should be as the stars of Heaven for multitude, been able to have made it good.

As for the story and affairs of this Countrey since the time of Adrian, the Iews being all expelled their native Soyl, and Christianity in fine prevailing over all those parts, it was inhahited as the rest of the Em∣pire was, by men of that Religion onely: in this Countrey so advanced and countenanced, that Helena the Mother of Constantine, is reported to have built in it no less than two hundred Temples and Monasteries in places of most note for the miracles of Christ our Savio ur, or the dwelling of some of his Disciples. In the year 615. the Persians, under the conduct of Chosroes their King, became Masters of it; and possessed themselves of Hierusalem also: expelled thence by the valour and good fortune of the Emperour Heracli∣us, who recovering the Cross on which Christ suffered, out of the hands of the Pagans, carried it with as great a triumph into Constantinople, as David once did the Ark into Hierusalem. But this glory and re∣joycing did not long continue: For within twenty years after the recovery of this City from the power of the Persians, it was again conquered and subdued by Homar or Aumar Caliph of the Saracens, Anno 637. Under this yoak the captivated Christians had long suffered, when they changed the Tyrant but not the tyranny: the Turks about the year 1079. overcoming the Saracens, and domineering in their steed. Twenty years did the Christians langnish under this oppression, when one Peter an Hermite, travelling for devotion to the holy Lnd, and being an eye-witness of the miseries under which they groaned, at his return, made his addresses to Pope Vrban the second, acquainting him with the sad condition of the poor Christians in those Countries. A Councill thereupon is called at Clermont in France, where the Pope (willing to imploy the Christian Princes farther off, that he might the better play his game at home) did so effectually advance and indeer the business, that no fewer than three hundred thousand fighting men, under severall Leaders, undertook the service. And it prospered so well with them in the first beginning, that ha∣ving beaten the Turks out of Asia Minor, taken the great City of Antioch, and most of the strong Towns of Syria, they incamped before Hierusalem, and in short time took it, Anno 1099. after it had been four hundred years and upwards in the power of the Infidels. The City being thus gained, was offered with the title of King, to Robert Duke of Normandy, Sonne of William the Conquerour: but he upon the hopes of the Kingdome of England, refused that honour, never prospering, as it was observed, after that refusall. Godfrey of Bouillon, Duke of Lorreine, had the next offer of it, which with a religious joy he accepted of; though on the day of his Inanguration he refused the Crown: affirming that it was not fit for a Christian Prince to wear in that City a Crown of Gold, where the Redeemer of the World ware a Crown of Thornes.

The Kings of Hierusalem.

• 1099. 1. Godfrey of Bouillon, Duke of Lorreine.
• 1100. 2. Baldwin of Lorreine, brother of Godsrey, wonne Ptolemais, and many other Cities of Syria.
• 1118. 3. Baldwin II. surnamed of Bruges, Cousin of Godfrey and Baldwin, the Former Kings, overcame the Sultan of Damascus, and inlarged his Kingdome by the addition of Tyre.
• 1131. 4. Fulk, Earl of Anjon, having maryed Milliscent the daughter of Baldwin the 2d. succeeded after his decease; unfortunately killed with a fall from his horse.
• 1142. 5. Baldwin III. Sonne of Fulk and Milliscent, fortified Gaza against the Caliph of Aegypt, and recoverd Paneade from the King of Damascus.
• 1164. 6. Almericus, the Brother of Baldwin the 3d. so distressed the great Caliph of Aegypt, that he was forced to call in the Turks to aid him; by whom slain, and his Kingdome transfer∣red on Sarracon, the Turkish Generall.
• 1173. 7. Baldwin IV. Sonne of Almericus, overthrew Saladine the victorious King of the Turkes in a fight neer Ascalon, and valiantly defended his Dominions.
• 1185. 8. Baldwin V. Sonne of Sibyll the Sister of Baldwin the 4th. by William Marquess of Mont∣ferrat, unnaturally poisoned by his own mother, having reigned only five moneths, to make way for her second husband, called
• ...

• 1185. 9. Guy of Lusignan, the last King of Hierusalem, that had the possession of the City, during whose time Saladine the Sultan of Aegypt won that Kingdome, Anno 1187. which his Succes∣sours defended against all invasions, till the year 1517. in which Selimus the first, Emperour of the Turks, added the Holy Land, together with Aegypt, to his Empire. When Hierusalem was taken by the Chri∣stians, the German Emperours name was Fredericus, the Popes, Vrbanus, the Hierosolymitan Pa∣triarch, Heraclius; and so also were they called, when the Christians again lost it. This is the con∣ceit of Roger Hoveden in the life of Henry the second; but how it can agree with Chronology, I do not see.

After the taking of Hierusalem by Sultan Saladine, the Christians retired their forces into some of the other Towns of the Holy land; which they made good against the enemy: and defended them under the government of these three Kings following, viz.

• 10. Conrade Marq. of Montferrat, husband of Isabel the daughter of Almericus King of Hierusalem.
• 11. Henry Earl of Campagne, second husband of Isabel.
• 12. John di Brenne, husband of Mary, or Yoland as some call her, daughter of Conrade and Isabel, the last Christian King that ever had possession in Syria or Palestine: inhabited ever-since by Moores and Arabians, few Christians, and not many Turks but such as be in garrisons onely. Yo∣land the daughter of this John di Brenne, was wife to Frederick King of Naples, who in her right in∣tituled himself King of Hierusalem: and so now do the Kings of Spain, as heirs unto, and possessors of the Kingdome of Naples. Concerning which title it would not be amisse to insert this story. When the warres, in Queen Elizabeths time, were hot between England and Spain, there were Commissioners of both sides appointed to treat of peace. They met at a Town of the French Kings, and first it was debated in what tongue the negotiation should be handled. A Spaniard thinking to give the English Commissio∣ners a shrewd gird, proposed the French tongue as most fit: it being a language which the Spaniards were well skilled in; and for these gentlemen of England, I suppose (saith he) that they cannot be ignorant of the language of their fellow-subjects: their Queen is Queen of France as well as of England. Nay in faith my masters, replyed Doctor Dale, (the master of the Requests) the French tongue is too vulgar for a business of this secrecy and importance, especially in a French Town. We will rather treat in Hebrew, the language of Hierusalem, whereof your master is King: and I suppose you are therein as well skilled, as we in the French. And thus much for this title.

The Armes of the Christian Kings in Hierusalem was Luna, a cross crosser crossed, Sol, which was com∣monly called the Hierusalem Cross. But for their forces and Revenues, I cannot see how any estimate may be made hereof, in regard they subsisted not by their own proper strength, but by the Purses and the Forces of the Western Christians; more or less active in that service, as zeal, or emulation, or desire of glory were predominant in them.

Chief Orders of Kinght-hood in this Kingdome after the recovery thereof from the power of the Turks, Were

1. Of the Sepulchre, said to be instituted originally by Queen Helena, the Mother of Constantine the Great, by whom the Temple of the Sepulchre was indeed first built: but more truly by Philip King of France, Anno 1099. at such time as that Temple was regained from the Turks. Their Armes the same with that of the Kings before blazoned, representing the five wounds of our Saviour CHRIST. At the first conferred on none but Gentlemen of blood and fortunes; now saleable to any that will buy it of the Pater-Guardian, who with a Convent of Franciscans doth reside neer that Temple.

2. Of Saint John of Hierusalem, begun by one Gerrard, Anno 1114. and confirmed by Pope Pas∣chalis the second. Their badge or Cognizance, is a White Crosse of eight points. Their duty to defend the Holy land, relieve Pilgrims, and succour Christian Princes against the Insidels. They were to be of noble parentage and extraction: and grew in time to such infinite riches, especially after the suppression of the Templars (most of whose lands were after given unto this Order) that they had at one time in the se∣veral parts of Christendome no fewer than 20000. Mannours; and of such reputation in all Christian Kingdomes, that in En••land the Lord Prior of this Order, was accompted the Prime Baron in the Realm. But now their Revenue is not a little diminished, by the withdrawing of the Kings of England and other Protestant Princes from the Church of Rome: who on that change, seized on all the Lands of this Order in their several Countries, and either kept them to themselves, or disposed them to others as they pleased. Of these we shall speak more when we are in Malta, where they now reside: advertising onely at the present, that their first Great Master was that Gerrard by whom they were founded; the last that had his residence in the Holy land one John de Villiers, in whose time being driven out of Pa∣lestine, they removed unto Cyprus, and in the time of Fulk de Villaret Anno 1309. to the Isle of Rhodes. Outed of which by Solomon the Magnificent Anno 1522. they removed from one place ro another, till at last by the magnificence of Charles the fift Anno 1530. they were setled in Malta: and there we shall speak farther of them.

3. Of the Templers, instituted by Hugh of Payennes, Anno 1113, and confirmed by Pope Eugeni∣us. Their ensign was a Red Cross, in token that they should shed their blood to defend Christs Temple. They were burried Cross-legged, and wore on their backs the figure of the Cross; for which they were by the common people called Cross-back, or Crouch-back, and by corruption, Crook-back. Edmund Earl of Lancaster, second sonne to our Henry the third, being of this Order, was vulgarly called Ed∣mund Crook-back; which gave Henry the fourth a foolish occasion to faign, that this Edmund (from whom he was descended) was indeed the eldest sonne of King Henry the third, but for his crookedness and

deformity, his younger brother was preferred to the Crown before him. These Knights had in all Pro∣vinces of Europe their subordinate governours, in which they possessed on lesse than 16000 Lordships; the greatness of which Revenue was not the least cause of dissolving the Order. For Philip the fair, king of France, had a plot to invest one of his sonnes with the title of King of Hierusalem, and hoped to pro∣cure of the Pope the revenue of this order to be laid unto that Kingdome for support of the Title: which he might the better do, because Cl••ment the fift then Pope, for the love he bare to France, had trans∣ferred his feat from Rome to Avignion. But herein his hopes deceived him; for this Order being dissolv∣ed, the lands thereto belonging were given to the Knights Hospitallers, or of Saint John. The crimes objected against this Order was, first, their revolt from their professed obedience unto the Patriarch of Jeru∣salem, who was their visitor; Secondly, their unspeakable pride; and thirdly their sinnes against nature. The house of our Law-students in London, called the Temple, was the chief house of the Knights of this order in England: and was by the Knights of Saint John, whose principal mansion was in Smithfield, sold unto the students of the Laws, for the yearly rent of 10 l. about the middle of the reign of Edward the third.

These three orders M.Salden (and deservedly) putteth not in his Titles of honour, in that they were prohibited to kiss a woman: honourary Knight-hood, and the love of Ladies, going together like vertue and reward.

Thus much for Palestine.

OF ARABIA.

ARABIA hath on the East, Chaldaea, and the Bay or Gulf of Persia; on the West, Palestine, some part of Aegypt, and the whole course of the Red-Sea; on the North, the River Euphraes, with some parts of Syria and Palestine; and on the South, the main Southern Ocean. But at some times the name extended somewhat further: Pliny enlargeth it as far as to Comagena, the North part of Syria, in regard that many Arabi∣an Colonies had been their planted by Tigranes; and Xenophon comprehending in it the greatest part also of Mesopotamia, because situate on the West of the River Tigris, and consequent∣ly the Western part of the Assyrian Empire, as the word Ereb doth import; from whence some derive the Erymon and name hereof. Which notwithstanding, in the generall esteem of Authors it is bounded only as before.

As for the name, there be some that derive it from Arabus a supposed Sonne of Apollo and Babylonia; others from three supposititious Sons of Janus Pater, one of the pretended Grand-Sonnes of Cham. Who is fabled to have sent his Sonne Arabus into Arabia Deserta; Petreius, into Arabia Petraea; and Sa∣bus, into Arabia Felix the dwelling place of the Sabaeans. And for this trim conceit we are beholding to the Berosus of Frier Annius. More probable is their conjecture who derive the name from the Hebrew, Arab, sig∣nifying black, by reason of the swarth or tawny complexion of the inhabitants, who are inter ni•• rum & fulvum, as Vertomannus an eye-witness hath informed us of them: on the same reason as one of the Pro∣vinces of Africa, is commonly entituled the Land of Negroes. But the most likely origination of it, as I con∣ceive, is from Harabi, which signifieth in the Hebrew a Theef or Robber, such as the Arabians, in all ages, have been known to be. According unto that of the Prophet Jeremy, In the waies thou hast sate for them as an Arabian in the Wilderness, as our English reads it, tanquam Latro insidians in solitudine, saith the Vulgar Latine, Jerem. 32. St. Hierome, though he render it, quasi Latro, as the Vulgar doth, yet in his Commentary he informs us, that the word doth also signifie an Arabian, quae gens latrociniis dedi∣taus{que} hodie incursat Palestinae fines, &c. which people being addicted to thest and robberie, do to this day (faith he) infest the coasts of Palestine which border neer them, and lay in wait for those which had any occasion to travel thither. Agreeable hereunto is the observation of Martin del Rio; Adeo latrocini∣is infames sunt, ut Hebraeis Arabs, latronem denotat, sicut Chananaeus Mercatorem, Chaldaeus Ma∣thematicum: i.e. So infamous were they for their theft and frequent Robberies, that it was as familiar with the Jews to call a thief by the name of Arabian, as by Chanaanite to signifie a Merchant, or to use the word Chaldaean for a Mathematician. In the same sense they came in the succeeding times to be cal∣led Saracens, from Sarak or Saraka, an Arabian word, which signifieth to steal; whereof more anon: no otherwise than one of the American Islands had the name of Ladrones, or Insula latronum, given by Magellanus, from the theevishness of the Inhabitants, who had stoln his cock-boat.

I have staid the longer on the name, because it doth express so much of the Charactar of the people also: living for the most part upon spoil and robberie, as all that travell that way know by sad experience. Of mean statures, raw-boned, tawny or swart-complexioned, having feminine voices; of swift but noiseless gate, and upon you ere you are aware. Of no set dwellings (except only in Arabia Felix) living in tents which they remove like walking Cities, for the benefit of pasturage, and hope of booty: for this last cause hanging about the skirts of more habitable Countreys; and having robbed retire with a marvellous speed. Mounted on Dromedaries for that purpose, a beast of most incredible swiftness, satisfied with little food, though without water to it, and will easie carry a man a hundred miles a day without any refreshing. Nor are such horses as they have, though but poor and lean, of less speed, or less patient of travel: whom they feed twice a day with the milk of Camels, and think them not worth keeping, if not able to outgoe an Ostrich. As now, formerly all horsemen, and but ill appointed; fitter to rob and spoil than to deal with Souldiers, as riding stark naked, and trusting rather to the swiftness of their horses than any other way of resistance where they were opposed.

There language is the Arabick, so called from this Countrey, but not proper to this Countrey onely, Spoken in all places where Mahometanism hath got any footing; The Alcoran being written in it, the publick offices of their Religion performed in it, and the tongue taught in Schools as generally as with us the Latine: but made the natural language in Mesopotamia, Syria, Palestine, the three Arabia's, Egypt, and all Barbary, except the Kingdome of Morocco. A great extent, but short of that which some give to it, who will have it spoken in two parts of the whole habitable world.

The Christian faith was first here planted by Saint Paul, of whose being in Arabia, after his conversion, he telleth us, Gal. 1. 17. to which the coming in of the Saracens gave a great increase in the time of Mav•••• their

Queen, during the Empire of Valentinian the first; Moses a man of exemplary piety, and famed for ma∣ny miracles, being created their first Bishop: after more generally propagated over all the Countrey by their King Alamandarus, Anastasius then reigning in the East. But long it had not been received, when supplanted by Mahometanism, which had its first beginning here, and hath so universally overspred the whole face hereof, that now there are no Christians left in all the Countrey, except only in Elior a Port Town in the Bay of Arabia Felix, in Petra the chief City of Arabia Petraea, and two small Monaste∣ries about Mount Sinai.

It is in circuit about 4000 miles, but of so unequall and heterogeneous composition, that no generall Character can be given of it: and therefore we must look upon it, as it stands divided into Arabia Deser∣ta, 2. Arabia Petraea, 3. Arabia Felix, and 4. the Arabick Ilands.

1. ARABIA DESERTA.

ARABIA DESERTA, (called Beriara by the Turks) is bounded on the East, with Ba∣bylonia; on the West, with parts of Palestine, and Arabia Petraea; on the North, with Palmyren•• and Mesopotamia, from which last parted by Euphrates; and on the South, by some parts of Petraea, and A∣rabia Felix.

It hath the name of Deserta, from the vast desarts which are in it, and the un-inhabitedness thereof; called also by Aristides, Aspera, from the roughness; by Servius, Inferior, or the Lower, in regard of the situation of it more towards the River; by Lucian, from the frequent bottoms and vallies in it, A∣rabia Cava; and finally by the Iews it was called Kedar, from the blackness or swarthiness of the People; the word in Hebrew signifying as much as Sun-bnrnt; whence the people are by some writers called Keda∣reni, and by Pliny Cedraei.

But the common and most usuall name of it is Arabia Deserta, agreeable to the nature of it, being ge∣nerally a sandy Countrey full of vast desarts, in which all such as travell use to carry their Provisions with them, and to guide themselves in their journey by the course of the Stars: though in some parts which lie neer Euphrates and the Mountains of Arabia Felix, it have some few towns, and those resorted to by Mer∣chants. But this is onely in those parts, the residue of the Countrey being so desolate and wast, that one who had travelled in it, doth describe it to be so wild a place, vt nec homines nec bestia videantur, nec Aves; imo nec arbores nec germen aliquod, sed non nisi montes saxosi, altissimi, asperrimi. A Coun∣trey faith Guilandinus Melchior, where are found neither men nor beasts, no not so much as birds or trees, nor grass nor pasture, but onely stones, high, and most craggy mountains.

The people for the most part used to dwell in Tents, alluded to by David Psalm 120. v. 5, which they removed from place to place as the pasture for their cattell failed them: taking no other care for houses than the boughs of Palm-trees to keep them from the heats of the Sun, and other extremities of weather. Hence by the Antients called Scenitae, or men dwelling in Tents (in which respect the Jews call the Tartari∣ans Kedarim, from the like course of life which these Kedareni or Arabians lived) but the name reach∣ing into the other parts of Arabia also, where they use the same king of living; of whom more anon.

Yet notwithstanding most memorable is this Countrey in sacred story, both for the dwelling place of Job, and the habitation of those Wise-men who came out of the East unto Hierusalem to worship Christ, the new-born King of the Jews. That Job was an inhabitant here, appeareth by the situation of his dwelling, being in the East, as is said in the Story of him, chap. 1. v. 3. that is to say, in the Countrey lying East to the Land of Canaan, as this part of it doth, and therefore called simply by the name of the East, as Judg. 6. 3. where by the Children of the East, are meant expresly the Inhabitants of Arabia the Desart, who together with the Midianites, and Amalekites, oppressed those of Israel. Secondly, by the ill neigh∣bourhood which he found from the Sabaeans, who inhabited in this part also; and of the Chaldeans men∣tioned v. 17. the next borderers to it: and Thirdly, by the inconsequences which needs must follow if we place him as some do, in the land of Vs, neer unto Damascus. For how improbable must it be for the Sabaeans of the Red-Sea or the Persian gulf; or the Caldaeans, dwelling on the banks of the River Euphra∣tes, to fall upon Jobs Cattell grazing near Damascus: the Countries being dis-joyned by such vast De∣sarts, and huge Mountains, that it is impossible for any Strangers to pass them, especially with any numbers of Cattel, in respect of those large Mountains, deep Sands, and the extreme want of water in all that passage? And how impossible must we think it, that the pen-man of the story of Iob, who certainly was guided in it by the Holy Ghost, should be so mistaken, as to place Iobs dwelling in the East, if the Land of Vs wherein he dwelt bordered on Damascus; which lay not on the East, but the North of Canaan? A City called Us, or Uz, there was situate neer Damascus, so called from Uz, the Son of Aram, Gen. 10. 23. A Land of Uz also amongst the Edomites, spoken of in the Lamentations of the Prophet Ieremie, chap. 4. v. 21. so called from Uz, one of the posterity of Esau, mentioned Gen. 36. 28 and finally, a Land of Us, or Uz, so called from Huz the sonne of Nachor the Brother of Abraham, mentioned Gen. 22. 21. which is that situate in this Tract, the habitation and possession of that righteous man: the Counttey hereabouts be∣ing called Ausit is, and the people Ausita, though by mistaking in the transcripts, we find them named 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, or Aesita, in the fifth of Ptolomy. The like I say also of the Wise-men, or Magi, who came to Hierusalem from the East, that they dwelt in this Countrey, where the said Ptolomy placeth the City Sab••; according unto that fore-signified by the Royall Psalmist, that the Kings of Arabia and Saba should bring their gifts, Psalm 72. 10. Confirmed herein by the situation of the Countrey lying East of Canaan; the au∣thority of those Fathers who lived neerest to the time of our Saviours birth, Iustin Martyr, Tertullian, Cy∣prian;

and by the testimony of Guillandinus Melthior above-mentioned, affirming on the credible report of the people hereof, that they came neither out of Mesopotamia, or Arabia Feliz, as many wise-men doe believe, but out of Saba in Arabia the Desart, which City (saith he) when my self was there, was, as I judged, called Semiscasach.

Cities of note in a Countrey so desart and uninhabited we must look for few; yet some there are, inhabited by a more Civill sort of people, whom they call by the name of Moores, giving that of Arabian to those onely, who live roming and robbing up and down. Ptolomy gives the names of forty Cities and villages in it (civitates & vicos saith the Latine) the memory of most of which is now utterly perished. Those of most observation, 1. Sabe, or Saba, the habitation of those Sabeans who pillaged Iob; so called from Sheba, the grand-sonne of Abraham by Keturah, mentioned Gen. 25. 3. Of whom, and of the rest of that line, it is said, in the sixt verse of that chapter, that Abraham gave them gifts, and sent them away from Isaac East-ward, unto the East Countrey: now called Semiscasac, as it thought by Melehtor. 2. Theman, which possibly may be the Countrey of Eliphaz the Themanite, one of the visitan••s of Iob; As 3. Shuah, on the North hereof, was probably of Bildad, another of them, hence surnamed the Shuhite. 4. Tharsacus, by Pline called Aphipolis. 5. Zagmais, near the Persian Gulf, in the Countrey of the Raubeni, supposed to be descended from Mishma the fourth sonne of Ismael. 6. Phunion the 36th. 7. Oboth the 37th. mansion of the Children of Israel. 8. Rheganna, another of those named by Ptolomy, in the Greek Copies called Eeganna. Of any Town of note now being more than this, and Sc∣miseasac, before named, I find nothing certain.

The first Inhabitants of this Countrey, of whom there is any certain Constat, were the posterity of Huz, the Sonne of Nachor, and the Sonnes of Abraham by Keturah, of whose being setled in these parts, we had before good testimony from the Book of God: and intermixt with them lived some of the descendants of Ismael also. For if the Adubeni, whom Ptolomy calleth the Agubeni, fetch their originall from Adheel the third, and the Raubeni, from Mishma the fift sonne of Ismael, as some say they doe; I see no reason but the whole Countrey might be called Kedar, from Kedar the second Sonne, as well as from the tawny complexions of the people of it. From them descended the Tribes or Nations spoken of by Ptolomy, that is to say, the Orcheni, Chaucabeni, Ausitae, Masoni, Materni, and Agrai, besides the Adubeni, and Raubeni, already specified. But being a dis-joynted people not under any setled form of Covernment, nor possessed of any thing worth looking after, they were either held not worth the conquering, in regard of their penury; or else unconquerable in respect of their Countrey, impassable for great Armies, by reason of the rolling Sands, and want of all things. Yet I coneeive that lying so near to the Chaldeans, they follow∣ed the fortunes of that mighty Monarchy, subjects unto it whilst it stood, and after Tributaries unto those who successively possessed themselves of the Supreme power. Not looked at by the Romans, or regarded by them, who aimed at wealth as well as honour, in their expeditions: nor otherwise subject to the Turk at this present time, than as they can make use of him and his protection in their frequent robberies. Though counted of as a part of the Turkish Empire, because the more civill Arabians are indeed his subjects.

2. ARABIA PETRAEA.

ARABIA PETRAEA, (now called Barra, Baraab, and Barthalaba) hath on the East, Arabia Deserta, and part of Sinus Persicus, or the Bay of Persia; on the West, the Isthmus which joineth Africa to Asia, and part of the Red Sea, or Gulf of Arabia; on the North, Palestine; and on the South, a long ridge of Mountains, which divide it from Arabia Felix.

It had this name either from the rockiness of the soil hereof, or more properly from Petra the chief Ci∣ty of it, called also by Aethicus, Sicaria, but I know not why; by the Hebrews, Chus, generally translated Ethiopia; by Willian of Tyre, Arabia Secunda, Felix being reckoned for the first. By Stra∣bo, Ptolomy, and Pl••ny it is called Nabathaea, which name it had from Nabaioth, the eldest of the twelve Sonnes of Ismael, though properly that name belonged only to those parts which lay next Judaea: fruitfull though joining to the Desarts; and thus remembred by the Poet, as an Eastern Coun∣trey.

Eurus ad Auroram, Nabathaeaque regna recessit. Eurus unto the East did flie, Where fruitful Nabathe doth lie.

The Countrey much of the same nature with the other, but in some parts thereof more fertile if well ma∣nured: and in the time of Marcellinus, affirmed to be a rich land, flourishing with variety of trade and trafick. But for the most part full of untravellable Desarts, except to those which carry their provisions with them for fear of starving, and goe in great companies or Carvans for fear of robbing, and yet much travelled by Merchants who trafick into Egypt and Babylonia, the commodities whereof they lay of Ca∣mels, which are the ships of Arabia, as their Seas, the Desarts. For upon one of these Camels, they will lay ordinarily 600. and sometimes 1000. pound weight: yet not afford him water above once in four days, not oftner in fourteen, if there be occasion. So that the Camel carrying so great a burden, and seldome fewer than 500 going in one voyage; the Merchant, if he scapeth robbing, makes a rich return. Of these Desarts the most memorable are those of Sin, and Pharan, in which the Israelites so long wan∣dred: not beautified with grass, nor adorned with trees, the Palm onely excepted; nor furnished with wa∣ter but by rain or miracle.

The people of it for the most part descended of the sonnes of Chus and Ismael, intermixed with the Ma∣dianites

descending from Abraham by Keturah, and the Amalekites, descended probably from A∣malek, the Grand-sonne of Esau, mentioned Gen. 36. but all united at the last in the name of Sara∣cens. This name derived, as some think, from Sarra, signifying a desart, and saken which signifieth to inhabit, because they live for the most part in these desart places; as others say, from Sarak, signifying a Thief or Robber, agreeable to that of Arabia before delivered. This last most suitable to their nature, and best liked by Scaliger. Saraceni à vicinis dicuntur ab Elsarak, i.e. 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, quod ra∣pinis victitent. So he, in his second book de Emend. Temp. A people not reckoned of in the former times, till made remarkable by their conquest of a great part of the world; but always counted warlike and martial men. Of whom take this Character out of Marcellinus.

The Saracens (saith he) whom we are neither to wish for our friends or enemies, are a martiall people, half-naked, clad as far as the groin with painted Cassocks, ranging up and down on Camels, and swift horses, as well in peace as troublesome times. Not used unto the Plough, to plant trees, or get their livings by tillage, they wander from one place to another, without house or home, or any constant dwelling place, or the use of laws: nor can they long endure the same either Air or Soyl, the manner of their lives being alwayes flitting; like ravenous kites, which if they chance to spie a prey, snatch it up in their flight, or if they chance to fasten on it as it leith on the ground they make no long stay. Their food is chiefly upon Venison, and store of milk, herbs which they gather from the ground, and birds which they get by fowling; but altogether ignorant of corn and wine. Their wives they hire onely for a time, though for a shew of Matrimony they present their husbands with a spear and a tent, as in way of dowrie; but they part with them when they please. Both Sexts most extremely given to carnal lusts; the women as rambling as the men, maried in one place, and brought to bed in another; leaving their children where they fall, without more care of them.

So farre, and to this purpose he.

Rivers of note here are not many. The principall are, 1. That called Trananus amnis, or the River of Tranan, which passing thorow this Country endeth his course in the Red Sea. 2. Rhtnocorura, called in Scripture the torrent of Aegypt, which rising in this Countrey, and passing by the borders of Idumaea, hath its fall in the lake of Sirbon, and together with the waters thereof, loseth it self at last in the Mediterranean.

With Mountains it is better stored, and those of eminent observation, as 1 Mount Sinai, famous in all ages, for the promulgation of the Law, and of late times for a Monastery of Maronites on the top thereof. The hill so high, that both shores of the Red Sea may be thence seen: but easie of ascent by reason of steps cut out of the rock: which notwithstanding, he that beginneth to go up it at the break of day, will hardly overcome the top of it till the afternoon. The Monastery made an Episcopall See, and for∣merly very well endowed, as appeareth by the letters of Eugenius Bishop hereof to the Arch-Duke Charles, Anno 1569. complaining that the Turk had sold all their lands, and that himself and the Monkes were fain to pawn their holy Vessells, and take up money on Usury. Here is also a Mesque or Mesquit of Turks, who resort in pilgrimage to this hill, as well as the Christians. 2. Mount Horeb, where the Israe∣lites worshipped the Molten Calf, about a mile and an half distant from Mount Sinai, but not so high, on the top of which is a Church also; and a Monastery of Coloires, or Greek Monks, at the bottom; exceed∣ing hospitable to strangers, whom they entertain of free cost, and cheerfully shew them all the places worth observation, which the Scripture mentioneth in that tract. Both hills by Ptolomy, called Melani, or the Black Mountains; the last now called Orel. 3. Mount Hor, bordering on Idumaea, and memorable for the death of Aaron.

Places of most observation, 1. Petra, the name-given to this part, at first called Recem, and at that time belonging to Midian: afterwards called Serah when pertaining to the Idumaeans. But falling under the power of the Arabians, it is now called Crat. Best known in holy Scripture by the name of Selah, before mentioned, which signifies the same with the Latine Petra. A City of great note and strength in all times foregoing, taken by Amaziah the King of Judah, 2 Kings 14. 7. and by him called Jock-beel, but in vain besieged by Scaurus, a Roman Generall, who finding the place to be impregnable, was con∣tent by the perswasion of Antipater, to take a sum of money and raise his siege. Not did the Emperour Traian speed much better at it, his Souldiers being still beat off in all their assaults, the very next man to him slain with a dart, and himself forced to cast away his Imperial habit, and flie for his life: the hea∣vens themselves, if Dion (who is never sparing of the like prodigies) may be believed, fighting against the Romans with thunder, lighting, whirlewinds, and tempests, as often as they made any approaches to it. But in the end subdued with the rest of the Countrey. In such esteem, by reason of the strength of it, by the Soldans of Aegypt, that they kept here their choisest treasures: and in the course of the Holy Wars, much aimed at by the Turks and Christians, as the key that opened the Gates of Palestine, on the South border whereof, not far from Mount Hor, beforementioned, the Town is situate. The Metropolis of the Province when first under the Romans; and made the Seat of a Latine Bishop, when the Christians of the West were the Lords thereof. 2. Bosra, said to have been built by Augustus Caesar, because by him repaired, when decayed and ruined; afterwards by Alexander Severus made a Colony of the Romans. This last most certain, and for such testifyed by this antient inscription, in an antient coin, COL. BOSTRAN. T. R. ALEXANDRIAN AE: Memorable also for the birth of Philip the Emperour, one of that Alexanders next Successors; by whom it was caused for a time to be called Philippus; for the Metropolitan dignity removed hither from Petra, somewhat before the time of Justiman, but by whom I find not; and for being the Episcopall See of Titus (hence sumarned) Bostre∣nus, a Reverend Father of the Church in the time of Julian the Apostate. A City of as great antiquity as the most that be, mentioned Gen. 36. 33. though there accounted of as a City of Edom, to which at that time it did belong; and is still remaining, and well known by the name of Buffereth. 3. Elama,

on a bay of the Red Sea, called hence Sinus Elaniticus, 4. Phara, reckoned by Ptolomy for a chief Town of this Tract, from whence the Wilderness of Paran seems to take its name. 5. Berenice, so cal∣led from some of the Queens of Aegypt, but better known by the name of Esion-geber, one of the Sta∣tions or incampings of the Children of Israel; and made by Solomon the ordinary harbour for his Ships which sailed to Ophir in the East-Indies. 6. Sur, the chief City of the Amalekites, giving name to the Wilderness or Desart of Sur, comming close up to it; remarkable for the first incamping of the Tribes of Israel after their miraculons passage over the Red Sea; and the defeat which Saul gave to the Amalek∣nes, whom he smote from Havilah to this place. 7. Havilah, so called from Havilah the Sonne of Chus, being the furthest border of these Amalekites and Ismachtes on the Gulf of Persia, as Sur was on the Red Sea, or Gulf of Arabia. 8. Madian, so called of Madian, the Sonne of Abraham by Keturah, situate towards the Red Sea also; the City of Jethro, whose daughter Zipporah was the wife of Moses: who flying from the Court of Pharaoh King of Aegypt, was by Gods secret providence di∣rected hither; that keeping the flocks of Jethro in the Desarts adjoining, he might acquaint himself with the waies and passages, thorow which he after was to lead the house of Israel. 9. Rephaim, the incam∣ping place of Moses, where he discomfited the Amalekites; and to which the said Jethro came to him with his wife and Children; advising him to ease himself of some part of that burden, which the govern∣ment of so great a people would else bring upon him. 10. Kadesh-barnes, the station of the Tribes, when the spies which were sent to discover the Land of Canaan, returned back unto them; memorable for the death of Miriam the Prophetess; and 11, Thara, no less memorable for the mutiny and punishment of Corah, Dathan, and Abirom, the place remembred Numb. 33. 27. but others will have 12. Mak∣heloth, mentioned v. 25. of that Chapter, to be the Stage of that action; the Scriptures being si∣lent in this particular. The rest of their encamping places, being most of them in this part of Ara∣bus, I omit of purpose, as obvious in the Scripture unto every Reader: as I do also some of the Cities of Moab and Ammon; accompted of by Ptolomy as Cities of this Province; but spoken of already in our Description of Palestine, to which more properly belonging.

The old Inhabitants of this Countrey, were the Madianites, the Ismaelites, the Amalekites, and the Children of Chus; who dwelling promiscuously together, are sometimes used for one ano∣ther: the Merchants which bought Joseph of his Brethren being indifferently called Midianites, and Ismaelites, Gen. 37. 28. and Zipporah the wife of Moses, who questionless was a daughter of Madian, being by Miriam, and Aaron, called an Ethopian or Chusite, as in way of reproach, Num. 12. 1. But being they were different Nations, and such as had some speciall ingage∣ment with or against the Children of Israel; we will consider them by themselves, till we have brought them into one body, by the name of Chusites, Hethiopians, or Arabians, which are all the same.

And first, the MADIANITES were such of the posterity of Madian, the sonne of Abraham by Keturah, who preserving the knowledge of the true God, withdrew themselves from all communion with the idolatrous Canaanites, at such time as the rest of their brethren did associate with them; and setled themselves more towards the banks of the Red Sea; where they did all good offices to the children of Israel, as they passed thorow their Countrey. Of these the Kenites were a branch, as ap∣peareth Judges 1. 16. where Jethro the Prince or Priest of Madian is called a Kenite: some of which turned Proselytes, and dwelt with the Israelites in Canaan, of which race Heber the Kenite, the hus∣band of Jael who slew Sisera, was undoubtedly one. The rest, continuning mingled with the Ama∣lekites, till the time of Saul, were by him warned (in memory of former curtesies) to withdraw them∣selves from them; lest they should perish with them in the same destruction. Afterwards we hear litle of either People, losing their name in the greater Nation of the Ismaelites, with whom intermingled; or passing with them into the same common notion of Arabians, Chusites, or Ethopians.

2. Nor were the AMALEKITES, though a greater and more powerful Nation, of much more continuance: descended, as it is conceived, from Amalek, the Grand-sonne of Esan, (though I deny not but there are some reasons to be urged against that opinion,) and planted on the back of the Edo∣mites, as their Guard or outwork. A people mischeivously bent against those of Israel, as if they had inherited the hatred which Esau their fore-father did bear to Jacob, whom they violently set on at Rephi∣dim, when they supposed them spend and wearied with their flight from Egypt. And though discomsited in that battel, yet they continued in their malice against the Tribes: and joyning first with the Canaa∣nites against them when they were in their March; and after with the Midianites when not well setled in their new possessions. A provocation so ill-taken by the Lord of hosts, because unnatural, and ill∣grounded, that he declared his resolution from the time of the battel of Rephidim, to put out the remem∣brance of Amalek from under Heaven, Exodus 17. 14. Accordingly, when the Children of Israel were provided for it, he commanded Saul to set upon them, and to slay both man and woman, Infant and suckling, yea their sheep and Cattel. But some of them escaped this slaughter, and fell not long after upon Ziglag, the retiring place of David, which they took and ransacked; but being by him followed on the first intelligence, they were easily overthrown, and the prey recovered. Their malice yet survived their power; and what they could not do by their proper forces, they endeavoured to affect by joying with the Ammonites, Moabites, and other enemies of David, in their warres against him. And this was ultimum conamen, one of the last flashes of their dying light: nothing done by them worth remem∣brance of the times succeeding, most of the Nation being worn out, and those few which were left, retir∣ing to the Mountains of Edom, but thereof also dispossessed by the Simeonites, during the reign of He∣zekiah.

3. The ISMAELITES, descending from Ismael, the sonne of Abraham by Hagar, branched into twelve great Nations, and grown wondrous populous; spread themselves over a great part of these three Arabias: all of them either Theeves or Merchants; trading to Egypt, in spicery, and balm, and myrrhe, or robbing those which traded in the like commodities. Called also Hagarens in the Scripture, as 1 Chron. 5. 10. Psalm 83. 6. &c. and by that name well known to many of the antient writers. A people for the most part of a vagabond and roguish life, more given to spoyl, than any honest course of living, which made every Traveller and Merchant to be armed against them: so verifying the prediction which was given of Ismael, that he should be a wild man, having his hand against every mar, and every mans hand against him. Saint Hierome so conceives that Prophecy to have been accomplish∣ed. More fitly verified perhaps, when in and under the name of Saracens, (by which, and by the name of Scenites, they were most generally known to the Greeks and Romans) they made such foul havock in the world, and were esteemed the common enemies of all Civil Nations. Never so governable in their best and most orderly times, as to acknowledge King or Law, till made one body with the Chu∣sites, and the rest of these Nations: and then no further than it stood with their lust or liking.

4. As for the Chusites, though they permitted the Nations above specified to inhabit in those Desarts and wast places which themselves either could not people or cared not for: yet were they alwayes of most power, and gave name to that whole tract of ground containing now all Petroea, the South part of Deserta, and the Mountains which divide Petroea from Arabia Felix; which from them was called. Chus, or the land of Chus. Rendred in all places of the old Testament by the name of Ethiopia, first by the Sep∣tuagint, and afterwards by all the Fathers Greeks and Latine, the Vulgar translation of the Bible, and al∣most all the other translations at this day extant. And rendred right enough at first, as in all times since, though by some mistaken: who having never heard of any other Aethopia than that in Africk, have trans∣ferred thither all those actions and Texts of Scripture, which are meant of this. The Septuagint, no doubt, were not so ignorant of the affaires of their next neighbouring Nation, as not to know by what name they were called by the Greeks, their then Lords and Masters. And he that looks into the History of Herodotus, who lived 150 years before that translation; will find, that by the Grecians they were called Aethiopians: and called so questionless from the self same reason, that is to say, the swarthyness, or Sun-burnt-ness, of their complexion, as the AE thiops of Africk were; that name being framed of the Greek word 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 signifying to burn, and 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 a countenance, by reason of their tawny and Sun-burnt Countenances. For speaking of the huge Army of Xerxes against the Greeks, he doth thus proceed, 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 &c.

Arsames (saith he) was Captain of the Arabians (he meaneth the Troglodites) and Aethiopians which are beyond Egypt: but the Ea∣stern Aethiopians were ranked with the Indians, nothing differing from the other in the structure of their bodies, but their hair and voice onely: the Eastern Aethiopians wearing their hair smooth, those of Libya curled. The Aethiops of Asia were armed like the Indians, but the Aethiops of Africa were arrayed with the skins of beasts.

Here then we have an Asian Aethiopia in the time of Herodotus: the same acknow∣ledged by Pausanias an old Greek writer, and by Philostratus after him, though they look for it in the wrong place; the first amongst the Seres in the North of Asia, the other on the River Ganges, too much in the East. Nor doth Aethicus one of the old Cosmographers; published by Simlerus, shoot more n••or the mark, who speaking of the River Tigris, faith that it buryeth it self, and runneth under the ground in Aethiopia: Which though Simler doth interpret of these parts of Arabia; yet questionless that Author meaneth it of the Countreys about Mount Taurus, where that River doth indeed run under ground, and ha∣ving passed under those vast mountains, riseth up again.

But what need further search be made to find out the situation of this Aethiopia, when it is bounded out so plainly in the holy Scriptures. For when it is said of Zipporah the wife of Moses, that she was an Aethiopian woman, Num. 12. 1. who is well known to have been a native of this Countrey; and when it is said in the 2 Chron. 21. 16. that the Lord stirred up against Jehoram the spirit of the Philistims, and of the Arabians that were near the Aethiopians: it must needs be that the Aethiopia there spoken of must be conterminous to the rest of Arabia, and be intended of that Countrey wherein Madian was. So where God threatneth by the mouth of the Prophet Exekiel, that he would lay wast the land of Egypt from the Tower of Syene even unto the borders of Aethiopia, chap. 29. 10. that is to say, from one end thereof unto the other: it followeth necessarily, that Aethiopia there meant, must be this part of Arabia, or the Land of Chus, as the bound of Egypt most remote from the tower of Syene, which all Geographers ac∣knowledge to be in the extreme South parts thereof towards the Cataracts of Nilus. For to expound it as some do, of Aethiopia in Africk, on the borders whereof Syene stood, and stood so indifferently betwixt it and Egypt, that Stephanus an antient Writer makes it very doubtfull to which of the two it did belong; were to make the Scripture speak plain non-sence, as plain as if a man should say, that the French comque∣red all the Netherlands from Graveling to Flanders; or that the sword hath ranged over all England, from Barwick to Scotland. As then we have found this Aethiopia of the old Testament to be neer the Phili∣stims on the one side, and the Land of Egypt on the other; so may we find it to be bounded also on the East, with Babylonia, or Chaldoea: the River Gihon, which is said to compass the whole Land of Aethi∣opia (or the land of Chus) Gen. 2. 13. being no other than a branch of the River Euphrates, which falleth into the Lakes of Chaldoea. So that the translation of the Septuagint in reading Chusit is, or the land of Chus, by Ethiopia, needs no such alteration or emendation as some men suppose. The mistakes (whereof there have been many) which arise from hence, not being to be charged on them or on their translation, but on the ignorance of the Reader, or errour of such Expositors, who dreaming of no other AE∣thiopia than of that in Africk, have made the Scriptures speak such things as it never meant, and carried these

Chusites into the African Ethiopia, where they never were. And yet perhaps it may be said, that this posterity of Chus, being streitned in their own possessions, or willing to seek new adventures, might have crossed over the Red-Sea or Gulf of Arabia (being but seven miles broad where narrowest); and ming∣ling with the Sons of Ludim on the other side, might either give the name of Aethiopians to them, or receive it from them.

Now to go forwards with the story, the first great action atributed to these Cbusites, or Arabian Aethops, incorporated with the rest of those mingled Nations, is the expedition of Zerah, the King hereof, against Asa King of Judah, drawing after him an Army of a million, and three hundred Chariots of war (the greatest Army ever read of in unquestioned story) but for all that, discomfited by the Lord of hosts on the praiers of Asa, and all the spoyl of that huge Army carried to Hierusalem. After this Tirrakth, another of these Aethiopian Kings, finding how dangerous the great growth of the Assyrian Kingdome might prove unto him, prepared a puissant Army against Senacherib, then besieging Libna, threatning the conquest of all Judah, and invading Egypt: upon the news of whose approach Senacherib's forces which were even upon the gaining of Pelusium, the Gate of Egypt, were fain to dislodge and provide for their safety. For though Herodotus call Senacherib King of Arabia and Assyria, yet was he Master onely of those parts of Arabia, which had been formerly possessed by the Kings of Israel, being no more than some few Cities of Petraea, bordering next unto them: or perhaps called so onely in respect of those parts of Syria and Me∣sopotamia, which were sometimes comprehended under the name of Arabia, as before is said. What part they after took in the great war betwixt Nebuchadnezzar and Pharaoh Necho King of Egypt, is not hard to say. For that besides the same reasons of state obliging them to side with the Egyptian were stil in force their giving Necho leave to pass thorow their Countrey with his Army, to invade the Babylonian on the banks of Euphrates, make that plain enough. Now that both Tirr akah and Zerah, were Kings of this Asian, and not of the African Aethiopia, is most clear and evident: partly in regard the Kings 〈◊〉〈◊〉 Egypt would never suffer such huge Armies to pass thprow the whole length of their Dominions; but princi∣pally because it is said in the holy Scriptures, that Asa having overthrown that vast Army of Zerah, smote all the Cities about Gezar, which formerly had belonged unto the Philistims, but were then possessed by these Chusites and their Associates. After this, either as Confederates or subjects, we find them aiding unto Xe••xes in his war on Greece: and like enough it was that in Alexanders march from Egypt to∣wards Persia, they submitted to him, as did all the other Countries thorow which he passed. He being dead, Antigonus, one of his great Commanders, sent Athenaeus with an Army to bring them in, who be∣ing trained into an ambush was discomfited by them; Demetrius the Sonne of Antigonus thinking that he had done enough in revenge of that overthrow, by compelling them to sue for peace. In the time of the Seleucian race in Syria, we find them governed by Kings of their own, most of them called by the name of Aretas; of which one was of special note in the declining forrunes of the Seleucidans, for bidding ve∣ry fair for the Crown of that Countrey; another mentioned by Saint Paul, 2 Cor. 11. 32. as Lord of Damascus. In the flourishing of the Roman fortunes, the Kings hereof having first aided Mithridates and Tygranes in the warre against them, submitted themselves unto Lucullus, being then no neerer to them than Armenia Major. The like they did to Pompey also, being then in Judaea. First vanquished by Aelius Gallus in the time of Augustus; but the Victory not improved to an absolute conquest, till the time of Trajan: when partly by his personall presence, and partly by the valour and good fortune of Pal∣ma, his Lieutenant, they were fully vanquished, and brought into the form of a Roman Province; but so that they had Kings of their own, (Vassalls and Feudataries of the Empire) as in former times; continuing in that condition till the rise of Mahomet; of which more hereafter.

3. ARABIA FELIX

ARABIA FELIX is bounded on the East, with the Persian; on the West, with the Arabian Gulf; on the North, with a long ridge of mountains, which part it from Deserta, and Pe∣traea; and on the South, with the boundless Ocean. Environed on three parts with the Sea, on the fourth with rough, impassable mountains, in situation and figure much resembling Italy.

It had the name of Arabia Felix from the fertility and happy condition of it, being esteemed the most fruitful and pleasant and Countrey in all Asia, abounding with Myrrhe, Balsamum, Frankincense, Gold, and precious stones: by Curtius called Odorum fertilitate nobilis Regio, from the abundance of Frankincense wherewith enriched beyond all others. Concerning which there goeth a story, that when A∣lexander in his Adolescency or boyage was sacrificing to the Gods, and cast into the fire with both hands great store of Frankincense and Myrrhe; Leonidas, his Governour, bid him be more sparing of those pre∣cious and dear Commodities, till he was Master of the Countrey in which they grew. Which Alexander remembring, when he brought almost all the East under his obedience, he sent unto Leonidas a ship laden with Frankincense, biding him from thenceforth serve the Gods more liberally. But aswel for the reason of this ad∣junct, as a more perfect Character, and description of it, take along this of Ammianus Marcellinus who de∣scribes it thus.

On the East, and South hereof (saith he) are the Happy Arabians, so called because so rich in corn, aswel as plenteous in cattel, vines, and odoriferous spices of all kinds; shut up betwixt the Red Sea, and the Persian Gulf, and so acquainted with all blessings, which either Element can afford: well fur∣nished with Roades, and quiet harbours for shipping, the Towns of Trade and merchandise standing very thick, the retiring houses of the Kings, passing neat and sumptuous. Besides most wholesome foun∣tains of medicinall waters, they enjoy divers Brooks and Rivers very cleer and pure, and a temperature of Air exceeding healthy, so that whosoever considereth all things aright, may well conclude, that there

is nothing wanting to the accomplishment of its felicity in the highest degree. So Ammianus Marcelli∣nus.

To which we need adde nothing more to set forth its happiness, than that Danoeus in his comment on Saint Augustines Echiridion ad Laurentium, is perswaded that it was the local place of Paradise Dicuur (saith he) Paradisi terrestris Regio pars quoedam esse Arabiae, quoe nunc dicitur Felix. But it hath other names besides this of Felix, by the Arabians themselves called Jeman, and Al-yeman (Aya∣man corruptly by the Turks) which in that tongue fignifieth the South, or Southern Region, By Virgil it is named Panchaia, quafi tota dehiscens, because of the many chops and chinks which the ardour of the Sunne makes in the sands thereof, though by him much extolled also for its plenty of Frankincense,

Totaq thuriferis Panchaia pinguis arenis, Famed are the whole Panchaian lands For rich and incense-bearing sands.

The People antiently, though more civil than the rest of the Arabians, had yet many strange and bar∣barous customes. Adultery amongst them was punished with death, as in other places, but he onely was held an Adulterer, which enjoyed any that was not his own kinswoman, be she his Sister or his mother, and so they kept themselves in their own families, community of wives or woemen was esteemed no crime. And of this there is a tale in Strabo, that a King of this Countrey had 15. sonnes, and but one daughter, who according to the customes hereof, was the common wife of all the Brethren: every of which had a staff of like making, which when he went in unto his Sister he did leave at the door, and by so doing did forbid entrance to the rest till it were removed. The young Lady wearied with a continual excess of dalliance, se∣cretly procured a staff like unto the rest, which when she was desirous to prohibit their accesses to her, she left at her chamber door; and by that means did many times enjoy her desired privacy. At last it hap∣ned that all the Brothers being together, one of them departed towards his Sisters lodging; Where finding a staff before the door, and knowing that he had left his brethren in one place together, accused her of A∣dultery: but the truth being made known, the Lady was quitted, and her visits afterwards restrained. Of dead bodies, they took no care, not so much as of their Chiefs, or Princes, but left them to the custody of the next dung-hil. They bragged much of their descent from Jupiter; and neglected all sciences and arts, as disparagements to so great nobility. Commendable onely in the keeping of their faith and promises, and in that most punctual. Much of the same condition are the present Inhabitants, save that less faithful in their contracts, and by their law restrained from the medling with the wives of others, permitted many of their own. Some there are of them which apply themselves to the grazing of cattel, and the rest to Mer∣chandize, wherein very cautious, and cunning: but hating to this day all Mechanical Arts. A Nation from the beginning unmixed with others till the coming of the Turks amongst them, of which but few, and those disposed of in garrisons: boasting of their nobility, and glorying in nothing more than their greatest shame, namely that the false Prophet Mahomet was their Countrey-man, whose impieties are here gene∣rally embraced and followed.

Amongst the rarities of this Countrey, some account the Phoenix, which growing old burneth it self in a nest of spices, and from thence a young one is ingendred; one of them onely at a time, which after a life of five or six hundred years, thus reneweth her kind. But this tradition, questioned in former times by Pliny and some others, is now proved a fiction; contrary both unto divinity and natural reason, though some of the Fathers made use of it as an argument to prove the Resurrection against the Gentiles, by whom the tradition was believed. More common, but of no less observation, is the Ostrige, a Bird which swal∣loweth all it findeth, be it stones or Iron, They delight chiefly in the Desarts, in the sands whereof they lay their eggs, and then forgetting where they left them sit on those they meet next. In that respect ac∣counted for a simple fowl, though otherwise of wit enough to preserve themselves, keeping in flocks, and oftentimes with their fearful shreeches affrighting Passengers, to whom they do appear a farre off like a Troop of horsemen. Their wings too little for their bodies, serve them not for flight, but to run more speedily; and by that means not easily caught, though much laid in wait for, for their skins, which the people sell unto the Merchant with the feathers on them. Nor of less note is the Frankincense, though of common use; almost peculiar to this Countrey, and here but to those parts thereof which were formerly possessed by the Sabi, the wood out of which this gum proceedeth being about 100 miles long, and 500 broad; gathered onely in Spring and Autumn, More of this anon.

The Countrey is much commended by Ammianus for plenty of Rivers, the principal whereof are said by Ptolomy, to be 1. Betus. 2. Prion. 3. Harman. 4. Lar; but the modern names thereof I find not. Many fair Lakes, and store of large capacious Baies on each coast of the Sea, as 1. Sinus Elini∣ticus. 2. Sachalites. 3. Leanites. 4. Sinus Magoram. 5. Sinus Iehthy-phagorum. 6. Messanites. 7. Sacer Sinus, or the holy Bay, and 8 the Road or Naval station called Neogilla. Mountains of most note, 1. Those which are called Melanes, at the entrance of the Persian Gulf. 2. Cabubuthra, at the entrance of the Red Sea or Gulf of Arabia. 3. Hippus. 4. Prionotus, not far from the River Pyton, from whence so denominated. 5. Climax. 6. The Mountains called Dedymi, &c.

Towns of good note in antient times it had very many, no Region affording unto Ptolomy the names of more; and amongst those, many commodious Ports for trafick, the Sea begirting it for the space of three thousand miles and upwards. Of most importance and observation in those times were, 1. Zabrum, 2. Baden, 3. Rhabana, 4. Carman, 5. Manambis, 6. Sabe, 7. Are; the Royal seats of so many severall Kingdomes, and therefore honoured by Ptolomy with the title of Regioe. Then there are 1. Ma∣co••mos, 2. Meara, 3. Nagara, 4 Sabbatha, 5. Mapha, and 6. Saphar, which he called Metro∣polet; as being the head Cities of some severall Nations. Amongst the Ports, he reckoneth, 1. So••ip∣pus, 2. Trulla, 3. Tretos, 4. Cryptus, 5. Itamos, and 6. Moscha: amongst the most noted Em∣pories

or Towns of Trafick, 1. Musa, 2. Ocelis, 3. Arabia, 4. Cane. Besides which there are some which do preserve the memory of their first Plantations, as, 1. Saphta, upon the Persian Gulf, to called from Sabta, the third Sonne of Chus. 2. Rhegama, or Regma (as the Greek copies of Ptolomy have it) so named from Regmoe or Raama his sixt Sonne; On the same Gulf also. 3. Sabe, on the shores of the Red Sea, and 4. Sabe Regia, more within the Land, so named from Seba the eldest Some of the same Chus, from whom the rich and potent nation of the Saboeans are to be derived. Out of all which, and many others by him named, we shall take more particular notice of some that follow. 1. Musa, a noted Port on the entrance of the Red-Sea, frequented antiently by the Ethiopian and Egypti∣an Merchants, who there laded their ships, with Frankincekse, Myrrhe, Spices, and other commodi∣ties of this Countrey, bringing in, in exchange thereof, Saffron, corn, wine, ointments, purple dies, &c. 2. Sabe, the Regal Seat of the Kings of the Sabaans, particularly of that Queen so memorized in holy Scripture: called in the old Testament the Queen of Sheba, from her Countrey and place of dwelling, in the New Testament, the Queen of the South, because of the Southern situation of it in respect of Ju∣dea: said there to come from the furthest parts of the world, because there was no part of the world which lay south to the Countrey of the Saboeans over which she reigned. Situate on a little Mountain, assumed by Agatharcides to be 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 the most beautiful by far in all Arabia, and the Metropolis of the rich and potent Nation of the Saboeans; rich in all the excellencies of Nature, espe∣ecially in Frankincense, a gum peculiar to them only, and growing here in a wood of about 100 miles long, and 50 broad, not gathered but in the Spring and Autumn, nor then without great care, and ma∣ny ceremonies. The Countrey hereabouts from hence called Thurifera, and this sweet gum appropriated soly to it. Sabaei Arabum propter thura clarissimi, as we find in Pliny, Solis est thurea virga Sabaeis, as it is in Virgil; and finally—Thuriferos, felicia Regna, Sabaeos, in the Argonauticks of Valerius Flaccus. It was called also Mariaba, and by that name occurreth in some antient Writers. 3. Saphar, more towards the Persian Gulf, on the South-side of the mountain Climax, the chief City of the Homerita; adorned in times of Christianity with a beautifull Temple. 4. Sabbatha, or Sabota, as Pliny calleth it, seated about the middest of the Countrey, on the top of an high and lofty hill, from whence it had a gal∣lant prospect on the fields adjoyning; antiently large and populous, and strongly fortified, having no few∣er than 60 Temples within the walls, the principal that consecrated unto Sabis, the God of their Nation, to whom they offered the tith of their Frankincense, ubi decimas Deo quem Sabin vocant, mensura non pondere capiunt Sacerdotes, as we read in Pliny.

But these and almost all the rest being grown out of knowledge, there have risen in their rooms, 1. E∣gra, on the shore of the Red Sea, neer the Bay called Sinus Elaniticus, by Prolomy called Arga, by the Arabians themselves, Algiar, the Port Town to medina, from which about three daies journey distant. 2. Jatrib, or Jathrib, in the way betwixt Aygiar, and Medina, the birth∣place of Mahomet; by whom fortified with a mud-wall as his place of retreat in the first beginnings of his fortunes. 3. Medina, or commonly called Medina Talmabi, corrupty for Medinatho-luabi, that is to say, the City of the Prophet, so called from the Sepulchre of Mahomet, that vile Imposture, which is there to be seen; although not in such an iron coffin, or drawn up to the roof of the Temple by vertue of an A∣mant there placed, as some deliver. The Town situate in a desolate and barren place, bordering on Ara∣bia Petroea; but of great trade, rich, and well inhabited: the Sepulchre of that false Prophet drawing thither a continuall resort of Pilgrims. The Temple gorgeous, having 3000 lamps in it, which burn continually. The Sepulchre or Tomb inclosed within an Iron grate, but of no magnificence or beauty: co∣vered with a carpet of Green Velvet, which is sent hither yearly by the Grand Signeur, the old one being taken off, and cut into innumerable shreds or peeces, and sold for Relicks by the Priests, (to such as come in Pilgrimage thither) to their great enriching. 4. Cufa, the ordinary residence of the first Caliphs, till the removing of the Imperiall Seat to Damascus in Syria; and after that, the usuall place of meeting for ••••••sultation in affairs of State, relating to the peace of this Countrey, and the common interest of this Peo∣ple: as memorable for the Sepulchre of Mortis Hali, the Progenitor of the Persian Sophies, as Medina is for that of Mahomet. 5. Meccha, supposed to be the Mechara of Ptolomy, situate in the like barren soyl, not far from Medina, but of far greater resort and trafick: the whole wealth in a man∣ner of this Countrey, together with the commodities of Persia, and India, being first brought hither, and from hence on Camels backs transported into Aegypt, Syria, Palestine, and other parts of the Turkish Empire. Unwalled, and either for that cause or for concealement of their fopperies from the eyes of Chri∣stians, it is made death for any Christian for to come within five miles of it. Utterly destitute of water, but what they keep in cisternes from one shewer of rain to another, or else brought thither with great charge; otherwise pleasantly seated, rich, and containing about 6000 families: every year visited with three Caravans or troops of Merchants and Pilgrims, from India, Damascus, and Grand Caire: who having done their business and devotions there, go afterwards in Pilgrimage to Medina also, to the great enriching of both places. 6. Ziden, the Haven Town to Mecca, from which distant about 40. miles, situate on the Red Sea, in a sandy soyl, unwalled and much exposed both to wind and weather, but wealthy, well-built, and of great resort. 7. Zebit, now the Metropolis of the Countrey, situate about half a daies journey from the Red Sea, in a large plain between two mountains; a Riveret of the smae name passing by it, well-traded for Sugars, spice, and fruits; the ordinary residence of the Turkish Begler••e, by whom taken not longer after Aden. 8. Eltor, a Port Town of this Countrey, where the Christians are suffered to inhabit. 9. Aden, on the very entrance of the Red Sea, neer the Streights called 〈◊〉〈◊〉 M••ndell, supposed by some to be the Madoce of Ptolomy, but more agreeing in situation, with the 〈◊〉〈◊〉 Emporie by him called Arabia. The fairest Town of the whole Peninsula, of great strength,

both by Art and Nature, well-traded, and well-fortified, having a large capacious Haven, seldome without good store of shipping, and containing to the number of six thousand persons. Once a distinct Kingdome of itself, but treacherously surprized by the Turks, Anno 1538. and therewith all the rest of the Countrey made afterwards the seat of a Turkish Beglerbeg, under whom, and him of Zebit, are sup∣posed to be no fewer than thirty thousand Timariots. 10. Oran, the Lock and Key of the Southern O∣cean. 11. Thema, or Theman, the same I take it, which our later travellers call Zeman, situate more within the land, affirmed by Benjamin the Jew, surnamed Tuledensis, to be a Town of 15 miles square, but to have within the walls thereof great quantity of ground for tillage. 12. Zarval, a retiring place of the Caliphs, when they lived in this Countrey. 13. Hor, on the point or Promontory called Chorodemus, a Garrison not long since of the Kings of Ormus. 14. Muskahat, on the Persian Gulf, neer the point of Land called Cape Rozelgate; opposite to Surat, in the East India, and possessed by the Portugals, who have fortified it with a well-built Castle, for defence of their ships and Frigots which fre∣quent those Seas. Of no great note till the taking of Ormus by the Persians, many of the Inhabitants whereof were since setled here. Of the affairs of this Countrey we shall speak anon; having first took a brief view of the Ilands which belong unto it.

4. THE ARABICK ILANDS.

The ILANDS which lie round about the shores of Arabia Felix, and have been antiently accompt∣ed as parts thereof, are dispersed either in the 1. Red-Sea, 2. Southern Ocean, or 3. the Gulf of Persia.

1. The RED-SEA, (called also by the Antients Sinus Arabicus, and now Golso di Mecca) is that part or branch of the Southern Ocean which interposeth it self betwixt Egypt on the East; Arabia Felix and some part of Petraa on the West; the North-East bound of it touching upon Idumaea, or the Cost of Edom. Extended in length from the Town of Sues, antiently called Arsinoe, in the bottom of it, to the streights of Babe!-Mandel, where it openeth into the Southern Ocean, for the space of one thousand and four thousand miles, in breadth for the most part but one hundred, but in some places almost two: the Streights themselves not being above a mile and an half; antiently chained by the Kings of Aegypt, as is said by Strabo, but now left open by the Turk, who is Lord hereof. A violent and unquiet Sea, full of sands and shelves; insomuch as they who passe in and out, are fain to make use of Pilots which dwell thereabouts, and are experienced in the channel. Sufficiently famous in all times and stories for the miracu∣lous passage of the Children of Israel.

It took the name of the Red-Sea, as some conceived, from the redness of the sands; as others have deliver∣ed, from the redness of the waters: but later observations have discovered the weakness and absurdity of these Etymologies; the Sea and Sands being coloured here as in other places. By the Grecians it was cal∣led Erythraum, which in that tongue signifieth Red also, not from the colour either of the sands or waters, but from one Erythras supposed to be the Sonne of Perseus and Andromeda, who commanded the Ea∣stem shores hereof. And these come neerer to the mark than the others did. For the truth is, it was ori∣ginally called the Sea of Edom, because it took beginning on the coasts of that Countrey: which word in the Hebrew, signifying Red, as appeareth Gen. 25. 30. first given as a nick-name to Esau, and from him afterwards to Mount Seir, or the Land of Edom, Gen. 36. 31. was by the Greeks rendred Erthra∣um, and Mare Rubrum by the Latines. Whence the name of the Red Sea became known to all, but the reason of the name to few.

Of the great trafick which was antiently driven up this Sea, we shall speak hereafter, when we are in E∣gypt, on the other side of it. Look we now on the Ilands which belong to Arabia, as they all generally do. Known in the times of Ptolomy by the names of 1. Adani, 2. Aeni, 3. Are, 4. Cardamine, 5. Com∣busta, 6. Damanum, 7. Hieracum, or the Isle of Hawkes, 8. Maliaci, 9. Polbii, 10. Socratis, 11. Timagenis, and 12. Zygana. But by what names now called, and of what note then, is a thing so doubtfull, that I dare not offer a conjecture. Late Travellers report almost all of them to be small, desolate, or but meanly inhabited, described by them under other names. One there is of indifferent largeness, said to be an hundred twenty and five miles long, though but twelve broad, called Dalaqua, with a City in it of that name, where they gather Pearls. 2. Then there is Camaran, most extremely hot, of most note for the many spoils there made by the Portugals. 3. Xamoa, the earth whereof is said to be Red, (perhaps to countenance the vulgar tradition of calling this the Red Sea from the colour of the sands of shores) and the King a Moore. 4. The Samaritan Iland, spoken of by Scaliger, inhabited by a remain∣der of that people; who assoon as they saw any stranger land upon their coasts, would most religiously de∣site him not to touch them.

II. The SOUTHERN OCEAN comprehendeth that vast body of waters, which from the Eastern banks of both Aethiopia's, coast along on the South of Arabia Felix, and so directly East-ward to the furthest India: in this regard called by some Writers Oceanus Indicus, by others Mare Australe, from the situation; and by some also Mare Rubrum or the Red Sea, from Erythras a great King (as they suppose) reigning hereabouts, and giving name not onely to the Red Sea (or Gulf of Arabia) strictly and specially so called, but to all the Sea-coasts also from the opening of the Bay of Arabia to the coasts of India, by them called Mare Erythraum.

In this vast Ocean Ptolomy placeth many Ilands which belong to Arabia, but of little note, viz. two Ilands by the name of Insula Agathoclis. 2. Three more by the name of Cocconati. 3. Dioscoris, by Pliny called Dioscurias, with a City of the same name in it. 4. Seven others in the Bay called Sinus

Sachalites, by the name of Zenobii. 5. Organa, by Strabo called Tyrrina, memorable for the Se∣pulchre of Erythras before mentioned, being a great Hill planted with trees. 6. Sarapias, by Ammi∣anus Marceuinus called Turgana, famed for a Temple of Serapis, the Egyptian Idol. None of them now of any Credit, nor formerly of any great note, the two last excepted.

III. On the East-side of Arabia Felix, betwixt it and Persia, lieth another large Arm of the Southern Ocean, antiently called Sinus Persicus, or the Bay of Persia, now Golfo di Elkadiffe. A turbulent and unruly Sea, the Southern Ocean breaking in at the one end, and the River Euphrates at the other: the continual combatting or clashing of which two great waters, makes it so unquiet. Ptolomy placeth in this Bay (but as parts or members of Arabia,) 1. Tylus, which Arianus sets at the mouth of Euphrates, Samus in the Indian Seas, affirming it to be well stored with vines, and olives: another of this name being placed by Theophrastus in the Bay of Arabia (but probably the place mistaken) affording good ma∣terials for shipping. 2. Apphana. 3. Tharo. 4. Ichara; of which nothing memorable. To these somelate Travellers have adjoyned two others, if not some of the former under those new names, that is to say, 5. Bayrea, and 6. Gonfiar, where they take the best Pearles in the World, in beds of Oisters. Other Ilands of this Bay (if any) do belong to Persia; where, if occasion so require, we shall speak more of them.

To return therefore to the main-land of Arabia-Felix, the first Inhabitants thereof were the sonnes of Chus, and the families which they brought with them. Their memories preserved in the names of some of the chief Towns and Nations, till the dayes of Plinte, Ptolomy, and some others of the antient writers. Divided afterwards into the severall Tribes or Septs of the Cassanitae, Cinadocolpitae, Homeritae, Adra∣mitae, Elesari, Salchalita, Anaritae, Gerrai, Aegai, Sabai, Minai, Leanitae, Cattabani, Abuceni, and divers others: each governed separately and apart by their several Chiefs; whom they honoured, as in o∣ther places, with the name of Kings. One of which spoken of by Justine, named Hierotimus, is said to have been the Father of 500 Children. Easie to have been overcome, because so divided, if any potent neighbour had attempted the conquest of them: as it is wondrous strange they did not, considering the rich∣ness of the Countrey, and the many temptations which it had to invite them to it. More worthily de∣serving the name of Felix in that never conquered, than in all the other rarities and delights thereof. By Alexander once designed for the seat of his Empire, who probably had endeavoured the conquest of it, having finished his warre against the Persians, had he not died in Babylon at his coming back. Nor did the Romans ever extend their Empire beyond Petrea, though once Augustus did attempt it, employing in that action, Largus, his Lieutenant in Egypt, one Sames being then King of those parts which lay neerest to him. The Romans at their first entry found no resistance. But when by the extraordinary heat of the air, and drinking salt waters, they began to grow diseased and sickly; the Arabians fell lustily upon them, and made them return back both with loss and shame. After this nothing done by the Romans to disturb their quiet; nor much done by the Christians to advance their glories: the whole divided into almost as many Religion; as Principalities and Estates. Most of them Gentiles, but Circumcised, as the Ismaelites and other Arabians had been of old; many Jews intermingled with them, and some store of Christians, but those divided also into Sects and factions. And in this state it stood, when Mahomet first began to broach his blasphemous dotages. By birth of Jathripp, an obscure village then, not far from Medina; his Father called Abdilla, an Idolatrous Pagan; his mother named Hemina, as perverse a Jewess. Deprived of both his Parents when but two years old, he was left unto the care of an Uncle: who not able to give him education, not willing to be at the change to keep him longer, sold him at sixteen years of age to the Ismaelites, by whom exposed to sale in the o∣pea markets, he was bought by one Abdalmutalif, a wealthy Merchant. By him employed at first in daudgory, and servile offices, till noting his great wit, and fitness for better services, he at last used him as his factor, sending him with his Camels and loads of Merchandize, into Syria, Persia, Egypt, and other places: wherein he did behave himself with such dexteritie, that he much increased his Masters wealth, and his own estimation. Of person he is said to be low, and withall scald-headed; but otherwise comely to the eye, and of good aspect. Much troubled with the falling sickness, which infirmity he made good use of afterwards, affirming that those fits were nothing but he evenly raptures, in which he did con∣verse with the Angel Gabriel. He is said to have been also well skilled in Magick, by which he taught a white Pigeon to feed at his ear, which he gave out to be the Holy Ghost, by whom instructed in the law which he was to publish: but this not till afterwards. By Sorceries, comeliness of person, and the great knowledge which he had in his masters business, he gained so farre on the affections of his Mistress, that on the death of Abdalmutalif, she made him her husband. Possessed of all his masters wealth, he affected ease; and being till then of no Religion, or at best a Pagan, he began to harken unto Sergius, a Nestorian Monk, who flying out of Syria for fear of punishment (the heresies of Nestorius being newly both revived and censured) came into Arabia, where he found entertainment in the house of Abdalmu∣••alif, the Master of Mahomet. By his perswasions, who found him a fit Instrument for the devil to work on, he began to entertain the thoughts of hammering out a new Religion, which might unite all par∣ties in some common principles, and bring the Christians, Jews, and Gentiles, into which the world was then divided, under one Professior. Resolved on this, he retired himself unto a Cave not farre from Mecca, as if he there attended nothing but meditations: Sergius in the mean time founding in the ears of the people, both his parts and piety. The people being thus prepared to behold the Pageant, out-comes the principal Aetor with some parts of his Alcor in (pleasing enough to sensual minds) which he next professed to have received from the Angel Gabriel. And finding that this edified to his expectation, he next pro∣clamed liberty to all staves and servants as a thing commanded him by God, by whom the natural liber∣ty of mankind was most dearly tendred: which drew unto him such a rabble of unruly people, that with∣out

out fear of opposition, he dispersed his doctrines, reducing them at last to a book or method.

The Book of this religion he calleth the Alcoran, that is to say, the Collection of Precepts: the Origi∣nall whereof they feign to be written on a Table which is kept in Heaven, and the Copy of it brought to Mahomet by the Angell Gabriel. A Book so highly reverenced by the Mahometans, that they write upon the cover of it, let none touch this but he that is clean. The body of it (as it now standeth) was com∣posed by Osmen the fourth Caliph; who seeing the Saracens daily inclining to divers heresies, by reason of some false copies of Mahomets Lawes; and that the Empire by the same means was likely to fall into ci∣vill dissention; by the help of his wife, who was Mahomets daughter, he got a sight of all Mahomets papers, which he reduced into four Volumes, and divided into one hundred twenty and four Chapters; command∣ing expresly upon pain of death, that that book, and that onely, should be received as Canonicall, through his Dominions. The whole body of it is but an exposition and gloss on these eight Command∣ments.

1. Every one ought to believe that God is a great God; and one onely God, and Mahomet is his Prophet. They hold Abraham, to be the friend of God; Moses the messenger of God; and Christ the breath of God: whom they deny to be conceived by the Holy Ghost, affirming that the Virgin Mary grew with child of him by smelling to a Rose; and was delivered of him at her brests. They deny the mystery of the Trinity; but punish such as speak against Christ, whose Religion was not (they say) taken a∣way, but mended by Mahomet. And he who in his pilgrimage to Mecca, doth not, comming or go∣ing, visit the Sepulchre of Christ, is reputed not to have merited, or bettered himself anything by his journey.

2. Every man must mary to encrease the Sectaries of Mahomet. Four wives he alloweth to every man, and as many Concubins as he will: between whom the Husband setteth no difference either in affection or apparrell; but that his wives onely can enjoy his Sabbaths benevolence. The women are not admitted in the time of their lives to come into their Churches; nor after death to Paradise: and whereas in most or all other Countries, Fathers give some portions with their daughters, the Mahometans give money for their wives; which being once paid, the contract is registred in the Cadies book, and this is all their for∣mality of Mariage. More of this theme we shall speak when we are in TRECOMA∣NIA.

3. Every one must give of his wealth to the poor. Hence you shall have some buy slaves, and then manumit them; buy birds, and then let them flie. They use commonly to free Prisoners, release bond∣slaves, build caves or lodgings in the waies for the relief of Passengers, repair bridges, and mend high∣waies. But their most ordinary almes consist in sacrifices of Sheep or Oxen, which when the solemnity is performed, they distribute among the poor; to whom also, on the first day of every year, they are bound to give the tith or tenth part of their gettings in the year fore-going: insomuch that you shall hardly find any beggers amongst them.

4. Every one must make his prayers five times a day. When they pray they turn their bodies towards Mecca, but there faces sometimes one way, sometimes another way, believing that Mahomet shall come behind them, being at their devotions. The first time is an hour before Sun-rising; the second at noon∣day; the third at three of the clock after noon; the fourth at Sun-setting; the first and last, before they go to sleep. At all these times the Cryers keep a balling in the steeples (for the Turks and Saracens have no bells) for the people to come to Church. And such as cannot come must when they hear the voice of the Cryers, fall down in the place where they are, do their devotions, and kiss the ground thrice.

5. Every one must keep a Lent one moneth in a year. This Lent is called Ramazan, in which they suppose the Alcoran was given unto Mahomet by the Angel Gabriel. This fast is only intended in the day time, the law giving leave to frollick it in the night as they best please, so they abstained from Wine, and Swines flesh, prohibited by their Law at all times, but never so punctually abstained from, as in the time of their Lent.

6. Be obedient to thy Parents; which law is the most neglected of any; never any children being so unnatural as the Turkish.

7. Thou shalt not kill; and this they keep unviolated among themselves; but the poor Christians are sure to feel the smart of their fury. And as if by this law, the actual shedding of bloud only were prohibi∣ted, they have invented punishments for their offenders, worse than death itself. As first the Strappade, which is hanging of them by the arms drawn backwards: when they are so bound, they are drawn up on high, and let down again with a violent swing, which unjoynteth all their back and armes. Secondly, they use to horse up their heels, and with a great cudgell to give them three or four hundred blowes on the soles of their feet. Thirdly, it is ordinary to draw them naked up to the top of a Gibbit or Tower, full of hooks; and cutting the rope to let them fall down again. But by the way they are caught by some of the hooks, where they commonly hang till they die for hunger.

8. Doe unto others as thou wouldest be done unto thy self. To those that keep these Lawes he promi∣seth Paradise, and a place of all delights, adomed with flowry Fields, watered with Chrystalline. Rivers, beautified with Trees of gold, under whose cool shade, they shall spend their time with amourous Virgins, whose mansion shall not be far distant. The men shall never exceed the age of thirty; nor the women of fifteen; and both shall have their virginities renewed as fast as lost.

Fryday he ordained to be the Sabbath-day, partly to distinguish his followers from the Jewes and Chri∣stians, who sole unize the daies ensuing; but principally because he was on that day proclamed King or Emperor, and solemnly so created. Wine and Swines-flesh are the principall things forbidden by the Al∣coran, the last whereof they unanimously refrain; but on the first they are so sotted, that when they come at

it, they seldome go home again unled; insomuch that all the wines in Constantinople have been thown about the streets, and death made the penalty for any that will presume to bring any more into the City. Manomet taught them that every one should be saved by his own Religion; him onely excepted that re∣volted from the Alcoran, unto another law; but so that under the notion of Religion, he means onely such as worship the one and onely God; excluding by that means the old Idolaters of the Gentiles from the hopes of salvation. And he taught too, that at the end of the world all men that professed any such Religi∣on, should go into Paradise, the Jews under the banner of Moses, the Christians under the banner of Christ, and the Saracens under the banner of Mahomet. They compel no man therefore to abjure the faith in which he was born, but commend and approve secretly such as they find zealous and constant in their own Religion, yet holding it an especial honour to have daily new proselytes, they incite them by hope of freedome and preferment, which with many are motives too much prevailing. Hence I have heard many say, that it is better for a man that would enjoy liberty of conscience, to live in the Countries pro∣fessing Mahometanism, than Papistry: for in the one he shall never be free from the bloody inquistion; in the other he is never molested, if he meddle not with the Law, their women, or their slaves.

The opinions which they hold concerning the end of the World are very ridiculous: as that at the wind∣ing of a horn, not all flesh onely, but the Angels themselves shall die; that the Earth with an Earth∣quake shall be kneaded together like a lump of dough; that a second blast of the same horn, shall after fourty dayes restore all again; that Cain shall be the Captain or ring-leader of the damned, who shall have the countenance of dogs and swine; that they shall pass over the bridge of Justice, laden with their sinnes in satchels; that the great sinners shall fall into hell, the letter into purga∣tory onely; with a thousand of the like fopperies; which it is needless to add here, considering that the Alcoran it self is now extant in the English, and every one that lists may read it. A thing so full of tautologies, inchohaerencies, and such gross absurdities, of so impure and camal mixture, that he must lay aside the use of his natural reason, who is taken by it, if force, am∣bition, or the want of Christian education do not lead him on. For if we seriously look into the causes of the deplorable increase and long continuance of this Religion, we shall find them to be chiefly these, 1. The Greatness of the Victories gotten by the Saracens; who easily compelled the con∣quered Nations to receive their Law. 2. The great zeal and diligence of the Arabians themselves, who being a numerous People, and much given to Merchandise, have possessed themselves of all the Sea-coasts of Africk, from the streights of Babel-Mandel, almost as farre as to the Cape of good hope; of all the Ilands in those Seas, and many Factories and good Towns on the coasts of India: in all which they have setled their Religion also, as a thing inseparable from their Nation. 3. A peremptory restraint of all disputation in any point of Religion whatsoever it be. 4. The suppressing of Philosophy, and the study of Humane Sciences; the light whereof might easily detect the grosseness of their Superstiti∣ons. 5. The sensual liberty allowed of having variety of wives, and as many Concubines as they are able to keep. 6. The promise of the like sensual pleasures in the other world, with which a sense not il∣luminated with the Spirit of God, doth for the most part use to be more affected, than with the speculative hope of spirituall happiness. 7. The forbiding of Printing and printed Books, by which the People might come to see the verity and purity of the Christian faith; the falshood and impurity of the Law of Mahomet. These last not useful, or at least not able to induce belief, if the first had not opened and prepared the way.

For indeed force of Armes was the strongest Argument by which Mahomet himself confirmed, and his Successors in their times have since propagated and dispersed his doctrines. Strengthened by the resort of that rascal Rabble which repaired to him, he assaults Medina, pretending a quarrel to the Jews, who had there a Synagogue. Repulsed at first with loss of men, and a wound in his face, by which some of his fore-teeth were beaten out, there likely to have made an end of his new Religion, if not recovered by his Souldiers for a further mischief. At the next onset he prevailed, the battel being fought neer a place called Bedez, situate betwixt Mecca and Medina, frequently mentioned in the Alcoran. After which fight he took the City, converting the Synagogue to a Temple for his own impieties: the news whereof so starded the Phylarchy, or nobility of Mecca, that they armed all their powers against him, and sped so well in the beginning of the warre, that they drove him forcibly from their territories, which not long after he subdued, and set his chief seat at Mecca. From that his flight, the Saracens began their computation of years (as we from CHRISTS Nativity) which they call the Hegira; which beginneth about the year of our Redemption 617. concerning which time, I cannot but observe, that Mahomet compiled his devilish doctrine, beginning his Empire; and Boniface the third assumed his Antichristian title, beginning his unlimited Supremacy, nigh about the same year. It was called the Hegira, from the Arabick Hegira∣thi, which by the learned in that tongue, is rendred by 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, i.e. the persecution raised ab ut Religion. Joseph Scaliger in the first edition of his most laborious work de emendatione temporum, casteth off this Etymology with purum putum mendacium. He will not have it called Aera fugae or persecutioris, but Aera Hagarene: because for sooth the Arabians were by some called Hagarons. I believe it would have puzled Joseph, with all his reading, to shew unto us any Epoche or Aera, which is taken from the name of a Nation. And therefore other reason he giveth us none but this. Nos autem scimus vocem illam primogenia significations ab Hagarenis, non à fuga duci. But time, and opposition, at the last reclamed him from this error: and in the second edition of his work, he is content to follow the common opinion of those men, whom in the first he whistled off with the in∣famous appellation of mendaces.

But to proceed, It hapned much about this time, that the Saracens revolting from Heraclius the Ea∣stern

Emperour, joyned themselves unto him. They had long been displeased with their condition: and now hoped to mend it. Exasperated by Julian the Apostate, when they served in his warres against the Persian, for telling them when they demanded their pay, that he had more store of steel than Gold: but then they wanted a fit head to resort unto. Now serving Heraclius in the same warre, they were used by his Officers in the same ill manner. Asking their pay, the Treasurer of the Army made them this churlish answer, that there was scarce money enough to pay the Roman and Grecian Souldiers; and must those dogs be so importunate for their wages? Provoked herewith, and hearing the fame of Mahomet, they betook themselves to him: who strengthned by their forces, and the coming in of the rest of their Coun∣trey-men, soon brought the three Arabias under his subjection. To which, having defeated the Emperors forces sent against him, he added some parts of Syria and Egypt; and returning to Mecca, there dyed fran∣tick and distempered, in the 70th, year of his Age, and three and twentieth of his impostures: of which he had spent thirteen at Medina, and the rest at Mecca; from his first serling in which City the years of his Empire were computed. His dead body being kept four daies in expectation of a resurrection, which he promised to perform at the end of three; grown full of stench and putrefaction, was carried to Medina, and there interred: his Successors out of wicked and worldly policy, keeping up the reputation of that Re∣ligion after his decease, which they derided in his life; and calling themselves Caliphs, or Vicars Gene∣rall, to him, their Prophet, to the Catalogue of which we hasten; made intricate, not more by their own confusions, than by the difference of those names by which they are presented to us by severall Writers, ac∣cording to the times and Languages in which they writ.

The Caliphs or Emperours of the Saracens.

• A. C. A. H.
• 622 5 1. Mahomet the Impostor, of whom before.
• 632 15 2. Ebubezer, or Vquebar, Mahomets Father-in-Law, and one of his Great Captains, sup∣planted Ali, to whom the Empire was designed by the will of Mahomet; and took unto himself the name of Caliph. 2.
• 634 17 3. Haumar, the second of Mahomets Great Captains, having the command of the Army under Ebubezer, succeeded him in the estate; and added to it Persia, Egypt, Pale∣stine, with great part of Syria and Mesopotamia. 12.
• 647 30 4. Osmen, the third of Mahomets great Captains, Husband of Zetneh, his second daughter; succeeded under that pretence, and added all Barbary to his Empire. Distres∣sed by the faction of Halt, and besieged in his own house, he flew himself, in the eighty seventh year of his Age, and the tenth of his Reign.
• 657 40 5. Hali, the Kinsman and next heir of Mahomet, and the husband of Fatime his eldest daughter, succeeded on the death of Osmen: murdered by the procurement of Mxavi∣as neer Cafa in Arabia Felix.
• 660 43 6. Muhavias, having murdered Hali, his Sonne Hasem or Ossan, and eleven of the Sonnes of that Hasem, the twelfth onely escaping with life (from whom descended the Family of the Alaveci, and the Persian Sophies) assumed the Government as right∣full Successor to Osmen, whose widow, the daughter of Mahomet, he had took to wife. He conquered Rhodes, Cyprus, and a great part of Asia Minor, and was the Founder of the Family of Aben Humeya.
• 681 64 7. Gizid, the Son of Muhavias, more skilled in Poetry than in Armes.
• 8. Habdalla and Marvan, Competitors for the Supreme dignity; but carried at last by Marvan.
• 685 68 9. Abdimelech, the Sonne of Marvan, established the begun conquests of Armenia and Mesopotamia 22.
• 707 90 10. Vlidor Ulit, under whom the Saracens or Moors first conquered Spain. 9.
• 716 99 11. Zulcimin, Brother to Ulit, whose Captain Mulsamas besieged Constantinople, till his Ships were burnt, and his men consumed with the Plague. 3.
• 719 102 12. Homar or Haumar II. Son of Vildor Vlit 2.
• 721 104 13. Izit, or Gizid II. the brother of Haumar, with whom during his life he was joynt Caliph, and after his decease enjoyed it wholly to himself.
• 725 107 14. Evelid, by some called Ischam, in whose time Charles Martel made such havock of the Moores in France Anno 734 their General then named Abderamen. 18.
• 743 125 15. Gizid III. the Son of Gizid the second.
• 744 126 16. Hyces, by some called Ibrahim, the brother of Gizid the third, slain by Marvan.
• 745 127 17. Marvan II. the last of the house of Ben-Humeya, slain by Abdalla, of the house of Fatime and Hali. 7.
• 752 134 18. Abdalla, of the house of Alaveci, or Alabeci, descended from Hali, and Fatime, the eldest daughter of Mahomet: called also the Family of Abas, because of their descent from Abas the Uncle of Mahomet, and perhaps Father unto Hali.
• 756 138 19. Abdallas II.
• 20. Mahomet II. surnamed Bugiafer, or Abugefer, who built the City of Bagdat, made from that time the constant seat of his Successors till their fatall period.
• 777 156 21. Mahadi. 9.
• 786 168 22. Musa, or Moyses. 1.
• ...

• 787. 169. 23. Aron, or Arachid, who compelled Irene Empress of Constantinople to pay him tri∣bute. 23.
• 810. 193. 24. Mahamad, or Mahomet III.
• 825. 198. 25. Abdalla III. who took and spoyled Crete, and overthrew the Greeks; be spoi∣led Sicilia, Sardinia, and Corsica. 17.
• 832. 215. 26. Mahomet IV. wasted Italy, burnt the suburbs of Rome, and harassed the fore-na∣med Ilands. 40.
• Others reckon these Caliphs to have succeeded Mahomet II.
• 815. 198. 25. Mamon 12.
• 827. 210. 26. Mutetzam 8.
• 835. 218. 27. Wacek 4.
• 839. 222. 28. Methucall 12.
• 851. 234. 29. Montacer 1.
• 852. 235. 30. Abul Hamet 6.
• 858. 241. 31. Almatez 4.
• 863. 245. 32. Motadi Bila 7. 7. After whose death the Aegyptians with-drew themselves from their obedience due to the Babylonian Caliph, and chose one of their own, to whom all the Arabians, or those of the Mahumetan religion, in Africa and Europe, submitted themselves. Of the Aegyptain Caliphs, when we come into that Countrey: take now with you the names onely of the Syrian and Babylonian Ca∣liphs; for story of them I find little or none; the power being totally in the hands of the Sultans of the se∣verall Provinces, and nothing left unto the Caliphs but an aiery title; the shadow of that mighty Tree, which formerly had spread it self over most parts of the World.

The Babylonian Caliphs after the division.

• A. C. A. H.
• 870 252 1. Mutemad 21.
• 891 273 2. Mutezad 8.
• 897 281 3. Muchtaphi 8.
• 907 389 4. Muchtedtr 24.
• 931 313 5. Elhaker 1.
• 932 314 6. Ratze 7.
• 939 321 7. Muctade 4.
• 943 325 8. Musteraphs 2.
• 947 325 9. Macia, and Taia 44.
• 989 361 10. Kadar 41.
• 1030 412 11. Kaim 5.
• 1035 417 12. Muctadi. 60.
• 1095 477 13. Mustetaher 22.
• 1117 499 14. Musteraschad 18.
• 1135 517 15. Raschid 25.
• 1160 542 16. Musteneged 9.
• 1169 551 17. Mustazi 10.
• 1179 561 18. Narzi 39.
• 1225 597 19. Taher.
• 20. Mustenatzer.
• 1255 638 21. Mustatzem, the last Caliph or High-Priest of the Saracens of Bagdet, or Babylon, living in the accompt of a Prince or an Emperour, or looked on as the Supreme Lord of the Saracen Empire: starved in his Castle of Bagdet, and his whole posterity rooted out, by Allan, or Halon the Tartar, in the first year of his reign. Yet there is still remain∣ing a carcass of the old body, one whom they call Caliph, at whose hands the neighbour Princes use to re∣ceive their Diadems and regalities: so we find Solyman the Magnificent, after his conquest of Chaldaea, Mesopotamia, and Assyria, to have been by one of these poor titulary Caliphs, Crowned King of Baby∣lon, Anno 1513.

This unwieldy body of the Saracen Empire, having thus two heads, began apparently to decline: lo∣sing to the Kings of Leon and Oviede, the greatest part of Spain; to the Genoese, Sardinia, and Corsica; to the Normans, Naples, and Sicily; and finally most of their Empire, with their very names, to the Turks and Tartars. For Allan, or Haallon, a Tartarian Captain, starved Mustatzem the Babylo∣mon Caliph, in his Tower of Bagdet, and rooted out all his posterity: and Sarracon the first Turkish King of Egypt, brained the last Aegyptian Caliph with his horsemans Mace; leaving not one of his issue or kindred surviving. The office of the Caliphs is now executed in the Turks Dominion, by the Mufti or chief Priest of the Turkish Mahometans.

As Mars shewed himself a friend unto those Moors in their warres and triumphs; so also did Phoebus powre down no less ceiestial influence, on such as addicted themselves to Scholarship. Bagdet in Chaldaea, Cairo in, Fess, Morocco, in Barbary, and Corduba in Spain, were their Universities: out of which came the Philosophers, Avicen, and Averroes; the Phisicians, Rhasis, and Mosue; the Geographers, Leo, and Abilfada; & almost all the Textuarie; & profound Writers (as Halt, Algazel, Albumazar, &c.) in Astrology; from whom a great part of our Astrommicall and Astrologicall termes are borrowed.

There is now no Kingdome, Iland or Province, which acknowledgeth the Empire of the Saracons, but the Kingdome of Fess and Morocco ovely: Arabia it self, the very first seat of their power, acknowledge∣ing a subjection to the Turkish Empire. For first Petraes and Deserta being subdued by the Turks, when they conquered Persia, or otherwise following the fortunes of the present Victor, were afterwards accoun∣ted of as subject unto the Mamalucks of Egypt, who out of that Countrey and all Syria, had by degrees diffeized the Selzucci in Family. And as the vassals of that Crown, though but Subjects at will, they more molested Selimus in his march towards Egypt, by falling on his Rear, and terrifying him with their night-Alarms, than all the forces of the Mamalucks in the field against him. But Egypt being subdued, and the Mamaluths utterly destroyed, some of their Chiefes being gained by money, and the rest by pro∣mise

of preserment, the whole Nation of these wild Arabs swore alleageance to him; continuing in ac∣compt as Subjects unto his Successors, but in effect doing what they list: governed as formerly by the Chieses of their severall Clannes, and in their Robberies taking no more notice of the Turk than they do of the Christians. And as for Felix, it continued also in a free condition, in respect of any forrein power, till of late times the Turks and Portugals entrenched upon them. For in the year 1538. Solyman Bassa, Admirall of the Turkish Fleet against the Pontugals, who had diverted the trade of the Red Sea, and o∣therwise given offence to Solyman the Magnificent by aiding the Persians, went with a strong Army to take Din, a Town and Iland of East-India, then in their possession. But being unable to effect it, at his coming back he called in at Aden, one of the best traded Ports of Arabia Felix, invited the King thereof aboard, most trecherously hanged him, and surprized the City. The like he also did to the King of Zibit, the Port Town to Mecca: and by that means got possession of all the Coasts of this Countrey, border∣ing on the Red Sea, or Gulf of Arabia; of which the Turks still continue Masters. But in the inland parts, and towards the Persian Gulf, of no power at all; not suffered to travell up and down without a Pass from some of the Arabian Chiefes, or if they do, in danger to be set upon by the Natives, who brook them not. Some parts hereof which lie next unto the Isle of Ormus, made one Kingdome with it; but the Kings originally of this Countrey, by whom the City of Ormus was first builded; and so continued till the taking of Ormus by the Portugals, Anno 1622. who since the taking of that Isle by the King of Persia, hold Muskahat, and some other peeces upon this Continent. The residue of the Countrey can∣tonned amongst a company of petit Princes, as in former times; before ambition taught them to devour one another.

And so much for Arabia.

6 CHALDAEA, 7 AS∣SYRIA, 8 MESOPOTAMIA.

THese Provinces, which properly and originally constituted the Assyrian Empire, I have joined together in the Title, because united in the story, and affairs thereof; though se∣verally to be considered in the description, and Chorographie of them.

CHALDAEA is bounded on the East, with Susiana, a Province of Per∣sia; on the West, with Arabia Deserta; on the North, with Mesopotamia; and on the South, with the Persian Bay, and the rest of Deserta. Originally called Chasdam, from Chesed the fourth Sonne of Nachor the brother of Abraham. Chesed quo{que}, quartus est, à quo Chasdim, idest Chaldaei postea vocati sunt, as Saint Hierome hath it. But why the Chaldeans should derive their name from Chesed, being a People long before Cheseds birth, I am not able to determine: unless he taught them the first Principles of the Art of Astronomy; or was the Author of some signall benefit unto them, which we know not of. It was called afterwards Babylonia, from Babylon the chief City of it; and at this day by Bellonius, Azamia; by the Arabians, Keldan; by the Turks, Curdistan.

But the name of Chaldaea sometimes went beyond these bounds, taking in somepart also of Mesopota∣nia, as appeareth by that passage of Saint Stephen, saying, Acts 7. v. 2, 3, 4. That the God of glory appeared to our Father Abraham, when he was in Mesopotamia, before he dwelt in Charran; And said unto him, Get thee out of this Countrey, and from thy Kindred, and come into the Land which I said shew thee. Then came be out of the Land of the Chaldees, and dwelt in Charran, &c. Where clearly that part of Mesopotamia which lay next unto Assyria, where then Abraham was, is included un∣der the name of Chaldaea, or the land of the Chaldees. Which I desire the Reader to take notice of, because I must make use of this observation in another place.

The Countrey by Herodotus said to be so fruitful that it yielded ordinarily two hundred, and in some places three hundred fold; the blades of wheat and barley being (as he assirmeth) four fingers broad. By plamy it is said of the Babylonians, that they mowed their corn twice, and seeded it a third time, or else it would be nothing but blades: and yet so, that the worst of their land yielded firsty, and their best an hundred fold increase. Nor is the nature of the soyl so altered in long tract of time, but that (as late Tra∣vellers have observed) it would in all likely-hood attain to its first fertility, if it were ordered with like care and diligence, as in former times. But what need more be said as to the natural fruitfulness and delights of this Countrey, than that it pleased Almighty God to make choice of some part hereof for the terrestri∣al Paradise or Garden of Eden, in which he placed our Father Adam, at his first creation. For here that Paradise, by men both skilled in Divinity, and Geography, is assumed to have stood. Yet amongst all sorts of Writers we find different opinions. Some make Paradise to be a place of pleasure, and the four Rivers to be the four Cardinal Vertues: but these allegories on the Scripture are not warrantable. O∣thers place it in the air, under the circle of the Moon; and tell us that the four Rivers in the Scriptures mentioned, fall down from thence, and running all under the Ocean, rise up again in those places, where they are now found: but this is so vain a foppery, that I will not honour it with a confutation. Such as make Paradise local, are divided also into three ranks, (for I omit the rest) whereof some place it under the Aequator; but this agreeth not with the bounds prescribed by the Holy Ghost. Some conceive the four Rivers to be Tigris, Euphrates, Nilus, and Ganges; and that Paradise was the whole world: but this cannot be, for then when Adam was driven our of Paradise, it must also follow that he was driven out of the world, which were absurd. Those of the soundest judgements place it here, in an Iland which is made by the Rivers Tigris and Euphrates, and some branches running from them both: the uppermost of which is called Pison (falsely rendered Ganges) which watereth the land of Havilah, or that part of the land of Havilth which is now called Chusestan or Susiana, a Province of Persia containing Susiana; and the lowermost is named Gihon, (improperly by some translated Nilus, which compasseth the East parts of Arabia Petraea, by the Septuagin for the reasons above-mentioned, rendred Ethiopia, And this agreeth both with the position of this Countrey, and the course of those Rivers. For that Tigris, and Euphrates (which the Hebrew text called Hiddekel, and Perah) do here join their streams, is confessed on all sides. Then as for Pison, it is no other than that River by Ptolomy called Basilius, or Regius; by Curtius more near∣ly Piso-Tigris, or Pasi-Tigris, Pervenit ad fluvium, Pasitigrin incolae vocant, as his own words are A little stream, which watering the Land of Havilah, or the Countrey of the Chaveloi, or Cheulases, or Chaulaterei (for by these severall names they are called amongst the antients, who place them betwixt the Babylonians, and the Nabathaeans, an Arabian People) powreth itself into the Tigris, and falls toge∣ther

with it in the Gulf of Persia. And finally for Gihon, by Ptolomy called Maarsares, and by others Marsyus, it is no other than a branch of Euphrates, which watering the Land of Chus, or Ethiophia A∣satica, take which name you will, loseth it self at last in the Lakes of Chaldaea.

But though in generall the Countrey was extremely fruitfull; yet in some places was it covered with a slimy matter, which the overflowings of the waters, and the nature of the soyl together, did bring forth abundantly. Used by them in their buildings instead of morter, than which more durable and binding; and therefore chosen for the cement of the Tower of Babel, Gen. 11. 3. Some also tell of a clyff which open∣ing sendeth out such a stink that it killeth birds as they flie over it: and others of a like open place near a Town called Ait, which continually throweth out boyling pitch (named therefore H••••••-mouth by the Mo••res) filling therewith the adjoining fields; and that herewith the people use to pitch their boats. But this is in some places onely, the Countrey generally being both healthy and delightfull, as before was said.

The people antiently were much addicted unto Sooth-saying and Divinations; and no less noted for be∣ing Authors of the first Idolatry that was ever practised in the world. Induced unto the last perhaps by the power of their Kings, who would needs confer divine honours upon some of their Ancestors. But to the first inclined by their own disposition, and the situation of their Countrey, yielding a fair sensible Hori∣zon, (for the Rationall is alike in all places both in hills and val••ies) and consequently profitable to the observation of the rising and setting of the Stars, whether Heliacal, Acronicall, Matutine, or Vesper∣line, as the Artists phrase it. Whereunto may be added the length of life in those elder times, furnish∣ing them with the greater measure of experience concerning the distinct motions of each severall Orb, and the full period of the courses of each severall Planet. Certain it is, that they grew so noted in this Art, that at the last every Astrologaster, or figure-flinger, was called a Chaldaean: Gentis nomine ad eos homines translato, qu••••ese illius sapientiae specie venditabant, as Beza hath observed in his Annotation••. For gi∣ving too much credit to them, the people thus flouted by the Satycist.

Chaldaeis sed major erit fiducia, quicquid Dixerit Astrologus, credent à fonte relatum Ammonis, &c.

That is to say,

Joves Oracles no greater credit have, Than Sooth-sayings of a Chaldee cosening knave.

The language which was spoken here had the name of the Chaldee or Chaldaean tongue: of great anti∣quity, and sanctified by the Holy Ghost, some Chapters of the prophecy of Daniel being written in it. So different from the Hebrew in its primitive purity, that the Jewes did not understand it, as appeareth by the words of the Officers of Hezekiah, 2 Kings, chap. 18. ver. 26. desiring Rabsaketh to speak to them in the Chalder tongue, that the common People of the Jewes might not hear his blasphemies. A fur∣ther proof whereof may be, that a man may have some knowledge in the Hebrew, and yet be ignorant of the Chaldee, as many are, no doubt, at this present day. But whatsoever it was in its primitive purity, it altered afterwards, when the Jews came to live amongst them during the Captivity: out of whose long commerce with them, both nations lost their proper languanes, and fell upon a third, made out of both, which was called the Syriack. Of this we spake before when we were in Syria, and Palestine. And this is now the naturall language of this Countrey, and its neighbour Assyria, but with a little mixture of the Greek and Arabick, not vulgarly spoken elsewhere, for ought I can find; but used by many others, in their sacred offices, by whom not commonly understood. For in this language all the Sects of the Ea∣stern Christians do officiate their publick Liturgies, that is to say, the Nstorians, Jacobites, Mar••∣nites, (for I reckon not the Melchites, who use the Greek Liturgie, amongst the Sectaries.) The like do also the Indians, or Christians of Saint Thomas; the Cophties or Christians of Aegypt, and the poor remainder of Christians in the Isle of Zocatara, an Island on the coast of Asrick. Used to those Liturges when that language was more understood amongst them; though now worn out of Vulgar knowledge by the overspreading of the Arabick, Tartarian, and Turkish Conquests. In which the Prelates of these Churches have fallen into the great errour of the Church of Rome: and without taking notice of the alterations hapning in the Vulgar tongues of those severall nations, which are united under them into one opinion, keep up a language in their Liturgies which they understand not: as if the capacities of the people could be sooner raised to the understanding of an unknown language; than the publick Liturgies be fitted unto their capacities. The antient piety of the Church and the modern languages of Gods people are not inconsistent; though out of private ends some have taught us otherwise. But I fear this errour (as some others) will not be so easily reme∣died, as reprehended. From the tong••e in which they celebrate the Divine Offices of their Religi∣on, pass we to the Religion it self, whose Sacred Offices are so celebrated.

The Christian faith was first preached in this Countrey by Saint Peter, of whose being in Baby∣lon, (the chief City hereof) himself assureth us in the last words almost of his First Epistle: and o∣ther busines he had none here but to preach the Gospel. Much persecuted by the Persians, (who were then possessed of all these parts) it prevailed at last, Christianity growing up the faster for the cutting down. The Patriarchall See, originally planted in Salencia, successour unto Babylon in repute and greatness, if not also in name, the Bishop whereof, by order of the Nicene Councill, had the Ecclesiasticall jurisdiction of these parts with the name of Catholique, and the next place in S••ssiom at all publick assemblies of the Church, next after the Patriarch of Hierusalem. And be∣sides this the Indians or Christians of Saint Thomas, acknowledge him for their Primate or Metro∣politan;

as they did afterwards in his right, the Patriarch of Muzal. At this present here are some remainders of Christianity, part of them Jacobites; but the most Nestorians; of whom more a∣non.

Of the chief Rivers hereof we have spoke already, and Mountains there are none to hinder us in our pas∣sage forwards. So that without more delay we may take a view of their principall places. And in the first place we meet with Babel, (in the Hebrew signifying confusion) famous for the confusion of langua∣ges which here hapned. For immediately after the Universal deluge, Nimrod the sonne of Chus, the sonne of Cham, perswaded the people to secure themselves from the like after-claps, by building some stupendious Edifice, which might resist the fury of a second deluge. This Counsel was generally imbra∣cod, Heber onely and his Family, (as tradition goeth) contradicting such an unlawful attempt. The major part prevailing, the Tower began to rear a head of Majesty▪ 5146 paces from the ground: having its basis and circumference equal to the height. The passage to go up, went winding about the outside, and was of an exceeding great breadth, there being not only room for horses, carts, and the like means of carriage, to meet and turn; but lodging also for man and beast, and (as Verstegan reporteth) grass and corn-fields for their nourishment. But God beholding from an high this fond attempt, sent amongst them (who before were of one Language) a confusion of tongues: which hindred the proceeding of this building, one being not able to understand what his fellow called for.

2. Babylon, on the Bank of Euphrates, the antientest City in the World, on this side of the flood, first built by Nimrod, in the place destinated to the raising of the Tower of Babel, and by him made the Seat of his Kingdome; afterwards beautified and enlarged by Semiramis, the wife of Ninus, one of his Successors; and finally much increased both in bulk and beauty by Nabuchadnezzar, who therefore arrogated to himself the whole glory of it, saying in his pride, is not this the great Babel that I have builded? Dan. 4. 30. A City of great fame and state, accompted one of the worlds nine wonders, and deservedly too.

The compass of the walls 365 furlongs, (or 46. miles) according to the number of the dayes in the year; in height 50. Cubits, and of so great breadth, that carts and carriages might meet on the top of them: finished in one year by the hands of 200000 workmen, employed dayly in it. Situate on both sides of Euphrates, over which there was a sumptuous bridge, and at each end of that bridge a magnificent Palace: and beautified also with the Temple of the Idol Bel, and famous for the Pensile Gardens, made with great charge, and born up with most stately Arches. In a word, so great and vast it was, that Ari∣stotle saith, that it ought rather to be called a Countrey, than a City: adding withall, that when the Town was taken, it was three dayes before the furthest parts of the Town could take notice of it. Which taking of the Town must be understood of the surprize thereof by the Medes and Persians; and not of the taking of it by the Macedanians, as Pet. Ramus (as great a Clerk as he was) in his marginal notes up∣on the Politicks of that Author, hath most vainly told us. Which whether it were that there were Gates at the end of every street, which made it be so long in taking; or that the Babylonians were not wakened from their drunken feast, in the time whereof it was surprized, I determine not. Revolting in the time of Semiramis, the news came to her as she was ordering her hair: whereupon, leaving her head half-drest she went and besieged it; never ordering the rest of her hair, till she had recovered it. How it fell into the hands of Cyrus, we learn out of Xenophons Cyri-paideia, which was in this manner. The River Eu∣phrates ran quite thorow the Town, round about whose banks the politick Prince cut many and deep channels: into which when the Babylonians were securely merry at a general feast, he suddenly drained and emptied the River, conveying his own forces into the Town all along the dry and yielding Channel; and in a little time made himself master of it. From the Persians it revolted in the reign of Darius Hysta∣spes: and that sustenance might not be wanting to the men of warre, they strangled the most part of the wo∣men, being thought in actions of this quality, not so much as necessary evils. When they had for twen∣ty moneths so obstinately defended the Town, that the Persians had less hope than ever of prevailing; Zo∣pyrus one of Darius Captains, mangling his body, and disfiguring his face by cutting off his nose and ears, fled to the Babylonians, complaining of the tyranny of his King. They crediting his words, and know∣ing his prowess, commited the charge of the whole army unto him, as a man, to whom such barbarous usage had made the King irreconcilable. But he taking the best opportunity, delivered both the Town and Souldiers into the hands of his Soveraign. Which made Darius often say, that he had rather have one Zo∣pyrus, than twenty Babylous. Here died Alexander the Great, after whose death the Graecian Captains regardful rather of their own ambitions, than the common loyalty, divided the Empire among themselves; leaving the body of the King 8 dayes unburied. A wonderful change of fortune, that he who living thought the world too small for his valour, being dead should find no place big enough for his body. After this taking of it by the Macedonians, the glories and magnificence hereof began to decline, lessned unto a fourth part in the time of Qu Curtius the historian; in solitudinem redacta, reduced to desolation in the dayes of Pliny; and being turned into a Park, in which the Kings of Persia did use to hunt, in the time of Saint Hi••∣rome. That wondrous change occasioned partly by the injury of time, partly by the neglect of the Macedo∣mans, who removed the Seat Royal of their Empire more towards Greece: but principally by Seleucus Nica∣nor, who offended with the Babylonians, built the City of

3. Seleucia, the second City of note in all this Countrey, situate in a place more commodious and healthy, neer the meeting of Tigris, and Euphrates, and about 40 miles more North than Babylon, out of which he drew 500000 persons for the peopling of it. Nor did this new City rob the old onely of its power and greatness, but also of its very name; being called Babylon in some of the antient Authors; 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, as (for one) by Stephanus. In the primi∣tive

times of Christianity, the Bishop of this See was accounted for the Primate of the Chaldaeans; with a super-intendency over the Christians of India also, as before was said. But this Supplanter was in time brough•• to ruin also, And

4. Bagdad, a new City raised from the ruins of it; built neer the foundations of Seleucia by Bugia••er the twentieth Cal••ph of the Mahometans, at the expence (as some write) of eighteen millions of Crowns; which because of the many Gardens contained in it had the name of Bagdad, the word so signifying in the A∣rabick tongue. First built upon the Western bank of the River Tigris neer to its confluence with Buphrates; but in the year 1095. removed to the other side of the River, by Mustetaher, the 45 Caliph of the Sara∣c••••, because less subject to the inundations of that furious River. But it was reckoned still for the same City, as if built by Bugiafer, by whom being made the seat of his Royall Residence, (whose Succes∣sors were from hence called the Caliphs of Babylon) it flourished in great pride and splendour, till taken and saked by Allan, or Haalan a Tartarian Captain, who here starved Musteatzem, the last C••liph of it, and rooted out his whole posterity, as if the Caliphate and the City were to end together. But the Town revived again, though the Caliph could not; continuing to this day a City of great wealth and tra∣fick, but nothing comparable unto what it was for beauty and bigness; being not above seven miles in com∣pass, and having nothing in the buildings to be justly bragged of. Taken by Solyman the Magnific••nt with the rest of the Countrey, it became subject to the Turks; from them recovered by Abas the King of Persia, Anno 1625. and again recovered by the Turks, about the year 1640. In which changes it can be no marvell that she hath lost much of her former splendour. Maintained especially at the present by the trade of Aleppo, to which, besides such goods as go up the water, there passe yearly many Caravans, or troops of Merchants, each of them having in it some hundreds (if not thousands) of Camels laden with commodities. For whose safe lodging, as they pass (the waies being generally ill provided for Travellers, in these Eastern Countreys) there are some houses of receipt built at the publick charge, or by some speciall Benefactor, to preserve his memory; most of them strong, and many very fair and lovely: which in the do∣minions of the Persians they call Caravane-Ruwes; in the Turkish, Canes. And for communicating the success of their business unto the place from whence they came, they make use of Pigeons, which is done in this manner. When the Hen-Pigeon fitteth, or hath any young, they take the Cock, and set him in an open Cage: whom, when they have travelled a daies journey, they let go at liberty, and he strait flieth home to his Mate. When they have trained them thus from one place to another, and that there be occa∣sion to send any advertisements, they tie a letter about one of their necks, which at their return home is ta∣ken off by some of the house, advertised thereby of the estate of the Caravan. The like is also used betwixt Ormus, and Balsora. But of this enough.

5. Ctesiphon, on the River Tigris, not far from Seleucia, by whose fall it rose; occasioning the de∣cay thereof, as that did of Babylon. So Pliny, speaking of the fall of Babylon, by the building of Seleucia so neer unto it; then adding, invicem ad hanc exhauriend im, Ctesiphontem juxta tertium ab ea Lapi∣dem condidere Parthi. First built, saith Marcellinus, by Vardanes, afterwards beautified and wal∣led by Pacorus, a Parthian King; and by him made the Seat-Royall of the Persian Kingdome. Many times besieged and assaulted by the Roman Emperors; but most commonly without success; and amongst others, by Julian the Apostate, that bitter enemy of the Gospell, who here breathed out his soul to Satan, in these dying words, Vicisti tandem Galileae. But Vardanes (whosoever he was) cannot of right be called the first founder of it, who raised it rather from the rubbish of an old foundation: this City being the same with that which Moses calleth Calne; and Ezekiel, Canneh, Gen. 11. and Ezek. 27. 23. and therefore rightly said by Pliny to be built in Chalanitide, or the Region of Chalne.

6. Sipparum, remarkable for the great Trench made neer it, to receive the over flowings of Euphrate••, which otherwise might have annoyed the City of Babylon: in compass 1280 furlongs or 160 miles; In depth 20 fathoms. A vast and expencefull work; but that nothing was to be admired when Babylon it self was up and in full prosperity.

7. Apamia, a City of Seleucus foundation also, situate at the fall of Pison into the River of Tigris.

8. Vologesia, placed by Ptolomy amongst the Cities of Chaldaea, but by Marcelinus in Assy••ia; built or repaired by one of the Vologeses Kings of Persia, and from him denominat∣ed.

9. Borsippa, by Ptolomy called Barsita, memorable for the great victory which Cyrus the first Per∣sian Monarch, obtained here against Nabonid the King of Babylon, by Sealiger called Darius Medus, (of which more anon): whom having vanquished, he pardoned him (as he saith) his life, and gave him the government of Carmania.

10. Balsora, the Port Town to Babylon, situate at the fall of Euphrates into Sinus Persi∣cus, and consequently of great wealth and trading: The riches of Arabia, Persia, and some part of India, being landed here, and so carryed to BABYLON, and thence up the water to A••eppo. Supposed to be the City of Teredon, mentioned by Ptolomy; built or repaired by Nebuchadnezzar, and not long since taken from the Turke by Abas, the Persian.

7. ASSYRIA.

ASSYRIA is bounded on the East, with Media, by which parted by the mountain called Coachras; on the West, with Mesopotamia, from which divided by the River Tigris; on the North, with some part of Turcomania, and part of Chaldaea. So called from Assur the sonne of Sem, by whom first inhabited. But having long since lost that name, as to vulgar speech, it is by Niger called A∣d••nsa; by Murcator, Sarh; by the Turks, Arzerum.

The Countrey very plain, and levell, exceeding fruitfull, and abounding in Rivers. For besides Ti∣g••is, which washeth one whole side thereof, Ptolomy assigneth to this Countrey the Rivers of 2. Lyc••••, 3. Cuprus, and 4. Gorgos; all of good note, and all of them increasing, with their tributarie Streams, the greatness of Tigris.

The people were antiently great warriers, and together with the Babylonians or Chaldaeans, command∣ed a great part of the East; extending their dominion from the Mediterranean Sea, to the River Indus; insomuch that not the people of this Province only, but of all the Provinces almost of this spacious Empire, had the name of Assyrians. The men for all this, exceeding formall in their habit, wearing long robes which trailed on the very ground, their hair long, their hats or Caps Pyramidall like the Persian Mucre; not stirring out of doors but perfumed with Musk, rings on their fingers, and a Scepter in their hands; and very frequent in their washings, especially after copulation. As for their women, it was an antient cu∣stome with them, to expose the fairest unto sale in the open Market; and with the money given for those, to put off such as were deformed and not so amiable. And hence perhaps the Fathers of our times have learnt this leston of giving less portions with such daughters as will sell themselves, but greasing the fat sow (as the saying is) with the addition of some hundreds; which made the merry fellow say, That the money were a good match if the wench were away.

The Christian faith was first here planted by Saint Jude, and took such deep root in that plantation, that it could never be pulled up, notwithstanding the cruel persecutions raised against it by the Kings of Per∣sia; who when they saw there was no means to destroy it by violence, attempted in the next place to cor∣rupt it with heresie. And to that end, as also to revenge himself upon the Emperor Heraclius, a great Champion of the Orthodox belief against Nestorianism, Chosroes the great King of Persia inforced all the Christians of his Empire unto those opinions, which he knew that Emperour condemned; permitting none who were counted Catholicks within his Dominions. By means whereof, and afterwards for want of Preachers to instruct them otherwise (the Saracons having conquered the Persian Empire) Nestoria∣nism prevailed so far, that it extended over all the Countreys East of Tigris, as far as India; and North∣wards too amongst the Tartars, of which more hereafter. Governed by their own Patriarch who resi∣deth at Mosul, now the chief City of this Countrey; and honoured by his people with the Title of Jacelich, mistaken or pronounced amiss for Catholique; an attribute given antiently to all Orthodox Pre∣lates.

The Opinions held by them as Nestorians, were, 1. That there were two persons in our Saviour, as well as two natures; but yet confessing that CHRIST from the first instant of his conception, was both God and man. 2. That the blessed Virgin ought not to be called 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, or the Mother of God; but yet acknowledging her to be the Mother of God the Sonne: 3. That Nestorius, condemned for these opinions in the third and fourth Generall Councills, was an holy man; for whose sake they condemn Saint Cyrill his profess'd Antagonist, and all those Councils wherein any censure was laid upon him. In other points, though differing from the Church of Rome, they are right enough, (their rejecting Episcopall Con∣firmation excepted only) as 1. in celebrating the Sacrament of the Lords Supper with leavened bread; 2. communicating in both kinds; 3. enjoining no necessity of ••uricular Confession; 4. contracting mariages in the second degree of Consanguinity; 5. permitting second and third mariages unto men in Orders, after the death of their first wives; 6. not praying before the Cross, nor giving religious worship to the Crucifix, or other Images. So much for these Nestorians, if so named aright, considering the qualifications added unto their opinions; now (but corruptly) called Nostranes; the greatest Sect of Christians in all the East.

The solemnities which these Christians use in contracting mariage, because not very usual, I will here relate. Their Wives they never see till the day of their mariage, but hearing a good report of the young Woman, negotiate with her parents for her. Agreed upon the business, they meet in the Chancell of the Church, wherein there is a partition with an hole in it: the Bridegroom and his friends standing on the one side; the Bride and her kindred on the other. When there, the Cassisse or Church-man biddeth the Bride∣groom to put his hand thorow the hole in the Partition, and take his Bride by the hand, which he doth accordingly: the mother of the Bride, with a sharp-pointed instrument, made of purpose, pricking the Bridegrooms hand all over, with sufficient eagerness. If when he feeleth the smart, he lets go her hand, they take it for a sign that he will not love her; but if he hold her fast, and wring her hand till she cry again, they take it for a very good Omen, and are glad they have so well bestowed her. After the mariage consu∣mate, if a male-child be born unto them, the Father loseth his own name, and is called by the name of his eldest Sonne: so as if the Fathers name be Moses, and his Sonnes name Joseph; the Father is no more called Moses, but Abda-Joseph, or the Father of Joseph. So highly do they reverence mariage, and the fruit thereof, posterity.

It was antiently divided into these six parts, 1. Arraphachitis, bordering on Armenia Major; so cal∣led for Arphaxaditis, or the plantation of Arphaxad, the Sonne of Sem. 2. Adiab••ne, bordering

on Mesopotamia, so called, quasi 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, or inaccessible, because fenced with such unfordable Rivers, Tigrus, and Euphrates, that there was no easie comming to it; 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, as it is in Suidas: or rather for Adiavenena, from Diavas, and Adiavas, the chief Cities of it (the same which Ptolomy called Lycus, and Caprus) as in Marcellinus. 3. Calacine, and 4. 〈◊〉〈◊〉 from Sittace, and Calach, two chief Cities of it; of which more anon. 5. Arbelites, and 6. Apollo∣mates, from Apollonia and Arbela, two others of the principall Cities.

Here then we have four of the Cities of Assyria brought unto our hand, 1. Calach, one of those four which Nimrod built in the Land of Assur, Gen. 10. 11. and one of them to which the Ten Tribes were transplanted by Salmanasser, 2 Kings 17. 6. & 18. 11. of such esteem in those elder dayes, that Calacine, as Ptolomy, or Calachene as Serabo more rightly calleth it, did take name from hence. 2. Sirtace, situate about two nules from, the banks of Tigris, in the way from Babylon to Suja. A City, when it gave name to the parts adjoyning, both great and populous; well seated, in a fruitful soyl, and well shaded with trees of several sorts; supposed by the situation of it to be that Accad, (or rather built in or neer the place of it) which was one of the first four Cities of Nimrods Kingdome. 3. Arbel; on the banks of the River Caprus, built as some say by Belus, (or Belochus) Priscus, an Assyrian King, whence it had the name. Neer unto which there is a place which Strabo calleth 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, or Cupressetum, con∣ceived by some to be the place where Noah framed the Ark. 4. Apollonia, built after the Macedonian conquest, as appeareth by the name which is wholly Greek: not otherwise observable but for giving the name of Apoilomates to the Countrey adjacent. Adde unto these, 5. Gaguamela, situate in the mid∣dle space betwixt Lycus and Caprus; memorable for the last and greatest battle betwixt Alexander and Darius the King of Persia: who had he made good the Eastern banks of the River Tigris, might easily have hindred the Macedonians from coming over: the River being so extremely swift and violent, that the Macedontans were not able to pass it but by linking their hands and armes together, and making one en∣tire body to oppose the current; and therewith all of so great depth, that the footmen were fain to hold their Bows and Arrows over their heads, to keep them from being moistned and made unservicable. But having miserably lost this opportunity by the cowardise of Mazeis, who had the keeping of this pass; he was inforced to venture all upon a battel: drawing unto this place an Army of 50000 horse, and 200000 foot, in their accompt who speak least of it (for Arrianus makes it above a Million.) Opposed by Alex∣ander with no more than 40000 foot, and 7000 horse of his Europaeans; but those victoriously successefule 40000 of the Persians slain, (but Diodorus Siculus speaks of 900000) with the loss of 300 Macedani∣ans onely, as is said by Curtius, In memory of which notable victory, a Mountain neer the place of the battel, was by Alexander called Nicator, known by that name to Strabo and some other antients. 6. Rehoboth, another of the four Cities, which Nimrod is said to have built in Assur; by some supposed to be Birrha, an antient City upon Tigris, and bordering so neer unto Mesopotamia, that by Ptolony it is place in it. Of which more anon. 7. Rhesen, another of the Cities of Nimrods building, seated by Moses between Calach and Ninive, Gen. cap. 10. v. 12. and there commended for a great Cov. Which Character with the site thereof have induced some learned men to think it to be the same which is by Xenophon called Larissa, seated by him on the River Tigris, much about this place, and said to be a Ci∣ty of such strength and greatness, that it was no less than two Parasings, or four miles in compass, the walls in height a hundred foot, twenty five in breadth; so strongly cemented, that Cyrus, who besieged it, could have never taken it if a casual Ecclipse of the Sunne had not discouraged the desendants. But whe∣ther this conjecture be good or not, we have here Larassa for another of the principal Cities. 8. Nixive, by the Greeks and Lutines called Ninus; first built by Nimrod, and called Ninive with relation unto Ninus, his sonne or Nephew, after the example of Cain whose steps he followed: of whom it is said that he built a City, and called after the name of his sonne Enoch, Gen. 4. 17. I know the building of this City is by sonne ascribed to Assar, grounding themselves on that of Moses, Gen. 10. 11. Out of that Land went forth Assur, and built Ninive &c. But I like better of their judgement who take Assar in this place for the name of the Countrey and not of the man; making the Text to speak of Nimrod, and to say of him, Eregressus est in Assur, &c. that is to say, And he went forth to Assur or the land of Assyria, and there built Ninive, Rehoboth, and the rest there named. A City so enlarged by some of the succeeding Kings, that it came at last to be bigger than Babylon, in compass 480 furlongs, or 60. miles; and there∣fore said in the Book of Jonah, to be a City of three dayes journey, in circuit, as indeed it was; ac∣compting 20 miles for a days journey, according to the common estimate of those elder times, as also of the Greeks and Romans in the times succeeding. Nor was it of less strength than greatness, the walls an hun∣dred foot high, and so broad that three Carts might go a brest on the top thereof: and in those walls 1500 Turrets, each of 200 foot in height. So strong, that it was thought to have been impregnable, especially because of an antient Prophecy, which signified that the Town should never be taken, till the River be∣came an enemy to it. A Prophecy which induced Sardanapalus to make it the seat of his warre against Belochus, and Arbaces, then in armes against him: who having besieged it three years without hope of success, at last the River over-flowing, carried before it twenty furlongs of the Wall. Which accident so terrified the effeminate King, that he burnt himself in the midst of his enemies, and left the Town to the Besiegers. Threatned destruction by the preaching of the Prophe: Jonah, it escaped then upon repentance. But the people going on in their wicked courses, it was destroyed by Astyages King of the Medes, that it might no longer be an encouragement to the Assyrians to rebel aginst him, as formerly against some of his Predecessors: and so destroyed, that in the time of Saint Cycil of Alexandria, as himself affirmeth in the comment on the Prophet Nihum, 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, that one scould scarse dis∣cern in what place it stood. 9. Mosul, at this time, and for long since, the chief of Assyria, seated on

the Tigris, and raised out of the ruins of Ninive: of most note for being the ordinary abiding place of the Nestorian Patriarch, who either in the City it self, or the Monasterie of Saint Hermes neer adjoyn∣ing to it, hath his constant Residence. The Nestorians in this City so considerable both in power and num∣ber, that though it be in the hands of Mahometans, either Turks or Persians, yet there are numbred in it fifteen Christian Churches, and at least 40000 souls. A Sect so maligned by the Pope, (whom they commonly call the Reprobate Bishop) for the greatness of the jurisdiction which this Patriarch hath; that not contented to withdraw the Indians from him, (whereof more hereafter) Pope Julius the third, see up an Anti-Patriarch against him, to whom he gave the title of the Catholique of Musal also; to whom the Nestorians dwelling in the Northern parts of Mesopotamia (if some writers of the Papal party may be believed) do submit themselves. 10. Arzeri, of greater strength than Mosul, though of less antiquity and repute; from which the whole Province of Assyria, is now called Arzirum. And 11. Scheheru∣er, at this time of the greatest note, as being the ordinary Residence of the Turkish Beglerbeg or Bassa, who hath 10000 Timariots under his command, to defend this Countrey, and be ready for any service, as occasion is.

MESOPOTAMIA.

MESOPOTAMIA, is bounded on the East, with the River Tigris, by which parted from Assycia; on the West, with Euphrates, which divideth it from Comagena, a Province of Syria; on the North, with Mount Taurus, by which separated from Armenia Major; and on the South, with Chaldaea, and Arabia Deserta, from which last it is parted by the bendings of Euphrates also.

In the Scripture it is called most commonly by the name of Padan Aram, that is Syria Culta; but that name properly belonging to the North-parts of it: Aram or Syriae, because inhabited originally by the Ara∣mites, whom the Greeks call Syri; and Padan or Culta, from the fruitfulness and riches of it, exceeding plentifully stored both with corn and wine, and furnished with all necessaries for the life of man; in that re∣gard by Strabo called Mesopoamia Felix. The Southern parts hereof being barren and full of Desarts, not having any herbage in them, 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, nor any kind of Tree, as we read in Xenophon; amongst some of the antient Writers, had the name of Arabia: partly because so like in nature to Arabia Deserta, and partly because planted with Arabian Colonies. The name which comprehends both parts is sometimes Syria Trans-fluvtalis, or Syria beyond the River (Euphrates,) of which see 2 Sam. 10. 16. But generally in the Hebrew it is called Arom-Naharatjn, which the Greeks render properly by Meso∣potamia, or the Countrey in the middle of Rivers; environed by Tigris on the East, and Enphrates on the West and South; the River Chabaras or Abaras, passing also thorow it. The Latines generally call it by the same name which the Greeks had given it: Priscian only to shew his faculty in Grammar, calling it Medamna, by the Turks now Diarbech.

As is the Countrey, such the People, the most Adjective of any we have met with hitherto; able at no time to stand by themselves, but still requiring the addition of some neighbour Nation to be joyned unto them. Nothing that they can call their own, their Name, their Language, nor their Countrey. Behold∣ing for their Nime in the North, to Syria, in the South, to Arabia; the (haldaeans also putting in for a share, and challenging those parts which lie next Assyria, to belong to them. Their Language antiently the Syriack, at this day the Arabick. Their Countrey successively subjected to the Babylonians, Assy∣rians, Medes and Persians. From them first conquered by the Romans, under the conduct of Pompey; reduced into the form of a Province, by the Emperour Traian; more fully setled and confirmed by Aurelia∣nus. But being recovered by the Persians, they fell together into the power of the Saracens, and are now commanded by the Turks. Never appearing of themselves on the Stage of action, but when once God shewed his mighty power in their many weaknesses, and raised them up to be a Scourge to the house of Israel; of which see Judges chap. 3. v. 8. Hired afterwards by Adaedezer King of Syria Zobah, in his warre against David; by whom most shamefully defeated, 2 Sam. 10. 16, 18. Yet notwithstanding memorable in the Book of God for the birth of Abraham and Rebecca; the long abode of Jacob, and the birth of his Children: in that respect affording an Original to the Hebrew Nation.

The Christian faith was first preached here by Saint Thaddaeus, one of the 70. Disciples, Anno 43. upon this occasion. Agbarus the Toparch, or Prince of Edessa, one of the chief Cities of this Coun∣trey, having been long afflicted with an incurable infirmity, and hearing of the fame of JESVS, be∣seeched him by a special message to come and help him: whereunto our Saviour made this Answer, that he could not visit him in person, the things he was to do, whilest upon the earth, being to be performed onely in the land of Canaan; but that he would take care of his health in convement time. Accordingly, not along after his Ascension, Saint Thomas the Apostle, by immediate revelation from our Saviour, sent Thaddaeus thither; by whom the Prince was cured, and the Gospel preached, and many of the Nation con∣vered to it; the Ats whereof, together with the Copies of the several Letters from Agbarus to CHRIST, and from CHRIST to him, preserved in the Archives of Edessa, were by Eusebius translated out of the Syriack, and inserted into the body of his Ecclesiasticall History, lib. 1. cap. 14. Once planted, it found good increase, continuing in the purity of it till about the yeare 530. at what time one Jacobus Syrus (so called from his birth and abode in Syria) took on him the defence of the Errors of Eutyches, touching the unity of natures in CHRIST our Saviour. Whose followers finding the Patriarchs of Antirch too vigilant over them, removed for the most part further off, seding themselves in Babylonia, and Mesopota∣mia, where they continned in great numbers: Governed by their own Patriarch, to whom the Jacobites in Syria are also subject, who takes unto himself the title of Patriarch of Antioch, and is successively cal∣led

Ignatius, as if the undoubted Successor of that Saint and Martyr; superior in that regard to the Patriarch of Hierusalem who is also a Jacobite. The Patriarchal See, fixt in the Monastery of Saphran, neer the City of Merdin; but the Residence of the Patriarch for the most part at Caramit: the number of Chri∣stians under his obedience, computed formerly at 160000 Families, reduced since unto 50000. That which they hold as Jacobites, distinct from all other Christians, is 1. The acknowledgement but of one nature, one will, and one operation (as there is but one person) in Christ our Saviour. 2. In signing their Children before Baptism, in the Face or Arm, with the sign of the Cross, imprinted with a burning iron. 3. Retaining Circumcision, and using it in both Sexes. 4. Affirming the Angels to consist of two substances, Fire, and Light; and 5. Honouring the memory of Dioseurias (of Alexandria) and Jacobus Syrus, condemned by the antient Councils. The points wherein they differ from the Church of Rome,

1. Not enjoining on the People the necessity of Confession to a Priest, before they admit them to com∣municate.

2. Not admitting Purgatory, nor Prayers for the Dead.

3. Administring the Sacrament of the Eucharist in both kinds.

4. Allowing the marriage of Priests; And

5. Teaching that the souls of men deceased, are not admitted presently to the Vision of God, but re∣main somewhere in the Earth, to expect Christs coming. In which last, (letting aside the determination of the place) as they have many of the Fathers concurring with them; so to the first (touching the unity of nature in our Saviour Christ) they have of late added such qualifications, as possibly may make it capable of an Orthodox sense.

Chief Rivers of this Countrey, (besides Tigris and Euphrates, of which more hereafter,) 1. Chabi∣ras, which rising in Mount Masius, passing directly South, falleth into Euphrates; as also doth, 2. Syngarus, by Pliny, called Masca, arising out of the Mountain Syngarus, which is but the more We∣stern part of the said Mount Masius. Which names of Masea, Masius, and the Masicni (being the name of a People dwelling thereabouts) shew plainly that they go upon very good grounds who place Mesch, or Mesich, one of the sonnes of Aram in these parts of the Countrey.

It was divided antiently into, 1. Anthemasia, 2. Chalcitis. 3. Gaulinitis. 4. Accabene. 5. Ancorabitis, and 6. Ingine: each part containing several Cities or Towns of name. These six when con∣quered by the Romans reduced unto two Provinces onely, viz. 1. Mesopotamia, lying on the South of Mount Masius, or the head of Chaboras; and 2. Osrloene on the North: this last so named from one Osrhoes, the Prince or Governout of these parts in the time of the Persians, as Procopius telleth us.

Chief places of the whole, 1. Edessa, the Metropolis of Osrhoene, situate on the River Scirtas, which runneth thorow the middest of it, not far from the fall thereof into Euphrates. Memorable for the Story of Agbarus before related, amongst Church-Historians: and in the Roman Histories, for the death of the Empe∣ror Caracalla, slain here by the appointment of Macrinus, Captain of his guard. The occasion this. The Emperour conscious to himself of his own unworthiness, employed one Maternianus to enquire a∣mongst the Magicians in the Empire, who was most likely to succeed him: by whom accordingly advertised that Macrinus was to be the man. The letters being brought unto Caracalla, as he was in his Chariot, were by him delivered with the rest of the Packets, to the hands of Macri∣nus, (who by his Office was to be attendant on the Emperiours person) that he might open them, and signifie unto him the contents thereof at his better leisure. Finding by this the danger in which he stood, he resolved to strike the first blow; and to that end entrusted Martialis, one of his Centurions, with the execution; by whom the Emperour was here killed as he withdrew himself, Levandae ve∣sicae gratia, as my Author hath it. So impossible a thing it is to avoid ones Destiny; so vain a thing for any Prince to think of destroying his Successor: and therefore very well said to Nero in the times of his tyranny, Omnes licet occider is, Successorem tunm occidere non potes, that though he cau∣sed all the men of eminence to be forthwith murdered; yet his Successor would survive him, and escape the blow. But to return unto Edessa, in following times it was made one of the four Tetrar∣chies of the Western Christians when they first conquered Syria, and the Holy Land; the two first Gover∣nors or Tetrarchs, successively succeding Godfrey of Bouillon in the Kingdome of Hierusalem. But in the year 1142. it was again recovered by Sanguin the Turk, Father of Noradin Sultan of Damascus, and by the loss thereof no fewer than three Arch-Bishopricks withdrawn from the obedience of the See of Antioch.

2. Cologenbar, another strong peece adjoining, besieged on the taking of Edessa, by the same Sanguin, who was here stabbed in a drunken quarrell by one of his familiar friends; and the Fort saved for that time.

3. Nisibis, situate somewhat to the East of Mount Masius, called also Antiochia Mygdo∣nia; from the River Mygdonius, which runneth thorow it; and afterwards Constantia, from Constantius the Sonne of Constantine. A City of great note in those elder times, a Roman Colony, and the Metropolis of the Province of Mesopotamia, properly and specially so called: which being besieged by Supores the King of Persia, (Constantius ruling in the East) and in no small danger to be lost, was gallantly defended by James the then Bishop of it, whom Theodoret calls not onely, Episcopum Civitatis, sed Principem & Ducem, not the Bishop only of the City, but the Prince and Captain of it, libr. 2 cap 31. So little inconsistencie was there found in those early daies be∣twixt the Episcop all function and civill businesses, that the Bishops were not interdicted from the Acts of war, when the necessities of the State did invite them to it. The City not long after most unworthily delivered to the said Sapores by the Emperour Jovinian; which drew along with it in short time the loss of the Pro∣vince.

4. Vr, seated on the East of Nisibis, betwixt it and Tigris; and so placed by Ammianus who had travelled this Countrey. Conceived to be the Birth-place of Abraham, and called Vr of the Chaldees, Gen. 11. 28. either because the Chaldees were in those daies possessed of the place; or because the name of Chaldaea did comprehend also those parts of this Countrey which lay towards Tigris, as was shewn be∣fore. For that the place from which Terah the Father of Abraham did return to Haran in Mesopot amia, was rather situate in this coast where Vr is placed by Ammianus, than betwixt the Lakes of Chaldaea and the Persiau Golf, where most Writers place it, may appear probable for these reasons.

1. Because it is said by Josuah, chap. 24. ver. 12. That Terah the Father of Abraham and the Fa∣ther of Nachor dwelt on the other side of the Flood; that is to say on the further side of the River Emphra∣tes, and that too 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, as the Septuagim; ab initio, as the Vulgar Latine; in the first beginning. Which cannot be understood of any Vr, placed on or neer the Lakes of Chaldaea, those being on this side of that River. 2. Because all the rest of Abrahams Ancestors from Phaleg downwards, were seated in the Northern parts of Assyria and Mesopotamia: and it were strange that Terah should be planted so far from the rest of his kindred. 3. Because from Vr in Mesopotamia neer the banks of Tigris, the way to Canaan, (to which Terah did intend to go) was directly by Haran: whereas if he had dwelt (as some say he did) by the Lakes of Chaldaea, his way had been directly West thorow Arabia Deserta, and not to have travelled, with his family, so far North as Haran; and then to have fallen back as much South∣ward, as he had gone Northward, crossing Euphrates twice with his herds and Cattel. 5. Haran, the place to which Terah did remove when he went from Vr, and from which Abraham did remove when he went towards Canaan, so named in memory of Haran the sonne of Terah: but called afterwards by the name of Carrae, and by that name well known to the Roman Writers for the death of Crassus, that wealthy Roman, whose estate, (besides the tenth which he offered to Hercules, and three moneths corn distribut∣ed amongst the poor) amounted to 7100. Talents, which comes in our money to one Million, 331250. l. But all his wealth could not preserve him from the slaughter, slain neer this City, with the routing of his Army al∣so by Horodes King of Parthia; of which briefly Lncan,

—miscrando funere Crassus Assyrias Latio maculavit sanguine Carras.

Which may be Englished to this purpose,

By a defeat lamented Crassus stains With Roman blood the Assyrian Carras Plai.

Called the Assyrian Carrae by Poeticall Licence, because the Assyrians formerly had been Lords thereof. And no less memorable was it in the times foregoing, for a famous Temple of the Moon, worshipped here (but in no place else) under both Sexes: some honouring it as female Deity, then called Dea Luna; and others in the shape and dress of a man, and called Deus Lunus. But with this fortune and success, as faith Spartianus, qut Lunam foemineo nomine putabat nuncupandam, is mulieribus semper inserviat; that they who worshipped it in the form of a Woman, should be alwaies subject to their Wives (I trow there were but few of that Religion) qui vero Marem deum crederet, is uxori dominetur; but he that worshipped it as a man, should preserve the masterie. 6. Amida, neer the River Tigris, the Metropolis of Mesopo∣tamia when one Province only, and before it fell into the hands of the Romans: much beautified by Constantius the Sonne of Constantine, by whom named Constantias. But that new name dying with him, the old revived: of great strength, as a strontire Town against the Persians, and by them much ai∣med at. Honoured of late times with the Residence of the Patriatch of the Jacobite Christians, as the chief City of this Province: for this cause also made the dwelling of the Pseudo-Patriarch of the Nesto∣rians (or Nostranes) of the Popes erection; and the chief Seat also of the Bassa or other Officer, govern∣ing this Countrey for the Turks; by whom called Caramit, or Kara Amida, that is to say, Amidae the black, because it was walled with black stone. 7. Phalga, or Phaliga, at the meeting of Chabe∣ras with Euphrates not far from Carrae, mentioned by Stephanus, and Arrianus, and by Ptolomy mistakingly called Pharga; the seat or first plantation of Phaleg, one of Abrahams Ancestors: Serug, another of them giving name to 8. Sarug, about a daies journey off from Haran, spoken of by some later writers. 9. Singara, on the River so named, a well fortified City in the time of Ammianus, by whom mentioned, lib. 20. 10. Berabde, mentioned by the same Author, by whom said to have been a very strong Fort, seated on a pretty high hill, and bending towards the banks of Tigris; before whose times it had antiently bin called Phoenicha. 11. Virta, supposed to have been the work of Alexander the Great, circled with walls, environed with half-moones and Bulwarks, and made unaccessible: in vain besieged by Sapores the Persian King after the taking of Bezabde. The same perhaps with the Birtha of Ptolomy. 12. Merdin, not far from which in the Monastery of Saphran, is the Patriarchall See of the Jacobite Sectaries.

The first Inhabitants of these Countries, though united from the first begining under the same Princes, and form of Government; came from severall Families: all the three sonnes of Noah concurring as it were in this plantation. From Nimrod, Havilah, and others of the posterity of Chus, the sonne of Ham, came the Babylonians: with whom Chesed the Sonne of Nachor, of the house of Sem, intermingling fa∣milies; or being the Author of their language, or of some other signall benefit; gave to them the name

of Chaldim, whence came that of Chaldaeans. From Assur, Arphaxad, and those of Ar∣phaxads posterity, intermingled with the Sonnes of Mash, the sonne of Aram, came the Me∣sopotamians, and Assyrians. And that Japhet also and his Children may put in for a part, the neighbourhood of the Medes, and Albanese, descended from him, makes it somewhat proba∣ble.

But, whatsoever parents they descended from, Nimrod the Sonne of Chus made so bold with them, as to bring them under his command: planting in Chaldaea, the Cities of Babylon, and Calne; in Assyria, Ninive, Rhesem, and Calach; and finally Rehoboth (if that were Birtha, as some think it was) in Mesopotamia. By these strong Forts he curbed the natives, and assured his power; being the first that altered the Paternall form of Government, and drew unto himself the government of severall Nations, not having any dependance upon one another. The foundation thus laid by him, his Succes∣sors soon raised the building to a wondrous height; advancing the Assyrian Empire, from the Mediter∣ranean Sea, to the River Indus; and that too in a shorter time than could be imagined, but that the world was then divided into petit States, not cemented together with the ligaments of power and po∣licy: for though there be litle found of Belus the Sonne of Nimrod, but that he spent most of his time in draining the marishes, and making firm ground of those vast fennes which lay neer to Babylon, which were works of peace: yet by those and the like works of peace he so setled his affairs at home, that he gave his Sonne Ninus the better opportunity to look abroad; who mightily improved his Empire, and was the greatest and most powerfull of all that line; extending his dominions from the River Indus, to the Mediterranean; and from the Caspian Sea, to the Southern Ocean. His Successors we shall find in the following Cata∣logue of

The Assyrian Monarchs.

• A. M.
• 1798 1. Nimrod, called by some Saturnus Babylonius, the Sonne of Chus, and Nephew of Cham, was the first who altered the Paternal government, and usurped dominion over others; mak∣ing Babylon his Imperiall City. 47.
• 1845. 2. Belus, or Jupiter Babylonicus, the Sonne of Nimrod, whose Image was worshipped by the old Idolaters under the names of Bel and Baal. 62.
• 1907. 3. Ninus, the Sonne of Belus, conquered Armenia, Syria, Media, Bactria, and the Persian Provinces, and removed the Imperiall Seat to Ninive, by him much beautified and inlarged. 52.
• 1959 4. Semiramis, the wife of Ninus, subdued the Arabians; but invading the Indians also, she was vanquished and slain by their King Staurobates. Of this great Lady it is said, she was born in Ascalon, a Town of Syria, and exposed to the fury of wilde beasts. But being born not to die so ingloriously, she was brought up by shepherds, and at full age presented to the Syrian Vice-roy, who gave her in mariage to his onely Sonne. Going with him to the warres, she fell in acquaintance with Ninus, who liking her person and spirit, took her to his bed. This bred in him a greater affection towards her, so that he granted her at her request, the command of the Empire for five daies; making a Decree that her will in all things should be punctually performed: which boon being gotten, she put on the Royall Robes, and (as some Writers doe report) commanded the King to be slain. Having thus gotten the Empire, she exceedingly enlarged it, leading with her an Army consisting of one hundred thousand Chariots of warre, three millions of Foot, and half a million of Horse. A woman in whom there was nothing not to be honoured or applauded, but her insatiable lusts: in which if the Greek writers say true (as we have no reason to believe it of so gallant a woman) she was very guilty.
• 2001 5. Ninus II. the Son of Ninus and Se∣miramis.
• 2039 6. Arias 30.
• 2069 7. Arabius 40.
• 2109 8. Belus II. 30.
• 2139 9. Armamatrites.
• 2177 10. Belochus Prisc. 35.
• 2212 11. Belochus Jun. Balaeus 52.
• 2264 12. Altades 32.
• 2296 13. Mamitns 30.
• 2326 14. Mancaleus 30.
• 2356 15. Spherus 20.
• 2376 16. Mancaleus II. 30.
• 2406 17. Sparetus 40.
• 2446 18. Ascatades 40.
• 2486 19. Amintes 45.
• 2511 20. Belochus Jun. 45.
• 2556 21. Bellopares 30.
• 2586 22. Lamprides 22.
• 2618 23. Sasares 20.
• 2638 24. Lampares 20.
• 2668 25. Panmas 45.
• 2713 26. S••ramas 19.
• 2732 27. Mitreus 27.
• 2759 28. Tatanes 32.
• 2791 29. Tautes 40.
• 2831 30. Tineus 30.
• 2861 31. Dercillus 40.
• 2901 32. Eupales 38.
• 2939 33. Loastines 45.
• 2984 34. Pyrithiades 30.
• 3014 35. Ophrateus 20.
• 3034 36. Ophraganeus 50.
• 3084 37. Ascrasapes 24.
• 3126 38. Sardanapalus, by Eusebius called Tonosconcolos, the last King of this Race. Of which

• being 38. in all, there is scarce any thing remaining but the very names: registred in this order by Berosus, or rather by Frier Annius a Monk of Viturbum in Tuscany, who hath thrust upon the world, the fancies of his own brain, under the name of that antient Historian. The chief Kings of note after Semiramis, were,

1. Ninus, or Zameis her Sonne; who by his Deputies and Lieutenants subdued the Arrians, Bac∣trians, and Caspians, but was otherwise a man of effeminate and unkingly carriage. And therefore is conceived to be the elder Bacchus, so much celebrated amongst the Grecians.

2. Belus the second, who recovered that Countrey which afterwards was called Judaea, to the Assy∣rian Empire, from which it had revolted in the time of his Predecessor, (on the defeat of Amraphel, one of his Lieutenants, by the sword of Abraham,) and subdued many other nations.

3. Belochus Prise. the tenth King, who by some writers is said to be the Author of Divination by the flying of Birds, called Auspicium. For of Sooth-saying there were in all four kinds.

1. This Auspicium, quasi Avispicium, taken from the flight of birds, either on the right hard, or on the left; (and hence the Proverb commeth, avi sinistra, good luck, because in giving, the right hand is opposite to the receivers left;) or from the number of the birds, whence R••mulus had promised to him the Em∣pire, before his Brother, because he had seen the double number of Vultures: or lastly, from the nature of them, whence the same Romulus, seeing the Vultures, was (saith Florus) spei plenus urbem bellatriem fore, ta illi sauguini, & praedae assuetae aves pollicebantur.

2. Aruspicium, ab inspiciendo, in which the Sooth-sayers observed whether the Beast to be sacrifised came to the Altars willingly, or not: whether the entrails were of a naturall colour, exulcerate, &c or whether any part were wanting. All Histories afford variety of Examples in this kind; I need give no particular instance. A kind of Divination said to be practised first by the Tuscans, or Hetrurians; instructed in the knowledge thereof by one called Tages, who appearing to certain Ploughmen out of a Furrow, caught them this mystery, and so vanished.

3. Tripudium, so called quasi Terripudium, and Terripavium, from the trembling or shaking of the Earth, was a conjecture of future successes, by the rebounding of crums cast unto Chichens. We have an instance of this in the life of Tiberius Gracchus, who being seditiously busie in promoting the Law A∣graria, was fore-warned by the keeper of his Chickens to desist from that enterprise, because when he had thrown the crums to the Coop, there came out but one of the Chickens only, and the same without eat∣ing went back again, which was taken for a sign of ill luck, as the greedy devouring of them had been of good. But Tiberius slighting the advertisement, and pursuing his design, was the same day slain.

4. Augurium, so called ab avium garritu, was a prediction from the chirping or chattering of birds; as also from the sounds and voices heard they knew not whence, nor on what occasion. In which later kind the death of Caesar was divined from the clattering of Armour in his house, and the poisoning of Ger∣manicus by the sounding of a Trumpet of its own accord: in the former, an Owl screeching in the Se∣••ate-house was deemed ominous to Augustus; and a company of Crowes following Setanus to his house with great noise and clamor, was judged to be fatall to that great Favorite; and so it prov∣ed.

4. Manitus, the thirteenth King; who revived again the antient Discipline, corrupted by the sloathfulness and effeminacie of his Predecessors; and by the terrour of his name awed the Aegypti∣ans.

5. Ascatades, the eighteenth King, more absolute in Syria, and the Western-parts, than any of the Kings before him.

6. Sardanapalus, the last King of this Race, who being wondrous effeminate, and utterly unable to govern so great an Empire, gave opportunity to Arbaces his Lieutenant in Media to conspire against him. By whom, associated with Belochus Governour of Babylon, he was besieged in his City of Ninive: and there reduced unto such extremities, that gathering his treasures all together, he burnt himself and them in one funerall Pile, eo solum facto virum imitatus, as is said by Justine. The treasure which he is said to have burnt with him amounted to one hundred Millions of Talents of Gold, and a thousand Millions of Talents of Silver: which in our English money comes to twenty thousand and five hundred Millions of pounds. A mass of money, which as it must be long in gathering, so probably it had not seen the Sun in many years, and therefore grown rusty, desired a fire to purge it. This Sardanapalus afforded it, it may be to end his life with that, in which he placed his Summum Bonum: It may be in spight unto his enemies; and it is possible it might be in policy, that so great a treasure not falling to the possession of his foes, might so much the more disable them from making resistance against, or detaining the Empire from his next right∣full Successors. For it is of all things the most foolish, both to lose our Treasure, and with it to enrich our Adversaries. On which consideration the Spaniards fired their Indian Fleet at Gades, and the Geno∣ese theirs at Tripolis; that their lading might not come into the Possession of their enemies, the English and Mahometans. After the death of this Sardanapalus, Arbaces took Media and Persia with the confining Provinces: Belochus strengthened himself in Assyria, Chaldaea, and the adjacent Regions, his Kingdome being called the Kingdome of Assyria.

The new Kings of Assyria and Chaldaea.

• A. M.
• 3146. 1. Phul Belochus, the beginner of this new Monarchy.
• 3194. 2. Phul Assur, destroyed Galilee, and subdued the Kingdome or Damascus, the same who

• is called Tiglah Ph••lassar in the holy Scriptures.
• 3217. 3. Salmanassar, who destroyed Samaria, and ruined the Kingdome of Israel, and carried the 10 Tribes to perpetual Captivity. This is the Nabonassar of the Chr••nologers.
• 3227. 4. Sennacherib, whose blasphemous hoast was vanquished by Angels from heaven, and he himself murdred by his two sonnes Adramelech and Sharezer. 7.
• 3233. 5. Asserhaddon, who revenging his Fathers death on his brothers, was deposed by his Deputy of Chaldaea, and the seat Royal transferred from Ninive to Babylon. 10.
• 3243. 6. Merodach Baladan, governour of Babylon, succeeded his Master in the Throne, conceived by some to be the Mardocempades of Ptolomy, by others to be also the fame King who by his Captain Holofernes did so plague Judaea.
• 3283. 7. Ben Merodach 30th sonne of Merodach Baladan. 21.
• 3304. 8. Nabopullassar, who vanquished Pharaoh Necho King of Egypt. 25.
• 3339. 9. Nabuchodonosor the Great, by some called the Hercules of the East: who conquered Egypt in the life of his Father, with whom he reigned for a time, and mightily enlarged the City of Babylon, he joyned also with Astyages King of Medes, in subverting the pround City of Ninive; and in the 18th. year of his reign destroyed Hierusalem, and carried the People captive unto Babylon. But in the last seven years of his reign he was so distracted, that he lived not much unlike the Beasts of the Field; according to the word of God spoken by Daniel, chap. 4. during which time his sonne Evilmerodach, his daughter Nicocris with Niglissat her husband, and Laborasaradach their sonne, governed his Empires as Protectors; and there∣fore are by some reckoned as Kings. Finally Nabuchadnezzar having recovered his senses, was again restored unto the Throne, and died, when he had reigned in all 44. years.
• 3583. 10. Evilmerodach; the sonne of Nabuchadnezzar, slain by Astyages, King of the Medes. 26.
• 3409. 11. Balthassar, sonne of Evilmerodach (the Nabonidus of Berosus, a Prince of a dissolute and cruel nature, was in the later end of his reign assailed by Cyaxares the Sonne of Astyages, (whom the Scriptures call Darius Medus,) and by Cyrus the Persian; by whom he was slain in the 17th. year of his reign, and the Empire of the Babylonians was transferred to the Medes and Persians. A. M. 3426.

That this was the end of Balthassar, is the common opinion. But Josephus Scaliger in his learned and industrious work, De emendatione temporum, maketh him to be slain in a tumult by his own people: who elected into the Empire a Noble man of the Medes, called in prophane stories, Nabonidus; in divine, Darius Medus; who after a 17 years reign was slain by Cyrus King of the Persians. But by the leave of so worthy a man, this cannot hold good. For the Lord by his Prophet Jeremy, had pronounced, (Chap. 27.) That all Nations should serve Nabuchadnezzar, and his sonne, and his sonnes sonne, whereas Nabonidus was a Prince of strange blood, and so the Nations were not to serve him; and in Balthassar, the sonnes sonne of Nabuchadnezzar, was this word accomplished. But let us examine his arguments, and withall the scoffes, which very prodigally he bestoweth on such as maintain the contrary opinion: Natio Chrono∣logorum, the whole rout of Chronologers; boni & diligentes viri, good simple meaning men; & addunt alta nihil veriora, are his first complements; Vt igitur, quod Chronologorum est, omnesresiptscant, &c. therefore that they may repent their ever being Chronologers, he bringeth in Berosus, Cited by Jose∣phus, in his first book against Appion. But Berosus there maketh Nabonidus (to whom he saith the Kingdome of Balthassar was by the people delivered) to be a Babylonian, and not as Scaliger would have him say, a noble man of the Medes: neither can the authority of Berosus countervail that of Daniel, who in his 6 Chapter telleth Balthassar, that his Kingdome should be divided among the Medes and Persians. His second argument is drawn from the nature of the word 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, as it is in the same Chapter, and Darius the Mede took the Empire: by which word took is implyed (saith he) not a forcible in vasion, but a willing acceptance of the Empire offered. To this we answer, that Dari∣us indeed took the Empire quietly and willingly, being offered unto him by Cyrus, and his army consisting of Medes and Persians: who according to the word of God, had taken it from Balthassar, Darius being then absent. Quid si probavero (saith he) eum cognominatum fuisse Medum? he hath yet one trick more than all these; and Medus must not be the national name, but the surname of Darius, which he proveth out of a fragment of Megasthenes, cited by Eusebius, in his work de praeparatione Evange∣lica, where he is called 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, &c. an argument of all others the most slight and tri∣vial. For besides that 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 may there as well be the name of his Nation, as of his Family; and besides that it thwarteth the places of Jeremy and Daniel already quoted; it is diametrally opposite to another place of the same Daniel, in his ninth chapter; where he is called Darius, of the seed of the Medes. Of this Darius more anon when we come into Media. As for Nabonidus, questionless he was the same with Balthassar. For besides that Josephus, and Berosus, attribute to either of them the reign of 17. years, the same Josephus (who might best know the truth in this case) telleth us that Balthassar was by the Babyloni∣ans called Naboandel; a name not so great a stranger to Nabonidus, as Scaligers Darius, or Herodotus his Labonitus. But in this we must pardon Joseph. Scorn and contradiction was a part of his essence. For had he not been in some things singular, in all, peremptory; he had neither been a Saliger, nor the sonne of Julius.

But leaving Joseph to the singularity of his own conceits; we find nothing done by the Assyrians or Chal∣aeans after this subjection, which might denote them to have been once the Lords of so great an Empire. Successively inslaved by the Medes, Persians, and Macedonians; then by the Persians again, after∣wards by the Saracens, next by the Turks, a third time by the Persians, once again by the Turks of the

Ottoman Family, unto whom now subject: never endeavouring to assert in the way of war, or oppositi∣on, either their antient reputation, or their native liberties; but suffering themselves to be won, lost, fought for, and again recovered by their quarrelsome Masters, as if they had no title to their own Countrey, but were born to follow the fortunes of all pretenders. The reason of which is principally to be as∣cribed to the form of Government used amongst the Persians, which was so Despoticall and absolute, if not tyrannicall, that they held all the people conquered by them in the nature of slaves; not suffering any to grow great in a state of inheritance, or to enjoy any place of power and profit under them in the conquer∣ed Provinces, but at the pleasure of the Prince: as it is now used amongst the Turks of the Ottoman Em∣pire. By means whereof, the great men having no alliances amongst themselves, and as few de∣pendants amongst the people; were never able to take head against the Conqueror; but in the fall of the present Prince fell together with him: it being a good rule of Machiavet, that where the antient Nobility is in good regard linked in alliances with themselves, and well respected by the common and inferiour peo∣ple, there it is difficult for the Invader, though a Conqueror, to win a Countrey, and harder to keep it being conquered. But on the other side, where Nobility is quite worn out, & the Prince doth hold his Subjects in the nature of slaves, there both the Conquest will be easie, and soon assured. For to what purpose should the Subjects resist the Conqueror, or stand any longer to their King, than he stands to himself, when they are sure the Conqueror can lay upon them no heavyer burdens, than they were accustomed to before; and have withal a flattering hope that their new Masters may be gentler to them, than their former were? It fares with them no otherwise than with Aesops Ass, which refused to make the opportunity of an escape from the hands of the enemie, by which he was taken, because he knew it was not possible they should lay more load up∣on his back, than his old Master made him bear. To which condition the Chaldeans and Assyrians being brought by the Persians, and never accustomed to the tast of a better fortune: have followed the same successes as the Persians did; falling together with them from one hand to another; the particular accompt of whose estate we shall find in Persia: taking this onely for the close, that when Solyman the Magnificent had discomfited Tamas King of Persia, and taken the great City of Bagdat; Ca∣ramit, Merdin, and the rest both in Assyria, Chaldaea, and Mesopotamia, submitted to him with∣out any resistance, and received his Garrisons. And for a confirmation of his estate he received at the hand of the Caliph of Babylon, who by an old Prerogative had the nomination or confirmation at the least of the Kings of Assyria, and the Sultans of Aegypt, the Royall Ornaments and Ensignes, Anno 1534. in∣corporating by that means those Regions into his estates, and making them Provinces of his Empire; in which he left a Beglerbeg at Bagdat to command in chief; and divers Sanziacks in their severall and respe∣ctive Provinces. And though the Persian Kings have since taken, and are still possessed of some places of importance in them; yet I account them in regard of the said investiture, and the long possession following on it, for Provinces of the Turkish Empire: as I do Media of the Persian, though Tauris and some other peeces of it be possessed by the Turks.

OF MOUNT-TAURUS.

MOVNT-TAVRVS is a constant and continuall Ridge of hils, which extend from the Mediterranean to the Indian Seas; running thorow the whole length of Asia from West to East, and dividing it, as the Aequator doth the Globe, into North and South. It was called Taurus from the word Tur or Taur, which in the Syriack and Chaldaean sig∣nifieth a mountain, the common name of all high mountains being made peculiar unto this, by reason of its greatness and continued length; yet so, that it had other names also in some parts thereof, according to the Regions and Nations by which it passed, and on which it bordered. The course where of is thus set down by Sir Walter Ralegh: premising onely, that it beginneth in the Pro∣vince of Lycia, a Region of Asia Minor, neer the Mediterranean. These Mountains (saith he) which sunder Cilicia from the rest of Asia the less, on the North thereof are called Taurus; and where they part it from Comagena a Province of Syria, they are called Amanus. On the East side of the River Euphrates (which forceth it self a way thorow it) it sometimes resumeth the name of Taurus, as in Ptolomies three first Tables of Asia, and sometimes taketh the name of Niphates, as in the fourth: retaining that uncertain appellation, so long as they bound. Armenia from Mesopotamia. After the River Tigris hath also cut them asunder, they continue the name of Niphates altogether, untill they separate Assyria and Media, but then they call themselves Coatras: although between the upper and lower Media, they appear not alwaies, but are seen discontinued, and broke in pieces; such parts of it as are found in the midle of that Countrey being called Orontes, those which lie more towards the East being named Coronus; out of the Southern parts whereof issueth the River of Bagradus, which divideth the antient Persia from Caramania. Continuing further East-ward by the name of Coronus, they give unto the Parthians and Hyrcanians their proper Countries: and afterwards change themselves into the Moun∣tains of Seripht, out of which riseth the River Margus. And now beginning to draw towards the end of their course, they first make themselves the South border of Bactria; and are then known by the name of Paropamisns: and after take unto themselves the name of Caucasus, where the famous Rivers Indus, Hydaspis, and Zaradrus, have their first beginnings. In this point do they hold their heads exceeding high, to equal the Mountains of Imaus, whom they encounter within the 35, 36. & 37. Degrees of Latitude, and the 140 Degree of Longitude: known by no other name than this, till finally they terminate their course in the Indian Seas. So farre, and to this purpose, that noble Gentleman. It may be added hereunto, that though the antient Writers could trace the course of this Mountain no further than the meeting of it with Imaus; yet later observations follow it to the wall of China: the parts beyond Caucasus being now known by the names of Delanguer, and Naugrocot. But this is to be understood onely of the main body of these Mountains, which hold on in an even course from West to East; not of those spurres and branches of it, which shoot either to the North or South: such as are the Anti-Taurus in some parts of the lesser Asia; the Gordiaan hills, and the Montes Moschici, with those which Pliny calleth Pariedri, others Pariardes, in Armenia Major: and that of Caboras, which sheweth it self on the North-East of Assyria, with divers others.

In such a continual course of Mountains it must needs be that many fierce Nations did inhabit in former times, not easily subdued, nor so soon reduced unto civility, as such who were possessed of places less de∣sensible, and fitter for commerce and trafick with the rest of mankind. And they continued in these late times the last which were brought under by the Turks, and Persians, the mightiest Monarchs of those parts; though bordering on, or totally environed with their dominions. Two Kingdomes they afforded of long continuance: one towards the West where it closeth with the Mountains of Anti-Taurus, and di∣videth Syria Comagena from Armenia Major; the other towards the East, separating Media from Hyr∣cania. For want of other names to describe them by, we will call the first the Kingdome of Aladeules, and the last the Kingdome of Bathaman; according to the names of the two last Kings.

1. The Kingdome of ALADEVLES contained that part of this Mountainous tract, which beginning in or about Anti-Taurus, extended it self as farre towards the East, as to the banks of the Ri∣ver Tigris, where they part Mesopotamia from Armenia Major. Inhabited by a people naturally very fierce and warlike, more famous for nothing than their want of all things, who as men dwelling in a rough and barren Countrey, could litle profit themselves by husbandry, and therefore gave themselves to grazing, breeding on their pastures some store of horse and camels, which they sold to others, but especially main∣taining themselves and their families by hunting and stealing. Supposed to come originally from the Cappado∣c••••s, and A••menians of the lesser Asia, which by long and continual warres in the former Ages, were forced to forsake their dwellings, and for safety of their lives to flie to these unpeopled and desolate Moun∣tains. Where searching every hill and dale, and following the opportunity of Springs and Rivers, but

chiefly the mildest Temperature of the Air, and most cheerfull aspect of the Sunne: they built in many places poor villages, and afterwards some better Towns. The principal of which is named Maras, so called as it is conceived from the River Marsyas, which rising out of the Mountain Calene, passeth by the same, and not farre off falleth into the River Euphrates.

When it was made a Kingdome first, it is hard to say, the Kings here of being mean and inconsiderable in the eye of the world; not worth the conquering, and wanting power to conquer others and enlarge their territories: nor indeed worthy any King but one of their own, who could content himself with reigning over rocks and Mountains. The last was Aladeules so much spoken of in the Turkish Histories, and by them called the Mountain King. Conceived by some writers to have been the Author of such a Paradise, as we shall find described when we come to Drangiana, a Province of Persia; and by that means grown for∣midable to his neighbouring Princes. But that which made him most really and truly known in the stories of the former times, was the stout opposition which he made against the Turks, in their warres with Persia: He had before given no small check to the proceedings of Bajazet the second in his conquest of the Cara∣manian Kingdome; and no lesse troubled Selimus the sonne of Bajazet, in his Persian warres, impeach∣ing what he could the greatness of the Ottoman family. Fought with by Selimus, he made good his ground with a great deal of courage, till betrayed by Alis Beg, General of his horse; and seeing his Ar∣my terrified by the shot of the Turks, he was fain to flie. But being at last taken, and put to death by the command of Selimus, his Kingdome was converted to a Turkish Province, Anno 1515. and so con∣tinueth to this day.

2. The Kingdome of BAHAMAN was situate more towards the East, amongst the Moun∣tains which divide Media from Hyrcania, as before was said. The Mountains in those parts so high, that Travellers at the end of a two daies journey, may discern the midle Region of the Air to be beneath them; exceeding troublesome to ascend, about 50 miles in height when once got to the top; but more dangerous by reason of the Rocks and precipices in the going down: full of inhospitable streights, and so cold and bar∣ren, that were not Sovereignty a temptation above all resitance, no man would take upon him the com∣mand of so poor a Kingdome. And yet in this extremity of height and cold, there is great quantity of Sul∣phur, which makes it sparkle in the night, like the hill Vesuvius, in Italy: by means where of here are many Hot-Bathes, three of them walled about, two open; to which resort unsound & decrepid people in very great multitudes. The chief Town of it Larry-Joon, in the ordinary road or pass betwixt Omoal the last Town of Hyrcania, and Damoan the first of Media. But the Kings Seat was in a village called Ry∣na, where he had a Castle so built upon the best advantages of art and nature, that it seemed invincible: a∣dorned, above, with gardens, flowers, and most pleasant fruits; and fumished beneath with a Rivulet of purest water, which pleasantly passing thorow the Castle, fell into the Vallo. A Castle of so large a circuit, that besides the Kings Family or Court, it was able to admit a garrison of 10000. men.

The last king hereof was the foresaid Bahaman, derived from a long descent of Royal Ancestors, com∣paring for antiquity with the Persian Sophies: who though ill-neighboured on both sides, by the Tartari∣an on the one, and the Kings of Persia on the other; yet had they with great fortune, policy, and valor, maintained their Royalties, against all pretenders. But Abas the late Persian Sophy, having either con∣quered or reduced Hyrcania, picked a quarrel with Bahaman: pretending that by the opportunity of his situation he might rob his Caravans, hinder his progress towards the Hyrcanian Sea, and turn into other Channels all the Streams or Rivers, which rising from Mount Taurus watered and enriched his Persian ter∣ritories. And though Bahaman never had attempted any of the things objected, yet it was cause enough of quarrel that he might so do: and therefore is besieged in his Castle of Ryna, with an Army of 30000 men. Finding no possibility to prevail by force, the General of the Persians proceeds by treachery: invites the old King into his Camp under colour of parley, and by his means drew his two sonnes out of the Castle to the parley also. Whom having got into his power, he first caused their heads to be cut off; and after making use of their seales and signets, obtains a surrender of the place; and with it the possession of this mountainous Kingdome, Anno 1601. or thereabouts, united ever since to the Crown of Persia.

OF TURCOMANIA.

TVRCOMANIA is bounded on the East with Media, and the Caspian Sea; on the West with the Euxine Sea, Cappadocia, and Armenia Minor; on the North, with Tartary; and on the South, with Mesopotamia and Assyria. So called from the Turcomans or Turks; who from hence made their first expedition for the conquest of Persia, and after spread themselves over all those parts of Europe, Asia, and Africk, now in their posses∣sion. A Countrey which consisteth of four several Provinces, each province having to its self its particular story; and therefore we must look upon it as it is now divided into those four parts, that is to say, 1. Armenia Major, or Turcomania properly and specially so called. 2. Colchis, now cal∣led Mengrelia. 3. Iberia, now named Georgia; and 4. Albania, which they now term Zuiria.

1. ARMENIA MAJOR.

ARMENIA MAJOR is bounded on the East with Media, and some part of the Caspian Sea; on the West, with the River Euphrates, which parteth it from Armenia Minor, in the lesser Asia; on the North, with Colchis or Mengrelia; and on the South, with Mesopotamia and some part of Assyria.

It was called Armenia, as some say quasi Aram-Mini or the Minni of Syria: but as others say, quasi Har-mini, that is to say Mons Mini, or Montana Miniadis: the Mini or Minni, being a region of this tract, mentioned by Jeremie the Prophet, chap. 5. ver. 27. and by him placed betwixt Ararat and Askenaz, which shew the situation of it to be hereabouts. Major was added to it for distinction sake, to dif∣ference it from Armenia Minor: and now it is called Turcomania, as the first seat in which the Turco∣mans or Turks did fix themselves, after their eruption out of Scythia.

The Countrey in the most parts overspread with hills, branches of those huge mountains of Taurus, and Anti-Taurus; but intermixt with fertile and delightful vallies, liberally furnished with Cattel, and good store of fruits, though much subject to deep snows, which do much annoy it. The Riches of it not to be better estimated than by the frankness of Tigranes, once King hereof. Who being fined by Pompey at 6000 Talents, not onely very readily laid down that summe, but added of his own accord to every Roman Souldier 50 Drachmas of Silver, 1000 Drachmas to each Captain, and to every Colonela Talent. For though Tigranes had added some part of Media, and the whole Kingdome of Syria, unto his estate: yet those being new Acquests, and not fully setled, were not much likely for the present, to enrich his coffers: new conquered Provinces being for the most part more chargeable than beneficial to the Victor.

The people are generally great bodies, of comely personage, and patient of all kind of labour; good Ar∣chers, when put to it, but careless of honour got by warre; merry, desirous to be at ease, and apt to be soothed. The women tall, but homely, of a manly look, most of them skilfull at their bow, or some other weapon. Their families for the most part great, the Father and all his posterity to the third and fourth generation living under a roof, after whose death the eldest whether Sonne or Brother hath the chiefest Rule. In diet and clothing all alike: and in most places they are said to be very industrious, painful in tillage, and well seen in manufactures, especially rich tapestries, Grograins, and watred Chamlets: with which they trafick into most Cities of the Turks and other Mahometans, privileged as they say, by a Charter under Mahomets own hand, above other Christians; and upon that occasion more dispersed in the Eastern Countries, than any Nation in the world, the Jews excepted.

They have a language of their own which they call the Armenian, not onely used amongst them in common talk, but in sacred offices: the Scriptures being translated into that language also, and that as the people do affirm by the hand of Saint Chrysostome, at such time as (on the solicitation of the Empress Eudoxia, his most eager enemy) he was confined to the lesser Armenia, by the Emperor Arcadius, to whom also they ascribe the invention of the Armenian Characters, or letters, still in use amongst them.

They received the Christian faith by the preaching of Saint Bartholmew, and were antiently of the ju∣risdiction of the Patriarch of Constantinople, as a Province of the Pontick Diocese, which together with the Asian D••o••ese, and that of Thrace, were by the Council of Chalcedon laid unto that Patriarchate. But falling into the opinions of Eutyches touching one nature onely in CHRIST our Saviour, they with∣drew themselves long since, from the communion of the Greeks, whom they hold in greater detestation than all other Christians; and chose two Patriarchs of their own, of whom more anon. Other opinions which they hold besides those of Eutyches, which yet they labour to make capable of an Orthodox sense, and those wherein they differ from the Church of Rome, as 1. Denying Purgatory, and prayers for the

dead. 2. Admitting none to be made Priests except those that be maried. 3. Denying the body of Christ to be really under the species of bread and wine; and 4. Rebaptizing such as come to their Com∣munion from the Latine Churches; are these that follow: in which they differ also from most Churches else, viz. in receiving Infants to the Lords Table, immediately after Baptism. 2. In abstaining from ••••••lear beasts. 3. In fasting on Christ-mass day; and 4. In holding their children over the fire, as a necessary circumstance in Baptism, because John the Baptist told the people which followed him, that CHRIST should baptize them with the Holy Ghost, and with fire; in which place he meaneth not materiall fire, but the lively purgation of the Holy Ghost, according to the nature of fire. The Church of this sect is Governed by two Patriarchs, whereof the one hath under his jurisdiction this Turcomania; comprehending 150000 Families, besides very much Monasteries: and the other hath under him the two Provinces of Armenia the lesser, and Cilicia, comprehending 20000 Families, or thereabouts. The first residing antiently in Sebastia, the Metropolis of the greater Armenia; the second originally at Me∣litene, the Metropolis of Armenia Minor, but of late at Sis, a small City, not farre from Tarsus in Cilicia. Both honoured with the title of Catholiques, and having under them to the number of 30. Bi∣shops.

Chief Rivers of this Countrey, 1. Araxes, which rising out of Mount Abos, an Armenian Moun∣tain, first runneth Eastward as farre as Media, and then bendeth it self towards the North, and after a long course is divided into two Branches; whereof the one falleth into the Caspian Sea, the other into, 2. Cyrus, another great River of this Countrey. The fountain of this last in Mount Caucasus in the furthest North of Turcomania; and falling into a Lake, there meeteth with 3. Cambyses, another great River of these parts; and so together hasten to the Caspian also. 4. Euphrates, by the Turks called Frat, by the Hebrews, Perah, famous in Scripture for its watering the garden of Eden, hath its fountain in the hills which they call Niphates, as is said by Strabo. A River of great length and swiftness. For having forced it self a passage through the Mountains of Taurus, it runneth in the West of Mesopotamia, with a stream so violent, that they who go by water from Bir or Birra, a Town on the North-West of Meso∣potamia, to the City of Bagdat, are fain to come back again by land, selling those Boats for eight crowns which they bought for 50. At Apamia, a City of Chaldaea it is joyned with Tigris, with which the greatest branch of it passeth thorow the City of Babylon, and so into the Persian Gulf: the rest of it being cut into many Channels, for fear it should overflow and drown the Countrey, are quite lost in the Lakes of Chaldea. 5. Tigris, a swifter stream than that, whence it had the name; the word in the Median tongue signifying an Arrow. A River of so strong a course, that it passeth thorow the Lake Thonitis, without mixture of Waters, and affordeth the Armenians an easie passage to Bagdat: who on a few Rafis born up with Goat-skins blown full of wind, and boards laid upon them, make their voyage thither. It is called Heddekel in the Scripture, one of the four Rivers which watered the garden of Paradise; situate in an Iland made by the imbracement of this River and Euphrates, with their several Branches. Rising origi∣nally out of the Lake of Thelpitis, in Armenia Major, where now we are; it is presently almost swallow∣ed by the gaping Earth; and passing under the huge bulk of Taurus, breaketh forth again; and compas∣sing the East parts of Mesopotamia, which it divides from Assyria; meets with Euphrates, as before. Of which its first and second birth, thus the Poet Lucan.

At Tigrin subito tellus absorbet hiatu, Occultos{que} tegit cursus; rursus{que} renatum Fonte novo flumen pelagi non abnegat undas.

That is to say.

Tigris, soon swallowed by the thirsty earth, Finds there a buriall where it had its birth: But breaking out at a new spring, vouchsafes With the Salt Seas to mixt it sweeter waves.

Mountains of most note, are, 1. Abos, glorying in the fountains of the great River Araxes. 2. Peri∣ardes, or Periarges as Ptolomy, Pariedri, as Pliny calleth it, a branch or spurre of the great moun∣tain Taurus. 3. Vdacespes, another branch of that great Mountain. 4. Some part of Anti-Taurus. 5. The Mountains called Montes Moschici, more towards the North, abutting upon Cappadocia, and the Euxine Sea: which name they took from Mesech, or Mosoch the sonne of Japhet, preserving the re∣membrance of his planting there. 6. Niphates, one of the spurres of Taurus, out of which the famous River Euphrates is said to issue. 7. The Gordiaean Mountains, conceived by many learned men to be the mountains of Ararat, on one of the tops whereof called Baris, the Ark of Noah is most generally affirmed to rest. Affirmed by many antient writers of the Christian Church, and countenanced not onely by Josephus and some others of the Elder Historians; but by the Septuagint themselves: who in the 37 chap. of Esay v. 38. and 2 Kings 19. 37. have rendred Ararat by Armenia. And be it so, let Ara∣••a be Armenia, and consequently the mountains of Ararat be Armenian Mountains: yet doth it not follow hereupon, that the Ark rested on the Gordiaean mountains, or any others of this Countrey, as they would conclude. We may infer as Logically, for ought I can see, that the Garden of Eden must be looked for in Armenia also; because situate in the circlings of Euphrates, and Tigris, two Armenian Rivers. Those Rivers have indeed their fountains in Armenia Major, but compass not the Garden of Eden, till after a long course they encounter each other in the spacious plains of Babylonia. And so those mountains, though they have the name of the Mountains of Ararat or Armenia, because there first grown to a discemable and supper-eminent height above all the mountains of those parts: became not the resting place of the Ark, till after a further course towards the East, they were grown to their fullest height; which

is in those parts of it betwixt Scythia, and Persia, which are called Mount Caucasus: not that Mount Can∣casus, which lieth on the North of Colchis, and Iberia, out of which the River Cyrus is said to rise; but that which lieth on the East-side of the Caspian Sea, where Mount Taurus and Imaus do cross each other. But of this elsewhere.

It was divided heretofore into many Provinces, the principall whereof had (I grant) its name from the Gordiaean Mountains, called in some writers Cordiaei, from whence the Province had the name of Gora∣ene, but most commonly called Corduene, bordering on Assyria. The Kingdome once of Zarbi••nus, who siding with Lucullus against Tigranes King of Armenia, was by Tigranes murdered with his wife and Children; but honoured by Lucullus with a stately and magnificent funeral. 2. The 2d. Province of uote is called Cotacene, neer the Montes Moschici. 3. Tosarene bordering on the River Cyrus. 4. Col∣thene on the banks of Araxes. 5. Sophene, neer the turnings of the River Euphrates; mistook by some industrious and knowing men, to be the Syria Soba of the Holy Scriptures. 6. Basisine, on the North-West, neer the springs of that River. But what Cities did belong to each, I find no where spe∣cified

Those of most consequence in the whole, 1. Artaxata, by Florus called Caput Gentis: of most e∣steem in those times, and the Seat-royall of the Kings of Armenia from its first foundation. Built by Artaxes, one of the Progenitors of Tigranes, at the perswasion of Annibal, whilest he abode in this Countrey: who liking the situation of the place, drew on it the model of a strong and gallant City, accor∣ding to which Plat-form it was presently built. Taken and sacked by the Romans, as a daughter of Carthage, by Corbulo in the time of Nero, it never could revive again to its former splendour: in the mi∣dle ages called Esechia, and at this day Coy, or Coim; if not built rather out of the ruines of it. A City memorable for two great battells neer unto it; the first between Luculius on the one sid, against Mithri∣dates and Tigranes on the other; wherein the Romans were victors: the second between Selimus Empe∣ror of the Turks, and Hysmael the Persian Sophy; wherein the Turks were conquerors, Anno 1514. A victory which he bought with the loss of 30000 of his best men, and such a terrour to the whole Ar∣my, that the Turks to this day call it, the only day of doom. The fields adjoining to the Town where∣in this cruel battel was fought, called the Chalderan fields. 2. Sebastia, now Suassia, seated on Euphrates, where it meeteth with the Mountain Taurus, the residence of the Patriarch of the Armeni∣ans, at their first separarion from the See of Constantinople; the Metropolis at that time of all Armenia: so named in honour of Augustus, whom the Greeks call Sebastos. But of late divested of that dignity, the Patriarchall See, by reason of the fierce wars raging in this Countrey betwixt the Persians and the Turks, being removed to the Monastery of Ecmeazin, neer the City of Ervan in Persia, in the domini∣ons of which King these Armenian Christians live in great abundance, by the name of Jelphelins. 3. Tigraneceria, beautified and inlarged, if not first founded, by Tigranes above-mentioned, by whom re∣plenished with people of severall Nations, whose Countries he had taken from them, and enriched in a manner with the wealth of all his Kingdome: there being no Armenian, either Prince or Paisant, who sent not somewhat towards the adorning of it. But taken by Lucullus without great resistance, those se∣verall Nations not agreeing amongst themselves: and therein besides other Treasure, no less than 8000 Talents in ready money. The City situate neer a River, which Tacitus calleth Nicesorius. 4. Arsamo∣sata, by Pliny called Arsimote, on the banks of Euphrates. 5. Cholna, so called in memory of Hul, or Chul the sonne of Aram, one of the first Planters of this Countrey, 6. Baraza, by the Emperor Leo much enlarged and beautified, dignified with the new name of Leontopolis; and for a while made the Me∣tropolis of the Province. 7. Ars••rata, by Strabo called Arxata. 8. Theodosiopolis, built on the foundation of some of the more antient Cities, by the Emperor Theodosius, and of him thus named. 9 Colonia, the strongest and most defensible City hereof, when possessed by the Romans. 10. Clamassun, a strong Town on the banks of Euphrates, taken by Selimus the first in his way towards Persia; and therewith livery and seisin of the rest of this Countrey, since wholly conquered by his Successors. 12. Chars, not far from the same River also, supposed to be the Chorsa of Ptolomy, of which not long since the ruins onely; but in three weeks so repaired and fortified by the Turks, Anno 1579. that it is thought to be impregnable. 13. Thespia, giving name of old to the Lake Thespitis, and to the Region called Thespites; but now not in being. 14. Arminig, now of greatest name, and esteemed the Metro∣polis of this Countrie: situate in that part of the Lake of Vaslan (the Martiana palus of the antient writers) which lieth next to this Countrey; and by that well fortified; the onely City of Armenia pos∣sessed by the Persians, who are the Lords of all that Lake, of which more hereafter. 15. Van, both for natural situation, and the works of art, accompted by the Turks for their strongest Bulwark in these parts against the Persians; and for that cause well garrisoned, and as well munitioned.

This Countrey was first planted by Hul or Chul the sonne of Aram, and by Mesech one of the sonnes of Japhet, who with their families or Colonies possessed the same: the one leaving the remainder of his name in the Montes Moschici; the other in the Town called Cholna and the Region called Colthe∣ne by Ptolomy, Cholobatene by Stephanus. Advanced to the honour of a Kingdome assoon as any, that of Babel excepted, Ninus the third from Nimrod finding Barzanes King hereof, whom he forced to acknowledge his superiority, and to aid him in his warres against Zoroaster the King of Bactria. Kings of most note in times succeeding, for we have no constant Cata legue of them, were 1. Araxes, who be∣ing warred on by the Persians, was promised victory by the Oracle, on the sacrifice of his two fair daugh∣ters. Willing to satisfie the Gods, and yet spare his children, he sacrificed two of the daughters of Mu∣salcus, a noble man of this Countrey, by whom in revenge hereof his own daughters were slain, and him∣self so closely followed, that swiming the River then called Helmns, he was therein drowned, and thereby

gave unto that River the name of Araxes. 2. Artaxa, the founder of the great City Artaxata; spo∣ken of before. 3. Tigranes, the most mightie King that ever reigned in Armenia, to which he added by his prowess Galatia, and a great part of Cilicia in Asia Minor, the whole Countreys of Media, Sy∣ria, and Phoenicia. But siding with Mithridates, whose daughter he had maryed, against the Romans, he was by Lucullus overthrown in two grea: battels, and outed of the greatest part of his dominions. Hear∣ing that Pompey had succeeded Lucullus in command of the Army, and trusting more unto his goodness than a wiseman would, he put himself into his power: by whom condemned in a great sum of money for the charge of the war, and stripped of all the rest of his estates; he was suffered to enjoy Armenta Major, Syria being made a Province, Sophene given to Ariobarzanes King of Cappadocia, Media left unto it self, and the lesser Armenia conferred on one of his Sonnes, who being found guilty of some practice with the King of Parthia, was carryed Prisoner unto Rome, and his Countrey brought into the form of a Pro∣vince. 4. Artavasdes, circumvented by Mar. Antonie, who led him Prisoner to Rome, but (catenis, i.e. quid honori ejus deesset, aureis, as the Historian tells us of him) it was in chaines of Gold for his greater honour; giving Armenia to one of the sonnes of Cleopatra. And though 5. Artaxias recovered his Fathers Kingdome, yet he and his Successors held it but as Vassals of the Roman Empire: the Senate af∣ter that confirming and sometimes nominating the Armeni in Kings. Continuing in this estate till the time of Trajan, it was by him reduced to the form of a Province, (made after that a part of the Pontick Diocese) who adding Mesopotamia also unto his dominions, make Tigris the Eastern border of his Em∣pire, which Augustus thought fit to limit with the banks of Euphrates. But long it held not in that form, being governed by its own Kings, as it was before Trajans time, in the reign of Constantius, Ju∣lian, and the Emperors following; whom they acknowledged and revered as their Lords in chief, till the time of Justinian the second (he began his Empire Anno 687.) when subdued by the Saracens. Re∣covered by that Emperour, but soon lost again, it continued subject to the Saracens, till the breaking in of the Turks, Anno 844. of whom more anon. The greatest part of the Turks emptying themselves into Persit, and other Countreys which they took from the Eastern Em∣perors, the Christians of Armenia began to take heart again, and to have Kings of their own, by whom governed, till again subdued by Occadan, or Hoccata sonne of Cingis, the first Cham of the Fartars. Nor did the Tartars make so absolute a conquest of it as to extinguish either Christianity, or the race of the Kings: Haithon, surnamed Armentus, reigning after this, and going in person to Mangu, the great Cham of Tartarie, Anno 1257. And in our own Chronicles, in the reign of King Richard the se∣cond, we find mention of one Leon an Armenian King, who came hither to sue for aid against the Turks, by whom then dispossessed of his estates. By Ussan-Cassanes, one of the Princes of this Countrey, (of whom more hereafter) who had the fortune to obtain the Crowh of Persia, Anno 1472. it was made a Province of that Kingdome: and so continued till the year 1515. when conquered by Selimus the first, and by him made a part of the Turkish Empire; more fully setled and assured in the reign of Amurath the third, who by causing many Forts and Garrisons to be planted in it, made the conquest absolute.

The Armes of this Kingdom, when a Kingdom, governed by Princes of its own of the Christian faith, were Gules, 3 heads of a Buck Argent, Crowned Or.

2. COLCHIS.

COLCHIS is bounded on the East, with Iberia; on the West, with the Euxine Sea, and past of the Tartars Precopenses; on the North, with Tartarie, from which parted by those vasl hills, which the Romans called Caucasi; and on the South, with Armenia Major, from which separated by the Montes Moschici.

The reason of the name I find not. Nor can yield unto Bochartus, who fetcheth the original of the name and Nation, from Cusluhim, one of the sonnes of Mizraim, the sonne of Cham: the Etymology of the name being too much wrested, and Egypt too farr off to give a being to Colchis in those early daies: though possibly in times succeeding, the Aegyptians hearing by the Greeks of the wealth of the Countrey, might send Colonies of their people thither, as to other places. It is now called Men∣grelia.

The Countrey said to be very fruitful if the care of the husbandman were not wanting. Their vines they plant at the feet of great trees, which twining about the armes thereof lade them full of Grapes: with which, and other fruits rising from the Earth, they used of late times to furnish the Store-houses of their Kings, for want of ready money to fill his Coffers; their tributes being paid in such commodities. Formerly of great fame for abundance of gold found in the sands of their Rivers issuing from the Caucasian Mountains. The thing affirmed by Appianus in his Mithridatica; 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, Many of their springs saith he, which come out of Caucasus, carry veins of Gold. The like saith Strabo also, and some other Antients. With which, and out of their rich Mines both of Gold and Silver, the Kings hereof were so well furnished with those metals, that the furniture of their Chambers were all of Gold, and the beams of their Lodgings were made of Silver. But now so de∣stitute of both, that the people for want of money to buy and sell with, are inforced to barter their commo∣dities, and change one for another.

The people at the present very rude and barbarous; so inhumane and voide of naturall affection, that they sell their children to the Turks. The better sort of them much given to belly-cheer, dancing and sing∣ing loose sonnets of love and daliance; using much wine in their in tertainments, which the more their Guests drink, the better welcome; inflamed wherewith they offer them for a cooler their wives or Sisters, with

charge to yield them all content, esteeming it no small credit to them if it be accepted. Nor are the wo∣men much averse from the entertainment, whether to please themselves or obey their husbands, let them tell that can.

The Christian faith was first here planted in the time of the Emperour Justinus, by whose perswasion Taurus Prince of the Colchi, then at the Court in Constantinople, became a Christian, and being baptized, was returned back into his Countrey, with the title of King. But Cabades the King of Persia much of∣ended at it, proclamed war against him: which hindred the further progress of the Gospell, till the year 860. About which time Methodius and Cyrill, two reverend men, were by the Patriarch of Con∣stantinople employed in this service; which they succesfully effected: in that regard they hold to the com∣munion of the Church of Greece, and belong to the jurisdiction of that Patriarch. To whom conform in most dogmaticall points of their Religion, and in many practicall. And though they have a distinct lan∣guage of their own, which hath no affinity with the Greek, yet do they celebrate their Divine Offices in the Greek tongue, and follow the Rituals of that Church; which few of them understand any better than the Vulgar Papists of France, Spain, or Germany, do the Latine service. Whether it be that they have no learned men amongst them, either to translate their old Liturgic, or to compose a new, or that they hold tall alterations in Religion to be matters of danger; or that ignorance is the best mother of devotion (as is thought by others) I am nor able to determine.

The chief Rivers of this Conntrey, are, 1. Hippus, 2. Cyaneus, 3. Chaeristus, all rising out of the Caucasian Mountains, and falling into the Euxine. 4. Phasis, the principall of all, rising out of the Mo••es Moschici, or Armenian Mountains, and there called Boas. Navigable with smaller vessels a great way up into the Countrey, and with great ships 18 miles from the Sea. Memorable amongst the Antients for the landing of the Argonatutes, in the mouth thereof; and those delicate fowl called from hence Phasides, or Phasiani, (Phesants,) which they brought with them into Eu∣rope.

As for this expedition of the Argonautes, being the most remarkable action in those elder ages of the world, when Piracy and depredations were accounted for Heroical vertues: it was no other than the ad∣venture of some noble Grecians, for the gold of Cholchos. The Age wherein it hapned was about the 11 year of Gideon the Judge of Israel. The chief Adventurers, Jason, Orpheus the famous Poet, Ca∣stor and Pollux the Sonnes of Tindarus, Telamon and Peleus the Sonnes of Aeacius, and Fa∣thers of A••ax and Achilles; Lacries the Father of Vlysses, Amphiaraus the Sooth-sayer, Her∣cules, Theseus, Meleager, with many others of like note. These moved with the great noise of the wealth of Colchos, and the riches of King Aetus, then therein reigning, resolved upon a voyage thither, embarked in a ship called Argos (whence the name of Argonautes) whereof one Typhis was chief Pi∣lot. Passing the Hellespont, Propontick, and Thracian Bosphorus, they came into the Euxine Sea: and after many difficulties and strarge Adventures (which such Knights Errants could not chuse but en∣counter with) they landed in the River Phasis, and came to the Kings Coutt, and there were kindly en∣tertained. But finding the Kings Treasures to be too well guarded to be took by force (said by the Po∣ets to be kept by a Dra••••n alwaies waking) they practised with Medea, the daughter of Aetes, to as∣sist them in robbing her Father. Who being in love with Jason, on promise of mariage with him, as∣sented to it: by whose Attisices (which the Poets call Magicall charmes) the Guardians being circum∣vented, and the treasure gotten, they all, together with Medea, imbarked again, and af er a long and dan∣gerous voyage returned into Greece. This is the substance of the Story; which being the greatest and most notable voyage which the gre••ians in those early daies had undertaken, occasioned the Poets to advance it to the highest pitch, and to disguise it with many fictions, and ingenious fancies. But not without some ground entituled to the Golden Fleece (which they make the end of the design). For the Rivers, as before was said, having Golden sands, which fell down from the mountains, (as in many other parts of the world they are found to have) it was the custome of the people to lay many Fleeces of wooll in the descent of those Rivers, in which the grains of Gold remained, though the water passed through, which Strabo wit∣nesseth to be true.

But leaving these Adventurers to pursue their fortunes, let us go forward to survey the Colchian Cities; the principall whereof, 1. Dioscurias, a Town of great wealth and trade, founded by Amphitus, and Telchius two Spartans, the Charioters of Castor and Pollux, (and so named in honour of their Masters, whom the Greeks call 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉) which two Spartans passing further East, were afterwards the foun∣ders of the Nation from them called Heniocht, or the Chariot-drivers. A Town of such resort by Mer∣chants from most parts of the world, that here were spoken 300 different languages; insomuch that the Romans (as Pliny saith) were fain to maintain here 130 Interpreters, for dispatch of business, and negoti∣ating with those Merchants. 2. Sybaris, the seat-Royal of the Colchian Kings, about nine miles from which was the Temple of Mars, to which Medea is reported to have brought the Argonauts. 3. Siganeam, neer the mouth of the River Cyaneus; as is also, 4. Aea, by Ptolomy called Aeapolis, an Aegyptian Colony, planted there by Sesosoris (in the time of Rehoboam the Sonne of Solomon) at what time he attempted but without success the conquest of Colchis. 5. Neapolis, so called from the newness or late foundation of it, when that name was given. 6. Phasis, so called from the River, upon which it is situate, retaining both the site and name to this very day: the ordinary residence of the Turkish Begl••r∣be••, by whom called Phassum. 7. Alvati, a well fortified place. More in the land are placed by Ptolomy, 8. Mechlessus, 9. Sarace, 10. Zadris, 11. Surium; &c. not much obser∣vable.

The first Inhabitants of this Countrey most probably came of out of the neighbouring Armenia, and

therefore the posterity of Hul or Chul, from whence perhaps the name of Colchis: to whom in tract of time, some Colonies out of Aegypt (a seafaring people) moved with the great fame of the riches and wealth hereof, did adjoin themselves; the Colchians on that ground, (or from some part of his Army left there by Sesostris) being said by Ammianus Marcellinus to be the antient off-spring of the Aegypti∣ans. The most antient of their Kings was Aetes spoken of before: who entertaining Phryxus flying out of greece from the fury of his stepdame Ino, with great store of treasure, occasioned the Argonauts, as well in way of revenge, as in hope of booty, to make that famous expedition for the Gold of Colchos, disguised under the fiction of the Golden Fleece. Of most note after him, Selauces, and Esubops, who first discovered the rich mines of Gold and silver, of which metals they made all their Utensils, even the beams of their Chambers. The fame whereof drew thither Sesostris the great King of Aegypt, who be∣ing vanquished in the field was fain to lay aside all those hopes which he brought with him thither, and re∣turn back to Aegypt in worse state than he came; but that he left behind him an Aegyptian Colony in the City of Aea; which after occasioned others of that Countrey to repair hither also. Living in peace and unmolested from this time forwards, they were unhappily ingaged by Tigranes of Armenia, to side with him against the Romans; and in his overthrow gave such advantage to the Victor, that Orodes the King of Colchis was fain to submit himself to Pompey, to dismiss his forces, leave his fastnesses, and finally to redeem his peace, by sending to him a Bedstead of purest Gold, and many other rich presents. After this, the Romans had here their Agens, and received hence some annuall profits, but never brought it to the form of a Province. Distressed between the Persians and Constantinopolitans, they had much ado to stand upright; though be∣twixt both they kept themselves in a kind of liberty: as of late times, betwixt the Persians, Turks, and Tartars, their too potent Neigbours. But at the last Anno 1579. Amurath the third, to make the safer passage for his forces in Georgia, sent Uluzales his Admiral with a great Fleet into the Euxine Sea, who comming up the River Phasis took the City of Fassum, fortified it, and laid so certain a foundation of a future conquest; that though the Mengrelians did not long after demolish some of his fortifications, yet they were afterwards repaired, and Fassu made the seat of a Turkish Beglerbeg, as it still conti∣nueth.

3. IBERIA.

I BERIA is bounded on the East, with Albania; on the West, with Colchis; on the North, with the Caucasian Mountains; and one the South, with the Montes Moschici: by the first moun∣tains parted from Sarmatia Asiatica, and by the last from Armenia Ma••or.

It was so called from the River Iberus, which running thorow it, falleth at last into the more noted Ri∣ver Cyrus: but is now called Georgia, and that as some say from Saint George the Cappadocian Martyr, whom here they have in very great reverence, as their tutelary Saint and Patron: as others say, from George a Cappadocian Bishop, by whose preaching they were brought unto Christianity; and some again will have them called properly Gordiaeans, and corruptly Georgians, from their neer neighbourhood to those moun∣tains. But the most probable opinion is, as I conceive, that they took this name from the Georgi, whom Pliny reckoneth amongst other of the Caspian nations. Though to say truth, the name of Georgia extend∣eth somewhat further than that of Iberia, as comprehending also that part of Armenia Major which lies next to Media, and the whole Countrey of Albania, if I guess a right.

The Countrey for the greatest part, is covered with Mountains, woods, and thickets, and in that re∣gard unconquerable for the difficulty of the mountainous passages; yet notwithstanding it is very fruitfull in many places, having many fertile plains, and wealthy vallies; well watered, and of great increase to the husbandman, if he be not wanting to himself in care and industry.

Of the old Iberians it is written, that they were a very warlike nation, and used to set as many Pillars about the grave of a dead man, as he had slain Enemies in his life: as also that those of the same Tribe or family had all things common; he being the Ruler which was eldest: and that some of them did derive themselves from the Children of David begotten on the wife of Vriah, for that cause never marying out of their own kindred. The present Georgians very warlike, strong of bodie, and valorous in fight; for along time defended themselves and Countrey from the Turks and Persians, with great prudence making use of the one against the other. But overpowred by the vast multitude of Turks breaking in upon them, they have lost many of their best Forts, and much of their liberty.

The Christian faith was first here planted in the time of Constantine the Great, by means of a Christian captive women (such extraordinary waies doth God find out to promote his Gospell): who being of a most devout life, and exemplary piety, had by her prayers to CHRIST restored a young child to health which was thought past cure; and healed the Queen hereof of a desperate maladie, when no help of Phy∣sick would prevail. Whereupon the King sent Ambassadours to Constantine, desiring Ministers and Preachers to be sent to Iberia, to instruct the people in the faith: which was done accordingly. Since that time, Christianity hath flourished in this Countrey without interruption; though by Mahometans, and Pagans, on all sides encompassed: agreeable in doctrinal points to the Church of Greece, whose Rituals also the People do to this day follow. Not subject for all that to the Patriarch of Constantinople, (though of his Communion) but to their own Metropolitan onely; who hath under him about 18 Bishops, and resideth for the most part in Saint Catharines Monastery on Mount Sinai. By means of which remote dwel∣ling of their principall Pastor, Mahometanism hath got some sooting, and Jesuitism began to creep in amongst them. The occasion of which last was this.

About the year 1614. the Persians making an inrode into this Countrey, took the City of Cremer, and therein Cetaba, the mother of Prince Teimurazes, whom leading her captive into Persia, and not able to

prevail with her to turn Mahometan, they most cruelly murdered. Some of the Jesuites then travelling in those Countreys, and willing out of that sad accident to advance the fame of their Society, together with the Catholique cause, cut off the head of a dead man whom they found in the way, anoined it with oyl and odours, brought it into Georgia, and signified unto the Prince, that they had with them the head of the blessed Martyr Cetaba, desiring leave to live in some Monastery, and have the keeping of the holy Re∣lique committed to them. This easily believed, and granted, the head was placed with great honourin the Church of Saint George at Aberdall; much resort to it from all parts by diseased persons: whom if past cure, the Jesuites sent home again, prescribing them in the way of preparation a long time of repen∣tance; if curable by outward means which they applyed, the cure was presently ascribed to the holy Re∣lique. Grown famous by this means, they gained many Proselytes to themselves; and had no small hope of prevailing on Prince Teimurazes to submit himself to the Pope, as the Vicar of CHRIST. When in the heat of all their glories, a letter cometh from Maacla, a Lady attendant on the Princess, (but then living in Persia, as a slave or bond-maid) signifying that her Master by her perswasion, had got into his power the body of his mother Cetaba; which he might ransome if he pleased; two Travellers withall, who came out of Persia with the Jesuites, reporting what they see them do with the dead mans head. By which means the Imposture being discovered, the body of the Queen was sent for, the false Relique was cast out of the Church, and the falser Jesuites into prison, and next out of the Countrey.

Rivers of note I find not any, either in Ptolomy or any of our modern writers, but what are touched up∣on before, except onely the River of Iberus spoken of before, from which the Countrey is thus named. The whole in general so destitute of waters, that Pompey in his march this way against the Albanians, was fain to carry 10000 bladders filled with water for the use of his Army.

Places of most antiquity and importance in it, 1. Artaxissa, 2. Vasada, 3. Lubium, 4. Arm••∣stica, all named by Piolomy; this last by Pliny called Harmastis. 5. Cremen, the chief City now possessed by the Georgians. 6. Cachete, honoured with a fair Church, the most beautifull of all the Countrey, dedicated by the name of Saint George. 7. Triala, where are to be seen the ruins of a large City, and many Churches; by what name antiently called, I find not. 8. Altuncala, or the Gold∣en Castle, a strong fortress, and the ordinary residence of the Georgian Princes, since the time of the wars betwixt the Persians and the Turks. 9. Archichelech, a strong Castle taken by Solyman the Magni∣ficent in his wars against Tam as King of Persia, and ever since holden by the Turks. 10. Teflis, a large and capacious Town, forsaken by the Georgians at the coming of Mustapha, Generall of Amu∣rath the third against the Persians: who liking the situation of it, caused it to be repaired and fortified, planted thereon an hundred peeces of Ordinance, and left therein a Garrison of 6000 Souldiers. 11. Lo∣••••, distant from Teflis about two daies journey of a Carriers pace, strengthned with a lofty Castle, en∣vironed with deep ditches, and a thick wall, amounting to a mile in compass. Seised on by Ferat Bassa, the Successour of Mustapha, who repaired the walls, planted thereon 200 small peeces of Ordinance, and garrisoned it with 7000 Turks for defence thereof. 12. Tomanis, a short daies march from Lors, the Countrey lying betwixt both full of rich fields and pastures, abounding with corn, fruit, and cattel. Nigh unto which the said Fer at raised a new Fortress for the better command of the Streights and passages, leading from thence to Lori, and so to Teflis (the Key of Media or Sirvan) the wall whereof being 1700 yards in compass, he caused to be planred with 200 peeces of Artillery; and with incredible dih∣gence cut down a thick wood which lay before it, and otherwise would have been a receptacle of theeves, or Enemies. 13. Glisca, 14. Bascapan, &c. possessed and fortified by the Turks to make good their footing in this Conntrey. But possibly most of these strong holds now possessed by the Turks may be with∣in the bounds of Armenia Major, and Alhania, though within the Countrey of the Georgians, that name not being limited to Iberia, as was said before.

The first Inhabitants hereof were such who were brought hither by Tubal, the sonne of Japhet, from whom this people at the first, as Josephus hath it, had the name of Thobeli. But that name growing out of knowledge, the nations in it of most note were the Tibareni, Mossynoeci, Chalybes, and of less esteem the Biseries, Sapires, Macrones, &c. united at the last in the name of Iberi, from the River Iberus, of which Pliny speaketh, the principall of all this Countrey. Too fruitfull of increase for so narrow a dwelling, some of them put themselves to seek their fortunes, where after long wandring they fell upon the Coast of Spain next the Pyrenees, where they staid themselves, giving the name of Iberus to the chief Ri∣ver there, and of Iberia to the Countrey. Of which more before. Such of them as remained behind continued an unconquered people, under the government of their own Kings, till the time of Tigranes King of Armenioe. By whom invited to his aid against the Romans, they came in accordingly: and in his fall discom∣fited by Lucullus in three severall battells, were fain to stand upon their guard as well as they could: first holding fair with Pompey who succeeded Lucullus in his charge. But breaking out again on a new tempta∣tion, they were incountred by him. In which battel 9000 of their men being slain and 10000 taken, they were constrained to sue for peace, not otherwise to be obtained till Artaces the King of these Iberians, gave his sonnes for Pledges. After this Feudataries to the Roman and Grecian Emperours, till the fatall inundation of the Saracens had so weakned that Empire, that the Kings hereof acknowledged no more subjection to those of Constantinople, till Constantinople it self became the Imperiall seat of the Ottoman Family; in whose quarrels with the Persian Sophies, this Countrey began to suffer a new invasion: some Towns and Forts of it being taken by Solyman, in his march or passage against Tamas. Afterwards in the time of Amurath the third, who set his mind most eagerly on the warre with Persia, a great part of it was subdued by Mustapha the Turkish Generall: who inviting the widow Princess and her two sonnes to come to his tent, sent the young Princes to Constantinople, and by that means had opportunity to assure

his purchases. And though the Persians did their best to assist the Georgians, yet proved they but a kind of miserable comforters; as much punishing or plaguing this poor Countrey with their aides, as the Turks by their armies. So that now it stands divided betwixt the Grand Signeur and its naturall Princes: the Georgian Princes holding the greatest part, but the Turks being in possession of the strongest holds; kept by them under colour of securing their way to Persia, for which this Countrey is indeed but unhappily seated.

4. ALBANIA.

ALBANIA is bounded on the East, with the Caspian Sea; on the West, with Iberia; on the North, with the Caucasian Monntains; on the South, with the Moschici. So named from the Albani, who did once inhabit it; and of late called Sairia; but reckoned in these last ages as a part of Georgia.

The Countrey of so rich a soil, that without the least labour of the husbandman, the Earth doth naturally and liberally afford herstore, and where it is but once sown, will yield two or three reapings. But being ill husbands on it in former times, they occasioned Strabo to give them this note for a remembrance, That they needed not the use of the Sea, who knew no better how to make use of the Land. The people anti∣ently so simple that they could not reckon above an hundred; ignotant of weights, measures, and the use of money. Old age they had in high esteem, but held it utterly unlawfull to make speech of the dead. And of these Pliny doth report that they were gray-headed from their very youth, and could see as well by night as by day; the verity of which last may be somewhat questionable. But withall they are assirmed to have been a stout and couragious people, strong bodies, patient of toil and labour, as they are at this day. And well the men may be couragious and stout, where the women are so truely masculine. Of whom it is affirmed by Authors of undoubted credit, that they were excercised in Armes and martiall feats, as if descended lineally from the antient Amazons; whom Plutarch placeth in this tract, reporting some of them to be aiding to these Albanians in their war with Pompey: which possibly might be no other than some the more noble Albanian Dames.

Principall Rivers of this Countrey, 1. Soana, giving name to the Soani, one of the Nations of these parts mentioned by Pliny. 2. Coesius, 3. Gerrus, 4. Albanus, whence perhaps the name of Albani came unto this people. 5. Cyrus, (by Plutarch called Cyrnus) spoken of in Armenia Major, but more properly belonging to this Countrey, because herein it hath its spring, and the greatest part of its course also. For rising out of the Mountain Caucasus, which shuts up this Province on the North, it passeth thorow the middest of it, till it come to the borders of Armenia, where it beginneth to bend more towards the East: and having received into its Channel all the former Rivers, besides many others of less note, fal∣leth with twelve mouths into the Caspian or Hyrcanian Sea. Mountaines of note here are not any, but what are common unto them with other Nations: the Montes Moschici on the South, and Caucasus upon the North, being rather common boundaries betwixt severall nations, than peculiar unto any one; though from the last the Iberians, and these Albanians, be in some writers called Caucasioe Gentes.

Cities and Towns I find many in it, but little of them more than their very names. 1. Chabala, by Pliny called Cabalaca, and honoured with the Character of Insignior Albamoe urbs, the most noted City of this Countrey. 2. Albana, so called from the River Albanus, upon which it was seated. 3. Teleba, 4. Namechia, 5. Thelbis, 6. Getarra, neer unto the influx of the River Cyrus. How these are called, or whether any thing be remaining of them, I am not able to say. The chief now being, and worthy to be so accounted, is the City of Derbent, situate neer the Caspian Sea, from which to Tef∣lis a City spoken of before, remain the foundations of a high and thick wall, affirmed to have been built by Alexander the Great, to defend these parts against the irruptions of the Northen unconquered nations. The Town environed with two walls, and so defended by difficult and narrow passages of the rocks, that it is not easily accessible: but taken for all that by Mustapha the Turkish General, Anno 1587 and made the ordinary residence of a Turkish Bassa. Conceived to be the Caucasiae Portae of the Antients, which Pliy honoureth with the title of ingens naturae miraculum: by Egesippus for the strenght of it called Por∣toe Ferrea; with reference to which by the Turks called Demir-can, the word signifying in their language, a gate of iron. The other places of this tract are either of no accompt and estimation, or else are specified before amongst the Cities and good Towns of the Georgians, of whose Country this is now a part: yet we may add 2. Subran, upon the borders of Media. 3. Sancta Maria, north of Derbent; both of them on, or neer the banks of the Caspian Sea.

The first Inhabitants of this Countrey, seem to have been of the plantation of Gether the Sonne of A∣ram, and Nephew of Joephet, whose memory was long preserved in the City of Getara before-mention∣ed; So called by him or some of his posterity in remembrance of him. The People living somewhat out of the common road, were little troubled with Invaders from forreign parts; neither the Persians nor Ma∣cedonians looking so far North. Nor possibly had the Romans taken notice of them, had they not ingag∣ed themselves with Tigranes first, and afterwards with Mithridates. Falling on Pompey with an Ar∣my of 40000, and well beaten by him, they were content to sue for peace. But finding that the Iberians also had took up Arms, they ingaged again, leavying an Army of 12000 horse and 50000 foot, in which Oroezes their King, with his brother Cosis, were in person present. And though they had made good the banks of the River Cyrus; yet being ill armed, and for the most part only with skins of beasts, they made but small resi∣stance against the Romans; notwithstanding the gallant charge of Cosis, who assaulted Pompey, and had the honour to be siain by him in the place. After this overthrow, and their giving pledges

unto Pomper for their good behaviour, we find little mention of them in the Stories of the Roman Em∣pire, till the time of Iraan. Who having conquered and reduced Armenia Major to the form of a Province, resolved to shew his power to these neighbouring nations: and to that end imposed a King on the Albant of his own appointment, and made the Kings of Colchis, and Iberia, do their homage to him. In times succeeding no news of them; either because remote from the stage of Action, or serving under the command of some greater nation, where their name occurs not. Conquered by Occadan, or Hoc∣cata the Cham of Partarie, together with Iberia, and Armenia, they were a while subject to that Em∣pire: and possing in succeeding times by the name of Georgians, partook of the same fortunes with them. Now at the mercy of the Turk, who by reason of the strong footing which he hath gotten amongst them is become a dreadful neighbour to them, if not acknowledged by them for their Lord in chief.

Thus having taken a survey of all the Provinces of the Turkish Empire both in Europe and Asia, and touched upon the means by which they are possessed of Aegypt, whereunto all the rest of their hold in A∣friet, serves but for an accessory; we will now look upon the story of this people, their first originall, the great success of their affairs, the Princes under whose command they have made these conquests. Which having done, we will proceed to a Description of the Persons, Manners, and Conditions of the Turks themselves, their power and policy, with other things considerable in so great an Em∣pire.

And first for the original of the Turkish Nation, they were most probably the Descendants of those Tur∣coe, whom Pliny and Pomponius Mela place about the fennes of Moeotis. Of whom thus Mela, speak∣ing of the Gelani a Scychian people. Juxta Thyrsagetae Turcaeque Vast as sylvas occupant, aluntur{que}, vinard, &c. Next unto them (saith he) live the Thyrsagetae and the Turcae, possessed of vast woods, and maintained by hunting; and then a rough and desart Countrey with continuall rocks, as farre as to the Arymphetans. And Pany mustering up the barbarous nations of those parts, joins the Tussagetoe (or Thyrsagetoe) with the Turks, and placeth them next the Arympheians, as Mela doth, us{que} adsolundines solunasis vall bus asperas, spreading themselves unto the rough desarts, and woody vallies. Not known by action (though by name) till the time of Tiberius the second, who began his Empire Anno 577. when pressing hard on the Avares, a neighbouring Nation, they compelled them to forsake their seats and pass into Europe, where they made themselves masters of Pannonta, now called Hungary. In the time of Heraclius, we find them with other barbarous nations at the siege of Constantinople, but under the com∣mand of the Persians. After which they began to set up for themselves, and in the year 763. made a road into those Countreys which we last described, and loading themselves with prey and booty, returned home again. But liking better of these parts that their own poor dwellings, in the year 844. they brake once more thorow the Caspian Streights, and passing through Iberia, seized on Armenia Major, and there fixed themselves; giving it the name of Turcomania: in which wide and spacious Countrey they roamed up and down, without any certain habitation, removing their heards and families from one place to another, as they had formerly been used to do in the sennes of Moeotis; and as the Tartars and wild Arabs do untill this day. And so they lived, a poor and contemptible nation, till Maehomet the Sultan of Persia, rebelling against his Lord and Master the Caliph of Babylon, called in these Turks unto his aid; and by their help obtained a signall victory. The victory obtained, the Turks desire their wages, and a fair dismission; but could speed in neither; the Sultan being loth to part with such a necessary mis∣chief, till his affairs were better setled; and therefore shuting up the passages of the River Araxes, which he before had opened for them: Provoked wherewith, under the conduct of Tangrolipix, their prin∣cipal Leader, they began to spoil and wast the Countrey, a multitude of needy people, and some of the discontented Souldiers coming daily to them. Assaulted by the Persians, in the first battel they not onely got a notable victory, but such store of Armour, horses, and other necessaries, as made them able to en∣counter with the Sultan himself: whom having overthrown and slain in the second fight, Tan∣grolipix is by both Armies proclamed King of Persia, in the year one thousand and thirty, or there∣abouts.

There were at this time amongst the Turks two most noted Tribes, the Selzuccian, and the Ogazian. Of the Selzuccian, Tangrolipix, Cutlu Muses, and Ducat were the heades: of which Tangrolipix as the chief of that Clan or Family was setled in the throne of Persia; Cutlu Muses furnished with an Army against the Christians, possessed himself of a great part of Asix Minor; Melech and Du∣cat, by the like favour of their Cousen the Persian Sultan, were vested into the Cities of Aleppo and Da∣mascus, with their severall Territories. But the line of Tangrolipix and the rest being all worn out, as hath been shewn in our descriptions of Syria and Anatolia; the man of most nobility amongst the Turks was Ottoman, the chief of the Ogazian family, Nephew of Solyman Prince of Machan, a small territory in the Realm of Persia. Which Solyman, flying the fury of the Tartars when they conquered Persia, was drowned in crossing the River Euphrates, as he passed with his few Subjects towards Asia Minor, the best place of refuge for his Nation; leaving the chief-ship of his Tribe to Ethrogul his some: who obtained of the last Aladine of the Selzucciaen Family, the village of Saguta in Bithynia for himself and his small handfull of people. To him succeeded his sonne Ottoman, in the year 1280. who to revenge some inju∣ries done unto his people by the improvident Christians, took from them Castle after Castle; and in the end possessed himself of the City of Nice, not long before the Imperiall Seat of the Grecian Emperors. Em∣boldned with such great successes, and heating of the death of Aladins the second, whom he acknowledged for his Lord, he took unto himself the Title of Sultan, Anno 1300. from which before he had abstained. To this time, and these small beginnings, we must reduce the first foundation of the Ottoman Empire;

increased unto its present greatness by the courage and good fortune of these Princes following.

The Kings of the Turks of the Oguzian or Ottoman Family.

• 1300. 1. Ottoman, the sonne of Ethrogul, the first Turkish Sultan of this line, added to his small territory the greatest part of Bithynia, and some part of Pontus. 28.
• 1328. 2. Orchanes, took the City Prusa, and made it his residence; and was the first that put footing in Europe, where he got Gallipolis, and other peeces.
• 1350. 3. Amurath, wonne the Thracian Chersonese, the strong City of Adrianople, with the Countries of Servia, and Bulgaria, where he was slain by a common Souldier in the fields of Cossova. 23.
• 1373. 4. Bajazet, made himself master of a great part of Thrace, Macedon, and Achaia. He was taken prisoner by Tamerlane, and brained himself in an iron cage, in which the insolent Conqueror used to carry him. 26.
• 1399. 5. Mahomet, united the dismembred Empire of his Father, and inlarged it with the more absolute conquest of Dacia, part of Sclavonia, and the rest of Macedon. 17.
• 1416. 6. Amurath II. subdued from the Constantinopolitan Empire, all Achaia, Thessa∣ly, Epirus; he shaked the State of Hungary, and dyed before the Walls of Croy. 34.

The Ottoman Emperors.

• 1450. 7. Mahomet II. sumamed the Great, and first Emperor of the Turks, ruined the two Empires of Constantinople, and Trabezond, twelve Kingdomes, and two hundred Cities. 31.
• 1481. 8. Bajazet II. subdued the Caramanian Kingdome, and part of Armenia; and drove the Venetians from Morea, and their part, of Dalmatia. 31.
• 1512. 9. Sclimus, having poisoned his Father, subverted the Mamalucks of Egypt; bring∣ing it, together with Palestine, Syria, and Arabia, under the yoke of the Turks. 7.
• 1519. 10. Solyman the Magnificent, surprised Rhodes, Belgrad, Buda, with a great part of Hungary, Babylon, Assyria, Mesopotamia. 48.
• 1567. 11. Selimus II. an idle and effeminate Emperour, by his Deputies took from the Venetians, the Isle of Cyprius, and from the Moores, the Kingdome of Tunis, and Algi∣ers. 8.
• 1575. 12. Amurath III. took from the disagreeing Persians, Armenia, Media, and the City Tauris, and the fort Guierino from the Hungarians. 20.
• 1595. 13. Mahomet III. took Agria in Hungarie, which Kingdome had likely bin lost, if he had pursued his victory, at the battell of Keresture. 8.
• 1603. 14. Achmat, who the better to enjoy his pleasures, made peace with the German Emperor, and added nothing to his Empire. 15.
• 1618. 15. Mustapha, brother to Achmat, succeeded; a novelty never before heard of in this Kingdome; it being the Grand Signeurs common policy to strangle all the younger bro∣thers: howsoever this Mustapha was preserved, either because Achmat being once a younger brother, took pitty on him; or because he had no issue of his own body, and so was not permitted to kill him.
• 1618. 16. Osmen, succeeded his Unkle Mustapha; and being unsuccesseful in his war against Po∣land, was by the Janizaries slainin an uproar, and Mustapha again restored; yet long enjoyed be not his throne: for the same hand that raised him, plucked him down, and seated young Amurath in the place.
• 1623. 17. Morat (or Amurath the IV.) Brother of Osmen, of the age of 13. years, succeeded on the second deposition of his Unkle Mustapha, who proved a stout and masculine Prince, and bent himself to the reviving of the antient discipline. To the great good of Christen∣dome, he spent his stomach on the Persians.
• 18. Ibrahim, the brother of Morat, preserved by the Sultaness his mother in his brother life; and by her power deposed again for interdicting her the Court. He spent a great part of his reign in the warre of Crete, against the Venetians; but without any great suc∣cesse.
• 1648. 19. Mahomet IV. sonne of Ibrahim, now reigning: Lord of all this vast Empire, containing all Dacia, and Greece, the greatest part of Sclavonia and Hungary, the Isles of the Aegean Sea, and a great part of the Taurican Chersonese in Europe; of all the Isles and Provinces, which we have hitherto described in Asia; and in Africk of all Aegypt, the Kingdomes of Tunis and Algiers, with the Ports of Suachem, and Erocco. Nor is their stile inferiour to so vastan Empire, Solyman thus stiling himself in his Leter to Villerius great Master of the Rhades, at such time as he intended to invade that Iland: i.e. Solyman King of Kings, Lord of Lords, most high Emperour of Constantinople and Trabe∣zond; he most mighty King of Persia, Syria, Arabia, and the Holy Land; Lord of Europe, Asia, and A∣frica;

• ... Prince of Meccha, and Aleppo, Ruler of Hierusalem, and Soveraign Lord of all the Seas and Isles thereof.

As for the persons of the Turks, they are generally well-complexioned, of good stature, proportiona∣bly compacted, no idle talkers, nor doers of things superfluous; hot and venereous, servile to their Prince, and zealous in their Religion. They nourish no hair upon their heads, except it be a Tust on the top of their Crowns; by which they think that Mahomet will snatch them up into Paradise at the day of judge∣ment. For which reason they keep on of all sides, though never so poor, accounting it an approbrious thing to see any men uncover their heads; saying when they dislike of any thing which they see, or hear, I had as liefe thou hadst shewn me thy bare skull. In their familiar salutation they lay their hands on their bosomes, and a little incline their bodies; but when they accost a person of rank, they bow almost to the ground, and kiss the hem of his garment. Walking up and down they never use, and much wonder at the often walking of Christians. Biddulph relateth, that being at his ambulatory exercise with his com∣panion; a Turk demanded them whether they were out of their way, or their wits? If your way (quoth the Turk) lay toward the upper end of the Cloister, why come you downwards? If to the neither end, why go you back again? Shooting is their chief recreation, which they also follow with much laziness, sitting on carpets in the shadow, and sending some of their slaves to fetch their arrowes. They prefer, as they pass the streets, the left hand before the right, as being thereby made master of his sword with whom they walk. As they shave their heads, so they wear their berds long, as a sign of freedome; but their slaves keep theirs shaven and close cut.

The women are of small stature, for the most part ruddy, clear, and smooth as the polished Ivory; as neither afflicted with the weather, and often frequenting the baths: of a very good complexion, sel∣dome going abroad, and then masked; lascivious within doors, pleasing in matters of incontinency, and they are accounted most beautiful, which have the greatest eyes, and are of the blackest hue. Every Turk is permitted to have four wives, and as many slaves as he is able to keep, yet are they to meddle with none but their own, the offending women being drowned, and the man dismembred. These women live in great awe and respect of their husband, never sitting with him at the table, but waiting till he hath done, and then withdrawing into some room. If their husband hath been abroad, at his comming in they all rise from their stools whereon they fate, kiss his hand, and make an obeisance, and stand as long as he is in presence. The children which they have, they carry not in their arms as we do, but astride on their shoulders; they live immured from the sight of the world: and permit not any male children, no not their own sonnes, to come among them after they are twelve years old. From their husbands they cannot be divorced, but on special occasion: but their husbands may put away their wives, ot give them to their slaves, when and as often as they list. Far better is it with the sisters or the daughter of the Sultan; to whom when her Fa∣ther or brother bestoweth her on one of the Bassas, giveth her a dagger, saying I give thee this man to be thy slave or bedfellow; if he be not loving, obedient, and dutiful unto thee, I give thee here this Can∣zharre or dagger to cut off his head. When they are ma•• ryed, their husbands come not to bed unto them, till they are sent for, and then also they creep in at the beds feet. That ever any of their Ladies made use of their daggers, I could never read, onely I find, that Lutzis Bassa, the chief man of the Empire next the Sultan himself, and of him very much beloved, having given his wise, which was sister to Solyman the Magnificent, a box on the ear, was upon complaint by her made, thrust from all his honours, banished in∣to Macedon, and had doubtless been slain, if the Emperours love and his own merits had not pleaded for him. And this is all the Prerogative of the Sultans daughter: her sonnes being accounted as meer and ordinary Turks onely, and never being preferred above the rank of a common Cap∣tain.

The better sort of the Turks use the Schivonian Tonque, the vulgar speak the Turkish language, which being originally the Tartarian, borrowed from the Persians their words of State; from the Arabick their words of Religion; from the Grecians their words or terms of war; and from the Italians, their terms of navigation.

They were formerly idolatrous Pagans, and were first initiated in Mahometanism, when they got the Soveraignty of the Persian Scepter. The degrees in their Religion are, 1. The Saffi or Novices. 2. The Calsi, or readers. 3. The Hegi, or writers of books, for printing they use not. 4. The Napi, or young Doctors. 5. The Caddi, whereof there is at least one in every City, to judge of offences. 6. The Mudressi, who use to oversee the Caddis. 7. The Medlis, or principal Church Governour under the Musti. 8. The Caldelescats, whereof there are onely three, one of Greece, the other for Anatolia, the third for Egypt and Syria: These sit with the Bassas in the Divano, to determine of temporall suits. 9. The Musti, whose sentence in law and religion is uncontroulable. He abaseth not himself to sit in the Divano, nor affordeth more reverence to the Emperor than he doth to him.

His forces are either for the Sea, or the land. His Sea forces are great in regard of his spacious sea-coasts, vast woods, and number of Subjects: he never suffered but one memorable defeat, which was that at Le∣panto; yet the next year he shewed his Navy whole and entire. Gallies are his onely vessels, which being unable to cope with ships of any bigness, were not onely the occasion of that overthrow, but also have heartned the Florentine, onely with six great ships of war, to swager in the Seas; so that for more safety the tribute of Egypt is of late sent to Constantinople by land. The Captain Bassa, or Admirall, not∣withstanding with a Navy of 60 fail, makes a yearly progress about the Seas, and Sea Towns, to annoy the enemy, suppress Pyrates, collect the tributes, and to redress the abuses committed in the maritime Towns, belonging to the Admirallity: which annuall circuit is begun in May, and ended in Oc∣tober.

Their land forces are either horse or foot, they which served on horseback are the Spali and Asapi: these latter serving to weary the enemies, and dull there swords with there multitudes; of whole bodies the Janizaries use to make mounts whereon to assault the wall of a besieged Town: and are by them so contemned, that a Janizary once sold a of them for a sheeps head. As for the Spali, they till they are inrold into pay, are of the same originall and education with the Janizaries; and called by the same name Azamaglans. Their pay is ten aspers a day. The Turk is able and doth main∣tain 150000 Horses at little or no cost, which no other Prince can do with 14. millions of Gold; for wheresoever any Parcell of Land is conquered, it is divided into divers parts, and committed to the manuring of divers men, whom they call Timariots. These are to pay unto the Emperour cer∣tain rents, and at their own charges to send to his wars so many horse, excellently appointed for the field: and which is the chief point of their service to keep the subjects and all parts of his Em∣pire in awe. For being as they are dispersed in all quarters of his Dominions; the people can no sooner stir, but these will be assembled and fall upon them. These Timariots are in all accounted 719000 fighting men, whereof 257000 have their abode in Europe, and 402000 in Asia and A∣prica. Were it not for these Timartors as the Turks saying is, no Grass would grow where the Grand Signeurs horse hath once set his hoof: for if the care of manuring the ground were commited to Pai∣sants and not to military men, the greatest part of this Empire would grow wast and desolate. These Timariots were instituted by Ottomon the first Turkish King of this Family, and a curse by him laid on them that should annihilate the institution. The name is derived from the Turkish word Timaz signifying a stipend.

But the nerves and Sinews of this warlike body, are the Janizaries; who by originall being Christians, are chosen by the Turkish Officers, every five years, out of his European dominions: and so distributed abroad to learn the language, customes, and religion of the Turks; afterward according to there strength, will, or disposition, placed in divers chambers. They of the first cham∣ber are preferred some to be Chiausies, such as go on Embassies, and execute judgements; others to Sanziacks, or Governours of Cities; some to be Bassas or commanders of horsemen; and others to be Beglerbegs (idest, Lord of Lords) to command the rest in generall. They of the other cham∣bers are the Janizaries or Praetorian Souldiers of the Guard, to whose faith and trust the care of the Emperours Person is committed. The tithing of these young springals is as we have said every fifth year, and oftner sometimes, as occasions serve. By which means he not only disarmeth his own subjects and keepeth them from attempting any stirre or innovation in his Empire: but spoileth all the Provinces he most feareth, of the Flower, Sinews and strength of their People; choise being made of the strongest youths only, and fittest for war. These before they are inrold in pay, are called Azamoglans, and behave themselves with much submissiveness towards their Se∣niours and governours: but when once they are honoured with the title of Janizaries, they grow by degrees into an intolerable pride and haughtiness: till of late they were not permitted to mary, neither now can any of their sonnes be accounted any other than a naturall Turk, (whom of all the rest they account the basest) the eldest onely excepted: to whom this Prerogative was granted by A∣murath the third when he came to the crown. They are in number 40000. of which 16000 are alwaies resident in Constantinople. In this City they are diversly employed, being as Constables to see the Peace kept; as Clerks of the Market to see to the weights and measures; as Officers to arrest common offenders; as Warders to look to the gates, to guard the houses of Embassadours, and to travel with strangers for their more safety; in which charge they are very faithfull. There pay is but five aspers a day, and two gowns yearly; neither are their hopes great, the command of 10, 20, and 100 men being their greatest preferment; yet are they very obsequious to their Captain or Aga, who is in∣feriour to the meanest Bassa, though in power perhaps above the chiefest. For the crafty Turks join not power and authority, and if they observe the Janizaries to love and respect their Aga, they quickly de∣prive him of life and office. The Founder of this Order was Amurath the first, Anno 1365. their great∣test establisher Amurath the second: their name signifieth young Souldiers. Now concerning these Ja∣mazaries, we will farther consider the sway they bear in designing the Successour. 2. There insoleney to∣wards the Emperour, and his Officers. 3. Their behaviour in the vacancy of the throne; and 4. Their punishments.

1. Concerning the first, I never find any particular sway the Janizaries carryed in the designation of their Emperour, till the death of Mahomet the Great; when the Bassas having chosen Coreub the sonne of Bajazet, were overruled by the Aga and his Janizaries; who more inclined to Bajazet his Fa∣ther and sonne to Mahomet. Though I am not ignorant, that when this Mahomet succeeded in the Throne, the joyful acclamations made by the Souldiers was accounted the chiefest sign of his secure and perpetuated establishment. But the chief instance of their power herein, was the inthronizing of Selimus the first, who being but the seventh sonne of this Bajazet, was not only preferred by them before his brethren in his Fathers life time, but by their aids also be severally mastered them, and in the end poisoned his Father. To omit other examples, even of late Anno 1622. they slew the young Emperoun Osmen, drew his Unkle Mustapha out of prison, and established him in the Royalty.

2. As for the next, the first example in which I find them peccant toward their Prince, was at the be∣ginning of the reign of the abovementioned Bajazet; when hearing of the intended death of Achmet Bas∣sa whom they loved, they broke open the Court gates, and told the Emperour, They would teach him like a drunkard a beast and a rascall as he was, to use his great place and calling with more sobriety and discretion. Not long after conceiving further displeasure against the said Bajazet, they shook their

weapons against him, and refused to take him into the middest amongst them; and were not, without great and vile submission on his part, appeased. Against Selimns the first, they also mutined, when being resolv∣ed to winter in Armenia, for the better pursuit of his victories against the Persian, he was by them forc∣ed to return home unto Constantinople. Against Solyman they mutined so violently, that they compelled him to displace Rustan his chief Bassa or favorite. Against Amurath the 3d. for placing over them a new Aga, they so strongly opposed themselves; that first they set fire on Constantinople, and burnt therein, be∣sides shops and ware-houses, twentyfive great Innes, seven Temples, and 15000 houses, and in the end constrained him to give them money, and to yield also into their hands two of his chief Counsellors, by them supposed to be their adversaries; whom they drew about the streets. Finally, (to omit the tumult 1622 above-named) in the year 1600 they grew so discontented with Mahomet the 3d. that they not onely threatned to destroy the Principal Officers of the Court, and the banishment of the Sultaness his Mo∣ther, but the deposing of himself also.

3. Now for the third, I find it to have been the custome of these Janizaries, between the deaths of an old Emperor, and the beginning of a new, to commit divers insolencies; as the rifling of the houses of the Jews and Christians, among whom they dwell; the murdering of the Bassas, and principall men about the Court, whom they suspected not to have favoured them; and a number of the like outragious mis∣chiefs. Of these we find frequent mention, as after the death of Amurath the 2d. and Mahomet the Great: at which last time the Merchants of Constantinople, being naturall Turks, escaped not their ra∣venous hands; neither could Mahomet-Bassa avoid the fury of their swords. This spoil they took for so certain a due, that if they were disappointed of it, they would presently raise commotions both in Court, Field, and City, unless some present satisfaction were made them. To this end Ackmat distributed a∣mong them two millions and an half of Ducats; Selimus the first, two millions; others made an encicase of their dayly pay. But Selimus the 2d. distributing among them 100000 Sultanies onley, was by them prohibited to enter into his Seraglio, till he had inlarged his bounty: and the great Bass••es were rapped a∣bout the pate with their callivers, for perswading them to quietness. Now to prevent the dangerous and factious liberty, which in the vacancy of the Empire was usually committed, the death of the old Em∣perour was with all secrecy concealed, till the arrivall of the new. To omit others, I will instance in the deaths of Mahomet the first, and Solyman onely. This Solyman died at the siege of Sigeth in Hungary, which was so cunningly concealed by Mahomet-Bassa the space of twenty dayes; that before the Janizaries knew of it, his sonne Selimus had possessed himself of Constantinople, and came also to their Army then in retreat homewards. For this Mahomet privately strangled the Physicians and Apothe∣caries which knew of his death, commanded the Souldiers to go on in their siege, and diverse times shew∣ed them the Emperor sitting in his horse-litter, as (being troubled with the Gout) he used to do: and when the City was taken, marched home with his dead body, sitting still in the same manner. So after the death of Mahomet the first, the Bassaes of the Court called their Divanos, as formerly they used, gave order for the levying of an Army, as if some warre were intended, and the Kings Physicians went up and down with their Potions, as if they had him still in cure. But the Pensioners and Janizaries misdoubting the matter, with all egerness desired to see him, which when the Bassaes durst not deny, they appointed the next day for their visit. The next day the body was apparrelled in royall large robes, placed in a chair, at the end of a long gallery, and a litle boy cunningly set behind him to move the Kings hand to his head, as if he should stroke his beard, as his manner was: which signes of life and strength the Souldiers seeing, held themselves contented, and so was his death concealed the space of 41 dayes.

4. As for the last, These insolent and unsufferable pranks committed so commonly by these masterfull slaves, so exceedingly stomached Ba••azet the 2. that he secretly purposed with himself, for curing so dange∣rous a disease, to use as desperate a remedy; which was to kill and destroy suddenly all the Janizaries. It is like that this Ba••azet being a Scholar, had read how Constantine the Great had cassed the Praetorian Souldiers, and destroyed their camp, as men that were the causes of all the stirres in his Empire, and whose pride was come to an intollerable height: and having the same cause to destroy his Janizaries, hoped to have done it with as much ease and safety as the other did; but they having notice of the plot, for the time continued so united and linked together, that he durst not then attempt it; and afterward siding with his sonne Selimus, cast him out of his Throne into his grave. Since which time the Emperors never durst punish them openly, but when any of them proveth delinquent, he is sent privately in the night time to Pera over∣against Constantinople, where by the way he is drowned, and a peece of Ordinance shot off, to signifie the performing of the Sultans command.

Now for the Emperors themselves, we will consider them in matters of pleasure, in matters of ceremony, and in matters of State, the last being considerable in three main points, which are the murdering of their brethren, the removing of their sonnes, their revenue, and therein a touch of their goverenment. To these we will adde, what apparent symtomes may be observed to prognosticate the standing, decreasing, and increasing of this puissant Monarchy.

1. For the first, he hath not so few as 500. (sometimes a 1000) choice virgins kept in a Seraglio by them∣selves, all slaves born of Christian Parents, and indeed the rarest beauties of his Empire. When he is dis∣posed to take his pleasure with any of them, they are all ranked in a gallery, and she is by the Aga of the women prepared for his bed, to whom he giveth his handkercher. She that beareth him the first sonne, is honoured with the title of Sultaness (Queen Mother we may call her) neither can he make any of them free, unless he marry them. When the Sultan dieth, all his women are carried into another Seraglio, where they are strictly looked too, and liberally provided for, and not seldome times are bestowed by the succeeding Sultan, on his great Bassaes, and such us he chiefly favoureth, which is a principall honour. They are at∣tended

on by women, and Eunuches; these being not gelded onely, but deprived of all their genitalls, and supplying the uses of nature with a silver quill: which in humane custome was brought in among them by Selimus the second, because he had seen a Gelding cover a mare.

2. These ceremonies are either performed by them, which is for the most part the building of a Mosche onely to help to the salvation of their souls: or towards them by others, which are most apparent in the enter∣tainment of Embassadors. For when such come to his presence, they are led between two of his Courti∣ers, and comming before the Throne on both sides (whereof the Bassaes sit with admirable silence, resem∣bling rather Statuaes than men;) they bow themselves to the ground with all humility, laying their hands on their breasts, but never uncovering their heads, which (as we before noted) is counted an undecency. When they are to depart, they go all backwards, it being accounted very irreverent to turn their back-parts towards a Prince so glorious. The reason why they are thus brought in between two, is said to be for their greater honour: but is indeed a fear that they have, lest the Grand Seignieur, under the pretence of a Salurati∣on, or the delivery of an Embassie, should be stapped. Which wariness they have used, ever since the time that Miles Cobiletz, a Servian, scrambling from among the slain at the battel of Cassona, and being ad∣mitted to the speech of Amurath the first, the Author of that overthrow; stabbed him into the belly with his dagger.

3. Amongst all the jarres and discontents that be, none have been with more unkindness begun, or more eagerness prosecuted, than those of brothers: and that not only in private families, but in the stems of Princes; the multitude of Pretendants, being the originall of most civill wars. To prevent these pub∣lick emotions, the Emperors of Habassia use to immure up all their younger children in the hill Amaza; the Persians do put out the eyes of their younger brothers; and the Turks do murder them: strange and horrid courses, whereby to avoid the fear of a war in the State, they stirre up a war in their own bowels. The first amongst the Turks that began this barbarous cruelty, was Bajazet the first, on his brother Jacup; whom immediately after his Fathers death he strangled with a bow-string: this being the only in∣stument of their Fratricide, because thereby none of the blood-royall of Ottoman is spilt on the ground. After him, Mahomet the Great, caused his young brother then at nurse, to dy the death; and was not without much ado perswaded from being the executioner himself. Amurath the third, caused his five brethren to be at once strangled before his face; and Mahomet, his sonne, no fewer then nineteen in one day. By this course they imagine their own estate to be infinitely secured, as knowing that Mustapha a younger sonne, stirred a rebellion against Amurath; and Zemes against Bajazet, both the second of those names: that Solyman, Musa, and Isa, severally afflicted Mahomet the first, and Corcut, Seli¦mus; the first of these names also. But yet they will not know, that nothing sooner putteth their youn∣ger Brothers into these acts of hostility, than an inevitable certainty of a violent and unnatural death: where∣as were they but sure of life, and a liberall and Princely maintenance, it is more than probable, they would rest content, as in other Kingdomes the younger Princes do. And notwithstanding their barbarous policy, in particular, they are not quite free from fear, as knowing the counterfeits have heretofore much disturbed the quiet of their Predecessours: for thus we find Amurash the second to have been vexed by one that took upon him the name of Mustapha elder brother to Mahomet, then late deceased; who was much fur∣thered and aided by the Greek Princes. This hath been one of the vulgar policies of Princes to kindle flames of sedition in their neighbours Countreys. In the infancy of the Roman Empire we find a counter∣feit Agrippa, after that a counterfeit Nero, and before two counterfeit Alexanders in Syria. But never was Realm so often troubled with these Mock-kings, as England; a counterfeit Richard the 2d. being made in the time of Hen. the 4th. a counterfeit Mortimer, in the time of Hen. the 6th. counterfeit Duke of York, a ounterfeit Earl of Warwick, under Henry the 7th. and a counterfeit Edw. the 6th. under Q. Mary. To prevent these walking spirits, Mahomet the third, laid out the dead bodies of his Father and nineteen brethren, as a common spectacle for all that passed by, or would come to behold them. Of late indeed the Grand Signeur Mustapha, miraculously scaped the bow-string twice; 1. when his brother Achmat, and 2ly. when Osmen his young Nephew were made Sultans, and was the first that in this Empire did ever succeed in the collateral line: as Ibrahim the late Sultan was the second, on the death of Morat or Amurath the fourth, his elder brother.

4. The removing of the young Princes is done for three reasons: 1. to wean them from the pleasures of the Court, 2ly. to train them up in arms, and inure them to hardness, 3ly. and principally to avoid the danger of a Competitour, where of old Princes are especially jealous. The common places destinated to this Princely exile, are Amasia in Cappadocia, Magnesia in Lydia, and such like Towns of Natolia. Neither do the old Sultans by such a great distance think themselves secure altogether; but carry a vigilant eye over their sonnes actions, and have intelligence of almost every particular thought, the least suspicion being cause sufficient to destroy them; so we find Mustapha, sonne to Solyman, the hopefullest branch that ever sprang from the Ottomon tree, to have been shamefully strangled by the command of his Father, upon a rumour onely of a mariage which he was said to have negotiated with the Persian Kings Daughter. When these Princes are once setled in their government, it is a crime meriting no less punishment than death, to depart thence and come unto Constantinople, before their Fathers death; or unless they are by their Fathers sent for. Of this we have a Tragical example in Mahomet a Prince of great hope, sonne to Bajazet the second: who desiring to see the fashion of his Fathers Court, left Magnesia to which he was by his Father confined; and attended by two or three Gentlemen, came in the habit of a seafaring man to Constantinople, and having obtained his desire he returned to his charge. This strange action being quickly divulged abroad, and by divers variously entercepted, stirred such jealousies in the suspicious head of his old Father, that he took order not long after to have him secretly poisoned.

5. As for the ordinary revenue, it consisteth either in money received, or in money saved. The mo∣ney saved, is first by the Tartars, of whom he commands continnally 60000 to attend him in his wars without any pay but the spoil of the Enemie. And second by the Timariots, who nourish and bring into the Field more horses than any Prince in Christendome can keep (as we have already said) for 14 millions of Gold. The money received (according to Boterus) is only 15 millions of Sulianies, which is nothing in respect of so great an Empire: the chief reason whereof is the Tyrannicall government of the Turk, which deters men from tillage, merchandize, and other improvements of their estates; as knowing all their get∣tings to lie at the Grand Signieurs mercy. His extraordinary revenue is uncredible; For besides that no Em∣bassadour commeth before him empty handed; no man is master of his own wealth, further than it stands with the Emperours liking: so that his great Bassaes are but as spunges to suck up riches till their cofiers swell; and then to be squeezed into his Treasury. These men, as he advanceth without envy, so can he de∣stroy without danger: no man here hoping for Partakers, if he should resist, as not being ignorant that one mans fortune is built on the desired overthrow of another. Such riches as they gain, if they hap to die naturally, return to the Emperors coffers, who giveth only what he pleaseth to the Children of the deceased. These Bassaes have in their particular Provinces, their Divanoes, or Law-Courts, where justice hath bin administred formerly with great integrity; but now not a little corrupted; yet the comfort is, that such as miscarry in their right, shall without delay know what to trust to; and the Bassaes upon complaint to the Emperor are sure to die for it. Over these Bassaes (the chief of whom is the Uizier Bassa, or Presi∣dent of the Council) preside two Beglerbeggs; one for Greece, the other for Natolia.

6. Concerning the present state of the Empire, many judge it to be rather in the wane, than the increase, which judgement they ground upon good reasons, whereof these are the chief.

1. The body is grown too monstrous for the head: the Sultans since the death of Solyman never accompa∣nying their Armies in person (except Morat, or Amurath the fourth) but rioting and wasting their bodies and treasures at home.

2. The Janizaries, who have been accounted the principall strength of this Empire, are grown more factious in the Court, than valiant in the Camp: corrupted with ease and liberty, drowned in prohibited wines, enscebled with the continual converse of women, and fallen from their former austerity of disci∣pline.

3. They have of late given no increase unto their Dominions: and as in the paths of vertue, non progredi est ••egredi; so in Empires, by violence gotten, when they cease to be augmented, they begin to be dimi∣nished.

4. Rebellions have in these latter times been in this Empire strangely raised, and mightily supported; which commotions the former Sultans were never acquainted with.

5. The greatness of the Empire is such, that it laboureth with nothing more than the weightiness of it self; so that it must in a manner needs decline Pondere pressa suo, overburdened with its own mightiness. For as in a naturall body, a surfeit killeth more than fasting; so in the body Politick also, too much extent doth sooner draw on a ruin, than either too little or a mediocrity.

6. The Sonnes of the Grand Signieur, whose bravery of mind is ever suspected by their Fathers, are nurs∣ed up (contraty sometimes to their natural inclinations) in all effeminacy; which once rooted in them in their youth, doth alwayes after subject them to the softness and baseness of libidinous pleasure.

7. They have lost much of that fear and terror, which formerly their very name did carry with it: inso∣much that not the Venetians onely have by Sea often mated, and once overthrown them; the Hungarians withstood their greatest forces, for the space of 200 years, by land; the Polonians forced them to disho∣nourable retreat and composition: but the poore Prince of Transylvania did divers times discomfit them, with the death of many of their Bassaes; the Florentines with six ships onely, intercepteth their trade; and the poor Emir of Sidon held it out against them many years together.

8. By the avarice and corruption reigning in the Court; all peace and warre, all Counsels and informa∣tions, all injuries and favours, being now made saleable. And

9. It is visible and apparent, that their Empire was long sin ce at the highest: Et naturaliter quod pro∣cedere non potest, recedu, as Velleius hath it: when an Empire can ascend no higher, by the ordinary course of nature it must have a fall. All these are more than probable Prognosticks of a sinking Monarchy; and yet there is a greater than any of these, that is to say, the present State of Affaires. The young Empe∣ror Mahomet the fourth, now reigning, is but a weak staff to support so vast an Empire: consi∣dering not onely the infinite casualties to which children are naturally subject; but the dangers which he may justly fear from a Rebellious Souldiery, and a Factious Court; Who by the murder of one Emperor, and the deposition of two, have made themselves so formidable, but withall so odious in the sight of the Imperiall house, that there is no way left to save them from a merited vengeance, but to translate the Empire tosome other Family; though by the rooting out of this. Which whensoever it shall happen, either by the natu∣rall death, or unnaturall destruction of the present Sultan, it will draw with it an extermination of the Ot∣toman race: which I look on as a matter not to be avoided, except by miracle. Supposing then the line of Ottoman to fail, (as it is most probable that it will) what will become of this vast Empire? Three there will be to offer at it, viz. the Crim-Tartar, the Janizaries, and the Bassas, And first the Crim-Tartar may plead a composition, made by his Ancesters, with the Princes of the Ottoman family; which is, that he supplying them with 60000 men at his own charges, should on the failer of the heirs males suc∣ceed in this Empire. Besides which, he may hope for no small succors, not onely from the rest of the Tartarian Princes, but even from the Great Cham himself, to recover his Estate herein, if with-holden from him: thereby to adde unto the Present greatness and renown of the Tartars, the access of such a foa∣cious

Empire. 2. The Bassaes may conceive no small possibilities of dividing this great Empire among themselves, parely by the Example of Alexanders Captains, who after their masters death (there being yet some of the blood Royall remaining) parted amongst themselves not onely the new-gotten Provinces, which they had conquered from the Persians; but even the Kingdome of Macedon, his old Inheritance: partly by an example in their own Histories, by which it appeareth, that after the death of Aladine the 2d. Ca∣raman, Sarachan, Aedin, Carasus, and the rest of the more powerfull Commanders, divided among them the whole Turkish Kingdome in the Lesser Asia: and partly by the opportunity which they have as Govemours in their severall Provinces, and having so many bands of Souldiers under their command; which may easily invest them as Proprietaries in those Estates, of which they have already such a fair possession. And so we find the Sultans or Provincial Governours of the Caliphs of Babylon, to have done before them. 3. The Janizaries may also build their hopes on as fair foundations, as being the Sword and Buckler of the Ottoman Empire; got, and maintained by their valour chiefly, who to excite them to the Enterprize have the Example of the Pratorian Guards of the Roman Empire (a body farre more Politique and better compacted than this is); who out of their own company created the farre greater part of the Roman Em∣perors, neither the Provinces or Senate daring to oppose them in it. But above all Examples that of the Mamalucks of Egypt doth make fairest for them; who were born of Christian Parents, as these are; ap∣pointed for the Guard of the Sultans, as these are; purposely entertained and inured to the warres, to take from the naturall subjects, the use of Armes, as these are; men of approved valour, and the chief Bulwark of that Kingdome against the Christians, as these are: and then why may they not be like them in this last Attempt, for setting in their Masters Throne, as these Mamalucks did. Adde hereunto, that they are already in (a manner) possessed of Constantinople, the head town and heart of the Empire; and their hopes are not vain. For my part I hold them to be the men most like, unless the Princes of Christendome lay a∣side private malice, joyn all in arms to strip this proud Peacock of his feathers: and (upon so blessed an advantage) to break in peeces with a rod of iron, this insolent and burdensome Monarchy. A thing rather to be desired than expected. But this by way of supposition, and as in a dream, I awake.

The ensign of this Empire (or armes of it) is the Croissant, or half moon; but how blazoned I cannot tell you: not are the learned yet resolved on the beginnings of that bearing. Some derive it to them, from the Eastern Gentiles, who worshiped the Moon under both sexes; as we learn in Spartianus. Some make it common to them, with the other Mahumetans; and they derive it from a pretended miracle of Maho∣met: who to shew his power, is said to have made the Moon fall into his lappe in two peeces; and to have restored her whole again to the heavens. Others are of opinion, that it was taken by the Grand Signeur at the winning of Constantinople; ut signum victae gentis penes quam orientis imperium esset. And of this mind is Justus Lipsius, induced thereto as it seemeth, by the figure of the Croissant born in some old Bi∣zantine coins. A pretty plausible conceit; and therefore till we have a better, may pass as currant as the money.

And thus much I thought convenient to insert in this place, concerning the originall, proceeding, and continuance; the naturall dispositions, policies, and forces of the Turks: this being as the onely Province which retaineth their name; so both the first they were possessed of, and the last which they have fully con∣quered of all their Dominions.

And thus much of Turcomania.

OF MEDIA and PERSIA.

THese I have joyned together also, because the affairs thereof have been so united, in making up the second of the four great Monarchies, and running the same fortunes ever since, that they are hardly to be parted in course of story, though each must have unto it self a distinct Chorographie. First then, we begin with MEDIA.

MEDIA is bounded on the East, with Parthia, and some part of Hyrcania, Pro∣vinces of the Persian Empire; on the West, with Armenia Major, and some part of Assy∣ria; on the North, with the Caspian Sea, and those parts of Armenia Major which now pass in the ac∣compt of Georgia; and on the South, with Persia. So called from Madai the sonne of Japhet, by whom first planted and possessed, after that general dispersion made at Babel. Known by this name amongst the antients both Greeks and Romans; but at this time called Sheirvan by the Turks and Persians: the word sig∣nifying in the language of this Countrey, a Milkie-Plain.

The Countrey of a large extent, and of so different nature, as one would think it not the same. The North parts lying betwixt Mount Taurus and the Hyrcanian Sea, very cold and comfortless: so barren, that for the most part they make their bread of dried Almonds, and their drink of the juice of certain herbs. Fruit-trees they have but few, and those but of Apples; nor any droves of tame cattel, as in other places, their food being generally on Ventson, or the flesh of wild beasts took in hunting. But on the South-side of the Taurus, the soyl is very rich, and the Countrey pleasant, plentifull both of corn and wine, and all things necessary: full of fat pastures, some of them so large in compass, that 50000 horses do graze upon it.

The people antiently great Warriers, as those who ruined the great Empire of the Babylonians; and laid upon themselves and their own vertue the foundation of the second Monarchy. But being not long after in∣corporated into the same Empire with the Persians, have not onely ever since followed the same fortunes with them, but participate of their nature also: and therefore we shall hear more of their Character when we come to Persia. Polyg••mie antiently amongst them, so farre from being esteemed a sinne or an incon∣venience, that it was a punishment for the common Villager to have less than seven wives; or the woman, if of noble birth, fewer than five husbands. In their warres they use commonly to envenom their Arrows with an oyl or liquor, made of a bituminous water called Naphta, whereof there is great plenty both here, in Persia, and Assyria. The oyl called Oleum Mediacum, from this people only because their invention, and by them most mischievously used. The Arrow which was anointed with it, being shot from a slacker bow (for a swift and strong motion took away its vertue) did burn the flesh wherein it fastned with so great a violence, that nothing but dust could mitigate the fury of it, water increasing rather than diminishing that malignant flame.

The Christian Religion was first here planted by Saint Thomas, but never had the happiness to be so uni∣versally embraced as in other places; alwayes opposed and suppressed, either by Paganism in the time of the old Porsian Kings; or by Mahometanism, since the first conquest of this Countrey by the power of the Saracons. Some Christians yet there be amongst them either of the Armenian or Nestorian Sects, (as in all other parts of the Persian Empire) the specialties of whose Religion have been elsewhere spoke of. Here live also very many Jews, indulged the free exercise of their Religion: many of which are the De∣scendants of those Tribes which were transplanted hither by Salmanassar. But the Religion generally embraced and countenanced is that of Mahomet, according to the Sophian or Persian Sects, the Lan∣guage of which Nation they do also speak, though they had a language of their own, different from that of the Parthian, Elamite or Persian, as appeareth Acts 2. v. 9. where they are reckoned as distinct.

Mountains of chief note, 1. Orontes, 2. Coronus, 3. Chabor as, the boundary betwixt Media and Assyria, 4. Jasonium, 5. Lagoas; all of them (except Chaboras onely) the disjointed bran∣ches of Mount Taurus: which is here more broken and divided than in any part of his course besides.

Out of these flow their principall Rivers, 1. Amandus, 2. Strato, and 3. Carindas; of greatest eminence in this Countrey, in the time of Ptolomy, but otherwise of no great account or observation. 4. Canac, the Divider of this Province from Armenia Major, but whether any of the former under this new name, I am not able to aff••••m. Adde hereunto the great Lake, now called Argis (by the Persians, V••••sthlar) but by Strabo named Martiana Palus, situate in the confines of Assyria, Media, and Ar∣menia; of the fish whereof, dryed by the Sun and wind, and sold into divers other Conntreys, the people of these parts raise a great commodity.

In former times it was divided into many Provinces, the principall of which 1. Tropatene, 2. Cha∣rome••••rene, 3. Daritis, 4 Marciane, 5. Amariace, and 6. Syro-Media: these and the rest re∣duced to two in the later reckonings, viz. Atropatia, and 2. Media Major.

1. ATROPATIA is that part hereof which lieth betwixt Mount Taurus and the Caspian Sea. So called from that Atropatus, Governor of these parts in the time of Darius, the last persian Monarch, who so valiantly held out against the Macedonians. The Tropatene, (as I take it) of the antient Writers. A patten, cold, and unhospitable Countrey, as before described: and for that cause allotted for the dwelling of many of the captive Israelites brought hither by Salmanassar when he conquered that Kingdome: their numbers being found so great in this Northern Region, that benjamin the Jew, reckoned no fewer than 50000 of them in one City onely, which he calleth by the name of Madai. And that great numbers of them were transplanted hither, appeareth by that passage 2 Kings 17. 6. where it is said, that they were placed in Halan and Habor by the River of Goz••n, and in the Cities of the Medes. Now Halah or Chalah seems almost probably to be that Region of Assyria which Ptolomy calleth Chalatone, in the North of that Countrey towards Media; Habor, or Chabor, to be that Mount Chaberus, which parteth this Countrey from Assyria, in which Mountainous tract there was in those times a City of the same name al∣so. Betwixt which City and the banks of the Caspian Sea, I find in Ptolomy the City Gauzania in the 40th. degree and 40 minutes of Northern Latitude: in which there are apparent footsteeps of the name of the River Gozin, upon whose banks it was most likely to be seated.

Places of most observation in it, 1. Hamadum, by Benjamin the Jew called Madai, replenished in his time with families of the captive Israelites. 2. Gaurazania, another dwelling of those Tribes, spoken of before. 3. Mandigarsis, of which nothing extant but the name. 4 Gelan, the Gela of the antients, whom the Greeks call Cadusii. 5. Bochu, more towards the the Caspian Sea, hence called Mare de Bochu. 6. Eres, a place of great strength, but possessed by the Turks, and made the residence of some of their principal Officers: taken by Mustapha, Generall of the Turkish forces in the time of Amurath the 3d. and by him fortified as the Gate and entrance of this Countrey. 7. Sumachia, or Shamaki, betwixt Eres and Derbent, taken by Osman Bassa, at the same time, Anno 1578. and made the Residence of a Beglerbeg, Anno 1583. Conceived to be the Cyropolis of Ptolomy, by the Persinas called Cyreckbata, bearing the name of Cyrus the great Persian Monarch, by whom built or beautified. Remarkable at the present for a Pillar of flint-stones, inter-woven with the heads of many of the Persian nobility, most barbarously slain by one of the late Sultans, and this Pillar here erected for a terrour to others.

2. MAJOR MEDIA, or MEDIA specially so called, is that part hereof which lieth on the South of the Mountain Taurus. Commended by the Antients for one of the godliest Countries in all Asia: the fields (saith Ammianns) yielding abundance of Corn and Wine, for their fatness and fertility very rich, and no less pleasent for fresh Springs and cleer veins of water: where one may see plenty of green Mea∣dows, and in them a breed of generous horses, which they call Nisoei, mounted by as valiant and generous Riders, who with great jollity use to go unto the warres, and charge furiously upon the Enemy. The men commended by Polybius (〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 &c.) as well as the Countrey.

Cities of most note in it, 1. Ecbatana, of as great antiquity as Babylon; for we find that Semiramis the wife of Ninus in a warre made against the Medes, who had then rebelled, taking an affection to the place, caused water-courses to be made to it from the further side of the Mountain Orontes, digging a pas∣sage thorow the hills, with great charge and labour. Destroyed by the injury of time it was re-edified by Deioces the sixt King of the Medes, and afterwards much beautified and enlarged by Seleucus Nicanor, Successor unto Alexander in his Asian Conquests. For beauty and magnificence litle inferiour to Baby∣lon or Ninive, before described. In compass 180 or 200 Furlongs, which make about 24 Italian miles. The walls thereof affirmed in the book of Judith to be 70. Cubits high, 50. Cubits broad, and the Tow∣ers upon the Gates 100 Cubits higher; all built of hewn and polished stone, each stone being six Cubits in length, and three in breadth. But this is to be understood only of the innermost wall, there being seven in all about it, each of them higher than the other, and each distinguished by the colour of their severall Pin∣nacles; which gave unto the eye a most gallant Prospect. From which variety of colours it is thought to have the name of Agbatha, or Agbathana. In former times the ordinary residence of the Monarchs of the Medes and Persians in the heats of the summer, as Susa (the chief City of Susiana) in the cold of win∣ter. The Royall Palace being about a mile in compass, was built with all the cost and cuuning that a state∣ly mansion did require: some of the beams thereof of silver, and the rest of Cedar; but those of Cedar strengthned with Plates of Gold. Said by Iosephus to be built by the Prophet Daniel. Which must be understood no otherwise in the truth of Story, than that he over-saw the Workmen, or contrived the Model, appointed to that office by Darius Medus, to whom the building of the same is ascribed by others. Neglected by the Kings of the Parthian race, it became a ruin. 2. Tauris, situate in or neer the place of Echatana, out of whose rubbish it was built. Distanta 150 miles from the Caspian Sea, under the shadow of Orontes, now called Baronta, but opening Southwards towards a large and spacious Campagn: in compass about six miles, and beautified on the South-west within a large and pleasant garden, the work of Sultan Tamas, who resided here often; the buildings for the most part of brick, which flat Roofs (as ge∣nerally in all the East) well peopled, as containing 200000 persons of all sorts and Sects. Of great trading, subdued by the Turks by whom it was thrice taken within very few years, viz. by Selimus the first, Anno 1514. by Solyman the Magnificent, Anno 1530. and by Osman Bassa, generall of Amarath the 3d. Anno 1585. But this last finding it too chargeable to be always garrisoned, and nototherwise tenable but by force, pulled down the walls, and built a large and capacious Citadel: both Town and Citadel recovered by Emir-Hamze Mirza, Prince of Persia, and father of Sultan Sofy, Anno 1614. after it had been for a hundred years a continuall prey unto the Turks. 3. Arsa∣cia, so named by Ptolomy, and by the name conjectured to be built by some of the Par∣thian

race. Ruined long since, but more beautifully revived than ever in the present. 4. Casbin, raised from the ruins of that Town. Situate in a fair and open place on the banks of a litle River, which serveth 〈◊〉〈◊〉 for houshold uses, but not for trafick. Exceedingly enriched by removall of the Court from Tauris hither, in the time of Tamas, partly invited thereunto by the richness of the soyl, and the commodiousness of the place, but chiefly that he might without danger attend the Turks, who began to incroach on his domini∣ons. In compass about seven miles, beautified with a large market-place, many stately Mosques, and the Sultans Palace: this last adjoyning to the first, convenient enough, but neither of great state nor beauty. 5. Rages, or Raga, mentioned in the book of Tobit, so called from Ragas the sonne of Phaleg, the founder of it: situate neer the spacious Plain, so memorable for the great breed of horses spoken of before; and there∣fore in that book called the Plain of Rages. Repaired afterwards by the Greeks, it was named Europus, and so stands in Ptolonty. 6. Nassivan, supposed by some to be the Artasata, more probably the Nasman••, of the Antient Writers: a place much aimed at by the Turks in their Persian warres. 7. Ardoville, on or neer the banks of the great lake Argis, spoken of before: the birth-place and chief Seat of Guine and Ai∣der the first Authors of the Sophian Sect, and the burrall place of Sultan Hysmael the first Persian Sultan of that line. 8. Sultania, about six dayes journey from Taurus, environed with high Mountains, the tops of which continually covered with snow, may be seen farre off: founded by Alyaptu, the 8th. King of the Sixt or Tartarian Dynasty; and by him made the Royall Seat of the Persian Sultans, whence it had the name. But ruinated by the Tartars, it retaineth nothing now of its former splendour, but the Mosques, or Temples (one of them, the fairest in the East) which the Tartars spared. 9. Tyroan, in the Territory of Sultania, situate in a large Plain, but not farre from the Mountains; beautified with a fair Market-place, many pleasant Gardens of private men, and one belonging to the King, environed with a wall of greater Circuit than the City. 10. Turcoman, in the midle way betwixt Tauris and Casbin. 11. Damoan, at the foot of Taurus, a Town of 200 houses, not here considerable but for the signification of the name; which is said to signifie a Second Plantation: and being situate at the foot of so high a Mountain, occasioneth some of the Jews to think that the Ark rested not farre off, as perhaps it did not. 12. Maran••, in the Extremity of the Countrey, but of lesser note.

The first Inhabitants hereof were the posterity of Madai, as before was said; Ragan the sonne of Pha∣leg taking up those parts which lay next Assyria. Divided in long tract of time into several Tribes as the Codus••, Amariacle, Margasi, Sagartii, Debryces, Tapyri, and some others. Governed by King; immediatelly from the first Plantation: for we find that Pharnus King hereof was overthrown and slain by Ninus the grand-sonne of Nimrod: After this made subject to the Assyrians, their Kings were onely 〈◊〉〈◊〉 at the best but Homagers, perhaps no better than Provincial Governours under that great Monar∣narchy. Of most esteem amongst them was that Arsaeus, who with an Army of 800000. men (if the number be not mistaken) incountred the Cadusii, by whom discomfited and slain. But the Cadusii so broken, that they were fain to put themselves under the power of the Persians, and so continued till the time of Ar∣baces, the last of these Provincials, and the first Monarch of the Medes. He living in the time of Sard••∣napalus, had the chance to see his Lord and Master in a womans dress, spinning among his Concubines, & otherwise behaving himself in a brutish manner, which so moved him, that he resolved to be no longer sub∣ject to so vile a Monster. Communicating his thoughts unto Belochus Governour on Babylon, and well seen in Astrology, he was incouraged to proceed; and sped so well, that having made themselves Masters of Ninive, the Imperial City (though Sardanapalus for a time put them shrewdly to it) they divided be∣twixt them his Estates. To Belochus fell Assyria, and Babylonia, with the Provinces of the West of Ti∣gris: to Arba••es, Media and the rest, which now make up the Kingdome of Persia. But being a mild Prince, and desirous by fair and gentle means to assure his Empire, he confirmed the Persian Satrapaes in their former Governments; reserving nothing to himself but a titular Soveraignty. Of whom and his Successors more, when we have taken in the rest of the Provinces.

PERSIA.

PERSIA is bounden on the East, with India; on the West, with Media, Assyria, and Chaldaea; on the North, with Tactarie; on the south, with the main Ocean. So called from Persis the predomi∣nant Province of it, that which gave law to all the rest: as that is said to do from Perseus, the sonne of Jupiter and Danae; affirmed by the Grecians to have conquered these Eastern Countries, and to have left his name to this. Of which thus Isidore, Persae populi à Perseo Rege sunt vocati, qui à Graecia in Asiam transiens ibi barbaras gemes gravi diuturnoq•• bello perdomuit, et victor nomen subactae Genti imposuit. In the Scripture it is constantly called Elam, till the time of Daniel the Prophet, from Elam, the sonne of Sem, who was planted there. But after that the Medes and Persians had subdued Babylon, and transferred the supreme Monarchy to themselves, we find this people called by the name of Paras, (whence the name of Persian seems to come), the word Paras, (or Pharas) signifying as much as horsemen. Given there∣fore to this Nation, as it is supposed, from an Edict of Cyrus, who not onely taught them the art of horse∣manship, but set forth a law, that it should be a repoach to any man to go on foot, sive multum sive parum ••tin••ris esset conficiendum, whether the journey that he had to go were long or little. Called sometimes also Achaemenis, from Achaemenes the sonne of Perses, one of the first known Kings hereof; and by that name, Non tot Achaemeniis arm antur Susa Sagittis, they occurre in the second of Propertius. Where by A haemeniae Sagittae, he means Persian Arrows.

It is of very great extent, stretched out in length from the 82. degree of Longitude, to the 120. being 38 degrees in all; and in breadth from the 23. degree of Northern Latitude, to the 43. being 20 more; Accor∣ding unto which position, with reference to the heavenly bodies, we shall find it seated under the third,

fourth, fift, and sixt, Climates: the longest summers day in the Southern parts being thirteen houres and almost three quarters, and fifteen houres one quarter in the parts most Northwards.

The Countrey not alike in all places, as it is impossible it should in so great a compass. But generally it is of a pure and wholesome air, the high hills shading it on the one side from heat of the Clime under which it lieth; and the warmth of the Sea, wherewith encompassed, cherishing a great part thereof. And so it is affirmed to be by Quintus Curtius. Regio non alia in tota Asia salubrior habetur; temperatum coe••um, hine perpetuum Jugum opacum et umbrosum, quod astus levat; illinc mare adjunctum, quod modico tepore terras fovet. Then for the Earth, it is by reason of the great heat of the Sunne, very dry and sandy, in many parts destitute of water, few Rivers, and not many Lakes; by consequence neither well peopled, nor manured, for the greatness of it: men loving to inhabit (and I cannot blame them) where they may have the use of water. Which notwithstanding, it is furnished with all necessaries both for life and pleasure; one part affording that which the other wanteth, as shall be shewed in the description of the several Provinces.

The people antiently were trained up to the warres, but chiefly unto Archerie from their very childhood. Indulged the liberty of having as many wives as they pleased, they never saw the children begotten of them, untill five years old. At that age sent unto their Fathers, they were taught presently to handle the Bow and Arrows. Upon this ground we find the Bow of Elam mentioned by the Prophet J••remy chap. 4. and the Quiver of Elam by the Prophet Esaiah chap. 22. v. 6. as the Armes peculiar to that Nation, or most used amongst them. They were good horsemen also, and well skilled at their darts and slings, till wealth, and ease, and the pride of so great an Empire, made them wholly feminine: depriving them of those abilities both of mind and body, wherein they did excell most Nations in their harder times. In all their fortunes very obsequious, if not servile, to their Kings and Princes; in whose presence it was a crime to spit, but to deny obedience unto his commands an offence so heinous, as was not to be punished with less than the loss of life, and want of buriall. In this observance of their Kings, followed, if not out-strip∣ed, by the modern Persian. A race of men, affirmed to be cunctorum hominum mitissimi, the most meek or patient of the world, especially compared with those of the same Religion, the Turks and Tartars. Not haters of learning, as the Turks; But studious, many of them in Physick, and Astrology; most of the better sort much delighted in Poetry, which they give their minds to. For the most part addicted to hospi∣tality, magnificent in expence, Lordly in their complements, fantastical in their Apparell, maintainers of Nobility, and desirous of peace. Such as apply themselves to Trades, and Mechanick arts, prove ex∣cellent in the making of Silkes, and Cloth of Gold: those which betake themselves to warre, proving very good Souldiers, as the Turks have found unto their cost, who by their long warres against them have got no∣thing but blows. The women said to be neat and cleanly, truly loving, gorgeous in Attire, and de∣lightfull in the sequestrations of pleasure.

Their Religion at the first was Paganism, wherein directed principally by their Priests or Magi; men of a strict austere life, forbidding outward ornaments, and the use of gold; making the ground their bed, and the Herbs their food: their whole time spent in offering to the Gods the prayers and sacrifices of the peo∣ple, as if they onely might be heard; or else in divinations and foretelling of things to come, from whence the names of Magick and Magician are derived unto us. Studious in the knowledge of God and nature, and therefore called by Suidas, not onely Philoso••••hi, Lovers of wisdome; but Philothei, the Lovers of God. Of such esteem that as Cicero telleth us, the Persian Kings were not admitted to the Throne, till they were trained up in the discipline of the Magi: and of such power and intimacy in the Royall Court, that one of those Magi, on the death of Cambyses, possessed himself of the Persian Monarchy. In a word, such as the Druides were to the Galls and Britans, the Gymnosophists or Brachmans to the antient Indians, and the Chaldaeans in the Empire of Babylon, the same, if not of greater sway in affairs of mo∣ment, were the Persian Magi. And Persians they must be if Magi; none but the Natives of that Coun∣trey being to be admitted of that Society: though by a Metaphor applied to the Professors of the same Arts, though of other Countries; as those which came from the East to worship Christ are by Saint Matthew called Magi (Mat. 2. 1.) though they came from Arabia.

The people then were Gentiles as to their Religion; and besides other Gods which the Gentiles wor∣shipped, they were great Idolaters of the Fire; which they offered sacrifice unto in time of peace, and car∣ried it with them as their Tutelar Deitie in the time of warre. At what time (especially if the King were there in person) it was born in the very front of their Army, attended on by their Priests, and followed by a train of boyes all clothed in Scarlet, to the number of 365. according to the number of the daies of the year. In this equipage, with a great deal of pomp besides, did Darius set forwards to fight with Alex∣ander, at the battell of Issus in Cilicia. A superstition derived from them to the Medes and Assyria••s, their next-neighbouring Nations, and not extinguished to this day in some parts of this Countrey; in which many of these Fire-worshippers are still remaining. But from a God, it grew in time to be a Gentleman∣vshar, and to attend on Kings and persons of greatest eminence: used to be born before the Emperors of Rome, as a point of State. Insomuch that Commodus though fallen out with his Sister Lncilla, permitted her notwithstanding to enjoy her Seat in the publique Theatre, 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, and fire to be born before her, as in former times; as we are told by Hexodian.

The Christian faith was first planted in the Provinces of the Persian Kingdome by Saint Thomas the Apostle: and held in all points answerable to those of the Catholick Church, till Sapores to despight the Emperour Heraclius, a right Orthodox Prince, commanded that all the Christians in his Domi∣nions should conform themselves to the opinions and tendries of the Nestorian Sect, by that means uni∣versally spread over all these Provinces. With whom here live now intermingled some Armenian

Christians, who with their Patriarch removed hither, when their own Countrey was made the seat of a long and miserable war betwixt the Persian and the Turk: but found not here so safe a dwel∣ling as they did expect, 1200 of them being slain by Abas the late Persian Sultan, on a suspicion that they went about to reconcile themselves to the Pope of Rome (whom he held to be more inclina∣ble to the Turk than to him,) in the year 1609. Which notwithstanding (so miserable a condition do these Christians live in) he suffered two Convents of Augustine and Carmelite Friers, to be setled at the same time even in Spaw-hawn it self; and many Jesuites to live peaceably up and down the Countrey, which serve for little else than to give intelligence. Here are also many Jews dispersed o∣ver all the Provinces of this Empire; allowed their Synagogues, and publick places of assembly. But the Religion publickly authorized and countenanced, is that of Mahomet, imposed on this Countrey by the Saracens, when by them subdued: differing in some points from the Turks, especi∣ally about the true Successour of that fals Seducer (of which more anon) the cause of the long wars betwixt those nations.

As for the Persian language it is very antient, supposed to be as old as the Confusion at Babell: some words whereof, by Daniel and Ezra which lived in the Persian Court, have been made use of in some parts of the holy Scripture. A tongue which still hath left some remainders of it, in the language of the modern Persian (as those of judgement in this tongue have delivered to us): not∣withstanding so long tract of time, and the conquest of this Countrey by the Greeks, Arabians, Turks, and Tartars. Not spoken onely in this Countrey, nor limitted within the Provinces of the Persian Empire, but used also in the Court and Camp of the Great Mongul, and some parts of Za∣gathay: and where not vulgar unto all, studied and understood by persons of more eminent sort, as the Latine by the Gentry of these western parts. Insomuch as he that hath this Language, may travell over all the East without an Interpreter.

Rivers here are but few, as before was said, and those few not navigable; by consequence of little note or estimation. The principall of those that be, are 1. Eulaeus, the chief River of Susi∣aua, emptying it self into Sinus Persicus: a River of so pure a stream, that the great Persian Kings would drink of no other water. 2. Ochus in Bactria, a River of the greater note amongst the An∣tients, because it was navigable; opening with a fair Channel into the Caspian Sea, to which it hastneth from Mount Taurus; and so doth also, 3. Oxus in Margiana, a fatall bound to these great neighbours. A River which the Persians have seldome passed to inlarge their dominions, but they received some notable overthrow at the hand of the Scythians: and when the Tartars made o∣ver it under the conduct of Saba the Cham of Zagathay, for the invasion of Persia, they were shamefully beat back again by Hysmael Sophie. Nor is it less memorable in old stories for the fa∣mous passage of Alexander over it, in pursute of the murderers of Darius. For having followed Bessus to the banks of this River, and not knowing how to pass over his men, there being neither ships upon it, nor timber neer at hand to build them, he caused a great number of bags and bladders to be stuffed with straw, and so in 3 daies transported his Army. So that I may truely say with his own Historian, Unum id Consilium quod necessit as subjecerat, iniit; necessity is the best Author of fine inventions. 4. Zioberis in Hyrcania, which rising out of the same mountainous tract (as the two last-mentioned) after a long course above ground, in the open light, hideth himself again for the space of 38 miles, and then breaketh out at a new fountain; and falleth into 5. Rhadaga, a∣nother chief River of those parts. And this Alexander the Great found to be true, by casting two Oxen into the River Zioberis, which by the current of the stream were carryed under the ground, and brought to light where the River had its rise again. 6. Hidero, by what name known unto the Antients I am not able to say, but of great note amongst modern Travellers for the fall thereof into the Sea: so steep and strong, that the people are said to sacrifise or banket under the fall thereof, the stream so violently shooting over their heads, that it never wetteth them.

Mountains of most note, are those which pass by the name of Tanrus, which having left Media on the West, passeth thorow the Northern Provinces of the Persian Empire, dividing Parthia from Hyrcania, and Paropamisus from Bactria, and Aria from Margiana. Known by the names of Coronus, the Scriphian hills, Paropamisus, Caucasus; whereof more as occasion serveth in their proper places.

It is divided into the particular Provinces of 1. Susiana, 2. Persis, 3. Carmania, 4. Ormuz, 5. Gedrosia, 6. Drangiana, 7. Aria, 8. Parthia, 9. Arachosia, 10. Paropamisus, 11. Hyrcani∣a, and 12. Margians. Which we will severally survey in the Chorography and story, till we have joined them altogether in the Persian Monarchy; and then pursue the history as conjunct and fashioned in∣to the body of one Empire.

1. SVSIANA.

SVSIANA is bounded on the East, with Persis; on the West, with Babylonia or Chaldea; one the North, with Assyria; on the South, with a branch of the River Tigris, and some part of the Gulf of Persia.

It was so called quasi Cusiana, or the Land of the Chusites, from Chus the eldest sonne of Ham, and the grandsonne of Noah; by whose sonne Havilah, it was first peopled; and therefore called in Scripture the land of Havilah, this being that land of Havilah, which the River Pison is said to incompass, in the Book of Genesis. The difference betwixt them is, that that land of Havilah lay on both sides of the River

Euphrates (which the Countrey of Susiana doth not) and was the Eastern bound of the Ismaelites, Amale∣kites, and other Nations intermingled in those parts of Arabia. For whereas Saul is said in the first of Sam. chap. 15. ver. 7. to have smitten the Amalekites from Sur to Havilah, that is say from the Red Sea to the gulf of Persia: it must be understood of Havilah in the first extent; but neither of Havilah in the East Indies (so called from a sonne of Jocktan) or of that part of Havilah which lay on the East side of Euphrates, and is that Susiana, in which now we are: it being no where found that Saul was so great a Traveller as to see the Indies; or of such puissance as to force a passage thorow the Countreys of the Chaldeans and Babylonians. But the name of Havilah being lost, that of Cusiana or Susiana did still remain; preserved to this day in that of Chusestan, by which now called.

The Countrey memorable in the Scriptures for Gold, Bdellium, and the Onyx-stone; which doth abun∣dantly set forth the richness and commodities of it: Bdellium being a Tree (for of the other two nothing need be said) about the bigness of an Olive, yielding a certain Gum very sweet to smell to, but bitter of tast; which in time hardneth to a Pearl, as Eugubinus and Beroaldus have delivered to us.

Divided antiently into many particular Regions, or at least known by severall names in its severall quar∣ters. For where it bordered upon Tigris, it was called Melitene; Cabandone, where it touched upon Persis; where it confined on the Elymeans, it had the name of Cissia; and neer the wall or Ditch called Fallum Pasini, it was called Characene. Watered besides Eulaeus, and Tigris before spoken of, with the Rivers Orontes, and Masaeus, with that branch of the River Tigris which Ptolomy called Basilius; Cur∣tius, Pasi-Tigris; and the Scriptures, Pison.

Chief Cities hereof, 1. Aracca, spoken of by Ptolomy, the same which the Scriptures call Erech, and one of the four which Nimrod built in the first beginning of his Empire, Gen. 11. Remembred by Tibullus for the fountains of Naphtah (of which the Medians made their oyl spoken of before) a bituminous liquor, easily taking fire, but not easily quenched. Of which thus the Poet,

Audet Areccaeis aut unda perhospita Campis.

Where by unda perhospita, he meaneth that bituminous liquor called Napthta, issuing from the fields of Erech, as the learned Salmasius hath observed in his notes on Solinus. 2. Susa, the Shusan of the book of Hester, and Nehemiah, honoured with the residence of the Persian Monarchs in winter, as Ec∣batana in summer. Situate on the River Eulaeus, by the Prophet Daniel called Ulai. Built, as some say, by Memnon the sonne of Tithonus, slain by the Thessalonians in the Trojan warres: the walls where∣of as Cassiodorus hath reported, cemented with Gold. But howsoever, it was doubtless a magnificent City, and of infinite wealth: Alexander finding in it 50000 Talents of gold uncoined, besides silver wedges, and Jewels of inestimable value. Memorable for the great feast here made by Ahasuerus of 180 dayes continuance for his Lords and Princes: imitated by the Persian Sultans to this very day; who with a Royal Feast of the like continuance do annually entertain their Nobles. Now nothing but a ruine, and perhaps not that. 3. Elymais, the chief City of the Elymaei, by Ptolomy (unless his Copies be corrupted) mistakingly called Eldimaei. Situate on the banks of Eulaeus also, neer the border of Persis (the Nation of the Elamites or Elymaei taking part of both Provinces). Of great note antiently for a sumptuous Tem∣ple of Diant, sacrilegiously ransacked by Antiochus, of which see 1 Mac. 6. 2. and of such wealth, by reason of the concourse of Pilgrims thither, that Severus Sulpitius calleth it Oppidum opulentissimum, a most opulent City. 4. Sela, on the banks of Eulaeus also; reckoned by Ammianus amongst the most emi∣nent of this Province: so named from Selah the sonne of Arphaxad, who first planted there. To whom the building of the City of Susa is ascribed by Eustathius in his Hexameron, 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 are that Authors words; perhaps more truly than to Memnon: and unto whom the Original of the Cossaei, whom Prolomy placeth in this tract, is referred by Eusebius. 5. Tarsianu, another of the Cities mentioned by Ammianus (who takes notice onely of the chiefest,) the same no doubt which Ptolomy calls Tariana, and joynes next to Sela. 6. Agra, upon the banks of Tigris, not farre from Erech. But there is litle left of these, but what is to be found in the antient Writers; now hardly visible in their Ruins; The Towns of most note now remaining, being 1. Jaaroone, inhabited for the most part by Jewes, of which here are no sewer than a thousand familes; supposed to be the descendants of those whom Salmanas∣sar transplanted out of the Kingdom of Israel. 8. Saum. 9. Casa, of which litle mémorable.

The first Inhabitants hereof were the Chusites of the house of Havilah, the sonne of Chus; the Cossaei and the Susiani, descended from Sala the sonne of Arphaxad; and the Elymaei, the posterity of Elam the sonne of Sem. Betwixt the two last Nations long and frequent warres, till the Kings of Babylon or Assyria composed the differences, by making both subject to their Empire. After this, nothing memo∣rable in the story of it, till the transplanting of the tem Tribes into the Regions of Assyria, and the Cities of Media. At which time, as many of the Israelites were removed hither; so many of this Nation were sent out (with others) to possess themselves of the void places of those Tribes. Called Cutheans by the Jews, because the most considerable number of them came from this Province, called in the Scriptures Cush, by Josephus Cutha, and by him reckoned for a Region of Persia, as indeed it was, the time wherein he lived considered: difference onely in the Dialect or form of speech; that Countrey which the Hebrews called Chus, being named Cuth by the Chaldaeans; by the Persians Chuzestan: that name continuing to this day.

2. PERSIS.

PERSIS hath on the East, Carmania; on the West, Susiana; on the North, Media; and on the South, some part of the Persian Bay or Sinus Persicus, which took name from hence. The reason of the name we have had before; this being the predominant Province which in fine gave both name and law to the rest of this Empire. It had antiently been called Cephene, but now most commonly by the name of Ears, or Farsishan; more neer to Pharas, the old name of it both in the Arabick and He∣brew.

Such parts hereof as lie towards the North are cold and hilly, not apt to bear either fruit or com••, in any plenty. Some Emeralds they find there, but not very cleer. Those parts which lie towards the Persian Gulf, of as bad a nature, though of different quality, sandy, and hot, and beareth little fruit but Dates, and few trees but Palm. But betwixt both there lieth a rich and pleasant Countrey, abounding with com, fruit, and cattell; great store of Roses, of Rose-water consequently, wherewith and with those skins which we call commonly by the name of Cordovans from another occasion, they use to furnish all the ad∣joining Provinces. And to make up the Character of a happie Countrey, to which nothing wanteth, it is well stored with Lakes and Rivers; the chief whereof are 1. Bagradas, which divideth this Province from Carmania. 2. Rhogomanes, by some called Araxes, now Bindimir, on whose banks stood the renowned Persepolis. 3. Orantes, dividing Persis from Susiana, where it falls into the Bay. 4. Brisoana, ending its course in the same Sea also.

Mountains of note I find not any but those which part this Region from Susiana; not known by any spe∣ciall name (for ought I can find) but of sufficient note for the difficult passages out of one Countrey into the other, called Pylae Persidis, defended by Ariobarzanes, a Noble Persian, against Alexander the Great, who was here very handsomely beaten, and forced to save himself by a close retreat. And though Alexander was shewed a By-path afterwards, whereby he fell on Ariobarzanes ere he was aware; yet he was taught by this hard lesson, that if those who kept the straits of Cilicia, and the banks of Tigris and Euphrates had made like resistance, he had not bought the Persian Monarchy in so cheap a Mar∣ket.

It was divided antiently into Paraticine, bordering on Media. 2. Mardiene, joining on the Gulf or Bay of Persia. 3. Misdia, lying betwixt both. Each of which, with the severall nations intetmingled here as in other places, had their severall Cities. The chief whereof 1. Ausinza, seated on the Bay be∣twixt the mouths of Bagradas and Brisoana. 2. Jonacapolis, on the same Bay also, neer the influx of Rhogomanes, or Araxes. 3. Axima, more within the land, now called Lansilla. 4. Marrasium. 5. Obroatis, or Orebatis, as some Copies have it. 6. Pasarracha, in the Greek text of Ptolomy called Pasacgadt, and Pasagrada by Qu. Curtius. Memorable for the Sepulchre of Cyrus the first Persian Monarch. Which violated by a Souldier of Alexanders, in hope of finding some rich booty, he met with nothing but this modest inscription, Cyrus ego sum qui Persicum regnum consistui: quicunque ades mortalium, ne mihi tantillum telluris invideas, qua corpus meum obtegitur. The Sacrilegious Soul∣dier though a Macedonian, put to death by Alexander. 7. Persepolis, the chief City of this Pro∣vince, and of all the East, called therefore Regia Orientis, by Qu. Curtius; situate neer the banks of the River Araxet, and built for the most part of Cypress wood, the walls of the houses being made of Marble, dig∣ged out of an adjoining Mountain. Affirmed by Diodorus Siculus, who at large describes it, to be the richest and goodliest City in all the world. And well we may believe him for the richness of it, Alex∣ander finding here 120000 Talents, in ready money for his own share, after the Souldiers had made what spoil they listed of coin, Plate, Bullion, Images of Gold and Silver, and Jewells of unspeakable value. But the chief beauty of it was the Royall Palace, built on an hill, environed with a treble wall, the first of 16 Cubits height, the second of thirty, and third of sixty; all of them of black polished marble, with stately battlements, and in the Circuit of the whole Palace an hundred Turrets; which gave to the be∣holders far and neer a most goodly Prospect. Nor was the inside of less beauty, than the out-side of Ma∣jesty: the Roofs thereof shining with Ivory, silver, gold, and Amber; and the Kings throne being whol∣ly composed of Gold, and the richest Pearls. But rich and stately though it were, and one of the greatest Ornaments of the Eastern world; it was by Alexander in a drunked fit consumed with fire, at the insti∣gation of Lais that infamous strumpet; as in revenge for so many Cities of the Greeks, which the Persians formerly had burnt in the Grecian warres. And though Alexander in his sober sense did repent him of it, and gave order that it should be re-edisied; yet did it never rise to its former height; the Conquerour dying shortly after, and that purpose with him. So ruined in the age of Qu. Curtius, (who lived in the time of Claudius Caesar), that he prosesseth vestigium ejus non inveniri nisi Araxes amnis ostendert, that no footsteps of it had been found, if not shewn and pointed out by the River Araxes, on whose banks it stood. But by the fall thereof rose 8. Shyras, now the chief City of this Province, situate in a fair large plain hemmed about with mountains, under one of which it is plealantly seated; in compass about nine miles, well built and beautified with fair Gardens and magnificent Mosques: two of which larger than the rest, are made more eminent by the addition of two Spires or Sceeples covered with a painting of Gold and Azure; the fabricks for the most part of Mosaick work, as light almost by night as day, by reason of a thousand Lamps burning nightly in them. A City (as is said by a modern Traveller) which for good wine, pretty women, peasant fruits, and a gallan People, may hold comparison with the best in P••r∣sia. 9. Moyown, on the North-east of Shyras, delightfully situate amongst woods and fruitfull pastures, and blessed not onely with good wine, but wholesome waters; of which last, few parts of Persia have

much cause to brag. 10. Bamaraw, on the Southwest of Shyras towards Carmania, chiefly remarka∣ble for the ruines of an antient Castle, situate on the top of a losty mountain. 11. Goyaam, a Town of a thousand houses. 12. Berry, of no great bigness, but of most esteem by reason of a fair Mosque, a School for the Arabick tongue, and the Sepulchre of one of their false Prophets; of which the Persians, besides Mahomet and Mortis-Ali, do acknowledge many.

The first Inhabitants here were of the posterity of Elam the sonne of Sem, and such who under his con∣duct were setled here; called from hence Elamites in the usual stile of holy Scriptures, by the Greeks and Latines, Elymaei: who spreading themselves into Susiana, and by degrees also into other Provinces, be∣came so considerable, that the name of Elamite and Elam were of great renown: having a language to themselves distinct from that of the Medes and Parthians, as is appatent Act. 2. and comprehending under that appellation the adjoining Regions, as appears plainly in the eighth of the Prophet Damel, where Susa is said to be in the Province of Elam. How the name was changed into that of Persia, hath been shewn before. Such as continued in this Province, divided into the Tribes of the Mesabatee, Rapsit, Hippophagi, Suzaei, Megores, and Stabaei, were at first under the command of their own Princes onely: amongst which Cherdolaomer is of greatest fame, who having the conduct of some Adverture••rs of this nation, associated himself with Amramphel the leader of some Assyrian Troops: and by the name of the Kings of Elam and Assyria invaded Palestine, subdued the City of Sodom, took Lot pri∣soner, and in the end were overthrown by the forces of Abraham. Of no note after this expedition till the time of Perses the Father of Achaemenes, who being Provinciall Governour of these Countreys un∣der Sardanapalus, joined with Arbaces and Belochus in the war against him: and by the victory, got for himself the dominion over those estates, which he had formerly ruled for the Assyrians; with reference to the Kings of Media as the Supreme Lords; whose Successours, till the time of Cyrus, take in order thus.

The Kings of Persis.

• 1. Perses, from whom perhaps the name of Persis may be more properly derived, than either from Perseus the sonne of Danae; or the sonne of that Perseus by Andro∣meda.
• 2. Achaemenes, from whom the Persians had the name of Achaementi, and the succeeding Kings were called Achaemenides.
• 3. Cambyses, in some places of Herodotus called also Darius.
• 4. Cyrus, from whose second sonne named Teispeus, descended that Darius, the sonne of Hy∣staspis, one of the seven Persian Princes, who got the Kingdom on the expiration of the pre∣sent line, and the extirpation of the Magi; of which more hereafter.
• 5. Cambyses II. the sonne of Cyrus.
• 6. Cyrus II surnamed the Great, sonne of Cambyses and Mandane the daughter of Astyagos King of Media: who joining with Cyaxares, or Darius Medus, overthrew the Babylo∣nian Empire; and translated thereby the Supreme power to the Medes and Persians. Of which more hereafter.

CARMANIA.

CARMANIA is bounded on the East, with Gedrosia, and some part of Aria; on the West, with part of Persis, and the Gulf of Persia, from hence called also by the name of Sinus Carmanicus; on the North, with Parthia; and on the South, with the main Indian Ocean. So cal∣led from the Carmani, a chief People of it: but the reason of that name I sind not. It is now generally called Chyrman; those parts of it which lie next to Parthia, which Ptolomy calleth Car∣mania Deserta, being now named Mingia, and by some Dulcinde.

The Countrey for the most part barren, and but ill inhabited. That part which Ptolomy calleth Car∣mania Deserta, being truly such; a wilderness or very Desart, having in it neither Town nor village, but some scattered houses, and those but ill provided of food and necessaries, full of unprofitable sands, de∣stitute of water; and of a very hot and unhealthy air. And though the other part hereof which lieth to∣wards the Ocean, hath a Sea coast of above 200 leagues in length, and many Rivers emptying themselves into it, yet are they not the richer by it: the shores being full of rocks, and the Rivers small; so that they neither have good Port nor safe coming to it. The best commodities here of (besides their Manufac∣tures) are Dates, Myrrhe, Arsenic, some few mines of silver, more of brass and iron, and good store of Alabaster. In which regard, the Inhabitants hereof were antiently called Ichihyophagi, because they lived wholly upon fish, the Countrey yielding little else for the life of man. Carmani sine veste ac frage, sine pecore ac sedibus, piscium cute se velant, carne vescuntur, praeter capita toto cor∣pore hirsuti. The Carmans (saith Pomponius Mela) have neither fruits, nor rayment, nor house, not cattel; but cloth themselves with the skins, and feed themselves with the flesh of fishes; hairie not onely in their heads, but over all their bodies also. Where by the way, Ammianus Marcellinus must be out in his informations, who telleth us of these very Carmans, that their Countrey though far less than that of Arabia Felix, and far more obscure, was as well replenished with Rivers, and for fertility of soil not inferior to it. But we must understand the one of the best parts of Carmania; the other of Deserta onely.

Amongst the Rivers which he reckoneth of greater name than the rest, he mentioneth 1. Saganis, 2. Sagareus, and 3. Hydriacus. Of which Saganis onely is named by Prolomy, the other Rivers or the same under divers names, being 1. Dara, 2. Andanius, 3. Cathrappis, 4. Achindura, 5. Salarus (the Sagareus as I take it of Ammianus) 6. Caudriaces, 7. Zoromba, and 8. Samida∣ce, most of them falling into the Gulf of Persia, few navigable, or of any use in the way of tra∣ding.

Mountains of most note 1. that called Semiramis, from some exploit of that great Lady. 2. Stron∣geius, so named from the roundness of it; and 3. a continued ridge of hills, dividing this Countrey from Gedrosia.

Places of most observation in it, 1. Cantharis, 2. Agris, 3. Tisa, honoured by Ptolomy with the names of Cities. 4. Cyrza, and 5. Gocharta, two Port-Towas. 6. Alexandera, bearing the name of that great Conquerour, who here or hereabouts kept his Bacchanalia, whereof more anon. 7. Por∣tospant, by Ammianus called Ortospana, and by him reckoned amongst the fairest and richest of all the Countrey. 8. Armuzt, (or Armuzium as Pliny calleth it,) on the shore of the Gulf, giving name to a Promoatory neer-adjoining, and to the Noble Isle of Ormus, of which more anon. 9. Guntroone, not longsince a poor village; but since the fall of Ormus (from which not above nine miles distant) grown a populous Town, consisting at the least of a thousand houses. 10. Jasques, at the opening of the Par∣sian Gulf into which it looketh, whence the Promontory of it called Carpella, is of late named Capodi Jasques. 11. Carmania, the Metropolis or mother City of the Province, in former times of good e∣steem; and now of passing good repute both for cloth of gold, and the making of the best Scymitars. A weapon of such value amongst the Mahometans, and so esteemed of by the Turks, that at the overthrow of their Navy at the battle of Corsu, Anno 1574. most of them who were taken Prisoners threw their Scymnars into the Sea, for fear the Christians should be masters of such excellent weapons. It is now called Chyrman, by the name of the Province, as in former times; with very little difference from the antient name. 12. Lar, more within the land towards Persis, seated in a barren and inhospitable Countrey, full of huge heaps of sands, both loose and dangerous, moved and removed as the wind sitteth into plains and Mountains; without grass, water, herbs, or any other necessary for the use of Travellers, the City being served with rain-water only, entertained with great joy when it falleth, and kept in cisterns. The City notwithstanding large, and of good capacity, containing not long since to the namber of 5000 hou∣ses; of which the greatest part, in the year 1590. were thrown down by an earthquake: now most re∣markable for a fair Market-place of about 180 paces square; a goodly Mosque, adorned with Masaick work, and a strong Castle seated on the top of an hill, furnished with great plenty of Ordinance brought hither from Ormus. This once a Kingdome of it self, or the head City of a Kingdome, acknowledging no sub∣jection to the Persian Sophies: till conquered to that Crown by Emangoli Chawn Duke of Shyras, who sent hence as much treasure as was said to load 700 Camels; and put to death the poor King with his whole posterity, Anno 1604. or thereabouts. 13. Tecoa, or Dea-chow, a Town of the jurisdiction of Lar, not far from which is a huge wall cut out of the solid rock by incredible labour, which served formerly both for the boundary and desence of that sandy Kingdome against the Per∣sians.

The antient Inha bitants hereof, were the posterity of Sabta, the sonne of Chus, who wanting room on the coast of Arabta Felix, where they were first planted, passed over into Sophta (from them so named) an Island of the Persian Gulf, and afterwards into the main land of Carmania, where they built and gave name to the City of Sabis, which we find in Ptolomy. Divided in some tract of time into the severall Nations of the Sazota, Ara, Charadra, Chelonophagi, Cabadinae, and Pasa∣garda.

Neither the People nor the Countrey memorable in the way of story; but by Accident onely: it being here that Alexander being returned out of India, kept his Baechanalia, in imitation of Bacchus, who first conquered that Nation. Night and day he was continually feasting with his friends, on a scaffold drawn with eight horses; his Companions following in their Chariots: some adorned with Purple and Silk; others with Flowers and Green Boughs; themselves wearing Garlands on their heads, and carrying their Carowsing Cups in their hands. In this Army there was neither Helmet, Sword, Ar∣row, or Buckler seen: all their Armour, was Cups, Barrells, and Flaggons; their Skirmishing Ea∣ting, Drinking, Laughing, and Singing. Attended they were by Minstrells, playing on their Fluits; by Women, dancing; Boyes, shouting; all playing the drunken Foolls most naturally. Thus march they through the Countrey of Carmania, in as great dissoluteness, as if BACCHUS himself had indeed been there, and led the Mummery; and for seaven whole daies this sottishness continued. So that Curtius well observeth, Si quid victis saltem adversus comessantes animi fuisset, mille hercule viri, modo & sobrii, septem dierum crapula graves in suo tri∣umpho capere potuerunt: a thousand Persians, sober and well provided, had their hearts been answerable to so good an opportunity, might have destroyed this drunken Army, and redeemed at once the honour of their Countrey, and their own liberty.

4. ORMVS.

ORMUS, not so much memorable for the greatness, as the wealth, the conveniency of the situati∣on of it, is an Iland situate in the entrance of the Persian Gulf: commanding not long since over some part of the Continent of Carmania, and some few Towns of Arabia Felix, and most of the Ilands of the Bay. And therefore before we come to speak of the Isle it self, we must take a brief survey of the Sea or Bay called Sinus Persicus, according to our method in other places.

SINVS PERSICVS, the Gulf or Bay of Persia, so famous, so full of Ilands, and so much frequented (I use the words of Ammianus Marcellinus) beginneth at Harmozonta, (the name which Prolomy calls Armuza) a Cape or Promontory of Carmania, from which unto a Cape or foreland of Arabia Feltx, which the Inhabitants call Maces, the passage is so strait and narrow, that one may very easily see to the opposite shore. The Strait once passed, the Bay beginneth to open and in∣large it self, as farre at the City of Teredon (now called Balsora) where Euphrates after many downfalls is lost in the Sea. The whole Gulf measured by the shores of Orbicular form, in compass 20000 Furlongs, (or 2500 Italian miles) in all the coasts and sides whereof the Villages and Towns stand exceeding thick, affording frequent passage to and fro for shipping. So farre, and to this purpose he. To which descripti∣on of his, so exact and punctual, our late Navigations have not added much; but the change of names: the whole Bay being now called Mare Elkariffe, and the entrances thereunto the Streits of Balsora; these last so called because they opened the way to the Town of Balsora the most noted Empory of those parts in the times foregoing.

Chief Isles hereof, besides those on the Arabian shore, of which we have already spoken, are, 1. Taxiana, on the coast of Susiana. 2. Tabiana. 3. Sopththa, and 4. Alexandri, or the Isle of A∣lexander, on the shores of Persis. Of which that which is called Sopththa, seems to take name from Sabta the sonne of Chus, planted upon the opposite shore of Arabia Felix, and therein giving name to the City of Sapthta, which we find in Ptolomy: And finally joying to Carmania, there are the I∣lands called 5. Sagdana, the chief Town whereof was antiently named Miltus; and 6. Vorochtha, fituate at the very mouth of the Straits, now called ORMVS, by the name of the Town and Promontory of Armuza, in Carmania, neer adjoyning to it, and unto which it did in former times belong.

This Iland situate as is said at the mouth of the Gulf or Bay of Persia, is in compass about 20 miles, stony, and full of rocks, in a manner barren of all necessaries except salt, wherewith their very Rocks are covered, and of salt-stones many houses built. So destiture of all things fitting for the life of man, that the Inhabitants had all their victuals, even the very water which they drank, from some of the adjoying Coun∣tries. The air so hot in time of Summer, that the people rest themselves in caves, covered over with wood, where they stand or sit in water up to the chinne: and have loop-holes in the tops of their houses to let in the wind. Which notwithstanding, in regard of the situation, it was of late one of the richest Empories in all the world, the wealth of Persia and East-India being brought hither, and conveyed hence up by water to the River Euphrates, and so by boats or on camels backs, to Aleppo, Alexandretta, Tripo∣lis; from whence dispessed into all the Countries on the Mediterranean, and to some beyond.

The people hereof in their persons, habit, and Religion, participate somewhat of the Arabians, but most of the Persians. Mahometans for the most part of the Saphian Sect: the rest, but few in number, of the Christian faith, to which converted by the preachings of Father Gasper, a Portugal Jesuite; since the setling of that Nation there.

The chief and onely City was of the same name with the Iland, founded some seven hundred years a goe by one Mahomet Dranku, descended from the Kings of Saba, in Arabia Felix, who with many fami∣lies of the Saboeans passed over the Straits into Carmania, and the Isles adjoyning, and liking the situation of this Iland, built this City in it, which he called Ormus, or Armuzium, according to the name of the Town and Promontory upon which it heth. The City seated at one end of the Isle; about 2 miles in compass: well built, and adorned with a fair market place, some Churches, and a well-fortisied Castle furnished with all necessaries to maintain a Siege. By reason of its wealth and resort of Merchants, grown to such esteem, that it gave occasion to this Distick,

Si terrarum Orbis quaqua patet, annulus esset, Illius Ormusium gemmadecus{que} foret.

That is to say,

Were all the World a Ring, this Isle alone Might of that Ring be thought to be the Stone.

It was first under its own King, whose dominion extended also into some part of the Continent on either side, and over all the rest of the Ilands within the Gulf. His Revenue of no great yearly value till the com∣ing of the Portugoels hither, by whom it was discovered under the conduct of Albukerque, Anno 1506. Who having fortified some part of it for their own desence, and made it the Staple of their trade for the In∣dian Merchandise, so enriched the same, that the Revenue of those Kings (though Vassals and Tributa∣ries to the Portugoels) amounted to 14000 Seriffs yearly. In this flourishing state it stood till the year 1622. when Abas the Sultan of Persia having received some affront at the hands of the Portugueze, or desuous to remove the trade of Ormuz to some Port of his own; gave order to Emangoly Chawn, the Duke of Shiras, to laysrege unto it, with an Army of 15000 men. Who seeing no hopes of mastering it by his land-forces only, furnished himself with the ships and Cannon of some English Merchants, to whom he pro∣mised many things which he never performed. For being once master of the City he destroyed it utterly, re∣moving

the Ordinance to Lar, the wealth thereof to his own treasurie of Shiras, the materials of the houses to Gombroon spoken of before: the Portugueze, and Christian natives passing over unto Musba∣kat in Arabia Felix. Since which time though the English Captains that adventured in it, were disappoin∣ted of the spoyl which they did expect: yet so much honour hath been given by the King of Persia to the Eng∣lish Nation, that their Agent who resideth at Gombroon takes custome of all strangers which do trafick thither.

5. GEDROSIA.

GEDROSIA is bounded on the West, with Carmania; on the East, with Cambaia or Gu∣zarat a Province of India; on the South, with the main Indian Ocean; on the North, with Drangi∣ana and Arachosia. The reason of the name I find not. Now by Mercator, called Gest; by Castal∣dus, Circan.

The Countrey desolate and barren, like the worst part of Carmania, much destitute of fresh water, and covered over with loose sands, dangerous to the native and stranger both. Some rain they have, but not sufficient to allay the heat and drouth which they suffer under, and yet by reason of that heat it assordeth in some places Nard and Myrrhe, with some other spices. Some Brooks here are, or rather Torrents, which falling from the hills do somewhat qualifie the indisposition of the soyl, and make it habitable, The chief of which was called Arbius antiently; the chief Mountain Baetius.

Towns of most name in it, 1. Rhagiana, honoured by Ptolomy with the name of a City; and 2. a Port or Harbor called Mulierum portus, or the Haven of women. 3. Arbis, upon the banks of the River Arbius, presented so us also by the name of a City. 4. Musarna, the chief of the Musarnae, a chief tribe of this Countrey. 5. Parsis, or rather Easis, as the Greek text hath it, the Metropolis of the whole Province in the time of Ptolomy. 6. Gest, the chief City at the present; but for nothing memo∣rable.

The old Inhabitants hereof were the Masarnae bordering on Arachosia, the Parsirae towards Car∣mania, the Rh••mae on the banks of Indus, and the Orbitae, or Arbituri; on the shores of the Oce∣an. The Countrey of no note in preceding times, till made famous by the follies of Alexander. Who finding by the hard bout which he had with Porus that there was litle hopes of the Conquest of India, would needs make a fruitless voyage to see the Ocean. And having satisfied himself with the sight of that furious Element (as if his very seeing it had sufficiently subdued it to him), landed his Army on this coast. Where in his march for want of victuals, water, and other necessaries, he lost more men in the vast and un∣comfortable Desarts of this Countrey, than in all the military services he had put them too: the Army which he carired with him into India, amounting 15000 Horse, and 120000 Foot, whereof hardly the fourth part came back to Babylon. So dearly did he pay for his indiscretion.

6. DRANGIANA.

DRANGIANA hath on the South, Gedrosia; on the North and West bounded with Aria; on the East, with Arachosia; So called from Drangius, now Ilment, the chief River of it: the modern name thereof being Sigestan, from Sige, the now principall City.

The Countrey very hilly, and so closed with Mountains, that the River above named is scarce able to force its passage thorow them. Of no great beauty to invite or reward a Conqueror; yet with the rest, brought under the great Persian Monarchs; the fortunes of which Crown they have alwaies followed. So meanly planted that Ptolomy findeth in it but ten Towns of name: the chief whereof, 1. Ariaspe, mistook perhaps for Agriaspe; and if so, then the mother City of the Agriaspae, whom Curtius placeth in this Tract. 2. Propthasia, by some of the Antients called Phradag, the Metropolis of this poor Province; much boasted of by the old Inhabitants hereof who had seen no better, (as Countrey-villagers use to brag of the next market-Town) and said by Ammianus to be rich, and of high renown, the quality of the place consideted. Still of some note amongst the Natives, by whom called Sistan. 3. Arivada. 4. Pha∣razana, of which nothing memorable. 5. Sige, now of most credit in this Countrey, from hence cal∣led Sigestan. 6. Timocant. 7. Mulebet, the chief seat of the Kindome of Aladine, or Aleadine, who had here a Fooles-Paradise of his own, of which more anon.

The old Inhabitants hereof were the Bairii, and the Darandae, from which last, the greatest of the two, the Countrey might perhaps be called originally Darandiana, abbreviated to Drandiana, and at last cor∣rupted easily into Drangiana. But I offer this onely as conjecturall. They were called also by some Wri∣ters by the name of Arabians, and that as Ammianus thinks, because they descended from that people: but I think rather from a branch of the River Arabius, which parteth this Countrey from Gedrosia. For I conceive the Arabians were too wise to forsake their own Countrey, and go so farre, to get so litle by the bargain. Together with the rest of the Persian Provinces, subdued by Alexander; who being in this Countrey, hapned on the discovery of the treason intended against him by Philotas, the sonne of Parmenio, the most renowned of all his Captains. After this litle memorable till these later daies, when it grew fa∣mous by means of Aladine a seditious Persian, Lord of the vally of Mulebet, spoken of before, who there made a terestrial Paradise, which he promised to all his Partizans: but the company growing too great for the safety of the Kingdome, they were quickly dispersed: and Alading, with his Fools-Paradise, both taken away together, Anno 1262. Some attribute this fiction of Paradise to Aladeules, the Moun∣tain King of Taurus, vanquished by Selim the first. The whole story is this, out of Paulm Venstus. A∣ladine

inhabited a valley in this Countrey, the entrance into which he fortified with a strong Castle cal∣led Tigade. Hither he brought all the lusty youths and beautifull maidens of the adjoyning Pro∣vinces. The women were confined to their chambers, the men to prison; where having endured much sor∣row, they were severally cast into dead sleeps, and conveyed to the women: by whom they were en∣tertain'd with all the pleasures, youth and lust could desire, or a sensuall mind affect. Having in∣joyed this happiness a whole day, they were in a like sleep conveyed to their irons. Then would A∣lidine inform them how they had been in Paradise, and that he could seat them there eternally, if they durst hazard themselves in his quarrels. This when they had sworn to do, they were destinated to the massacre of such Princes as were like to prove his bad neighbours; and they accordingly did execution. But neither he nor Aladeules were the first who trained up their followers in the Arts of murder. One there was before either of them, whom the Writers of those ••mes call the Old man of the Mountains, inhabiting the mountainous parts of Tyre and Sidon; and from thence sending his Disciples in the like Temptations, to make away the Western Princes whom he stood in sear of, during the course of the Holy warres. For out of his School came those Wretches, who murdered the Count of Tripolis, being in the Church at his Devotions; and desperately slew Conrade Mar∣quess of Montferrat, walking openly in the market-place at Tyre; and with like carelesseness of their own lives dangerously wounded Prince Edward (after King of England) sitting in his Tent. These the Italians call Assassines, (whence the word to Assassinate) intimating thereby a desperate Cut-throat, but the reason of that name is not yet agreed on: mistakingly by some Latine Writers of the darker times called Arsacidae, and their commander Rex Arsacidarum, as if descended from Arsaces, the founder of the Arsacidan race of the Kings of Persia.

7. ARACHOSIA.

ARACHOSIA hath on the West, Drangiana; on the East, the great River Indus; on the South, Gedrosia; and Paropomisus on the North. So called from Arachosia the chief City of it; but now best known by the name of Cabul, the name of the chief City at this pre∣sent.

Of the Countrey I find little spoken, but that it is watered with a branch of the River Indus, or rather with some nameless River which falleth into it. By the overflowings whereof is made a Lake which Am∣mianus calleth Arachotoscrene, by Ptolomy called Arachotos, after the name of Arachotos the chief Town of it, neer to which it is.

Towns here were once thirteen, whose names and situation we find in Ptolomy, but little or nothing of them in other Writers. The principal, 1 Arochotos, on the Lake so named, said to be built by Semiramis in her march towards India, and by her to have been named Cephene. 2. Alexandria, or (for distinctions sake) Alexandria Arachosiae, the work of Alexander the Great, in his like march a∣gainst the Indians: built at the foot of one of the branches of Mount Taurus shooting towards the South, and peopled with a Colony of 7000 old Macedonian Souldiers, forespent with age, and with the travel of the wars, whom he left there to inhabit it: his Army being here recruited with the forces which had served under Parmenio, consisting of 12000 Grecians and Macedonians. It is now called Cabul, accounted the cheif City of it, in that capacity gives the name of Cabul unto all the Province. 3. Arbaca, seeming by the name to be the work of one Arbaces, but whether of Arbaces the great King of the Medes, I am not able to say. 4. Choaspa, neer some River of that name, as I conjecture; there being besides Choaspes the chief River of Media, another of that name also in India; and probably another hereabouts to give name to this Town. 5. Phoclis, 6. Sigara, 7. Dammana, of which I find nothing but the names. 8. Sin, now a Town of name amongst them, but not much observable.

The old Inhabitants hereof were the Pargyetae, called also Arimaspae, and Euergetae, a powerfull Nation of themselves, brought under the command of Alexander by means of Amenides, sometimes the Secretary of Darius, whom he made their Governour. And besides them the Syeri, Rophitae, and the Eoritae, which three made up the main body of the Arachosians, committed by Alexander to the government and command of Menon. Following after this the fortunes of the Persian Empire, they changed their Masters as that did, till the comming in of the Tartars. Since that time governed for the most part by a King of their own, especially since the dividing of the Kingdome of Persia amongst Tamer∣lanes children: some of which held it as a distinct estate, by the names of the Kings of Cabul; till grow∣ing great by the conquest of some parts of India, they took unto themselves the name of the Great Mon∣gul; Now Lords not onely of this Countrey, but of the greatest part of India on this side of Ganges: of whom we shall speak more when we are in India, that being the chief Seat of their Power and Em∣pire.

8. PARAPOMISVS.

PAROPAMISVS is bounded on the South, with Arachosia; on the North, with Ba∣ctria, from which parted by the main body of Mount Taurus, which is here called Paropami∣sus, by the name of the Countrey: on the East, with some part of India; on the West, with Aria. So called quasi Paro••anesus, from the resemblance which it hath to an Island, begirt on all sides al∣most with Rivers: in which respect by Ptolomy called Paropanisus, and not Paropamisus; by which last name the Latines for the most part call it, some of them Paropamissus, with a double ss. But that

name being lost long since, it is now by some called Dache, by others Candahor, but most commonly Sublestar.

The Countrey mountainous and hilly, here and there intermixt with Valleys: the Mountains of great height, and exceeding barren; the Valleys indifferent fruitful, but so over-shadowed with those hills, that the cleerest day in some places seems but like a twilight. The people as obscure as their Countrey, scarce known to any of their neighbours in the time of Alexander; the barbarous nations neerest to them esteem∣ing them unworthy of their acquaintance. Agreste hominum genus, & inter Barbaros maxime incon∣ditum, as it is in Curtius.

Rivers of most note herein, 1. Oxus, (of which before) which rising out of Mount Caucasus, passeth Northwards, and afterwards divideth Bactria from Sogdiana. 2. Dargamanis, 3. Coacus, both owing their original to some of the branches of Mount Taurus. Which chain of hills, beginning hereabouts to draw towards their end are towards the West called Paroetes, where they give being to the River Dargamanis, be∣fore named; more Eastward they have the name of Parapomisus; and Caucasus they are properly called where they are thwarted by Imaus, in the very point, as it were, where Scythia, India, and the Persian territories do encounter Each other. The hills in that place mounted to so great an height, that from the tops thereof the Stars appear much greater than in other places: the rising and setting of which are from hence easily discerned: made memorable by the fable of Promotheus, who is said to have been bound here by command of Jupiter; on which, vistum Promethea fuisse antiquit as tradit, saith the Historian. Pro∣metheus is indeed by the Poets feigned to have stoln fire from heaven, and to have made a man of clay: for which presumptuous fact, Jupiter bound him on the hill Caucasus; where a vulture continually fed on his his Liver. But according either to the truth of Story, or their guess at least, who make some Story the ground of Every Fable; Prometheus being a very wise man, instructed the dead and clayie carcasses of o∣thers with wisedome; and that being very desirous to learn the nature of the starres, (which is the fire he stole from heaven) he made the highest part of Mount Caucasus his studie, where the inward care he had to accomplish his desire, might justly have been compared to a Vulture gnawing on his entrails; and of this opinion is Saint Augustine. But far more memorable is it made for being the resting place of the Ark of Noah, whereof we have already spoken in our Generall Preface.

Places of most consideration in it, 1. Naulibis, and 2. Ortospana, both named by Ptolomy, and reckoned by Amminus for the most famous of this Countrey. But in what their same confisted I cannot find. 3. Parsiana, 4. Gazaca, 5. Doroacana, 6. Bagarda; all named by Ptolomy; but not else observable. 7. Candihor, now the Metropolis of the Countrey, a Town of great trade, by reason of the situation of it on the borders of India; in that respect giving to the whole Countrey the nameof Can∣dahor. By which name reckoned for a Kingdome, and used amongst the many titles in the Stile Imperiall. Nothing considerable of it in the course of Story, but that being once brought under by the Persian Mo∣narchs, it followed the fortune of the rest till these latter times; when the Persians being overlaid by the Tertars, it became subject to some Kings of the race of TamerLane, reigning in this Province, till brought under by the Kings of Cabul, of the same extraction. Finding those Kings intent on the conquest of India, they freed themselves from all subjection to that Crown, and had Kings of their own, till the year 1600. or thereabouts, when the last King, unable to defend himself against Abduxa King of the Usbeques (a Tartarian people, but subject in some sort to the Crown of Persia) surrendred his Kingdome to Echebar the Great Mongul (descended from the old Kings of Cabul) whose dominions border close upon it. Reco∣vered to the Persian Crown by Mirza, the sonne of Abas, and father of Soffie the now Sultan; a Prince of much gallantry, but of more misfortunes: the Persian Sophies, since that conquest, using the title of Kings of Candahor, in the Regal stile.

9. ARIA.

ARIA is bounded on the East, with Paropamisus; on the West, with Parthia; on the North, with Margiana; and on the South, with Drangiana, from which last parted by the mountain Bagoas. A name in old times given to the Province of Media, especially by the Grecians, till changed (as they say) into Media, on the comming thither of Medea. For so Pansanias, amongst others, 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, i.e. comming into the Countrey then called Aria, she caused it after her own name to be called Media. But the name of Aria was not lost, though it were removed; remaining proper to this Countrey till these later ages; now changed with little alteration into that of Eri.

The Countrey much subject unto heates, environed with desarts, heaths, and forrests; yet neer the mountains which defend them from the heat of the Sun, they have some fruitful Champagnas; bearing very good fruits, and amongst others, a strong wine, and of long continuance; keeping both tast and co∣lour above 80 years. They have also here a Drug somewhat like to Myrrhe, and a kind of Saphyr, but not right.

Rivers of note I meet with none but that which Ptolemy calleth Arias, by the name of the Province, making a Lake of the same name. The fountain of which River he maketh to be in Paroumisus, and the fall thereof in the said Like: the waters of it first increased by a nameless Stream falling from the Mountains called Seriphi, being that part of Taurus which divideth this Countrey from Margiana.

Antiently it was populous and well-inhabited, containing above 30 Towns of name and note. Those of most consequence, 1. Aria, on the banks of the River Arias, the seat of the Aria, whom Pliny speaketh of in this Tract: but whether they received this name from the Province, or bestowed their own

name upon it, I determine not. 2. Bataxa, 3. Sotera, 4. Orbitana, 5. Sarmagana, 6. Ar∣tacanda, by Strabo called Artacana, 7. Nisibis, mentioned both by Ptolomy and Ammianus, 8. Alexandria, bearing the name of the Great Conqueror, by whom planted and made a Colony of his Macedonians, for the better awing of the Countrey, which by some former rebellions had been trouble∣some to him. But these, and most of those remembred by Ptolomy, being grown out of knowledge, there remains now of speciall note, 9. Heri, or Eri, seated not far from the place of the antient Aria, but much superiour to it in strength and greatness. Said by Maginus to be in compass thirteen miles, and so plenti∣fully stored with Roses, that the inhabitants of the Countrey call it the City of Roses. Naturally of a strong situation, compassed about with a very good wall, and watered with deep Channels, conveyed unto it by Tamerlanc, that most puissant Tartar, by whom either founded or repaired. 10. Sasuar, a place of good importance, and the second in esteem next to Herit it self.

The old Inhabtants were the Masdarami, Nisar, Astaren, the Cassirota, Obares, Dracha∣mae, Borgi, Paranti, &c. united altogether in the name of Arians, by that name subject to the Persians, and subdued by Alexander. Against whom when they had rebelled, and were worsted by him, they were compelled to betake themselves to the strength of a Cave, seated upon the top of an inaccessible Rock, and with small force easily defended. But to Alexander nothing was impossi∣ble For piling up a great mass of timber, equall unto the mouth of the Cave, when the wind serv∣ed opportunely, he put fire unto it, and by that means so filled the Cave with fire and smoak, that some of them were stifled, some half-burnt, and the rest forced to yield to the Victors mercy. Nor was this the onely action of note during that Rebellion, though it was the greatest. The common Souldier also had his honour in it. Sarlibarzanes, a Persian, whom Alexander had trusted with the command of this Province, had drawn them unto this Revolt, and became their head. Who to express his courage in the sight of the Arians, challenged the proudest He of the Macedonians to a single combat. The challenge cheerfully accepted by one Eriguis, one of the most aged in the Army: and saying aloud, ostendam quales milites Alexander habet, he valiantly charged upon the Rebell; and at the second venew slew him. The Arians after this triall of their disabilities, re∣mained in quiet, taking the same fortunes as the rest of the Persians did, in their change of Masters. Of late, by Mahomet Codubanda, it was aliened for a time from the Crown of Persia, and given to Sultan Abas, his second sonne, who took unto himself in his Fathers life-time the title of the King of Heri. But comming to the Crown by the murder of his elder Brother, and the death of his Fa∣ther, he united Heri once again to the Regal Diademe, but kept as a distinct title in the Royall stile.

10. PARTHIA.

PARTHIA is bounded on the East, with Aria; on the West, with Media; on the North, with Hyrcania; and on the South, with that part of Carmania, which by Ptolomy and others of the Antients was called Deserta. The reason of the name we shall see anon. But that name being laid aside it is now called Arach.

The Countrey walled as it were round with Mountains, and in most parts overgrown with woods; by which defended from those heats to which otherwise it would be subject, it produceth many things of necessary use for the life of the people; but nothing for riot and excess. In other places where the shade of the wood is wanting, the whole Countrey is in a manner but a sandy Desart, dangerous to Travellers, and impassable even with the help of Guides, the sands continually driven from one place to another, tak∣ing away all tracts of a beaten way. For which cause there be certain Castles at each three miles end, built at the Kings charge, as well for the direction as the reception of Passengers; and Cawseys of many miles in length, in some other places, for their better travelling; the sands on each side of them so loose and light, that if a man should fall aside, he were lost remediless.

The people antiently were very couragious and stout, as commonly they are in all barren Countries, and were withall of a Scythian extract and originall. Exceeding spare of diet, and good reason for it, the Coun∣trey not affording any superfluities; but otherwise much given to pleasures, allowing themselves plurality of wives and Concubines. Good horsemen, and to that so used, that they consulted of all business both private and publique, when they were on horse-back. Such lovers of the warres, that they accompted no man happy after his decease but who died in battell; esteeming of all others but as fooles or Cowards. Their Souldiers for the most part Slaves, whom they trained up unto their weapons, and to manage horses: in∣somuch as of 50000 horse which the Parthian King had in the field against Marcus Antonius, there were not above 800. Free-men. But their greatest same consisted in the handling of their Bow and Ar∣rows, esteemed the best Archers in the world, and not underservedly; having the Art of shooting back∣wards, and making their Retreat or flight more terrible, than their charge or onset. Whence that of Se∣noca.

Terga conversi metuenda Parthi. The Parthians flight Doth most affright. Which, with the manner of their fight, more copiously described by Lucan thus. Pugna levis, bellum{que} fugax, turmae{que} fugaces, Et melior cessisse loco quam pellere miles. Illita terra dolis, nec Martem cominus unquam

Ausa pati virtus, sed longe tendere nervos.

Which I find thus Englished to my hand.

Light skirmish, fleeing warre, and scattered bands, And better Souldiers when they run away, Than to cut off an enemy that stands. Their crafty Gall-thraps on the ground they lay, Nor dares their courage come to down-right blows, But fight best furthest off, most trusting to their bows.

From hence it was that M. Crassus, in his expedition against them, being told by an Astrologer, that his enterprise would prove unprosperous, by reason of some ill aspect which he had found in Scorpio; Tush (said he) I fear not Scorpio, but Sagittarius. And to these warlike exercises of horse and Archery, the temper of the Air and Soyl, gave no smal advantages, the dry Air seasoning their Bow-strings, and their large fields affording them sufficient room to train their horses. Coelum enim quod siccum est, nervos in∣tentos facti; Regio tota plana est, et ob eam rem equis accomodata, as it is in Dion. But this is to be un∣derstood not of Parthia onely, but the whole Countrey of Persia; subject at that time to the power of the Parthian Kings. Next to these Parthians, the English have been looked on formerly, as the ablest Bow-men, having gotten by their bow and arrows as many notable victories over the French, as the Par∣tians ever did obtain upon the Romans. But at this time Archery both here, and elsewhere, is quite laid aside, the Gun silencing all offensive weapons: how justly I determine not. The point hath been long since debated betwix: Sir John Smith, and Sir Roger Williams; many great wits appeared upon either side; and the summe of their severall Arguments drawn up together by Sir Clement Edmunds in his judicious ob∣servations upon Casirs Commentaries, to which the Reader may repair for his satisfaction. All I shall say is only this, that victories as great as any in those elder daies have been obtained with farre less bloodshed, since the Gun came up, than in any of the times before it.

The Religion of this People hath suffered under the same changes with the rest of Persia, but they have a language of their own, mixt of Mede and Scythian. For which besides the testimony of humane Au∣thors, we have the Authority of Scriptures; where the Parthians, Elamites, and Medes, are nam∣ed as Nations of a severall language, or a different Dialect at the least, Acts 2.

Rivers of note I find not any, nor any Mountains proper and peculiar to them: Coronus, part of the great Mountain Taurus, lying in common betwixt them and Hyrcania; as Masdoranus doth betwixt them and Aria, and the hills called Parchoatras, betwixt them and the Desarts of Carmania. So that for want of such known Landmarks, the finding out of their antient Cities would be very difficult, if any learned Antiquary should undertake it.

The Countrey antiently more populous, the towns and villages thicker set, than they be at the present: many Cities, and 2000 villages having, been overthrown with Earth-quakes. In Ptolomy we find the names of 25. of their Cities distributed into the 4 Provinces or Tetrarchies of Camisene towards Hyrcani∣a; Par••hiens, bordering on Media; Paracanticene, confining on Aria; Tabiene, neighbouring Carmanta. The principall of which, and of those that are now in being, 1. Genonia. 2. Charax. 3. Ar〈◊〉〈◊〉. 4. Apama, which by the name seems to have been of the foundation of Seleucus. 5. Dardamana. 6. Syndaga. 7. Pasacarta. 8. Hecatompyle, the Royall City, so called from the num∣ber of an hundred Gates in the walls thereof, by which we may conjecture at the antient greatness: the Parthians, which had seen no greater, calling it by the glorious name of Half the world. 9. Hispaan, commonly called Spahan, or Spawhawn, raised out of the ruins of Hecatompyle, and as that was, the Regal City for these parts. In compass about nine miles, of figure round, and seated in the middest of a large and capacious Plain, beautified with many pleasant Gardens, goodly Bathes, and handsome Mosques. But the greatest glory of it lieth in the market-place or Midan, quadrangular in form, but the sides une∣qual; cloistred about, and well stored with merchandise of all sorts, but drugs especially: the Court or Qua∣drangle, serving for horse-races, and other warlike exercises which are done on horse-back. On the west-side a magnificent Mosque, built of white Marble five yards high, and the rest above that of brick; curiously interwoven with Araback Poesies. In the middest a fait Conduit, wherewith they purifie them∣selves when they go to their prayers. On another side the Royall Palace, wronght in the Front with An∣tique works; the Floors on the inside covered with rich Persian Carpets; and the Roofs chargeably em∣bossed with Gold and Azure, 10. Jelphea, on the other side of the River on which Spawhawn is seated, as the Burgh of Southwark is to London; wholly inhabited (at this time) by Armenian Christians, from hence called Jelphelines, who live here in great freedome, both for person, and conscience, but that their spoll-money is taxed at an higher rate. 11. Groom, a right pleasant and healthy City, well built, of large streets, and seated on the banks of a small but delightfull River, issuing out of the Coronian Moun∣tains, neer to which it standeth. Consisting at the present of 2000 Families, but antiently, as may be ga∣thered from some ruins, of farre greater compass. Much honoured by the Persians for the Sepulchre of Fatima, the daughter of Mahomer, from whom the Sophian Sect and Princes do derive their Pede∣gree. 12. C••him, a rich and pleasant City, about 60 miles from Spawhawn, well-built, and peopled by a number of 〈◊〉〈◊〉 who for the making of Silks, Sattens, and cloth of Gold, are in great esteem. Beautified amongst other things with a stately and magnificent Caravanus-Raw, built by Sultan Abas,

for the reception of Strangers, whether Merchants or other Travellers, but fit to entertian any Prince of Asia. The City of no great age, the work either of Vssan-Cassanes, the Armenian, who got the Crown of Persia, in the year 1470. or at the highest of Cassam, the sonne of Axan and Grand-sonne of Tangro∣lipix, the first Turk here reigning; from one of which it had this name. 13. Tawgehawt, where the Persian Kings have a house of pleasure, of no great receipt, but for the cost and ofnaments of it, and the delectableness of the Gardens adjoyning to it, not yielding to any in this large Empire: and for Grots, Ecchos, Labyrin hs, and the other excellencies of Art, perhaps not fellowed in the world, especially considering that it standeth in the midle of a sandy Desart.

The Parthians were originally a Scythian Nation, banished their own Countrey, and glad to plant themselves in this barren Region, calling themselves by the name of Parthians, which in their language signifieth as much as Exiles. A People so obscure and poor, either not knowing or not caring for the use of money, that none of Alexanders great Captains would vouchasafe to be their Governour; but let it lie as an Appendix of Media, to the Kings whereof it had originally been subject, till one Philip, a man of small regard, took the place upon him. Falling at last, with the rest of Alexanders Asian purchases, into the hands of Seleucus, it was governed by the Lieutenants of the Syrian Kings, till the time of Seleucus Calinicus, the fourth of that house. During whose reign, Arsaces a noble Parthian, provoked by some indignities, slew the Governour, and took the estate upon himself, perswading all the rest of the Provinces to do the like: and thrived so well in his design, that he not onely gained the Kingdome of Parthia, but united to it all the Provinces lying on the East of Euphrates. Of whom and his Successors more, in the story of Persia. After this nothing singular which concerns this Province, but that as this Arsaces did re∣cover the Persian liberty from the power of the Greeks; so Gempsas, one of the Sultans of this Province also, redeemed (though but for a little time) this Parthia and the parts adjoyning, from the yoak of the Tartars; as shall be shewn in prosecution of the Persian History.

11. HYRCANIA.

HYRCANIA is bounded on the South with Parthia; on the North, with the Hyrcanian or Cas∣pian Sea; on the East, with Margiana; and on the West, with Atropatia, or Atropatene (as Ammianns calleth it) the North part of Media. Divided from Parthia by the interposition of Coro∣nus, part of the main body of mount Taurus. The way thorow which, said by the Persians to be cut out at one blow by the Scymitar of Mortis Haly, their second Mahomet, as not above fourty yards in breadth, in the broadest parts of it, the hills on both sides to wring to the very clouds. With small strength easily defended against mighty Armies, and possibly may be the same which the Antients called Portae Cas∣piae, before described.

It took the name of Hyrcania, from Hyrcana, a large and spacious forest betwixt it and Scythia; sometimes called Caspia also, from the Caspii, a chief People of it; of whom it is reported, that when their Parents came to the age of 70 years, they used to shut them up, and starve them, as being then no longer usefull to the Common-wealth. But both those names growing out of use, it is by Mercator cal∣led Diargument; by some late Travells Mezendram; by some others Corcam.

Those parts hereof which lie towards the South are said to yield abundance of wheat, wines, figges, and fruit: those towards the Caspian Sea, as plentifull of Grass and pasture. But betwixt both, no∣thing in a manner but continual forests, and those so intricate and thick, that it is a matter of no small diffi∣culty to find passage thorow them. Full, as most other Forests are in those Eastern parts, of Panthers, Leo∣pards, Lions, Tigers: these last of such an horrible fierceness, that it grew into a common Proverb used of cruel men, that they had sucked an Hyrcanian Tiger; Hyrcanaeg, admorunt ubera Tigres, as it is in Virgil.

Principall Rivers of this Countrey, 1. Zioberis, spoken of before. 2. Maxera, or Mazeras, men∣tioned by Pliny, Ptolomy, and Ammianus; and 3. Secanda; all falling into the Caspian or Hircani∣an Sea. A Sea which had the names of Caspian, and Hyrcanian, from the Caspit and Hyrcani, bordering text unto it; now from the Town of Bochu, in Atropatia, called Mare di Bochu. Fashioned in an O∣vall form, the length thereof from North to South 700 miles, and 600 miles from East to West. Stormy, and troublesome, by reason of those many great Rivers which fall into it from all the Provinces adjoyning; which notwithstanding it hath no visible commerce with the Ocean; nor doth it at any time overflow its banks: finding some passage under ground to discharge it self of those vast streams of water which are powred into it. Well traded by the Moscovite Merchants, who having the command of the River Volge (which with 70 mouths doth open into this Sea) sail over it, and land at Farabant, or some other of the Port-Towns, where they trade for silks. Some Ilands here are in it, but not many, or of any great fame but onely that they served the Nations which lay neer it for a place of retreat, in time of the Tartarian tempest under Tamerlane; as the Isles of Venice did to the Italians at the comming of Attila.

Places of most consideration, 1. Hyrcania, once the Metropolis of the Province, and so called by Ptolomy; still extant, but of less esteem, and still called Hyrcan. 2. Tambrace, in old times of the greatest strength, and most defensible, but taken by Antiochus Magnus in the warre against Arsaces the Parthian for the recovery of those Countries then revolted from him. 3. Adrapsa, 4. Masaca, 5. Anarosa; of which we find the names, amongst others, in the antient Writers. 6. Asharaffe, two miles from the Sea, in a spacious Plain, containing about 2000 houses; and now of most reputation of all this Province, by the long Residence therein of Abas, the late Persian Sultan; who built there a magnficent Palace, & another two miles off at a place called Abassebaut. The furniture whereof, besides costly Carpets, in Plate

and Jewels, at such time as Sir Dodmore Cotton was there Ambassadour, is said to have been valued by a knowing Merchant, at 20 millions of Pounds. But I fear the Merchant had more skill in silks than Jew∣els; such a vast summe to be expended on the furniture of one Palace onely, being beyond the possibility of the Revenue of the Persian Sophies; hardly amounting towards all charges to five millions of Crowns. 7. Farabant, on a navigable Arm of the Caspian Sea; for beauty, wealth, and greatness, of most note in this Countrey. Well traded from all parts of this Inland Sea, especially by the Russian Merchant, as before is said; whose ships come hither in March, and return in July; it being from hence to Astrachan but ten dates sail. Beautified with goodly Gardens, a Royal mansion of the kings, and aspacious Market-place. 8. Chiacoporo, neer the Sea also, but on the banks of a River; the water whereof is said for eleven moneths to be fresh and sweet, and for the twelf month very salt. 9. Barfrushdee, twelve miles from the Sea, well furnished with wood and water. 10. Omoall, a Town of about 3000 houses, seated on the North side of the Taurus, in a pleasant and fruitfull soyl; resorted to by the people of so many Nations, that seven languages are there commonly spoken. Once larger, as appeareth by some ruins, than it is at the pre∣sent; by some conceived to be the Nabarca of the Antients, honoured in those times with an Oracle. 11. Strava, a town of great trafick, for raw silks especially. 12. Mesandre, whence the whole Province (or rather the parts adjoyning to it) hath the name of Mezendrum.

The old Inhabitants hereof, besides the Caspii, were the Maxerae, Astabeni, Chrindi, and the Arsitenses; united in the name of Hyrcans in the time of the Persians, and by that name well known at the comming of Alexander. Against whom they so defended themselves by tying the boughs and twigs of their Trees together, that it was impossible for him to come at them till with incredible pains and labour he had caused their woods to be cut down: at sight whereof the People, who supposed the King had too much other business, and of more importance, than to put himself unto that trouble, did submit unto him. Falling to the share of Scleucus, they were the first people that were gained by Arsaces, and joined with him in recovering their former liberty, though they got nothing by the bargain but the change of their Ma∣ster. In all times since, they have been looked upon as Members of the Persian Empire, till the conquest of it by the Tartars; in the distractions of whose great Empire after Tamerlanes death, it fell to some Princes of his house; who governed here under the vassallage and protection of the Tartars of Zagathay. Re∣covered not long since to their old obedience by Sultan Abas: who for the better setling the affairs hereof, removed the Seat Royall from Spawhawn, to which before he had transferred it from the City of Casbin, to Ashtrasse, then a small town, now the chief of this Countrey.

12. MARGIANA.

MARGIANA is bounded on the West, with Hyrcania; on the East, with Bactria; on the North, with part of Tartary, from which severed by the River Oxus; on the South, with Aria, divided from it by the Mountains. So called from the River Margus which runnes throw the Countrey: but is now named Tremigen.

The Countrey environed with Mountains, and in most places of it full of sandy Desarts. But where it is watered with the Rivers, Arias, and Margus, it is very fruitfull, streching it self into a large and spacious plain, containing in the circuit neer 200 miles. The Plain once compassed with a wall by Antio∣chus Soter, King of Syria: more memorable for the huge stocks of Vines which are said to be in it, as big in bulk as two men can fathom, and sometimes bearing branches of grapes two Cubits long. The more to be admired in regard there is no other place neer unto it where the vine will grow. And if the Ark rested on the top of Mount Caucasus, as it is most probable it did; why may not this be some of the re∣mainder of that first Vineyard which was planted by Noah, when he descended from these Mountains, as is affirmed by the constant tradition of the people which inhabit here.

The people mixt of Scythian and Persian breed, partaking of the fierceness of the one, and the beha∣viour of the other. Conform unto the Persians, in Religion, language and apparell; distinguished from them in the colour of their Turbants onely, which are commonly Green; and therefore by the Per∣sians called Ieselbas, or Green-caps; the Turbants of the Persian being alwayes Red.

Chief Rivers of this Countrey are, 1. Margus, the peculiar River of it, which rising out of the foot of the Mountains, and passing thorow the middest of the Province, receiveth into its channell the River, 2. Arias, hastning out of Aria; and so together lose themselves in 3. Oxus, dividing the Margians from the Tartars. Out of the joint streams of which several Rivers is made a large Lake now called Sabacam∣ber, but antiently Palus Oxiana, from the principall River.

Places of most observation in it, 1. Alexandria, or Alexandria Margiana for distinction sake; one of the fix towns built by Alexander for defence of this Countrey; called afterwards Seleucia from Seleucus; next Antiochia from Antiochus Soter King of Syria, by whom fortified with a very strong wall. It is now called Indion, and esteemed for the chief of the Countrey. 2. Jasonium, seated on the confluence of Margus with a nameless River issuing from the Seriphian Mountains. 3. Nigaea, as the printed books of Ptolomy call it; but mistook for Nissa, or Nysaea. 4. Argadina. 5. Rhea; of which nothing memorable. 6. Maran, neer to which Ismael the first of the Sophian race, discomfited the forces of Saba the Cham of Zagathay.

The old Inhabitants here of were the Massagetes, and the Parni, taking up the midlands; the Der∣biceae, bordering upon Oxus; and the Tapyri, dwelling towards the East. United by the name of Mar∣gians they were subdued by the Kings of Persia, from whom won by Alexander to his Empire: who to assure himself hereof built fix Cities in it, two towards the South, and four towards the East, all situate

on the tops of hills, and built at such convenient neerness that they might afford succour to each other, as occasion served. After this nothing singular in the story of them; involved in the same fortunes with the rest of Persia, till Persia was conquered by the Tartars. Since which time, though the rest of the Persi∣an Provinces were freed from the Tartarian yoak by Gempsas, the Soldan of Parthia, and King of Per∣sia for a time, yet part of this Province, and of Bactriana, are still subject to them.

13. BACTRIA.

BACTRIA or BACTRIANA, is bounded on the West, with Margiana; on the East & North, with the River Oxus, dividing it from Sogdiana; on the South, with Paropamisus, from which parted by the hills so named, and the Mountain Caucasus. It took this name from Bactra, the chief Ci∣ty of it; and is now called Chorassin, but by some named Batter.

The Countrey towards the River Oxus, is for the most part well manured, and affordeth plenty of Wheat, and all sorts of fruits excepting Olives; rich metals, and some precious stones, as Emeralds, Chrisolites, and Jacinthes. Plenty of pastures there be also, well stored with Cattell, and those of big∣ger bulk than in other places. But the greatest part hereof to the South and West is nothing but a sandy Desart; and by reason that the sands are driven up and down by contrary winds, no tract or beaten way is to be discerned: insomuch as Travellers rest all day, and take their journey in the night, that they may guide themselves by the course of the Stars, as upon the Sea, not without great danger of being lost or bu∣ried, whilst alive, in that sandy Ocean.

The people heretofore a puissant and warlike nation, not without great difficulty conquered by the Assyrians, nor with less by the Persians; alwaies in armes, cruel, and resembling the Scythians, whose neer neigh∣bours they were: and (which may very well pass for their greatest vertue) multum à Persarum luxu ab∣horrentes, abhorting naturally from the Persian luxuries. But withall unnaturall to their Parents, whom when old they cast unto their dogs, kept for that purpose, and called Canes Sepulchrales, or buriall dogs. The women gorgeous in apparell, and proud of gesture, but prodigall of their bodies to their meanest slaves. The men to this day do retain their antient stoutness; but hard beset betwixt the Persians and the Tartars, who severally pretend a dominion over them.

No Province of the Persian Empire hath so many Rivers. The principall of which are 1. Artamis, and 2. Zariaspes, mingling streams together, as do also 3. Ochus, and 4. Orgomanes; all four contributing their waters to the River Oxus. Of Oxus, being rather a boundary betwixt the Persian and the Tartar, than rightly proper unto either, we have spoke already.

Towns of most observation in it, 1. Bactra, the Metropolis or chief City of it, situate at the foot of the Mountains Sogdii; giving the name of Bactria unto all the Province. It is now called Bochor, and still keeps the dignity of the Metropolitan: the seat of the Chief-Priest or Bishop of the Mahometans of Zagathay (to which this City, and great part of the Countrey also, doth now belong) having here his re∣sidence, in power and reputation equall to the King himself. Well fortified, and stored with all military provisions: the birth-place (as Maginus faith) in these latter Ages of Avicenna, that learned Philoso∣pher and Physician; and in the first Ages of Zoroaster the more learned Astrologer. 2. Ebusmt, once the Regal seat, and therefore honoured by Ptolomy with the name of Regia. 3. Zarispe, or Charispe, the chief City of the Charispae, a great Tribe of this Countrey. 4. Charracharta, mentioned by Pto∣lomy and Amnaianus: these two, upon the River Oxus. 5. Eucratidia, built or repaired by the Ma∣cedonians; as the name, being meerly Greek, doth seem to intimate. 6. Alicodra, as antient as the rest, but of no great note in the course of business. 7. Iseigias, of a later date, but of greater beauty than any of those before spoken of: superiour to Bochor in elegancy, state and greatness, though not in dignity; and held by some to be the pleasantest of the East.

This Countrey was as soon peopled as any since the generall Deluge. It had not else been possible that Zoroaster King hereof in the time of Ninus, and by him assaulted, should bring into the field an Army of 400000 men of this, and perhaps some other of the neighbouring Provinces, as most credible writers say he did. Encountring Ninus with this Army he prevailed at first, and slew of the Assyrians neer an hundred thousand. But Ninus having better opportunities of recruiting his forces, invaded him a second time with an Army of 1700000 foot, and 200000 horse (the greatest on record in all ages since that time, except that of Semiramis) with which he over came Zoroaster, slew him in the field, and united Bactria to his Empire. Unto this Zoroaster is ascribed the invention of Astronomy, but on no good ground: that Art or Science being studied before the flood, (if Seths Pillars mentioned by Josephus be of any cre∣dit): and therefore probably no otherwise to be ascribed to Zoroaster, than as to the Reviver of it; or because he first committed that unto writing, which he had received by tradition; or because he brought those confused notions which he had received from others, into rule and method. He being slain, and Bactra his chief City taken by the wit of Semiramis, then the wife of Menon (but on the merit of that service made the wife of Ninus) the Buctrians became subject unto the Assyran Kings, after to the Mo∣narchs of the Medes and Persian. In the e••piring of which great Monarchy Bessus a false and cruell Traitor, did command this Province and having villainously stain Darius, his Lord and Master, assu∣med unto himself the title of King of Persia••, under the name of Art••xenxes. But being betrayed by Spitamenes one of his Confederates, by him delivered unto Alexander, and by Alexander put to a cru∣ell death the Bactrians became subject to the Macedonians, and in that right unto Seleucus and the Kings of Syria. But long it held not in that State; one Theodatus, who formerly had the Governm••ent of it for the Syrian Kings; taking unto himself the title of king, and the possession of the Countrey, about

the same time that Arsaces and the Parthians made the like revolt. Wrested from his posterity by one Enthydemus, the recovery of it was attempted by Antiochus Magnus: and the whole cause put to the trial of a barrel. In which, though Antiochus had the better, and shewed more personal valor in it than any time after: yet he was glad to come to a composition, and left to Euthydemus both the Crown and the Countrey. Made not long after an accession to the Parthian Kingdome; it continued part thereof whilest that Kingdome stood: and in the time of Ptolomy (as long time before) had for the chief tribes or nati∣ons of it the Salatarae, and Zariaspae towards the North; the Comani, or Coamoni (as Pliny calleth them) dwelling in the South; the middle parts being taken up by the Thocari, said to be gens magna; the Scorde, Savadii, Maricae, Tambyzi, Amarispe, and others of as little note. In the often chan∣ges and alterations of the Persian State, one of the last Nations which submitted to the new Pretenders: and at this time so neutrall betwixt the Persians, and the Cham of Tartary, that it is wholly under the power of either. More averse from the Persian government since the alteration of Religion made there by Hysinael, and the rest of the Sect of Mortis Halt: these Bactrians being of the old race of Mahometans which adhered to Haumar, Osmen, and Abubecher, as the true Successours of their false Prophet: and therefore ill-affected to the Sophian faction, whom they call commonly Caphars, or Hereticks, for the innovations by them made in the Law of Mahomet.

Thus having taken a survey of those several Provinces which constitute the Persian Empire, and shewn by what means they were first united into one estate: we must next look upon the names and actions of those mighty Monarchs, who have successively, and from time to time enjoyed the Soveraignty. By what good chance Arbaces from a Deputy or Lieutenant of Media, obtained the Diademe for himself, we have shewn before: and we have shewn how liberally he enfeoffed the Vice-Roys of the severall Provinces (which in the division made betwixt him and Belochus, fell unto his share;) in the propriety and command of those Countreys, which before they held. Nothing reserved unto himself, and his posterity, but the ti∣tle onely; and perhaps some acknowledgments made to them, as the Lords in chief. Nor left he less li∣berty to his own Medians, than to the rest of the Provinces: which turning to licenciousness was so hurt∣ful to them, that they were glad at last of that wholesome severity, which Deioces, a more Lordly King, began to exercise: who taking to himself a guard, building the Royall City of Ecbatana, and fortifying some other places of importance, first brought the people under the command of law: in that regard not unfitly called by Herodotus, the first King of the Medes.

Kings of the Medes.

• A. M
• 3146. 1. Arbaces, at first Governour of the Medes under Sardanapalus the Assyrian; but joining with Belochus, overcame his Master, and was the first founder of the M••dian Mo∣narchy
• 3174. 2. Mandanes, the sonne of Arbaces. 50.
• 3224. 3. Sisarmus. 30.
• 3254. 4. Medidus, by some called Artyras. 25.
• 3279. 5. Cardicceus, whom some call Arbianes. 13.
• 3292. 6. Deioces, the founder of Ecbatana, and the Legislator of the Medes, whom he first brought under the command of Law, and a Regal Government, the former Kings having left the reigns so loose on the necks of the peopl, that they seemed to reign by curtesie only; and had no more authority amongst their Subjects, than any of the mean Lords had upon their Vassals.
• 3303. 7. Phraortes, a man of great prowess and fortune; he made all Asia stand in fear, and com∣pelled the Persians to be his tributaries; but was after overtopped by the Scythi∣ans. 22.
• 3331. 8. Cyaxares, united to his Empire the Saracens, and the Parthians. The King was so over∣laid by the Scythians, who in the reign of Phraortes, had broke into Media; that he was little better than their rent-gatherer. But having endured them for above two years, he plotted their finall extirpation, and committed his design to the Nobles, who willingly gave ear to it. One night they invited the chief of the Scythians to a banquet, where having well liquored them, and put them all to the sword, the baser sort willingly returned home∣ward. 40.
• 3371. 9 Astyages, the sonne of Cyaxares, who having maried his Daughter Mandane, to Camby∣ses the Tributary King of Persia; dreamed that she had made as much water as drowned all Asia: hereupon he commanded Harpagus, one of his Noble men, to see the Child killed; but he loathing so cruel a fact, committed the charge of executing the Kings commandment, to Mithridates the Kings heard-man. He preserved the life of the young infant, to whom he gave the name of Cyrus, whose fortune at last lifted him up to the Kingdome of Persia: when abhorring his Grand-Father for that intended cruelty, he both bereft him of his King∣dome, and confined him to Hyrcania, when he had reigned thirty five years. A. M. 3406.
• 3406. 10. Cyaxares II. in the Scripture called Darius Medus, sonne to Astyages, of the age of 52. years succeeded his father. For Cyrus pretending no quarrel to his Unkle who had never wronged him; left him the Kingdome of Media; and took unto himself the Soveraignty of

• ... Persia, which before was tributary to the Medes; not making any other alteration in the State of Media.

At this division of the Median Empire, as Torniellus in his Annalls, (and that not improbably) is of opinion, it was also agreed on, that Cyrus should take the daughter and only child of Cyaxares to wife; that they should both join together, in subduing of their neighbours; that whatsoever they won, should belong to Cyaxares, (who was even then an old Prince) during his life; and that Cyrus should be his heir. In the twentieth year of their severall reigns, they took Babylon, slew Baltazar, and destroy∣ed the Empire of the Chaldaeans. This action, the Scriptures attribute wholly to Cyaxares, who is by them called Darius Medus; whereof Saint Hierome allegeth three reasons: 1. Ordo aetatis, 2. Regm, 3. Propinquitatis. 1. Darius was the elder; 2. the Empire of the Medes was more famous than that of the Persians; and 3. the Unkle ought to be preferred before the Nephew. We may adde to these three, the composition above-mentioned, made between these Princes, at the beginning of their reigns or the death of Astyages. The Greek Writers attribute the victory onely to Cyrus, and that on three reasons also. The Persians desirous to magnifie Cyrus their own Conntrey-man, gave him all the glory of the action; and from the Persians the Greeks had it. Secondly, Cyrus was only imployed in the siege, (Darius then being absent) and by his valour and conduct was the Empire of the Chaldaeans ruined. And thirdly, Darius lived not fully two years after the great victory; s that before remote Nations had taken notice of the conquest, Cyrus was actually in the Throne. Josephus onely in the 11 Chapter of his Book, cutteth the thread even between these two Princes, and telleth us that Darius, with his 〈◊〉〈◊〉 Cyrus, destroyed the estate of the Babylonians. That this Darius Medus of Daniel, is the Cy∣axares of the Greeks, is more than manifest. For Josephus in the place above-cited telleth us, 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 That he was Astyages sonne, and is otherwise called by the Greeks: now ask the Greeks what was the name of the sonne of Astyages, and Xenophon will tell you, that it was Cyaxares. As for the name of Nabonidus, which Joseph Scaliger in spight of reason, and the whole world of Chronologers, would thrust upon this Darius Medus; we have already refelled it, though we are not ignorant that Helvicus and Calvisius, two most worthy Writers, have followed him, as in all his Canon, so also in this particular Error. But to proceed unto the course of the Persian history, after the death of this Cyaxares, Cyrus succeeded in his Throne, and the Empire of the Medes was incorporated in that of the Persians, as it hath ever since continued, if not subject to it.

The first Dynasty, or Race of the Persian Monarchs, of the house of Achaemenes.

• 3406. 1. Cyrus, who having vanquished Astyages, united to the Empire of Persia the whole King∣dome of Media; the Countreys of Armenia, Phrygia, Lydia, some part of Arabia, and all the Provinces possessed by the Babylonian and Assyrian Monarchs. After which victories, he was slain by Tomyris a Queen of the Scythians, as some Writers say: o∣thers affirming that he escaped alive (but wounded) out of the battel, died in his own Kingdome, and was buryed at Pasagarda, a Town of Persis. This Cyrus is magnified by Xenophon, as Aeneas is by Virgil, and Vlysses by Ho∣mer. 29.
• 3434. 2. Cambrses, the sonne of Cyrus, subdued Psamniticus King of Aegypt, which Countrey he united to his Empire. Having a mind to marry his own Sister, he was told by his Lawyers that they knew no law which admitted such mariages, but that there was a law, that the Persian Kings might do what they listed. This King was a very bloudy Tyrant.

The Inter-regnum of the Magi.

Cambyses at his expedition into Aegypt, constituted Patizithes, one of the Magi, Vice-Roy in his absence. He hearing of the Kings death, conferred the Kingdome on his own sonne Smerdis, making the people beleeve, that he was the brother of Cambyses: A matter of no difficulty, considering, how re∣tirement from the publique view was a chief point of the Persian majesty. But the Nobles either know∣ing the true Smerdis to be slain, or suspecting the overmuch retiredness of the new King; began to search out the matter. Otanes had a daughter, which was one of the Kings Concubines; her he commanded when the King took next his pleasure with her; to feel whether he had an years: for Cambyses (in I know not what humour) had cut off the ears of this Magus. This commandment she obeying, found out the fals∣hood. The seven Princes informed of this imposture, join together, and slew this Pseudo-Smerdis, in the eighth moneth of his reign. This done, to avoid contention, they agreed among themselves, that the seven Princes meeting on the Palace green, should acknowledge him for King, whose horse before the rising of the Sunne, first neighed. The evening before the day appointed, the horse-keeper of Darius the sonne of Hystaspis, brought his masters horse into the green, together with a mare, which the horse then covered. In the morning the Princes met; and Darius his horse knowing the place, and longing for his mare, neighed lustily: on which the Princes presently acknowledge Darius for their King.

The restoring of the Kingdome.

• 3443. 3. Darius Hystaspis, one of the seven Persian Princes, descended from Cyrus the fourth King of the Persians, thus elected King, took Babylon (which had revolt∣ed) by the ingenious fetches of Zopirus; and over-ran all Asia and some part of Greece. 36.
• 3479. 4. Xerxes, to revenge the overthrow at Marathron, attempted to subdue the Greeks: by whom he was overthrown in the navall battle of Salam••s; and that famous and honourable ex∣ploit of the Graecians, at Thermopylae. 21.
• 3500. 5. Artaxerxes Long••manus, was he who sent Esdras to re-build the Temple of the Lord; and received Themistocles, being banished from Athens. This also was he, as some would have it, whom the Scriptures call Ahasuerus, the Husband of Hester; though others choose rather to place that story in the time of Xerxes. 44.
• 3544. 6. Darius II. surnamed Nothus, in whose time the Aegyptians revolted and chose a King of their own. 19
• 3563. 7. Artaxerxes II. from the greatness of his memory surnamed Mnemon; under whom hapned that famous retreat of Xenophon with an handfull of Graecians thorow most of the Provinces of this Empire; by which they shewed the way to the Macede∣nians.
• 3599. 8. Ochus, a great Tyrant, but a valiant Prince, recovered Aegypt, subdued Syria, Cyprus, and some part of India; and was at last slain by Bagoas, one of the Eunuchs of his Chamber.
• 3625. 9. Arses, the sonne of Ochus, most villanously murdered by the same Eunuch, for fear he should revenge the death of his Father.
• 3629. 10. Darius III. Governour of Armenia, and Cousin German of Ochus, before his comming to the Crown named Codomannus; by the means of the said Bagoas made sole Mo∣narch of Persia. But being vanquished by Alexander the Great in the three battels of Granicus, Cilicia, and Arbela, the Empire of the Persians was transferred to the Grae∣cians, A. M. 3635.

The certain Revenues of this great Monarchy, seem to have been 14560 Talents; for so much the last Da∣rius received yearly. But what the casuall and extraordinary Intrado was, is not easie to say, though ma∣nifest it is, and demonstrable by many strong and evident reasons, that they farre exceeded the certain. For first, the Persian Monarchs were Kings of 127 Provinces; Secondly, Darius offered to Alexander for the ransome of his mother and two daughters, 30000 Talents of Gold; Thirdly, Alexander found in the Treasury of Damascus, 2600 Talents; in that of Susa, 50000 Talents of Gold uncoyned; in that of 'Pasagardis, 60000 Talents; in that of Ecbatana, 26000 Talents; in that of Persepolis, 120000 Talents; in all 204600 Talents: besides the infinite riches of the Treasury of Babylon, yielded into his hands by Bagoph••••nes, and other places of note, no•• particularly specified; an huge and most un∣speakable summe. Fourthly, in that the gold and riches which Alexander, now a Conqueror, sent from Persia to Macedon and Greece, (besides that which every Captain and common Souldier had pro∣vided and laid up for his own maintenance) loaded ten thousand Mules, and five thousand Ca∣mels.

After this overthrow of the Persian Monarchy, this Nation lay obscure 535 years, viz. from the 3635 year of the world, to the 228 year of CHRIST: of which time they were 83 years under the Syrian Successors of Alexander; and 452 years under the Arsacidan Kings of Parthia 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 &c. as Herodi••in.

For after Darius had lost his Kingdome to Alexander the Macedonian, and after the Victor himself was dead also; the more potent Captains divided Asia among them. But discords often arising, and the Macedonions puissance, by these often broiles, not smally broken; Arsaces one of the Parthian Nobility, perswaded the barbarous people of the East, and among them the Persians, to cast off the Greek yoak, and stand for their liberty: he himself taking upon him the title of King, and inversting himself with a Diadem, A. M. 3718.

The Persians by this revolt, got little or nothing, having indeed not changed the Tyranny, but the Tyrant onely: these Parthian Princes lording it with as high an insolencie, as ever the old Persian Monarchs, or the Kings of Syria, did before. From this Arsaces, all the rest of his Successors, and those too of the family of Artabanus, or the second race of arthian Kings, took that name upon them: as the Roman Emperors that of Caesar, or the old Aegypti∣an Kings the name of Pharaoh. Their usual stile was Rex Regum, or King of Kings: and by that stile with arogance and insolence inough, Vologeses thus inscribed his letters to Vespasian the Roman Emperor, Ar∣saces, Rex Regum, Flavio Vespasiano: giving himself the title of Kings of Kings; but the other no∣thing but his bare names onely. To which, Vespasian without taking notice of the Parthians pride, return∣ed his answer to him with this superscription, Fl. Vespasianus Regi Regum Arsacidi: whether with more scorn, or modesty, it is hard to say. They also called themselves the Brethren of the Sun and Moon, which were the chiefest Gods they worshipped. Great Princes questionless they were, and kept the Romans harder to it, than all the Kings and States in the world besides: whose names and acts occurre in these following Catalogues of

2. The Arsacidan or Parthian race of the Kings of Persia.

• A. M.
• 3718. 1. Arsaces, the founder of the Parthian family.
• 3741. 2. Mithridates, or Arsaces the 2d. assaulted by Antiochus Magnus with an Army of 120000 men, but without success.
• 3761. 3. Pampatius.
• 3773. 4. Phraartes, the sonne of Pampatius.
• 3783. 5. Mithridates II. brother of Phraartes, subdued the Medes, and extended his Empire to Euphrates.
• 6. Phraartes II. slain in a warre against the Scythians.
• 3857. 7. Artabanus Uncle to Phraartes the 2d.
• 8. Pacorus, the sonne of Artabanus.
• 9. Mithridates III. brother of Pacorus.
• 3903. 10. Horodes, brother of Mithridates, whom he overcame, and caused to be slain in his own sight. He also vanquished M. Crassus, and flew 20000 Romans: and because Crassus was reported to be wondrous covetous, he caused molten gold to be powred down his throat. A miserable death, but in respect of the divine Providence a most just revenge upon him for his sacrilege, in robbing the Temple of Hierusalem, as he marched towards the Parthi∣ans. The overthrow, and the disgrace which thereby hapned to the Romans, was not long afterwards recompensed by Ventidius, one of the Lieutenants of Mark Antony the Triumvir, who flew great numbers of them in a pitched field, and amongst others Pacorus the Kings sonne; the day of the battell being the same, in which Crassus had before been vanquished. After this victory, for which Ventidius had the honour of a Triumph (and the first Triumph that ever the Romans had beheld for a Parthian victory) he was in a fair way to have ruined this Kingdom, to have shrewdly shaken it at the least, had not Antony in an envious humour called him from that service. Finally, Horodes was slain by his sonne Phraartes.
• 11. Phraartes III. a valiant Prince, but wicked and cruell. Against him marched Marcus Antonius with a populous Army, which wanted little of an absolute overthrow, of 16 legions, scarce six returning home in safety. This King submitted himself and Kingdome unto Augustus, restoring the Roman ensigns, and freeing the Captives taken at the defeat of Crassus. The onely mark of the Parthians subjection, was their receiving Kings at the ap∣pointment of the Senate and Emperours of Rome: which also was of no long continuance.
• 12. Phraartes IV. sonne of Phraartes the 3d. whom he slew and succeeded.
• 13. Orodes II. sonne of Phraartes the fourth, slain in a conspiracy.
• 14. Vonon, substituted in the place of Orodes, but outed by
• 15. Tiridates who was also dispossessed of his life and Kingdome by Artabanus, a stranger to the blood of the Arsacidae, the family of Arsaces giving place to that of this Artabanus; of which family we have the names of twelve Kings successively reigning: the most conside∣rable of them being Chosroes, the 8th. King of this line, from whom the Emperor Trd∣jan gained Armenia and Mesopotamia, adding them to the Roman Empire, members whereof they did continue till regained to the Persian Crown by Sapores the 9th King of the next Persian Dynasty. But for those twelve Kings of this house they are these.

The 3d. Dynasty of the Kings of Persia, and the 2d. of the Parthian Race.

• 1 Artabanus.
• 2 Bardanes.
• 3 Goteres.
• 4 Vonones.
• 5 Vologeses.
• 6 Artabanus II.
• 7 Pacorus.
• 8 Chosroes.
• 9 Parmaspates.
• 10 Vologeses II.
• 11 Vologeses III.
• 12 Artabanus III. the last King of this new race of the Parthians, whose overthrow by the valour of Artaxerxes the first Persian King of the 4th. Dynasty, oc∣casioned the translation of the Diadem to the naturall Persians; after it had continued in two Parthian families for the space of 470 years. Which Translation as it was wrought by the unresistable power of God, who onely hath the disposing of Crowns and Scepters; so in the way of second causes it may be prin∣cipally referred to the barbarous massacre of this people by Antonius Caracalla the Roman Emperor. Who having negociated a mariage with the daughter of this Artabanus, and going (as he gave it out) to solemnize the nuptials; was met by the old King accompanied with the flower of his Nobility, and the choi∣cest of his Souldiers, and other Subjects in Triumphall Ornaments. Which honourable train was no sooner come neer his Army, but he commanded his Souldiers, (on a watch-word given) to put them all to the sword, the King himself hardly escaping with his life. Caracalla being dead, and Macrinus succeeding in the Throne, the Parthians set upon him to revenge that slaughter. But understanding after a long fight of three daies continuance, that Macrinus had slain Caracella, they made peace with him: but were so

• weakned and unable to hold their own, that it made the Persians once more think of recovering to their own Nation the Regall power. For Artaxerxes, a noble and generous Persian (his name perhaps suggesting some high thoughts unto him) did so much husband the opportunity, that he slew Artabanus the last King of the Parthians, and once more brought the royall seat into Persia. Yet was not this so easilly effected, the Parthians notwithstanding their former losses, maintaining a cruell fight for three dayes together: so difficult was it to vanquish that Nation, when their forces were broken; impossible when they were whole. Artaxerxes, proud of this success, sent a peremptory embassie to Alexander Severus, the then Roman Emperor, to have all the Provinces of Asia, which had formerly belonged to the Persian Monarchy, re∣delivered to him: a matter not so easily granted as demanded. For Severus so suppress so insolent an ene∣my, marched towards Persia with an Army Romanly appointed; which, to find his enemy more work he divided into three parts: whereof the first was to march into Media; the second into Persia; the third him∣self led in the mid-way between both, to succour both as occasion required. But his device succeeded not happily: for his two Annies being by the Persians broken, he with much danger and hast retired back with the third. This was a good beginning for the Persian Empire, the establishment followed not long after: Valerianus the Emperor being vanquished and taken prisoner by Sapores the second King of this race. So that now the name of the Persian grew so terrible to the Romans, that Co••stantine the Great, transplanted many of the Colonies and Garrisons of the North-west part of the Empire, into the East; to keep the Persian from growing to farre upon the Roman Provinces; and removed also the feat of the Em∣pire nigher unto them, from Rome to Constantinople. And thus having shown the beginning and establish∣ment, the foundation and building of the new Kingdome of the Persians: take along with you the Cata∣logue of their Kings, untill they once more lost the soveraignty of their own Nation, and became slaves a∣gain.

The 4th. Dynasty, or race of the Persian Kings.

• 228 1 Artaxerxes 15.
• 243 2 Sa••ores 31.
• 272 3 Ormi••••••e•• 1.
• 275 4 Vararanes 3.
• 278 5 Vararanes II. 16.
• 294 6 Vararanes III.
• 294 7 Narses 7.
• 302 8 Misdues 7.
• 310 9 Sapar II. 70.
• 380 10 Artaxerxes II. 11.
• 391 11 Sapores III. 5.
• 396 12 Varanes IV. 10.
• 406 13 Isdigertes 21.
• 427 14 Vararanes IV. 20.
• 447 15 Vararanes V. 17.
• 464 16 Perozes 20.
• 484 17 Valens 4.
• 488 18 Cabades, dispossessed by
• 499 19 Lambases 4.
• 503 20 Cabades, again restored.
• 533 21 Cosroes Magnus 48.
• 581 22 Hormisda 8.
• 589 23 Cosroes II. 39.
• 628 24 Siroes 1.
• 629 25 Adhesi••.
• 26 Sarbatus.
• 27 Barnarius.
• 630 28. Hormisda II. the 28. and last King of the race of Artaxerxes, or the fourth Dyn••••sty: of whom besides the two first Kings, whose Acts are spoken of before, the most remarkable were, 1. Vararanes the second, in whose time Carus the Emperour passing over Euphrates, and laying sieige to Ctesiphon, was there slain by a thunderbolt. 2. Narses, the son of Varar••nes, who first discomsited Galerius, one of the Caesars, in the Empire of Diocletian, and to∣tally ruined his Army: for which Galerius being forced to lacquey it by the Emperors Chariotin his pur∣ple Robes, was so highly shamed, that to recover his credit he set upon Narses once again, routed him, and took Prisoners his wives and children. 3. Sapores the second, the sonne of Misdates, who began his reign before his birth. For his Father dying without issue, left his wife with Child: which Child the Magi having signified by their art to be a male, the Persian Princes caused the Crown and Royall Or∣naments to be set upon his Mothers belly, acknowledging him thereby for their future King. A great and puissant Prince he proved; holding continuall warr with Constantine and his Successours till the death of Valens, and gaining from them the best part of Mesopotamia: but withall a great Persecuter of the Christians, of whom no fewer than 20000 are said to have suffered in his time. 4. Isdigertes, a Prince so esteemed of by Arcadius the Eastern Emperor, that he made him Protector of his Empire during the mi∣nority of his sonne Theodosius: which trust he Royally performed, and was a great friend unto the Chri∣stians in his own dominions. 5. Cabades, first outed of his Kingdome by Zamaspes, and restored a∣gain, was the first Persian King who permitted the free exercise of the Christian Religion. He slew Ze∣liobes a King of the Hunnes comming to his aid against the Romans, because he had before promised to assist the Emperour; and rooted the Manichean Sect out of his estates. 6. Cosroes the sonne of Cabades, surnamed the Gre••t, a Constant enemie of the Romans, from whom he conquered a great part of Syria, and took and sacked the City of Antioch. But finding the war brought home to his own doors by Mau∣ritius, who was afterwards Emperour, and his own Countries in a flame, he took such thought of it that he died of a feaver. 7. Cosroes the second, as great an enemie to the Emperor Heraclius, from whom he took all that was left of Mesopotamia, Syria, and the Holy Land, with the City of Hierusalem it self: most of it recovered by Heraclius; in despight of whom he caused all the Christians in his King∣dome to turn Nestorians. 8. Hormisda the second, the last of this Dynasty, who being first weakned by Civill and Domestick dissensions, was vanquished by Haumar and his Saracens, Anno 634. bury∣ing so the glory of this renowned Nation, in the grave of oblivion and infamy.

The Saracen icall Caliphs, having added this Kingdome to their huge Empire, appointed here their De∣puties, whom they honoured with the name of Sultans: not one Supreme for the whole Kingdome, but se∣verall Governours or Sultans for each several Province; called by new names, and moulded into many Toparchtes, as Chorazan, Mauzenabar, Usbeck, and I wot not what; the Sultans acting of them∣selves, and warring upon one another, as their humours led them, without relation to the Caliph, or Lord in chief. During which bustles it so hapned that Mahomet, the Sultan of Persia (so called because he was the chief in command and power) picking a quarrell with his neighbour the Sultan of Babylon, (Pi∣••••iris he is called in some Christian writers, by whom taken or mistaken for the Caliph himself) made warre upon him. But finding him countenanced and supported by the power of the Caliph, in∣vited the Turks, then possessed of some part of Armenia Major, to come in to his aid: by whose means he overthrew the Caliphs forces, and might have got the Soveraignty of Persia unto himself, if he had used his victory and his friends with any tolerable discretion. But denying to pay these Turks their wages, and send them home, he occasioned them to make head against him under the conduct of Tangrolipix their prin∣cipall leader; to whom being once in armes, severall discontented persons of the naturall Persians did u∣nite themselves. Encouraged with which additions, and being furnished with Horse and Armour, and other necessaries, by the spoil of the Countrey; they give battell to the Sultan himself: whom having van∣quished and slain, Tangrolipix by the joint consent of both Armies is made King of Persia; the Foun∣der of

The fift Dynasty, or the Turkish Race of the Kings of Persia.

• 1030. 1 Tangrolipix, of whom sufficiently before.
• 2. Axan, the sonne of Tangrolipix, by whom Cutlu Muses, his neer Kinsman, was sent with great forces against the Christians, whom he dispossessed of a great part of Asia Mi∣nor.
• 3. Balak, Sultan of Persia, in the begining of the warres in the holy land, undertaken by the We∣stern Christians; against whom he is reported to have sent his forces. Of whose Successors I find nothing till the time of
• 1198 4 Cassanes, the last King or Sultan of the Turks; vanquished in the year 1202 by the Cham of Tartary. Which makes me very apt to think, that after the death of Axan, or his next Successor, the Turks lost the Soveraignty of Persia, though they kept the possession of some parts of it; the Soveraingty thereof being recovered by the Caliphs of Babylon: and that it was so held by both, till the Tartars dispossessed the one, and destroyed the whole progeny of the other, as before was noted. And this I find to be the opinion of Beniamin Tuledensis, a learned Jew, which had travelled most part of the East; to whose judgement herein I subscribe as most found and rationall.

The Sixt Dynasty, or the Tartarian race of the Kings of Persia.

• 1260. 1 Haalon, or Ulah-Kuhkan, by Occata the great Cham, made King of Persia, extermina∣ted the whole race of the Caliph of Bagdet.
• 1266. 2. Habkakaihon, the sonne of Haalon.
• 1282. 3. Nicador Oglan, by Haiton called Tangador, who made himself a Mahometan, and was named Hamed, the brother of Habkakaihon.
• 1284. 4. Argon-Khon, the eldest sonne of Habkakaihon.
• 1292. 5. Geniotukhon, brother of Argon-Khon.
• 1295. 6. Badukhan, the Unkle of the last, of which three there is little memorable.
• 1296. 7. Gazun, the sonne of Argon-Khon, who made Casbin his Imperial seat.
• 1305. 8. Alyaptu, who transferred the Court to Tauris, and is said to have been the founder of Sul∣tania, a chief City of Media; the brother of Gazun.
• 1317. 9. Abusaid, sonne of Alyaptu, that reigned in Persia. After whose death, Anno 1337. (being the 736. of the Mahometan Hegira) the more potent Princes of the Tartars seized on the severall parts and Provinces of it, every one calling himself King of that part or Province which he was possessed of. And amongst them Gempsas the Sultan or Soldan of Parthia (though a Per∣sian born) put in for a share, and made himself master of his own Province, and some parts adjoining: made on that ground by some of our Christian writers (who very imperfectly have transmitted to us the af∣fairs of this Countrey) the sole King of Persia. In this confusion it continued till the comming of Tamer∣lane, who like a furious Whirlwind driving all before him, composed the differences, by getting all unto himself. But as Philosophy doth teach us, that no violent motion is of long continuance, so the course of business, and the success of actions may instruct us also, that a Kingdome forced to bow under the command of a prosperous Army, is not so well assured to the Victor, but that the fury of the war once past, it may return again to its former liberty, or open a more easie passage to some new Invader. And so it fared with the conquests and successes of Tamerlane, whose issue quickly lost this Kingdome, and almost all the rest of his other purchases: leaving but little memory of their names and actions. For partly by his own imprudence in cantoning his Estates amongst his Children, and partly by the weakness of his

• Successours in the Realm of Persia: this Kingdome did relapse immediately to the same confusions in which he found it; having almost as many Soveraign Kings, as Provinces. Most of them Homagers perhaps to the Kings of the house of Tamerlane, and those who afterwards succeeded in the Title of Kings of Persia of the Turcoman or Armenian Dynasty: not yet reduced unto this Grown, notwithstanding the great and prosperous successes of the Sophtan Family. But for the Kings of the race of Tamerlane, who only in their times had the honour to be called Kings of Persia (and well enough content with that): such as they were we find them in this order following.
• 1405. 10. Mirza Charok, the fourth sonne of Tamerlane, succeeded by his appointment in the Realm of Persia.
• 1447. 11. Oleghbeg, sonne of Mirza Charok, vanquished and slain by his own sonne.
• 1450. 12. Abdalatise, slain not long after by his own Souldiers.
• 1451. 13. Abdula, the sonne of Oleghbeg, and brother of Abdalatife, vanquished by
• 1453. 14. Abusaid II. descended from Moroncha, the third sonne of Tamerlane, succeeded on the death of Abdula.
• 1461. 15. Zeuzes, whom some call Jooncha, others Malaonchres, discomfited and slain in bat∣tel by Ussan-Cassanes, Anno 1472. which was about 70 years from the death of Ta∣merlane.

The seventh Dynasty of the Turcoman, or the Armenian race of the Kings of Persia.

• 1472. 1. Vssan-Cassanes by some called Asymbeius, by others more truely Ozem-Azembec, was the sonne of Tracheton, one of those poor Armenian or Turcoman Princes dispossessed by Baiazet the first, and restored by Tamerlane. Encroaching on his neighbours, he was warned to desist by Zeuzes the Persian King, with whom encountring in a pitched field he overcame him, and got that Kingdome by the vi∣ctory.
• 1478. 2. Jacub, the second sonne of Ussan-Cassanes, having put by his elder Brother, attained the Throne; and repulsed the Mamalucks out of Mesopotamia and Assyria, which they had invaded: He was after poisoned by his wife.
• 1490. 3. Julaver, a Kins-man of Jacubs, succeeded him in the estate, which he held only three years, and then left it to
• 1493. 4. Barsinger, a Prince of the same blood, who living in adultery with the wife of Jacub, had conspired his death. 2.
• 1495. 5. Rustan, assaulted by Atder or Secaider of the Sophian faction, who then began to be of power.
• 1498. 6. Alamat, or Hagaret, the last King of this Turcoman or Armenian race; first vanquished Secaider at the battel of Derbent, and cut off his head: but was after overthrown and slain by Hysmacl the sonne of Aider; upon the quarrell and occasion which here followeth.

Mahomet the Impostor and first Emperour of the Saracens, by his last Will and Testament, be∣queathed the succession into that Estate, to Hali his neer Kins-man, and the Husband of Fatime, his Eldest Daughter. But Abubezar, Haumar, and Osmen, three powerfull men, and the Chief Commanders of the Army in the time of Mahomet, successively followed one another in the Supreme Dignity. After their death, Hali enjoyed that honour for a little while, supplanted first, and afterwards vanquished and slain by Muhavias a great man of warre, who succeeded in it; and to secure himself therein, slew Hasem or Ossan, the sonne of Hali, and eleven of the sonnes of that Ossan; the twelt called Musa Ceredine escaping with life. From him descended lineally one Guine the Lord of Ardoville in Media; who considering that their had been no Caliph in long time before, began to plot the establi∣shing of that high honour in his own family, as the right Heirs to it. A man of so great reputation a∣mongst the people, that Tamerlane having made a conquest of Persia, thought it no dishonour to his greatness, to bestow a friendly visit on him. Dying, he left his hopes and projects to his sonne called Atder, who afterwards for the purity of Religion pretended by him, had the adjunct of Tzophy; the word so signifying in that language: who also proved of such esteem and power with all sorts of men, that Ussan-Cassanes, the first King of the Armenian or Turcoman race thought fit to make him Husband unto one of his Daughters. But on the contrary, Jacub the sonne of Vssan, and some of his Successours, see∣ing him grow unto such power and estimation with the common people; and fearing what he could do, and not what he would do, endeavoured to depress him by all means that might be. Which he not able to remedy, as the Case then stood, practised to adde unto his party under the popular pretence of reforming things that were amiss in their Religion: and grew so powerfull in the end, that he gave battel unto Re∣stan and Alamat, the two last Kings of the former race. But Alamat having got the victory, caused him to be slain; and delivered Hysmael and Solyman his two sonnes, into the hands of Amazar, a chief Commander of his own, by him to be kept in perpetual prison. But Amazar a man of a more inge∣nuous disposition, afforded them not only liberty, but also good education: insomuch that Hysmael Sophi, a towardly young Gentleman, undertook revenge for the death of his Father, which work he

fulfilled, having overcome and slain King Alamat, and his sonne Elvan. After this victory, he being crowned King, or Shaugh of Persia, altered the form of Religion: making Hali, and himfelf the true Successors of Mahomet; but condemning Abubezer, Haumar, and Osmen, with the Turks, as rebells and Schismaticks.

Hence proceeded the divers warres, which to the Persians loss, have hapned between them and the Turks: the Persians burning whatsoever book or Monument they find concerning those three; and the Turks holding it more meritorious to kill one Persian than seventy Christians. Surius in his Commentaries, writing purposely of the Acts of Hysma••••, saith, that the Jews on some fond conceit were perswaded that he was the Messiah they had so long looked for: But it proved quite contrary, there never being Prince that more vexed and grieved them.

The eighth Dynasty, or Sophian race of the Kings of Persia.

• 1505. 1. Hysmael Sophi, the founder of this Family, overthrown by Selimus the first, in the Cal∣deran fields. 20.
• 1525. 2. Tamas, the Sonne of Hysmael, vanquished by Solyman the Magnificent, who took from him the Countries of Chaldea, Assyria, and Mesopotamia, with some part of Media. 53.
• 1578. 3. Aider, the second sonne of Tamas, obtained the Kingdome, imprisoning his elder bro∣ther; but his cruelty being much feared, he was made away by the practice of Periancona, his own Sister, having reigned only 15 daies.
• 4. Hysmael II. eldest sonne of Tamas, restored unto his Fathers Throne; but murdered with the privity of his Sister also, who found him of too rough a nature for her to govern; having reigned neer two years.
• 1579. 5. Mahomet Codabanda, advanced unto the throne by his Sisters faction, (as being of a milder and more tractable nature) at his first entrance caused her to be beheaded for the former murders. During his time, not fully setled in the State, Amurath the 2d. by his Lieute∣nants won from him almost all Armenia, Media, and great part of Georgia. 7.
• 1585. 6. Abas, the second sonne of Mahomet, having treacherously practised the death of Mirza, his elder brother, suceeeded his Father, recovered almost all which the Turks had gained, and added the Kingdomes of Ormus, Heri, Candahor, and Hyrcania, to the Crown of Persia.
• 7. Soffie, the Nephew of Abas by his sonne Mirza, (whose eyes he caused to be put out on a false suspition) at the age of fifteen years succeeded: committed by his Grand-father during his minority to the protection of Emangoly, Chawn, or Duke of Shyras. A Prince, who since he came to age, hath had a good hand against the Turks, attempting the recovery of Bagdel and other places, which had been taken from them in the time of Abas.

The Government of these Persian Kings, though it be despoticall and severe, hath a great deal less of the Tyrant in it than any other of the Mahometan Kings or Princes: these cherishing their Brethren, maintaining Nobility amongst them, and incouraging industry; which makes them to be better served than the Turk or Tartar; to both whom they are farre inferiour both in power and treasure. Their Officers of of State, and men of principall inployment, for the most part Eunuchs(as generally in all the Empires of the East): such Persons being thought most trusty; because abstracted from the obligations of wife and chil∣dren, they study more the Princes service than their own advantages. Their forces consist most of Horse, to which they are inclined more generally than to serve on root: and yet the greatest body of horse which they have brought at any time into the field, came not to above 30000; but those well furnished and ap∣pointed; maintained on Lordships and Estates after the manner of the Turkish Timariots. The Foot-Souldiers of his own Countries, but poor and raw, and very seldome stand their ground. That defect be∣ing for the most part supplied by Mercinaries. The inconvenience of which being found by Sultan A∣bas, he served himself of children bought of Christian Parents, neer the Euxine Sea (from whence the E∣gyptian Sultans had their Mamalucks) whom they call by the name of Cozel-Bassas, or Red-cap••, so named from the colour of their Turbans, trained up by them in their Religion, and warlike Discipline; as the Turks their Janizaries; yet farre inferiour to the Turk, against whom if they have prevailed since the time of Abas, they may ascribe the greatest part of their good fortune to those divisions and Rebellions which in these late times have been frequent in the Turkish Empire. And as for their Sea-forces they are inconsidera∣ble: For though they have a large Sea-coast both on the Persian Bay, the Caspian Sea, and the Southern Ocean, yet are they very poor in shipping; suffering the Moscovite to ingross the trade of the Caspian Sea; the Portug •••• to manage that of the Southern Ocean; as formerly that also of the Persian Bay, till the tak∣ing of Ormuz.

The Revenues of this Kingdome in the time of Hysmael the first Sophy, were exceeding great: inso∣much that Tamas, his Successor to ingratiate himself with all sorts of people, released them of all kinds of Customes imposed on Merchandise either imported or exported. And this they say amounted to the summe of 90000 Tomans yearly: which, reckoning every Toman at 20 Crowns, made up a million and

800000 Crowns of annuall income. Which notwithstanding, his Revenue was computed at four or five mil∣lions of Crowns yearly; raised out of Domain lands, the tenth of fruits, the profit of mines, and the 〈◊〉〈◊〉 payed by every subject when he sets up shop. But Tamas finding this not to be sufficient to maintain his Roy∣alty, doubled the value of his money, and thereby for the present his Revenues also. Since that they have been much empaired by the Conquests made upon them by the Turks, who had got from them so much land as maintained 40000 Timariots, and yielded to the grand Signeur one million of yearly income: whether improved again or not to their former height, I am not able to determine.

And so much for Persia.

OF TARTARIA.

ARTARIA is bounded on the East, with China, the Orient all Ocean, and the streights of Anian, by which parted from America; on the West, with Russia, and Podotra, a Province of the Realm of Poland; on the North, with the main Scythick or frozen Oce∣an; and on the South, with part of China, from which separated by a mighty wall; the the River Oxus, parting it from Bactria, and Margiana, two Persian Provinces; the Caspian Sea, which separates it from Media and Hyrcania; the Caucasian Mountains in∣terposing betwixt it and Turcomania; and the Euxine, which divideth it from Anatolia and Thrace. So called from the Tartars, a puisant and mighty people now possessed hereof; the reason of whose name we shall shew hereafter.

It containeth all those great and spacious Provinces which the antients called Seres, Scythia extra I∣maum, Scythia intra Imaum, Sacae, Sogdiana, the greatest part of Sarmatia Asiatica, and part of Sarmatia Europaea: extending it self the whole length of Asia from the River Tanais to the Eastern O∣cean, taking in Taurica Chersonesus, and some other parts of Europe also. So that if we measure it by miles, it is said to contain 5400 from East to West, and 3600 from North to South: a greater quantity of ground than the Turkish Empire, but of less fertility and accompt.

In measuring by the way of degrees, it reacheth from the 50. degree of Longitude, to the 195. which is 145. degrees from West to East: and from the 40th. degree of Northern Latitude, unto the 80th. which is within ten degrees of the Pole it self. By which accompt it lieth from the beginning of the sixt Clime, where the longest day in summer is 15 hours; till they cease measuring by Climates, the longest day in the most Northern parts hereof being full six moneths; and in the winter-half of the year, the night as long.

The Countrey lying under such different Meridians, and such distant Climes, must needs be such as no generall Character can be given of it, and therefore we shall deferre that, with the names of the Rivers, and chief Mountains, to the description of the several and particular Provinces. But for the people, being much of the same nature in every part, we may take the measure of them here. Affirmed to be of square Stature, broad faces, hollow eyes, thin beards, thick lips, flat noses, ugly Countenances; swart of com∣plexion, not so much by the heat of the Sunne, (which keeps farre enough off) as their naturall sluttish∣ness. Barbarous every where in behaviour, especially in those parts which they call Asiatica, and Antiqua: but withall very strong of body, swift of footmanship, vigilant in time of service, and patient of all extremities both of cold and hunger. The women suitable to the men, scorning or wanting orna∣ments to set themselves out, or when they do, they seldome go beyond copper, feathers, or such precious gew-gawes.

In behaviour they are rude and barbarous, as before was said; eacing their Enemies when they take them, as in way of revenge, first letting out their blood which they receive into Cupe, and use it as wine unto their feast. Though swift of foot, yet generally they love to ride though it be but on Oxen: about whose necks, as about their horses, when they travell, they use little bells, with which musick they are much delighted. Their spearh, even in their common talk, is a kind of whining; and their singing little better than the howlin•• of wolves. They eat commonly with unwashed hands, the durt and grease about their fingers serving as a sawce for their meat, which they devour greedily, and with little chewing; and for their ordinary drink use mares milk. Homely of habit, made of the coursest stuff, and reaching no lower than the knee: and if they go to the charge of furrs, contrary to the custome of other people, they wear the hairy side outwards, and the skinne next their own bodies; onely to shew the richness of their Apparell. And yet so proud in this beggery, that they account the Christians but as dogs, contemn all the rest of the world, and think their Cham the onely considerable Prince, by whose name they swear, as by their Gods.

In matter of Religion it is hard to say whether Mahometanism or Paganism be of most extent: some parts hereof being wholly Pagan, some wholly Mathometan, and some mix of both. But of the two the Pagan is the better Gentleman, as being of the elder house, and of more Antiquity: the Sect of Ma∣homet not being entertained amongst them till the year 1246.

And yet these have not so prevailed, as to extinguish the remainders of Christianity, of which there are amongst them many severall Churches. The Christian faith first planted amongst the Scythians by the preaching of Saint Andrew, and Saint Philip, two of the Apostles. Overgrown in these later Ages by the Sect of Nestorians, either by the diligence of their Preachers, or for want of others to instruct them in more Orthodox Tenets. Before the prevailing of the Tartars, besides the Circassian Christians of whom more anon, there are in the most remote parts of Tartary, whole Kingdomes of that Religion; as namely that

of Te••duc, then the chief of all; besides some numbers of them in Tangath, Cauchinteles, Cassar, Samarchan, Karthim, Suchair, Ergimul, and Caraiam, where in the time of Paulus Venetus, who surveyed these parts about the year they lived intermingled with the Pagans. Not so diminished since the conquest of those Countries by the Tartars, but that they are of a considerable number, especi∣ally in Cathay it self: where they are said to have a Metropolitan in the City of Cambalu (the principall City of that Empire) and he so honoured by the Great Cham, that they receive their Crowns successively from no hands but his.

As for the Tartars, they are by the Chronologer Genebrard, said to be the off-spring of the Ten Tribes, whom Salmanassar led away captive, and that especially for three reasons. The first is, that the word Tatari, by which name (saith he) they ought rather to be called, than by that of Tartari, signifieth in the Syriack and Hebrew tongues, a Remnant. But unto this it is answered, that the name of this people is derived from the River Tartar, as some; or from the Region called Tartar, where they first dwelt, as most think: and again, that though the Hebrew word 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 signifie a remnant, yet can it not properly be applyed to the Tartars; who so infinitely exceed the Jews, that they cannot be thought to be a remainder of them. Secondly, he allegeth for proof thereof, that this people use circumcision, the character of the Jewish Nation. And here unto it is replyed, that circumcision was common to many people, besides the Jews, as to the Aegyptians, Aethiopians, &c. and that rather as a national cu∣stome, than a religious ordinance; and again, that the Tartars cannot be proved to have received circum∣cision, before they received Mahometanism. Thirdly, there is brought to confirm this opinion a place of Esdras, cap 13. lib. 2. where it is said, that the Ten Tribes (that they might the better keep Gods Sta∣tutes) passed over the River Euphrates, and after a journey of an year and a half, came into a Coun∣trey called Arf••reth. To refell which, those of the contrary opinion find no better course, than by shew∣ing the impossibilities of it. For the Tartars (when their name was first known) were meer Idolaters, had no remembrance of the Law, observed not the Sabbath, nor any other point of Jewish religion: and so the Ten Tribes retired not hither to keep Gods Statutes. Secondly, Euphrates lyeth quite West from Assyria, and those places to which Salmanassar transplanted the Israelites; and so it could not be passed over in a journey towards the North. And Thirdly, it is very improbable, that the ten Tribes should ei∣their be so simple, as to leave Assyria, where they were peaceably setled; or so valiant, as to force a pas∣sage thorough those Countries of Scythia; which neither Persians, Greeks, or Romans were able to with∣stand in the best of their fortunes.

To let pass therefore all imaginations of a forein Pedegree, the truth is, that they were no other than a Ruder and more Northern brood of Scythians, who pressed by want, or otherwise oppressed by the King of Tenduch unto whom they were subject, armed themselves against him, obtained a memorable victory, and setled Cingis their chief Captain in the Royall Throne. Anno 1162. After which growing of more power, and inlarging their dominions further; they united in the name of Tartars all the Scythian Nations: as Mahomet did those of the three Arabias in the name of Saracens; or as in former times, the many se∣verall Tribes of the German Nations, were united in the names of Franks or Alemans. Not known in Europe by this name till their many great and signall victories had made them formidable, which was about the year 1212. within very little of which time they had made themselves Masters of a larger Empire, than that of Macedon or Rome, in their greatest glories. But being of a hasty growth it decaied as suddenly; the greatest part of their Europaean purchases being conquered from them by the Dukes of Moscovy, and the Kings of Poland; as their acquests in Asia, and Asrick, by the Turks and Persians. Yet still they are possessed of so large a territory, that were they not distracted into severall States; or did those seve∣rall states depend upon one Supreme; that one Supreme might very easily give law unto all his Neighbours; and make the Turks and Persians tributaries, as in former times. But laying aside these speculations of what they might do if united under one command: let us now look upon them as they are divided into these five parts, that is to say, 1. Tartaria. Precopensis, 2. Asiatica, 3 Antiqua, 4. Zagathay, and 5. Cathay.

1. TARTARIA PRECOPENSIS.

TARTARIA PRECOPENSIS is bounded on the East, with the River Tanais, now Don; on the West, with the River Borysthenes, now called Nerper, by which last parted from P••do∣l••••, a Province of Poland; on the North, with part of Russia; and on the South, with some part of the Euxine Sea: and by this accompt lying totally within Europe.

It had the name of Precopensis, from Precopia a chief Town thereof. By some called Tartaria Mi∣nor, to distinguish it from the greater body of that people: the Inhabitants hereof most commonly passing by the name of Crim-Tartars, from the Town of Crim, in which their Cham or Emperor doth reside most usually. The Countrey by them now possessed, part antiently of Sarmatia Europaea, was inhabieed by a warlike nation called the Tauri; from whom those parts hereof which lie betwixt the Empire of Russia, and the two Rivers Tanais and Borysthenes, were called Tauro Scythia; that which shooteth out into the Sea, encompassed with the Euxine on the one side, and Palus Maotis on the other, being called Tau∣rica Chersonesus. In the description whereof at this place and time, as formerly I made bold with some part of Asia to lay together the estate of the Russian Empire: so now to satisfie for that trespass, I shall make bold with part of Europe, to lay together the discourse and affairs of Tartary,

The whole Countrey plentiful of fruits, and the soyl indifferently disposed to tillage and grazing, though more accustomed unto the last: the people more delighting in their heards of cattel, than in the fulness of

their Garners. Camels, Horse, Oxen, Sheep, and Goats they have plenty of; great store of delicate fowl, and abundance of fish, bred in the large Fennes of Moeotis: and in their forrests plenty of all sorts of Venison. Which Character as it belongeth generally to all the Countrey, so most especially to the Chersonese or Demy-Iland. United to the main land with so narrow an Isthmus, that the Tartars once went about to dig it thorow: from whence some say they had the name of Precopenses, Precoph in the Sclavonian tongue signifying a deep trench, or a digging thorow. In length not above 24 German, or 96. Italian miles; in breadth but 60 of the one, or 15 of the other. Blest with a very temperate Air, and a gentle winter: which beginning with the last of December ends the first of March. Never extreme, and when the frosts are at the sharpest, but of short continuance. Divided in the middest with a chain of hills extended from the East to West, the boundary of the Dominions of the Turk and Tartar.

The people of the same complexion and composition, as the rest of the Tartars; and not much differ∣ent in manners. Their diet, Roots, Cheese, Garlick, and of the poorer sort, for the most part horse∣flesh (none but the better sort presuming upon Beef or Venison, though of both abundance) which they eat without bread or any thing else: and therefore when they go to the wars every Souldier takes two horses with him, the one to serve upon, and the other to kill. And yet for all this havock which they make of horseflesh, there are few years in which they sell not 40 or 50 thousand in the fairs of Mosco. Towns they build none, scarce willing to maintain those which were built to their hands. Nor have they (ex∣cept men of trades and manufactures) any standing houses, removing up and down with their Droves of Cattel, moving their houses with them, (which they build on wheels) from one place to another. Of money they make no esteem, preferring brass and steel before other metalls, because more usefull to them for Swords and Knives. Good Souldiers for the most part, especially at the Bow and A rows; to which so accustomed from their child-hood that they can shoot as readily backward as forward. Trained also of late times to the Harquebuse, well skilled in handling the Turkish Scymitars, and their horsemens Staves. Not to be vanquished but by death, as men that are resolved rather to die than be taken Prisoners: and if victorious, more intent upon taking Captives (especially young Boys and Girles, whom they sell to the Turks) than upon any other Booty or spoils of war.

The Religion most embtaced and countenanced is that of Mahomet, mingled with some of their old Principles of Christianity: for they confess that CHRIST shall be the Judge both of quick and dead in the day of judgement, and punish those that speak irreverently of him. In that regard more favourable to the Christians than other Mahometans, which makes great store of Grecian and Armenian Christians to dwell amongst them. The language which they speak is their own Tartarian, but intermixt with much of the Arabick, and Turkish Tongues, and when they write, they use either Chaldaean or Arabian Characters.

Rivers of most note in it, are 1. Borysthenes, & 2. Tanais, which though they have their spring-heads in the Empite of Russia (as was there declared) have their falls in this: the first in the Euxine Sea, in the 57th. the other into Palus Moeotis in the 67th. Degree of Longitude; by which we may conjecture some∣what of the length of the Countrey. 3. Hipanes, 4. Carcimitis, falling into the Euxine. 5. Agaris, and 6. Byces, which lose themselves in the Fennes of Moeotis; As do also 7. Pasiascus, 8. Gerus, 9. Lycus, from the mainland, and 10. Istrianus from the Taurican Chersonese. By the confluence of which waters, and many others falling from the Asian side, the lake or Fennes of Moeotis are of great extent, in compass at least a thousand miles, well stored with fish, and still retaining somewhat of the sweetness of those many Rivers which are emptyed into it. So called from the Moeotae who formerly inha∣bited on the banks hereof, and giving name to an excellent kind of fish which were called Moeotides by the Antients. At this day generally called Mar delle Zabahe, by the Italians commonly Mar della Tana, the sea of Tanais, and sometimes also Mer Bianco, or the White Sea, to difference it from the Euxine, which they call the Black, for the reasons formerly delivered. Passing directly towards the South, it is streightned by a narrow Channel not above four miles in breadth though about 24 in length, called antient∣ly by the name of Bosphorus Cimmerius. Bosphorus, because Oxen did use to swim over it; Cimmerius from the Cimmerii who possessed the adjoining Countrey on the Asian side: but known at this day by the name of Stretto di Caffa; from the City Capha neer unto it; aud by the Inhabitants Vospero, more neer the originall. Out of this Streight that confluence of waters which do meet in the Maeotick Fennes do make their way into the Euxine. According to that of Lucan.

Qua{que} Fretum currens Maeotidas egeritundas. Where the Maeotick Pools at last Thorow a narrow Streight makes hast.

Chief Cities of it at the present, 1. Capha, or Caffa, in the Chersonese not far from the Streight called hence Stretto di Caffa; a flourishing Empory, and furnished with a large and capacious Haven. Heretofore possessed by the Genoese, who by the benefit of this Port, and the plantation which they had in Perah on the North side of Constantinople, engrossed into their own hands the whole trade of the Euxine. Taken by Mahomet the Great, Anno 1475. it became subject to the Turks, and drew into that thraldome all the Southern parts of the Chersonese which depended on it: deprived thereby of the greatest part of its former lustre, the Christian Churches being destroyed, the Towers and publique buildings razed, the houses of the Genoa Merchants which were fair and beautifull destroyed and ruined; yet still the principall of this biland, or Demy-Iland; and antiently better known by the name of Theodosia, and by that name re∣membred in Ammianus. 2. Precoph, in Latine called Precopia; a Town and Castle situate in or neer the place where stood the Eupateria of the Antients: called also Pompeiopolis, Heraclea, and A••hillis Cursus. 3. Corsunum, the Chersonesus of Ptolomy, antiently a Greek Colony; & then accompted for the chief of

the whole Peninsula: ric••, populous, and well-traded, by reason of the Haven which was safe and large; and of great beauty and magnificence, as the ruins testifie. By the Turks at this day called Sari-Germa∣num, or the yellow Tower, the soyl about it being of a Saffron colour. 4. Cremam, or Crim, the an∣tient Seat of the Chams or Princes of these Tartars; and at that time the fairest and greatest of this Bi∣l••nd. Situate in the middest thereof, and fortified with a strong Castle, for the height of the walls, and depth of the ditch esteemed impregnable; supposed to be the Taphrae of Pliny, or the Taphros of Ptolomy. Mentioned by Florus, as then lately taken by some Roman Emperor, and so most likely to be Trajan, the first that ever extended the Roman Empire beyond Danubius and the Euxine. Situate in the very Isthmus, and so commanding both the Euxine and the Lakes of Moeotis; as Corinth betwixt the Aegean and Ioni∣an Seas. 5. Panticapaeum, situate on the very Bosphorus, and now called Vospero by the natives: the antientest City of this Peninsula, and said by Ammianus to be the mother of all the Greek Colonies which were planted in i••. 6. Tanas, the Tanais of Ptolomy and other antients, because situate on the mouth of that River, or rather betwixt the two mouths of it, distant from one another a degree of Longitude. A town of great trade, and well frequented by the Merchants of all those Countries which border on the Euxine Sea: but subject to the Turks who hath there a Garrison, and by them called Azac. 7. In∣germenum, situate on a large and losty Mountain, and fortified with a Tower or Castle of stone, under which there is a Church, with great charge and Art cut out of the Rock: formerly of great wealth and fame, now decaied and ruinous. 8. Jamboli, by some called Balachium. 9. Mancopia, by the Turks called M••ngutum, 10. Circum; all boasting of their severall Castles. 11. Oczakow, or Oc∣z••••covia, situate neer the influx of the great River Borysth••nes into the Bay of Carcimitis; and so most like to be built in the place of that which Ptolomy calleth Olbiah, Pliny, Olbiopolis. Honoured of late times (since the taking of Taurica by the Turks) with the residence of the great Cham: from whence these 〈◊〉〈◊〉 are by some called Olsanenses. 12. Metropolis as Ptolomy, or rather M••letopolis as Pl••ny calleth it; a Colony in old times of the Milesians, not farre from Olbia. Besides all which, and many others mentioned by the antient Writers of which there is nothing now remaining; the Court of the great 〈◊〉〈◊〉 in Summer time makes a moveable City; built upon Wheel-houses, and transported from one place to another, as occasion serveth: which houses at every station are orderly disposed of into Streets, and lanes, and by the Tartars are called Agara, or a Town of Carts.

The antient Inhabitants hereof were of Scythian race; for by that name some elder writers call not one∣ly the true and proper Scythians lying on both sides of Imaus; but even the Sauromatae or Sarmatians also; and those not onely of Sa••matia Asiatica bordering next unto them, but even such Europaean nations, as lived on the Northern banks of Ister, and the Euxine Sea. And so they are affirmed to be by Ptolomy himslf, though otherwise more exact than any in distinguishing Sarmatia Europaea from Asiatica; and Asi∣atica from the Scythians For speaking of the Nations of Sarmatia Europaea, inhabiting on the Palus Moe∣otis, he ranks them thus. 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, &c. i. e. And all along the coasts of Moeotis, dwell the Iazyges (distinct from those called Metanastae) and the Rhoxolani; and more within the land, the Hamaxobii and Alani, Scythians. More towards the banks of the Euxine, and in the Chers••nese it self, dwell the antient Tauri, subdivided into the se∣verall Nations of the Sin••hi, Napaei, and Arinchi, by the said Ptolomy included in the general name of ••au••o Sovt••. To none but these of all the Europaean Sarmatians doth he give this name. And there∣fore I conceive them to have been those Scythians against whom Darius Kings of Persia made his fruitless warre. Picking a quarrell with this people, because their King had denied to give him one of his daugh∣ters to wife; or to revenge, as others more improbably say, the inrode which the Scythians formerly had made into Asia; he drew together an army of 700. thousand. Passing over the Thracian Bosphorus, he came at last to the banks of the Ister, where it parteth Moldavia and Bulgaria; and there for the passage of his men caused a bridge to be built; to the keepers whereof he left a Cord of 60. knots: commanding them every day to untie one knot, and if he came not back before all were united, to return to their houses. This done he marched towards his enemies, who still fled before him; leading him into the most desert and unhabitable parts of their Countrey: and when they had brought him into a streight, sent Ambassadours to him with a bird, a mouse, a ••rog, and an handfull of Arrows; willing the Persians, if they could, to expound that Radle. Darius willing to hope the best of his design, conjectured that the Scythians did submit unto him, by delivering into his hands their Air, Earth, Water, and Arms, Hierog••yphi∣call signified in their present. But Gobrias, one of the seven Princes made this exposition, that if the Persians could not flie like a bird thorow the air, or like a mouse creep under the earth, or like a frog swim over the water, they could by no means scape the Persian Arrows. And to say truth this Com∣mentary best agreed with the Text. For these Scythians following close upon him, or rather driving him before them, and vex••••g him with continuall skirmishes, forced him to make such hast to get over the River, that he lost 80000 of his men in the sight and flight. This was the onely memorable Action of these Europaean Scythians in those elder ages: more memorable in the times succeeding for their horrid cruelty, than any argument of their valour. For it is said of these Tauri, or Tauro Scythae, that for the pleasing of their Gods, especially of 〈◊〉〈◊〉 whom they called Orsiloche, they used to sacrifise all such strangers as they could lay hands on, and with their heads most barbarously adorned the walls of her Temples. An inhu∣manity with which the Christian Advocates of the Primitive times, did much use to upbraid the Gentiles; taunting them with the sacrifices of Diana Taurica (so named from hence) as inconsistent with the nature of a God or goodness: most rightly giving them this brand or censure, that they were not sacra, but Sacrilegia. 〈◊〉〈◊〉 〈◊〉〈◊〉 〈◊〉〈◊〉 〈◊〉〈◊〉 〈◊〉〈◊〉 Better it was to be of no Religion, than of one so cruel.

But to go forwards with the story, in the actions of the Greeks and Romans we hear nothing of them,

unless it were that the Emperour Trajan (as Florus seems to intimate) took the City of Taphre. Which if he did, he added by that action somewhat to his own honour, but nothing to the Roman Empire: this people being never reckoned amongst their Provinces. Nor hear we any thing by name of their infesting the Roman territories (as the other barbarous Nations did) except they passed in the account of the 〈◊〉〈◊〉 Alani, Hunnes, Avares, or other of the Scythian or Sarmatian people, by which the majesty of that Empire was trod under foot. But what the Persians, Greeks, and Romans were not able to do, was with ease effected by the Tartars: who in the time of Joccatha, or Hoccata, the next to Cingis, under the conduct of Bathu, or Roydo, one of their most renowned Commanders, subdued all these parts, together with Russia, on the North Bulgaria, and Hungarie on the East. Subject at first to the com∣mand of the Great Cham of Cathaia, as the rest of the Tartarians were, they came at last to have a Prince of their own; one L••chtan Cham, descended from the aforesaid Bathu, and (as it was pretended) of the blood of Cingis. They grew at last of so great power by conquering the Asiatick Tartars which lay neerest to them, that Mahomet the Great thought fit to keep them down before grown too strong for him: and therefore under colour of taking in the City of Capha, then possessed by the Genoese, made himself master of the greatest part of the Taurican Chersonese, and the Port of Tanais; thereby commanding both Moeotis and the Enxine Sea. In the time of Selimus the first, who had maryed a daughter of this Crim-Tartar (for so they call him) and was aided by him with an Army of 15000 men against his Fa∣ther; the Turks and these Tartarians grew into a League. The chief conditions of it were, that the Tar∣tar should aid the Turk upon all occasions, with 60000 horse, if it were required; that they shall not make war with any of their neighbours, (except the Moscovite) without leave of the Turk; that they shall pay yearly to the Grand Signieur in the way of tribute 300 Christians; that the new Cham, upon the death or deposition of his Predecessor, shall receive from the Great Turk a Royall Banner in token of his Confirmation in that estate: that in reward of these services the Crim-Tartar shall have yearly from the Grand Signieur 5500 Ducates in the way of pension; and succeed finally in the Turkish Empire, if ever the male issue of the house of Ottoman should chance to fail. According unto this agreement the Tartars have been aiding to the Turks from time to time against the Persians, Polanders, Hungarians, Mol∣davians, and indeed whom not, and that with great and puissant Armies, the Great Cham sometimes arming 150000 of his own Subjects (leaving but one man in an house to attend their cattel) and some∣times adding 50000 Circassians, and others of the Asian Tartars. And for the Moscovite, whom he is left at liberty to assault by this Capitulation; he hath had so hard an hand upon him, that in the year 1571 they pierced as far as to the City of Mosco, and set fire on the Suburbs: which flaming into the Ci∣ty built most of wood, and then reckoned to be 30 miles in compass, within the space of four hours burnt the greatest part of it, and therein no fewer than 800000 of all sorts of people: A quarrel not to be com∣posed, the Tartar not only laying claim to the Kingdomes of Casan and Astrachan, which the Russe possesseth; but even to Moscovie it self, as hath there been shewn. Nothing so punctuall is the Turk on his part, to perform the contract, who not content to have the Tartar for his friend, or at the worst his Homager, hath of late times attempted to make him his slave or Vassall. For Amurath the third, quar∣relling Mahomet the Crim-Tartar for a design to intercept Osman Bassa in his way from Persia to Constantinople; authorised the said Osman to war upon him: by whom the poor Crim and his two sonnes, betrayed by some of his own Counsellers (corrupted with Turkish Gold) were strangled with a Bow-string; Islan a brother of the Crims, first sworn a Vassall to the Turk, put into the place; and over him a Tur∣kish Beglerbeg or Bassa to command in chief. What hopes he hath of succeeding in the Turkish Empire, if the house of O••toman should fail, hath been already taken into consideration, in our discourse upon that subject.

What the Revenue of this Prince is, it is hard to say; his subjects having little money, and living most upon the bartery of their Cattel. But besides what he hath in Lands or customes, and the 5500 Ducats yearly which he receiveth from the Turk; he hath the tenth of all the spoils which are got in the warres, and a Checkine for every Captive, for some two or three (whosoever taketh them) according unto their estates.

As for his power, what he can do in horse we have seen already; And as for foot, and Ammuniti∣on, and other necessaries, he is supplied with them by the Turk, (who doth sometimes espouse his quarrels) by whose assistance they have brought the Moscovites to some extremities. And upon confi∣dence of the favour and protection of the Grand Signieur, the Cham then being, upon the death of Ste∣phen Bathori (whom Amurath the 3d. commended to the Crown of Poland) sent Ambassadours to negotiate his election to that Kingdome: and to induce them thereunto promised them in his letters a∣mongst other things, that their Pope should be his Pope, their Luther his Luther; and that rather than put them unto any charge to find his Table, he could live with Horse-flesh. His Embassie entertained with Laughter, as it well deserved.

2. TARTARIA DESERTA.

TARTARIA DESERTA is bounded on the West, with Precopensis, and the Empire of Russia; on the East, with Antiqua and Zagathay, from which last parted by the River Spane, which falleth into the Caspian Sea about the middle of it, and the great Lake of Kitay, from East to west; on the North, with the Scythick or frozen Ocean; and on the South, with part of the Euxine Sea, the Caucasian Mountains, and some part of the Caspian.

It took this name from the many Desarts which are in it, and is called also Asiatica, to difference

it from Pre••opensis, which is wholly in Europe: or because it taketh up the whole Continent of Sar∣matia Asiatica, according to the bounds thereof laid down by Ptolomy, except some part hereof incorporated to the Russian Empire.

The Countrey of it self sufficiently fruitful, if well mannured; and were it in the hands of a laborious and industrious people, would yield large increase: as appears by the ill husbandry of the Tartars, who sow nothing on it but Mill and Puateum (grains unknown to us) and that without giving it any ••llage, receive very plentiful returns of both. But the Tartar being a Nation that hateth Agriculture, and laugheth at Christian for living on the tops of Reeds, (so they call our bread) neglect all that which is not of a rank pasture for their Herds and Cattell; moving from one place to another as the grass faileth them; which maketh it so full of Desarts, and so empty of Towns, as to deserve the name of Tartarta Deserta.

The people or Inhabitants of it are of severall sorts; derived from three severall Originalls, and dis∣posed of in three severall parts. 1. The Samoyede, dwelling towards the Northern Ocean, who are wholly Idolaters. 2. the Circassians, bordering on the Euxine, for the most part Christians; and 3. the Tartars, planted betwixt both, being all Mahometans. These again subdivided into severall Tribes, which they call their Hordes, of which the most considerable are, 1. the Nagaian Tartars, 2. the Zavalhanses, 3. the Thumenenses, 4. the Kirgessi: besides the Hordes or Kingdomes of Ca∣san and Astrachan added unto the Empire of Russia, where described already; and others of inferi∣our note, not here considerable.

But before we come to speak of these people in their severall places, we must first look upon the whole Countrey as presented to us under the name of Sarmatia Asiatica: bounded by Ptolomy as before, save that it did extend more Westwards, and was unknown to him in the Northern parts of it; now possessed by the Moscovite. So populous in the time of that Author, that he giveth us the names of fourty severall Nations which did then inhabit it, and of about as many Towns of good estimation. Of which there are few or none remaining: and for the names of some of the principall of them, we shall have them presently.

Rivers of most note in it, 1. Marabius, 2. Rhombitus the Greater, and 3. the Less; 4. Au∣ticus, 5. Theophanius, 6. Psathis, 7 Thesyris, 8. Corax, and 9. Vardanes; all of them falling into the Euxine, and Moeotick Fennes. 10. Udonis, 11. Alnuta, and 12. Rha, paying their tri∣butes to the Caspian or Hrrcanian Sea. Of these the principall is Rha, by the modern Latines cal∣led Volgo, by the Tartars Edi, rising in Russia, not far from the City of Mosco, (where we have described it). Most memorable, besides the seventy mouths or Channels, wherewith it openeth into the Caspian, for a medicinable and wholesome root growing on both sides thereof, which the Physici∣ans call Rha, by the name of the River, and for distinctions sake Rha Pontick, to difference it from Rhubarb, or Rha Barbarum, as of a different nature from it, this last being purgative, and the other more apt to bind. 13. Ob, a River unknown to Ptolomy, rising out of the lake of Kitay, a Lake in bigness like the Sea, and full of many little Ilands (most of them inhabited). Which River at its first parting from this Lake is said to be of 8 miles breadth; and growing still bigger and bigger, emp∣tieth it self at last in the Northern Ocean, the present boundary betwixt the Russian and the people in the North of this Countrey.

Principall Mountains of this part, 1. Corax, giving name unto the River issuing out of it. 2. Montes Hippici, extended towards the Caspian Sea. 3. Montes Ceraunii, lying in the furthest parts hereof (then known unto my Author) to the North and East. 4. Caucasus, or Caucasii Montes, extend∣ed from the Euxine to the Cuspian Seas, and parting Sarmatia Asiatica from Colchis, Iberia, and Albania. A chain of hills of which Aristotle saith, acumine & latitudine omnium maximi, &c. that for height and breadth they are the greatest of the East, the tops whereof are lightned by the Sun-beams in midnight till almost day-break, when it is dark-night in the valleys beneath. Not passable for horse or foot (except they creep along by the Euxine shore) but at one place onely, called Sarmatiae Pylae, or the Gates of Sarmatia; by others named Caucasie Portae, from the hills adjoining. Situate in the 81 degree of Latitude; and not far from the Caspian Sea: but that so intricate and narrow, that very small force may keep it against strong Armies. So carefully did Almighty God in his heavenly Providence, shut up this fierce and barbarous people, from the rest of Mankind, by such unfordable Waters, and impassable Mountains: not to be freed out of their prison, till he thought good to use them, as the executioners of his wrath and vengeance, for the punishment of sinful and impenitent Na∣tions. This said, we will consider those particular Nations, which before we named, and are now possessed of it in their several places.

1. Opposite to the Preco••enses lie the CIRCASSIANS, extended from the Cimme∣rian Bosphorus and the Fennes of Maeotis, towards the Eastern shores of the Euxine Sea, for the space of 500 miles, and reaching 200 miles towards the North. The name imposed on them by the Tartars; where∣as before, they were called by Pliny, Zigae, by some writers Zychi, conceived to be the Zinchi of Ptolomy.

The Countrie very fitly seated for trade and merchandise, as having a fair and large Sea-coast, with many Rivers opening into it (nine of those spoken of before passing thorow these tracts) and not a few capacious Baies, and commodious Havens. Of which the principall were Sinus Cerceticus, or the Bay of Cercetis, Syndi, and Bata two known Havens, and specified by my Author with the adjunct of Portus. But these conveniences not much looked after by the present Inhabitants, who are more inclined to the warres, than to trades, or merchandise. A stout and military people, trained to their weapons

from their child-hood; and sold as soon as trained to it by unnaturall Parents. For from these parts did the Mamalucks of Egypt fetch their first Originall; from hence supply themselves with a perpetuall Seminary of slaves and Souldiers, raised by degrees unto the highest dignities of that slavish Empire. And from these parts the Persian Sophies are supplied with their Cozzel-Bassas, disciplined and instructed by them like the Turkish Janizaries.

The Christian faith was here planted in the year 860 or thereabouts, by the Ministry of Cyrill (or Chiarill) and Methodius, employed in that service by the Patriarch of Constantinople. In which respect their Churches are of the Greek Communion, conform thereto in rites and doctrine, and of the jurisdicti∣on of that Patriarch: but differing from them very much in matters practicall. For it is ordinary with these half Christians not to baptize their children till eight years old; to hear divine service standing with∣out their Churches, into which they very seldome enter (especially the Gentlemen) till the 40th. or (as some say) the 60th. year of their age: dividing the whole course of their life betwixt God and the Devil, in dedicating their youth unto theft and Robbery, their old Age (when they can no longer commit those villanies) to the difficult business of repentance.

Places of most observation amongst the Antients, 1. Cimmerium, a Town and Promontory, so cal∣led from the Cimmerii, once the chief people of these parts; of whom more anon; situate on the very shore of the Bosphorus, from hence denominated. 2. Phanagoria, in old times a well-traded Empory; situate on a litle Iland raised out of the Sea by the care and industry of the Greeks, who had here a Fa∣ctory. 3. Apathurgus, by Pliny called Apaturum, memorable for a Temple of Venus surnamed Apa∣turia (which name she gave unto this place) because (saith Strabo) when the Giants assaulted her, she craved help of Hercules, who slew them all one after another. 4. Gerusa, by Ptolomy honoured with the title of Civitas; the Gargaza of Diodorus, now called Saint Georges. 5. Oenuntia, neer the mouth of the River Thesyris. 6. Araza, more within the land, which with 7. Ampsacis, hath the name of a City also. The name of their chief Havens we have seen before. But few of these or any other mentioned by the antient Authors, being now visible in their ruins: the chief of those which are now extant are 1. Lo∣coppa, 2. Conioco; but of no great note.

The people antiently though divided into the severall Tribes of the Thyrsagetae, Zigae, Turcae, the Hunnes, Avares, and Moeotae, all noted Nations; besides the Coaxtrae, Zinchi, Tyrambae, Pselii, and others as obscure as they: were better known by the name of Cimmerians, in which those seve∣ral tribes concentred. Descended in the right of that common originall from Gomer the sonne of Japhet, first planted in the mountainous places of Albania: his posterity known by the name of Gomerii, after∣wards Cimmerii, left there a memorial of themselves in the mountains called Cimmerini. But that Coun∣try proving both too barren, and too narrow for them, some of them passed into Phrygia Major, where they built the City Cimmeris, not unknown to Pliny, in whose time it was extant: and others in some tract of time keeping the Euxine on their left hand fixed themselves in these parts, here giving name to the Town and Promontory Cimmerion, to the Cimmerian Besphorus, and generally to all the people descended of them. From these particularly as the stout and valiant Nation of the Cimbri do derive their Pedegree; so from these and the children of Mesech, Magog, and Tubal, the Sarmatians both of Europe and A∣sia, the Moscovites, and perhaps the Scythians, are to fetch their Originall: all of them great and pu∣isant Nations, and all involved promiscuously in the name of the Scythians. Renowned for no other a∣ction more than the memorable expedition which they made into Media in the Greater, and Lydia in the Lesser Asia: the Cimmerians by themselves alone, or by them as principall the rest of these Sarmatians in a body together as a Scythian People. Distressed with want, or to disburden their small Countrey of superfluous multitudes, these Cimmerii in the time of Nabulassar, or Salmanassar King of Assyria, com∣municating their design with the rest of the Scythians to enlarge their quarters, holding along the course of the Euxine Sea, and passing thorow the Countrey of Colchis, first seized on some parts of Pont us and Paphlagonia. Where having fortified the Promontory on which Sinope was after built, and leaving there their carriages and the weakest of their train with sufficient guards, they marched into Lydia, reputed (as it was indeed) for a wealthy Region. There they possessed themselves of Sardis, the royall City, and after of the rest of the Countrey or the most part of it; Ardis, the sonne of Giges, who then reigned in Ly∣dia, not being able to withstand them. Both besides being wearied with long warre, and grown more pliant by degrees unto one another (as in like case betwixt the Saxons and the Danes) it proved no difficult matter for Halyattes, the grand-child of Ardis, to compound the business: assigning to the Cimmeri∣ans all those parts of his dominions which lay beyond the River Halys, and setling his Lydians in the rest. By this transaction there were so good correspondences betwixt the Nations, that when Cyaxares, King of the Medes, invaded the Countrey of these Cimmerians, under colour of the invasion which the Sey∣thians had made in Media; Halyattes did espouse the quarrell, and appeared in their aid. In following times, growing into confidence of one another, and mixt in mariages and blood they became one people; or at least passed not under the accompt of strangers, or the name of Aliens. Such end had this most no∣table expedition of these Cimmerians; not much remembred after this for the like undertakings. Yet here they held their own, though in other names, governed by many petit Princes, but all associated with Mi∣thridates against the Romans: that King being so great amongst them, that his sonne Machares, having maried into some of their families, was made King of Bosphorus. But Machares having made his peace with Lucullus, the Romans never looked this way. Nor hear we much of them in succeeding times till the invasion of the Tartars, by whom subdued, they acknowledged at first the Great Cham for their So∣veraign Lord: whose power declining, they have successively been subject to the Crim-Tartar, the Turk, and Moscovite, but most commonly to the Crim-Tartar as their neerest neighbour and most able to hurt

them. And him they furnish on command with 50000 horse for the Grand Signeurs service: yet so that they supply the Persian with his Cozzel-Bassas, and sometimes serve under him for pay, as they do under any which will entertain them. Governed like the Suissers, by their severall Commonalties, yet so, that every Commonal••y hath some principall man (which the Switzers have not) whom they call Morseys, (that is Dukes) to direct and order them.

2. Betwixt these and the River Volga dwell the ZAVOLHENSES, one of the greatest Hords or Tribes, of all the Tartars; and therefore called Horda Magna. Of these the Crims, or Precopenses were a Castling onely, proceeding out of this great Swarm or Nest of Hornetts, though after∣wards they became their masters. Of the Countrey or the People we say nothing here: having sufficiently spoken of both already. Their chief Town hath the name of Bo'gar, situate on the River Volga, and from thence so named: Volgar, and Bolgar differing but litle in Orthographie, and not much in sound.

This Countrey, as I take it by the situation, should be that which Ptolomy calleth Mithridat is Regio: whether so called in honour of him by the Princes of the neighbouring Cimmerians, with whom he had contracted alliance; or that he had made any conquests there; or from some other Prince of the same name; I determine not. And in this tract were those two Pillars advanced unto the honour of Alexander, in Ptolomy called Columnoe Alexandri, in whose time they stood without defacement: there being also Al∣tars erected to him, or in memory of him, neer the Banks of Tanais; occuring in the same Author by the name of A••oe Alexandri. Which probably occasioned the error of Qu. Curtius, who brings Alexander in pursuit of the Scythian warre, as farre as Tanais: whereas it is apparent by the course of his actions, that he never got beyond the River Iaxartes; distant from Tanais no less than 2000 miles.

This Tribe first governed by its own King, whom they called Vlu-Cham, or the Great Cham, was in the year 1506. subdued by the Crim-Tartar, and made subject to him. Afterwards conquered by Basilius the Great Duke of Mos••ovy, who thereupon assumed the title of King of Bolgar, which his Successors still preserve, with the Town it self; well garrisoned to keep open the whole course of the Ri∣ver Volga, by which they mannage the great trade of the Caspian Sea. But for the main body of this peo∣ple, they returned again to their obedience to the Crim••, as being a limb of the same body with him, and are subject unto his commands: though by reason of their neighbourhood to the Moscovite, and com∣merce with that Nation, they frame themselves both to their language, habit, and behaviour.

3. East of the Zavolhenses, on the other side of the Volga, dwell the NOIHACENSES, or NAGAIANS, spreading as far as the borders of Zagathay, and declining Southward towards the Caspian Sea, and the Montes Hippici. Accompted the best men of war of all the Tartars, but more fierce and cruell than the rest: void of all Arts, not having, or contemning, money, or the use of Corn. Horse-flesh and Mares Milk, their best diet; the flesh either rosted by the Sun, or heated by continuall hanging at their sadle-bow. And with such cheer (nor worse nor better) did Azim Can, one of the Princes of this Tribe, entertain Jenkinson and other English men in their travells to the Caspian from the River Volga. Their chief Town, if possibly it deserve that name, is called Scharayirzik, the Residence of one of their Princes; and the next, Sellisture, where the said Jenkinson found the Cham, as in the prime place of his abode. The Government is by severall Morseys, the Heads or Chiefs, no doubt, of their severall Clans: agreeing well enough together against the Moscovite, whom they infest with fre∣quent inrodes, and put him to the charge of continual Garrisons, at Casan, Astrachan, and Wiatra. Their warres for the most part only proedatorie, rather to get some present booty, than out of any hope to enlarge their dominion: and therefore commonly pacifyed, and sent home with presents. The Great Duke is so good a Statesman, as to think the expence of money cheaper than that of blood; especially when he hath to deal with such an Enemy, who hath neit her any Town of consequence, or fixt place of dwel∣ling, and consequently nothing to be got but blowes. Their Morseys, formerly more in number, were of late times reduced unto three; of which he of Scharayick was the Chief; to whose direction, and ap∣pointment (especially in matters which concerned the publick) the other two do commonly submit them∣selves.

4. Betwixt these Nagaians, and the Circassians, lie those Tribes which they call the KIR∣GESSI, spreading as far as to the mouths or influx of the River Volga: but intermixt with the Hese∣lites, and Baschurides, two other of the Tartarian Tribes, but of less power. Their life, for the most part in continuall motion, removing with their wives and families from one place to another; and govern∣ing themselves in their removes, by the sight of the Pole-star. Partly Mahometan, partly Gentile; but the Gentiles make the greater number, not burying their dead bodies, as in other places, but hanging them upon a tree, though they stink again: certain enough that they will be devoured or sweetned, before they return back to the same Station. Much reverence yet they give their Priests, by whom sanctified & besprinkl∣ed in their publick meetings with a certain mixture compounded of blood, milk, earth, and Cow-dung. A most sweet confection, but good enough for them that desire no better. And yet with these the Mos∣covite is fain to hold faire compliance, and to send them every year some presents, for fear they should joyn with the Nagatans, or otherwise disturb him in his Caspian Trade down the River Volga.

5. The THVMENSES or THVMENTARTARS lie more North than any of these Tartarians; having on the South, the Zavolhenses, and the territory of Viat∣ka in the Empire of Russia. A warlike people, and living neer a dangerous neighbour: for which cause they do not straggle so abroad in petit companies, as the others do, but keep together in great bodies. For the most part much delighted in Negromancy and conjurations. In which the devill so befools them, that he suffereth them to raise tempests, and sometimes by Diabolicaell illusions to defeat their enemies.

The only Hord of all Deserta, which still continue in obedience to their natural Lord the great Cham of Cathay. And unto these we may adjoin the Molgomozans, all Gentiles, and the most barbarous of all; living in Caves, and feeding upon worms, and mice, and Serpents, and such other Vermine, as would be poison unto any but such Molgomozans, who are more poisonous than those creatures.

These Hords, together with the Kingdomes of Casan, and Astrachan, and such of the Russian Pro∣vinces as lie on the East of Tanais and the River Duina, make up that Countrey which antiently passed un∣der the name of Sarmatia Asiatica: inhabited originally, by the Descendants of Gomer, Mesech, Tu∣bal, Magog, the sonnes of Japhet, spreading themselves more Northwards as they grew in numbers, out of Aloania, Iberia, Colchis, and the Pontick or Cimmerian Nations. Divided into the Tribes or Families of the Olandae; Gerri, Samocolchi; Sovani, Seci, Scim••itoe, Agaritae, Merdi, Conap∣seni, Chaenides, Basilici; Hyperborei, H••pp••phagi, and others of as little note: these last so called from their eating of horses, which dyet they have left unto their Successours. So like in manners and con∣ditions to the neighbouring Scythians, that they passed commonly by that name: and by that name are memorable for the expedition by them made into Asia the Greater, at such time as the Cimmerians fell into Asia Minor. For passing without opposition thorow the Sarmatian Streights, where they might have been easily kept out, and leaving behind them the more barren Countrey of Albania, they fell into Media, where they were incountred, but victorious, by Phraartes, then King of the Medes. Who finding that he was not able to remove them by force, assayed it by cunning; and first perswaded them to look towards the South, as into richer Countries, and more like to yield them full content. Hereupon, full of prey and presents, they marched towards Aegypt, out were met in Syria by Psamniticus the Aegyptian King, who had heard of their comming, and thought it best to entertain them on the way, and not to bid them welcome at home to his greater cost. Out-vying the Median (as of the two the richer Prince) he loaded them with gifts and treasure, and so sent them back again into Media; from whence they came: where for many years they afflicted that people and the neighbouring Provinces, doubling their tributes, and u∣sing all kind of insolencies: till in the end, Cy••xares, the sonne and Successour of Phraartes, acquain∣ting some of his most faithful subjects with his design, caused the better part of them to be plentifully fea∣sted, made them druak, and slew them; recovering thereby the possession of his whole estate. Afterwards, imitated by the English in their Hock-tide slaughter. Such of them as escaped this blow, and were not willing to be subject to the Kings of Media (as many of them were) were suffered to return home by the same way they came, where at their coming, they found foul work made by their wives and their slaves, the story whereof we had when we were in Russia. After this we hear nothing of them in the stories of the Greeks and Romans, unless those Amazon:, who attended their Queen Thalestris, when she bestowed a visit on Alexander, were rather of these Sarmarian Amazon:, than of those of Pontus and Thermo∣don, as I think they were: the neerness of their dwelling to Hyrcania, in which place they found him, inducing me to this opinion. But possible enough it is, (though it be not certain) that some of these Sarmatian tribes, though by other names, hearing of the successes of the Hunnes, Avares, and other barbarous nations which made havock of the Roman Empire; might join themselves unto them, and make up their numbers: those nations being else two small to compound such Armies, as by them were brought into the field against the Romans, with out such like helps. What their estate hath been since sub∣dued by the Tartars, hath been shewn already.

3. ZAGATHAY.

ZAGATHAY is bounded on the East, with the Mountain Imaus, by which it is parted from Cathay; on the North, with the main Scythick or Frozen Ocean; on the West, with Tarta∣ria Deserta, from which separated by the River Soane, and the Lake of Kitay; and on the South, with the Caspian Sea, and the River Oxus, by which divided from the Empire of Persia. So called from Zigathay, a brother of one of the Great Chams, on whom it was conferred for his better main∣tenance; the Scythia intra montem Imaum, of the antient writers.

The Countrey spreading out so far, on all sides; as before appeareth, comprehendeth all those Pro∣vinces and tracts of ground, which angiently were called 1. the Countrey of the Sacae, 2. Sogdiana, 3. Zagathay, specially so called, 4. Turchestan; included antiently in the name of Scythia intra montem Imaum; and 5. the Terra incognita which Ptolomy makes to be the Northern boundarie of that part of Scythia. By taking a survey of all which particulars, we shall find the temper of the whole.

1. SACAE, or the Countrey of the Sacans, is bounded on the East, with the mountain Imaus; on the West, with Sogdiana; on the North, with Zagathay, properly and specially so called; on the South, with the River Oxus, by which parted from Bactria. So called from the Sacae, the Inhabitants of it; but the reason of their name I find not.

The Countrey antiently either barren, or ill manured; full of vast Forests, wide Desarts, and the like unhabitable places. Few or no Cities in it, and not many villages (civitates autem non habent, as my Author hath it) the people living for the most part in Caves, or otherwise wandring up and down with their droves of cattel. Called for that reason Nomades by some antient writers. The name not proper to these onely, but common to all those who followed the like roving life, as the Sarmatians, wild Arabians, Saracens, and the Inhabitants of Libya and Numidia in Africk. Onely one fortified place they had, which from the materials of it had the name of Turris Lapidea, (〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, in the Greek) or the Castle of Stones; Part hereof being peopled for the most part by Camels, or travellable onely with those Creatures, had the name of Camelorum Regio.

Divided it was antiently into many Tribes, the Caratoe, and Comari, neer the River Jaxartes; the Mas∣sagetae, and Comedoe, neer the hills called Ascatanas; the Bylcae and Grynaei, more within the Country. All joined in one by the name of Sacae; and by that name made a very fortunate Progress into Armoniae (to which they had an easie passage by the Northern banks of the Caspian Sea) and therein gave name unto the Province called Sacasena. But proceeding into Cappadocia, and there slain by the Persians in the middest of their Feastings, they left there also some resemblance of their name, in an annuall festivall cal∣led Sarea, celebrated by the Persians in memoriall of their good success in the warre against them. Such as stayd here, being overcome by Cyrus the first Persian Monarch, did so good service to that Prince, that Amorges the King of these Sacoe, is said to have rescued him from the hands of the Scythians, by whom otherwise he had been slain, or taken Prisoner. In the declining of that Kingdome, they were subdued by Alexander at the end of his Scythian, and Sogdian warres; who hereabouts, by Cobortanes a noble Per∣sian, was presented with a Bevy of beautifull Ladies, one of the which was that Barsine whom he made his wise, and had by her that Hercules, whom Polysperchon and his faction proclamed King of Macedon. Not memorable in the following times for any thing which they did or suffered; as they have been made by the opinion or mistake of others. Who building Castles in the Air, will needs derive the Saxons (our famous Ancestors) from this Originall: as if they were called Saxons, quasi Sac-sonnes, or the sonnes of Sacae. A fancy in my poor conceit, of no ground at all. For either the number of these Sacae, when they left these parts, must be great, or little. I little, how can we conceive it possible they should force their way thorough those valiant Nations of both Sarmatias; who to the last maintained their liberties and estate against the Romans. If great enough to force their passage (for stout and provident Nations use not to give passage to great Armies, but they pay dear for it) how can we think it possible they should be shut up in a corner of Germany, betwixt the River Albis and the Cimbrick Chersonees. The Saxons then, whatsoever they were, were no sonnes of the Sacae; and what in likelihood they were hath been elsewhere shewn.

2. SOGDIANA hath on the East, the Sacoe; on the North and West, Zagathay specially so called; on the South, the River Oxus, parting it from Margiana. So called from a cha in of Mountains named Montes Sogdii, being the chief of all this Countrey, though of themselves a spurre or branch of the Mountain Caucasus.

The Countrey indifferently fruitfull, and very rich in pasturage, because very well watered. For besides Oxus and Jaxartes, which are common unto them and others; they have many Rivers of their own. The principal of which, 1. Dymus, and 2. Araxates, both navigable and capable of very good ships; both also running down the hills with a headlong course, and passing thorough the champain Countrey, empty themselves at last in the lake called Oxiana; as is affirmed by Ammianus, but as Ptolo∣my faith, into Jaxartes.

Places of most consideration it, 1. Drepsa, the Metropolis or mother-City of this people. By Pli∣ny called Panda, by Solinus Darapsa; situate on the River Oxus. 2. Oxiana, on the same River, and from thence denominated. 3. Maruca, on the same River also. 4. Alexandria, called for di∣stinctions sake, Alexandria Oxianoe; which name declareth both the founder and the situation. 5. A∣lexandria, for the same cause of distinction, named Alexandria ultima: either because the last City which he built in these parts, or because it lay furthest off on the borders of the Scythians; against whose in∣vasions or irruptions it was said to be built. 6. Tribarra, one of the chief hereof in the time of Am∣mianus Marcellinus. 7. Cyroschata, more memorable, and not less antient, than any of those named before, by Qu. Curtius called Cyropolis, built by Cyrus, to fortifie his borders against the Scythians. It held out against the great Macedonian, a long time: and he himself comming nigher to the wells, than discretion would permit an ordinary Generall, had such a blow on the neck with a stone, that he fell to the ground, his eyes swimming in his head, and his whole Army giving him for slain. But reviving he took the Town by a mine, and levell'd it with the ground, in revenge of so great a danger.

The antient Inhabitants hereof were the Oxydracoe, and Candari, dwelling at the foot of the Sogdian mountains; the Oxiani, and Cherasmii, neer the banks of Oxus; the Jasii, and Tachori, neer the River Jaxartes; the Drepsiani in the East parts bordering on the Sacoe; whose chief City was Drepsa: descen∣ded from their severall roots, but all called Sogdians. Conquered by Alexander, not without danger to his own person, as before was said, at the sollicitation of Spitamenes a noble Persian, it rebelled a∣gain. Who being suppressed, and the Countrey in some measure quieted, Arimazes, a native of the Province, renewed the war. Who followed with 30000 men, encamped upon the top of an hill, in a place of such notable advantage, that Alexander, neither by force nor fair words, could get him out of it. He therefore dealt with 300 of his youngest and most active men, on the promise of great reward, to climb the hill, and without any noise to shew themselves at the back of the Enemy. Which having performed with the loss of 30 of their company, Alexander sent one Cophes to Arimazes, to let him know that the whole Army of Macedon was at his back: who terrified with what he saw, more with what he feared, gave up the place, and was scourged and crucified for his labour. So necessary in the Art of warre-fare is a peece of wit. After this time, it ran the same alterations and change of fortunes, as the Persians did; till they were conquered by the Tartars, unto whom still subject.

3. ZAGATHAY specially so called, is bounded on the East, with Cathay; on the West, with Turchestan, and part of the Caspian Sea; on the North, with the Countrey of the Samoyeds, the Terra In∣cognita of the Antients; on the South, with the Sacae, and Sogdiana. Antiently part of Scythia intra montem Imaum, and took this new name from Zagathay, the first Prince hereof since the time of the Tartars.

The Countrey reasonably fruitfull, but not so rich in the naturall temper of the soyl, as the industrious∣ness of the people, more civill farre than any other of the Tartars; studious of good letters, lovers of Arts as well ingenious as Mechanick; well skilled in manufactures, and very seldome without the con∣fluence of forein Merchants. Populous, and well-stored with towns and villages; both for their own more handsome dwelling, and the entertainment of others.

Chief Rivers of it, 1. Jaxartes, now called Chesel, the principal of all this Countrey: great of it self, but made much greater by the waters of 2. Daix, another River of good note, rising out of the moun∣tain called Norosus, and falling with many others into Jaxartes; mixt with whose streams they are dis∣channelled in the Caspian Sea. 3. Jartus, and 4. Polytimetas, falling into Oxus. Others there are whose names I find not in my Authors, descending from the mountains of this Northern Region, which are great and many. As viz. 1. Norosus, spoken of before. 2. Aspisii, on the North of that. 3. Toporus, more unto the North. 4. The mountains called Sychi, more Northward still. 5. Those called Anaroei, besides 6. Imaus, of most name, but common unto Cathay as well as to Zagathay.

Cities of most observation in it, 1. Aspabota, the only Town ascribed by Ptolomy to this Countrey, and by him honoured with the title of Civitas. 2. Zabaspia, of less antiquity, but of greater estimati∣on at the present time. Situate on the mouth of the River Oxus (now called Abias) on the brink of the Caspian, and much frequented by the Merchants of forein Countreys, chiefly from India, and Ca∣thay. 3. Marachanda, antient, and of fame, but placed by Ptolomy, (why I know not) amongst the Cities of Bact••ia: differing herein from the common and received opinion of other Authors, by whom this City is affi••med to be on the North side of Oxus, and consequently not within that Province. Made good by Spitamenes, (who having delivered the Traitor Bessus into the hands of Alexander, revolted from him) against the Macedonian Army; by which besieged under the command Menedemus. But Menedemus being slain, with some of his Souldiers, Spitamenes escaped hence to Bactria, where he was slain by his own wife, and his head presented to the Conqueror. Here was it also that Alexander, being then Master of the Town, in a drunken fit slew his dear friend Clyt••us, who at the battel of Granicus had saved his life, by receiving a blow which was aimed at him. It was afterwards called Samarch and, the seat-Royall of Tamerlane, by whom enriched with all the spoils and treasures he got in the wars; there being brought hither from Damascus only (and by that one instance we may guess at the rest) 8000 Cae∣mel•• laden with the choicest moveables. Still the chief Residence of the Chams of Zagathay, but farr short of that magnificence which once it held. 4. Bichend, of no Antiquity, nor of such great name as the Regall Samarchand, but at this time of greater wealth; situate somewhat in the midland, but popu∣lous, and a well-traded Town. 5. Azara, memorable for being made the Rendez••••us of that migh∣ty Army which Tamerlane raised against the Turks, consisting in the totall of 1200000 fighting men when it was at the biggest. 6. Maranis, from which place the said Tamerlane, having received his aids from China, began his march.

These Tartars, called Zagathayans, by the name of their Countrey, are of a different government from that of the Great Cham of Cathay, though subject to him at the first: and have so been ever since the time of Zaicham or Bathu, the third great Cham; who gave it unto Zagathay, a younger sonne, whence it had the name. To Zagathay succeeded Og, by some called Zain-Cham, (the Father of Tamer∣lane) a peaceable and quiet Prince, who rather studied to preserve than enlarge his Empire. But Tamer∣lane being of a fiercer and more warlike nature, made the first proof of his valour and good fortune against the Moscovite (for spoyling a City which had put it self under his protection) whom he overthrew with the slaughter of 25000 foot, and 15000 of his horse. Moved with this notable exploit, and the hopes of greater, Gino Cham, the great Emperor of the Tartars gave him to wife his onely daughter, and there∣withall declared him his heir apparent. Incouraged and inabled with this advancement he first brake down the wall of China, encountred with the King thereof, overcame him in battel, and imposed on him the summe of 300000 Crowns of yearly tribute. Having left things quiet at his back, and taking with him a great part of the forces of Chin••, he advanced forwards against B••••azet, the fourth King of the Turks; of the greatness of whose growing Empire he began to be jealous. Passing along the left-hand shores of the Caspian Sea, and so through Albania, and the rest of the Provinces which lay in his way (which he took and conquered as he went) he came at last into Asia Minor, where neer the City of Sebastia, he en∣countred with Bajazet, vanquished him; slew 200000 of his men, and carried him away captive in an iron Cage. Restoring those Princes dispossessed by Bajazet unto their estates, and taking to himself all the Turkish Provinces in Anatolia; he bestowed a ••••rivate visit on Constantinople, which seen, he marched to∣wards Syria, subdued both that Province and the Kingdome of Egypt, then possessed by the Ma••alucks; visited Hierusalem, and did honour to the holy Sepulchre; returned by Babylon, and won it, and with it the whole Countries of Babylonia and Assyria. And taking Persia in his way, impatronized himself of that Kingdome also; and such parts of India, as either lay neer Persia, or his own dominions: now made the Soveraign Lord of all the Regions and Kingdomes in both Asias, excepting the chief India; for which the rich Kingdome of Egypt may be put in balance. Come home at last to Samarchand, he there died in peace. A Prince of strong body, but lovely lineaments, his eyes bearing in them such raies of maje∣stie, that ordinary men could scarce endure to look upon them. His hair long, contrary to the custome of the Mahometans, (for the most part shaved on their heads) for which he pretended a descent from Samp∣son. Perfect in the Arabian learning, and a lover of all learned men, a hater of Idols, and Polytheism, and a great friend to the Christians. More fortunate in the conquering of so many Kingdomes, than in ••ay∣ing any sure foundation to maintain his conquests. For by holding his seat Royal in Samarchand, Camb••∣ln, and other the chief Cities of Cathay, he gave the remote Provinces the opportunity of returning to

their former Governours: and by parcelling his estates amongst his Children, and kindred, this mighty flood which had so quickly overflown both Asias, returned in very little time within its own proper and originall banks. Even Zagathay it self, divided from the Empire of Cathay, had its King apart (hardly acknowledging the great Cham for the Lord in chief) the most considerable of whom was that Saba, who in the new beginnings and unsetledness of the Sophian Empire, invaded Per∣sia: but instead of recovering that Kingdome into the power of the Tartars, he lost some Provinces of his own. Hyrcania, Margiana, and some part of Bactria, being since subdued by Abas the late Sultan. Nothing since memorable, that I meet with in the affairs of this part of the Empire of Tartary.

4. IVRCHESTAN is bounden on the East, with Zagathay specially so called; on the West, with the River So••ne, parting it from Deserta; on the North, with those desarts which Ptolomy blindeth under the name of 〈◊〉〈◊〉; and on the South, with the Caspian Sea. So called from the Turks, some of which people when they left their first Seats neer the Fennes of Moeotis, setled in this Country, and here still continue.

The Countrey as desert and ill planted, as the rest of Tartary, not so much out of any defect in the soyl it self, as in the humour of the people: who though originally Turks, do yet compose themselves unto the lives of the Scythian or Tartarian Nomades, neglecting tillage, and abiding in no place longer than that place affords them pasturage for their Cattell: huge herds of which they keep as their greatest treasure, but more to cloth their backs with the skinns, than to fill their Bellies with the flesh.

Amongst the Rivers of most note we may reckon, 1. Rhymnus, mentioned by Ptolomy, which by the position of it in the 91 degree of longitude, seems to be of this Tract. It riseth out of the mountains called Montes Rhymnici, giving name to the River, or taking name from it. 2. Ardock, not known by that name amongst the Antients, and whether known at all or not, I am not able to say. Shaping its course towards the North, and weary of so cold a clime, and such barbarous people, after a long and swift course of a thousand miles, it hideth it self under the ground for five hundred more: but breaking out again, and finding little or no hope of a better fortune, loseth it self for ever in the great Lake of Kitay.

To look for Towns amongst a people which delight not in settled houses, were a labour lost: yet some I find ascribed unto them. The principall, but of no great note, 1. Calba, and 2. Occrra; Then there is 3. Cr••stina, situate on or neer the Lake of Kitay, never without the company of Russian and Tarta∣rian Merchants: the Russians sailing to it by the River Ob; and the Zagathaian Tartars travelling to it by land. By these two nations more peopled, to maintain their traffick, than by the Turcomans themselves, in whose land it standeth.

These Turcon••ans are of the posterity of some of those Turca, who wanting room, or otherwise oppress'd with want, forsook their antient dwelling neer the Fennes of Moeotis, and the coasts of the Euxine Sea, to seek new dwellings, Anno 844. That their whole body settled here, and from hence made their con∣quest quest of Persia, as some very industrious men are of opinion, I by no means grant. For when the Sultan of Persia, having by the means of Tangrolipix and those Mercinary Turks whom he invited to his aid, ob∣tained the victory; and thought it fit for his affairs to detain them longer in his service: it is said he shut up the passages of the River Araxes, to hinder them from returning to their habitations. The shutting up of which River, and fortifying against them all the passages and bridges of it, had not served his tum, if the Turks had come from this place: for then he must have manned against them the River Oxus, and such as lay betwixt them and him in the common rode. Nor is it probable, that the Turcomans dwelling in this Province, on the East side of the River Volga, would undertake the fording of that dangerous and vi∣olent Water, and force themselves a way thorow Albania, and Armenia, with no greater numbers than 3000 men, which was the whole strength that they carryed with them. So that it is not to be doubted but that they came first into Persia out of Turcomania, and not out of Turchestan: and probable enough, that when they first left their own abode, and came unto the Northwest shores of the Caspian Sea, they might there divide themselves; Some of which leaving that Sea on the left hand, and passing thorow the Sar∣matian or Albanian Streights, made their way into Armenia, and those parts of Iberia, which from them are now called Turcomiania. The residue keeping that Sea on the right hand, and crossing the Volga, where they found the passage most easie for them, settled themselves in these parts of Scythia which they found less peopled, now from them named Turchestan. Some of which hearing of the good success of their Countrey-men in the Conquest of Persia, might afterwards join with them to assure that purchase. Governed since their first comming hither by the Chiefs of their severall Clans, whom they honour with the title of Chams; but all of them tributaries, and vassals to the Cham of Zagathay.

5. That part of the Kingdome of Zagathay, which anciently passed under the name of TERRA INCOGNITA, and was accompted the Northern limit of Scythia intra Imaum, hath on the South, Turchestan, and part of Zagathay, strictly and specially so called; extending Northwards to the Scythick or Frozon Ocean; and bounded on the West, with the River Ob.

The Inhabitants of this Northern Tract are now called by the name of Samoyeds; neither the people nor the Countrey known to the antient Romans: and indeed neither of them worth the knowing. The men black haired, naturally be••trdless, and not to be discemed from women, but that the women wear a long lock down to their eares. Clad from the head to the feet in Deer-skins, or Seil-skins, with the hairy side outwards; (nothing more wise in that than the other Tartars). Their kind of life more rude than theirs, if more rude may be, ranging from place to place to place without any propriety of house or dwelling; the leader of each company their Priest•• whom they call their Popa who at every one of their Removes is to offer sa∣crifice. Idolaters they are all, and most of then Witches, especially such as live most towards the East, and furthest off from the Moscovite, who many times destroy their Idols, and rob them of the skins of Bevers, black Foxes, and Sables, wherewith those Idols are set forth to the publick veiw,

but bestow on them greater heats in a good Fire; into which they commonly use to cast them.

These Zagathaian Provinces, with those of Margiana, and Bactria, before described, made that part of Scythia, which antiently was called Scythia intra montem Imaum: though in the time of Ptolo∣my, when Margiana, Bactria, Saca, and Sogdiana, were reckoned of as Provinces of the Kingdom of Persia; this Scythia was restrained within narrower bounds, and comprehended onely Turchestan and the Speciall Zagathay. Inhabited besides the several Nations dwelling in the four Persian Provinces, by many fierce and savage Tribes, as the Alan••, Alanoesi, Saubeni, and Massaei, towards Terra in∣coguita; the Tectosages, and Asiota, neer the Mountain Imaus; the Jaxartae on the banks of the River so called; and the Mologeni, not farr off; the Zarata, and Sasones, neer the Mountains Alan••; the Galactophagi, or milk-eaters, more towards the East; the Taporaeai, and the Sychi, by the hills so na∣med; and many others not material to be here remembred. All now united under the general name of Tar∣tars, by whom first subdued.

And now we are at last come to Scythia, truely so named; Sarmatia Europaea and Asiatica being called so onely by way of participation and resemblance; because the inhabitants thereof had so much in them of the manners and conditions of these natural Scythians. Here therefore we intend to speak some∣thing of them, their name, Antiquity, disposition, customes, and the most memorable actions relating to them, as far as we can go by the light of story.

First, for the name, the Gracian Fablers have derived it from one Scythes the sonne of Hercules, be∣gotten by him on a Monster, half woman, halfe Viper. The Gramarians, 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 signifying to be fierce and angry; whence it is said of the Jewish Puritans, who fasted to be seen of men 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 that they looked with a sowr, severe, and a dissigured Countenance. Goropius Becanus doth derive it ra∣ther from the Dutch word Schutten, signifying to shoot: agreeable enough to the custome and exercise of the Scythians, who are observed by Herodotus, Pliny, Lucian, and other of the antient Writers, to be very good Archers. But that the word Schutten signifieth the same in the antient Scythick; or that the High-Dutch was originally the tongue of the Scythians, will not so easily appear.

Letting that pass therefore as a matter not to be defined, let us look on the Antiquity of these Scythian Nations: and we shall find it to be great, if not greatest of all. Scytharum gens semper an∣tiquissima, That the Scythcans were of all others, the most antient people, was receiv∣ed for an Oracle, in the elder ages of the world: and so resolved by way of verdict, when the great controversie touching the Antiquity of those Nations was to be determited betwixt the Aegyptian and the Scythian, who contended for it. And this hath passed with such a generall approbation, that it is, now to be disputed. In which regard I am so far of the judgement of Becanus in that particular as to conceive that the Countreys lying on the North of Mount Caucasus (on which the Ark is thought most pro∣bably to have rested) were peopled by the sonnes of Noah before they travelled towards the West, or set themselves on building the Tower of Babel. We had else no doubt heard somewhat amongst our Anti∣quaries, of the settling of some of those Adventurers in these Northern Regions, when giving off that en∣terprise, and falling upon new plantations, they either went themselves, or sent forth their Colonies, into all places of the world. But of any such plantations, ne gry quidem, not one word say they. Nor can it probably be supposed that Z••roaster the King of Bactria could have raised 400000 fighting men out of that one Province (though some of the adjoining Provinces were took into the reckoning) in those early daies, in which he did encounter Ninus the great Assyrian; had the Bactrians, and the rest of these Scy∣thian nations been but a Castl••ng as it were of some second swarm, and not coavall with the first. But be∣sides these presumptions we have other proofs: viz. an old and constant tradition on this side the Moun∣tains, that the great Vineyard of Margiana was of Noahs planting; and 2. the affirmation of Porcius Ca∣to, (though one of the writers of Frier Annius) in Scythia Sagarenatum mortale genus, that mankind was repaired in these parts of Scythia, so called from Sabatius Sagar, an Armenian King, whose Domi∣nions did extend thus far. So that I look upon it as a matter of strong presumption, if not demonstrably concludent, that these People were of the first plantation which was made after the flood; before the rest of the world was peopled by the Confusion of Languages: Scytharum gens semper antiquissima, could not else hold good.

As for their dispositions, and naturall inclinations, they are said by Trogus, or his Epitomator Justine, to be Gens & laboribus & bellis aspera,

A Nation patient of labours, and fierce in warr; of bodily strength immense and vast; yet so much masters of their affections, that they made no further use of their greatest victories, than the augmentation of their fame. Theft they esteemed the greatest crime, and that they punished so severely, that their Flocks and Herds might and did safely wander from one place to another, without fear of stealing. In them they placed their greatest wealth, feeding themselves with the milk thereof, and making their rayment of the skinns. Silver and gold they contemned as much as it was coveted by others•• there being no desire of riches, where there was no use. Mcum, and Tu∣um, those common Barretours, and authors of debate amongst other men, were not known amongst them: and therefore did not care for tillage, or made any inclosures, nor troubled themselves with the care of building. But putting their wives and children upon wains, or wagons, covered with hides a∣gainst the weather, they removed from one place to another, no longer staying upon one, than they found grass and herbage to sustain their Cattel. So just in all their actions, that they needed not the restraint of lawes; and had attained to such an eminent degree of humane perfection, as not to cover. In a word, that moderation which the Greeks endeavoured to attain unto by the help of learning and Phi∣losophy, was to these so natural: that the ignorance of vice did as much contribute to their welfare, as

the knowledge of vertue.

Such are the antient Scythians affirmed to be. And being such, it was a won∣der that the great Monarchs of the world who had wealth at will, should make warre upon them, amongst whom there was nothing to invite an Army, or reward a Conq uerour. Yet either on desire of glory, or to add unto the former multitudes over whom he reigned, they were first invaded by Cyrus the great Persian Monarch, who quarrelling with Tomyris Queen of the Massagetes, a warlike Nation, inhabiting on both sides of the River Oxus, discomfited her Army, and slew her sonne Spargapises, who commanded it. In revenge whereof, the Queen having in a second battail obtained the victory, and took Cyrus prisoner, is said to have cut off his head, and cast it into a boul of blood, with this scornful taunt, Satia te san∣guine quem sitiisti, now drink thy fill of blood which thou hast so thirsted. But others tell us otherwise of the success of this fight. By whom it is reported that the horse of Cyrus being disordered on the sight of some Elephants which came from India to her aid, and himself dangerously wounded, the Scythians had won the victory, but for the comming in of Amorges King of the Sacons, (who of a conquered E∣nemy was become his Confederate) by whom he was rescued, and b the 20000 fresh men which he brought with him, obtained the honour of the day; though long he lived not to enjoy it, dying not long after of the wounds he had received. With Alexander they are said to begin the war, as loth to be behind∣hand with him; arming themselves upon the building of Alexandria ultima, so neer their borders, which they conceived rather intended for a curb to hold them down, than for a btidle to keep them in. But be∣ing repulsed, and wife enough to suffer what they could not hinder, they sued for peace, and had it granted; Alexander being called away by the revolt of the Bactrians, a matter of more conseqnence than these Scythian brables. With Alexanders, Successours they had nothing to do, nor with the Persian Kings of the Parthian race: the Parthians being their Allies, and of Scythian breed. And for the Romans, it is well observed by the Historian, Romanorum arma andivere magis quaem sensere, that they had heard much of their valour, but never felt it: Remaining undisturbed in their honest poverty, till the Tartars an obscure and beggerly people brake out of their Prison, and carryed the whole World before them.

As for their Kings, I find some of their names laid down, but without any note of time in which their reigns might be supposed to begin or end. Nor can I think that the Kings occurring in that Catalogue, did either reign in the same place, or over the same Nations, or that they succeeded one another. Howsoever we will take their names as they come before us in this list of

The Kings of Scythia.

• 1. Scythes.
• 2. Napis.
• 3. Phitra.
• 4. Sagillus.
• 5. Targitana.
• 6. Plinus.
• 7. Scholypethus.
• 8. Panaxagora.
• 9. Tanais.
• 10. Indathyrsus.
• 11. S••Ulius.
• 12. Spargapisis.
• 13. Tomyris.
• 14. Aripethes.
• 15. Seiles.
• 16. Octimasdes.
• 17. Lanthinus, the last of all those Scythian Kings who are conceived to have the government of these warlike Nations. But for my part I dare not say that ever any one King did command the whole people generally; each Tribe or Nation having their particular Kings, as in other places not reduced into form and or∣der. And therefore for those Kings, if such Kings there were (as for some of them I durst venture to swear the contrary) they must be such as in their severall Countries were of greatest same, most taken notice of in the world, or imployed in the conduct of their joynt and united forces; and so conceived to be the Kings of the whole Scythian Nation; as Cassibeline, King of the Trinobantes, and perhaps not that, is by some writers said to be the King of the Britains, because he had the conduct of their forces against Julius Caesar.

CATHAY.

CATHAY is bounded on the West, with Zagathay, from which parted by the Mountain I∣maus; on the East, with the Orientall Sea, and some part of China; on the North, with the Scythick, or Frozen Ocean; and on the South, with China onely. So called, as some think, from the Chatae, an old Scythian people.

The Countrey, notwithstanding the cold Clime under which it lieth, is said to be abounding in wheat, rice, wooll, hemp, silk, and musk: Great store of that medicinall root called Rhubarb, or Rha-barbarum, to difference it from the Rha-Pontick growing on the banks of Volga. They have also very great herds of Camels, of whose hair they make those stuffs which are hence called Camelets, or Chamlets: and such an infinite breed of horses, that the great Cham feedeth yearly 10000 white mares, which he keeps for their milk. Some of their Rivers are reported also to yield golden sands. But whether it be so or not, certain it is, that it is so well provided of all things both for necessary use, and the pleasures of life, that it is thought to be inferiour to few Countries of Europe. The Air indeed not so temperate, as in many places; in sum∣mer-times extremely hot, and in winter miserably cold: the thunders and lightnings being here so terrible, that in summer many men die for fear, when they hear it. The winds no less violent than the thunder, do sometimes tear up trees by the roots, and beat men from their horses; but seldome bring with them any storm of rain: the greatest showers which they have, hardly wetting the ground.

The people are generally very wa••like, strong of body, quick of action, fearless of the greatest dangers, patient both of want and labour: of mean stature, little eyes, sharp-sight, and thin beards. Industrious they are in severall manufactures, of a good wit for dispatch of business: more honourable than the rest of the Tart••••ars, as loving to dress themselves gorgiously, to fare sumptuously (if there be occasion) to live in handsome houses, and to frequent the most populous and best-traded Cities. They accompt not any for a wife till she bear them children, nor till then do medle with their dowries; but repudiate them at a certain time, if they find them bar••en. They reverence their Cham, or Emperor, even to adoration: not suffering any stranger to come in his presence, except he be first purged: if any any otherwise presume, it is present death.

The Religion publiquely allowed and conntenanced, is that of Mahomet, but so that they obey the Pentateuch of Moses, and observe many things there commanded. It was much laboured by Pope Inno∣cent, and King Lewis of France, that they should receive the Christian faith; and they found some in∣clinations in the people, and chief Princes to it. But finding by the Mahomentan Agents, who then la∣boured to bring them to their superstition, that Mahomet allowed of many wives, and other things more agreeable to their fleshly lusts, they conformed to that: Yet so, that there are many Idolaters in Cathay it self (I mean Cathay strictly so called) and some Christians also; the state of whose affairs we have shewn before.

Chief Rivers of the whole, 1. Palysanga, navigable up to the City of Cambalu, to which it is a means of conveying great store of merchandise. 2. Caromoram, so broad and deep that no bridge can be made over it. 3. Quiam, one of the greatest in the world; in length about an hundred dayes journey; for breadth, in most places six miles, in many eight, and in some ten. 4. Quiantu, about half a mile over, and well stored with fish. Here are also very many Lakes, both large, and usefull, as 1. the Lake of Cani••lu, in which are said to be so many pearls as would make them of no value, if every man might have leave to fish for them: which is therefore interdicted (without speciall licence) upon pain of death. 2. the Lake of Caraim, about an hundred miles in circuit, and so full of fish as might suf∣fice for all the Countrey, did they love to eat of it. Their mountains we shall climb over in their severall places.

It comprehendeth those two large and ample Provinces which the Antients called Serica, and Scy∣thia extra montem Imaum: the first conceived to be Cathay especially so called; the last now nam∣ed Altay, and subdivided into severall Regions, of which more anon.

1. SERICA, hath on the East some part of China; on the South, the rest of China, and some part of India; on the North, Altay, or S••yshia extra moutem Imaum; on the West, the moun∣tains of Imans. In which I follow not the bounds laid down by Ptolomy, who for want of that knowledge in these remote Countries which these latter ages have afforded, is fain to shut it up on the North and East, with a Terra incognita. At the present it is called CATHAY, and that most probably from the Chatae a Scythian People, who subduing the old Inhabitants, became masters of it.

But for the name of Serica, it was derived originally from Sera, the chief City of it; whence the people had the name of Seres; very industrious in their times, and amongst other things in the making of silks (made of a fine wooll growing on the leaves of trees) from hence named Serica. Of great esteem amongst the Romans, as is said by Pliny, Tan•• multiplici apere, tam longinquo orbe potitur, ut in publico matrona transluceat; being fa••••e fetch'd, and dear-bough, they were good for Ladies. Nor were they industrious onely, but chast and temperate. The names of Theeves and whores were not known amongst them. They eat not any unclean flesh, nor used the company of their wives, either after conception, or during their menstrual purgations. So moderate of diet, that they lived commonly to the age of 200 years; the quietness and mildness of their disposition helping much thereto. Of yellow hair, watchet or Sea-green eyes, and good composure. Men of few words, but very just in all which they said or did Governed by a common Councell of 5000 men, every one of which was to find an Elephant for the use of the State.

If you will take the character both of the Countrey and People from Ammianus Marcellinus, he will give it thus.

First of the Countrey, that it is plentifull and large, circled about with a chain of mountains, the two famous Rivers Oechar des and Banthisis with a still and slow stream running thorow the midle of the inclosed plain, spaciously stretched out to the sides of the pr••cipices: in one place large and open, in another lying flat and low with an easie descent; in which regard they have abundance of corn, store of Cattel, and plenty of Orchards. The temperature of the Air pleasant and wholesome, the constitution of the weather clear and pure, the blowing of gentle winds most commodious, and the woods with a pretty glimmering of light, both within and under them: from whence the people with much sprinkling of water, softning that which the trees bring forth like a kind of Fleece, kemb a most fine and tender matter, which they spin into silk, serving in former times for the nobility and gentry, now become common to those also of inferiour rank. Then for the People, he saith that they are a frugall Nation, lovers of quiet, not troublesome unto their neighbours, without the use of Arms, and the knowledge of battels, declining the company of Strangers, and so farre from covetousness, or curio∣sities, that when any Merchants come unto them to buy their silks, without much beating of the price, they let them have such things as are bred amongst them, without looking after the commodities of o∣ther Countries.

So he. And if he did not over-act the Pan••gyrist (as I see no reason why he should) ne∣ver were people happier in the place of their dwelling, nor Countrie happier in its people.

Chief Mountains of it (and mountains they had very many) were 1. the Montes Casii, and 2. Au∣zacii towards the East. 3. the Annibae, environing a great part of the Countrey. 4. the Asmirae••, 5. and those called Serici, neer the City S••ra. 6. Tagurus. 7. Ennodorus, and 8. Ottorocorus. But

by what names now called it is hard to say. Out of which flowed these principall Rivers, 1. Oechar∣des, by Pliny called Cambris, rising out of the montes Auzacii; 2. Psitara, issuing out of the As∣miri; 3. Ba••tisus, whose fountain is in the montes Casii; and 4. Lanos.

Towns of chief note amongst them, 1. Sera, which gave the name of Serica, and Seres, to the Pro∣vince and people. 2. Ottorocora, neer the hills so called; whence it had the name. 3. Issedon, for distinctions sake called Issedon Serica, to difference it from another of that name in Scythia, called Isse∣don Scythica; the chief City of the Issedones, gens magna, one of the greatest Nations in all the Coun∣trey, as is said by Ptolomy. 4. Orosana, 5. Drosache, 8. Daxata, of which little memorable. But these and all the rest (about nine more named by Ptolomy) being all decaied, let us next look on the chief Cities, as it stands at the present, by the name of Cathay: The principall whereof, 1. Cambalu, supposed to be the Issedon Serica of the Antients; Built of free stone, and situate in the middest of the Countrey, as the heart and center to the rest. It is seated on the River Polysanga, honoured with the great Chams re∣sidence, and enriched with a mighty confluence of Merchants of all sorts. Besides other merchandises, there are every year 10000 Carts loaded with silk, sent thither from China. This City is in compass 28 miles, besides the suburbes: in which, besides other inhabitants of all sorts, are 50000 Astrologers, or rather fortune-tellers. 2. Xundu, the Royall Palace of the Emperor, is of a souresquare figure, every side ex∣tending 8 miles in length. Within this quadrant is another, whose sides are 6 miles long: and within that another of four miles square, which is the Palace it self. Betwe••n these several Walls, are Walks, Gar∣dens, Orchards, F••shponds, places for all manner of exercise; and Parks, Forrests, Chases for all man∣ner of game. 3. Car••tan, where the women are said to guild their teeth. 4. Gouza, a fair City and a great, adorned with many Icol-M••n••steries. 5. Careanfu, neer which there groweth an herb called Chiar-Cathay, of admirable effect against many diseases, and so esteemed of by the natives, that they value an Ounce of this, at a Sack of Rhubarb. 6. Segui, the residence of a Nestorian Bishop.

The old Inhabitants hereof, in those parts which lay next the Scythians, are said to have been Ambr••∣pophagi, or man-eaters, most probably a Scythian Nation, that custome being so abhortent from the mildness of the Serican temper. Or else, we must correct the Copies of Ptolomy, by the History of Am∣mianus Marcellinus, who instead of Anthropophagi, placeth the Alitrophagi in the self same tract. The other Nations not distained with the like reproaches, are the Sizyges, and Anabi, not farre off the Auzac••an mountains; the Pialae neer the River Oechardes; the Geranaei, and Rhabbanaei, their neerest neighbours; the Throam dwelling towards the East, the Batae and Ottocororae more towards the South. These with the residue, governed by a Common Councel of 5000 men, every one of which was to find an Elephant for the service of the Common-wealth, as was said before. And more than this we hear not of them in the way of story: the natives never going abroad to vent their wares, and having little speech with Strangers, when they come amongst them. Being vanquished by the Cha••ae, a Scythian Nation, from whom it is likely that it took the name of CATHAY; (for in this I go but by conjecture:) they continued under Kings of their own, till subdued by the Tartars; against whom they made such stout re∣sistance, being besieged by ingis in their principall City, that when they wanted stones to cast out of their engines, they supplied that want with molten silver, and held it out so long, that Cingis finding victuals to grow short in his Camp, commanded that every tenth man should be eaten. But at the last being under∣mined, the Town was taken, the Citizens massacred, and their King or Emperor (as some call him) slain: after whose death, and not before, Cingis assumed the title of Cham, or Emperor. The residue of their sto∣ry we shall have hereafter.

ALTAY, called also SCYTHIA EXTRAIMAUM, is bounded on the South, with Cathay; on the West, with the mountain Imaus; on the North, with Tartaria Amiqua; on the East, with the Ocean. Called Scythia, because planted by a brood of the Scythians. Extra Imaum was put to it, to difference it from that part of Scythia which lay on the West side of that mountain, neerest unto the Greeks and Romans. But now the Mountain, and the Countrey, have the name of Altay.

To look upon it as it standeth by the name of Scythia extra Imaum, we find not any thing delivered of the Rivers or Mountains of it, but what is common unto them with the neighbouring nations: the moun∣tains called Auzacii, Casii, and Ennodorus, being common unto this with Serica, as Imaus jointly to both the Scythia's, which it divided antiently the one from the other: though now this last be reckned to belong to Cathay alone, because the Tartars on both sides of it profess themselves subjects to that Cham. This the most famous mountain in the East of Asia; beginning at the shores of the Scythick or Frozen O∣cean; and extending the••ce directly Southwards unto Cape Coma••i, a Promontory of the Southern or Indian Seas. By which account it divideth the Greater Asia into East and West, as Taur••s doth into North and South, which Mountain it crosseth in right Angles, about the Longitude of 140. as before was said. That part hereof which lyeth on the South of Taurus, was by the Antients called Bitigo; and by the modern is named Gates: of which we shall speak more when we come to India. That on the North of Taurus, called Imaus properly, was antiently most memorable for dividing the vast Countreys of the Scythians into Scythia intra Imaum, and Scythia extra Imaum; a division much observed by the old Geographers: now chiefly memorable for being the Sepulchre of some of the Chams of Tartary; most ge∣nerally known by the name of Altay, but by some called Belgion.

Chief Towns hereof were 1. Auzic••a, at the foot of the hills so named. 2. Chaurana, the chief City of the Chauranaei. 3. Saeta. 4. Issedon Scythica, so called to difference it from the other of that

name in Serica. These with the rest, and all the Countrey, as far as it was known in the daies of Pto∣lomy, inhabited by the Ab••i, Happophagi, or horse-eaters, a diet still used by the Tartars or modern Scythians. 2. The Issedones, who are said by Pomponius Mela to make Carousing Cups of their Fathers heads, first trimed and gilded. 3. The Chauranaei, and 4. the Chatae; who being (as it seemeth) the most potent Nation, caused all the rest to be called by the name of Cathay; communicating that name al∣so to the conquered Seres. Besides the possessions of which Tribes, there were also the Regions of Acbassa, Casia, and Auzacitis, these last so called from the Mountains upon which they bor∣dered.

More than this we have not to say of this Countrey by the name of Scythia, there being nothing memo∣rable of it in the course of story, or worth the observation in the way of Chorography. Let us therefore look upon it, as presented to us by the name of ALTAY: though therein I shall trouble my self no further than by giving a brief touch on the severall parts of it. Of which the most that can be said, will be but little for the information of the judicious Readers; who are not to be bettered by the names of places, if there be not something in them of further use. Now for these Provinces the principall of them are, 1. Cascar, 2. Chesmur, 3. Lop, 4. Camul, 5. Tainfu, 6. Caindu, 7. Carazan, 8. Car∣dandan, 9. Erginul, 10. Tanguth.

1. CASCAR, bordering upon China, a Mahometan Countrey, but admitting of some Christians also. In some parts both sexes do indulge themselves this mutual privilege, that if the husband or the wife be absent above twenty daies, the other party is at liberty to mary again.

2. CHESMUR, the inhabitants whereof are generally both Idolaters, and Inchanters, causing the dumb Idols to speak, the winds to rise, aud the sun to be darkned. For studying which black Arts (if they come to them by study) they have many Monasteries, in which their Hermits or Monasticks live a strict kind of life, and are very abstemious.

3. LOP, memorable for a great Desart of thirty daies journey: so true a Desart, that whosoever doth not mean to be starved must carry all his victuals with him. Dangerous to travellers, if not before∣hand made acquainted with their danger; the evill spirits using to call men by their names, and make them go astray from their company, where they perish with famine, or are devoured with wild beasts. The chief Town hereof called Lop, giving name to both.

4. CAMVL, an Idolatrous Countrey, the people whereof accompt it a great honour to them to have their wives and sisters at the pleasure of such as they entertain. From which brutish custome when restrained by Mango Cham, they petitioned him at three years end to be restored again to their for∣mer liberty; protesting they could never thrive since they left that custome. Which desire of theirs was at last granted, and is still in use.

5. TAINFV, more civil than the rest, the people being very industrious and good Artificers, making the most part of the Arms which are used by the Cham; and some also which they fell to Mer∣chants.

6. CAINDU, with a Town in it of the same name, of great resort by Merchants (such as we commonly call petit Chapmen) for the Womens veils here made, with very great Art, of the barks of Trees. And it is well that they have veils to hide their shamelessness, the women of this Tract being pro∣stituted unto every Traveller.

7. CARAZAN, inhabited by a barbarous and savage people, who in the day-time live in dens for fear of Serpents, with which (and some of them ten paces long, and ten spans in thickness) they are much infested; and in the night go forth to prey upon Wolves and Lyons. They have an use, that when any stranger cometh into their houses, of an handsome shape, to kill him in the night; not out of desire of spoil, or to eat his body, but that the soul of such a comely bodie, might remain amongst them.

8. CARDANDAN, neer Carazan, and as savage as that. The people whereof draw black lines on their bodies, which they count for the greatest Ornament. In case of sickness they send not to the Physician, but the next Inchanters: who taking Counsail of the Devil, apply some remedy; or if they think the man past cure, they tell him that his offences are grown too great to admit of help; and so put him off.

9. ERGINVL, possessed by an Idolatrous people, but mixed with some Mahometans, and Nestorian Christians. In which Countrey they have certain Bulls as big as Elephants, with mains of fine white haire like silk, some of which they tame; and betwixt them and their Kine engender a race of strong and laborious Beasts, not inferiour in that kind to Oxen. Here is alsofound a beast of an exqui∣site shape, but not bigger than a Goat, which at every full Moon hath a swelling under the belly, which being cut off by the Hunters, and dryed in the Sunne, proveth to be the best Musk in the World.

10. TANGVT, the greatest and most potent of all the rest, inhabited by an industrious and la∣borious people, amongst whom the Art of printing is said to have been extant a thousand years. Blessed heretofore with a great increase of Christianity; but now the Gentiles or Idolaters make the greatest part, with some Mahometans amongst them. And for the serving of those Idols, they have not onely many large and beautifull Temples, built in the manner of Christian Churches, and capable of 4 or 5000 per∣sons; but also many fair Monasteries for the use of their Votaries and Recluses. They are possessed of many Towns, most of them well fortified, and planted with good store of Artillery. The chief of which, 1. Sachian, bordering on the Desart of Lop, inhabited by some of all three Religions; in which it is affirmed that they first used the Art of printing. 2. Campion, the Metropolis, or Mother City of

this Countrey: where the Christians in the time of Paulus Venetus had three fair Churches: now over∣numbred by the Gentiles. who have here many Monasteries for the use of their Iaols, and many Religi∣ous persons dedicated to their service only. Who though they live more honestly than the rest of their Order, and hold it an impiety to tempt a woman to the act of lust; yet if the woman make the offer, they hold it no small si••••e to refuse her curtesie. 3. Su••cuir, situate amongst Mountains clothed with Rhubarb, from whence conveyed by Merchants over all the world, but so neglected by the natives, that did not the forein Mer∣chant bring it into request, they would scorn to gather it. This once a Kingdome of it self, but subject now, with Ta••guth, to the Cham of Cathay, or the Great Cham of Tartary.

5. TARTARIA ANTIQVA.

TARTARIA ANTIQVA hath on the South, Altay; on the West, and North, the main Scythick Ocean; on the East the Streights of Anian, by which parted from America. So cal∣led, because the first habitation of the Tartars, who from this den or Jail, made their first eruptions, and have since over-grown so much of Asia.

The Countrey cold, and comfortless, as lying under the Polar Circle, and in part beyond it: not fit for any but for such as can live no where else: yet heretofore a receptacle of many Christians (though those of the Nestorian Sect) who here enjoyed that liberty of their Religion, which the Persians and Sa∣••••••en•• denyed them in more pleasing Countries. It containeth many Regions, some not considerable. Those of most note, are 1. Thebet, 2. Tabor, 3. Tendu••, 4. Bargu, 5. Anian, and 6. Tar∣tar.

1. THEBET, a fenny Region, and full of woods, rich in Corall which they find on the Sea-shore, and use it instead of money. So named from the chief City of it, the ordinary Seat of the Abassi, or Pope of this Idolatrous people; much reverenced, and having in his power the disposing of all Offices which con∣cern the service of their Idols; They have also some good store of Musk; and abundance of wild beasts which are bred in their Forrests. But no beasts wilder than the people, who in times past (if not at the pre∣sent also) used to bury their Parents in their own bowels, and to make drinking cups of their skuls; for fear lest in the midst of their jollity they should forget their Progenitors. Yet not more barbarous than immo∣dest; it being contrary to their custome to take a wife that is a Virgin. And therefore the Mothers use to pro∣stitute their daughters to the Merchant-Strangers, who having had their pleasure of them gratify them with a Jewell or some other present; which they wear on their wedding day: she being the most ac∣ceptable Bride to her husband, who bringeth the greatest Dowry with her of those base rewards. It con∣tained once eight petit Kingdomes, (Homagers to the Kings of Tenduc) with many Cities: but now laid desolate by the Tartar.

2. ••ABOR, once a distinct Kingdome also. One of the Kings whereof in the year 1540. came to the Courts of Charles the fift, and Francis the first; where he found Princely entertainment. But upon proof that he was a Factor for the Jews, and secretly solicited many uato that Religion, by the command of Charles, he was burnt at Mantua.

3. TENDV••, a populous Kingdome of it self, but greater in name and power, the Kings here∣of commanding all these North-East parts, as far as the borders of Cathay. Christian in Religion, till the Conquest of it by the Tartars, though according to the Nestorian tendries: but now Mahometan ••or the most part, with some remainders, and but few, of Christianity. Divided into many large and spaci∣ous Provinces, as Chin••hintales, Cerguth, Egrigaia, Cercham, others of less note, so called ac∣cording to the names of their princip••ll Towns, or having some Towns in them of the name of the Provinces.

Those of most note in Tenduc It self, 1. Coras, the ordinary sepulture of the Kings of Tenduc, be∣fore it was subdued by the Tartars, and since that also. 2. Ca••acoras, where Cingis was first honoured with the Title of King. The Kings hereof bearing the port of Kings, and the office of Priests, were an∣tiently called by the name of Presbyter Johannes, or Prester John: a title now erroniously conferred by some on the Emperour of the Abassines or Aethiopians in Asrick. Concerning which it is a wonder, that Joseph Scaliger, a man of such infinite reading, should be so deceived: and by the authority of his judgement deceive so many. For finding that there was a Presbyter Johannes in the North of Asia, and hearing vulgarly that title given unto him in Africk; he fell upon a fancie that this A••assine Emperour was formerly of so great power, as to extend his empire over India, and the North of Asia; and in this last, for the assurance of his conquests, to hold his residence. A monstrous, and undefensible fancy. For besides that all histories, even those of the A••••ssines themselves, are silent in it: how improbable is it, that a King reigning in the heart of A••••••k, should subdue the most remote parts of Asia; and there keep his Court: so many great States and most puissant Nations, being interposed? or that so memor∣able an exploit should be buried in silence, and found in no record but in Scaligers head? Besides it is well known, and generally granted, that the Presbyter John of Asia, was by Sect a Nestorim; but he that is so called in Africk, of the Sect of the Jac••bites: and further, that the Christians of Aethiop•••• are circumcised, which never was reported of those of Asia.

Letting this pass therefore as an unwarrantable, and ill-grounded fancy, we are to know that former∣ly this Province of Tenduc, was under the old Kings of Cathay, till the time of Cin-Cham, the King thereof. After whose death a certain Nestort••n shepheard (that is to say, the master of great flocks of sheep) be∣ing Governour of the Yaymans, a People of Tenduc, took to himself the title of king of Tenduc▪ whom they called by the name of Pr••••st John, or Prince John (the same word in their language, as in the Hebr••••,

signifieth both Priest and Prince.) Dying he bequeathed his estate and flocks to his brother Unt-••ham, (commonly called in one word Uncham) a greater sheep-master than he, whose flocks ranged over all the past ures of the Mo••es, or Monguls and Tartars, though dwelling fourteen daies journey off, whom he had in subjection: the title of Priest John, or Presbyter Johannes, going along with the dig∣nity and Royall estate. And though afterwards this Uncham was subdued by the Tartars, yet his posteri∣ty for long time were suffered to enjoy the title of Kings and Presbyters; (but Vassals, and Homagers, to the Great Cham): the Great Chams, in regard of their nobility, and royall parentage, bestowing their daughters on them in marriage; as is said by William de Rubraquis, who travelled in these Countries, An∣no 1253. the King hereof being then named George (the fourth from Uncham) but commonly called Presbyter Johannes, as his Fathers were

4. BARGV, on the extreme North-west, bordering on both those sides the cold Scythick Ocean situate under the North-starre; of the same nature, both for the soyl and people, as that of the Tartars. And

5. ANIAN, on the North-East, opposite unto it, giving name unto the Streight•• of A••ia••, lying betwixt Tartarie and America, which Streights the Tartars, and some other of these Northern nations, are thought to have passed over, and to plant that Countrey.

6. TARTAR, so called of the great River Tartar, the principall of this Northern Tract, and giv∣ing name unto the Tartars: this being their Originall Countrey, where they lived like beasts, having nei∣ther faith, nor letters, nor habitation, nor the use of Arms, nor any reputation amongst their neighbours. In matter of Religion, the worst sort of gentiles, worshipping the Sunne, Moon, Fire, and the very Earth: to which they offered in the morning fasting, the first of their meats and drinks.

Their Idols made of Felt, and placed on both sides of the doors of their tents or booths, as the preser∣vers of their Cattel, and the Authors of milk. Divided into five Clans, or Tribes, denominating so ma∣ny Towns and territories in which they dwel••, that is to say, 1. Mongul. 2. Yek••-Mongul, or the Great Mongul) 3. Sommongul, or the water-Mongul. 4. Mercat. 5. Metrit: each of them Governed by its Chief, as commonly it is amongst barbarous Nations; though all those Chiefs sub∣ordinate to some higher power. Oppressed by Uncham, or Unt-cham, the King of Tenduc, who invaded their pastures, and compelled them to pay unto him the tenth of their Cattel, with joint consent they removed somewhat further off, and denied their Tribute. This opportunity was taken by Cingis, one of the Tribe of the Yek••-Monguls, and so well husbanded, that they admitted him for their King. For publishing abroad amongst the Credulous people, that an armed man appeared to him in his sleep, with a white horse, and said, •• Cangius, or Cingis, it is the will of immortall God, that thou be Go∣vernour of the Tartars, and free them from bondage, and paying tribute; he found, a generall belief; e∣specially amongst those of his own Clan, who joyning themselves to him, followed him, as their Ring-leader, in all his actions. Thus backed and strengthned he made warre against the Sommonguls, ••lew their Commander, and subdued them: and by their help, successively assaulted the Mercats, and Metrits, whom he also vanquished. And having thus subdued all the Clans of the Tartars, and added the estates of Theb••t, and Tanguth, unto his Dominions, he was by the consent of the seven Princes, or Chiefs of their Clans, (Thebet••, and Tanguth being added to the former number) placed on a seat on a peece of Felt, (the best throne they had or could afford) and saluted King; with as great reverence and solemnity as their state could yield. And first to make triall of his power, and their obedience, he commanded the seven Chiefs or Princes to surrender their places, and each of them to cut off the head of his eldest sonne: which was done accordingly. Had John of Leiden been a Scholar, as he was but a Botcher, I should think he had studied the Acts of Cingis, and proceeded by them. Assured by this of their fidelity and obedience, he set upon the Naymans, a people of the Kingdom of Tenduc, whom he overcame. And now conceiv∣ing himself fit for some great alliance, he sent to Uncham, and demanded one of his daughters for his wife, Which Uncham with some threats, but more scorn, denying; he marched against him, slew him in the field, and possessed his daughter, and with her also his estate. Proud with this good success, and encourag∣ed by so great an increase of power, he invaded the Kingdome of Cathay; pretending for that also the au∣thority of an heavenly vision, in the name of the immortall God: in which attempt, discomfited at first with a very great overthrow, but at last victorious; conquering the several nations of it by one and one, till in the end he brought the warre to the chief City of that Kingdome, which at last he took, and therewith∣all the title of Cham or Emperor. Continuing in this dignity for the space of six years, and every year ad∣ding somewhat to his dominions, he was at last wounded in the knee at the Castle of Thaygin, of which wound he died, and was honourably buried in Mount Altay.

This is the best accompt I am able to give of the beginning of this great Empire, the originall of this spreading Nation, and the description of the Country of their first habitation. They that have christ∣ned some of the most Northern parts of it by the names of the Tribes of Dan, and Napthalim, and accord∣ingly placed them in their Maps, might with more credit have supplied those vacant places, which they knew not otherwise how to fill, with the pictures of wild beasts, or monstrous fishes: which might well enough have pleased the eye, without betraying the judgement of the looker on. Of his Successors I am able to make no certain Catalogue, their names being doubtfully delivered, and the succession much confoun∣ded amongst our writers: the names of the Provincial Sultans being many times imposed upon us, instead of those of the Chams themselves. But we will wade through those difficulties as well as we can, and ex∣hibit as perfect a Catalogue of them, as the light of story will direct me: first adding (what should have been before remembered) that it is recorded, that Cingis before he joyned battel with Uncham, consulted with his Diviners and Astrologers of the success. They taking a green reed, cleft it asunder, writ on the one the name of Cingis, and Uncham on the other; and placed them not farre asunder. Then fell they to

reading their Charms, and conjurations; and the reeds fell a fighting in the sight of the whole Army, Cin∣g••s Reed overcomming the other: whereby they foretold the joyfull news of victory to the Tartars, which accordingly hapned. And this was the first step by which this base and beggerly Nation began to mount unto the chair of Empire and Soveraignty; whereas before they lived like beasts, having neither letters, nor faith, nor dwelling, nor reputation, nor valor, nor indeed any thing befitting a man, as before was said.

The great Chams of Tartars.

• A. C.
• 1162. 1. Cingis, Cinchius, Zingis, or Changius, was made King or Cham of the Tartars; he subdued Tenduch, and Cathaia, changing the name of Scythians, and Scythia, to Tar∣tartans, and Tartari••. 6.
• 1168. 2. Jocuchan Cham, or Hoccata, succeeded. In his time the name of Tartar was first known in Europe, Anno 1212. in which year they drove the Polesockie from the banks of the Euxine Sea. By his Captain Bathu, or Ro••do, he subdued Moscovia; planted his Tartars in Taurica Chersonesus; wasted Hungary, Bosnia, Servia, Bulgaria; and by his other Captains, took P••rsia from the Turks.
• 3. Zaincham, Bathu, or Barcham, ruined the Turks Kingdom of Damascus, and Asia the lesse.
• 4. Gino Ch••m, whose daughter conveyed the Empire unto her husband Tamerlane or Tamber∣l••ne.
• 1370. 5. Tamir-Cutlu, Tamir-Cham, or Tamerlane, a great tyrant, but withall an excellent Souldier. It is thought, that he subdued more Provinces in his life-time, than the Romans had done in 800 years. Of whose acts we have spoke at large. Dying, he divided his great Empire amongst his Children, as Persia to Miza Charok his fourth sonne, Zagathay to another, (perhaps unto Sautochus his eldest sonne) and so to others.
• 1405. 6. Lutrochin, the second sonne of Tamerlane, succeeded in Cathay, though the eldest was before proclamed, which his Father had before prognosticated: who when his sons came to him before his death, laid his hand on the head of Sautochus who was the eldest, but lifting up the chin of Lutrochin, who was the second. He lived not long, succeeded to by
• 7. Atlan, who added little to his estate.
• 8. Mango Cham, to whom Haiton an Armenian Prince (and the chief Compiler of the Tar∣tarian History) went for ayd against the Caliph of Bagdt. By whose perswasion the said Mango Cham is said to have been christned, with all his houshold▪ and many nobles of both sexes.
• 9. Cublay Cham, the sonne of Mango.
• 10. Tamor Cham, the Nephew of Cablay by his sonne Cingis.
• 11. Dem••r Cham, the great Cham of Cathay in the year 1540 or thereabouts. What the names of the Chams are, who have since reigned, we cannot learn; nor what memorable acts have been done among them. The great distance of Countries, and difficulty of the journey have hindred further dis∣coveries. For the great Cham, and his next neighbour the King of China, will neither suffer any of their subjects to travell abroad; nor permit any foreiners to view their dominions, or enter into them; unless ei∣ther Embassadours or Merchants, and those but sparingly, and under very great restraints, to avoid all giving of intelligence touching their affairs.

The government is tyrannicall; the great Cham being Lord of all; and in his tongue, (besides which they have almost no laws) consisteth the power of life or death. He is called by the simple vulgar, the shadow of spirits, and sonne of the immortall God: and by himself is reputed to be the Monarch of the whole world. For this cause every day assoon as he hath dined, he causeth his trumpets to be sounded; by that sign giving leave to the other Kings and Princes of the earth, to go to dinner. A fine dream of uni∣versal Monarchy. At the death of the Cham, the seven chief Princes assemble to crown his sonne; whom they place on a black coarse cloth; telling him, if he reign well, heaven shall be his reward; if ill, he shall not have so much as a corner of that black cloth to rest his body on: then they put the crown on his head, and kissing his feet, swear unto him fealty and homage. And at the funerall of these great Monarchs, they use to kill some of his guard-Soudiers, whereof he hath 12000 in continuall pay; saying unto them, It•• & domino nostro se••v••••e in ••••ia vita. Paulus Venetus reporteth, that at the obsequies of Man••o Cham, no fewer than 10000 were slain on this occasion.

There Chams are for the most part severe justicers, and punish almost every small fact with sudden death; but theft especially: Insomuch that a man in Cambalu taking a pa••l of milk from a womans head, and beginning to drink thereof, upon the womans out-cry was apprehended; and cut a sunder with a sword, so that the blood and the milk came out together. Nor are Adultery or lying punished with less than death, and so ordained to be by the lawes of Cingis, their first Emperour, a wiser man, than possibly could be expected from so rude a Countrey, and of so little breeding in the knowledge of books or business: the Tar∣tars being utterly without the use of letters, till the conquest of the Huyri, a Cathaian nation, but of Christian faith.

What forces the Great Chams, in the height of their power, were able to draw into the field, may be conje∣ctured at by the Army of Tamerla••e, consisting of 1200000 horse and foot, as was said before. And looking on them as confined within Cathar, we shall find them not inferiour to the greatest Princes. For Cubla•• Cham, long after the division of this great estate, which was made by Tamerlane, had in the field against Naian his Unkle, and one Caidu, who had then rebelled, an Army of 100000 foot, and 360000 horse;

there being 500000 horse on the other side. Which made almost a million of men in both Armies. And this is probable enough, if report be true touching the Chams of Zagathay and those of ••urchestan, (be∣fore reduced under the obedience of the other) of which the first is said to have been able to raise 300000 horse, and the last an hundred thousand more. For standing forces, he maintai••s 12000 horse, distribut∣ed amongst four Captains, for the guard of his person: besides which he hath great forces in every Pro∣vince, and within four miles of every City, ready to come upon a call, if occasion be: so that he need not fear any outward invasion, and much less any homebred rebellions.

Of the Revenues of the Cham, I can make no estimate, but may conclude them to be what he list himself: he being the absolute Lord of all, the Subject without any thing he can call his own. But that which ordinarily doth accrew unto him, is the tenth of wooll, Silk, hemp, co••, and Cattel. Then doth he draw into his own hands all the gold and silver which is brought into the Countrey, which he causeth to be melted, and preserved in his treasurie imposing on his people instead of money, in some places Cockle-shels, in others a black coin made of the bark of trees, with his stamp upon it. And besides this, hath to himself the whole trade of Pearl-fishing, which no body upon pain of death dare fish for, but by leave from him. So that his Treasury is conceived to be very rich, though his Annual in-come be uncer∣tain, or not certainly known.

And so much for Tartary.

OF CHINA.

CHINA is bounded on the East, with the Orientall Ocean; on the West, with India; on the North, with Tartary, from which separared by a continued chain of hills, part of those of Ararat; and where that chain is broken off, or interrupted, with a great wall extended 400 Leagues in length: built as they say, by Tzaintzon, the 117th King hereof; and on the South, partly with Cau••hin-China, a Province of India, partly with the Ocean.

It was called antiently Sine, or Sinarum Regio, by which name it is still called at the present by our mo∣dern L••••inist••; and from whence that of China seems to be derived. By Paulus Venet••s called Mangi, by the neighbouring Countries Sanglai, by the natives Taine, and Taybin••o, which last, signifies no o∣ther than a Realm; or by way of excellence, the Realm. By the Arabians it is called Tzinin; and the inhabitants call themselves by the name of ••angis.

It is said to contain in circuit 69516 D••ez of China measure, which reduced to our Europaean measure, will make a compass in the whole of 3000 Leagues: the length thereof extended from the borders of In∣dia, to Col••m, one of the Northern Provinces of this Continent, 1800 Leagues. But they that say so, speak at randome. For besides that 1800 Leagues in length, must needs carry a greater compass than 3000 Leagues; they make it by this reckoning to be bigger than Europe, which I think no sober man will gran••. And answerable to this vast compass, it is said also to contain no fewer than 15. Provinces, every one of which is made to be of a greater Continen•• ••han the greatest Realm we know in Europe: Yet not a Continent of wast ground, or full of unhabitable Desar••s, as in other places; but full of goodly Towns and Cities. The names of which Provinces, and the number of their Towns and Cities, I have thought fit once for all to lay down in this Diagramme following.

The Provinces, Cities, and Towns in China.

Pro.	Cit.	To.
1 Canton	37	190
2 Foquien	33	99
3 Olam	90	130
4 Sisnam	44	150
5 To••enchia	51	155
6 Cans••••	24	122
7 Minchian	25	29
8 Ochian	19	74
9 Honan	20	102
10 Pagnia	47	150
11 Taitan	47	78
12 Quinchen	45	113
13 Chagnian	43	95
14 Susnam	41	105
15 Quinsay	31	114

By which it doth appear, that in these fifteen Provinces there are 591 Cities; 1593 walled Towns; and besides them 1154 Castles, 4200 Towns unwalled, and such an infinite number of Villages, that the whole Country seems to be but one City onely.

It reacheth from the 130th, to the 160th Degree of Longitude: and from the Tropick of Cancer, to the 53d degree of Latitude. So that it lyeth under all the Climes from the third to the nineth, inclusively: the longest Summers day in the Southern parts, being thirteen hours and fourty minutes; increased in the most Northern parts, to 16 hours, and 3 quarters. Enjoying by this site an air somewhat of the hottest, especially in those parts whichly neer the Tropick; but with all very sound and healthy, and fit for the production of the choisest fruits.

The Countrey very rich and fertile insomuch that in many places they have two, and in some three har∣vests in a year; well cultivated, and sowed with all manner of grain, and planted with the best kind of fruits; which do not onely come to a speedy maturity, but to more excellencie and perfection than any of these Western parts. The like is also said of their Pearls, and Bezoar; fairer and of greater vertue than those of America, or any other part of the world besides. Particularly it aboundeth with Wheat, Bar∣ley, Rice, Wooll, Cotton, Olives, Vines, Flax, Silk, all kind of metals, Fruits, Cattle, Su∣gar, Honey, Rhub••rb, Camphire, Ginger, all kinds of Spices, medicinall woods called China-wood, by the name of the Countrey, Musk and Salt: the custome for which last in one City onely, which is that of C••••t••••, amounteth to the yearly value of 180000 Crownes. It yieldeth also an Herb, out of which they press a delicate juice, which doth not onely serve them instead of wine, but preserveth their health, and freeth them from many of those inconveniences which the immoderate use of wine doth breed to others. Such store of Po••ltry of all sorts, but of Ducks especially, that in the Town of Canton onely before

mentioned, it is thought there are 12000 eaten every day, one day with another.

The people are for the most part of swart complexion, but more or less, according to their neerness to the heats of the Sun; short-nosed, black-eyed, and of very thin beards. They wear their garments very long, and are so much delighted with their own fashion and composure, that as the Neg••o••s use to paint the devil 〈◊〉〈◊〉 as a colour contrary to their own: so when these Chinots use to draw the picture of deformed persons, they set him forth in a short coat, broad eyes, long nose, and a bushy beard. They are much given unto their B••••lics, and eat thrice a day, but then not immoderat••ly: drink their drink hot, and eat their meat with two sticks of Ivory, Ebon••••, or the like, not touching their meat with their hands at all, and therefore no great foulers of linnen. The use of silver forks, with us, by some of our Sp••uce gallants taken up of late, came from hence into Italy, and from thence to England. Their mariages they celebrate most commonly in the New-Moon, and many times put them off till March, when the year beginneth with them as it doth with us: in which solemnity they spare for no c••st or charge, musick, and Stage-plays, and good cheer many daies together. Yet doth not this take them off a jot from their natural industry, and their proficiencie in Manufactures and Mechanick Arts. For the sonne is bound to follow his fathers oc∣cupation: which law preventing the roaving about of idle people, and exciting in each breast an emula∣tion of every Art; maketh the Inhabitants excellent Artificers. In giving almes they are bountiful to the maimed, and the lame; but reject the blind, as being sufficiently able to get sustenance for themselves by corporall labour; as grinding of Corn, &c. They have long enjoyed the benefit of Printing, before it was known in Europe: but print not as we do, from the left hand to the right; nor as the Jews, from the right hand, to the left; but from the top of the leaf, dowaward to the bottom. Gunnes also have been used among them time out of mind: whence they are so well conceited of themselves, that they use to say, They themselves have two eyes, the Europaeans one, and the rest of the people of the world, not one. A pretty flourish of self-praising. Now Gunnes were in use in these Eastern Coun∣tries, and consequently also amongst them, even when Bacchus made his expedition into India (which was some three or four years before, or after the departure of Israel out of Aegypt,) Sir Walter Raw∣leigh seemeth to affirm: because Philostratus in the life of Apoll nius Tyanaeus, telleth us how Baccl••us was beaten from a City of Oxyd••acae, by thunder and lightning; which he interpreteth to be the Cannon. But certainly himself in another place of his most excellent book, acknowledgeth this Philostratus to have written fabulously: and therefore no fic•• fou••dation for a conceit so contrary to probability, and the opi∣nion of all times. Besides, whereas Dion telleth us, that by the benefit of thunder and lightning from Heaven, Severus discomfited Pes••••ninus N••ger; and by the same means, was himself repulsed from the wall of Petra in Arabia; we may (if this interpretationhold good) as easily maintain, that Severus had great Ordnance in his Camp, and the Arabians, in their Town. As for P••••••ting, whether John Gertrudenberg learned it of the Chinois; or whether good inventions, like good wits, do sometimes jump, I dare not determine: sure I am that he first taught it in Europe; and as some say, in the year 1440. At Halam a Town of Holland, It is first said to be practised; and at Mentz, perfected. Now wher∣as it is by some doubted, whether the Art of Printing be available to the proficiency and advancement of Learning, or not; I must not herein be both a Judge, and a party; but must leave the decision of the point to men uninteressed. Onely this I dare boldly say, that this most excellent invention hath been much abused, and prostituted to the lust of every foolish and idle paper-blurrer: the treasury of learning being never so full, and yet never more empty, over-charged so with the froth and scumme of foolish and unneceslary discourses. In which (though all Nations have their share therein, and we of late as much as any) the Dutch have been accompted the most blame-worthy: who not content to scatter their poor con∣ceptions onely amongst themselves, and print them in their own tongue onely (as our English Paper-Blur∣ers do) publish them in the Latine to the eye of others, and send them twice a-year to the publick Marts, though neither worth the Readers eye, nor the Printers hand. Scriptorum plus est hodie quam muscarum o∣lim cum caletur maxime; the complaint once of an old Comedian, was never truer than at the present.

But not to dive too deep into this dispute, the people, as before was said, are good Artisicers, in∣genious and excellent in all things which they take in hand: the porcellan dishes, curious carvings, and the fine painted works which we have in Tables, Leathers, Stuffes, being brought from thence. A poli∣tick and judicious Nation; but very jealous of their women, and great tyrants over them, not suffering them to go abroad, or sit down at the Table if any stranger be invited, unless he be some very neer kins∣man. A tyranny or restraint, which the poor women give no cause for, being said to be very honest, and much reserved; not so much as shewing themselves at a window for fear of offence: and if they use painting, as most of them do, it is rather to preserve themselves in the good affections of their husbands, than for any other lewd respects. For the most part of a fair hair, whereof very curious: binding it a∣bout their heads with Ribbands of silk, garnished with pearles and pretious stones. Neat in their dress, and very costly in their apparel, with reference to their estates, and the degree of their husbands: the rich∣er sort wearing Sattin striped with Gold, and interlaced with very rich Jewe's; the poorer in Serge, and razed velvets. They have most of them little feet, which they take great pride in, and for this cause bind them up hard from their very infancy: which they endure patiently though it be very painfull, because a small foot is accounted for so great a grace. And yet it is conceived that this proceedeth not so much from their own curiosity, as from the jealousy of the men, who have brought it in; to the end that they should not be able to go but with a great deal of pain, and that going with so ill a grace, and so little case, they should have no desire to stirre much abroad. A custome so antient and received, that it hath got the force of law; and if any mother should do otherwise in breeding their daughters, they would undergo some censure

or mark of infamy. If a desire to see their Parents get them the freedome of a visit, they are carryed to them in close chairs, and attended by so many waiters, that it is not possible that any man either so see them, or hold any discourse with them.

Of both Sexes it is thought that this Countrey containeth no fewer than 70 Millions. Which though it seem to be a number beyond all belief; yet it is knowingly averred, and may be thought probable enough, if we consider the spaciousness of the Countrey; 2. The secret goodness of the stars, and temperature of the air; 3. The abundance of all things necessary to life; 4. That it is not lawful for the King to make any war, but meerly defensive, and so they enjoy perpetuall peace; 5. That it is not lawfull for any 〈◊〉〈◊〉 to go out of the Countrey; and 6. That here the Sea is as well peopled as whole Provinces elsewhere. For the ships do resemble a City; in which they buy, sell, are born, and die. And on the River which watret•• the walls of ••anquin, up to Paquin, which is no less than 300 leagues, the ships are said to be so thick ranked, that it seemeth to be a continuall street.

The people hereof in matters of Religion, are generally all Gentiles, and conceive thus of the creation▪ That there was one 〈◊〉〈◊〉, who created Panzon, and Panzona, whose posterity remained 90000 years; but they for their wickedness being destroyed, Taine created L••titz••m, who had two horns; from the right came men, from the left came women. When any of them dieth, they cloath him in his best ap∣parell, all perfumed, set him in his best chair, and there all his neerest kindred kneeling before him, take their leave with tears. When he is coffined, they place him in a room richly furnished, and set by him a ta∣ble full of viands and good cheer, with candles continually burning on it. Not much unlike to which ce∣remonies, we find, how whilst the funerall was preparing for Francis the French King, his Status ap∣parelled in royall robes, with the Crown, Scepter, &c. was laid on his bed; whither dinner and supper was daily served in, with the like state and solem••ity as when he was living. But to return again to my dead Chinois; when he had lain, as is above said, fifteen dayes, he is carried forth to his funerall, the place whereof is in the fields: for to be buried within the walls, were a thing of all others the most wretch∣ed. Hither, when they are in the manner of a procession, come; they burn his body, and with it men, cattell, and other provision, for his attendance and sustenance in the other world: as they use in the funeralls of 〈◊〉〈◊〉. As great Idolaters as any, sacrificing to the very devil, and that upon the same reason, as the most ignorant sort of the Gentiles do, because forsooth he is a wicked and mischievous creature, and would otherwise hurt them.

Yet in the midle of this darkness there appeareth some light, whereby we may perceive that Christia∣nity had some footing here in the times foregoing; For they believe, that God is an immortall spirit; that by him the first man was made of nothing; that the soul dieth not with the body, but is capable of reward and punishment in another ••ife, according to the works it hath done in this. Which lest they should be thought to be onely some remainders of the light of nature, the ••arned men amongst the antient Greeks and Romans, having so much 〈◊〉〈◊〉 as this, without the Gospel; we may here add, that the Idol most generally worship∣ped by them, is painted with three heads looking one on another, signifying, as themselves affirm, that they have all but one will: which makes some think they had been antiently instructed in the doctrine of the holy Trinity. They have also the picture of a very fair woman holding a Child in her Arms, who as they say, was daughter of some great King, and that she was delivered of that Infant when she was a Virgin. And as some add, they have portraitures, of the fashion, and with the marks or Characters of the twelve Apostles (as usually painted in some part of the Christian Church): of whom they are able to say nothing, but that they were great Philosophers who lived vertuously here, and were therefore made Angels in Hea∣ven. And finally they hold that there is a great number of Saints, or men estated in an eminent degree of happiness, who in their times exceeded others in knowledge, industry, or valour, or lived an austere life without wronging any man, or otherwise deserved nobly of the common-wealth, as the Authors of some signall benefit unto their Countrey. These I conceive to be some evident remainders of Christianity, or the Remembrances rather of that Christianity which formerly was known amongst them: First planted here (as may be probably collected) by Saint Thomas, or some of his Disciples, an antient Breviary or Li∣turgy of the Indian Churches, giving good hint to it; Where it is said, Per D. Thomam regnum coe∣lorum volavit et ascendit ad S••nas: i. e. that by Saint Thomas the Kingdom of Heaven was preached un∣to those of China. Some Characters here were also of it in the time of the Tartars, though now oblite∣rated, and not visible but in these defacements. And in this state it stood till the time of our Fathers, in which the Jesuites (commendably industrious in the propagation of the Christian faith) not without great danger to themselves, have endeavoured, and in part effected, their conversion. For though they have gain∣ed but few Proselytes, (in regard of those infinite numbers of people which are said to live here) yet some Converts they have made amongst them, and thereby sown those seeds of that saving truth (though mingled with some Tares of their own) which may in time increase and spread over all the Countrey.

Hills of great note here are not many, here being but one Mountain touched upon by Ptolomy, in his description of the Countrie called Sinarum Regio, which we conceive to be this China: agreeable unto the observation of modern writers, by whom it is affirmed to be so plain and levell, and so unswelled with hills at all, that they have Carts and Coaches driven with sayles, as ordinarily as drawn with horses, in these parts. Not the less destitute of Rivers for this want of mountains, Ptolomy naming in it, 1. Aspthara. 2. Se∣nus. 3. Ambastus, and 4. Cotiaris; all which had there their fount and fall: and yet he knew the out-skirts of the Country onely. Here are also many great Lake••, not inferiour to some Seas in bigness; so plentifull in fish, as if they contended with the soyl, which should be most profitable: and yet so little swelled with winds (though the winds many times blow strongly) that both upon these Lakes, and on the Rivers and Sea-coasts, they pass up and down in sinall barks, with no other sail than a bough set up an-end

in the middest of them; by the help whereof they make good speed in their navigations. Nor do these Lakes or Rivers use to overslow their banks, or endamage the Countrey: but when they do, it brings some fatail ruine with it; as in the year 1557 when the Lake of Sancey breaking out overwhelmed seven Cities, many Towns, and of Villages, and Countrey people, almost infinite numbers.

Towns of most note amongst the Sinae, though nothing but the names be remaining of them, 1. Bram∣na; and 2. Rhabana, honoured with the title of Civitates. 3. Aspithra. 4. Achatara, more within the land; but all four under some degree of Northern Latitude. 5. Thine, the Metropolis of the Countrey, by some called Sinae. 6. Sarata. 7. Catoranagara; these on the South-side of the line. But in this Ptolomy was mistaken, it being found by the more certain observations of our later writers, that no part of Chin: comes within 20 degrees of the Aequinoctiall; and so not capable of having any Towns or Cities of a Southern Latitude. Here was also a large by called Sinaerum Sinus; a Promontory named Notium, in the fourth degree of Northern Latitude; and another named Satyrocum, lying under the Aequinox. More than this, of the Cities of the antient Sinae, I have nothing to say, which I dare offer to the Reader.

But to behold them as they are presented to our view in the modern China, it hath been said, that for number there are no fewer than 591 Cities, and those so uniformly built, so conformably to one another, that they differ not in form, and fashion, but in quantity onely. Much like the Cities of Utopia mentioned by Sir Thomas More, Idem situs omnibus, eadem, quatenus per locum licet, rerum facties; so neer re∣sembling one another, that he who knoweth but one of them, may conjecture at all. And this is the man∣ner of their building. Most of their Cities have the benefit of some navigable River neer which they stand: the waters whereof serve them both for navigation, and domestick uses. Two great Streets crossing one another in the very middest, so broad, that ten horsemen may ride a brest in the narrowest of them; so strait, that a man standing in the middle, may see either end: each end being shut up with a Gate of great strenghth and beauty; and those Gates fortified and strengthned with thick plates of iron. Generally greater and more stately than those of Europe, but defective in that point of elegancy which the Magnificent Churches, and more sumptuous buildings for the dispatch of publique businesses, in these parts abound with. Their private houses for the most part are also low, and destitute of Porches, Windows, Galleries; the principall orna∣ments and graces of Architecture. Nor are their Cities built onely for resort, or trade, but for strength and safety, environed with deep and broad ditches, the wal's of brick or stone, strong above belief, plan∣ted with Ordnance and Artillery in convenient places: and every night the Gates not only locked but sealed; not to be opened till unsealed by the principall Magistrate.

But not to rest our selves on this generall Character, let us take a more particular view of some of the principall. And in that list we find 1. Quins••y, called Suntien by the natives, containing once in cir∣cuit an hundred miles, and having in the middest of it a Lake of 30 miles compass, in which Lake are two goodly Ilands, and in them two magnificent Palaces, adorned with all necessaries, either for majesty, or convenience; in which are celebrated the publique feasts, and the mariages of the better sort. The Lake is nourished with divers Rivers, the chief being Polysango, and Cacam••can; on which Rivers 12000 bridges lift up their stately heads: and under whose immense Arches, great ships, with sails spread abroad, and top and top-gallant, may and do usually pass. It was also said to have had ten market-places, each of them four miles asunder, and every one in form quadrangular, the sides thereof half a mile in length. Here were said also to be twelve Companies of tradesmen or Artizans, each company having 12000 shops; and in all a million and 600000 Families. But now on the removall of the Court from hence to Cambalu by the Tartars; and since to Nanquin and Piquin by the Prince; of the house of Hombu, seconded part∣ly the fury of the warres, and partly by the violence of Earth-quakes; it hath lost no small part of her an∣tient beauty, and renown. 2. Vnguen, famous for the abundance of sugar there made. 3. Nanquin, seated 9 leagues from the Sea, on a fair and navigable River, whereon ride for the most part no fewer than 10000 of the Kings ships, besides such as belong to private men. The Town in compass 30 miles, being girt with three fair brick walls, having large and stately Gates: The streets in length two leagues, wide, and paved; the number of houses is about 200000. so that it may equall four of the fairest Cities of Eu∣rope. 4. Paquin or Pagnia, where the King continually resideth; and that, either because the air here∣of is more healthfull and pleasant, than any of the other, or because it lieth neer unto the Tartars, with whom the Chinois are in perpetuall warre: so that from hence the dangers which may by their invasions happen unto the Countrey, may with more convenience be either prevented, or remedied. The City said to be inferiour to Nanquin for bulk and beauty, but to exceed it in multitude of Inhabitants, Souldiers, and Magistrates, occasioned by the Kings abode. Environed on the South, with two walls, of so great breadth that twelve horsemen may runne a brest upon them; on the North, with one wall onely, but that so strong and vigilantly guarded, that they fear as little annoyance on that side as they do on the other. But the greatest Omament hereof is the Royall Palace, compassed about with a triple wall, the outwardmost of which would well inviron a large City: within which space, besides the many lodgings for Eunuchs and other Courtiers, are Groves, hills, fountains, Rivers, and the like places of pleasure: larger in circuit, but not comparable for the Arts of Architecture to the Royall Palaces of Europe. 5. Canton, supposed to be the Caltigara of Ptolomy; by the Chinois called Quamchen, the least of the Metropolitan Cities of this Countrey, but beautified with many triumphant Arches, a navigable River, large streets, and many goodly bridges. Fortified with deep trenches, 83. Bulwarks, and seated in so rich a soyl both for Fowl and Catteil, that here are said to be eaten dayly 6000 hogs, and 12000 Ducks, besides proportionable quantity of other victuals. If this be one of the least of their Metropolitans, what may we fancy of the greatest? A Town in which the Portugals drive a wealthy trade, being permitted in the day-time to come within the City it self; but at night excluded, and forced to find lodging in the Suburbs. By reason of which

restraint, they have settled their Mart at Macaan, the Port-Town to this, where they have their Factor, and many Families, the Town being almost wholly peopled by them. 6. Suchean, seated in the ma∣rishes like Venice, but more commodiously, because those marishes are of fresh water; the streets and houses founded upon piles of pine-tree; with many bridges, and conveniencies for passage both by land and water. Well traded, as the fittest Center for dispersion of merchandise from all the other Ports of the Kingdome: by the multitude and frequency of ships, almost denying faith to the eyes, which would think all the ships of China to be here assembled. So infinitely rich, that the small Region whereof it is the head containing but eight Cities more, payeth 12 millions to the king of yearly income. 7. Hamseu, the Metropolis of the Province of Chequian, about two dayes journey from the Sea (of which distance from the Sea is Sucheau also) in compass less than Namquin, but better builded: no place in it taken up with gardens, Orchards, or other pleasures; but all employed for shops, houses, and other edifices. So beauti∣fied with Triumphant Arches, erected to the honour of deserving Magistrates, that in one street there are 300 of great mass or workmanship. The Temples magnificent and many; the bank-sides of the Chan∣nels watering every street, beset with trees of shade, and most excellent fruits: and in the midle of the City a round high mountain, which gives the eye a gallant prospect into every street. And not farre off a pleasant Like, of great breadth and length, the banks whereof are beautified with groves and gardens, and the Lake it self even clothed with vessels of all sorts, on which the Citizens use to feast, and entertain their idle time with plaies and spectacles. Two Cities so replenished with all kind of pleasures, that the Chi∣nois use it for a Proverb, Thien Xam, thien thum, ti Xamsu hum, that is to say, look what the Hall or Presence Chamber is in heaven, that Hamseu and Sucheau are on earth. 8 Focheo, beautified amongst many other Stately structures, with a magnificent Tower erected on 40 marble pillars of great elegancy, cost, and bigness, every pillar being 40 spans in height, and 12 in breadth: not to be parallelled, as some say, by any the like work in Europe. 9. Lochiau, in which are 70000 families. 10. Colans, famous for the best Porcellane. 11. Xaitou, whose Harbour is never without 500 ships. 12. Scianhay, within 24. houres sail of the Isle of Japan, and therefore defended with a strong Garrison and a Navy. Situate in a pleasant and wholesome soyl, the whole Countrey so set forth with trees, as if it were one continued Orchard. So populous, that it conteineth 40000 housholds, most of which get their livelihood by weav∣ing Cottons: it being supposed that here are 200000 persons which attend that maintenance. 13. Chin∣chi••••su, whence by a River made by hand there is a passage to Sucheau; the water of which never freez∣eth, and for that cause so clogged with ships in time of winter, that the passage is stopped with the multi∣tudes of them. 14. Cergivan, of the same fashion with the rest, though of lesser note. So like they are to one another, that we may say with Ovid on the like ocasion.

—Facies non omnibus una, Nec diversa tamen, qualem decet esse sororum.

Which I find thus English••d by George Sandys.

Amongst them all no two appear the same, Nor differ more than Sisters well became.

The antient Inhabitants of this Country, in the time of Ptolomy, were towards the North, the Semantini, bordering a mountain of that name, and the only one remembred in all this Countrey; more Southward, the Acadra, and Aspithrae; Towards the Sea the Anabastae, and Ichthyophagi (these last so cal∣led from living wholly upon fish.) From what Original they came it is hard to say, whether from the In∣dians, or the Scythes: or that it was primitively planted by some of the posterity of Noah, before the enterprise of Babel; which last may propably be concluded from the extreme populousness of the Country, the many magnificent Cities, their industry and ingenuity in all Arts and Sciences, not to be taught them by their neighbours, more ignorant in those things than themselves. And hereunto the Chronicles of Chi∣na seem to give some ground, which tell us of 340 Kings, which for the space of four thousand years have therein reigned. For as their Chronicles inform us, (if they may be credited) the Countrey being with∣out Rule or settled government, was first reduced into order by one Vitey, the Sonne of Ezolom, by whom the people were instructed in Physick, Astrology, Divination, and the art of tillage: to which this Vi∣tey, having found out the way of cutting or sawing timber, added the use of Ships and Houses, and ma∣ny other the effects of mechanicall hands. Having by the valour of Lincheon one of his Commanders, sub∣dued a great part of the Countrey, he drew them into Towns and villages, distributed them into Offices, and severall trades, disposing those of the same trade into Streets by themselves, and commanding that no man without leave from himself, or his Officers, should follow any other trade than that of his Father. He prescribed them also the fashion of their Garments, taught them the art of making and dying Silks: and having reigned an hundred years, left the Kingdome well established unto his posterity. Of this race there are said to have been 217 Kings, who held the State 2257 years. The last of them was that Tzaintzon, who being ill-neighbored by the Scythians (not yet called Tartars) built that vast wall spoken of before, extended 400 Leagues in length, and at the end of every League a strong Rampart or Bulwark, continual'y garrisoned, and well furnished with all warlike necessaries. He being slain by some of his Subjects, burdned and wasted with this work, the race of Vitey ended; and that of Anchosan succeeded, a Prince of much prudence, but greater courage; In his line it continued under 25 Kings, but shrewdly shaken towards the close by a civil war, betwixt Trunthey the 23 of this house, and his Nephew Laupy. Hardly well settled under Quiontey the last of this house, when Tzobu, a great Tyrant of the other faction, set upon him, and slew him. And so the majesty of the blood-ro••all be∣ing trod under foot, the Crown was also tossed from one hand to another, and made a prey unto the stron∣gest: there being of the race of this Tzobu, eight Kings, reigning 62▪ years. Of the race of Dian, five Kings,

who reigned thirty one. Of the race of Tzoy, three onely, who reigned thirty seven. Of the race of Ten∣c••, one and twenty, who held the Crown 294 years: and eight there were who reigned 120 years, of the house of Tautzom. Of other upstart families to the number of five, were fourteen Kings also, who go∣verned onely for the space of 66 years: And then one Zaitzon, deriving himself from Vifey, the first King of this Countrey, obtained the Kingdome; which he, and seventeen of his posterity, for the space of 320 years, governed with much peace and honour. Forfar, the last King of that Royall Family, foretold by prophecy that he should be deprived of his Kingdome by one who had an hundred eyes, neglected the Advertisement, as unworthy credit: but it fell out agreeable to that prediction, when vanquished by Ch••••••-baan (which word signifieth an hundred eyes) Lieutenant unto Vzan, a Tartarian Prince, but Feudatarie and Vassal to the Great Cham. China thus made a Province of the Tartarians, was governed for the space of 93 years, under nine Tartar-Kings, Tributaries to the Great Cham: and when it did re∣volt in the daies of Gino-Cham, the fourth from ••ingis, it was reduced again by the valour of Tamer∣l••e. For though Hombu, or Combu, the new elected King of China, having expelled the Tartars, and repaired the breaches of the wall by them thrown down, had brought into the field an Army of 350000 horse and foot: yet nothing could withstand the fortune of Tamerlane, who obtained the victory, with the slaughter of 60000 Chinois. But wisely moderating his prosperity, he thought it the best and safest way, to let that Nation have a King of their own; imposing on him the fine of 300000 Crowns of ready money, and such other conditions as were most pleasing to the victor, and yet not destructive to the vanquished. Before this time the Chinois were possessed of a great part of that Countrey which we now call by the name of Cathay; which lying without the wall of China, was taken from them by Tamer∣lane, and made by him part of the Empire of Tartary. Which possibly might be the reason, (part of Ca••hay being antiently a member of the Kingdome of China, and still retaining somewhat of their customs and ingenuity) that by some writers, easily misguided by such probability, Cathay and China have been reckoned to be one and the same. Nor did the Empire of the Chinois extend in those times one∣ly over part of S••ythia, but also over part of India, and most of the Oriental Ilands. But the Princes of the house of Hombu finding their own Kingdome large enough to content their desires, abandoned all the Accessories and Out-parts of their Dominions: prompted there∣unto, not onely by their own moderation, but by some misfortunes which befell them. For as we find that the Romans having by the fury of two violent tempests, lost no fewer than 206 of their ships and gallies, resolved to abandon (and for a long time did forbear) the Seas, which had used them so unkindly: So the Chinois having received a great overthrow, and loss of 800 ships, nigh unto Ze••lan, they freed all the Ilands from obedience unto them, and contented themselves with the bounds which nature had bestowed on them. And of their moderation herein, we have a late example. For when the people of Corea, a small Iland a butting on the confines of China, were invaded by the Japonites, they submit∣ted themselves unto the King of China: who having repulsed the enemy, and thereby cleared his own Countrey from danger, presently redelivers over unto the Coreans, their Town and liberty. A rare fact of a contented people. Which whether it favoured of greater moderation or magnanimity, I am not able to determine. In this family hath the Realm continued under twelve Kings for the space of 200 years and upward, reckoning from Hombu unto Boneg: who being the twelfth of this line, succeeded his elder bro∣ther, unfortunately slain with a fall from an horse. Reported for a Prince of good disposition, great judge∣ment, and a severe Justiciary. But whether still alive, or who hath since succeeded, if he be deceased, I am yet unsatisfied: though whosoever he be that now sits in the throne, or at least pretends a right unto it, he hath but little joy in this great estate; the Tartars being called in to a bet some differences touching the succession: who finding their advantages, and the unwarlikeness of the People, are said to have lately broken down the Partition-wall, and let in infinite numbers of their Country-men, and made themselves Masters in short time of the best parts of the Countrey. In which estate it now standeth, for ought I have heard unto the contrary.

The Government of this Kingdome is meerly tyr••••••icall; there being no other Lord but the King; no title of dignity or nobility ever known amongst them; nor toll or duty paid unto any but to him: the youn∣ger Princes of the blood being mantained by stipends, and annuall pensions, large enough to support their trains, but without any Lands or Tenants, for fear of drawing on them any great dependances. The King alone is the generall Landlord, and him the subjects do not onely reverence as a Prince, but adore like a God. For in the chief City of every Province, they have the Kings portraiture made of gold, which is always covered with a veil: and at every New-moon, the Magistrates and other inferiour Officers use to kneel before it, as if it were the King himself. By these and other artifices of the like contrivement the Common-people are kept in such awe and fear, that they are rather slaves than subjects: calling their King the l••mp of the world, and Son of the evershining Sun, without whose light they were able to see nothing. In every Province, except Paquin and Tolenchia onely, he hath his Deputies or Vice-Royes, maintained by liberall stipends from the publique treasury: but those he governeth by himself. Some laws they have, and those affirmed to have been written 2000 years since, as is like enough they were. So strongly do they favour of the ignorance and A••heism of the darkest times: the manner of life by them allowed, most ob∣scene and shameless, their idolatries most gross and palpable, their exorcisms ridiculous, and the prostituti∣on of their Virgins most abhominable, and the variety of sensuall prophanations, to an illuminated mind most base and contemptible. In a word, nothing commendable in their course of life (notwithstanding the brags which they make of themselves) but their Arts and industry.

The forces which this King is able to draw into the Field must needs be infinite, considering that incre∣dible number of subjects under his command. For whereas France is thought to contain 15 millions of

people; Italy, with the Isles, as many; Germany, with the Switzers and Belgick Provinces, about that pro∣portion; Spain not above seven Millions, and the Kingdome of England about four: this Countrey one-is computed at 70 millions; which is more by 15 millions than all together. Proportionably his Levies must be so much greater than can be ordinarily raised out of those Countries. But because it may be thought that his subjects, though more in number, may be less trained to the warres than those of Europe; the contrary is affirmed by such as have taken an estimate of the forces which every Province is bound to entertain in continuall readiness. And by that estimate it appeareth, that in the year 1557 (though a time of peace) there were dispersed in the fifteen Provinces of this Realm, to the number of five millions; 846500 Foot, and 948350 Horse. Nor is he less powerfull for Sea-service, having continually great Fleets for the guard of his costs in continuall attendance; and many more ready to set out when there is oc∣casion: insomuch that the Chinois use to say in the way of a Proverb, that their King is able to make a bridge of ships from China to Malaca, which are 500 leagues asunder. Some of these ships (whereof the King hath above a thousand of his own, besides those of his subjects) of great magnificence and beauty: the Officers and Souldiers in all which are exceeding well paid, and rewarded answerably to their merits. And as this King is able to raise greater forces than any, from his own estates; so doth he also de facto do it, when the urgency of his affairs do require it of him: his ordinary stint being 300000 foot, and 200000 horse, without which compleat number (not onely in the muster-rols, but in bodies of men) he vouch∣safes not to go into the field.

Answerable unto these great Levies of men; must be his Revenue: which they who have travelled in this search, (if they tell us true, and do not build upon an hope of not being confuted, as for my part I fear they do) affirm to be 120 millions of Crowns; answered unto him out of the profit of the mines of Gold, Silver, and other metalls; the tenth of all commodities which the Earth brings forth; the tolls imposed on that uspeakable quantity of merchandise, which passeth on so many navigable Rivers from one Town to another; the customes taken of all those rich wares which are brought into Europe, and the Gabell laid on Salt in all parts of his Kingdome. Out of which summe, the payment of his Fleet discharged, the entertainment of the Souldiers satisfied, and his Court defraied; there remaineth 40 millions of Crowns de claro to be disposed of, either in his treasury, or private pleasures, or the works of magnificence, and o∣stentation.

And so much for China.

OF INDIA.

INDIA is bounded on the East, with the Orientall Ocean, and some part of China; on the West, with the Persian Empire; on the North, with some branches of Mount Taurus, which divide it from Tartary; and on the South, with the Indian O∣cean. So called from the River Indus, the neerest of esteem and note in all the Country, towards these parts of the world.

It is conceived to be the largest Country of any one name in the world, except China and Tartaria; affirmed by Pomponius Mela, to be of such a great extent on the Sea-coasts of it, that it was as much as a ship could sail in 40 daies. Extended from 106, to 159 Degrees of Longitude; and from the Aequator to the 44th degree of Northern Latitude. By which accompt it lieth from the beginning of the first, to the end of the sixt Clime: the longest Summers-day in the Southern parts being 12 hours only, and in the parts most North, 15 hours and an half.

Concerning the monstrous Fables which the ages foregoing have delivered to us of this Countrey, give me leave to say, that as the Poets used of old to fill up the times of which they were ignorant, with strange fictions, and prodigious metamorphoses; or as our modern Geographers, in the Maps of the world, fill up those unknown parts thereof, of which they can give us no certain description, with strange pictures and uncouth shapes of beasts and trees: so also the writers in former ages have filled the more remote Coun∣tries, of which they knew little, with such impossible and incredible relations. Hence there have been attributed to this India, the fables of men with dogs heads; of men with one leg only, yet of great swift∣ness; of such as live by sent; of men that had but one eye, and that in their foreheads; and of others, whose ears did reach unto the ground. It is reported also that this people by eating a dragons heart and li∣ver, attain to the understanding of the languages of beasts; that they can make themselves, when they list, invisible; that they have two tubs, whereof the one opened yields wind, the other rain, and the like. But these relations, and the rest of this strain, I doubt not but the understanding Reader knoweth how to judge of, and what to believe. For my part I am of the same mind with Curtius, Plura equidem tran∣scribo quam credo; nec enim affirmare aus••us sum quae dubito, nec subducere sustineo quae accepi: I may perhaps relate some things which I do not credit, but shall not let them pass without some censure; that so I neither may impose any thing on the Readers belief, nor defraud him any thing conducible to his contentation.

The Countrey, to report no more of it than it doth deserve, enjoyeth an exact temperature of the air; two Summers, (or one as long as two,) and a double encrease: blest with all things which are either neces∣sary to the life of man, or of convenience and delight; particularly with mines of Gold and Silver, and with precious stones; with spices of all sorts, and Civets; with the best medicinable drugs; metals of all kinds, except Copper and Lead; abundance of all sorts of Cattel, except horses. Somewhat defective also in Wheat and Vines, that so this Countrey might be beholding unto others, as well as others to this. Famed also for abundance of Camels, Apes, Dragons, Serpents, Rhinocerots, Elephants. These last more savouring of reason and human ingenuity, or else more tractable and docile, than any brute Creature whatsoever. Of this we have a fair instance in the story of the Acts of Alexander. The Elephant which King Porus sate on, finding his Master strong and lusly, rushed boldly into the thickest of the E∣nemies Army: but when he once perceived him to be faint and weary, he withdrew himself out of the battell, kneeled down, and into his own trunk received all the Arrows which were directed at his master.

The greatness of the Creature makes it yet more admirable, that either he should have soul enough of his own, to actuate so vast a body; or being of such strength and bigness should submit himself to the instru∣ctions of another: some of these Indian Elephants, as Aelianus hath affirmed, being nine Cubits high, and as many long, and in breadth or thickness about five Cubits. Nor doth the Sea afford less plenty or variety, than we find on shore: yielding abundance of the richest and fairest Pearls, huge sholes of fish, and amongst them the Whale or great Leviathan; exceeding the proportion of that land-monster the Ele∣phant. For though the ordinary dimension of the Whale be but 36 Cubits in length, and eight in thick∣ness: yet Nearchus in Arianus is said to have measured one in these Indian Seas, which was of the length of 50 Cubits, and of breadth proportionable: not to say any thing of that incredible report of Plinie, who speaketh of some Indian Whales which were nine hundred and threescore Foot, or four A∣cres long.

The people are of five sorts, and as many Religions, that is to say the Naturall Indians, derived from the Original Inhabitants of it▪ 2. Moors, or Arabians, who more than two hundred years ago pos∣sessed themselves of some Sea-Towns driving the Natives up higher into the Countrey; 3. Jews, scat∣tered

and dispersed (as in other places) into all parts of it; 4. Tartars, in those parts and Provinces which are under the Great Mongul; and 5. Portugueze, who have many Colonies and Factories in the Ports and Islands; but brag as if they had made a conquest of all the Countrey. Which notwith∣standing, considering that the Naturall Indians are by far the greatest number, we must relate to them on∣ly in the Character, which is made of this people. Affirmed to be tall of stature, strong of body, and of complexion inclining to that of the Negroes: of manners Civill, and ingenuous, free from fraud in their dealings, and exact keepers of their words. The Common sort but meanly clad, for the most part naked, content with no more covering than to hide their shame. But those of greater estates and fortunes (as they have amongst them many antient and Noble families) observe a majesty in both Sexes, both in their At∣tendants and Apparel; sweetning the last with oils, and perfumes, and adorning themselves with Jew∣els, Pearls, and other Ornaments befitting. They eat no flesh, but live on Barley, Rice, Milk, Ho∣ney, and other things without life.

The W••me•• not of much fairer complexion than the men, yet of lovely countenances, wear their hair long and loose, but covered with a thin vail of Calicut Lawn. Their ears hung with many rings, so great and heavy, that they are torn, and stretched to much disproportion; their noses also ringed, and behung with Jewels according to their estate and quality. Servilely obsequious to their husbands, whose af∣fections they divide amongst them without jarre or jealousy: the men allowed here, as in all the East, the use of many wives, whom they buy of their parents for a yoke of Oxen; and may mary as often as they list. In which they have too great a privilege above the women, who after the decease of their common hus∣band, do either burn in the same flame with him, or else are forced to doom themselves to perpetuall Widow-Hood. But of this we may speak more hereafter when we come to the parti∣culars.

The Christian faith was first planted in these Countries by Saint Thomas, from whom the remainders of Christianity take denomination; and unto whom the Records and Miniments of that Church do as∣cribe their conversion. For in one of their Treviaries written in the Chaldaean tongue, and translated in∣to Latine by Father John Maria Campa•••• a Jesuite, we find it thus, Per D. Thomam evanuit error Idololatriae ab Indis, &c. i. e. By Saint Thomas, the errors of Idolatry vanquished out of the Indies; by Saint Thomas, they received the Sacrament of Baptism, and the Adoption of Sonnes; by Saint Tho∣mas, they believed and confessed the Father, the Son, and Holy-Ghost; by Saint Thomas, they kept the faith received of one God: And finally by Saint Thomas, the splendour of saying doctrine did ap∣pear to all India. His body as they say, in••ombed in the City of Maliapar, upon the Coast of Choroman∣d••ll; the truth of which tradition I dispute not here. But this plantation of the Gospel by the hand of Saint Thomas was not universal over all the Countrey; but in some parts and Provinces only: or else was forced to give ground a while to prevailing Heathenism. For in the reign of Constantine, we read how the Indians living on the further-side of the Rive Ganges (for so I understand the Indi interiores of my Author) were converted to the Faith byr•• the ministery of one Frumentius, of the City of Tyr••••, who having spent the greatest part of his time amongst them, was employed in that service, and consecrated the first Bishop (for those Churches) by the great Athanasius of Alexandria. But being the foundation of this building was laid by Saint Thomas, the remainder of Christians here being, ascribe the whole work to him; called therefore Christians of Saint Thomas. Governed origi∣nally by their own Bishops, subordinate to an Archbishop of their own also, residing at Augamale fifteen miles from Cochin, one of the chief Cities of this Countrey: who for long time acknowledged obedience to the Patriarch of Musal, by the name of the Patriarch of Babylon, as by these Christians of India he is still termed. The number of these Christians computed at 15 or 16 thousand families; or at 70000 persons in the accompt of others: inhabiting for the most part in that large tract of ground, which begin∣ning at the outlets of Ind••••s and Ganges, stretcheth unto the Cape or Promontory called Cape Comari. The points wherein they differed from the Church of Rome, 1. Their administring the Sacrament of the Eu∣charist in bread seasoned with salt; 2. Administring in both kinds, but using instead of wine (which is scatce or not at all to be had in this Countrie) the juice of raisins softn••d in water over night, and so pressed forth; 3. Not baptizing children untill 40 dayes old, xcept it be in danger of death; 4. Permitting no Images in their Churches, but that of the Cross; 5. Allowing one mariage to their Priests, but debar∣ing the second; 6. In painting God with three heads on one body to denote the Trinity. 7. Denying the use of extreme Vnction; and 8. Not acknowledging the Popes Supremacie. And in this State they stood till the year 1599, when by the sollicitation of the Portugals, they renounced their obedience to the Pa••riarch of Musall, and submitted their Churches to the jurisdiction of the Pope of Rome, in a National Synod held at Diamper, not farre from Maliapar by the Arch-bishop of Goa (the Primate of the Portugals in those parts) not onely rejecting all opinions contrary to the Romish Tenets, but deli∣vering all their Books and Liturgies to be altered and reformed by the said Arch-bishop, according to the Rites and doctrines of the Church of Rome, which was done accordingly.

But these comparatively to the rest, come not to an handfull; the main body of the People wallowing in their Gentilism; and still retaining many of those antient Customes, which they used of old: as viz. 1. Not knowing their wives after they have born them two children; 2. Nor keeping them, if after five years ••••habitation, they can raise no issue by them; but then exchanging them for others; 3. Reward∣ing none for any military exploit, if they bring not with them in their hands the head of an enemy; 4. Killing their Friends, before they were withered or decaied by Age, or sickness. To these they have since added others of a later invention, perhaps more barbarous, of which we may have opportunity to speak anon. Their Priests or learned men, in the time of old were called Brachmanes from one Brachman, the prescriber of their

Rites and Laws, by whom instructed in the Rudiments of their Philosophy; a Sect of which, from their going naked, had the name of Gymnosophists; who were to them as the Chaldaei, to the Assyrians; the Magi, to the Persians; and the Druides, to the antient Britans. Had in great Reverence by the People, and living for the most part an austere and solitary life in Caves and Desarts; feeding on herbs, poorly apparelled, and for a time abstaining from all carnall pleasures: but that time past, they may indulge them∣selves more liberty, and admit the company of women. Others of them live together with the common-people, as being their ordinary Priests. Of these, the great Alexander, when he was in this Countrey, surprized ten; one of them called by the name of Calanus, with whom he had a great deal of communica∣tion: propounding to him many strange questions, and receiving back to many of them, (as himself con∣fessed) some not unsatisfying though strange answers. To these Gymnosophists, or Brachmans the Bramines do now succeed, both in place and authority; but differ from them most extremely in point of learning, and the civilities of their lives: these Bramines being the most impure, libidinous, and sensuall beasts in all the Countrey; privileged with the first nights lodging of every Bride, which when sated with their filthy lust, they sell, or trafick with, to strangers; serving as Stallions to old men, and as Pandars to young; so flesh'd in wickedness, and ignorant of all good letters, that they have nothing of a man but the voice and shape. Mahometanism is also entertained in a great part of the Countrey, first brought in by the Tartars, and neighbouring Persians unto whom conter••••nous; but much increased by the victories of the Great Mongul: who being originally a Tartar, and of that Religion, hath caused it to be propaga∣ted in most parts of his large dominions.

Mountains of most note in it, besides Caucasus, and some other of the branches of Taurus or Arara••, common to this, and the Tartarian and Persian Empires, 1. Sardonix, full of mines of those precious stones which are called after the name of the Mountain. 2. Vindius. 3. Bittigo. 4. Adisathras. 5. Those called Apocopi, and 6. Those named Orodii. And on the further side of Ganges. 7. Se••yrrus. 8. Maeandrus. 9. Those called Damusi, and 10. Semanthinus; part of this last extending also unto China. All of them very fruitfull in the production of mines, and Rivers, as will appear by looking over the particulars when we come unto them.

But the Mountain of Chief note of all is that which Ptolomy calleth Bitigo, and is now named Gates, the Southern part of the great Mountain Imaus spoken of before: extended from Mount Caucasus, where it crosseth the Taurus in right Angels, to Cape Comari, a known Promontory of Industan, or the Hi∣ther India (which it divideth into East and West) for the space of 400 leagues and upwards. Conceived by Postellus a learned Writer, to be that Mount Sephar, mention whereof is made in the 10th of Genesis, where it is said to be the utmost Eastern limit of the Sonnes of Joktan, Gen. 10. v. 30. With probabili∣ty enough, for ought I can see, the sonnes of Joktan being settled in these parts of India, and the Provinces of the Persian Empire which lie neerest to them. And so farre Stephanus doth concurre with Postell, as to affirm of this Mount Sephar, that it is Mons Indiae, an Indian Mountain: both of them grounding on Saint Hierom, who expressly saith, Sopheramons Orientis in India, juxta quem habitaverunt filii Jectam, i. e. that Sephar, or Sopher, is the name of a Mountain of the East in India; neer to which dwelt the sonnes of Jocktan. More probably, without doubt, than that we should transfer it into A∣mercia, as I see some do; and make it there to be the great Mountain of the Andes, which runneth the whole length of Peru, from one end to the other; and thence as some will have it to the Streights of Ma∣gellan. Which should we grant, we must not look for Joktan, or the sons of Joktan, either in Arabia Fe∣lix, where Bochartus placeth them; nor in the Eastern parts of Asia, where most probably they may be found: but we must cross the vast Orientall Ocean, and look for them in a place where they never were: besides, that granting this for true, we must allow America to have been known in the time of Moses; which no Author that I ever met with did so much as dream of.

Rivers of most note are, 1. Indus, which ariseth out of that part of Taurus which the Antients cal∣led Paropamisus, the Moderns, Naugrocot; and having received into it 19 other Rivers, after a course of 900 miles, falleth into the Ocean at seven Mouths, that is to say 1. Sagappa, being the most Western, 2. Sinthum, 3. Aureum, 4. Cariphi, 5. Sappara, 6. Sabalassa, 7. Lonibare, the most Eastward. But five of these being chaoked with sands, or drawn into the neighbouring Chanells, there now re∣mains but only two. A River famous in Records and antient stories for giving name unto the Country, and that so celebrated voyage of Alexander, who sayled down it towards the Indian Ocean: the voyage holding above five moneths, of which there is said to have passed no day wherein he sai••ed not 15 miles, or 600 Furlongs. 2. Ganges, which riseth as some say from the Mountain Imaus, (or rather from that part of Taurus, where Imaus falleth right upon it,) and falling headlong down the Rocks, is first col∣lected into a Lake, or Pool (supposed by others for the fountain and Original of it) whence with a gentler pace it passeth towards the Ocean; taking in by the way, as is said by Pliny, 30 navigable Rivers. In the narrowest place of eight miles breadth, in the broadest 20. seldome so shallow but that the depth there∣of is 100 foot, or 20 Geometrical paces. Parted into five great Chanels it falleth at last into the Sea; the first of which most towards the West, is called Cambysum, 2. Magnum, 3. Camberychum, 4. Psendostomum, and 5. that which lyeth furthest towards the East, called Autiboli. This River erro∣neously supposed to be that Pison which watered Paradise: and to encrease the reputation of the error, we find it countenanced by Josephus, and other no less eminent names; and also backed by some traditi∣ons of the people which inhabit neer it. By whom it is affirmed that one of the Bengalan Kings sent men up the River, who came at last to a pleasant place, blest with a fragrant Earth, sweet air, and quiet waters; beyond which they could go no further. The truth and reality whereof doth so possess them, that at the mouth of this River called Gangasagie, such as are weary of this world use to cast themselves into the cur∣rent,

and are presently devoured by a fish called Sea-dogs, by whom they hope to find a quick passage to Paradise. The occasion of which error among the Antients proceeded from those words of the Scripture, in which it is affirmed of Pison, that it compassed the land of Havilah: which granting that it did, infer∣reth not that either this River must be Pison, or that India is intended by that Havilah. For besides Havilah the sonne of Jocktan, planted in some part of India; there was another Havilah the sonne of Chus, settled in the land of Havilah or Chasiana, not far from Babylon: this last indeed watered by the River Pison, and the first by Ganges; too farr asunder, and divided by too many Nations, to be taken or mistaken one for another. But not less famous, because none of those which neighboured the garden of Eden: perhaps of greater fame than any of those which did. For to this River do the superstitious Indians make their solemn Pilgrimages, vainly conceiving that they shall be sure of their eternity, if at the time of their death they may drink of this water. To the overflowings of this River do the People ascribe the fer∣tility of the Countreys adjoining, as the Aegyptians do to Nilus. And finally, by this River was the whole Countrey antiently, and at this present is, divided into two main parts, (each subdivided into many particular Provinces) viz. 1. India intra Gangem, 2. India extra Gangem. Of each of which we will first take a brief survey with reference to the state and story of it in preceding times; and then consider them with reference to the present age.

INDIA INTRA GANGEM.

INDIA INTRA GANGEM, is bounded on the East, with the River Gan∣ges till the fall thereof into the Sea, and after that with that large and spacious Bay, called antiently Sinus Gangeticus, now the Gulf of Bengala; on the West, with Paropamisus, Arachosia, Gedro∣sia, Provinces of the Persian Empire; and part of the Arabian Seas: on the North, where it is broadest, with Mount Taurus, branched into Paropamisus, Caucasus, and other parts; and on the South, where it endeth in a sharp point or Promontory, by Ptolomy called Commaria extrema, but now Cape Com∣mari, with the Indian Ocean. So named from being situate on this side of Ganges; by the moderns Indostan.

The Countrey of the same nature formerly, as it is at the present, not altered but by changing of the cha∣nels of Indus; which being shifted by an Earthquake, turned a great part of the once neighbouring Region to a sandy Desart: Indus (as many other of the Indian Rivers) fatning and enriching all the land which it overfloweth. The people of those elder times much like the Scythians, especially in their course of life, living without Cities, Temples, Houses, in their moveable tents: their food the bark of a tree called Tala, which served for bread; and the flesh of bucks, does, and other venison, with the skins whereof they made their Garments. All of them Free-men, but no Slaves to be found amongst them. Less warlike than the Scythians, but as great Contemners of death as they: the very women contending eagerly amongst themselves, which should accompany their Husband (one husband having many wives) to his Funerall Pile. Of which thus Saint Hierome, Hae igitur contendunt de amore viri, & ambitio summa certantium est ac testimonium castitatis dignam morte censeri. A custome still retain∣ed amongst them; of which somewhat hath been said already, and more is to be said in another place.

Principall Rivers of this part, 1. Hydaspes, by Ptolomy (and by him only) called Bidaspes, one of the furthest bounds of Alexanders conquests. 2. Suastus, 3. Coa, 4. Acesines, very memorable in the Gests of Alexander. 5. Sandabilis, 6. Zaradrus: all comming from the Northern Mountains, and all falling (Hydaspes with three other Rivers first received into it) into the greater bed of Indus. 7. Diamna, 8. Sorabus, and 9. Soa, falling from the like Northern Mountains, into the main Cha∣nell of Ganges. 10. Naragonas, issuing from Mount Vindius. 11. Baris, from Bittigo. 12. Cha∣beris, from Adisathras. 13. Tindis, from the hill called Vxentus; and 14. Tina, from the O∣rodian Mountains, with many others of less note. By what names called at the present, I determine not; nor find I any which have dared to adventure on it. But doubtless to be found in 1. Catamul, 2. Ceb∣cha, 3. Ray, 4. Chenao, 5. Rebeth, all tributaries unto Indus, which is now called Schind. 6. Taphi, 7. Harunda, 8. Chambel, 9. Jamena, which empty their waters into Ganges; the which, with such others of the principal Rivers as are now known by name unto us, shall occasionally be touched on in that which followeth. Besides which Rivers, here is a famous Lake mentioned in the Gests of Alex∣ander, (but the name occureth not) not much above a mile in circuit, but exceeding pleasant, shaded on every side with woods; memorable for the great refreshment which it gave to Alexanders Army, when e∣ven pined with thirst.

The Countrey so exceeding populous in the time of Ptolomy, that it afforded him the names of more no∣ted Cities, than any one Countrey in the world. Of which 1. Cottiara, 2. Nigama, 3. Sa••••da, 4. Rarassa, 5. Masopelle, and 6. Pityndra, are honoured with the name of Metropoles; as being the head Cities of their severall and respective Nations. 7. Ozene, 8. Sora, 9. Palibothra, 10. Gan∣ge, 11. Batana, 12. Hippocura, 13. Carara, 14. Modura, 15. Orthura, and 16. Mala••ga, mentioned as the Royall seats of severall Princes; by the name of Regiae. 17. ••ardaxem••, 18. T••••∣dis, 19. A••gari, 20. Curula, 21. Chaberis, on the River so called. 22. Palura, on the shores of the Golf of Bengala, and 23. Palura, on the banks of Cambysum. 24. Tilegramocum; marked out above the rest with the name of Civitates, (Cities) and therefore probably of more note than others not so distinguished. And finally 25. Monogsassum, 26. Simylla, neer a Promontory of the same

name; 27. Nitra, 28. Maziris, 29. Elancorum, 30. Colchi, 31. Salur, 32. Sobura, 33. Poduca, 34. Melange, 35. Maliarpha, 36. Contacissyla, 37. Nosygne. 38. Barygaza. Speci∣fyed as the most noted and celebrious Empories; besides 39. Canthimus, 40. Stathmus, (and 41 a Road opposite to Chrysas) two commodious Stations or Roads for shipping. The names and situation of these places is the most we find of them, which makes me pass them over with a bare recitall, only to shew how populous and well planted this Countrey was in the time of my Author.

Of less name, but of more note in the course of story; 1. Nysa, built by Bacchus at the time of his Indian conquest, and called thus by the name of his Nurse, to preserve her memory, his mother dying in Child-birth of him. Replenished by him with his sick and wounded Souldiers, whose posterity continued here till the time of Alexander, who spared the City and the people for his love to Bacchus, who was therein worshipped in a Temple of his own foundation, planted about with Baies, Vines, and Ivy, whose shidie branches covered the roof of it. In the middest thereof an Image, with all the Instruments belonging to a plentiful Vintage, all of Gold or Silver. 2. Taxilla, or Taxiala as Ptolomy calleth it, seated be∣twix•• Indus and Hydaspes in the Region called Varsa, and built most probably by Taxiles a puissant King of India, in the time of Alexander. Adorned in elder times with a Temple dedicated to the Sunne, and therein with an Ivory image of A••ax, a Golden Statua of Alexander, and the portraiture of King Po∣rus made in copper. The floor of Mosaical work pouldred with Pearls, the walls of red marble inter∣laied with gold, which made it shine a far off, like a flash of lightning. 3. Nagarna, called also Dio∣nysiopolis; in memory of Bacchus who was also called Dionysius, and Liber Pater. 4. Adorne, by Diodorus called Aornos, and Avernus by Strabo; so strongly seated on a Rock, that Hercules was not able to force it: which made Alexander, imitating, and therein out-going the Acts of Hercules, assault it with the greater force, and at last he carried it. 5. Bucephala, built by Alexander on the banks of Hy∣d••spes, and named thus in memory of Bucephalus his beloved horse, which had served him in all the course of his Fortunes, and dyed hereabouts, being then thirty years old. 6. Pireta, another of his foundations, so called by the name of his dog, whom he dearly loved. 7. Alexandria, on the banks of Indus, another of his foundations also. 8. Mazage, on the West of Indus, one of the first Towns of India taken by the Macedonians, though garrisoned within, and environed without by an host of 300000 men: but yielded after some resistance, with the use of her own body, by Cleophe the Queen the••eof, who received it back with other favours from the hands of the Conqueror. 9. Nora, a strong City on the same side of Indus, taken by Polysperchon, one of his Commanders. 10. Samus, on the banks of the same River, taken by Alexander in the course of his navigation down that sea of waters; the Inhabitants whereof fought against him with poisoned Arrows, with one of which Ptolomy, afterward King of Aegypt, was dangerously wounded, and cured with an herb which Alexander dreamt he had seen in the mouth of a Serpent. 11. Oxydrace, the chief City of the Oxydracans, at the siege whereof Alexander is said to be the first that scaled the walls, and the last that could do so: the ladder breaking as soon as he was at the top. Standing thus alone as a mark to all their darts, he was by the Souldiers desi∣red to leap down amongst them; but he in a daring bravado leaped into the Town among his enemies, where it was not only his good hap to light upon his feet, but to have an old tree at his back to defend him behind. In this posture he is said to have maintained the fight a long time against all the Souldiers of the Town; killing two of them with his own hands, and by that example teaching the rest to be more mannerly: till being wearyed, and dangerously wounded, he was forced to leave his feet, and commit the weight of of his body to his knees. In this case Leonatus, Peucestes, and some other of his Captains, came to as∣sist him; who defended their dying Master, till the whole Army entred the Town, and put all the people to the sword, in revenge of their King, whose life they had little hope to enjoy, though he with much dan∣ger did afterward recover. For my part I give little or no credence to this story, ranging it in the same Ca∣talogue of truth with the Adventures of Donzel del Phoebo, Rosicleer, Beliams, Amadis, and the rest of the rabble of Knights errant. Neither is this the first time that Curtius hath disgraced the soundness of Alexanders judgement, and the truth of his actions, with the like idle and impossible fables: though indeed in that particular, he saith that it was multo magis ad temeritatis quam ad gloriae famam. And 12. Nicaea, built by Alexander on the banks of Acesines, in memory of his many great and signal victories. Not far from which finding how unwilling his Souldiers were to pass further East, he purpo∣sed to leave behind him some Monument of his great exploits, and to make his fame immortall a∣mongst the Indians. And to that end he caused the form of his Camp to be inlarged, and the Cabbins to be made bigger than sufficed for his men to lodge in, the Mangers to be set higher than his horses could reach, Armour and Bits for horses of too great a ••ize (made not for use, but ostentation of his might,) to be scattered up and down the Camp for the savage people to wonder at in the times to come. By means whereof he got nothing amongst knowing men but a suspicion that his Actions were in∣deed less memorable than they are reported to have been, since he so vainly laboured to have them thought greater than indeed they were.

The old Inhabitants hereof were the Indo-Scythae, inhabiting on the North-West of Indus, the Mazagae, Sadani, Piratae, Limyrices, Aii, the Soringi, Arvari, Oxydracae, Malli, and Lambatae; the Gandarides, or Gangarides, neer the mouch of Ganges; the Caspiraei, under the shades of Mount Vindius. The Musicani, Chatziaei, Polindae, Phyllitae, Bittigi, Chadramotitae, Pezuari, Adisathri, Mandalae, Dryllophitae, Sabarae, Pandioni, with many others to the num∣ber 122 several nations, if Megasthenes be not out in his reckoning; too many and too impertinent to be mustered here.

Originally descended from the Sonnes of Noah before they left these Eastern parts to go towards the

unfortunate valley of Shinaar. We could not else have found this Countrey so full of people in the days of Semiramis, the wife of Ninus: who leading an Army compounded of several nations to the number of four millions and upwards (if Ctesias, and Diodorus Siculus who reports it from him be of any credit, but certainly the greatest Army that was ever raised) was encountred by Staurobates King of India, with greater forces made up of naturall Indians onely, by whom she was vanquished and slain. A matter beyond all belief, though neither Army could make up a fourth part of that num∣ber, if the Indians had been no other than some one of those Colonies which were sent from BABEL; or rather a second or third Swarm of those former Colonies, which went thence under the command of the first Adventurers. For that any of the first Adventurers, who were present at the building of the Tower of BABEL, travelled so far East, is not affirmed by any who have laboured in the search of their plantations. So that I take it for a matter undeniable, that the plantation of India pre∣ceded the attempt of BABEL; though by whom made there is nothing to be said for certain. Yet if I might have liberty to express my own conceptions, I am inclinable to believe that all the East∣ern parts of Persia, with China, and both the Indiaes, were peopled by such of the sons of Sem, as went not with the rest to the Valley of Shinaar. For otherwise I can see no reason, that the posterity of Japher should plant the greatest part of the Lesser Asia, and the whole Continent of Europe, with the Isles thereof; and that the sonnes of Cham should spread themselves over Babylonia, Palestine, the three Arabiaes, and the whole Continent of Africk; the posterity of Sem being shut up in a corner of the Greater Asia, hardly so big as some one Province taken up by the other Adventurers. And therefore that I may allow to the sonnes of Sem an equall Latitude, I think it not improbable to fix them in these Eastern Countreys, spreading themselves this way as they grew in numbers, before the rest of the Adventurers went to seek new fortunes at the Tower of BABEL. And being that the Coun∣trey was large and wealthy, and might have room enough to spare for some second commers (especially descending from the same root with them) I doubt not but to place here also all the sonnes of Jocktan, Havilah, Chatsarmaveth, Saba, Abimail, who have left here some tract or monument of them∣selves, as hath been shewn at large in our GENERALL PREFACE; and as concerning Ophyr, shall be shewed hereafter. To proceed therefore to our Story, the next who made a∣ny invasion on this Countrey, after that of Semiramis, was Bacchus or Liber Pater, the sonne of Jupiter and Semele, accompanyed with Hercules Aegyptius; not much more fortunate than she: the forces of Bacchus being defeated, and Hercules forced to throw away his Golden Shield. But what they could not do by Arms, they effected by Arts. Bacchus instructing them in the use of wine, oyl, sacrifices, and the Art of Architecture, and drawing them into Towns and Cities, for that cause ho∣noured as a GOD. To Hercules they ascribe the Nation of the Pandioni, proceeding from a daugh∣ter of his called PANDAEA: the memory of both preserved in Statuaes and Pillars erected by them.

After this unattempted till the time of Alexander, who having made a full conquest of the Persian Empire, invaded India with an Army of an 120000 fighting men. Beginning with CLEOPHE, Queen of the Mazagae, a people of Indo-Scythia, he brought her to conformity, possessed himself both of her person and estate; on whom he begot a sonne called Alexander, who is said to have succeeded in her Dominions. Being passed over the River Indus, Taxiles (by some called Omphis) a prudent Prince, whose Kingdome is affirmed to be bigger than Aegypt, submitted of his own accord, offering his service and assistance to promote his conquest, and presenting him with a Crown of Gold, and 80 Ta∣lents of ready money. The King made welcome, but his money not so much as looked on: the Mace∣donian being so far from fingring of this Indian gold, that he gave him a thousand Talents of his own trea∣sure. Encouraged by this Royall dealing, Abiajares, another puissant Prince of the opposite faction unto Taxiles, submitted also, and was as graciously received: Porus, whose Kingdome lay on the other side of Hydaspes, would not be so conquered, and therefore mustereth up his forces, and valiantly made good the banks of the River. But vanquished at the last, not without much difficultie, he was made a Pri∣soner to the Victor; who honouring the man for his brave resistance, gave him his liberty and Kingdome with a great inlargement. The Conqueror had a great desire to go further East, but the Souldiers would not be perswaded: sufficiently taught by Porus, what they were to look for, if the Indiansshould unite their forces. Unable to prevail, he erected in the place twelve Altars, as high as Towers, where he observ∣ed many solemn Games and Sacrifices: and having sacrifised to Hydaspes, Indus, and Acesines, he sailed down Indus towards the Southern Ocean; which seen at distance, he turned towards Gedrosia, and thence to Babylon, where he died.

After his death Eumenes raised some part of his forces hence. But the Macedonians being plunged in a Civil war, one Androcottus stirred up the Indians to recover their freedomes; making himself at first their Captain, but at last their King. Possessed of all that had been conquered by the Greeks, he was encountred by Seleucus, who had then got the command of Asia: against whom he brought an Army of 600000 fighting men. Frighted wherewith, Seleucus made peace with him, and contracted a solemn League betwixt them; continued with the interchange of friendly Offices amongst their posterity; and more confirmed by an interview betwixt Antiochus the Great, and Saphagasenus, one of the Successors of Andracottus; by whom Antiochus was presented with 150 Elephants, and the promise of some trea∣sure to be sent after him. By the Posterity of Andracottus was the Kingdome held till the prosperity and full height of the ROMAN Empire. The power whereof though they rather knew by report, than trial, yet was it not amiss to entertain a potent, though remote State, in terms of amity. Therefore they sent Embassadours unto Augustus, who presented him with a number of Tigers, (which beasts

(saith Dion) till then, the Roman people had never seen) and which was the most pleasing, a little boy born without arms, who with his feet could bend a bow, shoot, and play on wind instruments, as exactly as others with their hands. Tra••an the Emperor had a great desire to see this Countrey, but was diverted from that purpose by matters of more necessary importance to the State of his Empire. Moved with the same of Antoninus, the Roman Emperor, they sent a solemn Ambassie to him; making him Umpire in some Controversies which they had with the Bactrians: from which Ambassadors it is probable that Pto∣lomy the Geographer who then lived, might receive his informations of the estate of this Countrey. The like they did to Julian the Apostate also, then setting forwards on his expedition against the Persian; de∣siring his friendship and alliance. How it was with them in the time of Constantine and Justinian, hath been shewn already. After these times by little and little, histories have been in a manner silent concern∣ing the affairs hereof; but for some conquests made on the parts next Persia, by the Chaliphs of Bagdet. For no••withstanding that there was continual traffick from the Red Sea hither; and between the Persians, Turkish, and Indian Merchants for spices, and the other commodities of this Region; yet were not these Merchants acquainted with the state of the Countrey; because they entered not into it, but were met by the Indian Merchants at Sarmachand, being as it were the common Emporie. Neither did the Aegyp∣tians at all enter into India, but were met by the Indians at Ormus, or some other Iland: even as now the Chinois, make some of the Philippinae, the staple of their trade with the Spaniards; whom they li∣cence not to come into the Continent among them. But our modern navigators have withdrawn this mask of obscurity, and shew us her lively portraiture in as lively colours. One of the first which brake the ice, and gave us any certainty of their affairs, was Sir John Mandeville, accompted at his comming back for the greatest Fabler in the world: so incredible seemed his reports of the magnificence of those Kings, and the wealth of their Countreys, and the many rarities which he found amongst them. But better thought of by our neighbours, he obtained a Monument in a Convent at Leige, the Friers of which keep some things of his, Comme pour honorable memorie de son excellent, for an honorable memorial of his Excellencies. Many of his Relations since confirmed by the Portugals, who under the conduct of Vasquez de Gama first discovered this Countrey, by the new way of the Cape of good hope, Anno 1497. By whom and some la∣ter observations, we have been informed, that in this part of India were no fewer than 47 Kingdomes, whereof some few have still their own natural Kings; the rest all subject to the power of the Great Mogul. Contracted into a lesser number by joining many lesser territories into one Division, we shall look on it as distributed into 15 Provinces. Some have reduced them unto five, but give us neither the bounds nor ex∣tent of any of them. And others in the description of their travels, ramble up and down with such uncer∣tainties, (most of them being men of trades and ignorance) that though they tell us where they lodged, and what entertainments they did meet with; yet we shall hardly know by them (for I think they did not know themselves) in what Province they were; or to what part the severall Towns thorow which they passed, did of right belong. So that our passage thorow these Countries (having such blind guides to fol∣low) will be full of difficultie, and not so satisfactory to the Reader as he might expect. Howsoever, I desire him to bear me company, whilest I take the best survey I can of these 15 Provinces, to which the whole may be most handsomely reduced: that is to say, 1. Dulsinda, 2. Pengab, 3. Ma••dao, 4. Delly, 5. Agra, 6. Sanga, 7. Cambaia, 8. Decan, 9. Canara, 10. Malabar, 11. Narsinga, 12. Oristan, 13. Botanter, 14. Patenaw, and 15. Bengala.

1. DVLSINDA.

DVLSINDA is bounded on the East, with the River Indus; on the West, with Paro∣pamisus, and Arachosia, two Persian Provinces; but for the most part, under the command of the Great Mogul; on the North, with Caucasus, by which parted from Tartary; on the South, with the Kingdom of Cambaia. So that it taketh up all the Northern parts of this Estate, which lie upon the West of the River Indus: from which River called by the Natives Sinda, most probable it is that it took this name: and therefore I have written it with an s, Dulsinda, and not Dulcinda with a c, as I see some do, but on no good reason.

The Countrey by reason of the Northern situation of it more temperat, but less fruitful than the rest of In∣dia. The seat, in antient times, of the Mazagae, and Indo-Scythae, when subdued by Alexander. Made up at present, of many lesser Kingdomes, and smaller Provinces, denominated, for the most part, from the principal Tows, and Cities of them, as in other places.

Amongst which those of most esteem, are 1. Caximir, Cascimir, or Chesmur, (for by all these names it is called) the chief of a Kingdome once, unto which it gave name, till subdued by Echebar, the Mogul; who in a pleasant Iland, (in the middest of a great and deep Lake, about three leagues off the City) beset round with Trees, built a Royall Palace: which he honoured sometimes with his Court, removed hither from Lahor, partly the better to assure this new conquered Kingdome; but principally because his Palace at Lahor, and therein an infinite deal to Treasure, had but newly been consumed by fire. The City it self situate in the most healthy Country of all India, encompassed with high Mountains, covered for the most part of the year with snow; the rest a delicate, goodly plain, diversified with Pastures, Woods, Corn-fields, Meadows, Parks, Gardens, and Rivers, even to admiration. The air hereof, and of the Country round about, by reason of the Northern situation of it, and the snowie Mountains, very cool and temperate. The soil abundantly productive of Wheat, Rice, and Vines; which last they plant at the foot of the Mulberry-tree, which seemeth by this means, to bear double fruits. Both Town and King∣dome subdued by Echebar, the Mogul, about the year 1597. their own dissentions more conducing to

that subjugation, than any visible force which he brought before it. 2. Roree, a Fort of the M••gul•• towards Paropamisus; but bordering upon the Country of Multan, to which People it properly belong∣eth: garrisoned not so much for fear of the Persian, (for Paropamisus, now called Cabal, is his antient Patrimony,) but to preserve the People from the spoil of Theeves, who alwaies hang about the Mountains. 3. In the most Northern parts hereof, stood the Nagara of Ptolomy; mistook by some for the modern Agra, of which more anon. 4. Sestan, the chief City as I take it, of the Kingdome of Rebat; situ∣ate on the East of Caxim••r, betwixt it and the Indus: in the same Latitude with that, but not of so temperate an air; the snowy Mountains much conducing to the Temperature of the Realm of Caximir., 5. Mul••an, a great and antient City, and the chief of a Kindome, on the South of Caximir, or Chesmur, and about three French leagues from the banks of the River Indus. The ordinary thorow-fare of the Ca∣ravans, in the way from Lahor to Spahan, (the chief Seat of the Sophy or King of Persia) forced to abide there divers dayes, sometimes ten or twelve, to enrich the Town, which of it self is of no great trading nor otherwise able to subsist but by this device. 6. Duckee, a Fort or Garrison, situate in the Streights of the Mountains to secure the Caravans, and protect other Passengers from the danger of Robbers, hover∣ing in these hill-countr••es, the out-parts of this Empire.

2. PENGAB.

OPposite to Dulsinda, on the Eastern-side of the River Indus, but more inclining towards the South, lieth the Country, or Division rather, which my Author calleth by the name of PENGAB; bounded on the West, with Indus, which divideth it from Dulsinda; on the South, with the Kingdome of Mandoa; on the North, and East, with those many Kingdomes, which we have comprehended under the name of Botanter.

The reason of the name I find not, nor any thing memorable of the Country; but that it was divided in the time of Ptolomy, into the Provinces of the Lambatae, Caspiria, Cylindrine, and Suastene: subdued by Alexander in his expedition into India: the famous Rivers of Acesines, and Hydaspis (but by what names now called I find not) having here their course. So that it seemeth to have been a part of the Kingdom of Porus, or that the Kingdome of Porus was a part of this.

Places of most importance in it, 1. Lahor, on the Eastern banks of Indus, affirmed to be the fairest and most antient City in both the Indies; of most esteem for wealth and greatness. In compass about six∣teen miles, and honoured for a while with the ordinary Residence of the Great Mogul, till on the burning of his Palace, spoken of before, he removed his Court to Caximir, from thence to Fatipore, and at last to Agra. Since that time made the Seat of the eldest sonne, or heir apparent, sent hither for avoiding all occasion of factions, which their living in the Court might breed. A City of exceeding great trade, as being the chief Staple for the Spices in these parts, and other commodities of India, from hence transported into Persia by the way of Candahor, the principall Town of Arachosia; and so to Spahan the chief City of the Sophian Empire, where they are sold, by reason of so long and chargeable a journey, at excessive rates. It is said that 12000 Camels at the least pass every year thorow it with their lading, besides what is ferried down the River, and brought up by the Portugals, who therewith traded unto Ormus till that Town was taken. By this we may conjecture at the wealth hereof, but more by that great Mass of treasure which a late Governour hereof did leave behind him. At whose death Echebar the Mogul (for the Mo∣gul is the heir General unto all mens wealth) found in his Coffers three millions of Gold ready coined, great quantity of Gold and Silver uncoined, and some store of Jewels: besides Horses, Elephants, Houshold-furniture, and other goods almost invaluable. 2. Sultan-puare, of more antiquity than beauty; yet of good esteem. 3. Athec, in the common Road from Lahor to China; reported in the description of the travels of Benedictus a Goes, a Portugal Jesuite, to be a moneths journey from Lahor, and yet in the same Province with it. Which if it be true, either the Province must be large, or his journies short: or if not true, we must remember that we had it from the pen of a Jesuite. And yet as great as this Province or Di∣vision is affirmed to be, we do not find the names of any more Towns of consideration which may be said with confidence to belong unto it.

3. MANDAO.

THe Kingdome of MANDAO is bounded on the North, with Pengab; on the South, with the Realm of Agra; on the East, with Delly; and on the West, with the River Indus. So called from Mandao, the chief City of it.

The Country more mountainous and rugged than the rest of these Provinces, by reason of the many branches of Mount Bittigo, the Southern part of the Imaus, which do overrun it: in other things partaking of the rich∣es of India. The men, as most of those who live in such mountainous tracts, of a warlike temper; com∣paratively with the rest of the Indians: the women here antiently as valiant as the men in other places; ri∣ding astride, and practised in the Arts of Horsemanship: for that cause called Amazons; some of which are said to be still remaining. Insomuch as it is written in the stories hereof, that the King of this Countrey not long since going to the warres, was accompanied by the Queen his Wife march∣ing in the Front of two thousand women all well mounted and prepared for service.

Chief Cities hereof▪ 1. Mandao, seated on the bankes of the River Mandova, (the Manda of Ptolomy and the Antients) whence it had the name. A City of great note, said to be 30 miles in com∣pass; yet so well fortified, and furnished with all necessaries so: defence and resistance, that it held out

twelve years against Mirumudius, or Merhamed, the Great Mogul, who then besieged it. Surren∣dred at the last, and with it the Kingdome. Memorable for the great battail fought before it betwixt the said Merhamed, then comming to the relief thereof; and Badurius King of Cambaia who had then distressed it: in which fight Badurius lost his tents and Treasures, and was fain to fly disguised unto Diu, to crave aid of the Portugals. 2. Moltan, once the chief City of a Kingdome, or a Kingdome rather of it self, but of no great note: the women whereof though not so good Souldiers as their Ancestors of the fe∣male sex, yet to come as neer them as they can, use boots and spurs when they take a journey, and so fit∣ted fit astride the saddle. 3. Scernus, on the River so called, of more Antiquity than greatness; as is al∣so▪ 4. Polymbothie, the Palibothra of Ptolomy and others of the antient writers, then the chief Town of the Palibothei (by Pliny and Strabo, called Prasii) a People of as great authority and power as any in India.

This once a Kingdom of it self of great power and wealth, till Badurius King of Cambaia having conquered the Realm of Citor, and therewith a great part of Sanga, made an attempt upon this also. Galgee then King of Mandao finding himself too weak for so strong an Enemie, craved aid of Merhamed (of Mira∣mudius as the Latines) the Mongul Tartar, then reigning in Chabul or Arachosia, and possessed of some parts of India also since the times of Tamerlane. Who compounding an Army of his own subjects, some mercinary Persians, and a great body of Zagathaian Tartars, from whom originally descended, came in accordingly: discomfited the vast Anny of Badurius, consisting of of 150000 horse, and 500000 foot, in two set battails, the first at Doceti, the next at Mandao; and following his blow possessed himself of the whole Kingdome of Cambaia. But not content with that success, quarrelled the Mandoan King in whose aid he came; besieged him in his principal City, which at last he won, and therewithall the Kingdome also: the wretched King shewing hereby a fair both evidence and example to succeeding ages, that the easiest way for a Prince to ruin his own estate, and endanger his neighbours, is to admit a Forrein power into his own Dominions, which he cannot as easily thrust out, as he hath brought them in.

4. DELLY.

DELLY is bounded on the West, with Mandao; on the East, with the Kingdome of Botanter; on the North, with the Eastern parts of Pengab; on the South, with the Eastern parts also of the Kingdome of Agra. So named from DELLY the chief City of it, by some called Delin.

The Countrey, besides what is common to it with the rest of India, is said to be more abundantly stored than any other part of it with horses, Elephants and Dromedaries. Of the people nothing singular, ex∣cept it be that many of them taking more delight in thee very than honest trades, live for the most part upon spoil: but those especially whom they call by the name of Belemi, being such of the nobility or better sort, who since the conquest of their Countrey by the Great Moguls, have lived like Out-Laws on the Mountains. Of the same temper with the Resbutes in Cambaia, and the Agwans in Sanga and Dul∣sinda; who rather than submit themselves to a forrein yoak, (as they count that of the Mongull) choose to forsake their proper dwellings, and all honest waies and means of living.

Places of most importance in it, 1. Delly, A City not only honoured heretofore with the residence of the Great Moguls, who from hence pass in common appellation, by the names of the Kings of Delly, and that amongst their most knowing Subjects; but beautified with many sepulchres of their antient Kings, whose funerals and Coronations were herein celebrated. And though deserted of late times, by the Great Moguls, moving their Courts from place to place, as they inlarged their Empire, and increased their con∣quests: yet still a great many of the Nobles, and not a few Captains and Commanders, do frequent the same; and have their houses and pleasure of retirement in it. 2. Tremel, upon the Western side of the River Mandova; but not much observable. 3. Doceti, memorable for the great battel fought neer unto it, in which Merhamed the Mongul overthrew the forces of Badurius, and therby opened a fair way to the Realm of Cambaia.

This Countrey governed a long time by its natural Princes, was at last conquered by some Moores or Saracens, comming from Persia or Arabia, but I find not which, who grew to so great power and wealth, that Sanosaradine, a Mahometan, one of their Descendants, dreamt of no less than the con∣quest of all India, if not of the whole Continent of Asia also. Having about the year 1300 (memorable for the beginning of the Ottoman Empire) subdued by little and little all the neighbouring Princes which made head against him; he pierced at last into Canora, now called Decan, and conquering a great part of it returned back to Delly. The pursuit of his victories he left un••o one Abdessa his Lieutenant there, who added the rest of that Countrey to his Masters territories; but kept the possession to himself, confirmed ther∣in by Sanosaradine, with the Title of Regent. But Sanosaradine dying in a war against the Persians, left for his Successor a sonne so unlike his Father, that the conquered Provinces revolted from him unto other Masters, more able to govern and protect them. Confined unto its former bounds, it remained notwith∣standing of sufficient power to prese••ve it self, from any of their equal neighbors, till the rising of the Great Monguls: whose puissance being unable to withstand, it submitted at the last to Adabar, the son of Mer∣hamed, the second Emperor of this line: who to assure himself of the peoples loyaltie, and confirm his conquests, settled his Court a while at Delly, the chief City of it; from whence removed on the next prospo∣rous emergency, as before was noted.

5. AGRA.

THe Realm of AGRA is bounded on the North, with Delly, and Mandao; on the South, with Sang••, and Cambaia; on the West, with Indus, which parteth it from the Province of Sinda, a part of the Kingdome of Cambaia; on the East, with Oristan, or Orixa. So called from Agra the chief City of it, and the Seat Royall, of late times, of the Great Monguls.

The Country said to be the best and most pleasant of India, plentifull in all things, and such a delicate, even peece of ground, as the like is hardly to be seen. Well watered, as with other Rivers, so most espe∣cially with those of Tamtheo and Jemena; which last runneth thorow the middest of it, North and South, or rather from the North-west to the South-east: from whence bending more directly Eastwards, it falleth at last into the Ganges, or that which is supposed to be Ganges, for the bed of that great River is no: ncer∣tainly known. The People for the most part Gentiles; Mahometanism coming in with the Great Mogul; and generally inclining somewhat to the Pythagorean. For such as live upon the banks of the River Jemena, neither eat flesh, nor kill any thing. The waters of which River they esteem so sacred, that thereof they usu∣ally make their Temple, and say their prayers therein, but naked (in which posture they both dress their meat and eat it): lodging upon the ground, being imposed by them as a penance, and so conceived.

Places of most esteem herein, 1. Fattpore, or Fettebarri, on the West-side of the River, a very fair and goodly City, once beautified with a Royall Palace here built by Echebar (after the removall of his Court from Cascimar) with many spacious gardens belonging to it, but much decaied, since the fixing of the Court at Agra, to which most of the Stones are carried, and no small quantity of Corn sowed within the Walls. 2. Agra, on the North bank of the River Jemena; inferiour to Lanor for wealth and great∣ness, but far more populous: the constant residence of the Court here in these latter times, drawing to it great resort of all sorts of People. By some supposed to be the Nagara of Ptolomy; but such a supposition as is built on no better ground, than some resemblance of the names. For Ptolomies Nagara is by him placed on the Western-side of Indus, in the Latitude of 33. whereas this Agra standeth on the East of the River Jemena, five Degrees more Southwards, in the Latitude of 28. But what it loseth in Antiquity, it hath got in honor: the Town and Territory being a peculiar Kingdome, till Echebar the Mogul subdued it, Anno 1598 in his passage from Lahor to Decan. But it lost nothing by the hand. For Echebar delighted in the situation of it (and that withall it stood in the middest of his Kingdomes) made it the Seat Royall of his Empire; fixt there, for the most part ever since: by means whereof exceedingly increased in wealth, beauty and greatness: the very Castle in which the Mogul usually resideth, being two miles in compass, envi∣roned with most high and unscalable walls, and fortified with great store of Ordinance. The whole space be∣twixt it and Fatipore, being 18. miles, affirmed to be a continuall Market: and all the Intervall from hence to the Town of Lahor (from which distant 600 miles towards the South) adorned with continuall Rowes of Trees on both sides of the wayes, most of them bearing a kind of Mulber••y; and at every ten miles end, houses erected by the King or some of the Nobles, for beautifying the way to the Regall City, preserving their own memory, and the safe lodging of Passengers, in danger otherwise, by night of Theeves and Cut∣throats. 3. Hendee, a Town more towards the South, beautified with a fair Castle of the Kings, cut out of the main Rock, and wrought with carved work round about, fortified with 50 peeces of Ordinance, and thought impregnable: for that cause made a Prison for great persons. Here are also two Hospitals for such Captains (and Captains only) as are maimed in the wars. 4. Beani, twelve course or 18. miles from Fattipore; the most noted place for Indico in all the Indies; for the making whereof they have here twelve mills. Which Indico, (by the way) groweth on a small shrub like our Goose-berry-bushes, bearing seed like a Cabbage-seed: which being cut down, are laid in heaps for half a year, and when rotten, brought into a vault, to be trodden with Oxen from the Stalks, and being ground small and fine at the Mills, is last of all boiled in furnaces, refined and sorted.

6 SANGA.

SANGA is bounded on the North, with the East parts of the Realm of Agra; on the South and West, with Cambaia; from which parted on the West, by the Mountain Gate; and on the East, with O∣ristan. The reason of the name I find not: this Country being too far South to be so called from Sangalassa, a Town of chief note neer the fountains of Indus, where placed by Arianus, lib. 5.

Places of most importance in it, 1. Azmere, or Agimer, 180 miles from Agra. At the end of every course (each course a mile and an half) a fair pillar erected, and at every tenth course a fair Seraglio (such as we call Innes) for the entertainment of Travellors. All built by Echebar, who wanting Children, is said to have gone in Pilgrimage, on foot from Arra to Azimere, saying his prayers at the end of every course, and lodging all night at the tenth. 2. Citor, the chief City of Sanga, and once a Kingdome of it self, or the chief of that Kingdome. Situate in the midle way betwixt Surat, a known Port of Cambata, and Agra spoken of before: and most magnificently built on the top of a rocky hill, to which the passage is so narrow, and so well fortified, (there being in it three Gates, at the top, the middle, and the bottom) that thereby, and by other advantages of Art and nature, it was thought impregnable. Affirmed to he 12, miles in compass, beautified with many goodly buildings both publique and private; but once more glo∣rious than it is; here being to be seen the ruins of 100 Temples, and above 100000 houses, either demo∣lished by the wars, or suffered to decay by the great Moguls, who would not willingly have any thing in the Indies of more Antiquity, than themselves; and therefore are rather inclined to build new Cities, than

uphold the old. The greatness and Antiquity of it have made some men think that it was the Royall Seat of Porus. Others affirm the same of Delly, but neither rightly: the Kingdome of Porus lying more towards the River Indus, and not so far South. Governed not long since by a Queen called Crementina, not more fair than valiant, who revolting from Badurius King of Cambaia, to whom she formerly had paid tribute; was dispossessed of the Town of Citor, where she had fortified her self with 30000. foot, and 2000 horse: the People in a desperate resolution, laying all their treasures on an heap, which they burnt to∣gether with themselves; in which flame it is said that there perished 70000 persons. But the Cambatan did not long enjoy his victory. For not long after both the City and a great part of the Countrey, was conquered by the great Mogul, the mountainous parts hereof being held against him by Ramee, the Sonne or successor of Qu. Crementina: till seeing himself destitute of all better helps, he put himself into the hands of one of the Sonnes of the late Sultan, by whom reconciled unto his Father. Some other Towns there are in this Province, and in that of Agra before mentioned, and those of good esteem perhaps amongst the natives; but of no observation or importance in the course of business.

7 CAMBAIA.

CAMBAIA hath on the East Delly and part of Mandao; on the West, Gedrosia a Province of the Persian Empire; on the North, Dulsinda, and the rest of Mandao; on the South, the main Ocean, and some part of Decan. It lieth on both sides of the Indus; and is so called from Cambaia, the chief Province of it. The whole divided into 1. Sinda. 2. Guzarate, and 3. Cambaia specially so cal∣led.

1. SINDA hath on the East the River Indus, by which separated from Mandao; on the North, that part of Sanga which is called Dulsinda; on the West, parts of Gedrosia, and Guzarate; and on the South, the rest of Guzarate onely: coasting along the Western banks of the River Indus, whence it had the name; that River being now called Sind, as was said before. And for this reason, as I take it, the Western part of Sanga lying North of this, took the name of Dulsinda, and not Dulcinda (with a C) as most commonly written.

The Country for the generality very rich and fertile; but in some places nothing but a sandy Desart, in∣habited for the most part by wild Asses, Foxes, Deer, and some wilder beasts; but none so wild as the Caelies, a robbing nation, so numerous withall, that they sometimes rob whole Caravans as they pass that way, notwithstanding the many Forts and Castles built of purpose to secure those passages.

Places of most importance in it, 1. Tutta, (or Gutu Nagar Tutta) on the banks of Indus, a Town of great trade, but most frequented by the Portugals; who here receive such Indian commodities, as come down the water from Labor; returning Pepper in exchange, which they bring up the River from their other Factories. 2. Lawribander, at the mouth or out-let of the Indus, three dayes journey from Tutta, the Port-town unto which it is, notwithstanding that distance. Supposed to be situate in or neer the place of that Alexandria which Alexander built in memory of his navigation down this River to the Indian Ocean. An Haven much frequented because free from worms, which about Surat, and other Havens on these Seas, so infest the ships, that without much cost and care bestowed upon them, they make them unable to return. 3. Calwalla, memorable for the Tenure, as given by Echebar the Mongul to a company of Women and their posterity for ever, to bring up their daughters to dancing, and more wanton exercises. 4. Radempoore, a great Town with a strong Castle, seated at the edge of the Desarts: thorow which those that are to pass use here to provide themselves of water and other necessaries for their journey. 5. Nuraquemire, a pretty Town on the further side of the Desarts, esteemed a Paradise by such as have passed thorow those uncomfortable and dangerous sands, for the space of ten or twelve daies journey. 6. Sarrama, a large Town, twenty miles from Tutta; the Center in which all lines meet, and from whence the distances of all Towns in Sinda, are accustomably measured.

The Countrey antiently subject to the Kings of Cambaia, and in the right of that Crown to the Great Mongul: but the people for the most part so untamed and masterful, that except in some of the greater Towns they pay no Tributes, and in some places even within half a daies journy of Tutta, will acknow∣ledge no King, but rob and spare whom they please. If at any time the Mogul sends a force against them, (as he doth sometimes) they fire their houses, made like a Bee-Hive of straw and mortar, which are soon rebuilded; and retire themselves unto the Mountains. Yet one good quality they have amongst many ill ones. When they have robbed a Traveller, or took money of him in the way of toll or custome for his passage by them, they will conduct him honestly to the end of the Desarts, lest any should rob him but themselves.

2. GVZARATE hath on the North, Sinda; on the South, the main Ocean; the River Indus on the East; on the West, Gedrosia, which the Indians call Nawatacos, but the Persians, Circam.

The Soil of the same temper and fertilitie with that of Cambaia, specially so called; and there we shall speak further of it. The common people whom they call Guzorates of the same disposition generally with the rest of the Indians: but the greatest part of the Countrey is possessed by the Resbutes or Ras••ooches, the antient Inhabitants of this tract. Who when their Countrey was subdued by the Moores or Saracens, retired unto the Mountains and fatuesses of it, standing upon their guard, and were never yet subdued by the Great Monguls. Who though possessed of the Sea-shores, and most Towns of consequence, are fain to leave the inland parts and open Countries to the power of these Out-lawes: who either prey upon the people, or force them to compound for their peace and quiet at uncertain prices. Their Arms most com∣monly a Sword, Buckler, and Launce; well-horsed, and resolute in any thing which they undertake:

which made one of the Moguls say of them, that no men in the world knew to die, but they.

Places of most importance in it, 1. Diu, in a Peninsula looking towards Persia, but on the Eastside thereof, neer the mouth of Indus. Possessed by the Portugal, and by them fortified with a strong and impregnable Citadel, built with the leave and liking of King Badurius, thereby to buy their aid against Merhamed the Mongul who had newly vanquished him. A matter of such consequence to the Crown of Portugal, that John Bo elius confined to India for some Crimes by him committed, undertook (in hope by the merit of that service to obtain his pardon) to carry the first news of it in a small vessel not above 18 foot long, and but 6 foot broad (the best which for the present could be provided): which with great courage he performed, and thorow that large, wide, and tempestuous Ocean, came in safety with his news to Lisbon, to the great joy of the King, but greater admiration of all sorts of people. Scarce settled in their new possession, when besieged by Solyman Bassa, Admirall to Solyman the Magnificent, with a Flcet of 80 ships and Gallies, Anno 1537. offended with the Portugals for aiding the King of Persia, more for diverting the Spice-trade unto Alexandria. In which he had so ill success, that having assaul∣ted it in vain with his Land-forces, he was fain to raise his siege in such hast and tumult, that he left his great O dnance behind him. 2. Sauran, a Town and Castle of the Resbutes, spoken of before; and by them held against the power of the Great Mongul. 3. Boldra, a very fair and beautiful City, but of no great compass. 4. Ardovat, not far from the banks of the Indus, on the North of this Region to∣wards Sinda. 5. Madibat, by some called Amadabat, affirmed to be both for wealth and greatness the cheif of Guzarate, neer as big as London; well walled, and situate on a plain neer the Rivers side; seldome without Merchants of all Religions, Jews, Gentils, Christians, Moores, some of all, and neither. 6. Saringt, 7. Periano, 8. Serkeffe; this last remarkable for the Sepulchres of the old Kings of Cambaia, fair, and well kept, and visited from all parts of the Kingdome.

Nothing considerable in this part of the Countrey, as to point of story, but what is common to them with the rest of Cambaia; but that the Rasbutes, or Rasbooches still remain unconquered. Possessed not only of the hills and Mountains, but of some strong holds: and governed by the Heads of their Casts or Tribes: all which acknowledge the Morgul for their Superiour in regard of his power; but none of them obey him as their Lord or Soveraign: conceiving it to be some abasement of their own authority, if they admit of him as an Umpire to compose their differences, which they sometimes do.

3 CAMBAIA specially so called, hath on the North, Mandao; on the South, the main Ocean, and some part of Decan; on the East, Delly, from which parted by a ridge of Mountains; on the West, the Main Ocean, with some part of Guzarate. It standeth on the East-sides of the out-less of Indus, running along the Sea-shore for 500 miles, and took this name from Cambaia the chief City of it.

The Countrey said to be the most fruitful of all India, abounding in Rice, Wheat, Sugar, Spices of all sorts, and choicest fruits: of silk and Cotton so great plenty that they fraught yearly forty of fifty ships with those commodities. In the mountains they find Diamonds, Chalcedonies, and a kind of Onyx-stone, which are called Cornelines, and corruptly Cornelians. Amongst the Rarities hereof, they reckon the Abades, a great Beast, twice as bigge as a Bull, having on their snowts a little horn, and the hide so hard as no man can pierce it with a thrust; which is the Rhinocerot of the Antients.

The people effeminate and unwarlike, and therefore not much used by the Moguls in a war of con∣sequence; to supply which defect he furnisheth himself with Souldiers out of Persia, of which his stand∣ing bands consist; most of their Sultans and Commanders of that Nation also. More given to merchandise than war, and therein thought to be as cunning (if not deceitful withall) as any people in the world: trea∣cherous in their trust, proud in their carriage, bloody upon advantage, and much given to Venerie; igno∣rant of letters, but well practised in Mechanical Arts. In matters of Religion, for the most part Gen∣tils; not knowing, or contemning the Law of Mahomet; but very punctual in their own heathenish super∣stitions. The Bannians in this Countrey, being natural Indians, nusled in Paganism, and so wedded to their old Idolatries, that no perswasions can prevail with them, make the greatest number: and seem to be all Pythagoreans in some opinions, for they eat not any thing that hath blood or life, but feed on Rice, Roots, Plantons and such natural fruits; paying a large Revenue yeerly to the Great Mogul, that no Oxen may be killed amongst them. And because new opinions should not grow amongst them, they mary in their own Tribes only, and never out of their own Trades; secure thereby as they conceive from all innovations.

Cities of most observation in it, 1. Cambaia, three miles from the Indus, and as many in compass, one of the nearest and best built in all the East. So populous withall, that it is thought to contain 130000 Families, and is therefore called the Caire of the Indies. Of most esteem in all this Kingdome (though far less than Madabay) to which it doth impart its name. 2. Barocho, Southwards of Cambaia on the top of an hill, with a fair River underneath it: well-walled, and noted for the best Calicuts (a kind of linnen Cloth so called from the City of Calicut, where it was first made) not to be matched in all the Indies. 3. Swalley, still more unto the South, and about a mile from the Sea-shore; but giving name unto a large and capacious Bay, where the ships ride which trade at Surat. 4. Surat, about ten miles from the Bay of Swaller, from whence the River navigable but by Boats and Shallops; fortified with a Castle of Stone well stored with Ordnance. The houses for the most part of Sun-dried bricks, very large and lasting: built with flat roofs, but battlemented on all sides for fear of falling; and beautified with goodly Gardens of Pomgranats, Melons, Figs, and Limons, interlaced with Riverers and Springs. Made of late years a Factory for the English Merchants, who have here their President, and a magnificent house for the reception and staple of their Commodities. 5. Neriand, a great Town, and as remarkable for

the making of Indico; which growing on a small shrub like our Goose-berry-bushes, bears a seed like a Cabbage seed, and being cut down, is laid in heaps for half a year. Grown rotten, it is brought into a vault to be trod by Oxen from the Stalks, then ground in Mills, and finally boyled in furnaces, refined and sorted, and so sold to the Merchant. 6. Daman, upon the Sea-side over against 'Diu, and posses∣sed as that is by the Portugals. A beautifull and pleasant Town, fortified with a strong Castle: at the North-end of it, of white chalky stone, well planted with Ordnance: opposite whereunto on the South-side of the Town, a goodly Church, edged atop with white. Which with the houses, for the most part of the same colour also, afford a pleasing prospect to the sailers by. 7. Cumpanel, situate on the top of an high mountain, and environed with a seven-fold wall, once the Seat Royall of the Kings of Camba••••. 8. Da••aitote, a place of such strength that the great M guls could never get it by force. Rendred at the last upon composition, conditioned they should still be governed by a King of their own. 9. Netherby, a great market of brazen ware, beasts, and Armour. 10. Ba••nd••r••. 11. Tanai, &c.

This Kingdome taking in Guzarate and Sinda, as parts hereof, is extremely populous, said to contain 60000 Towns and Villages very well inhabited: but the people not accustomed to, or unfit for warres. Antiently governed by Kings of their own, it was first subdued by the 〈◊〉〈◊〉 or Moores, Anno 1423. under the conduct of one Mahomet or Machamut: who having forced the Resbutes or naturals of the Country to betake themselves unto the Mountains, was made Kings hereof. To him succeeded his soane Mamudius, one of no great action. But what he wanted was supplied by his sonne Badurius, who having conquered the Kingdome of Citor, invaded that of Mandao also. His Army for that warre consisted of 500000 foot, 150000 horse, 1000 great pieces of Ordinance, 500 wagons loaded with powder & shot, and as many wain-loads of gold and silver to pay his Army. But being discomfited in two great battels, by Merhamed the Mongul Tartar, whom Galg••e the Mandoan King had called in to his aid, he shaved his beard, and fled in a disguize to Diu then possessed by the Portugals, whom he licenced in that distress to build the Citadel: slain afterwards by a mean mariner, at his return from the Portugal Vice-Roy, whom he had visited on ship-board. And though Mamudius his Successor endeavoured to free his Kingdome from both pretenders: yet weakned with the loss of so great an Army he was not able to effect it. First dri∣ven from Diu, which he had besieged both by Sea and land, to his great dishonour; and after vanqui∣shed in battell by Adabar the sonne of Merhamed, not far from Serkeffe, the antient buriall-place of the Kings of Cambaia, but then the Sepulchre of the Kingdome: which by that victory fell to the Great Monguls, who have since enjoyed it.

8 DECAN.

DECAN is bounded on the East, with Narsinga; on the West, with the Indian Ocean; on the North, with Delly and Cambaia; on the South, with Malavar, and Canara. The reason of the name we shall have anon.

It lieth along the Sea-coast, for the space of 250 miles, betwixt Aliga, and Bate, two noted Rivers; extending East, as farre as the Mountain Gates, and afterwards thrusting into the North betwixt Cambara and those mountains till it meet with Delly. The soil much of the same nature with the rest of India, but not so flourishing as Cambaia. The People for the most part Mahometaus, which Religion was first plant∣ed there by the conquests of Sa Nosaradine, 350 years ago; yet not without some entermixture of their antient Gantilism.

Places of most importance in it, 1. Bider, the Seat Royall of Mamudza, once sole King of this Country, who to beautifie and adorn this City, commanded every one of his Prefects, or subordinate Governors, being eighteen in number, to build here a Palace, and to reside therein certain moneths in the year; each one to leave a sonne there in perpetual hostage. Situtate in the most Northern parts of the Countrey neer the borders of Delly; from the King whereof Mamudza had then newly revolted: and therefore would make sure of this place, as most in danger. 2 Visapore, bordering on Cambaia, the Princely Seat of Idalean, one of the Kings of Decan, after it was dismembered into severall Kingdomes. 3. Da∣nager, confiningon Canara, a beautifull and flourishing City, once the chief Seat of Nisalamoccus, or 〈◊〉〈◊〉, another of the Kings hereof after that division. 4. Decan, so called by the name of the Province, of which the chief City next to Bider the Imperiall Seat. Six miles from which there is an hill encompassed with an high wall, and kept by a strong Garrison, because of the great store of Dia∣monds which are digged out of it. The town so wealthy, that the people generally are attired in silks, or the purest tiffany. 5. Sintacora, on the mouth of the River Aliga, where it falleth into the Sea. 6. Goa, a Sea-Town also, situate in a little but most pleasant Iland called Ticuarinum, fifteen miles in compass; opposite to the mouth or out-let of the River Mandova. A noted Empory, and one of the chief keys which unlock the Indies; for number of Inhabitants, magnificent buildings, and pleasantness of situation, one of most note in all this Country. Possessed by the Portugals, who have here their Ar∣senall, and harbour for their Indian Fleet; by which they do command these Seas. So strongly forti∣fied withall, that though beleagured by Idalcan (of whom before) with 35000 horse, 6000 Elephants, and 250 peece of Ordance, Anno 1573. yet he could not force it. Made in regard of the convenient situation and strength thereof, the ordinary Residence of the Portugal Vice-Roy, who hath here his Coun∣sell, Chancellor, and other Officers, for the government of such parts of India as belong to that Crown: as also of the Arch-Bishop or Primate of the Indian Churches planted by that nation, who is hence called the Arch-Bishop of Goa. 7. Chaul, a Sea-Town in the hands of the Portugals also; and by them well fortified: Insomuch as Nisamalocco, assaulting it at the same time with a very great Army, was sain to

leave it as he found it. 8. Balaguate, in the uplands or Hill-Country, whence it had the name: Bal•• in the Persian language signifying a top, or summit of a mountain, and Guate an Hill. 9. Brampore, once the chief seat of another Kingdome; now the chief City of those parts of Decan which are subject to the Great Mongul. Situate on a great River in the middest of a spacious Plain, beautifull, and of very great trading; in bigness equall unto Paris, yet yielded to Echebar the Mogul, without any resistance, Anno 1600. Miram then King thereof forsaking it, and betaking himself to 10. Syra, a strong hold both by art and nature. Situate on the top of an hill, in compass five leagues, and environed with a triple wall, furnished with victuals, and all other necessary provisions, sufficient to maintain 60000 men many years; 3000 great peeces of Ordnance planted on the walls. Besieged herein by Echebar with an Army of 2000••0 fighting men, he held our against him: till over come by promises of fair correspondence, drawn out of his hold (some of his Counsellers being bribed to perswade him to it) he was detained by the Mo∣gull; and the Commanders won by rewards and hopes yielded up the Fort, and therein all the Princes of the Royall family, accustomably kept therein when the Throne was full; which vacant, the next Heir was taken hence, to succeed unto it. Of the same nature as it seemeth with the hill Amara in Ethro∣pia.

The Countrey formerly inhabited by a people called Venaz 〈◊〉〈◊〉, by Religion Gentiles, and held by them till the year 1300, when overcome by 〈◊〉〈◊〉 a 〈◊〉〈◊〉 and King of Delly: who driving the Inhabitants into the Hill-Countries, possessed himself of a great part of it, compelling them to submit unto his Religion. The residue hereof subdued by Abd••••a, whom Sa Nosaradine left here to pur∣sue the warre, was by him governed with great justice for 20 years: when dying, he left his government to his sonne Mamudza, confirmed by the Successor of Sa Nosaradine in his Fathers Regency on the pay∣ment of an annuall tribute. Mamudza soon finding that the young King was of no great Spirit, not only refused to pay the tribute imposed upon him, but took unto himself the title of King of Decan: giving this nameunto the Countrey (before called Canara) in regard that he had filled it with a Mungril body of Chri∣stians, Mahomet••ins, and Gentiles, acknowledging no common Parent, nor agreeing in language, customes, or Religion; the word 〈◊〉〈◊〉 signifying in that tongue, as much as an illegitimate brood, or a body of Bastards. Out of these he made choice of twelve (others say eighteen) whom he appointed Go∣vernors of so many Province: not daring to trust any of the old Nobility, or of the Natives of the Countrey: and hoping that these Slaves thus promoted by him, would be more subject to command. But here his silly hopes deceived him. For these Slaves either governed by their masters example, who had done the like unto the sonne and Heir of Sa Nosaradine, or presuming on their own strength, and some forein aids, left to their master nothing but an empty title, each one becoming absolute in his severall Province. Nor did his Successors for any long time enjoy that title; Daquem the last of them being taken at Bider his chief City: and thereupon the name of King usurped by every one of those petit Tyrants. Reduced at last into fewer hands, such of them as were left became considerable Princes; as appeareth by the great Army raised by Id tlean for the siege of Goa. But in the end, distressed on the one side by the Portugals, who embarred their trade, and invaded on the other side by the Great Mogul with most puissant Armies; Melie entituled King of Decan, and Miram King of Br••mpore, were in fine subdued by Echebar, about the year 1600. Against whom and his Successors, though the Venazarari still hold out, as the Resbutes or 〈◊〉〈◊〉 do in the Realm of Cambaia; and that the King of Amdanager, and perhaps some other pe∣tit Princes, are not yet brought under: yet we may look on the Mongul as the Lord of this Country; the residue of these Roytele••••, and petit Princes, (if any of them be remaining) being Homagers or Vassals to him. A∣gainst whose further Progress to the Cape of Comari, which Echebar so greedily aimed at, the puissant Kings of 〈◊〉〈◊〉, and those of Malabar, have opposed their power: whose Kingdomes and estates we must next survey, before we take a view of those other provinces, which are now under the command of that mighty Monarch.

9. CANARA.

CANARA is bounded on the North, with Decan (where of antiently it was a part) on the South, with Malabar; on the East, with Narsinga, from which separated by the Mountain Gates; on the West, with the Ocean. The reason of the name I find not; nor much worth the searching.

The Countrey hath a fair Sea-Coast, with many capacious Harbors to it, which cannot but adde much to the wealth thereof; as liberally furnished in the in-land parts, with Rice, Figs, and Sugars; but desti∣tute of Wheat, Pulse, and Barley. Not much the poorer for that want, the people either not know∣ing or not regarding the use of bread; but living on such fruits as the earth produceth of it self without the charge or care of the husband-man. In other things, but little differing, if at all, from the rest of the 〈◊〉〈◊〉: their Religion for the most part Pagani••h; but intermixt with Mahometans.

Principall Towns and Cities of it, 1. Me••inde, a commodious Haven. 2. Onor, a Port-Town of good note, sometimes held by the Portugals. 3. Buicalia, situate in the richest part of all this Country; never possessed by the Portugals, but under contribution to them. 4. Mangalor, a town of great wealth and trade; fortified with a strong Castle, once destroyed by the Portugueze, but recovered and repaired by the King of Narsinga, who is Lord of this Country. 5. Mayendre, more within the land. And so is also 6. Lispar, famous for her Quarries of Adamant. 7. Solsette, in a Peninsula of 20 miles com∣pass containing 36. Villages, and 80000 Inhabitants: the Town about 9 miles from Goa, and subject with the whole Peninsula to the Portugals.

This Country is now subject to the Kings of Narsinga; but formerly under the command of its own Princes:

the name of Canara, compreheading in those times all that Countrey also, which is now called Decan. Conquered by Sa Nosaradine and Abdessa, and by Mamudza cantoned into many Praefectures, this part reverting to its old name, fell to the Narsingan, who taking his advantages, in the minority of one of their Princes, became Master of it. And when the Idalcan, (for I take that not so much for the name of a man, as a Title of dignity) quarrelled his possession of it, as appertaining properly to the Kingdomes of Decan, Chrismarao then King of Narsinga, brought a powerfull Advocate to defend his right, that is to say, an Army of 606000 Foot, 29650 Horse, and 537 Elephants: every Elephant having a Tower on his back with four men in it, with which strong Argument the Idalean being confuted in the Schooles of war, with much difficulty saved himself, though he lost his cause: the Narsingan ever since continuing quiet in the possession of this Country; except onely some of the Sea-Towns in the power of the Portugals. Who in the year 1567 destroyed in those few places by them possessed no fewer than 200 of their Idol-Temples, with many of their Pagodes, or Idols in them; converting the Rents and Lands which belong∣ed unto them, with the Revenues raised from the severall Ports which they hold herein, to the mainte∣nance of a College of Jesuites in Salsette, and other Religious houses founded by them, in their other Cities.

10. MALABAR.

MALABAR is bounded on the North, with Canara, from which parted by the River Gan∣geraco; on the East, with the great Mountain Gates, by which divided from the Realm of Narsinga; on the West and South, with the main Ocean. On the Coast whereof it doth extend for the space of 300 miles, that is to say, from the River Gangeraco, to the Cape Comori, which I conceive to be the Com∣maria Extrema of Ptolomy, though others take it for the Promontory by him called Cory. But the breadth hereof is nothing answerable to the length, not above 50. miles where broadest, and ending towards the Cape in a point or Conus,

The Country more populous, for the bigness, than any in India; enjoying a very temperate Air, and a fruitfull Soyl, well watered, and indented with many Creeks: unfit for Corn, but plentifull in Rice, and all manner of Spices, as Ginger, Cinnamon, Cassia, Pepper, and most excellent fruits. Amongst their Trees, there is one whose name my Author speaks not, which bears Dates like unto the Palm; out of which they have not onely wood for Fewell, but they draw from it, wine, sugar, oyl, fine cloth and cordage: another tree, which beareth Cotton, and Cypress, or Cobweb-lawn, of the leaves whereof they make a fine stuff like to Sattin or Taffata. They have also great store of Apes, and Monkeyes, Parats, Paraquitoes, and other Creatures not known in these parts but from thence: not to say any thing of their Lions, Elephants, Bears, Bugles, common to them with others of their Indian neighbours. The flowers there alwayes in their Verdure, and the Trees perpetually green, by reason that the Air is so sweet and temperate.

The people are of coal-black colour (differing therein from the rest of the Indians, swarth and complexi∣oned like the Olive) well limbed, and wearing their hair long and curled: about their heads an hankerchief wrought with gold and silver, and about their middle a cloth, which hangeth down to conceal their naked∣ness. Of manners treacherous and bloody, more properly to be termed desperate than stout and valiant; and for more surety in their wars, they use poisoned Arrows, as they do also in their theeving both by Sea and Land, to which more addicted. In Religion for the most part Gentiles, and more besotted general∣ly on their Idolatries, than the rest of these Nations. The Pagode, or Idol which they worship, seated upon a brazen throne, and crowned with a rich Diadem. From his head issue out four horns, from his mouth four Tusks; his eyes fiery like a Glow-worm, his nose flat and ugly, his visage terrible, his hands like claws, his legs and thighs like those of a Lion. In a word, we cannot paint the Devill in a more ugly figure, than they do their God. Unto this Pagode, or his Priest, they offer the virginity of all their daugh∣ters: the Pagode having in the place of his privy parts a Bodkin of gold and silver, upon which the Bride (maried most commonly at ten or twelve years of Age) is forcibly set; the sharpness of it being such, that it forceth out the blood in great abundance: and if she prove with child that year, it is said to be of his be∣getting, and the more esteemed. Others with more humanity, instead of torturing their daughters to this wretched Idol (parallell almost to the offering of their sonnes to Moloch amongst the Syrians) present them to the Bramini, or Idol-Priest, to be deflowred the first night of the wedding: and without one of these two handsels, no man is suffered to enjoy the use of his wife, not their Kings themselves. More privile∣ged yet than many women neighbouring on them, in that they are not compelled to burn themselves with their husbands bodies: but may have many Husbands either successively or at once, as they list themselves: and if at once, she sends her children to that husband (as we know who did) who she thinks to have the best right to them.

The Country very well watered, as we said before, and parted by large Rivers into many Provinces; as if intended naturally to be cantonned into many Kingdomes. Divided at present, and long since, into those of 1. Cononor. 2. Calecut. 3. Granganor, 4. Chochin. 5. Cai-Colam. 6. Coulan, and 7. Travancor.

1. CONONOR, joineth to Canara, extending Southward on the shore about 20 miles, where is bordereth on the Kingdome of Calicut. The chief Cities of which, 1. Cononor, giving name to the whole Kingdom, well built, and beautified with a very fair Haven, not more safe than spacious, capacious of the greatest vessels, and for that cause much frequented by forein Merchants; but specially by the Portu∣gals, who for the assuring of their trade have here a Citadel, erected and well garrisoned with the Kings con∣sent.

2. Cota, not far from Cangeraco, the border betwixt this and Canara. 3. Peripatan, on the confines of Calicute. 4. Marabia. 5. Tramopatan. 6. Main, intermediate Towns, but not much observable.

2. CALICVTE, South from Cononor, extending on the Sea-shore 25 Leagues, and situate in the most pleasant and fruitfull part of all Malabar. Chief Towns whereof, 1. Pandaram, on the skirts of Cononor. 2. Tanor, a retiring place of the Kings. 3. Patangale. 4 Chatua, on the bor∣ders of Cranganor. 5. Chale, a strong peece, once in the hands of the Portugueze, but in the year 1601 recovered by the King of Calicute, who had besieged it with an Army of 90000 men. 6. Capa∣cote, the Haven to Calicute. 7. Calicute, the chief City of the Kingdom, to which it gives name, in length upon the Sea three miles, and a mile in breadth; containing about 6000 houses, but standing some of them far asunder, mean and low-built, few of them exceeding the height of a man on horse-back; the soil being so hollow and full of water, that it is not capable of the foundation of an heavier building; for that cause unwalled. Insomuch that Merchants houses are here valued but at 20. Crowns, those of the common sort at no more than ten. Which notwithstanding, of great trading, and much frequented by A∣rabians, Persians, Syrians, Indians, yea the very Tartars, these last from the furthest parts of Catha•• 6000 miles distant. The common Staple in those times of all Indian Merchandise, till distracted into seve∣rall Ports by the power of the Portuga••s: who being more industrious, and better Architects, have for∣ced a foundation on the shore for a very strong Castle, by which they do command the Haven, and receive custome of all Merchandise going in and out. The inconvenience whereof being found by the King of Ca∣licute, he besieged it with 100000 men: and though the Portugals held it out a whole winter together, yet in the end they were fain to quit it, but first den olished it to the ground, that it might not be made usefull to those of Calicute. A City of exceeding wealth, and of no less wantonness; the men here using to change wives with one another, to confirm their Amities: & the women spending their whole time in adorning themselves with Rings and Jewels, about their ears, necks, legs, arms, and upon their brests; though going naked for the most part, one would think that a little dressing might suffice them. If covered, it is onely with a smock of Calicut, a kind of linnen cloth here made, and from hence so called: and that not used but by those of the better sort.

3. CRANGANOR, lieth on the South of Calicute, a small Kingdom, and affording little worth the speaking of: but that a great part of the Inha••itants of it are of those old Christians, whom they call Christians of Saint Thomas. Cranganor, the chief City, which gives name to the whole, assumed to be so full of them, that they amount unto the number of 70000; vexed and exposed to publique scorn both by the Id••laters and Mahometans, amongst whom they live. The City rich, commodiously built for trade, at the mouth of a River, which watering with his crooked streams the most part of the Country, makes it fat and flourishing.

4. COCHIN, more South than Cranganor, extended on the shore for the space of 40. Leagues: and therein many Christians of the first plantation, besides some converts made of later times by the Jesu∣••tes. Towns of most note herein. 1. Augamale, the Arch-Bishops Sce of those antient Christians, fifteen miles from Cochin. 2. Cochin, a Bishops See, but of later erection, and the chief City of this Kingdome, which takes name from hence. Situate on the mouth or out-let of the River Mangat, by which almost encompassed like a Demy-Iland; Of great trade in regard of its Haven, very safe and spaci∣ous; as also by the friendship of the Portugal Nation. By whose power and favor they have not onely freed themselves from the King of Calicute, to whom before they did acknowledge some subjection; but drawn from thence a great part of the trafick also: this King permitting them to erect a Castle on the Ha∣ven, to secure their trade; which the other on good reasons of State forced them to destroy. The King here∣of in some respect superiour unto him of Calicute, when a Vassal to him: this King being the Pipe or Cheif Bishop, as it were, of all the Bramines: for which cause reverenced by all the Kings of Malabar, (as the Pope by many Princes of these Western parts) who look upon him as the head of their superstit••or, no pay him many Annuall duties.

5. CAI-COLAM, is on the South of Cochin, with which agreeing both in the temper of the Air, and the fertility of the Earth: which notwithstanding, the King hereof is not so rich as his other neigh∣bours. Here live also mary of the old Christians, taking name from Saint Thomas; but those so desti∣tute of Priests and Ministers to instruct them in the Principles of Christianity, that once in three years there came some formerly from the Patriarch of Muzall, in Assyria, to baptize their children. Better I hope provided for in these later daies: since their embosoming and reconcilement to the Church of Rome. Their chief Town of the same name with the Country, hath a very fair Haven, in the fashion of a Semi-Circle; well traded till destroyed by the Portugals; but since that re-edified. Of less note there are many both Towns and Villages, but such as do deserve here no particular mention.

6. COVLAN, upon the South of Cai-Colam, extended 20. Leagues more Southwards upon the Shores, is said to be destitute of corn, but plentifull of pepper, and most sorts of spices. So stored with Horses, and sit Riders to serve upon them, that the King hereof keeps 20000 Horse in continuall readiness either for invasion or Defence. This Kingdome, as the rest before, takes name from the chief City of it, which is called Coulan, 24. miles from Cochin, and once a member of this Kingdome; of great resort by forein Merchants, by reason of the fair and commodious Haven. In former times the ordinary Seat of the Cobritin, or chief Priest of the Bramines, till removed to Cochin: and held to be the Metropolis or mother City of all Malabar; the rest being thought to be but Colontes of this. Both in the City and the Country there are many Christians, as well of the originall foundation of Christianity, as of the late improvements which are made by the Jesuites.

7. TRAVANCOR, called also TRANCANOR, reacheth from the Kingdome of Coulan, to the Cape of Comarim, and turning towards the East, bendeth again unto the North, as far as Cael, in the Kingdome of Bisnagar or Narsinga. By which accompt it hath the benefit of the Sea on all sides ex∣cept towards the North: reaching in breadth from the West Seas unto the East about 90 miles. The Country, as the rest before, inhabited by many with the name of Christians, if they may be called so which want Sacraments: the condition of these Thomaean Christians in former times being so unhappy, that in 50 years before the coming of the Jesuites, (if the Jesuites may be believed from whom we have it) they had seen no Priest, nor other Minister of the Gospell. Chief Towns hereof, (for of those many o∣thers of less note I shall make no mention) are 1. Travancor, the chief City, which gives name to the Province, but neither well-built, nor of very much trading. 2. Quilacare, the head City of a peculiar Signeury, but held of the Kings of Trancanor, as their next and immediate Lords, though all those Kings also Feudataries of the Crown of Narsinga. And were that the worst Tenure by which they hold, it might be tolerable; but there is a matter of worse consequence which attendeth these besotted Princes. The Kingdome here is but a pomp of twelve years continuance, and then endeth in a sad Catastrophe. For at the end of those twelve years, the King repairs to Quilacare, prayeth before the Id••l above mentioned, then mounteth on a Scaffold covered with s••lk or Tape••try, and in the sight of all his People, gathered to∣gether to behold this strange solemnity, cutteth off his nose, ears, lips and other parts, which he casts to∣wards the Idol, and in conclusion cuts his own Throat for his finall Sacrifice: his designed Successor being present at this bloody Sacrifice, who at the twelve years end is to do the like. Never was Scepter bought at so dear a rate: For though all Crowns be lined with thornes, yet here the pomps of soveraignty be less lasting than in other places; the entrance full of fears, and the end, of horrors.

These Kingdomes heretofore but one, till the year 900 or thereabouts, were branched and cantoned into these seven by Sarama pereimal, the sole Monarch. He by the sollicitation of some Arabians, trading to his Ports, became Mahometan; and therein so devout, that he resolved upon a Pilgrimage to Meccha, there to end his daies. At his departure, he divided his estates into these seven parts, distri∣buting them amongst the neerest of his kindred: assigning unto him of Coulan the preheminence in sacred matters, and the Imperiall dignity unto him of Cale••ute, with the title of Samorin, that is to say, Chief Emperor, or as some write, a God on earth. He only privileged with the right and power of coinage; the rest to be subordinate, if not subject to him. From Percimals setting forwards to the City of Meccha, the Malabars accompt their reckonings, and begin their years; as the Christians from the birth of their Lord and Saviour. And for a time his hests were punctually observed. But the Kingdome of Calicute being weakned by the power of the Portugals, the other Kings began to free themselves from that subjec∣tion, and in the end to cast off all Relation to him, and to his Prerogatives. Yet still he is esteemed of more power and majestie, than any of the rest of the Kings of Malabar; and looked with more re∣verence than any of them. The certainty of his Revenues I have no where met with, but conjecture them to be very great; first in regard of that infinite trading which is mannaged from most parts of the World in his Port of Calicute; the customes and imposts upon which must needs be of exceeding value; and second∣ly in reference to the wealth of private Merchants, many of which are said to equal some Kings in Africk, and Dukes in Europe not a few.

Quid Domini facient? audent cum talia Fures. And if the man such riches have, Then what must he that keeps the Knave?

What Forces he is able to raise may be fully seen by that which hath been said before; wherein we find him with an Army of 90000 men besieging and taking in the Fort of Chalen; with another of 100000. beleagursing the Castle which the Portugals had built neer his City of Calicute. And when the said Por∣tugals stirred up the King of Cochin to make head against him, he fell upon them suddenly both by Sea and Land, with 60000 Land-souldiers, and 200 good Vessels of war for the service at Sea. Sufficient force to reduce the rest of these petit Kings to their old acknowledgements, but that some of them to avoid the danger, have put themselves under the Vassallage, or protection at the least, of the Great Mongul: others by suffering the Portugals to build forts in their Kingdomes, have engaged them in defence of their estate against this pretender. His forces consist most of Foot, Horse being unserviceable in these Countries, by reason of those many Rivers which interlace it. And these Foot are compounded most of Gentry which they there call Nairos, trained to their weapons when they are but seven years of Age; every one to that weapon which he most delighteth in; which makes them very expert and nimble at them: much privileg∣ed for that cause by the Lawes of the Countrey; and so esteemed of by the King, that out of them his Si∣sters choose what men they please to be their Husbands; some of them by that means being made the Fa∣thers of the King succeeding.

Nothing else memorable touching the affairs of Calicute, but the way of succession to the Kingdome: the Crown descending upon none of the Kings Children, but on the sonne of his Eldest Sister, or neerest kinswoman. For being that one of the Bramines hath alwaies the maidenhead of his Queens, and that some of these Stallions are continually allowed to keep them company; it is presumed, or very probably sup∣posed, that the Queens Children are the Bramines, and not the Kings.

8. NARSINGA.

NARSINGA is bounded on the South, with Travancor; on the West, with the Mountain Gates; on the North, with Oristan or Orixa; on the East, with the Golf of Bengala. So called from

〈◊〉〈◊〉 the chief City of it, and the Royal residence of the King.

The 〈◊〉〈◊〉 is said to be in length 600 miles, or as some say of as much extent as can be travelled in six Months: plentiful in the same commodities which the rest of India do hafford, except Pepper and some other spices which are proper to Malabar. Not so well furnished with Rivers, as some other places: which want is liberally supplyed by water falling from the Mountains, and received into trenches, meers, and 〈◊〉〈◊〉, which do wonderfully cool, moisten, and enrich the land, causing the Corn and Cat∣tel to prosper above all imagination. Most destitute in this kind is the Province of Choromandel, in which if any year passeth without rain, they fall into such extremities, that they are fain to ••ell their children.

The People, in Religion 〈◊〉〈◊〉, so worshipping one God, as the Lord of all, which is taught them by the light of nature, that they join the Devil or their Pagodes in Commission with him, where to indu∣ced by the perswasion of their beastly Bramines, who thereout suck no small advantage. Some Christians there are intermixt, of the old plantation, especially in Ma••apur, and the Region of Choromandel: but not to well instructed in the Principles of their own belief, as to be able to convince or convert the Gentiles, nor to disswade them from the use of some Heathenigh customes, though barbarous, inhumane, and against all reason; not used in any place but amongst the Indians. Amongst which I reckon for most savage, the forcing of poor women to burn themselves with their husbands bodies, the womens kindred not the hus∣bands thrusting them on these hard conditions, who reckon it a disgrace to their familie, if she should re∣fuse. And because they will be sure not to have that infamy stick upon them, they have ordered that the woman who shall so refuse, must shave her head, and break her Jewells, and not be suffered to eat, drink, or sleep, or company with any body till her death. A life more miserable than the Flames which they seek to shun. This makes them leap into the fire with joy and greediness, and to contend which shall be formost: she being thought to have been most loving during his life, which is now most willing to accom∣pany him in his death, and offer her self to his Mane, at the funeral pile: whereunto thus alludeth the Poet.

Et 〈…〉〈…〉, quae viva sequatur 〈◊〉〈◊〉 r••est non licuisse mori. 〈…〉〈…〉 & praebent pectora sammae: 〈…〉〈…〉

A shame 'tis not to dy: they therefore strive, Who may be sam'd to follow him alive. The Victor burns, yields to the flame her brest; And her burnt face doth on her husband rest.

Chief Cities of this Countrey, 1. 〈◊〉〈◊〉, on the borders of Travancer, belonging antiently to the Kings of 〈◊〉〈◊〉, now to those of 〈◊〉〈◊〉, the people whereabout called Paravt, are a kind of Christians, who live for the most part by fishing for Pearl, which they fell to the Portugals, and Bengalan Mer∣chants. 2. 〈◊〉〈◊〉, the chief City of the Province called Musulipatan, the Lord whereof is a Moor, of the 〈◊〉〈◊〉 sect; but a Vassal to the Kings of Narsinga. 3. Chamdagrin, one of the Seat-Royals of the King. 4. Prepett, three miles from Chamdag••••n, memorable for an yearly feast here celebrated in honour of 〈◊〉〈◊〉 (once s••le King of Malavar) reckoned for a Saint at least in these parts of India: the offerings at which accustomably amount unto 200000 Crowns. 5. Chadambaram, the Mo••he-City of these 〈◊〉〈◊〉 Solemnities, which are done to Pereimal, who hath here a Temple endowed with 30000 Ducats of annual reat, all consumed by the Bramines belonging to it, who pretend to have been born out of P••re••••alls head. 6. Madura, honoured with the residence of the Cho••an••t•••• or the Chief Prelsc of the Bramines of this Kingdome; so numerous, that in this Town, and the territories of it only, are thought to be no fewer than an hundred thousand. The seat also of one of three 〈◊〉〈◊〉, or tributary Kings of the Crown of Narsinga: the other two residing at 7. 〈◊〉〈◊〉, and S. 〈◊〉〈◊〉, the Chief Towns of their Principalities, but not else observable. 9. Mahapur, called also St. Thomas, from an opinion that the body of that Apostle was here interred: martyred here by the 〈…〉〈…〉, whose posterity, in other things like unto other men, are said to have one legand foot as big as an Elephants: a punishment inflicted on the whole Generation for the sin of their An∣cestors: How true this is I cannot say, but sure I am that Dorotheus faith, that he resteth at Calaem••na, where he was slain with a dart. However, the Portugali, to make some use of the old tradition, removed some bones from this place which were said to be his, and enshrined them in Goa, their own City; much visi∣ted by profitable 〈◊〉〈◊〉, to their great enriching. The City once so large and populous, that it con∣tained 330 Temples for the use of divers Nations which resorted thither. In these later daies desolate and forlorn, inhabited onely by some old Christians, till the Portugueze began again to people it with new Colonies. 10. Choromandel, giving name to a large Sea-Coast, lying on the West side of the Golf of Bengala. 11. Casta, a Town of Choromandel, in which the woman is not burned with her Husband, as in other places of this Countrey; but buried quick in the same grave with him. 12. Negapatan, in the same Region, inhabited for the most part by Saint Thomas Christians. 13. Tarnassari, once the head City of a Kingdome to called, the King whereof was able to bring into the field, 100000 horse and foot, and 100 armed Elephants, but now subject to the King of Narsinga. The people black, but so out of love with their own colour, that they willingly prostitute their wives or daughters, to any people of a whi∣ter and more cleer complexion. 14. Bisnagar, once the chief City of this kingdome, whence the King is sometimes called the King of Bisnagar. In those times 24 miles in compass, with nine Gates in it, (amongst others) continually guarded with Souldiers; and a magnificent Palace not elsewhere equalled. In the year 1565. sacked by four of the Mahometan Kings of Decan, who with their joint forces had invaded this kingdome, it became desolate and forsaken; and the Court removed to 15. Penegardc,

eight daies journey within the Land (Bisnagar being seated on the borders of Decan) But long it had not staid there when removed to 16. Narsinga, where it hath ever since been fixed, which is now the chief City of this Kingdome, unto which it gives name, though the King many times call himself by the name of that City where he resideth for the present.

Of the Antiquity of this kingdome I have little to say; these Eastern parts not being known at all till these later times, nor well known in these. About the year 1550 their King then reigning was imprisoned by three of his Captains or Commanders; who shewed him only once a year to his Subjects, parting the pow∣er and government amongst themselves. He being dead, and his sonne kept in the like restraint, Romara∣gio the first Captain ascended the Throne, Timaragio mannaged the Estate, and Bengahe commanded the Army. But these Usurpers being overthrown by the kings of Decan, in the year 1565. Timaragio the Survivor took the charge of all; whose sonne, to make himself sure of the kingdome, murdered his impri∣soned Soveraign (the life and liberty of kings being much of a date) whence followed many broiles and troubles touching the Succession, till settled in the person of Chrismarao, the undoubted Heir: who did not only restore peace and quiet to Narsinga it self, but recovered Canara out of the hands of the Idalcan, who had before endangered his estate therein. Of the great Army which he led against this Idalcan, we have spoke already: adding here onely, that before he went upon this enterprise (called the journey of Ra∣chiol) he sacrificed in nine daies 2036 Beasts to the Countrey Idols, the flesh whereof he caused to be distributed amongst the poor; Routed at first, and being perswaded by some about him to go out of the field, he is said to have made this Noble Answer, that he had rather the Idalcan should boast that he had slain him, than vanquished him. And thereupon leaping into the thickest of his enemies, and well followed by the valiantest of his Friends, he obtained the victory. But this vast Army of 606000 foot, 30000 Horse, 537 Elephants, with necessaries answerable to such infinite multitudes, speaks only what he can do on extreme necessiry, or when he hath some long time of preparation, as he had in that Action. The power of Kings is better measured by their standing forces, than by premeditated Levies. And here∣in this Prince comes not much short of his greatest neighbours: his standing bands consisting of 40000 Nai∣ros, or Gentlemen of his own Kingdom, which serve on foot; 20000 Horse, who are either Persians or Ara∣bians, and 200 Elephants; well paid, and kept in continual readiness: his foot defraied out of his Re∣venues, his Horse maintained like the Turks Timariots out of cerrain lands distributed amongst his Cap∣tains (some of which are said to have a million of Crowns per Annum) to furnish him with these stable bands of Horses and Elephants.

As for his Revenue it is reckoned at 12 millions yearly, out of which he is thought to lay up three, de∣fraying with the rest the expence of his houshold, and the entertainment of his Foot. This sum amassed together out of the lands, mines, and forrests of the Countrey, which are wholly his; and the waters of of some Rivers, (sold by him to his subjects) which he monopolizeth; the common people having nothing but their Armes and Labour. Of which, the mines, forrests, and one third of the lands, he retaineth to himself; the other two being divided amongst his Captains. So that it is no marvel if so rich a Coun∣trey yield him such an income, considering it is all his own. I do rather wounder (of the two) it should yield no more.

9. ORISTAN.

ORISTAN or ORIXA, is bounded on the South, with Narsinga; on the West, with Del∣ly, and Mandao; on the North, with the Kingdomes of Botanter; on the East, with the Golf of Bengala, and part of Patanaw or Patan••; so called from Orissa, the chief City of it.

The Countrey hath plenty of Rice, cloth of Cotton, and a fine stuff like silk, made of grass, and there called Yerva; with which, together with Long Pepper, Ginger, Mirabolins, and other commo∣dities here growing, they use to load 25 or 30 Ships from the Haven of Orissa only. The people so well governed, or so hating theft, that in the time of their own kings, before they came under the Moguls, a man might have travelled with Gold in his hand without any danger. In other points of the same temper and religion with the rest of the Indians subject to that Prince.

It is generally well watered, and interlaced with many Rivers, which do much moisten and refresh it, but none so beneficial to the Kings hereof, as the River Guangen (of old called Chaberis) the waters whereof esteemed sacred by the Kings of Calicure and Narsinga, and much used by them in their sacrifi∣ces and superstitious purgations, are wholly ingrossed by this King, who selleth them to those Princes at excessive rates. Besides which Rivers it is watered with a fair Sea-coast, of 350 miles in length; that is to say, from Cape Guadarino in the South, which divides it from the Realm of Narsinga; to Cape Leo∣gorae in the East, which parts it from Bengala. But for all that not very much traded, because not so well provided of commodious Havens, as many other Indian Provinces of a far less Territory.

Towns of most note herein, 1. Orissa, on the Sea-side, or not far from it, the best traded Port of all this Kingdome; to which the name thereof is to be ascribed, as the Head-City of the Countrey. 2. Cate••ha, six daies journey within the land, the ordinary residence of their Kings, before it was subdued by the Great Monguls. 3. Angeli, a well-frequented Port, at the bottom of the Golf of Bergala, from whence many ships are yearly laden with Indian wares. 4. Bacolli, or Bacola, more within the land, and once the head City of a Kingdome, but a very poor one. 5. Simergan, where they held it an impiety to eat flesh, or kill any beast. 6. Senerpate, of which little memorable. Nor do I find any thing which deserves much memory in the affairs of this Kingdom; but that the Kings hereof were Gentiles, subdu∣ed not many yeers since by the K. of Patanaw: and both, grown weaker by that war, by Echebar, the Great Mongul.

10. BOTANTER.

BOTANTER (under which name I comprehend all those petit Kingdomes which are crowded together in the North and North-East of this part of 〈◊〉〈◊〉) hath on the South, Oristan and 〈◊〉〈◊〉; on the West, the River Guenga or Chaberis, by which parted from the Realms of Sa••g••; on the North, the Zagathaian Tartars, divided from it by some branches of Mount Taurus; on the East, the famous River Ganges. So called from Bottia, the principall City of Botanter, which is the chief of these small Kingdomes.

The Countrey great, of three moneths journey in extent, full of high Mountains, one of which may be seen five dayes journey off, in which are said to dwell a people with ears of a span long or more, whom o∣therwise those of the Valleys count as Apes. In those parts which are next Sanga, they are white, and 〈◊〉〈◊〉i in others, more enclined to the Olive Colour. Their garments they wear close to their bod••es, so streight that one cannot see a pleit or wrinckle; and those they never put off by night nor day, whilest they are able to hang on: nor do they wash at any time, for fear of defiling so pure a Creature as the water. Content with one wife (deservedly to be held a miracle in these Eastern parts) and yet cohabit not with her after two or three Children. When any of them dy, the Sooth-sayer is to tell them what to do with his bo∣dy: according to whose direction (first consulting his Books) they burn, bury, or eat it. Few Tow••s of note there are amongst them. The principall, 1. Bottia, the Metropolis of it. 2. Calamur, and 3. N••gar••••t, their Staples for the sale of their cloth, (most of the people being Weavers) bought of them by the Chinors, and 〈◊〉〈◊〉 Merchants, who resort frequently to those markets. This a distinct King∣dome of it self, the Kings whereof are called Dermair, but 〈◊〉〈◊〉 to the great Mongul. And so 〈◊〉〈◊〉

2. 〈◊〉〈◊〉, another Kingdome of this Tract, frontire upon Cauch••-China, beyond 〈◊〉〈◊〉; so called from 〈◊〉〈◊〉, the chief Town of it. The Country rich, by reason that it may be drowned, and dried up again, when the people will; full of good pastures by that means, and those well stored with Sheep, Goats, Swine, Deer, and other Cattel, though the people neither kill nor eat them. But on the contrary build Hospitals for them, in which when lame and old they are kept till they die. Yet many times they eat their money, and I cannot blame them; their small money being▪ Almonds.

3. GOVREN, a kind of Desart or unpeopled Country, joyneth close to this. In which are few Villages, grass longer than a man, and therein many Buffes, Tigers, and other wild Basts, none wilder than the Theeves who frequent the wildernesses.

In this Tract also are the Kingdoms of RAME, and RECON, joining upon Zag••th••••, or endi∣ning towards it; possessed by the Mongul Tartars from the time of Tamerlane, if not before: but Fenda∣taries to the Kings of Ch••bul or Arachosie, who commanded in the North-East of Pers••••, and these North parts of India: and from those places drew his Army or the greatest part of it, when called unto the aid of G••lgee, the King of M••nd••o. Here is also the Kingdome of TIPPVRA, naturally fenced with hills and mountains; and by that means hitherto defended against the Mongul Tartar••, their bad neighbours; with whom they have continuall warres. But of these Northern Kingdomes lying towards Tartary, there is but little to besaid, and that little of no certain knowledge: those parts being hitherto so untravelled, that they may pass in the Accompt of a Terra Inc••gnita.

11. PATANAW.

PATANE or PATANAW, is bounded on the North, with the Realms of 〈◊〉〈◊〉 on the East, with Ganges; on the West, with Oristan; and on the South, with the Kingdome and Gulf of Bengala. So called from Pata••e the chief City of it. There is another Kingdome of th•••• name in the further India: but whether it were so called because a Colony of this; or from some resemblances in the nature of the severall Countries, or from the signification of the word in the Indian language; I am not able to determine. Certain I am, that though they have the same name, yet they are under several Go∣vernments, and situate in farre distant places: no other wise agreeing than in some resemblances, as Hol∣land in the Low-Countries doth with Holland in Lincol••shire.

The Country yieldeth veins of Gold which they dig out of the pits, and wash away the earth from it in great Bolls. The people tall, and of slender making, many of them old: great Praters, and as great dissemblers. The women so bedecked with silver and copper, especially about the feet, that they are not able to endure a shooe. Both Sexes use much washing in the open Rivers, and that too interm••xt together in their naturall nakedness; especially such as live neer the banks of the River Jemenae (esteemed more ho∣ly than the rest) which from Agra passing thorow this Country, falleth into Ganges.

Chief Towns hereof, 1. Patane, a large town and a long one, built with very broad streets; but the houses very mean and poor, made at the best of earth and hurdles, and thatched over head. The Metro∣polis of this Kingdom, because the antientest, and that which gives the name unto it. 2. Bannaras, a great Town on Ganges, to which the Gentiles from remote Countries use to come in pilgrimage, to bath them∣selves in the holy waters of that River. The Country betwixt this and Patanaw, very fair and flourishing, and beautified upon the Rode with handsome Villages. 3. Siripur, the chief Seat of one of the old Princes of this Country; not yet subdued by the Great Mongu's. 4. Ciandecan, on the bottom of the Gulf of Bengala; the Seat of another of their Kings. One of which memorable for a trick put upon the Jesu••es when blamed by them for the worship of so many Pag••des, as contrary both to the law of God and na∣ture. For causing them to rehearse the Decalogue, he told them that he did offead no more against those

commandements in worshiping so many Pagodes, than they themselves in worshipping so many Saints. 5. 〈◊〉〈◊〉, a fair City (for a City of Moores) once part of Patanaw, since ascribed to Bengala.

The people of this Country properly called Patanea••••, but corruptly Parthians, w••re once of great command and power in these parts of India. Lords for a time, of a great part of the Kingdom of Benga∣la, into which driven by Baburxa, the Mongul Tartar, the Father of Emanpaxda, and Grand-father of E••hebar. Their last King being slain in that war, twelve of ••heir chief Princes joined in an Aristocra∣ty, and warring upon Emanpaxda had the better of him. After this, their Successors attempted Oristan, and added that also to their Estate. But they could not long make good their fortunes; subdued by E∣thebar the Mongul, and made subject to him. Three of them, viz. the Prince of Siripur, the King of 〈◊〉〈◊〉, and he whom they call Mausadalion, retain, as yet (for ought I can learn unto the contra∣ry) as well their antient Paganism, as their natural liberty. The other nine, together with Mahome∣tanism, have vassail••d themselves to the great Mongul, now the Lord Paramount of the Country.

12. BENGALA.

BENGALA is bounded on the North, with Patanaw; on the East, with the Kingdoms of Pegu; on the South and West, with the Gulf of Bengala; So called from Bengala the chief City of it.

It containeth in length on the Gulf and River 360 miles, and as much in breadth into the Land A Countrey stored with all things necessary to the life of man, great plenty of Wheat, Rice, Sugar, Ginger, and Long-Pepper. Such aboundance of Silk, & Cotton, and of Flesh and Fish, that it is impossible that any Countrey should exceed it in those commodities. And which crowns all, blest with so temperate and sweet an air, that it draws thither people of all sorts to inhabit it. Here is also, amongst other rarities, a Tree called Moses, which beareth so delicate a fruit, that the Jews and M••hometans who live here, af∣firm it to be the fruit which made Adam to sin.

The natural Inhabitants for the most part, are of white complexion, like the Europaeans, subtil of wit, and of a courteous disposition, well skill'd in dealing in the world, much given to traffick, and intelligent in the way of Merchandize, if not somewhat deceitful. No•• ignorant of other Arts, but with some imat∣tering in Philosophy, Physick, and Astrology. Stately and delicate both in their Diet and Apparell: not naked as in others of these Indian Provinces, but clothed in a shirt or smock reaching to their feet, with some upper Garment over that. The women of an ill name for their unchastity, though Adultery be punished with cutting off of their noses. Neat, if not curious and too costly in this one custom, that they never seeth meat twice in the same Pot, but for every boyling buy a new one. In Religion, for the most part Mahometans, especially on the Sea-shores, which lay most open and commodious to the Arabians; by whom Mahometanism was here planted many ages since.

Of Rivers we need take no care having spoke of Ganges. That with its many Channels may abundant∣ly serve to water so small a Province. But hereof more anon in a place more proper. Proceed we now unto the Cities. The principall whereof, 1. Bengala, which gave name to the whole Kingdom, situate on a branch of the River Ganges, and reckoned for one of the most beautifull Towns of all the Indies. Ex∣ceedingly enriched by trade, but more by Pilgrimages, by reason of the holyness and divine operations a∣scribed by the Indians to the waters of it: there being few years in which not visited by three or four hundred thousand Pilgrims. 2. Gouro, the seat-Royall of the antient Kings. 3. Catig••n, on the bottom of the Gulf of Bengala, a well-traded Port. 4. Taxd••, once a Town of great trafick, and situ∣ate in those times on the banks of Ganges; now by the changing of the Channel (occasioned by the fre∣quent overflowings of it) above a league off from the River. 5. Porto Grande, and 6. Por••o P••qu••no, two Towns of the Portugals, but without Forts for defence, or rules for Government. Places like the Asylum, which was built by Romulus; whereunto such as dare not stay in their own Countries, or any well-regulated Cities, use to make their resort; privileged here to live in all kind of licentio••sness.

Here is also in the North parts of this Province, or adjoining to it, the City and Kingdom of ARA∣CHAN. Lying along the banks of Ganges, but so remote from the Sea, that it is 50 miles distant from the neerest branch of it. Wealthy, and populous withall; governed heretofore by a King of its own, so wallowing in wealth and sensuall pleasures, that he had in this City and the parts adjoyning twelve Royall Palaces or Seraglios, all stowed with women for his Iust. Now subject with Bengala and Patanaw, betwixt which it lieth, to the Empire of the great Monguls.

There are also some small Ilands in the Gulf of Bengala, which I account unto that Kindom. 1. Ba∣zacata, now called Basse. 2. Barassae, of which name there are five in Prolomy, three of them by Mer∣cator said to be Mind••nao, Cailon, and Subut. 3. Two, called the Ilands of Good fortune, by him placed under the Ae••uator, and said to be inhabited by Anthropophagi, or man eaters; as also were three more which he calls 4. Sabadibae, now named Cainam. 5. I••sulae Satyrorum, or the 〈◊〉〈◊〉 of Sa∣••••res, three in number, the people whereof were reported to have tails like Satyres▪ And 6. those called Maniolae, in number ten, (now Islas de Pracel) reported by Ptolomy to be so stored with Adamant stones, that they violently drew to them any ships or vessels, which had iron in them: for which cause they which used these Seas fastned the planks of their ships with wooden pins. But our later Navigators find no such matter unless perhaps it be in the exploits of Sir Huon of Bourdeaux, where indeed we meet with such an Iland, in the course of his Errantrie.

But to return again to the Kindome of Bengala, we find it of a different constitution from the rest of the Kingdomes of these parts. Not governed by a family of Successive Princes, descended from the Stemme of a Royall Ancestrie, as the others are. Chance, or necessity, had brought thi∣ther many Abassines, or Aethiopians, who made a conquest of the Country; and

chose a King out of themselves. To keep whan they had gotten, and perpetuate the Regall honor to the Abassine Nation, they procured thence yearly certain thousands of Slaves, whom they trained up unto the warres, advanced unto the higest commands in civill and military service; and out of them elected one for their Lord and Soveraign: as the Mamalucks in the Kingdome of Egypt, whom her••in they followed. By some Arabians trading with them, they came in time to admit Mahometanism amongst them; on 〈◊〉〈◊〉 Sea-coasts especially. Dispossessed first of some part of their Kingdome, lying about Satagan, by the Pa∣taneans; when driven to seek new dwellings by Baburxa, the Mongul Tartar: and of their whole Kingdom by the valor and good fortune of Echebar, who added it unto the rest of his estate.

Thus have we drawn together all the Indian Provinces on this side of Ganges (the Kingdoms of M••∣labar and Narsinga being but a Parenthesis in the construction of this sentence) into the hands of the Mo••∣gul. So called for his descent from the Mongul-Tartars, one of the five great Tribes or Nations into which that People were divided. Derived originally from the famous and mighty Tamerlane, who hav∣ing added almost all the greater and lesser Asia, unto his estates: left Persia, with the parts of Ind•••• which lay neerest to it on the North, to Myrza Charrok, his fourth, sonne. But his issue failing in Abdula, the 4th. of that line, those estates fell to Abusaid, descended from Marom••ha, the third sonne of Tamerlane: Whose sonne and Successor called Zeuzes, by some Malaonchres, being disseized of the greatest part of the Kingdome of Persia, by Ussan-Cassanes: the rights of all, with the possession of Arachosia (now called Chabul) and Paropamisus (now Candahor or Sablestan) together with so much of India as was held by those Princes, remained in Hamed, one of the younger sonnes of Abu••••••aid; whose posterity laying hold on such opportunities as were offered to them, have made themselves Masters in few years of this mighty Empire. Whose Successors and their achievements we shall here present.

The Great Monguls.

• 1473. 1. Hamed, the sonne of Abu••••••ul, of the race of Tamerlane, after the conquest of Persia by Vss••••-Cassanes, succeeded in Chabus, Candahor, and the parts of the Realms of India subject to the Tartars.
• 1500. 2. Babor, or Baburxa, in danger to be dispossessed of most of his Estates by the neighbouring V••beques, living upon the borders of Persia, Tartary, and India, whom at last he quieted; enlarged his dominions by the conquest of some part of Patanaw, and other Kingdomes in the North.
• 1532. 3. Hamoyen, the sonne of Babor, or Baburxa, commonly called Emanpaxda, vanquished by the Parthians, or Pataneans, and their confederates, craved aid of Tamas, the 2d. Persian Monarch of this line, on promise to conform to the Sophian Sect: and by that and confirmed and settled his affairs, but held himself to the former Principles of his Irre••••∣gion.
• 4. Merhamed, or Miramudius, sonne of Emanpaxda, called in by Galgee the King of Man∣d••o, against Badurius the Cambaian, vanquished the Cambaian King in two pitched fields, and conquered the Kingdomes of Mandao, and Balassia, with some other Pro∣vinces.
• 5. Adabar, the sonne of Merhamed, added the Realms of Delly and Cambaia, unto his Dominions.
• 1550. 6. Mahomet Selabdin, commonly called Eohebar, brother of Adabar, the most fortunate and victorious Prince of all this family, subdued the Kingdoms of Caxi••••ir, Agra, De∣can, Orissa, Bengala, Patanaw, and divers others of less note.
• 1605. 7. Selim, surnamed Jangheere, the sonne of Echebar, who added nothing that I hear of, to his fathers conquests.
• 1627. 8. Blockie, the grandchild of Selim by his eldest sonne, (wickedly murdered by the practice of Curroon at Agra) proclamed King on the death of his Grand-father; but shortly after made away by Asaph Chawn, so to make room for
• 1627. 9. Curroon, the third sonne of Selim or Jangheere, and sonne-in-law unto Assaph Chawn; ha∣ving by his own Ministers, and the hands of his Father-in-law, murdered the proclamed King his Nephew, and all the other Princes of the Royall blood, succeeded into the E∣states, and was crowned at Agra. A wicked and bloody Prince, still living for ought I hear to the contrary.

To look a little on these Princes, their estate and power; in matters of Religion they have generally been Mahometans, that Religion being long since embraced by the Tartars, from whom they originally de∣scended. But not so scrupulous or precise in that profession, as to endeavour the suppressing of any other opi∣nions: both Echebar, and his sonne Jangheere, being so inclined unto Christianity, that they permit∣ted the Jesuites to build Colleges and Churches in Agra it self the Imperiall City, and many other chief Cities in his dominions. Of Echebar it is reported, that being doubtfull what Religian to adhere unto, he caused 30 Infants to be so brought up that neither their Nurses nor any body else should speak unto them; re∣solving to addict himself to the Religion of that Country, whose language should be spoken by them, as most agreeable to nature: and he did accordingly. For as those Children spoke no language, so was he positive, and resolved in no Religion. Able to see the va••ues of Mahomet, and the horrible impieties of the Gentiles, but not willing to conform unto the strict•••••••• ••t Christianity. And though Selim who

succeeded, to content his Mahometan Subjects, declared himself for that Religion; yet his affairs be∣ing once settled, and his Throne confirmed, he became as Neutral as his Father. Sultan Curr••on now Reigning, of the same Neutrality, and 'tis well he is so, there being no Religion so impure and bloody, which he would not dishonor by his known ungraciousness.

The Language spoken by these Princes, and their natural Subjects the Mogores, or Mongul-Tartars, is said by some to be the Turkuh. But I think rather that it is some Language near it, than the very same: And that the Language which they speak is the ancient Scythian or Tartarian, from which the Turks (a Scythian people) differ but in Dialect, a sprinkling of the Persian intermixt amongst it. A mixture not to be denied, in regard of their long dwelling in that Countrey, the entercouse which their Subjects of those parts have with these of India, and that the greatest part of their Souldiers, Officers and Commanders, are supplied from thence.

Their Government is absolute, if not Tyrannical, the Great Mongul being Lord of all, and heir to every mans estate which is worth the having: the persons and purses of his Subjects at his sole disposing, so that he may amass what treasures, and raise what forces for the Wars his need requireth, or the Avarice or Ambition of his Ministers shall suggest unto him. First, for his Treasures, it is conceived that his Revenue doth amount yearly to Fifty Millions of Crowns, and there are reasons to perswade that it may be more. The Countrey very rich, and notably well traded from all parts of the world, the Impost upon which is of infinite value, besides the vast sums of money brought into his Dominions from all Countreys whatsoever, which hold traffick here; their commodities not being to be parted with but for ready coyn. The whole Land being also his, he estates it out for no term certain, retaining a third part of the profits to him∣self, and leaving two thirds to the Occupants, to be held by them during pleasure. Who if they thrive up∣on their bargains, they thrive not for themselves, but him: it being in his power, if he want patience to ex∣pect the Incumbents death, to enter on the whole estate of the Te••ant by the way of Escheat: but if he tarry till the death of the Occupant, it falls to him of course, the wife and children of the deceased being fairly dealt with, if he content himself with the personal estate, and leave the Land to them to begin anew. For instance, of those huge sums which in so rich a Countrey may be had this way, it is said that when the Vice Roy of Lahor dyed, he left to Echebar three millons of Gold, besides Silver, Jewels, Horses, Ele∣phants, Furniture and Goods, almost invaluable: And of one Raga Gagnar, another of his great Of∣ficers, that at his death the Great Mongul seized of his into his hands 3300 pound weight of Gold, be∣sides Plate and Jewels. Besides these means of heaping treasure, all the Mines of the Countrey are wholly his, and the Presents given by all sorts of Suters, hardly to be numbered; none being admitted to his presence which comes empty handed. Finally, if Badurius, which was King of Cambaia onely, could bring into the field at once 500 Tun of gold and silver to pay his Army; and after the loss of all that treasuee, advanced upon the sudden the sum of 600000 Crowns, which he sent to Solyman the Magnificent to come to succor him; both which it is well known he did: What infinite Treasures must we think this Prince to be master of, who hath more than four times the estate of the King of Cambaia, and far more trading now than in former times?

By the like Parallel we may conjecture somewhat at his Forces also. Badurius the Cambaian brought into the field against Merhamed, and the King of Mand ae, as was partly touched upon before, 150000 Horse, 500000 Foot, 2000 Elephants armed, 2000 pieces of brass Ordnance, of which were four Basilisks, each of them drawn with 100 yoke of Oxen; and 500 Carts loaded with powder and shot. What then may we conceive of this Prince, who is Lord of so much a greater estate than he, but that his Levies may be raised proportionably to so great Dominions? But because possibly Badurius did extend himself to the utmost of his power, and having lost two Battels, was never able to recruit again, which no wise Prince would do but in great extremities: It is conceived that the Mongul, without running any such hazards on the loss of a Battel, can in an instant raise 50000 Elephants, 300000 Horse, and Foot proportionable; and ye•• have stock enough for an After-game, if that he should chance to lose the first. But it is seldom that he hath advanced to so high a Muster. For in his action upon the Kingdoms of Decan, he had but an Hundred thousand men, and a thousand Elephants for fight; though possibly of all sorts of people there might be more than double that number. For in his ordinary removes in time of Progress, it is said that his followers of all sorts amount unto two hundred thousand; and that his Tents do usually take up as much ground as the City of London. Yet notwithstanding this great power, the fortunes of this Empire have not only been at a stand, since the deathof Echebar; But the Rasbooches in Cambaia, the Venazarari in Decan, and other puissant Rebels in other parts of his Dominions, hold out still against him, some of them being said to command as much land as a pretty good Kingdom, and to have always in a readiness 20000 Horse, & 50000 foot, to make good their Mountains. Nature or Divine Providence hath given to Empires, as to men, a determinate growth, beyond which there is no exceeding.

2 INDIA EXTRA GANGEM.

INDIA EXTRA GANGEM is that part of the great Continent of India, which lieth on the further side of the River Ganges, from the spring or fountain of it, wheresoever it be, to the fall thereof into the sea by the first and last mouth thereof, which is called Antholi: The other four being reckoned into the other part of India, on this side of that River. From hence extended Eastward as far as China and the Oriental Ocean, on other parts bounded as before.

The Countrey in those elder times so renowned for wealth, that one Tract of it had the name of The Silver Region, and an other of The Golden Chersonese: this last supposed to be the Ophir of Solomon, of

which more hereafter. The People of the same nature and disposition, in the elder times, as those which did inhabit on the hither side of the Ganges: not so well known to the Greeks or Romans as the others were, by reason of the remoteness of their situation; nor so well discovered at the present. So that the best Ac∣compt we shall be able to give of it, will no: be so exact and punctual as of that before: with reference either to the estate hereof in the times of the Ancients, or the affairs of it in these dates.

Mountains of most note in it, 1. Bepyrrus, 2. Maeandrus, 3. Semanthinus; and 4 these called Da∣masi, touched upon before, in our general discourse of India. Out of which, and from other Springs, flow these following Rive••s, 1. Catabeda, 2. Bocosanna, 3. Sadus, 4. Temala, 5. Besynga, 6. Chry∣saoras, 7. Polanaas, 8. Attabas, these three last in the part hereof called the Golden Chersonese. 9. Daonas, and 10. Dorias, rising out of the Mountains called Damasi. Others there are whose names I meet with in my Author, but of no great note: by what names any of them now distinguished, it is hard to say. Nor find I any who have dared to adventure on it.

Of the chief Towns, 1. Balanga, 2. Cirtatha, 3. Tasile, 4. Tagma, and 5. Malthura, have the name of being the Metropoles of their several Nations. 6. Triglyphon, only honoured with the name of Regia; more memorable perhaps for the white Crows, and bearded Hens, which are said to have been thereabouts, than for being the Seat-Royal of some petit Prince. After these 1. Sada, on the banks of the River Sadus, 2. Samba, 3. Sabara, 4. Col••, 5. Zabae, and 6. Sinda, have the name of Cities. 7. Baracura, 8. Berabonna, 9. Bobynga, 10. Tacola, 11. Sabana, and 12. Thi∣bon b••stus, are marked out for the most noted Emportes, or Towns of trade; the memory of Sabana being still preserved in the Frith of Sabaor, betwixt this Chersonese and Sumatra. Others there are not no∣ted by those special Adjuncts, of which, 1. Cocconagaoa, and 2. Balonoa, in the Golden Chersonese; 3. Rhandamarcotta, in the Midlands, 4. Pentapolis, neer the mouth of Ganges called Antibolum; 5. Agm••gara, neer the Bay called ••inus Magnus; and 6. Corygaza, one of the principal Towns of the 〈◊〉〈◊〉, may be some of the chief.

The old Inhabitants hereof, besides the Marandae last spoken of, were the Gangarides, and Gan∣gaent, inhabiting on the banks of Ganges; the Tacorae: bordering on the Mountain Bepyrrus; as the Tilaedae on Maeand••us; and the Ammachae, and Cabo••aeh, neer the hills called Damasi. The Basadae, said to be crooked, short, and thick; but of a cheerful aspect, and cleer complexion: of which compo∣sition also the inhabitants of the Golden Chersonese were observed to be: the Barrae, and Cudutae, on the Bay called Sinus Magnus; the Lestori, a Theevish and Piratical people, who lived in Caves, and were affirm∣ed to be of so hard a skin, that it was not penetrable by an Arrow These, with the rest, too many to be here recited, the issue in most likelyhood of Chavilath and Saba the sonnes of Joktan; of whom we find so many footsteps in Sabara Civitate, Sabaraco Sinu, Sabana Emporio, Sobanus Fluvio; and in the Countreys now called Ava, and the Kingdom of Cavelan. Of any of their actions we find little in antient stories, or of the power of any of their former Kings: but that it was given out in the time of Alexander, that beyond the Ganges lived a Prince called Aggramen••s (the most powerfull King of all those Countreys) able to bring into the field 200000 Foot, 20000 Horse, 3000 Elephants, and 2000 armed Chariots. With which report though Alexander was the more inflamed to trie masteries with him; yet his Soul∣diers were so terrified with it (remembring the hard bout which they had with Porus) that no perswasions could prevail with them to go further Eastward. Nor hear we much of them after this, unless the conver∣sion of the Indians in the time of Constantine, may be applyed to those on that side of the River, as per∣haps it may.

As for the later observations and discoveries of it, we find it (as most barbarous Countreys else till redu∣ced to Order) dismembred and subdivided into many estates, almost as many Realms as Cities, and di∣stinct governments amongst them, as Tribes and Nations. Most of them Gentiles in Religion, with whom the name of Christ and Christianity not so much as heard of, till the comming of the Jesuites thither; who have not onely obtained leave, but some invitations, for the promoting of the Gospel. And for Maho∣metamsm, though it had got some footing on the Sea-coasts of the Golf of Bengala, as lying most convenient for the trade of the Arabian Merchants: yet on the North, and midland parts, and those towards China, and the Oriental Seas, it was as little heard of as Christianity. But for the Kingdoms of this part, I mean the chief of them, to which as many of the rest as are worth the looking after are to be reduced, they are those of, 1. Brama or Barma, 2. Cauchin-China, 3. Camboia, 4. Jangoma, 5. Siam, and 6. Pegu.

BRAMA.

THe Kingdomes of BRAMA or BARMA have on the West, the River Ganges; on the North, part of Cathay in Tartarie; on the East, Cauchin-China; and on the South, the Kingdomes of Pe∣gu. So called from the Brachmanes, Bramanes, or Brames, possessed for many ages past of these North, West Countreys. By the transposing of a Letter, they are now called the Kingdomes of Barma.

The Countrey of these Brames or Bramanes, extendeth Northwards from the neerest of the Peguan Kingdomes for the space of 150 Leagues, but far more from West to East: watered with many great and remarkable Rivers, issuing from the Lake Chiamay, which though 600 miles from the Sea, and emptying it self continually into so many Channels, contains four hundred miles in compass, and is nevertheless full of waters for the one or the other.

By the overflowing of which Rivers, and the commodiousness of the Lake, the Countrey is wonderfully

enriched, as Ae••ypt by the overflowings of 〈◊〉〈◊〉 Which notwithstanding, there are in it many huge forrests, in the West especially, and therein many Lions, Tigers, Ounces, Serpents, and other Creatures of a mischievous and 〈◊〉〈◊〉 Nature.

The whole Countrey containeth the Kingdomes of 1. Calam, 2. Prom, 3. Melintay, 4. Mirand••, 5. B••cam, 6. Tangu, 7. Av••, and 8. Brama.

Of 1. MELINTAY and 2. MIRANDA, I find little written, but that they were con∣quered with the rest, by the Vice-Roy of Tangu, in the first rising of his fortunes, becoming the founda∣tion of his following greatness. Of 3. BACAM, it is said that it is plentifully enriched with Mines, both of Gold and Silver. In 4. CAVILAN, commonly and contractedly called CALAM, we find apparent foot-steps of the name of Chavilah the sonne of Jocktan. Of the rest more is to be said, not much.

5. PROM, though it be a little Kingdome, is exceeding populous, and stored with a warlike people. Given by the second King of Pegu of the Tanguan Race, to a younger sonne; who being by his Father commanded to the siege of M••rmolan which had then revolted, not only did decline the service, but re∣belled against him; and by the strength of this small Kingdome held it out three years. But seeing his Fathers fortunes in a manner desperate, he repented of his disobedience; and went unto his aid, with an Army of 50000 men of his Natural Subjects. Treacherously poisoned on the way by his chiefest Counseller, for fear the Crime of his Revole would be charged on him.

6. TANGV, is the name of one of these Bramian Kingdoms, so called from the chief Town thereof: formerly subject with the rest to the Kings of Pegu, and governed by their several Vice-Royes. One of which taking his advantage of the warres between the Kings of Pegu and S••am, began to set up for himself, and husbanded his affairs so well, that he became sole Lord of these Bramian Kingdoms; as afterwards of all the rest in this part of India. Not long enjoyed by his successor, when dispossessed and slain by one whom he married to his Sister, and made Governour of this very Province. In which he bore himself so st••ffely, that being sent for by his King to aid him against some of his Rebels, and to bring all the inhabi∣tants of the Country with him; he answered that he would send one half; to send all, unreasonable. In∣ceased with which denial the King armed against him; but he put the Leaders to the sword, and seized their followers. After this being now in Arms, and dispairing of reconcilement, he took upon him∣self the title of King of Tangu; and to secure himself therein, joined with the King of Arrachan against his Soveraign, whom he most barbarously slew (after he had put himself into his hands) with his wife and children. Neither enjoyed he long the fruits of his villany, subdued not long after, with the rest of these Indian Princes, by the King of Barma; of which more hereafter.

7. AV A, another of these Kingdoms, and one of the plantations of Chavilah also, is liberally fur∣nished with all things necessary for the life of man. It affordeth also store of Rubies, which they dig out of the Mountains; a certain creature which breeds Musk, together with great plenty of horse and Ele∣phants. Their chief City is called Ava, which name it giveth to the River upon which it is built, issu∣ing out of the Lake of ••h••amay, and communicates the same to the whole Province. Subject for many ages past to the Kings of Pegu, till conquered by the Vice-Roy of Tangu, as before is said; and by him given, with the Title of King, unto one of his brothers. Who rebelling against the sonne and suc∣cessour of his Benefactor, and by him slain in single Combat, this Kingdome was conferred on a sonne of the Conqueror. A Prince of more vertue than his brother, and one which grew at last unto so great power, that in the bustles or combustions of the Kingdome of Pegu, he surprised or forced the Fort of Si∣ri••••ngh, formerly given unto the Portugals by the King of Arrachan, slew all the Souldiers, and spit∣ted Philip de Britto, who commanded in it. After which, gathering together the dispersed Peguans, and repairing part of the City for them, he was likely to have made himself a good bargain by it, if the sudden coming of the King of Barma, had not spoiled his markets.

8. BRAMA or BARMA, the most Southern of these Bramian kingdomes, the king where of was Feudatarie to the kings of Pegu, or of their appointment. Of no accompt when the Por∣tugals came first acquainted with India, nor in many years after; now of most renown. For sitting still when all the rest of their neighbours w••re embroiled in wars, they gathered so much power and strength, that in the end, one of the later kings hereof observing how the forces of his neighbouring Princes were consum∣ed, and their treasures wasted; levyed an Army of 300000 fighting men, 40000 Elephants, with all things suitable. And with this power subdued the kingdoms of Macin, and Arrachan; conquered the Cities of Pegu and Odia, (the two chief Cities of these parts) invaded the kingdome of Siam, and posses∣sed himself of it; making in little time all the lesser Princes to become his Tributaries, as they still continue.

CAVCHIN-CHINA.

CAVCHIN-CHINA is bounded on the West, with the Kingdomes of Brama; on the East, with the Great Realm of China; on the North, extending towards Tartary; and on the South, bor∣dering on Camboia.

The Countrey aboundeth with Gold, Silver, Aloes, and great store of silks, of which the Inhabi∣tants make 〈◊〉〈◊〉, and other stuffes. It affordeth also plenty of Porcellane Earth, which being made into Cups, Dishes, and other Utensils of houshold, is sold by the name of China-ware: well counterfeit∣ed of late amongst us, by putting a white crust on our Po••••ers earth, as neat for use and shew as the natu∣rall China.

The people very stout and warlike, especially for Foot-service, though they have many horses here, and those fit for warre. Well-practised on their Peeces also, on which they spend great store of powder, but not so much in warre, as in sports and triumphs: yet making much more than they spend, the earth in some parts yielding very fit materials for that commodity. Trained up to Manufactures, especially to the mak∣ing of Powder, S••lks, and Porcell••ne, which they sell to the Chinese. Idolaters, for the most part, as 〈…〉〈…〉 whose Characters and language they also use: but so that there appear some inclinati∣ons unto Christianity, in many of them, who have erected many Crosses, and do admit the pictures of the Blessed Virgin, and the finall judgement. Men not unlikely to have made a further Progress in the Gospel, if they had met with better Teachers than these Laymens books.

The chief City hereof is called Cauchin-China by the name of the Province, situate on a River coming out of China; and passing hence into the bottom of a large and capacious Bay. The whole Country divided into three Provinces, and as many Kings, over which one Paramount: but he and they the Tributaries of the King of China. Belonging hereunto is a little Iland called Ainao, ten miles from the land, where the Inhabitants have a great trade of fishing for Pearls The onely Province of the Indies, which is wholly subject to the power of a forein Prince; the Portugals holding in this Continent many Towns and Cities, but no whole Provinces.

3 CAMBOIA.

CAMBOIA is bounded on the North, with Cauchin-Chin••; on the East and South, with the Ocean; on the West, with parts of the Kingdome of Stam, and the Realms of Jangoma. So called from C••mbo••a the chief City of it. Divided commonly into the Kingdom of Champa, and Cam∣bota specially so called.

1. CHAMPA, the Northern part hereof bordereth Cauchin-China, and is liberally provided of all necessaries: besides which, there is plenty of Gold, and of the wood called Lignum Aloes, prized at the weight thereof in silver, much used in Bathes, and at the funeralls of great persons. This a distinct kingdome of it self, but subject with the rest to the king of Barma. The chief City of it, called by the name of Champa, which it communicates to the Country, is situate neer the Sea-side, and of very good trafick.

2. CAMBOIA specially so called, lieth South of Champa, a very great and populous Country, well stored with Elephants and Rhinocerots, which last the Indians call Abades. It yieldeth also great plenty of a sweet-wood which they call Calumba, as precious and as much esteemed of as the wood of Aloes, (if not the same, or some Species of it as I think it is) together with abundance of Rice, Flesh, and Fish; well-wa∣tred with the River Mecon issuing out of China, & having received many lesser streams falleth first into a great Lake of 200 miles compass, and thence into the Indian Ocean, making betwixt the Lake and that an hundred Ilands. By the overflowings of this River the whole Country is enriched (as Egypt by the like overflow∣ings of Nilus): the inhabitants at those times betaking themselves to their upper Rooms, and passing alto∣gether by boats from one place to another.

The people are conceived to be strong and warlike, though more enclined to merchandise and naviga∣gation than to deeds of Arms. Idolaters of the worst kind, esteeming Men and Beasts of a like condition in regard of any future judgement; of late beginning to set up, and adore the Cross, which is (it seems) the first Principle of Religion, in which the Friers are wont to instruct their Converts. Not weaned as yet, by these new Teachers, from burning the women with their Husbands, common to them with many o∣ther Indian people, not from burning their Nobles with the King, used onely here; but voluntarily to ex∣press their loves, not upon constraint.

The chief Towns of it, 1. Camboia, one of the three prime Cities of this part of India; the other two being Od••••, and Pegu, of which more anon. Situate on the River Mecon before destroyed: where it hath its fall into the Sea; well traded, as the Staple for all this Country, the commodities whereof are brought hither, and here sold to the Merchant. 2. Cudurmuch, twelve league from Camboia, on the same River also. 3. Coul, on the Sea-side in the very South-west Angle of all the Country. The Kings where∣of, once absolute, and at their own disposing, till invaded by a vast Army of the neighbouring Laos; in which their King being slain, and his forces weakned, his sonne and Successor was constrained to become a V••ss•• to the crown of Siam. But fearing the loss of his estate, when that Kingdom was made subject to the Kings of Pegu, in the year 1598. he applied himself unto the Portugals, offered them a Peninsula (part of his dominions) extending three leagues into the Sea; and sent to the Jesuites for some of their So∣ciety to live and preach amongst his people. Not able for all these honest Policies to preserve himself from being made a Feudatary of the King of Barma.

4 JANGOMA.

JANGOMA or the Country of the LAOS, is bounded on the East, with Camboia and Cham∣pa, from which parted by the River Menon; on the West, with the River of Pegu, by which divided from that Kingdome; on the South, with the Realm of Siam; on the North, with Brama.

It took this name from Jangoma the chief province of it, the other two (for here be three of them in all) being those of Livet, and Curror. All of them joyned together called the Country of the Laos, by the name of the people, a mighty Nation and a stout, by Religion Gentile; naked from the middle upwards, and t••••ssing up their hair like a cap. Their Country very rich and levell, but very ill-neighboured by the Gu••o∣••••

(Paulus Venetus giveth them the name of Gang••gu) who possess the mountains: whence falling in great companies to hunt for men whom they kill and eat, they commit cruel butcheries amongst them. Inso∣much as this people, not able to defend themselves against their fury, or rather wanting good leaders to conduct and order them (for it is said that they can make a million of men) were fain to put themselves un∣der the protection of the King of Siam, whom they obeyed no further than the humour took them.

Towns they have none of any note, except those three which give name to the severall Provinces; and those of no note neither but for doing that. The people for the most part live on the banks of their Rivers, where they have Cottages of Timber; or else upon the Rivers in boats and shallops, as the Tartarians of the Desarts in their Carts or wheel-houses. One of their Rivers (commonly called the River of Laos) said to extend 400 Leagues within the land, as far as ••artary, and China; and from July to September to invert its course, and flow back strongly toward its fountain. Not governed by any certain rule or order, till they submitted to the Patronage of the king of Siam; and then no oftner than they listed: though for their sakes, that king engaged himself in a war against the Cannibals, their most deadly enemies, ac∣companyed with 25000 foot, 20000 Horse, and 10000 Elephants. Secured by his protection from the 〈◊〉〈◊〉 of those Cannibals (of whom otherwise they had been devoured) in the year 1578 they descended the River in great multitudes, to the number of 200000, and fell into the Realm of Camboia. But they made an unprosperous adventure of it. For though the king of Camboia lost his life in the battel, ye he gave ••hem such a fatal blow, that they were almost all slain, drowned, or captived in the fight. Weakned wherewith they became an easie prey to the Vice-Roy of Tangu, when he first made himself sole Master of this part of India. Who giving to his brother the kingdome of Ava, and leaving to his eldest sonne the kingdome of Pegu, with the Soveraignty over all the rest, conferred this Countrey, with the title of king of Jangoma, on a younger Sonne. But he, begotten on a daughter of the king of Pegu, and born after his Father had attained this whole Indian Empire, was easily perswaded by the ••alapoies, (so they call their Priests) that his Title was better than that of his Elder Brother, who was born before it. Prevented in his claim by the kings of Arrachan and Tangu, by whom that king was slain, and his king∣dome wasted. How he sped afterwards I find not. But probable it is, that he submitted with the rest to the king of Barma.

5. SIAM.

SIAM, is bounded on the North, with Jangoma, and part of Pegu; on all other parts, with the wide Ocean, save that it toucheth on the East, with a part of Camboia, and on the West, with a poin•• of Pegu. So called from Siam the chief of all those kingdomes which pass under this name, as that from Siam the chief City of it.

The Countrey of greater length than breadth, stretcheth it self South-wards into the Sea many hundred miles, in form of a Peninsula or Denty-Iland, called antiently Aurea Chersonesus, or the Golden Chersonese: one of the five famous Chersoneses or Peninsulaes of the elder writers; the other four being Peloponnesus in Greece, the Thracian Chersonese neer Propontis, the Taurican Chersonese in the Euxine, and the Cimbrian Chersonese in the North of Germany, now part of Denmark. It had the name of Aurea, or the Golden, super-added to it, from its plenty of Gold, for which much celebrated by the Antients, both Greeks, and Romans (and therefore not improbably thought by some to be Solomons Ophir) stil famous with the rest of the Countries of the kingdome of Siam, for abundance of Gold, Silver, Tinn, and o∣ther metals; great quantity of Pepper sent yearly thence, with store of Elephants, and horses: the whole Countrey very fat, and fertile, well stored with Rice, Corn, Grass, and all other ne∣cessaries.

The people generally much addicted to pleasures, if not to Luxury; delighted much with Musick and rich apparel; and such as stand much upon their honour. For their instruction in good letters they have publick Schools, where their own Lawes, and the mysteries of their own religion, are taught them in their natural Language; all other Sciences in strange tongues understood by none but by the learned. To til∣lage they can frame themselves, and are painful in it; but by no means will follow any Mechanicall Arts, which they put over to their Slaves. In Religion for the most part Gentiles, worshiping the four E∣lements amongst other Gods; to each of which as they are severally affected, so are their bodies to be dis∣posed of: either burnt, buried, hanged, or drowned, after their decease; as in their lives they were most devoted to the fire, Earth, Air, or Water. Some Christians here also in and about the parts possessed by the Portugals; but more Mahometans: who possessing two hundred Leagues of the Sea-Coasts of this Coun∣trey, have planted that religion in most part of the Countrey now by them possessed.

It containeth in it many kingdomes, some of little note; those of most observation, 1. Malaca, 2. Patane, 3. Jor, 4. Muan••ay, and 5. Siam, properly and specially so called. Of which Malaca is now in the hands of the Portugals, Jor and Patane are possessed by the Arabians or Saracens; the other two have followed the fortunes of the kings of Siam.

1. The kingdome of MALACA taketh up the South part of the Golden Chersonese, extend∣ed towards the North from the Cape or Promontory which Ptolomy calleth Malanco••in, in the extreme South-point hereof neer unto Sabana, then a noted Emporie, for the space of 270 miles. So called from Malaca the chief City of it, of old times called Musicana, or built very neer it, from whence this Tract is called by Strabo, Musicani terra. The City seated on the banks of the River Gaza, which is here said to be 15 miles in breadth; by the frequent overflowings whereof, and the neerness of it to the Line (being but two degrees to the North) the Air hereof, and all the territory belonging to it, is very

unwholsome; and for that cause the Countrey but meanly populous. In compass it is said to be 20 miles, of great wealth, because of almost infinite trading; for Spices, Vnguents, Gold, Silver, Pearls, and previous Stones, the most noted Emporie of the East. Insomuch that is said by Ludovico Barthema, who was there before the Portugals knew it, that it was traded by more ships than any one City in the world, more by far since the comming of the Portugals to it, than it was before. The People (as in all this tract) of an Ash-colour, with long hair hanging over their faces; bloody and murderous, specially when they meet one another in the Night. Few other Towns of any note in a place so unhealthy, except 2. Sinca∣pura, situate East of Malaca, neer the Promontory of old called Magnum; supposed by some to be the Zaba of Ptolomy; and that more probably than that it should be his Palura, as Maginus would have it; Palura being a City of the Hither India, and different at the least 20 degrees of Langitude from any part of this Chersonese. But whatsoever it was called in the former times, it was in these latter ages the mother of Malaca; the greatest part of the Trade and people being removed from thence to this newer foundation: before which time it was the best frequented Emporie in these parts of the East. 3. Palo Zambilan, 120 miles on the West of Malaca, from whence to Sincapura, coasting about the Southern Cape (now called Cape Liampo) we have a Sea-shore of 270 miles, as before was said. No o∣ther habitation of any reckoning, but a few sheds upon the shore for the use of Fisher-men, and some scat∣tered Villages in the land the People dwelling most on Trees for fear of Tigers.

This Tract in former times possessed by the Kings of Siam, about the year 1258 b•• came a kingdome of it self; founded by Paramisera, and some other of the Javan Nobility, who flying the tyranny of their own king, came into this Country, where they were lovingly received by Sangesinga, then reigning under the S••amite, in Sincapura. Him they perfidiously slew, and invested Paramisera in his Dominion. Outed of which by the King of Siam, he was forced to seek a new dwelling, and after two or three Removes, fell upon the place where Malaca now standeth, which City, pleased with the commodiousness of the situation, he is said to have built. The trade of Sincapura in short time removed hither also, which so in∣creased the wealth and power of the Kings hereof, that joyning with the Moores who began to plant themselves on the shores adjoyning, and receiving withall the Law of Mahomet, they began to cast off all subjection to the Kings of Siam, to whom the sonne and Successor of P••ramisera had submitted his new-raised kingdom, and became their Homager. Incensed wherewith, the S••amite about the year 1500 sent out a Navy of 200 Sail to distress it by Sea, and an Army of 30000 men and 400 Elephants to besiege it by land. But before he was able to effect any thing, hindred by Tempests, and the insolencies of some of his Souldiers, the Portugals, in the year 1511, under the conduct of Albuquerque had possessed themselves of it, who built there a Fortress and a Church. And though Alo∣d••nus the sonne of the expelled King (whose name was Mahomet) endeavoured the regaining of his Estate, and that the Saracens, Hollanders, and the kings of For and Achen (two neighbouring Princes) envying the great fortunes of the Portugals, have severally and successively laboured to deprive them of it: yet they still keep it in defiance of all opposition which hath been hitherto made against them.

2. North unto that of Malaca lieth the kingdome of YOR, IOR, or IOHOR; so called of Jor, or Johor, the chief City of it. Inhabited for the most part by Moores, or Saracens, Mahometanism by their means prevailing on the Natives of the Country also. A Kingdom of no great extent, but of so much power, that joining his Land-forces with the Navy of the King of Achen, he besieged Malaca, and built a Royall Fort before it: in which, when taken by Paul de Lima, by the defeat of this king, were found 900 pieces of brass Ordnance. After this, picking a quarrel with the king of Pahan, he burnt his houses, barns, provisions, and the Suburbs of the City it self: but in the course of his affairs, was in∣terrupted by the King of Achen (one of the Kings in the Isle of Sumatra) his old confederate, who after 29 daies siege took the City of Jor. What afterwards became of this king or kingdom, I am not able to re∣solve. In former times it did acknowlege him of Siam for the Lord in chief.

3. More North-ward yet lieth the kingdome of PATANE, denominated from Patane the chief City of it: but different from Patane, in the other India, as Cleveland in York-shire from Cleve∣land in Germany; or Holland in the Low-Countries from Holland in Lincoln hire, as hath been fully shewn before. The City made of wood and Reed, but artificially wrought and composed together: the Mesquit onely (most of the people being Mahometans) is built of brick. The Chinois make a great part of the Inhabitants of it, insomuch that in this small City there are spoke three languages, viz. the Chi∣nese, used by that people, the Malayan (or language of Malaca) which is that of the Natives; and the Siam, to the King whereof this small Crown is Feudatary. Built of such light stuff and combustible mat∣ter, it must needs be in great danger of fire; and was most miserably burnt in the year 1613 by some Ja∣van Slaves in revenge of the death of some of their Fellows: at which time the whole City was consumed with fire the Mesquit, the Queens Court, and some few houses, excepted onely. The Country go∣verned of late years by Queens, who have been very kind to the English, and Hollanders, granting them leave to erect their Factories in Patane. Not memorable for any great exploit by them performed, but that a late Queen a little before that dismall fire, offended with the King of Pan or Pahan, who had maried her Sister, and reigned in a little Iland not farre off, she sent against him a Fleet of 70 Sail, and 4000 men: by which compelled to correspond with her desires, he brought his Queen and her children with him to make up the breach.

4. The Kingdom of SIAM, strictly and specially so called, is situate on the main-land (the rest before described being in the Chersonese,) betwixt Camboia on the East, Pegu on the West, the king∣dome of Muantay on the North, and the main Ocean on the South. The chief Cities of it, 1. Socotai, memorable for a temple made wholly of mettall, 80. spans in height, raised by one of the Kings; it being

the custome of this Country, that every king at his first coming to the Crown, is to build a Temple which he adorneth with high S••eples, and many Idols. 2. Quedoa, renowned for the best Pepper, and for that cause very much frequented by forreign Merchants. 3. Tavay, upon the Sea-coast where it joineth to Pegu. Whence measuring along the shores till we come to Champa before mentioned; being all within the Dominions of the king of Siam (not reckoning the Chersonese into this Accompt) we have a Seacoastof the length of 600 Leagues. 4. Lugor, upon the sea-side also, neer that little Isthmus, which joineth the Cherson se to the land; from whence to Malaca is 600 miles sail all along the coast. 5. Ca∣lantan, the head City of a little kingdome but subject to the Crown of Siam. 6. Siam, the chief City of this part of the kingdome, which it giveth this name to. A goodly City, and very commodiously seated on the River Menam, for trade and merchandise. So populous and frequented by forreign nations, that besides the natives here are said to be thirty thousand housholds of Arabians. The Houses of it high built, by reason of the Annual deluge, during which time they live in the Upper rooms; and unto every house a boat for the use of the familie. Those of the poorer sort dwell in little sheds made of reed and tim∣ber; which they remove from place to place for the best convenience of their markets. And yet so strong that being besiged by the Tanguan Conqueror, then king of Pegu, Anno 1567 with an Army of four∣teen hundred thousand fighting men, for the space of 20 moneths together, it resolutely held good against him: not gained at last by force but treason, one of the Gates being set open to him in the dead time of the right, and by that means the City taken. The people hereof are thought to be inclining to Christiani∣ty, but hitherto so ill instructed in the principles of it, that they maintain amongst many other strange opi∣nions, that after the end of 2000 years (from what time I know not) the world shall be consumed with fire, and that under the ashes of it shall remain two egs, out of which shall come one man and one woman, who shall people the world anew.

5. MVANTAY the last of these Kingdomes, lieth betwixt Jangoma and Siam: memorable for nothing more then the City of Odia, or Vdi••, the principal of all the Kingdomes of Siam, and the usual residence of those Kings. Situate on the banks of the River Ca••pumo, and containing in it 400000 Inhabitants, of which 50000 are trained to the warres, and in continual re••diness for prelent service. For though this King be Lord of nine several Kingdomes, yet he useth none of them in his wars but the natu∣rall Siamites, and those of this City and the rest of his Subjects of Muant••y. It is said that for the use of this City only (being eated like Venice upon many little Ilands not bridged together) there are no few∣er than 200000 skiffes, and shallops; serving to wast the people from one place to another. By means hereof of great strength, and almost impregnable. But being beleagured by the Tanguan or 〈◊〉〈◊〉 Conquerour with ten hundred thousand fighting men (an Army bigge enough to have bu∣ry••d a greater City than this; if every man had but cast a shovell full of earth upon it) it was wonne at last.

The Government of these kings of Siam, was absolute heretofore, if not tyrannical, he being sole Lord of all the land in his kingdomes, which he either gave to his Nobles, or Farmed out to Husbandmen, during life or pleasure, but never passed over unto any, the right of Inheritance. And these he grants un∣to his Subjects, besides rents in money, upon condition to mairtain a determinate number of horse, Foot, and Elephants: thereby inabled without further charge unto the Subject to leavy 20000 Horse, and 250000 Foot for present service; besides far greater numbers out of the residue of his people, if occasion be. And for his ordinary Guard he was said to keep 6000 Souldiers, and 200 Elephants, of which beasts he is re∣ported to have 30000, of which every tenth Elephant is trained up to the war. By reason of so great a power he became Master of the Realms of Camboia, and Champa; held those of M••l••ca, J••r, Pahan, and Patane, as his Vassals and Tributaries with that of Jangoma and the Laos, under his protection. But when the fatal time was come; and that his City of Siam was betrayed to the king of Pegu, he poisoned himself upon the newes; his sonne becoming Tributary to the Peguan Victor. This sonne of his, too much a Prince to be a Subject, reuolted from a sonne of the Peguan, a vicious and tyrannical King, (degenerating from the gallantries of so worthy a Father) by whom he was besieged in Siam with 900000 fighting men. Unable to resist this Army, if he had presently declared such a resolution, he entertained the king with Treaties, and promises of delivering the City to him, till the third moneth after, (which was March) when ordinarily the River was to overflow all the Countrey for 120 miles about: by which sud∣den and violent inundation, and the sword together (the Siamites waiting diligently for the opportunity) there perished all of this great Army except 70 thousand. After this blow, the conquering Siamite An∣no 1600 besieged and endangered the City of Pegu, of which more annon: and dying in the year 1605. left his estate unto his Brother. Whose sonne succeeding, settled a Factory in Siam of the English Mer∣chants Anno 1612. and was in a fair way of obtaining the soveraignty of Pegu, then destroyed and wasted; if the violent and unresitable coming of the king of Barms had not crossed him in it; to whom now subject with the rest of the Indian Princes on that side of the River.

6. PEGV.

PEGV is bounded on the East, with Jangoma, and a part of Siam; on the North, with the kingdomes of Brama; on the West and South, with the kingdome and Golf of Bengala. So called from Pegu the chief City, as that is by the name of the River upon which it standeth. Divided commonly into the kingdoms and estates of 1. Verma, 2. Macin, 3. Orrachan, 4. Martavan, and 5. Pegu spe∣cially so called.

1. VERMA is the name of a small kingdome bordering upon Bengala, and so denominated from Verma, the chief Town thereof. A kingdome which hath no Port or Haven at all; and therefore wholly freed of Moores and Mahometans, which can be said of no other of these Indian king∣doms.

The people black, naked above the Waste, and covered beneath it onely with a veil of Cotton: in matter of Religion Gentiles, and in wane right valiant. This last apparent by the long and frequent warres which they had with the Peguans: to whom made Tributary in conclusion, but not fully con∣quered.

2. MACIN, so called from Macin the chief City thereof, is another of these Peguans kingdoms. Of small esteem but for the great quantity of the sweet-wood by the Latines called Lignum vitae, by the natives Calamba, so much in use for Funeralls and Bathes, (as was said before;) held also by the Indians for a Sovereign and unparallell'd Medicine against many dangerous diseases; great quantities whereof are brought hence yearly by the Merchant. One of the first kingdoms which was conquered by the king of Barma, (upon whom it bordereth) in the beginning of his Fortunes.

3. ORRACHAN or Arrachan, lieth on the West of Macin, and the South of Verma, environed round with mountains and impassable woods. Chief Towns thereof, 1. Dia ga, taken and destroyed by the Portugals, in the quarrels betwixt them and the king of Arrachan. Anno 1608. ••. Sundiva, situate in an Iland unto which it gives name, fix leagues off from the continent of Bengala, to which it formerly belonged. Subdued by the Portugals, Anno 1602. and from them taken by this king about two years after, and made a member of his kingdom. The Iland 30 leagues in compass, very strong, fruitfull, and the Town well fortified. 3. Arrachan, the head City, which gives name to all, distant from the Sea 45 miles, but seated on a large and capacious River. The king and kingdom of no note, till the ruins of Pegu, to the Crown whereof it once pertained. In the desolation of which State the king here∣of combining with him of Tangu, besieged the second Tanguan king in the Castle of Macan; and had betwixt them the whole pillage of that wealthy City, together with the possession of the best Towns of it. After this victory, he returned to Arrachan in triumph, leading with him the white Elephant: of the king of Pegu, sumptuously adorned; the brother and two sonnes of the Peguan following in the Pag••ant. A solemn and magnificent entry. The better to assure himself of his new dominions, this king bestowed upon the Portugals the fort of Siriangh, on the River of Pegu. For which favour ill-requited by the Portu∣gals, who had taken his sonne, and put him to a grievous ransom, they brake out into open warres. In the pursuit whereof, after many losses, the king recovered from them the Isle of Sundiva, and manning out a Fleet of 1200 sail (of which 75 were of so great burden as to carry every one, twelve peeces of Ordnance) and in that fleet 30000 Souldiers, 8000 hand-guns, and 3500 greater peeces, besieged the Fortress: as∣sisted in that action also by the king of Tangu. And though he failed in his design, yet like enough he had prevented the king of Av••, who took it in the year 1613 as before is said, had he not been outed in the mean time of his own kingdom, by the king of Barma: of whole great rise, the conquering of the Realms of Macin and Arrachan, were the first foundation.

4. MARTAVAN, the richest of these kingdoms, lieth South to Arrachan, a little turn∣ing towards the West. The soyl so fertile that it yieldeth three Harvests in a year, and sent annually 15 ships to Cochin, and as many to Mala••a, laden with Rice. Rich also in Mines of Iron, lead, steel, brass, silver, gold, and Rubies: and very liberally provided of Springs and Rivers. The Forrests well-stored with Harts, Bores, and Buffoles, store of Pines and Palms: the woods with Sugar-canes, many ex∣cellent fruits; the ordinary herbs and shrubs either Medicinal or odoriferous. The principall City of it called also Martavan, situate on an Haven open at all times of the year, and not choked with sands, as u∣sually other Havens are in the Indian winter: of great trading, much splendour, and a temperate a••••. Faithfull unto the last to the Crown of Pegu, to the Kings whereof their own were subjects and in that constancy they twice repulsed the king of Siam who then had conquered the most part of the Kingdome of Pegu. Angry whereat, the Siamite caused two of his cowardly Captains to be cast into a chaldron of scalding oyl: and at the third assault became master of it. Bannalaius the old King hereof (99 years old) with his heir apparent, and 200000 of his Subjects, being compelled to hide themselves in the woods and Desarts.

5. PEGV, the most predominant Kingdom, lieth like a Crescent or half-moon on the Gulf of Bengala; extending on that coast from Negrais unto Tavan the next Town of Siam, for the space of three hundred miles, and upwards; but little less in breadth, if not quite as much. So called from the River Pegu, which runs thorow the middest of it, and gives this name also unto Pegu the most noted City.

The Soyl hereof exceeding fruitfull, by reason of the annuall overflowings of the River, which do yearly fatten it, fit to bear wheat, and of Rice yielding an incredible quantity. It affordeth also many Rubies, great numbers of Civet-Cats, plenty of ••••cca, (a Gum there made by Ants, as here Bees make wax) store of Elephants, and abundance of Parats which speak plainer, and are much fairer than in any place else.

The people of a mean stature, somewhat corpulent, and naturally beardless. If any stragling hair thrust forth, they alwayes carry Pinsers with them, to pull them out. Nimble and strong, but yet not very fit for warre; spending too much of their strength in the love of women, to which most passionably addicted. They black their teeth, because they say that dogs teeth be white: and wear no cloths but on their heads and about their nakedness. Said by the Jews to be descended from some of the Tribes of Israel confined hither by Solomon: but by the Peguans themselves, to be begotten of a dog and a China woman, which

were saved here upon a Shipwrack. By Religion for the most part Gentiles, imagining innumerable worlds one after another, and a determinate number of Gods for every world: more Orthodox in assigning after this life according to the merits of the party deceased, one place of Torments, and another of Delights and pleasures, if they had not added a third also for satisfaction.

Chief Cities of this Kingdome, 1. Cosin, seated in a Territory full of Woods, as those Woods of Tigers, Wild Bores, Apes, and Parats: the houses made of Canes, which serve here for tim∣ber, (some of them being as bigge as Hogs-Heads) covered over with thatch. 2. Joccabel, a great City, on the River Pegu. 3. Dian, on the same River also, where they make Barks or Vessels as big as Galeasses; which serve both for trade and liabitation. 4. Coilan, a City four-square, and each square four miles. 5. Lanagon, a pleasant Town, and full of Palm-trees. 6. Dala, in which were the Kings Stables for his ordinary Elephants: his four White Elephants (for so many he had) being alwaies kept about the Court, not seen abroad but in great solemnities, when trap∣ped in furnitures of Gold, and no less honoured by the people, than the King himself: called therefore King of the White Elephant by the neighbouring Princes. 7. Silvanpede, where many victualling Barkes are made to serve for dwelling on the Sea. 8. Mevcao, where they use to unload such goods as are to pass by Land to Pegu. Neighboured by the strongest Castle in all this Kingdome, and therefore chosen by the King for his place of Retreat, when distres∣sed by the Kings of Arrachan; and Tangu. To the last of which making choice to yield up his person, with his Wife and Children, because he had maryed him to his Sister, he was by him perfidiously and basely murdered. 9. Siriangh, a strong peece on the mouth of the River, given by the King of Arrachan; to the Portugals, and by them committed to the keeping of Philip de Britto, in the year one thousand six hundred, or thereabouts. Who having made it good against him, and the King of Tangu his Associate, for the space of thirteen years toge∣ther; was at last forced to yield himself prisoner to the King of Av••, by whom cruelly tortured on a spit. 10. Pegu, the glory of these parts, great, strong, and beautifull; Divided into two Towns, the Old and the New; the Old, inhabited by Merchants, the New, by the King and his Nobility. The houses made of wood, but covered with Tiles; a Coco-Tree before every house, yielding a comfortable shade, and a pleasant shew. The Steetes as strait as any line, and so broad that ten or twelve men may ride abrest in the narrowest of them. In figure square, each square having five Gates, besides many Turrets; all of them beautifully gilded. The whole well walled with walls of stone, environed on all sides with great Datches; and in the middest the Royall Palace, walled and ditched about, most sumptuously gilded; but specially the Temple or Idol-chapel, the walls whereof were hid with Gold, the Roof tiled with Silver.

In this magnificent Palace lived the Peguan Kings, in as much pomp and pleasure as the world could yield: his empire not extending only over these kingdoms now described, but over all the Provinces or kingdoms of the Bramane also; which he governed by his severall Vice-Roys, or rather TRIBUTARIE kings. A happiness too great to continue long. For in the year 1567. the Vice-Roy or Tributary king of Tangu, by the aid of his faction, and reputation of his vertues, entered into rebellion, and slaying the Nobles of the Land, usurped that kingdome. After this he subdued the Cities and kingdoms of Calam, Melintay, Prom, Miranda, and Ava, inhabited all of them by the Brames or Bramanes; and ther∣fore taking to himself the title of king of Brama, because his fame and fortunes took their rise from his victories over them. Following the course of his Successes, he first assailed the Cities of Odia, and Siam, but repulsed with loss. To make amends for which misfortune, he beleaguered Pegu, and subdued it; and by the reputation which he got in that action, returning to the siege of Siam, had it yielded to him. Dying he gave the kingdome of Ava unto one of his Brothers; that of Peam to one of his grandsonnes; the kingdome of Jangoma to a younger sonne, but born after the time of his obtaining the Crown of Pegu; and finally that of Pegu, with the Soveraignty over all the rest, to his eldest sonne, a Prince of vicious and tyrannical nature; and not more cruell to his subjects, than they disobedient to him. Whereupon prepa∣rations are made on both sides, the people to defend their liberty, the King to preserve his Royalty. Du∣ring these civill discords, the titulary king of Stam, whose late overthrow was not yet fully digested, came violently into the Countrey of Pegu; burning Corn, Grass, and Fruits; killing man, woman, and child, and having satisfyed his Fury, returned to his home. This spoil of the fruits of the Earth, was but a pr••logue to an unsupportable famine, which consumed all the inhabitants of this flourishing king∣dome, except such whom the Granaries of the City of Pegu preserved, Anno 1598. For here the Fathers devoured their Children, the stronger preyed upon the weaker; not only devouring their more fleshy parts, but their entrails also: nay they broke up the skulls of such as they had slain, and sucked out their brains. This calamity incited another Tributary Prince of Tangu, to make his best advantage out of his neighbours affliction; though made his Brother-in-Law, and advanced to great honours by his Father. For justly fearing the displeasure of his angry Prince, to whose aid he had refused to come, when sent for by him, he joined himself with the king of Arrahan, besieged his Lord and Soveraign in the Fort of Meccao. Brought to extremities, the unfortunate Prince, thought best to put himself into the hands of his brother of Tangu; who assaulted and entred Pegu, where he found as much treasure as 600 Elephants, and as many horses, could conveniently carry away. This havock being made, he villanous∣ly murdered the King, Queen and their Children, and departed; leaving the gleaning of his spoil to the King of Arrachan: who, Anno 1600, was expelled by the King of Siam, who enjoyed it not long. For the King of Barma having with an Army of an hundred thousand fighting men, and four∣ty

thousand Elephants, subdued the Kingdomes of Macin, and Arrachan, followed the cur∣rents of his Victories; conquered Siam, drove the king thereof from PEGV, where he hath built a most Magnificent Palace: and is now the sole Monarch of the twelve kingdomes of this India.

A more particular relation of this King, and his new-settled Estate, we cannot yet understand: what his Revenues are, what his Government, what his Forces. Merchants, whose inquisitive∣ness into the State-Matters of other Princes, is dangerous to their trading, cannot give us any full satisfaction: Scholars and Statists are not permitted to observe; and such of the Natives as could give us the most light, are not suffered to travell. Onely we may conjecture by the great Wealth of those several Princes, and the vast Armies by them raised in their severall Territories, that his Annual Revenues, Casualties, and united Forces must be almost infinite.

And so much for INDIA.

OF THE ORIEN∣TAL ILANDS.

THE ORIENTAL ILANDS, so called from their situation in the Oriental or Eastern Seas, may be divided into the Ilands of 1. Japan, 2. the Philippinae, 3. the Isles of Bantam, 4. the Moluccoes, 5. those called Sinde, or the Celebes, 6. Java, 7. Borneo, 8. Sumatra, 9. Ceilan, and 10. certain o∣thers of less note.

1. JAPAN.

JAPAN is an aggregate body of many Ilands, separated by small Gulfs, Streights, and turn∣ings of the Sea, but taking name from Japan, the chief of all. Some reckon them to be 66. in all; others ascribe that number to so many Kingdoms into which these Ilands (be they in number more or less) use to be divided. But whatsoever the number be (the certainty whereof I can no where find) there are three only of accompt, to which the severall petit Kingdoms are now reduced: that is to say, 1. Ja∣pan specially so called, which containeth 53 Kingdoms; of which 26 are under the King of Meace, 12 under the King of Amagunce, the other 15 under other Princes of inferior note. II. Ximo, which containeth in it nine Realms, the principall whereof are those of Bungo and Figen. III. Xicoum, which comprehen∣deth four onely of these petit Signeuries.

JAPAN, the chief of all these Ilands, to which the residue may be accompted of but as Ap∣purtenances, is situate over against the streights of Anian, towards which it looketh to the North: di∣stant from New Spain on the East 150 leagues, or 450 English miles; and 60 leagues from Cantan a Province of China, opposite to it on the West. On the South it hath the vast Ocean, and those infinite sholes of Ilands which are called the Phillippinae, and the Isles neighbouring upon them. Extending in length from West to the East 200 leagues, but the breadth not proportionable thereunto: in some places not above ten leagues over, and in the broadest parts but thirty.

The Country mountainous and barren, but of a very healthy air, if not too much subject unto cold, yet in some places they have Wheat ripe in the moneth of May; but their Rice, which is their principall sustenance, they gather not before September. The surface of the Earth, clothed with woods and forrests, in which some Cedars of so tall and large a body, that one of them onely is sufficient to make a Pillar for a Church: the bowels of it stored with divers metals, and amongst others with such inexhausible mines of gold, that Paulus Venetus reporteth some of the Palaces of their Kings to be covered in this time with sheets of gold, as ours in Europe are with lead. But I find no such matter in our latter travellers. Their Fields and Medows full of Cattel, but hitherto not made acquainted with the making of Butter; their Fens much vi∣sited by wild-Ducks, as their house yards with Pigeons, Turtles, Quails, and pullen.

The People for the most part of good understanding, apt to learn, and of able memories; cunning and subtil in their dealings. Of body vigorous and strong, accustomed to bear Arms until 60 years old. Their complexion of an Olive-Colour, their beards thin, and the one half of the hair of their heads shaved off. Patient they are of pain, ambitious of glory, uncapable of suffering wrong, but can withall dissemble their resentments of it till opportunity of revenge. They reproach no man for his poverty, so it come not by his own unthrifciness, for which cause they detest all kinds of gaming, as the wayes of ill-husbandry; and generally abhorre standering, these, and swearing. Their mourning commonly is in white, as their feasts in black; their teeth they colour black also to make them beautiful; they mount on the right side of the horse, and sit, (as we are used to rise) when they entertain. In Physick they eat salt things, sharp, and raw; and in their salutations they put off their shooes. The very Antipodes of our world in customs, though not in site: and the true type or Figure of the old English Puritan, opposite to the Papist in things fit and decent, though made ridiculous many times by that opposition. In other things they do much resemble those of China, if not the more ceremonious of the two: washing their infant-children in the neerest Ri∣ver, as soon as born; and putting off their shooes when they go to meat.

The people have but one Language, but that so intermingled with the words of others nations, that it seems rather to be many languages than one. They have long used the Art of printing, which probably enough they might have from China: the Characters whereof are a kind of Brachygraphy, and signifie not only letters, but some whole words also. In matter of Religion, Gentiles, adoring antiently the Sun, Moon, and the Stars of Heaven, and giving divine honour to wild beasts, and the Stags of the Forrests: but

specially worshiping some of their deceased Priests and Princes, by the names of Fotoques, and 〈◊〉〈◊〉 the first of which they use to pray for goods of the other world, and to the last for Temporall blessings. The•••• Priests they call by the name of Bonzes, setled in goodly Conven••s, and endowed with very large Reve∣nues: who though divided into eleven different (if not contrary) Sects, do well enough agree in denying the providence of God, and the immortality of the soul. Of late times by the care and diligence of the 〈◊〉〈◊〉 Christianity hath begun to take footing here; whether with such a large increase as their letters, cal∣led Epistolae Japanicae, have been pleased to tell us, I am somewhat doubtfull. They tell us there of some Kings of these Ilands whom they have converted and baptized; that within 50 miles of 〈◊〉〈◊〉 they had 50 Churches, 200 at the least in all, that in the year 1587 the number of their Converts was two hundred thousand. Of this, if the one half be but true, we have great cause to praise God for it, and to give them the commendation of their pains and industry: not letting pass the memory of the first 〈◊〉〈◊〉 who was Father Xavier, one of the first foundation of this Society, (employed in this 〈◊〉〈◊〉 by Ign••t••••s, the first founder of it) who landed here about the year 1556.

Rivers of note I find not any, though the Iland be generally well-watered: more memorable for two mountains in it, than for all the Rivers. One of which called Fig••noiama, is said to transcend the clouds in height; the other (but without a name) useth to cast forth dreadfull flames, like Stcilian Aetna; on the top whereof the Devill environed with a white and shining cloud, doth sometimes shew himself unto such of his 〈◊〉〈◊〉 as live about this hill an abstemious life, like the antient Hermits.

Chief Cities of the whole Ilands, 1. Meaco, seated in Japan, and the chief of that Iland, for∣merly 21 miles in compass, but now by reason of their warrs, scarce a third part of it. The ordinary resi∣dence of the 〈◊〉〈◊〉 or three principall Magistrates, which sway the affairs of all these Ilands: o•• whom the first entituled 〈◊〉〈◊〉 hath the chief care in sacred matters; the 2d named Voo, doth preside in Civill; and the third called 〈◊〉〈◊〉 manageth the concernments of Peace and Warre. At this time it is used for the common E••p••••y of the trade of 〈◊〉〈◊〉 that people not permitting Merchants to come a∣mongst them, but bringing to this place their merchandise, as the common Staple, where they are sure to meet with Chapmen to buy it of them. 2. Ossacay, a great and renowned City, conceived to be the richest in all the East; of so great trade, that every ordinary merchant is said to be worth 30000 Crowns. 3. 〈◊〉〈◊〉 or 〈◊〉〈◊〉 at the foot of the chill so called, and about nine miles from Meaco. An University of the B••nze••, for whose convenience and study, one of the Kings of Japan is said to have foun∣ded in this Town, and about that mountain, 3800 Convents, and to endow it with the third part of the Revenues of the Kingdom of Vorn. These Colleges or Convents now reduced to 800 onely: but still the Vniversity of such same and credit, that they give not the command or government of it unto any but the Kings sonne, or his neerest kinsman. 4. Bano••m, another of their Vniversities, where they give de∣grees; affirmed to be as big as Paris. 5. Bongo, the chief of all that Province; in which the Jesuites have a College; the Japonues learn the Portugal language, and the Europaeans that of Japan. 6. Coia, the sepulture of their Princes, or of some part of them: it being antiently ordained, that if their whole bo∣dies be not here interred, they must at least send one of their teeth. 7. Fiongo, about 18. leagues from Meaco, the subject of many great misfortunes. Destroyed in part by Nabunanga one of the Kings of this Iland, who lived Anno 1550: that which he left, terribly shattered by an Earth-quake Anno 1596. most of the ruins of it since consumed by fire. 8. Amangasaqui, five leagues from the Sea. 9. Surungo, as big as London with the Suburbs. 10 Ed••o, a much fairer than that, and the chief Seat of one of their Kings. 11. Firando, a seat-Royall also of some other King, where, in the year 1613. there was a Fa••tory established for the English Merchants. 12. Ochinofamanus, one of their most noted Havens. 13. Tosa, or 〈◊〉〈◊〉 giving name to one of the Ilands.

These Ilands utterly unknown to the Antients, were first discovered by Antonio Mota, a Portugal, in the year 1542. I know Mercator taketh it for the Aure•• Chersonesus spoken of by Ptolomy; and I cannot choose but wonder at it. The situation of it so far distant from that of the Chersonese, that either Mercator must be grossely out in his conjecture; or Ptolomy as much mistaken in his informations; which no man hitherto can justly accuse him of. But passing by the improbability of Mercators fancy, we are to know, that in former times these Ilands were subject to one Prince, whom they obeyed and reverenced with great affection: which government continued, as themselves report, 1600 years in great State and Majesty. But in the end, the Dairi, (so they call their King) addicting himself wholly unto pleasures, and laying the burden of Government upon other mens shoulders, his Deputies or inferiour Officers usurped Rega•• power, plumed themselves with Eagles feathers, used in their stiles the name of Jucatas, or Kings; and in a word, left nothing but the name of Dairi, to their Lord and Soveraign. His issue to this day do enjoy that title, and but little else: the Princes bordering on Meac••, once his Royall seat, hardly al∣lowing him sufficient means to find himself victuall and Apparell; but otherwise befooling him with as glorious titles, as if he were possessed still of his antient power. Onely they let him execute the place of an Harald, in giving Arms, and selling dignities and honours; which brings him in the greatest profit he hath to trust to. Of all these Kings, he which can make himself Lord of Coquinai (which are the five Realms a∣bout Meaco) is called Prince of Tenza, and esteemed Soveraign of the rest. Which height of dignity Nabunanga before mentioned, in his time attained to; after him Faxiba, and since him Taicosuma: that sovereignty being now in a likely way to become hereditary. For Faxiba having brought under his command most of these small Kingdoms, transported the vanquished Kings, and the chief of their Nobles, out of one Countrey into another: to the end that being removed out of their own Realms, and amongst strange subjects, they should remain without means to revolt against him. A mercifull and prudent course. Having reduced into his power at least 50 of these petit Kingdoms, he divided the greatest part of the con∣quered

territories. amongst his own faithfull friends and followers: binding them to supply him with cer∣tain numbers of men upon all occasions. By which, and other politick courses, he so setled himself in those estates, that Taicosuma his sonne succeeded without opposition, who had he lived would have abolished the vain title of the Dairi; or took it to himself as he had the power; sollicited thereto by the King of 〈◊〉〈◊〉 But dying in or about the year 1607. Fere••sama his son succeeded; and may be still alive for ought I can learn.

What the Revenues of this King are, it is hard to say. I guess them to be very great, in regard he maketh two millions of Crowns yearly, of the very Rice which he reserveth to himself from his own de∣measns. The store of Gold, and pretious stones which these Islands yield, being wholly his, must needs adde much unto his Coffers. And for his power, it is said that Faxiba was able to raise so good an Army out of the estates demised by him to his faithful followers; that he resolved once on the conquest of Chi∣na and to that end had caused timber to be felled for 2000 vessels for the transporting of his Army. And had he lived a little longer, tis probable enough he might have shaken that great Kingdome, the 〈◊〉〈◊〉 being so much the better Souldiers, that a small party of them would defeat a good Army of 〈◊〉〈◊〉 The fear whereof made the King of China after his decease correspond so fairly with his Suc∣cessour.

Adjoining to Japan, betwixt it and China, lyeth the Iland of COREA, extended in length from North to South: the people whereof being distressed by the Japonites, called in the Chinese, by whom delivered from their Enemies, and restored to liberty, as before was noted.

2. PHILIPPINAE.

South of Japan, lieth a great frie of Islands which are now called PHILIPPINAE in ho∣nour of Philip the second, King of Spain, in whose time discovered by Legaspi a Spanish Captain, 〈◊〉〈◊〉 1564. Strangely mistaken by Mercator for the Barussae of Ptolomy, those being placed by him in the bottom of the Gulf of Bengal••, five degrees South of the Aequator; these sicuate on the East of China, •••• 13 or 14 degrees of Northern Latitude: those being only five in number, these reckoned at above ten thousand.

The Air in all of them generally very mild and temperate, especially in the midland parts; that on the shores, somewhat inclining unto heat. The soil abundantly fruitful of all commodities both for ne∣cessity, and delights; that is to say, Rice, Pulse, Wax, Honey, Sugar Canes, many pleasant fruits, the fairest Figges of all the world, plenty of fish, variety of Birds and Beasts, as well wild as tame, great store of Cotton Wooll, some Mines of Gold, and of other mettals great abun∣dance.

Of all these Islands there are only fourty in possession of the King of Spain, belonging properly to A••ia, but by him placed under the Government of New Spain in America, because discovered by 〈◊〉〈◊〉 at the instigation or procurement of Don Lewis de Velasco, who was then Vice-Roy of that Pro∣vince. In these 40 Ilands there are thought to be at the least a million of people subject to that Crown; many of which have been converted by the Friers and Jesuites unto Christianity. Of these the principal in ac∣count are, 1. LVSSON, affirmed to contain in compass 1000 miles; beautifyed by the Spaniards with a fair City, seated on a commodious Haven, which they call Manilla, in which resides the De∣puty or Lieutenant Governor for all these Ilands; and the bishop of the Philippines for ordering all affairs of those Churches. II. MINDANAO, 380 Leagues in compass; in which are many good Towns, as 1. 〈◊〉〈◊〉 2. Pavados, 3 Subut, 4. Dapiro, and some others. III. TANDAIR, more fruitful than any of the rest, and of good extent, 160 Leagues in circuit; more specially called Philippina, because first dis∣covered, and so named. IV. PALOHAN, as much mistaken by Mercator for the Bazacata of Ptolomy.

These, with the rest, subject in former times to the Kings of China, till they did voluntarily abandon them, and confine their Empire within the Continent. On this relinquishment the people fell into Civ•••• warres, every man getting what he could for himself, and the stronger preying on the weaker: which factions and divisions gave great help to the Spaniard in the conquest of those few which are under their power. I∣lands of more importance to the Spaniards, than is commonly thought: and therefore furnished by them at their first plantations, with Bulls, Kine, Horses, and Mares, which before they wanted, and do now reasonably abound with. For besides the abundance of victuals, and some plenty of Gold which they find therein, the situation is very fit to subdue the rest of the neighbouring Ilands; to settle the commerce betwixt China and Mexico; to bring on a continual trade betwixt the Ilands of this Sea, and those of America; and finally to prevent the Moors or Arabians from planting their Mahometanism any fur∣ther Eastwards.

Not far from these, on the South of Japan bending towards the west, is another great heap of Rocks and I∣lands. Some of them rich in Gold, and furnished with very choise fruits, and other necessaries, and peopled with a stout and warlike breed of men, well skilled in Archerie. The chief whereof have the names of 1. Lequin Major, 2. Lequin Minor, 3. Hermosa, 4. Reix Magos, &c. of which little memorable. And not far off those called 5. Ciumbabon, in which is said to be a Plantanimal, or sensi∣ble tree, and 6. Matban, unfortunately remarkable for the death of Magellanus, slain there in a bat∣tel with the Natives.

3. The Isles of BANDAN.

THe Isles of BANDAN are in number seven, that is to say 1. Mira, 2. Rosalargium, 3. A••••, 4. Rom, 5. Nerra, 6 Ganuape, the least of all, continually burning, and for that cause de∣serted of its inhabitants, and 7. Bandan, bigger than any of the rest, and therefore giving name to all. Situate South of the Philippines, in the seventh degree of Southern Latitude. More fruitful of Nut∣megs, than any other of all these parts, for which cause never without the concourse of forein Merchants from Java, Malaca, and China; and of late times from these Northern Countreys of Europe also. Where by the way, the Nutmeg-tree is like a Peach or Peach-tree, the innermost part where of is the Nut∣meg it self, covered over with a thin film or coat, which we call by the Arabian name of Mac••z or Mace; and over that the fruit itself, as it is in Peaches, Malacotons,, and such fruits as those.

The people barbarous and rude, slothfull, of weak bodies, and dull of wit; living contusedly toge∣ther without rule or order. Some of them still continue in their antient Paganism; but the greatest part are thought to be Mahometans, in which Religion very zealous, and so devout that they will not go unto their work or wordly businesses, till they have visited the M••squits, and there done their devotions. A shame or Pattern shall I say in this, unto many Christians. All of them bloody and revengefull, but yet so farre from wronging the body of a dead Enemy, that they use to bury it with sweet o∣dours.

Some Towns they have, of which the principall, 1. Nera, and 2. Lontoor, joined in a league a∣gainst the rest; the quarrell rising from the cutting down of certain trees, proceeding to the butchery of one another, and ending in the loss of their common liberty. Subject in shew to the King of Botone one of the Moluccoes; but too much at their own disposing They had not else entred into quarrels with one another. Which opportunity being taken by the watchfull Hollanders, they did not only settle four Faato∣ries there; but for the security of their trade, and to awe the Natives, they have built three Forts. They had also turned one of their Mesquits to a Fortress. Whereat the people were so incensed that they pro∣mised liberty to their Slaves, to get them out of i••: who falling desperately on fired it over their heads, and killed every man of them. The English Merchants have some trading also in these Ilands, more ac∣ceptable than the other, because not so insolent.

There is not far off another Iland, not in this accompt, called Timor,situate in the tenth degree of Southern Latitude; the chief of many little Ilands which lye round about it; but not else observable, ex∣cept it be for that ab••ndance of Sanders both white and yellow, which growing there, is greedily ex∣changed by the Inhabiants for I••on, Hatchets, Swords, Knives, and the like commodities.

4. The MOLVCCOES.

THe MOLVCCOES are in number many, the King of Terenate which is one of them, being said to have dominion over 70 Ilands; but the determinate number of them I do no where find. Si∣tuate on both sides of the Aequator, and consequently of an hot and intemperate air: the soyl so drie and spongious, that it sucketh up the greatest shewr of Rain that doth fall amongst them, before it can pass in∣to the Sea. Not very well furnished with necessaries for the life of man; but that defect supplied with the abundance of Spices which are growing here, Cinnamon, Ginger, Nutmegs, Mastick, Aloes, Pep∣per, and the like commodities, for which the Merchants bring them all things that the Country wants. But tis the Clove, which is the great Riches of these Ilands, and peculiar in a manner to them. A spice, which groweth on Trees like Bay-trees, yielding blossoms, first white, then green (at which time they yield the pleasantest smell in the world) and last of all Red and hard, which are the Cloves. Of nature so ex∣treme hot, that if a Pail of water should only stand in the Room in which they are cleansed and sorted, the Cloves in two daies would dry it up. Of which nature the unspun silks of China are affirmed to be.

The people for the most part Idolaters, intermixt with some Mahometans dwelling on the shores, and of late times with Christians in their severall factories. Of severall Originals, and different languages, but all in generall fraudulent, perfidious, treacherous, inhumane, and of noted wickedness. Few of them clothed, nor much caring to hide their shame; Not civilized by the cohabitation of more modest and ci∣vill Nations. Pitty such ill conditions should be lodged in such handsome bodies: the people being said to be better proportioned than the other Indians; and for strength and valour not fellowed by any of them.

Of all the Ilands which pass under this name, there are not above five or six of any rekoning: that is to say, 1. Terenate. 2. Tidor. 3. Macir. 4. Rachian. 5. Machian, and 6. Botone: none of them above six leagues in compass, many not so much; the whole cluster of them thronged together in a girdle of no more than 25 leagues in the Circumference. Some reckon Polerone amongst them, a little Iland not far off (if not one of the number) and well stored with Cloves. Frequented first by the English Merchants, from them taken by the insolent and ingratefull Hollanders: who being to restore it upon com∣position, cut down all the Clove-trees, so to deprive the English of the benefit of it.

Of the rest, Re••hian, and Tidore have their proper Kings; So hath Botone also, if that be one of them, the King whereof had antiently some title and authority over those of Bandan. Macir, and Mach••••n, are subject to the King of Ternate, who is a Mahometan in Religion, and said to be the Lord of 70 Ilands. This the most puissant member of this scattered body; and for that cause most aimed

at by all Competitors: the Spaniards having here one Fortress, and the Hollanders three: both nations hated by the Natives, whom they consume and wast in the wa••es betwixt them; but of the two, the Spa∣niard looked on by the people as the more Gentleman; the other stomacked and despised for their sordid dealings. Nothing else memorable in the story or Chorographie of them, but that they were discovered by the conduct of Magellanus, in the reign of Charles the fift, who employed him in it, Anno 1519. And that there is in Ternate a prodigious mountain, in height above the clouds of the Air, and in nature agreeing with the Element of fire, which it seems to mount to: huge flames whereof, with dreadfull thunders, and a dark smoak, it sends forth continually.

5 The SINDAE or SELEBES.

Neer the Moluccoes, and almost intermingled with them, are a set of Ilands which Ptolomy calleth SINDAE, and the Moderns, SELEBES, many in tale, but not above four of any weight, that is to say, 1. SELEBES. 2. Gilolo, 3. Amboina. 4.Macasser, of which the two first are si∣tuate under the Aequator, and the last somewhat on the South of it: all of them in the time of Ptolomy inhabited by Anthropophagi, and a long time after; insomuch as the Kings of the Moluccoes, did use to send their condemned persons into these Ilands, there to be devoured. Which said in generall, we will take a more particular view of them as they lie before us.

1. SELEBES, which gives name to the rest, and hath under it many lesser Ilands, is large and rich. The foil thereof exceeding fertile, the people tall and comely, and of color, not so much black, as ruddy. Much given to Piracy, and all Idolaters till of late. Governed by many Kings or petit Princes, the cause of much contention, and many quarrels: three of which are said to have been converted to Christi∣anity, and for that cause much hated by their heathenish Subjects, who thereupon rebelled against them. It is situate West of the Moluccos, and hath therein a Town called Sion, honoured with the abode of one of their Christian Kings: but possibly not so called untill their conversion; the proper name thereof be∣ing Cian. 2. Nibon, in the South, and 3. Terolli, in the North parts of it.

2. GILOLO, called also ••atachina, is one of those Islands, which our late Navigators include under the name of Del Mor. Of large extent, conceived to be half as bigge as Italy. By that ac∣compt (the truth whereof I do very much doubt) greater than Ze••lan is in compass, though of less repu∣tation: that being governed by its own Princes, this subject for the most part to the king of Ternate. Si∣tuate East of the Moluccos, exceeding plentiful of Rice, well stored with wild hens, and on the shores provided of a kind of Shell-fish, which in tast much resembleth mutton. A tree they have which they call by the name of Sag••••, of the pith whereof they make their bread, and of the sap or juice of it they com∣pose a pleasing drink which serveth them instead of wine. The air intemperately hot; the people well pro∣portioned, but rude and savage; some of them Gentiles,some Malome••ans, of which last Religion is their king. The chief Town of it is Batchame or Batachina,(whence the new name unto the Iland) in which the Hollanders have a Fort to defend their Factory.

3. AMBOINA, South of the Aequator, and the third of the Sinda, hath many Ilands of less note which depend upon it, and do communicate in the name. In compass about five hundred miles, said by Maginus to be extremely rough and barren; which must be understood with reference to some kinds of grain. For otherwise it is very fertile, abundantly productive of Rice, Citrons, Limons, O∣renges, Coquo-nuts, Sugar-Canes, and other fruits; and very plentiful of Cloves. Which last, as it makes some to reckon it amongst the Moluccos, so may it be the reason why the Iland is defective in such fruits as require much moisture: the Clove being of so hot a temper, as before was noted, that it draweth to it all the moisture of the Earth which is neer unto it.

The people much given to Piracy, wherewith they do infest all the neighboring Ilands. Defamed for Cannibals, or man-caters: it being here a constant custome, that when their parents are grown old, or sick of any incurable disease, they give them unto one another to be eaten by them. They have one Town of more note than other, which they call Amboyna, by the name of the Iland. First taken by the Portu∣gals, and by them secured with a strong fortress: during whose power here, the Jesuites who had in it their several Residences converted many to Christianity. But in the year 1605. the Iland and the Fort both were conquered by Stephen of Hagan for the States of the united Provinces: who having cleered the Countrey of the Portugal Forces, possessed themselves of it. Received by the natives at their first comming with joy and triumphs: but they got little by the change, as they found soon after; their new Masters being more burden some and unsufferable than the old had been. For clai∣ming in the right of conquest, they think they may oppress the Natives by the law of Arms, and ingross all trade unto themselves as the true Proprietaries. Infamous even amongst the rude and savage Indians for their barbarous inhumanity executed upon some of the English (the greatest Patrons under God which they have in the world) whom in the year 1618 they most cruelly tortured, and most wickedly murdered, under colour of some plot to betray their Fortress: but in plain truth for no other reason but because they were more beloved by the Inhabitants, and began to gain upon their trade.

4. West of Amboina, and South-west of Celebes, lieth the 4th of these Ilands called MACAS∣SAR, said to contain from East to West 600 miles; plentiful of Rice, Flesh, Fish, Salt, and Cot∣ton-wool; not destitute of Gold and Pearls, and well stored with Sanders (Sandalum it is called in L••tin) a medicinal wood, growing like a Nut-tree: of several colours, white, red, yellow, but the red, the best: the fruit in making, like a Cherry, but of no esteem. In some parts overgrown with woods, in which certain fierie Flies make nightly such shining light, as if every twig or bough were a burning Candle. In the midle covered with high Mountains, out of which flow many navigable Rivers.

The people for the most part Gentiles, intermixt on the Sea-coasts with some Mahometans. Chief Towns hereof, 1. Senderem, the Kings Seat, situate neer a large Lake, very commodiously for trafick. 2. Macassar, an English Factorie, so called according to the name of the Iland.

Neer to these Islands, and somewhat North to Battachina are some other Isles, plentiful of all things necessary for the life of man, but inhabited by a theevish and Piratical people: the principal of which, 1. Terrao, 2. Sanguin, 3. Solor, 4. Moratay, in which last they eat Battata Roots instead of bread, besides some others of less note, Most of the People Gentiles, except those of Sangum, the King whereof being gained to the Christian Faith, by some of the Jesuites, hath brought many of his subjects to the same Religion.

6. BORNEO.

WEst of these Celebes, lieth BORNEO, of more note and greatness, than any hitherto descri∣bed in these Indian Seas. In compass after their accompt who speak most sparingly, 2200 miles; but as some say no less than three moneths sayl about. Situate under the Aequator, which parteth the dominions of the King of Borneo, and the King of Laus: opposite on the North, to Camboia; on the South, to Java; on the East, to Celebes; on the West, unto the Isle of Sumatra.

The Countrey said to be provided naturally of all things necessary; yet said withall to be unfurnished of Asses, Oxen, herds of Cattell, except only horses, and those but of small stature neither: the grea∣test riches of it being Camphire, Ag••trick, and some mines of Adamants. Erroneously conceived by Mercator to be the Insula bonae Fortunae spoken of by Ptolomy; that being seated opposite to the out-lets of Ganges, in the Latitude of a hundred fourty five Degrees, and fifteen minutes; this Eastward some Degrees of the Golden Chersonese, and consequently twenty degrees Distant at the least from that Iland in Ptolomy.

The people generally more white than the rest of the Indians, of good wits, and approved integrity, though all Mahometans or Gentiles. Divided betwixt two Kings, and two Religions; the King of Bor∣neo and his Subjects being all Mahometans; those of Laus still remaining in their antient Gentilisim. These think the Sun and Moon to be man and wife, and the Stars their children; ascribing to each of them divine honours, to the Sun especially, whom they salute at his first rising with great Reverence, say∣ing certain verses. Their publicke businesses are treated of commonly in the night, at which time the Counsellers of State meet, and ascend some tree, viewing the Heavens till the Moon rise, and then go to the Senate-house. The same Apparell generally of both Religions; but thin, by reason of the great heat of the Air, a shirt of Silk, or of Calicut, or some such slight stuff, worn more for modesty than for warmth.

Chief Towns hereof, 1. Borneo, situate in the North-west part of the Iland neer a goodly bay, but in the middle of the Fens like the City of Venice; and seated as that is, on Piles, the building sumptu∣ous, of hewed stone, covered with the leaves of the Co••••-tree. The Town so large as to contain 25000 Houses in the smallest reckoning, the principal of all the Iland, which takes name from hence. 2. Cabura. 3. Taiaopura. 4. Tamaoratas. 5. Malano; all of them noted for fair Cities, or commodious Havens. 6. Sagadana, a Factory of English. 7. Lavi, on a large Bay in the South-East part of the Iland, the ordinary Seat of the King of Laus. 8. Paro, on another capacious Bay, not farre from La∣vi, and directly opposite to Borneo: that being seated on the North-west, and this on the South-East of the Iland. Betwixt these two Kings is the whole divided; but so that he of Borneo hath the greatest part of it, and therefore keeps the greater State: not to be spoken with but by the mouth of some of his own Interpreters; and in his Palace served by no other Attendants than Maids or Women.

7. JAVA.

OPposite to Borneo towards the South lie the Isles of JAVA, two in number; both situate South of the Aequator, both of great Circumference, and commonly distinguished into Major and Minor, or the Greater and the Lesser Java.

1. JAVA-MAJOR, the more North-ward of the two, and by much the bigger, is said to be in compass 3000 miles, and that by them who elsewhere reckon Borneo for the biggest of these Seas. But the truth is, that the South-parts of this Iland not being perfectly discovered make the ameasurement thereof to be very uncertain. Conceived most probably to be the Jabadiu of Ptolomy, the most Northern part whereof is placed by him in the 8th Degree of Southern Latitude: said by him to afford much gold and silver, to be exceeding fruitfull of all other necessaries; and finally that the name did signifie 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, or the Iland of Barley. All which agreeth punctually with the present Iland, the word, Jabad sig∣nifying a kind of grain much like our Barley, and Diu in the Persian and Indian tongues signifying an I∣land. And so in Jabadiu, we have found the Iland of Iava, the mutation of B. into V. being very or∣dinary.

Then for the riches and fertility of it, it is said to yield great plenty of fruits, and com, but of Rice especi∣ally; flesh of all sorts, salted and sent from hence into other Countries; great store of fowl, both wild and tame; plenty of gold, some precious Stones, and the best kind of brass; silks in abundance, and great quantities of pepper, ginger, Cinnamon, and some other spices. In a word so befriended by the bounty of nature, that Scaliger calleth it Epitome Mundi, or the whole World contracted in a lesser Volume, But withall it is much exposed unto storms and tempests, from which seldome free.

The people of a midle Stature, corpulent, and of broad faces, most of them naked or covered onely with a slight silken stuff, and that no lower than the knee: accompted the most Civill people of all the Indians, as fetching their descent from China: but withall treacherous, very proud, much given to ly∣ing, and very careless of their words, to which so used, that they count it not amongst their Faults. And therefore when a king of theirs had broke promise with the Hollanders, and was challenged for it, he an∣swered that his tongue was not made of bone. Cruel they are also said to be, and implacable, if once offended: accustomed of old to eat the bodies of their friends: accounting no buriall so honourable; nor ob∣sequy, so applausive. This also a custome amongst many of the rest of the Indians, and so hath been e∣ver since the beginning of the Persian Monarchy. Herodoius reporteth how Darius Hystaspis understan∣ding of this custome, and withall knowing how the Grecians use to burn their dead; sent to the Greeks, that it was his pleasure they should eat the bodies of their dead: But they used all means of perswasion and entreaty, not to be forced to so bruitish and barbarous a custome. Then commanded he the Indians, to conform themselves to the fashion of the Graecians; but they all more abhorred to burn the dead, than the Greeks did to eat them. So impossible is it for a custome either to be suddenly left off, or to seem undecent and inconvenient, if once thorowly settled.

In matter of Religion they are all Mahometans or Gentiles, according to the fancy of their severall Kings, whereof in this Iland there are very many, one for every great Tribe, or more powerfull Family. Zealous in their Religion which soever it be, as appears by the sad story of the daughter of the King of Ballambua, murdered by her husband the King of Passarva, the second night after her wedding, with all her Attendants, because they would not be Mahometans, which was his Religion. Yet in some common Principles they agree well enough, punishing Adulery with death; in which case the woman chooseth her neerest kinsman for her Executioner: but otherwise spending day and night in much sloth and dalliance. Of the two, Gentilism is the mo••e diffused, because most antient; the Sect of Mahomet not being intro∣duced till the year 1560. though of a very swift growth, and of a great increase for so short a time.

Their chief Towns, 1. Pa••aruaan, neer a burning hill, which in the year 1586. break forth exceed∣ingly, oppressed infinite numbers of men, and cast great stones into the City for three dayes together. 2. ••••ctam, a Town of 1000 Housholds, the Inhabitants whereof are Gentiles, and have their Temples in the Woods: the Chief-Priest of whose superstition hath his dwelling here, of great authority and power over all the Iland. 3. Ballambua, 4. Passarva, 5. Taban, 6. Matara, 7. Daum••, 8. Taggal, 9. Surrabaia, 10. Catabaon; the Seats of so many of their Kings; some of them also furnished of con∣venient Havens. 11 BANIAM, the seat also of a King, but of most trade in all the Iland, seldome with∣out the company of English, Portugals, and Hollanders; the principall Factory of the English in all the Indies, though they have many besides this. The Town unwholesomely seated in a moorish ground, and much subject to fire. 12. Sund••, situate in a place abounding in pepper. 13. Agracan, a convenient Port; Here was also in the time of Ptolomy a Town called 14. Argyropolis, or the Silver City, long ago destroyed. And now there is, 15. Sura, a new Town in the territories of the King of Bantam, built by some of the Subjects of the King of Passarva, who being oppressed by their own King, came into this part of the Country, where they go•• leave to build this City. The people whereof live quietly according to their own Laws, follow their Husbandry abroad, but never marry; and yet do not want a constant Suc∣cession, adopting some of the other Javans into their Society, as they find their numbers to dimi∣nish.

Of the story of this Iland I can say but litle. Divided into many petit and inconsiderable Kingdoms; and those divided too by Mountains; crossing the Iland in the middle from West to East, which cut off all com∣merce and correspondence betwixt one another. Some of these Kings Mahometans, some Gentiles, as be∣fore was said; all subject or Homagers at least to one of the Kings of the Gentiles, who hath his dwel∣ling in the middest of the Iland. Next him, the King of Tub••n was conceived to be richest, and the King of Ballambua of the greatest territory, whose Family, after long warre and blood-shed, begun in the mur∣der of his daughter, is said to be wholly rooted out by the King of Passarva. These Kings much reverenced by their subjects, and so well obeyed, that whatsoever they command, is done, be it ne∣ver so dangerous.

2. IAVA-MINOR, situate on the South of the other, is said to be 2000 miles in compass, and to be very neer the firm land of Terra Australis in••ognita, or the Southern Continent. Not very well known to any of our late Adventurers; but generally affirmed (not so much on certain knowledge as unsure con∣jecture) to be of the same nature and condition with the greater Iava. The Inhabitants hereof in the time of Paulus Venetus, who had travelled in it, reported to be Cannib••ls, Idolaters, devourers of their Pa∣rents and dearest friends, and to worship all day whatsover they saw first in the morning. Divided then into eight Kingdoms, distinguished by the names of their principall Towns. Six whereof he had seen, which are these that follow. 1. Felech, where the Townsmen were Moor••s, and the Paisants Gentiles. 2. Basma, which did acknowledge the Great-Cham of Tartaria for Lord in chief; but without paying of any tribute. 3. Samara, where none of the North-Stars could be seen. 4. Lambri, in which some men were said to have tails like dogs. 5. Fanfur, in which they have a Tree, the wood whereof put in water, will sink like iron; of which they use to make Launces that will pierce an Armour. And 6. Dragorian, of which there is nothing memorable or prodigious, but that the people of it use to eat their neerest kinsmen; and that no Prodigie at all, because used by others.

To these two we may joyn MADVRA, on the North of the greater Iava, fertile of Rice, but otherwise of so waterish and moist a Soyl, that the men and Cattel use to go knee-deep when they sow it. The chief Town whereof is called Arosbay. And on the East of the same Iava the Iland Baly, exceeding

populous for the bigness, supposed to contain 600000 Inhabitants; and very well provided of Buls, Buf∣fais, Goats, Horses, Swine, many kind of fruits, and some store of metals.

8. SVMATRA.

SVMATRA lieth on the North of the Greater Java, betwixt it and the Streight of Sincapura the most Southern Town of the Golden Chersonese. The Streight in that place so streight and narrow not above a musket shot in breadth, that some conccive this Island to have been formerly joined unto it by some little Isthmus, since worn away by the violence and working of the Sea: and that this Iland, and not the Land of Malaca was that Golden Chersonese which we find in Ptolomy. More probably by farre, than that we should run after to the Isle of Japan situate on the East of China, so farr from any part of India, where it is placed by the Author of the Atlas Minor.

The length hereof, extended from the North-west to the South-East, is said by some to be 900. by others but 700 miles, the breadth 200, and the whole compass one and twenty hundred. Strangely af∣firmed by some writers to be the biggest of all ••he East; who yet assign a greater circuit unto Java, and as great to Borneo. Situate under the Aequator, which divideth it into two parts, very neer an equalite: that on the North-side reaching unto five degrees, that on the south-side but to seven degrees from the line it self. By which accompt there is little difference betwixt the length of a day and night; both much at one in all times of the year whatever.

The air hereof by consequence must be very hot, but withall unwholsome, not so much in regard of the extream heats, as by reason of the gross vapours drawn from the many Fens and Rivers which are found to be in it; and the thick woods which intercept the free course of a purging wind. The soil not capable of such grain as in other places, except Rice or Millet (for I know not otherwise how to render the Latine, Milium) but yielding Ginger, Pepper, Camphire, Agarick, and C••ssia, in great abundance. It af∣fordeth also great plenty of Wax and Honey, store of Silks and Cottons; rich mines not onely of tin, iron, sulphur, and other Minerals; but of Gold such quantity, that some conceive this Island to be Salomons Ophir. And if Pedrunka Sirie one of the Kings of this Iland, in a letter written to King James did not brag too impudently, it may be probable enough. For by that letter it appeareth that all the furni∣tures of his house, and the trappings of his Elephants, and horses, withal his Armour, were of pure Gold, and that he had in his dominions a whole Mountain of Gold; King of which Golden Mountain he entitu∣leth himself in his Regal Stile.

The Inhabitants are many of them good Artificers, cunning Merchants, or expert Mariners. All of them Gentiles till about two hundred and thirty years since, at what time by the diligence of some Arabian Merchants trading to this Island, Mahometanism began to spread upon the Coasts. But in the inland parts of the Countrey they are Gentiles still, and still retain amongst them their old barbarous cu∣stomes. The most loving men unto their enemies that were ever known; for otherwise they would never eat them. Having eaten they use their skuls instead of money, which they exchange or barter for such ne∣cessaries as their wants require▪ and he is thought to be the wealthiest man amongst them, who hath most of this coin. Those of the other Religion though in most points and customes they agree with the rest of the Mahometans, have this one singular to themselves: which is, that once every year on a certain day they go solemnly unto their Mesquits to see if Mahomet be come; leading a spare Horse for him to ride upon: which (missing him) is mounted at their coming back, by the best man in the company. Of any great Progress that Christianity hath made here, I have no good evidence.

That here are many and great Rivers, hath been said before, but their names I find not. Here are also many Mountains, and those great and high; that of most note called Balalvanus, said to burn continually. Out of which, or not farre off do arise two Fountaines, of which the one is said to runne pure Oile, and the other the best Balsamum: which I bind no man to believe but such as have seen it.

Chief Towns hereof 1. Achen, the Seat Royall of that Kingdome, beautifyed with the Regal Pa∣lace, to which they pass thorow seven Gates one after another, with green Courts between the three out∣ermost; those three continually guarded with women expert at their weapons, and using both swords and Guns; the only ordinary guard that he hath for his person. The materials of this Palace mean, but the furniture costly; the walls thereof being hanged commonly with Veivet and Damask, and some times with cloth of Gold. 2. Pedir. 3. Pacem, 4. Cambar, 5. Menantab••, 6. Aura, and 7. Andrag∣de, the seats of so many of their Kings. 8. Passaman, a Town of great trade, but situate in a moorish and unhealthy place; found so experimentally by too many of the English, who have there their Facto∣ry. 9. Priamon, and 10. Teco••, of a more healthy aire, but not so commodious in their Havens as is that of Passaman: these 3 Towns standing in that part of the Countrey where the Pepper groweth.

All that we know touching the storie of this Countrey, is that the Portugals, when they first came hi∣ther, found in it nine and twenty kings; reduced since to a smaller number. For Abraham, some∣times a Slave, afterwards King of Achen, having turned Mahometan, by the help of the Turks and A∣rabians subdued the Realms of Pedir and Pacem. Aladine who succeeded him, being once a Fisherman and grown famous for his exploits at Sea, was by this King preferred to the mariage of one of his Kinswo∣men, made his Lord Admirall, and by him trusted with the protection of his sonne and heir: of whom instead of a Protector he became the murtherer, and usurped the State unto himself. When King, he added to his Crown the Kingdomes of Aru, or Aura, and Manucabo, and almost all the rest in the North∣part of the Iland. In this kings time, the English were first settled in their Factory there. Grown old (an

hundred years at least) he was imprisoned by his eldest Sonne, impatient of a longer stay, alleging that his age had made him unfit for government, Anno 1604. The name of the New King Sultan Pedrucka Sirie, who in his letter to King James spoken of before, stiles himself the Sole King of Sumatra: either with greater brag than truth, or else because the Kingdomes of Tecoo, Priaman, and Baronse, being conquered by him, all the rest were become his Tributaries. Associated with the forces of the King of Jor, or Johor, who had maried his Sister, he besieged Malaca, and distressed it: But being beaten from it by the Portugals, he turned the tide of his displeasure upon his Consederate, and subdued that Kingdome; who with the King of Siak (some other petit Prince neer Jor) and two of their brethren, were in the year 1613. brought Prisoners to Achem.

The Government of this King is absolute, and meerly arbitrary, executing what he hath a mind to with∣out form of Law. So cautelous, that without his Placard no stranger can have ••ngress into his domini∣ons, or free Egress out of them. Nor is admittance to his presence granted unto any whom he first sends not for by an Officer with a Gilded Staff. He is conceived to be strong both by Sea, and Land, his Coun∣trey populous, his Elephants many and well trained, able to put to Sea 120, or if need be 200 Ga••lies and Frig••ts fit for any service, most of which carry Demi-Cannon, Culverin, Sakar, Minion, and other the like Ordnance of Brass. So great a Master of his Subjects, that in 21 daies he had a goodly Channel drawn about his Palace, from a River which was eight miles off. Of his Revenues I am able to make no conjecture, but think him to be full of Gold, by that great quantity of Golden furnitures which he hath about him.

And now I am fallen on this Kings Gold, I cannot but take notice of some Ilands on the West of Su∣m••tra, called Aureae Insulae, of the Golden Ila••ds; the chief of which named Andramania, is posses∣ed by Cannibals, or man-eaters. Opposite unto which on the East side of this Iland, are those called Linga, Banca, and Bintam; which last is said to be very woody, well watered, and to afford a com∣modious Station for shipping. The houses built of stone, but thatched except that of the King (for even these sorry Ilands love to have a King of their own) whose house more eminently seated, is more handsomly covered.

9. ZEILAN.

VVEst of Sumatra, somewhat inclining to the North, is the Iland of ZEILAN, ten Degrees distant from the Aequator, and neer adjoining to the Promontory in the hither India which Ptolomy calleth by the name of Cory. The length hereof computed at 250 miles, the breadth at 150 miles only; the whole circumference at 700 or 800 miles. Conjectured by the situation, and other probable inducements, to be the Taprobane of the antient Writers. Ortelius and most other intelligent men of these later times are of that opinion. Onely Morcator, who hath carried the Golden Chersonese to the Isle of Japan; and fixed Taprobane in that of Sumatra, (in which last I must confess he hath many Part∣ners) will have this Iland to be that which Ptolomy calls Nanigeris, though that be four Degrees more West than the Promontory of Cory, to which this Isle in former times seems to have been joined.

Taking it therefore for an evident and undoubted truth, that this Zeilan or Ceilan is the Taprobane of the Antients, we will a little look on the State of that Iland, with reference to the times when those Authors lived. By Ptolomy affirmed to be plentiful in Rice, Honey, Ginger, Gold, Silver, Precious Stones, and all kind of metals; By Pliny, that the Gold is purer, and the Gemmes fairer, than any in India; that there were also Groves of Palm-trees, and great store of Elephants, is declared by Aelian and some others. Watered with many fair and pleasant Rivers, viz. 1. Soana, 2. Azanus, 3. Baracus, 4. Gandes, 5. Phasis: the hills in many places having a full prospect over the adjoining Vallies; the chief of which were Malea, and those called Calibi, the vales perpetually enriched with the choicest fruits. Exceeding po∣pulous for the bigness, and stored with many Towns of note. Of which Magrammum only hath the name of a Metropolis. 1. Marga••a, 2. Jogana, 3. Sindocanda, 4. Hodoca, 5. Nabartha, 6. Dogana, 7. Dionysiopolis, 8. Bocana, 9. Abara••ha, 10. Procurum, 11. Nagadiba, and 12. Anubingara, have the name of Cities. 13. Moduttum, and 14 Talaco••um, noted for the Towns of trafick; 15. Priapis, 16. Mardus, 17. Rhizala, 18. Spa••ana, and 19. that of the Sun, for com∣modious Havens; 20. Anurogrammum being honoured with the Title of Regia, or the Royal City. As for the name, it is said by Ptolomy to have been first called Taprobane, then Simondi Insula, and fi∣nally in his time Salice, and the People Salae; from whence the name of S••lan or Seilan seems to be de∣rived.

To take a view of it at the present, I find it said to be of an Ovall form, divided from the main land by a narrow Channel, the Heavens refreshing it with their dewes, the Air with a fragrant freshness, and the waters with their many Rivers and Fountains; the Earth diversifyed into lofty hills, and lowly Vallies; her inward Chambers filled with Metals, and Jewels, her outward Coat of the pleasantest colour, stored with whole woods of Cinnamon; besides Fruits, Limons, Oringes, &c. bettering those of Spain. Of Fouls and Beasts great plenty both wild and tame; and the best breed of Elephants in all the world. De∣stitute only of the Vine, the want of which supplyed with a pleasant drink made of the juice of fruits, more natural to them than the other, and so preservative of life that the people are reported to be longer lived than in any other parts. In a word so abounding in all contentments, that the Indians hold it to be Paradise, and take upon them to point out some of Adams footings, left for a memorial in some parts of it. And to confirm them in their Error, they have an Hill there which the Spaniards call by the name of Picode Adam, affirmed to be seven Leagues in height, from whence Adam ascended into Heaven: for

that cause visited by the M••ores or Arabians, with continuall Pilgrimages.

The people for the most part tall and strait of body, naked from the girdle upwards, unwarlike, and much given unto ease and pleasures; So queasie stomached that the poorest of them will not eat that meat which another hath touched; inclined to bravery, and therefore make wide holes in their ears, which they stretch out with Jewels to their very shoulders. Cunning Artificers in all metals, one of them making a Crucifix of such exquisite workmanship, that it seemed to give life to the dead; and was sent by the Arch-Bishop of Goa to the King of Spain, as the rarest Jewell which had evergraced his Royall Cabiner. They are also very active, and well skilled in Iuggling, both men and women, travelling thorow India with their tricks and Hobby-horses, by which they get themselves both delight and money. In matter of Religion, they are generally Idolaters, especially the Natives, whom they call Cingalas, which live in the Inlands; the Sea-coasts (as in other Ilands) being filled with Mahometans. No Christians that I hear of but in Columbo, a Town of the Portugals.

Cities of most repute amongst them, 1. Candie, the Seat of one of their Kings, supposed to be the Sindocande of Ptolomy, memorable for the statues of their supposed Adam, most artificially wrought, of five or six Fathoms high, Symetrically proportionable to the print of his foot, which they conceive to have amongst them. 2. Ventane, of great renown for an Idol-Temple, in compass 130 paces, of great height, and all white except the top, which hath the Spires thereof so gilded, that when the Sun shines, men are not able to look upon them. 3. Janasipatan, 4. Triqui-Le••ale (supposed to be the Tarichi of Ptolomy, 5. Batecolom, 6. Vilassem 7. Tanamaca, 8. Laula, 9. Galle, the Seats of so many of their Kings. 10. Nagarita, conceived to be the Nagiri; as 11. Agena, the Jogana of Ptolomy. 12. Colmuchi, the Seat Royall of the chief King of this Iland, situate on a capacious Bay in the South∣west of it, and of most trade in all this Country: many great ships laden with Cinnamon, Gemmes, Elephants, and other Indian commodities, going yeerly hence. Fortified by the Portugals (by whom called Columbo) with a very strong Castle, built with the Kings leave at first, to secure their trading; but since used by them as a curb to hold him in with, and to compell him to pay tribute.

This Country first discovered to be an Iland by Onesicritus, Admirall of Alexanders Fleet, was in the time of Ptolomy inhabited by severall Nations. The principall of which were the Galthi, and Muduls dwelling in the North, the Rhogandani, and Nanigiri in the South; the Sindocandae in the West, and the Tarachi in the East: the middle parts being taken up by the Anurogrammi, Nagadibi, Soani, Semni. But little or nothing is said of them in the way of story, but that they were good Mimicks, did imitate the tunes of birds, and could speak to two at once, as if double-tongued; that they were very studious of A∣strology, and worshipped the Sun and the Host of Heaven; that some of their Ambassadors coming to Rome, in the time of Claudius Caesar, Solem a Laeva oriri mirati sunt, &c. admired to see the Sun rise on the wrong side of them; and finally that the King was chosen by the people with respect had to his age and clemency; who being inthroned, appointed thirty Judges to administer Iustice to the Subject, with∣out the Major part of whom, sentence of death was to pass on no man. In following times this Monar∣chy (for such it was in the time of those Authors) was broken into many peeces: the Portugals finding nine Kings in it, at their first coming hither, all homagers or Tributaries to the King of Colnuchi. After that this their chief King was wickedly murdered by his Barber, who drove the other Kings out of the Coun∣try, and for a while usurped the Monarchy to himself. Since which time, having once again recovered their Kingdoms, six of them (as I have somewhere read, but remember not where) put themselves under the protection of the Great Mongul, and became his Feudataries.

Neer hereunto on the Coasts of Malabar, are the Ilands which they call Maldivae, many in number, but so called from the principall of them, as that from Maldiva, a noted and well-traded Empery, where the King resideth. Not very plentifull of necessaries for the use of man, did not the Palm alone supply them in all other wants. Inhabited by an industrious and sober people, who make themselves long gar∣ments of Silk or Flax brought from other places, wherewith more modestly adorned than the rest of the Indi∣ans: and by their fishing draw up shels of such mingled colours, that they serve amongst the Siamites in∣stead of money.

10. ILANDS OF LESSE NOTE.

BEsides these Ilands represented to us by their severall names, and some who have nothing but their names to take notice of; there by many thousands of less note which we find in gross: these Indian Seas be∣ing so prodigiously full of Ilands, that it is almost impossible to believe there should be such multitudes; but utterly impossible to credit what is told us of them. Some of the most remarkable of them we have touched upon, as Accessories or Appurtenances to some greater Ilands. The rest we shall present only in the generall muster, together with a tast of some of those strange reports, with which some men have fouled their Papers, and abused their Readers. Of the Philippines, there are said to be 11000. though but 40 of them in possession of the King of Spain. More South, but over against China, is another frie of them affirmed by Mariners to be no fewer than 7448 and (as if nature had delighted to disport her self by sowing Ilands in these Seas) another Shoal of them about India, no fewer in number than 127000: all which laid to∣gether would make a Continent as large as three or four parts of Europe; and are still groaning under the burthen of Heathenism. These Ilands stand so nigh unto one another, that they seem not only to such as are a far to be all but one firm land; but whosoever also passeth between them, may with his hands touch the boughs of the trees on the one side, and on the other. Of these and the other Indian Ilands, travellers relate many incredible fables; viz. that here be hogs that have two teeth growing out of their snowes, and

asmany behind their ears, of a span and a half long; a tree whose Western part is rank poison; and the Eastern part an excellent preservative against it. They tell us also of a fruit, that whosoever eateth, shall for the space of 12 hours be out of his wits; and of a stone, on which whosoever sitteth, shall suddenly have a rupture in his body. We are told also that here abouts are taken Tortoises of that bigness, that ten men might sit and dine within one of the shells; And that there is a tree, which all the day time hath not a flower on it, but within half an hour after Sun-set, is full of them. All huge and monstrous lies, and not fit for credit. Galvano reporteth also, that in some of these Ilands there is a fruit, of which if a woman that is w^h child eat, her child will presently move; that there is a River plentifully stored with fish, whose wa∣ter is yet so hot, that it doth immediately scald off the skin of any beast that is cast into it; that some of the men have tailes; and most of their swine horns: that they have oysters which they call Bra••, the shels where∣of are of so large compass, that they Christen Children in them; that in the Sea there are stones which grow and increase like fish, of which the best lime is made; that there is a bird called Monicodia••a, which ha∣ving no feet is in a continuall motion; and that there is a hole in the back of the Cock, in which the Hen doth lay her egges, and hatch her young ones. Ibid no man to believe these Relations: for my part I say with Herace,

Quodcun{que} ostendis mihi sic, incredulus odi. What ever thus thou tell'st me, I Will alwayes hate it as a lye.

And so much for these Eastern-Ilands.